/ PROCEEDINGS Academy of Natural Sciences PHILADELPHIA Volume liv 1902 philadelphia: The Academy of Natural Sciences LOGAN SQUARE 1902-1903 The Academy df Xatukal Sciences of rHiiAPF.i.PHiA, March 13, 1903. I hereby ccrtily that printed copies of the PROcEEDiNCis lor 1902 liave been presented to the meetings of the Academy and mailed as follows : — Pages 1 to 10 mailed April 22, 1902 presented April 22, 1902. 17 to 48 " April 23, 1902 April 29, 1902. 49 to 64 " May 9.1902; May 13, 1902. 65 to 112 " May 16, 1902 May 20. 1902. 113 to 144 " June 3, 1902 June 3. 1902. 145 to 192 " June 11, 1902 ; June 17, 1902. 193 to 208 " June 20, 1902 June 24, 1902. 209 to 240 " July 11, 1902 July 1, 1902 241 to 256 " July 15, 1902 July 11, 1902. 257 to 320 August 8, 1902 August 19, 1902. 321 to 384 " August 23, 1902 September 16, 1902 385 to 400 " September 3,1902; September 16, 1902 401 to 416 " September 11, 1902 September 16, 1902. 417 to 496 September 30, 1902 September 30, 1902. 497 to 544 " October 20,1902 October 21,1902. 545 to 592 " November 6, 1902 November 11, 1902. 593 to 624 " November 21, 1902 ; " November 25, 1902. 625 to 640 " December 8, 1902 December 16, 1902. 641 to 672 December 12, 1902, December 16, 1902. 673 to 736 " January 20, 1903 January 20, 1903. 737 to 768 February 14, 1903 February 17, 1903. 769 to 800 " March 6, 1903 March 10, 1903. EDWARD J. NOLAN, Recording Sccrctari COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION: Henry Skinner, M.D., Philip P. Calvert, I'li.D. Henry A. Pilsbry, Sc.D., Wither Stone, Edward J. Nolan, M.D., The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D. , ex-officio. F^ditor: Edward J, Nolan, M.D, 111 + CONTENTS. For Annouiicements, Reports, etc., see General Index. Blaisdell, F. E., M.D. The Frons iu Bembidium, with Description of New Species (Plate III), .... 70 Brown, Arthur Erw^in. A Collection of Reptiles and Batrachians from Borneo and the Loo Choo Islands, 175 A List of Reptiles and Batrachians in the Hariison- Hiller Collection froni Sumatra, 693 Chamberlin, Ralph V, A New Genus and Three New Species of Chilopods, 39 Chapman, Henry (I, M.D. Observations on Galeopithe- cus volaus (Plates X, XI, XII), 241 CocKERELL, T. D. A. The Classification of Aleyrodidse (Plate XV), 279 Crawley, Howard. Ttie Progressive Movement of Grega- rines (Plates I and II), 4 A Peculiar Helizoau, 256 Dall, William Healy. Synoj)sis of the Carditacea and of the American Species, 6!>6 Fielde, Adele M. Notes on an Ant, 599 Fox, William J. Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymeuoptera of Brazil, No. 8, Eumeuidse, con- tinued (Genus Odynerus), 44 Hamilton, S. Harbert. Minerals from Santiago Prov- idence, Cuba 744 Harshberger, John W., Ph.D. The Germination of the Seeds of Carapa guianensis Aubl, (Plate VIII), . 122 Two Fungous Diseases of the White Cedar (Plates XXII and XXIII), 461 Additional Observations on the Strand Flora of New Jersey, 642 i 11 Hay, O. p. rVscriptioiis of two Sjiecies of Ex (i net Tortoi- ses, one New, ,S8o Mekhan, Thomas. ContriI)iUions to the Life-History of Plants, No. XVI. The Bartram Oak, in Connec- tion with Variation and Hybridism. Observations on the Flowering of Lobelia eardinalis and Lobelia syphilitica, 88 Miller, Gerrit S., Jr. Mammals Collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott in the Region of (he Indragiri River, Sumatra, 148 Twenty New American Bats, 889 Mills, Charles K., M.D. The Neurofibrillary Theory and its Bearings upon Localization of Function in the Nervous System, 118 Montgomery, Thomas H., Jr. On Phylogeuetic Classifi- cation, 187 Descriptions of Lycosidse and Oxyopidpe of Philadelphia and its Vicinity (Plates XXIX and XXX), . . 534 Moore, J. Percy. Some Bermuda Oligochwta, with a Description of a New Species, 80 Descriptions of some NeA\ Polynoidse, with a List of Other Polychseta from North Greenland Watere (Plates XIII and XIV), 258 MuRLiN, John Raymond, Ph.D. Absorption and Secre- tion in the Digestive System of the Land Isopods (Plate XVI), 284 Palmer, T. Chalkley. Five New Species of Trachelo- monas (Plate XXXV), 791 Perkins, Henry Farnham. The Development of Gonio- nema Murbachii (Plates XXXI, XXXII, XXXIII, XXXIV), 750 PiLSBRY, Henry A. New Land Mollusca from Japan and the Bouin Islands, 25 Revision of Japanese Viviparidte, with Notes on Melania and Bithynia (Plate IX), 115 On the Localities of A. Adams' Japanese Helicid^, . 233 Additions to the Japanese Land Snail Fauna, VI (Plates XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI), . . 360 Southwestern Land Snails, 510 m PiLSBRY, Henry A. Additions lo the Japanese Land Snail Fauna, VII (Plates XXVII and XXVI LI), . . 517 New Laud Mollusca from Idaho, 59;j Rehn, James A. G. A New S[)ecies of the Orthopterous Genus Pseudophyllus from Sumatra, 21 A New Bat of the Genus Glossophagus, 37 A Revision of the Genus Mormoops, 160 On the Genus Phrvnotettix Glover (Haldemauella Auct.), 595 Gontributions Toward a Knowledge of the Orthoptera of Japan and Korea, I. Acrididte, 629 Three New American Bats, 638 Notes on the Orthoptera of New Mexico and Western Texas, 717 Reese, Albert M. Structure and Development of the Thyroid Gland in Petroniyzon (Plates IV, V, VI, VII), " 85 Rhoads, Samuel N. Synopsis of the Anierican Martens, . 443 S.MiTH, Burnett. Phylogeuy of the Species of Fulgur with Remarks on an Abnormal Form of Fulgur caua- liculatum, and Sexual Dimorphism in Fulgur car- ica, 505 Springer, Ada. On some Living and Fossil Snails of the Genus Physa, found at Las Vegas, New Mexico, . 513 Stone, Wi^mer. A Collection of Birds from Sumatra, obtained by Alfred C Harrison, dr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller,' 670 Stone, Witmer, and J. A. G. Rehn. A Collection of Mammals from Sumatra, with a Review of the Genera Nycticebus and Tragulus, 127 Viereck, H. Hymenoptera from Southern California and New Mexico, with Descriptions of New Species, . 728 Walker, Bryant, and Henry A. Pilsbry. The Mol- lusca of the Mount Mitchell Region, North Caro- lina (Plates XXIV and XXV), 413 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1902. January 7. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair. Thirty-two persons present. Papers nnder the following titles were presented for publication : " The Progressive Movement of Gregarines," by Howard Crawley. ' * A Collection of Reptiles and Batrachians from Borneo and the Loo Choo Islands," by Arthur Erwin Brown. The Council reported that the following Standing Committees had been appointed to serve during the ensuing year : On Library. — Dr. C. N. Pierce, Thomas A. Robinson, Henry C. Chapman, M.D., Charles Schaeffer, M.D., and George Vaux, Jr. On Publications. — Henry Skinner, M.D., H.A. Pilsbry, Sc.D., Philip P. Calvert, Ph.D., Edward J. Nolan, M.D., and Witmer Stone. ■; I 2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., On Instruction and Lectures. — Benjamin Smith Lyman, Uselma C. Smith, Henry A. Pilsbry, Sc. D. , Charles Morris and Philip P. Calvert, Ph.D. Committee of Council on By-Laws. — Charles Roberts, Isaac J. Wistar, Theodore D. Rand and Arthur Erwin Brown. January 14. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D,, in the Chair. Sixteen persons present. A paper entitled ' ' A New Genus and Three New Species of Chi- lopods," by Ralph V. Chamberlin, was presented for publication. January 21. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair. Nine persons present. A paper entitled "A New Pseudophyllus from Sumatra," by James A. G. Rehn, was presented for publication. The deaths of Caleb C. Cresson, a member, and of Alpheus C. Hyatt, a correspondent, were announced. January 28. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair. Thirty persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : " Contributions to the Life-Histories of Plants, No. XVI," by Thomas Meehan. " New Land ]\IolliL?ca from Japan and the Bonin Islands," by Henry A. Pilsbry. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 3 The death of Charles Koberts, on the 22d inst., having been announced, the following minute was adopted : The Academy deeply regrets the death of its member, Charles Roberts, who, since his first association with the society manifested his interest in its welfare so constantly and practically. The qual- ities which characterized him as a model citizen in his connection with public interests, his strict integrity, clearness of judgment and self-sacrificing devotion to duty were of the highest value in one concerned Avith the administration of the affairs of the Academy ; as a member of the Coimcil, he has been judicious as an adviser and helpful in all that made for the advancement of science. The Academy tenders^its sincere condolence to his widow. The following were elected members: J. Chester Bradley, Marian G. Nimlet, Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., H. N. Hiller, M.D., Judson Daland, M. D. , Owen S. Paxson, F. Ehrenfeld, and Burnett Smith. The following were ordered to be printed : PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., THE PBOGRESSIVE MOVEMENT OF GREGARINES. BY HOWARD CRAWLEY. I. Introduction. AVhile making observations on living specimens of Stenophora juli,^ incident to a study of the life-history of this gregarine, I became impressed by the fact that Schewiakoff's currently accepted explanation for the progressive movement of gregarines does not satisfactorily account for all of the phenomena which the animals display. I was working at the time in the Zoological Laboratory of Harvard University, and at the suggestion of the Director, Prof. E. L. Mark, an investigation of gregarine movements of all sorts was undertaken. I desire to take this opportunity to express my sincere gratitude to Prof. Mark for the valuable aid which he rendered me. The work was done almost exclusively on living animals, after the method used by Schewiakoff, which will be described below. Stenophora juli, from the intestine of Julus, and Echinomera hispida, from the intestine of Lithobius, were the species studied. II. Historical and Critical. The movements displayed ;by gregarines are of two kinds. The one, which consists of contractions of the body, is readily explain- able by the existence of the muscular layer. The other, for which I shall use the term progression, is a movement of translation, during which the animal glides from place to place. It is usually described as taking place without the slightest bodily movement. This supposition, combined with the fact that gregarines possess no motor organs, rendered their progression apparently causeless, and until 1894, when Schewiakoff published his paper, it was regarded as one of the unsolved problems of biology. Prior to this date, biological literature contains but two suggested solutions of the problem. Lankester (1872, p. 347) says: " On slitting up a large ^ The nomenclature used in this paper is that given by Labbe (1899). 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5 Sipunculiis, and allowing its abundant pink perivisceral fluid to run into a glass dish, my attention was attracted by two white flakes, of about an eighth of an inch in length, which were swim- ming actively in the liquid. Their movement was like that of some planarians, and seemed to depend on the undulation of their lateral margins, which were plainly to be seen in a state of vibra- tion. These white flakes turned out to be specimens of Monocystis sipuncuU." It is probable, however, that the movements here seen were noth- ing but the violent contortions which gregarines frequently show when first removed from their native environment. Such contor- tions might readily cause progression were the animals floating freely in a fluid. Moreover, Lankester himself appears never to have laid much stress on this single observation, for to my knowl- edge it is not referred to again in any of his later contributions on the Gregarinida. Frenzel (1891 p. 287 et seq.) suggested that the progression of gregarines is due to a chemotactic afiinity between them and their food. Such an explanation, however, is manifestly inadequate. Schewiakoff (1894), as the result of a painstaking study, came to the conclusion that gregarines progress by means of the extrusion of gelatinous fibres. These fibres are derived from a layer of sub- stance which is deposited between the cuticle and the ectoplasm. They pass out to the exterior through slit -like openings through the cuticle which occur in the grooves between the longitudinal thick- enings. Upon their emergence, they do not project radially from the surface of the gregarine, but run backward until the posterior end of the animal is reached. Somewhat hardened by the action of the surroimding watery media, they then project backward and free of the animal. This extrusion, which takes place over the entire surface of the gregarine, results in the formation behind it of a hollow cylinder, the walls of Avhich have by now acquired a certain amount of rigidity. The posterior end of this cylinder, impinging upon some resistant body, becomes fixed. The extrusion continuing, the cylinder lengthens, and the gregarine is pushed passively forward. Schewiakoff undertook his studies in the light of Lauterborn's discovery that diatoms progress by means of the extrusion of gelati- nous threads. There is a difference iu the progressive nioveraents 6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., of these two groups of organisms in that diatoms move indifferently in two directions, whereas gregarines always move forward. But in both cases the movement takes place without visible cause, and when Lauterborn showed that diatoms progress by means of the extrusion of threads of an invisible substance, a presumption was established that the cause for gregarine progression was to be sought for along similar lines. Accordingly, Schewiakoff undertook a study of living gregarines. As mounting media, he employed either normal salt solution or an albumin solution of the following formula : Egg-albumin, 20 cc. Distilled w^ater, 200 cc. Sodium chloride, 1 gi"* Powdered carmine, Chinese black and, in some cases, native sepia were added to the fluid, so that invisible extrusions from the grega- rines could be detected. The results were to show that gregarines usually caught up and pulled after them a number of particles of carmine, etc., thus demonstrating the presence of a sticky substance. Further, as a gregarine progressed through a medium thickly filled with carmine particles, there was always left behind it a clear trail. Schewiakoff says that this does not happen with other Protozoa, and so furnishes proof that gregarines leave something behind them. This substance was wholly invisible under ordinary circumstances, but very delicate manipulation enabled him to stain it and to demonstrate that grega- rines actually are followed by long fibres of extreme tenuity. Stress was laid upon the fact that carmine particles in the neighborhood of a motionless gregarine could be seen to show molecular move- ments ; next to slip backward along the surface of the animal and to collect in a lump at the posterior end, and that only after this had taken place would the animal progress. In the course of what follows, there will be frequent occasion to refer to Schewiakoff' s statements, and the conclusions that he draws from them, in much greater detail. I have given above only his results, and a few of the more important observations upon which these results were based. His explanation of the cause of gre- garine progression has been accepted by most authors, yet in some cases with a considerable amount of reserve. Lang (1901, p. 127) and Doflein (1901, p. 161) accept it without comment. Calkins 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 7 (1901, p. 149) says: " although very improbable at first sight, it is the only one thus far that fits the case." Wasielewski (1896, p. 22) rejects it, while Delage et Herouard (1896, footnote on p. 261) say: " Pour bizarre qu'elle paraisse, il faut bien 1' accepter jusqu'a nouvel ordre, car elle repose sur des faits observes et on n'en connait aucun autre a lui substituer." Schaudinn (1900) and Siedlecki (1899) are credited with having confirmed Schewiakoff, the former by Lang (1901, p. 128) and the latter by Calkms (1901, p. 149).' Schaudmn (pp. 222-224) gives data which show that the sporozoites and merozoites of Coccidium schubergii extrude fibres of a gelatinous substance. These fibres carry backward such small particles as may be in the immediate vicinity of the coccidians, and form a trail behind them. In so far as the extrusion of a gelatinous substance is concerned, Schau- dinn's observations im questionably confirm those of Schewiakoff, but, as will be seen later, they do not necessarily show that this gelatinous substance is the cause of progression. Siedlecki (1899, p. 521) says: " Es liisst sich aber bei Mono- cystis aseidue leicht noch ein anderer Bewegungsmodus beobachten : ohne irgendwie ihre GestaUt zu wechselii gleitet sie namlich plotzlich vorAviirts. Die Ui'sache der Bewegung liegt, wie es Schewiakoff fiir andere Gregarinen beschriebeu hat, in einer plotzlichen Aus- scheidimg von Schleim aus dem Hinterende des Korpers, und es ist leicht festzustellen, wie das Tliier durch einen aus ihm plotzlich herauswachsenden Schleimfaden vorwiirts geschoben wird." This can scarcely be regarded as a confirmation of Schewiakoff. III. Observations. 1. As a necessary preliminary, attention is here called to two points of considerable importance. The first of these concerns the shape of gregariues. The statement that gregarines are flat, like treraatodes, is made in some text-books, but this is an error when applied to the Polycystidea. The gregarines of this group are monaxial animals, with a circular ci'oss-section, and any plane passing through the axis divides them into morphologically identical halves. This is shown by sectioned gregarines, and it may readily be seen by watching the living animals. * Tlie date, 1900, given by Calkins to Siedlecki's paper is incorrect. 8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., The second point concerns progression. Gregarines are stated to show a " gliding " movement, and this, as we have seen, has been carefully studied. But I have been unable to find m the published literature on these animals any conclusive statement bearing upon the question as to whether gregarines creep or swim. Gliding could readily be effected in either of these two ways. When considera- tion is taken of their native environment, a very strong presumption is established that gregarines creep, yet certainly the matter is one which necessitates a demonstration. This demonstration is not at all difficult. In all microscopic mounts, gregarines either lie against the under surface of the cover- glass or upon the slide, which can be shown by raising or lowering the tube of the microscope. Either the upper or imder surface of the animals remains in focus until everything else has disappeared from view. This shows that all studies on progression have been made on animals which are in contact with a surface. Gregarines possess and at times exert the power to progress con- tinuously in straight lines. But more usually the progression is neither straight nor continuous. The animal advances by fits and starts, and the path pursued may be a zigzag or a series of curves. Plate I, fig. 1 shows the positions occupied by a progressing greg- arine, a being the earliest and / the latest. To the right is sketched the line generated by any given point of the animal's body. Under such circumstances the advance is not continuous, but slow and hesitating, and accompanied by frequent stops. There may be an advance of perhaps the body length, followed by a short pause. Ujion progression being resumed, it may be in the same or in a slightly different direction. The proper idea will be obtained by supposing the stops to take place anywhere along the broken line shown in the figure. This mode of progression is very common, and at least in Steno- pohora juli is much more frequently seen than continuous progx'es- sion in a straight lino. The alterations in the direction of the path are not, however, always so frequent as those shown in fig. 1, and the animal may advance along a series of curves. On the other hand, very short turns are often seen (Plate I, figs, 2, 3 and 4). While progressing in any of these ways, gregarines may or may not display evident muscular movements. In all published accounts of gregarine progression, the statement is made that the animals 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 9 glide forward without auy alteration in the body form, and this is frequently the appearance. The converse statement, that gliding takes place while the animals are displaying evident muscular con- tractions, has never, to my knowledge, been made, although the fact itself can scarcely have escaped frequent observation. Yet progression without alteration in the outline of the body is no more frequently seen than progression accompanied by obvious muscular contractions. Gregarines may also progress, in either a straight line or in zigzags, with the body held rigidly in a contorted form. My observations here differ from those of Schewiakoff. On p. 348 he says that progressing gregarines may alter the direction of their progression, and continues : "In solchen Fallen bemerkt man jedes Mai, wenn die Bewegimgsrichtung verandert Avird, dass an der einen Seite der Gregarine eine Querfalte auftritt Die Gregarine wird aus der friiheren Bewegungsrichtung nach der Seite hin abgelenkt, auf welcher die EinschniJrung am Gregarinenkorper erfolgte. Bleibt die Einschniirung liingere Zeit hindurch bestehen, so wird die Bewegung bogenformig, ja sie kann sogar zu einer spiraligen oder schleifenformigen werden. Wird die Einsch- niirung auf gehoben, d. h., die Gregarine wieder gerade gestreckt, so wird die Bewegung von Neuem geradlinig." He believes that the bending of the body is the cause of the turning. For when the body is bent, the extrusion of the gelatinous fibres from the bent side is hindered. The residt is a weakening of the propelling force on the bent side, with the natural result of a turning to that side. Straightening of the body brings about a uniform protrusion of the gelatinous fibres on all sides, with a resumption of progres- sion in a straight line. According to my observations, however, it is impossible to estab- lish any definite correlation between alterations in the direction of progression and extensive muscular contractions. The animals may turn without the slightest bending of the body. As Sche- wiakoff says, they may turn and bend to the same side, but, on the contrary, they frequently turn lo one side and bend to the other. Further, they may progress in a straight line with the body held rigidly in a contorted form, as stated above. Progressing gregarines, without their progression being in any ways checked, will often bend and suddenly straighten with a jerk. This movement may take place a number of times and it has a 10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., certain bearing on the mode whereby progression is effected. The bending of the body necessarily throws either the anterior or the posterior end of the animal out of the line of progression (figs. 5 and 6). The former case (fig. 5) is not inconsistent with Sche- Aviakoff' s views, but the latter is (fig. 6). For such a movement would presumably detach the animal from the gelatinous stalk, yet it is effected with absolutely no pause in the progression. Observations made on Echinomera hispida are equally suggestive. Fig. 7a-d shows the several positions successively occupied by a progressing individual of this species in making a turn. It will be seen that the animal bent sharply, so that the axis of the anterior part formed nearly a riglil angle with that of the posterior part. The narrow posterior part then swung rapidly around until it lay in line with the rest of the animal. It seems impossible to avoid the conclusion that this would have resulted in the breaking loose from any attached stalk, with the consequent cessation of progression. Yet there was not the slightest slackening in the speed of the animal, which was considei'able. 2. On encountering obstructions, gregarines may simply slip off to one side or the other. Frequently, however, when an obstruction is met head-on, the protomerite holds its position for the moment and the animal swings to and fro like a pendulum. There may be one or two to several of these swings, after which the progressive movement may be resumed. This may take place without notice- able change in the shape of the body. I am again obliged to differ with Schewiakoff, who (p. 343) says : ' ' Triff t die Gregarine auf ein Hindernis, so steht sie einige Zeil still ; es tritt dann eiue Knickung am Korper der Gregarine auf, worauf die Beweguug in einer neuen, durch die Knickung des Voi-derendes vorgezeichneten Richtung fortgesetzt wird." This may happen, but, according to my observations, more often there is no alteration in the shape of the body. It apparently depends upon the force with which the gregarine strikes the obstruction, this force being not necessarily powerful enough to cause the animal to bend. I believe that the swinging to and fro tells strongly against the idea that gregarines are followed by an attached stalk of gelatinous fibres. It is not easy to see how such a swinging could fail to break the animal loose from any such stalk, whereupon it would 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11 come to rest. But this does not happen. Such a turn as that shown in fig. 3 may be a matter of only a second or two. Another case is shown in fig. 4, where a—f show six positions successively occupied by a progressing gregarine. It is difficult to see how the gelatinous stalk can explain a progi-essive movement of this sort, which was seen a number of times. 3. Schewiakoff arrived at his conclusions partly from a study of the action of carmine particles, etc., in the vicinity of progressing gregarines. Such particles are seen to slip backward along the surface of the gregarine, and Schewiakoff believed they were being pushed or carried backward by the extruding gelatinous substance. He states that this take? place just before a gregarine begins to dis- play a progressive movement, and continues during progression. This is true, but these particles show such varied movements that it is probable the extruding gelatin is not in all cases the cause. If the extrusion of gelatinous fibres be the cause of gregarine progres- sion, then the rate at which the gelatinous fibres are passed back- ward should bear a direct ratio to the speed of the progressing gregarine. The movement of the particles along the animal's sur- face should mark the rate of extrusion, which shoidd itself condition the rate of progression. But these particles may slip backward either more rapidly or more slowly than the gregarine is progres- sing. They may also slip rapidly backward along the surface of a gregarine which is not changing place, and further remain at a fixed point on the surface of a progressing individual. As a rule, the slipping is seen in progressing animals, but often it is not. Fre- quently a progressing individual causes little or no disturbance among the loose particles lying in its path, merely pushing them aside as it advances. The particles may also move forward along the animal's surface. This is seldom seen in progressing grega- rines, but is frequent in those which are displaying changes of body form. The movements of these small particles are so multifarious as to suggest that they are due to different causes. It is probable that surface tension is in part responsible. At the same time, the evi- dence that gregarines extrude a gelatinous substance is wholly con- clusive. The animals are sticky, and will often remain adhering to the cover-glass in spite of rapid currents in the mounting fluid. I have also seen the substance arising from the surface of a progres- 12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [Jan , sing gregariue, and constituting a trail behind it. I made this observation but once, the gregarine being Echinomera hispida. AVith Stenophora juli I have never been able to see it. My observa- tion differs from those of Schewiakoff in that the trail does not consist of fibres, but of a series of splashes (Plate II, fig. 8). The substance arose from the surface of the gregarine as short rods, which almost instanty expanded into irregular drops. These drops then became detached from the surface of the gregarine to con- stitute the trail. I do not think that this observation gives any I'eason for ques- tioning Schewiakoff ' s statement that the gelatinous substance passes backward as fibres. But since an extrusion of the sort shown in fig. 8 could hardly push the animal forward, the observation appears to me significant in indicating that the trail is the effect of progres- sion and not its cause. It is an intrinsic weakness of Schewiakoff ' s explanation that it gives no reason why the gelatinous substance should pass backward instead of either forward or radially. If, however, the cause for progression is to be sought for elsewhere, it is easy to see why it passes backward. Upon its emergence on the surface of the gregarine, it is merely left behind, in precisely the same way as the mucus secreted by a snail is left behind as the animal advances. The passing backward of the gelatinous substance is the effect of progression, and not its cause. As Schewiakoff states, progressing gregarines gather up and drag behind them masses of loose particles. The size of these masses is shown in figs. 9, 10 and 11. It often happens, however, that a gregarine may travel for a considerable distance without gathering up any such appendage. Except for perhaps half a dozen carmine particles x>v minute fat-drops, the animal drags nothing along behind it. This suggests that the quantity of adhesive substance on the surface of gregarines is subject to variation. Whether Schewiakoff believes that the ability to extrude a gela- tinoas substance has been developed in gregarines for the purpose of locomotion does not appear. The extrusion of slimy substances by endo-parasites is, however, a common phenomenon, and we should look to find this power in a gregarine, just as we find it in a cestode. In some cases, however, the sticky substance on the surface of gregarines appears to be derived from the host-tissue. To study 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13 gregarines, the method is to break up the appropriate host-organ on a slide, add a drop of some fluid, aud place a cover-glass over the mount. There is necessarily released a quantity of various organic fluids, and these fluids are nearly always mucilaginous. That they are responsible for certain of the phenomena displayed by grega- rines is suggested by the following observations, which also bear upon the question of gregarine progression. Fig. 12 shows a gregarine distant a trifle more than its own length from a solid mass of host-tissue. Between the gregarine and the host-tissue are a number of small particles. If an animal so situated be watched, it wiU be seen to advance slowly and imsteadily for a very short distance, possibly the half of its length, but usually much less. It will then stop, remain motionless for the fraction of a second, and finally, with a sudden jerk, return to the position which it occupied originally. The particles follow the movement of the gregarine, those nearest to it moving the greatest distance. This suggests that there is behind the gregarine a mass of an invisible, elastic substance, in which both the gregarine aud the small particles are entangled. As the animal advances, this elastic substance is stretched, aud when the force which has caused the animal to advance is released, it is brought back into its original position by the sudden shorten- ing of the elastic substance. This phenomenon, which was seen time and again, first caused me to question the truth of Schewiakoff ' s explanation of gregarine progression. For, if the advance be due to the elongation of a stalk behind the animal, this stalk should prevent the slipping back- ward. As will be developed later, I believe gregarine progression is due to slight muscular movements, not apparent under ordinary observational conditions. In such cases as the one now under con- sideration, the advance is resisted by the elastic sticky substance, and when the power is released the gregarine is jerked passively backward. Since it is those gregai'ines which are lying near the host-tissue which behave in this manner, it is probable that the elastic substance is derived in part from the host-cells. Gregarines some distance from any host-tissue were never seen to act in this way. 4. My studies had advanced to this point with no more result than to conclude that Schewiakoff' s explanation of gregarine pro- gression was probably incorrect. The case shown by fig. 12 sug- gested that the problem was to be solved by watching the gregarine 14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., itself, although, assuming Schewiakoff to be incorrect, there was no other conclusion possible. The existence of locomotor organs, such as small cilia or temporary protoplasmic processes, was next considered. There was not, however, the slightest evidence for such organs to be detected with living gregarines, and the most rigid staining methods gave wholly negative results. Varying the obser- vational conditions was next tried. I had been making my studies after the methods which I suppose have been generally employed in work on li\'ing gregarines. The highest powers used were those obtained with a one-eighth-inch dry lens and a No. 4 eye-piece. I had also followed the instinctive tendency to focus on the periphery of the gregarines, which results in studying no more than an optical section of the animals. Knomng that Stenophor a juK has the longitudinal elevations of the cuticle well developed, it occurred to me that they might furnish a means of getting at additional data. Accordingly, I began to make observations on the upper surface of the gregarines, using a one-twelfth-inch oil-immersion lens. It developed at once that this could not be done with ordinary illumination, on account of the opacity of most gregarines. But with the use of a lamp, it was easy to get an illumination sufficiently intense to render the grega- rines almost transparent. The light was permitted to pass from the mirror to the sub-stage condenser without the interposition of blue or ground glass, and the diaphragm Avas left well open. The difficvdty of managing a wet mount when studied under an oil- immersion lens was obviated in some cases by gluing the cover-glass to the slide with vaseline or spermaceti. This is not always neces- sary, for frequently the surface tension of the fluid of the mount will hold the cover-glass perfectly rigid. This method very quickly revealed the fact that gregarines show a movement which hitherto appears to have escaped observation. This I shall designate as the transverse movement. It may be seen to take place when gregarines are behaving in any of the ways already described. It manifests itself as a shifting of the cuticular striations in a direction at right angles to the long axis of the ani- mal. The more superficial granules of the endoplasm also take part in it, which indicates that the myocyte, or muscular layer, is in- volved. There is often to be seen in contracting gregarines a flow of granules which calls to mind the flow of granules seen in an amoeba. 1902.J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15 A deep constriction in the deutomerite will cause such a flow. The phenomenon just mentioned, however, is to all appearances of a totally different nature. It shows itself as a shifting, eii masse, of all the granules in sight. There is no flowing, and, so far as it is possible to see, the granules maintain somewhat the same relative positions. The reasons for supposing the muscular layer is involved in this phenomenon are as follows : The muscular layer lies upon and is directly continuous with the endoplasm. The latter is beset with granules to its extreme limit. Away from the surface, there is nothing to prevent a flow of these granules, but on the surface (of the endoplasm) it is not unreasonable to suppose that the netlike muscular layer entangles a number of these granules. In conse- quence, when the muscular layer contracts, the superficial granules are carried along with it. That there are granules embedded in the muscular layer is indicated by what is seen in plasmolyzed gregarines. In such animals, when the muscular layer is torn loose from the endoplasm, it always carries with it a number of granules. The transverse movement is indifferently to one side or the other, or else to and fro. It is displayed conspicuously when the grega- rine is beha\nng in the manner described on pp. 12 and 13, and illustrated in fig. 12. It also takes place when the animals turn, and frequently in such cases the cuticular markings and superficial granules are seen to sweep rapidly to one side, suggesting that the gregarine is rotating on its long axis. That such a rotation actually takes place can be confirmed by watching gregarines which have the nucleus out of the middle line, or some other mark which ren- ders it possible to distinguish one side from the other. In other cases there is nothing to demonstrate a rotation. The transverse movement is slight and slow, being first to one side and then to the other. This is seen when the animal is displaying the slow typical glide. Should the animal then turn, the transverse movement becomes more extensive and more rapid, while if pro- gression be in any ways interfered with, a still greater increase in the speed and extent of the transverse movement takes place. Ail of this occurs without the extensive muscular contractions which gregarines so frequently display. But it is possible to estab- lish a correlation between the transverse movement and what is clearly a dis])lay of muscular activity. When a gregarine displays 16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan. the common movement of a lateral displacement of the protomerite, or a bending jnst behind the septum, it can be seen Avith moderate powers that a wave of disturbance passes down the upper surface well to the rear end of the animal. Under high powers, with their limited focal depth, this wave is not readily seen unless it is the upper surface of the animal that is being watched. It is a very common phenomenon, and it establishes the fact that those muscu- lar impulses which are most evident in the anterior part of the body make their influence felt nearly as far as the posterior extremity. Under moderate powers, it appears only as a wave passing down the upper surface, but if higher powers be used, it can be seen that this wave is the same as the transverse movement described above. That is, bending of the anterior part of the body causes a trans- verse movement of the cuticular striations and superficial granules. Moreover, the character of the bending bears a direct relation to the character of the transverse movement. When the bending is rapid and extensive, so also is the transverse movement, and it is under such circumstances that evident rotation may take place. These phenomena are well seen in those animals which are entan- gled in some sticky elastic substance, as described on pp. 12 and 13, and shown in fig. 12. Such animals show frequently a more or less continuous bending of the anterior part of the body, and simultaneously the ti-ansverse movement. In the case of animals Avhich are gliding freely, the transverse movement is always much less extensive. With these it usually requires an oil-immersion lens to make satisfactory observations, with the result that it is altogether impossible, on account of the large size of Stenophora, to keep enough of the animal under observation at any one time to see if both the bending and the transverse move- ment take place together. Since, however, it is easy to see that an extensive bending is accompanied by an extensive transverse move- ment, it is supposable, by analogy, that the slight transverse move- ment is accompanied by slight bending. I was able to obtain a certain amount of evidence that this is so. Observations were made on the protomerite of gliding gregarines, vnth the result of detecting frequent lateral displacements of this part of the animal. These movements were mostly so slight iu extent that it required steady Avatching to detect them, and they would never be noticed with low or medium powers. They occur 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17 at frequent intervals. As stated above, Stenophora is so large that it is impossible to keep both the protomerite and the upper surface of the deutomerite in focus at the same time. But gregarines which showed these slight displacements of the protomerite were ^ displa}dng the typical gliding movement, and such gregarines usually show the transverse movement. Moreover, by transferring the attention from the upper surface of the deutomerite to the pro- tomerite, it was possible to see that both of these two sorts of move- ment take place at only very slightly separated periods of time. It is evident that lateral movements of the protomerite which are at all e\'ident must take place in a horizontal plane. A movement in a vertical plane would need to be far more extensive in order to be detected. Vertical displacements, however, can often be seen. That is, gliding gregarines move the protomerite indifferently in any direction. This appears to me a fact of considerable signifi- cance. It indicates that bendings of the protomerite may take place even when it is not possible to see them. Fig. 13 is a dia- gram of the anterior part of a gregarine. The solid line represents the longitudinal axis. The dotted line represents the axis of the protomerite when displaced in a horizontal plane. This displace- ment is so slight that it is clear, were it to be effected in a vertical plane, the highest powers and the most rigid attention would wholly fail to detect it. It therefore seems reasonable to suppose that the transverse move- ment is dii'ectly correlated with either displacements of the pro- tomerite or bendings of the body in the region of the septum. When both are extensive the connection is readily established, but when the transverse movement is slight, this can only be done by somewhat indirect means, as I have just pointed out. Yet it would be improbable that the transverse movement should at one time be correlated with bendings of the anterior part of the body, and not at other times, when the difference in the two cases is merelv one of degree. If, as I hope, my conclusions are warranted by the observational data, the cause for gregarine progression is extremely simple, and while the exact mechanics of the process are probably bevond observation, it may be suggested that it is effected in a manner somewhat as follows: The muscular impulse, starting backward from the region of the septum, necessarily causes the contact of the 18 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., gregarine with the cover-glass to be different in this region from wliat it is in the more posterior parts. Further, since the transverse movement takes place at the same time as the backward movement, that part of the gregarine' s surface where the contact relations are temporarily different moves not only backward, but from side to , side as well. It is not difficult to see how movements of this sort may produce locomotion, when it be recollected that gregarines are sticky. If a particular part of the surface be in close con- tact with the cover-glass or slide, a muscular movement which car- ries this particular part backward would not be followed by a mere slipping of this part, but by a movement of the gregarine in the opposite direction. It is easy to see, when obserxing the upper sur- face of a progressing gregarine, that the contact relations of differ- ent parts are different. The upper surface loses its normal curved contour, and shows considerable irregularities. The observational conditions are too difficult to permit the changes of contour to be followed, and in consequence wholly direct evidence that progression is brought about in the manner outlined above is not to be had. It seems to me, however, that the explanation of gregarine progression here given is, on a priori grounds, more probable than that given by Schewiakoff, for it is based on the fact that gregarines possess a weU-developed muscular system, and it is in line with the general principles of animal locomotion. On the other hand, a passive locomotion by means of the extru- sion of gelatinous threads is without parallel in the animal kingdom. Moreover, when the form of certain of the polycystid gregarines is taken into account, this mode of progression is almost incon- ceivable. Thus, Porospora gigantea, which inhabits the intestine of the lobster, is shaped like a serpent, and is about forty times as long as it is broad. Several genera, Dactylophorus, Schneider la and Stichospora, for examples, have the form of greatly elongated cones, with the posterior end terminating in a point. Specimens of Echinomera hlsplda frequently show an outline which recalls tliat of a tadpole. It is difficult to believe that the projection of gelatinous fibres from the exti-eme posterior ends of animals of this shape could push them forward. It may not be amiss to call attention to the conditions in other Sporozoa. An adult coccidian possesses no muscular system, and lacks the power to move. On the other hand, intra-cellular grega- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19 rines, wheu squeezed out of the cell?, show muscular coutortious, and occasionally the typical progression of the free-living sporont. The Hsemosporidia and IMyxosporidia, both of Avhich are motile, possess muscle fibres similar to those of polycystid gregarines, whereas the Amoebosporidia (Schizo-gregarines) show no muscle, and are not known to possess the power to move. In general, throughout the Sporozoa, the possession of muscle fibres and the power of moving from place to place go hand in hand, while the forms which are not knoAvn to move lack muscular elements. It would, therefore, seem somewhat extraordinary if the polycystid gregarines, in which the musciUar system is well organized, should have developed such a unique mode of progression as that described by Schewiakoff. Bibliography. Calkins, G. K, 1901. Columbia University Biological Scries, No. 6» Tlie Protozoa. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1901. Delage et Herouard, 1896. Traite de Zoologie Concrete, Tome I, La Cellule et les Protozoaires. Paris, Schleicher Freres, 1896. Doflein, F., 1896. Die Protozoen als Parasiten und Krankheitserreger. Jena, G. Fischer, 1896. Frenzel, J., 1891. Ueber einige argentinische Gregarineu. Ein Bei- trag zur Organisation und Physiologic der Gregarinen iiberhaupt. Jena Zeitschr., Bd. 27, pp. 233-336, Taf. 8. Labbe, a., 1899. Das Tierreich ; 5 Lief., Sporozoa. Berlin, R. Fried- lander und SohD, 1899. Lang, A., 1901. Lehrbuch der vergl. Anatomic der wirbelloseu Thiere. 2 Aufl., 2 Lief., Protozoa. Jena, G. Fischer, 1901. Lankester, E. Ray, 1872. Remarks on the Structure of the Gregar- inae, and on the Development of G. (Mouocystis) sipunculi Koll. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci.. N. S., Vol. 12, pp. 34>-3il, PL 20. ScHAUDiNN, Fe., 1900. Untersuchungen iiber den Generationswechsel bei Coccidien. Zool. Jahrb., Bd. 13, Abth. f. Anat., pp. 197-292, Taf. 13-16. Schewiakoff, V., 1894. Ueber die Ursachc der fortschreitenden BeweguDg der Gregarinen. Zeitschr. f. wiss. iZool., Bd. 58, pp. 340-854, Taf. 20 u. 21. Siedlecki, M., 1900. Ueber die geschlechtliche Vermehrung'der Mon- ocystis ascidiiB R. Lank. Bull, intern, de I'Acad. cles Sci. de Cracovie. Compt. Rendus des Seances de I'Ann. 1890, pp. 515- 537, 1 pi. (Plate appeared in the number for May, 1901.) EXPLANATION OF PLATES I AND XL Plate I. — Fig. 1. — The successive positions occupied by a gregarine {Slenophora juli) progressing in a zigzag. The line to the right shows the nature of the path followed. Fig. 2. — The successive positions taken by a progressing gregarine (StenophorajuU) wheu turning without alterations in the shape of the body. 20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., Fig. 3. — The successive positions taken by a gregarine {Stenophora juli) after running head-on into an obstruction. Fig. 4. — The same phenomenon as that shown in fig. 3. Here the change from h to c is accomplislied in the same way as tlie change from 6 to e in fig. 3, and the change from dio e and from e to/ in the same way as the change from the first to the last positions in fig. 2. Fig. 5. — A progressing gregarine {Stenojiliora juli) throwing the anterior end out of the line of progression, which is shown by the ruled line. (This line is incorrectly drawn too far to the left.) Fig. G. — A progressing gregarine (Steno2)hora juli) throwing the pos- terior end out of the line of progression. Fig. 7. — A progressing gregarine (Echinomera hispida) making a turn. Between c and d the narrow posterior end swung rapidly around until it lay in line with the rest of the animal. Plate II. — Fig. 8.— The trail of gelatinous substance left behind by a progressing gregarine {EcJiinomera hispida). Figs. 9, 10, 11.— The appendages of carmine, etc., which progressing gregarines gather up and drag behind them. Fig. 12. — A gregarine {Stenophora juli) behind which are a number of small particles, lying near a mass of host-tissue. Both the gregarine and the small particles are entangled in an invisible, elastic substance (see pp. 12-13 of the text). Fig. 13. — Anterior end of a gregarine {StenopJiora juli). The solid line represents the longitudinal axis ; the broken line the axis of the protomerite when displaced in the horizontal plane. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21 A NEW SPECIES OF THE ORTHOPTEROUS GENUS PSEUDOPHYLLUS FROM SUMATRA. BY JAMES A. G. REHN. The Academy of Xatural Sciences of Philadelphia has been the recipient of a collection of zoological material from the island of Simiatra, presented by Mr. A. C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. The collection included an alcoholic specimen of a species of the genus Pseudophyllus, Avhich on examination proves to be new, and which I take pleasure in dedicating to one of the donors. Pseudophyllus harrisoni n. sp. Type, female, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Allied to P. neriifolius Serville,^ but differing in the obtuse ante- rior angles of the mesosternum, in the bluntly bituberculate pro- sternum, and the central position of the metasternal foveolse. From P. brullei Pictet and Saussure it is distinguished by the centrally bent transverse veins, and by the anteriorly inserted radial vein. Size large. Head with the vertex produced, acuminate, supe- riorly sulcate; eyes subovate, exserted; antennae filiform. Pro- notum with anterior margin subarcuate, posterior broadly rounded ; lateral lobes with the lower margin obtusely trian- gular ; transverse sulci two in number, the posterior very deeply incised. Tegmina elongate, moderately broad; radial vein inserted decidedly before the middle ; transverse vems toward the apex centrally bent, giving them a subarcuate appearance. Wings exceeding the tegmina in length, apex acuminate. Prosternum bluntly bituberculate; mesosternum with the anterior* border sinuate, the anterior angles obtuse and bearing a spine directed downward ; metasternum with the anterior border truncate, as long as the same portion of the mesosternum, foveolaj placed in the central portion, rather close together. Anterior femora with a few very obscure spines on the lower margins ; tibite with the upper ^ See Brunner, Monographie der Pseudophylliden, p. 37, for a study of the synonymy of this species. 22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan. surface deplaiiate, foramina moderately inflated. Median femora bearing eight spines on the outer margin, six on the inner, the spines increasing to six on the outer margin as the distal portion is approached ; tibise compressed, the inner margin of the upper sur- face mth four spines. Posterior femora rather weak, genicular lobes produced and apically roimded, outer lower margin bearing twelve large dentiform spines, inner lower margin with ten or twelve spines; tibite compressed, quadrate, all margins spined, the outer upper margin with several very obscure spines, the inner upper margin with very distinct spines. Ovipositor very robust, lower margin arcuate, upper margin with the basal third straight, apical two-thirds slightly curved. Subgeuital plate very small, triangidar, apex moderately emargiuate. General color greenish ; antennse annulate with blackish ; ovi- positor with the apical portion black. Length of body (excluding o\ Length of pronotum. Length of tegmina, . Greatest width of tegmina. Length of hind femora, . Length of ovipositor, pos] 12.5 93 22.5 28.5 32 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23 February 4. Mr. Uselma C. Smith iu the Chair. Fourteeu persous present. '. February 11. Mr. Lewis Woolman in the Chair. Eight pei'sons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : " The Frons m Bembidium, with Descriptions of New Species," byF. E. Blaisdell, M.D. " A New Bat of the Genus Glossophaga, " by James A. G. Rehn. February 18. J. Cheston Morris, M.D., in the Chair. Fourteen persons present. February 25. Edwin G. Conklin, Ph.D., Vice-President, in the Chair. Papers under the following titles were presented for })ublication ; " Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymenoptera of l^razil, No. 8. Eumenida?, continued (Genus Odynerus)," by William J. Fox. 24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb.., " Some Bermuda Oligochseta with a Description of a New Species," by J. Percy Moore. " Structure and Development of the Thyroid Gland in Petro- myzon," by Albert M. Reese. " Karyokenesis and Cytokenesis in the Maturation, Fertilization and Cleavage of Crepidula and Other Gasteropods, " by Edwin G. Conklin. " Certain Aboriginal Remains of the Northwest Florida Coast, Part II," by Clarence B. Moore. The following were elected members: J. P. Murlin, Ph.D., A. F. K. Krout, Ph.D., James A. Nelson and A. B. Gordon-Davis. The following were ordered to be printed : 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25 NEW LAND MOLLTJSCA FROM JAPAN AND THE BONIN ISLANDS. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. A mouograpliic account of the uou-marine mollusks of the Bouin Islands (Ogasawara-jima) is now in preparation, in which all of the species will be illustrated. As Mr. Nakada is still collecting in the islands for Mr. Hirase, and will probably spend a month or two more there, it has been thought desirable to publish brief notices of his discoveries, reserving the consideration of the extrinsic relations of the Ogasawaran fauna for the article to follow. Besides the material sent by Mr. Hirase, I am indebted to Mr. S. Yoshiwara, of the College of Science, Imperial University, at Tokyo, for valuable specimens and data which will be fully utilized in the projected monograph. One of the most interesting of Mr. Yoshiwai'a's discoveries is the true locality of Mandarina ruschen- bergeriana (Pils. ), which he found on the islet Minami, off the southern end of Chichijima. HELICINA Lam. This genus is represented in the Bonin Islands by several species and varieties, all more or less related, and doubtless claiming a common ancestor, though several of them are conspicuously diverse. Those now known from Hahajima may be determined by the fol- lowing key : a. — Spire elevated, conic; lip simple, blunt, unexpanded. AVhorls 4^. Alt. 4, diam. 5.2 mm., . . . H. capsula n. sji. a\ — Spire convex or merely somewhat conoidal ; base convex; lip more or less expanded or thickened. b. — Periphery conspicuously cariuate ; lip expanded and thickened, c. — Whorls 4; strongly striate spirally above. Alt. 3.2 or 3.3, diam. 5 mm., . H. ogasawarana n. sp. c\ — Much depressed and very acutely carinate; pale yellowish-corneous; whorls 4^. Alt. 2.7 to 3, diam. 5.8 to 6 mm., . . . H. hirasei n. sp. 6'. — Periphery more or less angular, or rounded though com- pressed. 26 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., c. — Surface delicately striate spirally. Alt. 3.5, diam. 5.3 to 5.8 mm., . . . H. yoshiwarana n. sp. c'. — Upper surface strongly striate spirally, if. yoshiwarana var. arata u. v. c". — ^Smaller, delicately striate. Alt. 2.2, diam. 4.5 mm., H. yoshiwarana var. mierotheca n. v. Only one form is yet kuowu from Chicliijima, H. ogasawarana var. discrepans. It differs from the typical form iu having the spiral strise obsolete on the last whorl. Alycaeus biexcisus n. sp. Shell similar in general form, size and sculpture to A. rtinhardti Pils., but differing in the aperture. The lip is thickened and built forward. The parietal margin of the lip is continuous, raised in a blmit, somewhat triangular process. The columellar margin is excised in a broad curve, and there is a more or less pronounced notch at the junction of the basal and outer margins. The neck is only slightly constricted, and is striate. Whorls 3^. Diam. 3J mm. ^Suimura, Awa. Types No. 82,660 Coll. A. N. S. P., from No. 8316 of Mr. Hirase's collection. This i*s one of the most differentiated of the Japanese species of Alycceus. Blanfordia japonioa var. simplex nov. The specimens of Blanfordia from Nippon which I have seen differ from B. japonica of Sado Island, as defined by A. Adams, in having the lip only a mere trifle expanded, hardly perceptibly so, and not doubled, as it is said to be in B. japonica. The shell consists of 5 whorls, the first one more or less worn, and it is cov- ered with a yellowish-olivaceous cuticle. It is shorter and broader than B. bensoni of Yesso. Length 6, diam. 4 mm. Nishigo, Uzeu. Types No. 78,836 Coll. A. N. S. P., from No. 406 of Mr. Hirase's collection. Similar specimens have been sent from^Kajima, Satsuma, and one immature shell before me from Ibuki, Omi (No. 842 of Mr. Hirase's collection), may prove to be the same variety. The species of Blanfordia now known are as follows : B. bensoni (A. Adams). Tomichia bensoni A. Ad., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist, (3), VIII, p! 308 (October, 1861). 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27 Blavfordia bensoni A. Ad., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), XII, p. 424, PI. 7, fiii. 11. Blanfordia bensoni A. Ad., Mollendorflf, Nachr'bl. d. D. Malak. Ges., 1897, p. 32 (description of specimens from Hakodate). Pomatiopsis hirasei'PUs., Nautilus, May, 1900, p. 12. Southern Yesso, in the Province Ojinia, at Matsiimai (A. Ad.), Kayabe (Y. Hirase), and Hakodate (B. Schmacker). B. japonica (A. Adams). Tomkhia japonica A. Ad., Ann. and Mag. (3), VIII, p. 308 (Octo- ber, 1861). Blanfordia japonica A. Ad., Ann. and Mag. (3), XII, p. 424, PI. 7, fig. 13. Sado Island (A. Ad.). B. japonica var. simplex Pils. See above. Blanfordia japonica Mlldflf., Nachr'bl. d. D. Malak. Ges., 1900, p. 153. Nishigo, Uzen, Nippon ; Kajinia, Satsuma, Kiushiu (Y. Hirase). I have given the references in full because several authors, nota- bly von Mollendorff and Kobelt, have expressed ignorance of the existence of descriptions of A. Adams' species ; the former author, with characteristic temerity, stating that one of them had never been described. Cyclophorus kikaiensis n. sp. Shell depressed-turbinate, moderately solid but not thick, openly umbilicate; pale yellowish, encircled by many dark red-brown dotted or spotted lines and bands, those above usually more or less confluent, and usually marked with radiating zigzag light streaks ; the earlier whorls purpligh-bi-owu ; sculptured with minute, thread- like striae, coai'ser and more separated on the early whorls. Whorls 4f, very convex, the last rounded or sometimes indistinctly angular in front, convex below. Aperture circular, oblique, bluish inside, the peristome built forward beyond a very slight expansion, in fully mature individuals ; in contact with the preceding whorl for a very short distance only. Alt. 1\^, diam. 15 mm. Alt. 12, diam. 16 mm. Alt. 12^, diam. 17 mm. Kikai-ga-shima, Osumi. Types No. 81,940 Coll. A. N. S. P., from No. 547 of Mr. Hirase' s collection. I formerly thought this a small variety of C. turgidus Pf r. , but further study of larger series shows it to be distinct. It is a smaller, 28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Feb-, less elevated shell, with decidedly larger umbilicas, the whorls being more loosely coiled. Specimens from the fossil-bed on the same island (Hirase's No. 6846) are a little larger, the largest measuring alt. 15, diam. 20 mm. They show the same open umbilicus and rather lax coil. C. turgldtis Pfr., from the same deposit, is decidedly larger than the typical form, diam. 27-28 mm. Diplommatina kiiensis n. sp. Shell cylindric, conic above, the tapering portion less than half the length of the shell ; dull red ; sculptured with strong but narrow thread-like rib-strise, slightly coarser on the cone than on the last two whorls. Whorls 6^, convex, the last narrower, strongly ascend- ing in front. Aperture circular, the lip narrowly expanded, re- inforced by a narrow rib or crest close behind it ; continuous across the parietal wall. Columellar denticle strong. Palatal fold very long. Length 3.3, diam. nearly 2 mm. Nachi, Kii. Types No. 82,656, Coll. A. N. S. P., from No. 837a of Mr. Hirase's collection; also No. 8376, from the same locality. . Some specimens are superficially ei'oded, and whitish ash-colored. The palatal fold is miusually long. It is a smaller species than D. tenuiplica, larger than nipponemis or cassa. Diplommatina kobelti var. ampla nov. Shell with the spire long and regularly tapering to an obtuse apex. Whorls 8 to 8^, convex, the last narrower and ascending as usual ; pale reddish or corneous ; evenly sculptured with delicate thread-like rib-strise, subobsolete on the last half of the last whorl. Aperture subcircular, with straightened, sinuous columellar margin. Columellar tooth strong. Palatal fold curved, covered by the expanded ])arietal callus. Length 4, diam. 2 mm. ' "' Goto, Uzen. Types No. 82,664, Coll. A. N. S. P., from No. 812 of Mr. Hirase's collection. It is larger than D. kobelti, with more whorls. Diplommatina pudica n. sp. Shell cylindric below, tapering in a long, slender spire above, the apex small, somewhat obtuse; dull red, the spire and apex blush- ing deep rose. Sculpture of thread-like ril)lets, conspicuous and 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29 very widely spaced on the spire, rapidly becoming finer at the beginning of the penultimate whorl, which is very finely and closely striate ; last whorl contracted, similarly sciUptured but with the striaj partially effaced, ascending as usual. Aperture somewhat oblique, subcircular, the peristome expanded and reflexed, but not doubled and with no rib behind it. The columellar tooth is rather small, and deeply placed. No palatal fold is visible through the shell. Length 3, diam. 1.5 mm. Nachi, Kii. Types No. 82,652, Coll. A. N. S. P., from No. 836a of Mr. Hirase's collection. A very distinct species, like D. kobeltl in the long spire, but in D piidica the cone is more slender above. The disparity in scidp- ture bet>veen the whorls of the cone and the last two is unusually marked. The color of fresh, uuAvoi-n shells is deeper than in the other species of Nippon known to me. Mandarina exoptata var. obtusa nov. More depressed than the typical form, and merely angular at the periphery; whorls 4^. Alt. 13, diam. 22^ mm. Hahajima, No. 845 of Mr. Hirase's collection. Mandarina mandarina var hahajimana nov. Shell small, thinner than typical mandarina, pale yellowish; uniform or with a pale reddish band above, another below the periphery. AVhorls 4^, the last slightly angular in front, soon becoming rounded at the periphery. Surface very densely engraved with clear-cut, minutely crimped spiral strise, obsolete immediately around the axis. Alt. 13 J, diam. 18^ mm. Sekimon-zan, Hahajima (INIr. S. Yoshiwara) ; Hahajima (Mr. Y. Hirase). Genus HIRASEA Pilsbry. This group has been modified to fill many places in the Ogasa- warau snail fauna. Six species have already been found on Haha- jima alone, and one on Chichijima. Those known from the former island may be determined by the following key : 30 rROCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., I. — Si)ire more or less convex or low-couic; perij)licrv angular or cariuate. a. — Basal lip produced forward beyond the outer and upper margins ; periphery angular above ; whorls 5f , closely coiled ; upper surface diUl, striate, base glossy. h. — Spire but slightly convex. Alt. 2.1, cliara. 4.3 mm., H. sinuosa. b\ — Spire low-conic; base very convex. Alt. 2, diam. 3.1 mm., H. eutheca. a}. — Aperture normally oblique, the outer and upper margins projecting forward of the basal. b. — Base translucent, thin, polished; whorls 5J; peri- phery merely angular. Alt. 2, diam. 4.6 mm., M. hypolia. 6\ — Base opaque, finely ribbed, like the upper surface; periphery acutely cariuate. c. — Biconvex; Avhorls 4J to 4|-. Alt. 2.2, diam. 4 mm., H. nesiotlea. c\ — Much depressed, the keel very acute ; whorls 4. Alt. 1.6, diam. 4 mm., . . H. acutissima. II. — Spire concave, the earlier whorls sunken; periphery rounded. a. — Disk-shaped; rich brown, and densely, minutely rib -striate above and at the periphery, becoming polished and somewhat translucent beneath, whitish near the axis. "Whorls 5, the last rounded at the periphery ; aperture lunate, the lip simple and acute in the specimens seen, which are probably not adult. Alt. 1.7, diam. 4 mm., H. biconcava. Another genus or subgenus, apparently allied to Hirasea, is re- presented by one species sent from Hahajima, and by Helix oper- culina of Gould, collected on Peel Island [Chichijima] by the North Pacific Exploring Expedition, but not yet obtained by Mr. Hirase. This group may be defined as follows : FAMETESTA subgen. nov. Shell disk-shaped, excessively depressed and acutely cariuate, concave below the keel, imi)erforate, thin, minutely striate. Aper- ture oblique, extremely narrow, the basal lip thickened within. Type H. mirabilis. Two species are now known. Both are pale brown with 5 whorls. They differ thus: a. — Diameter three times the altitude, 2.5 x 7.5 mm. Chichijima, II. opercul'ma Old. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31 a\ — Diameter five times the altitude, 1.5 x 7 mm. Hahajima, H. mirabilis n. sp. Tlie last species is so flat it looks as though troddeu upon. Kaliella ogasawarana n. sp. .Shell large for the genus, subperforate, conic, pale yellowish- corneous, subtransparent, glossy, smooth except for slight growth- lines. Spire almost straightly conic, the apex obtuse. "NVhorls 7^, somewhat convex, the last strongly angular at the periphery, mod- erately convex below. Aperture slightly curved, in crescent form, truncate at the ends; lip thin and acute, the columella concave, with narrowly reflexed margin. Alt. 5, diam. 5 mm. Hahajima, Ogasawara (Y. Hirase, No. 846). Nesopupa dedecora n. sp. Exceedingly small, obesely oval, dark red-brown, faintly striate. Whorls 4f , convex, the last swelling in a very conspicuous crest some distance behind the aperture, and grooved at the position of the upper palatal fold. Aperture squarish, well rounded below, the lip expanded, brown. Parietal lamella long and strong; angular lamella well developed, not united with the parietal. Columellar lamella deeply placed, small. Basal fold small, close to the colum- ella. Lower palatal fold very small and deeply situated. Upper palatal large and prominent All the teeth are whitish. Length about 1.6, diam. 1 mm. Hahajima, Ogasawara (No. 855 of Mr. Hirase's collection), Eulota senckenbergiana var. awaensis nov. Very large, dark brown with wide, ill-defined darker brown, and lighter dusky yellowish streaks, a narrow blackish su})ra-peripheral band bordered with yellow on both sides, and the interior of the umbilicus blackish. It wants the bright yellow variegation of typi- cal senckenbergiana. Surface conspicuously malleate. Alt. 30, diam. 55 mm. Alt. 33, diam. 53| mm. Suimura, Awa. Types No. 82,608 Coll. A. N. S. P., from No, 828 of Mr. Hirase's collection. The species has not hitherto been reported from Shikoku Island. 32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb , Eulota vulgivaga var. lanx nov. Shell more depressed thau vulgivaga, the base less convex. Last Avhorl deflexed in front. Aperture more oblique. Fringe at the periphery and sometimes along the sulture well developed. Alt. 9, diam. 22 mm. Suimura, Awa, Shikoku Island (Mr. Hirase, No. 825). A large form of vulgivaga occurs at Mt. Ibuki, Omi, having almost^? whorls, a dome-like spire, and comparatively smooth cuti- cle ; but smaller specimens seem to occur with the large ones, so that with the material now in hand I do not see that a distinct local race is indicated. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 33 CONTKIBUTIONS TO THE LIFE-HISTORY OF PLANTS, NO. XVI. by thomas meeiian.' The Bartram Oak, in Connection with Variation and Hybridism. My recent di.?covery that the mature wood of tree.«i may so change their original lines as to alter the v.hole form of the skeleton, and that these changes in form are characteristic of the species, may enable us to settle some disputed questions. In the case, somewhat famous, of the Bartram oak, Qiiercus heterophylla Mx., we may now say with absolute certainty that it is but a form of the pin oak, Quercas palustris. The angular divergence of the mature branches is the same in both ; while other resemblances to the latter species are well known. ]Much of the confusion in regard to this matter has arisen from the tree, still in the Bartram gardens, that for many years past has been pointed out to botanists as a seedling from the original tree long since destroyed. Specimens from this tree are widely diffused through herbariums. It is but a somewhat lobed- leaved form of the willow oak, Quercus Phellos, a condition not infrequent among trees of this species, and of which form there are numerous specimens in the herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. If any one had thought to compare these specimens with the plate in Michaux's " Sylva," the error would have been noted. Dr. Engelmann was familiar with Michaux's plant only through these misleading Bartram specimens, and Iience described his Quer'CUi palustris-imbricaria, whicli proves to be identical with ^Michaux's Q. heterophylla. Dr. Engelmann was led to write positively in regaixl to the hybridity iii a great degree from his belief in the sterility of hybrids — the St. Louis tree producing only a single acorn, so far as any one knew, during ' The manuscript of this article was found among the late Mr. Mee- han's papers after his death and sent to the Academy for publication by his son, ]Mr. S. Mendelson Median. It possesses a special interest as bein^ the last contribution from one who for nearly forty years enriched the Proceedinr/s with the results of his acute and devoted study of nature. Mr. ]\Ieehan's first paper in the Proceedings of the Academy was published in 18G2.— Editor. 34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., its existence. From this acorn grew the tree now on my grounds. It is remarkably fertile, wholly destroying the " sterile " idea, even though it were a hybrid, and with the leaves and skeleton characters of Q. paluMris, as already noted. Seedlings from Delaware trees, the acorns sent by Mr. Conmions, a well-known local botanist, all retain the character of occasional entire leaves, but in other respects coincide with Q. palustris. AVhile the absence of deep lobing struck ]\Iichaux, it is remarkable that he did not note the opposite in other cases. It is not unusual to note individual trees of Quercus palustris with the leaves so deeply incised that there is left little of leaf- blade but the strong veins and midribs. Indeed, this variation in the lobing of leaves may be noted in all species of oak. There is no need to call in hybridism to account for this varying condition. We find in many plants a tendency to have lobed leaves in an early stage and wholly entire at a later. The evergreen ivy, Hedera Helix, is a familiar example. AVe now know that these changes result from varying degrees of growth-energy, and not from any external agency in which hybridism may be included. In the light of modern knowledge, explanations of the past seem remark- able. Referring to Quercus heterophylla Michaux says: " Ever}^ botanist who has \"isited different regions of the earth must have remarked certain species of vegetables which are so little multiplied that they seem likely at no distant period to disappear from the earth. To this class belongs the Bartram oak. ' ' "When we remem- ber that this was said of a young tree, described as ' ' 30 feet high and 8 inches in diameter," growing in the midst of numerous pin oak trees of great age, that formed almost the chief oak character of that region, and from which this young tree must have had its origin, one can only surmise that for once INIichaux had lost his usual high judicial ability. The main point of this note is to illustrate by the Bartram oak the value, in settling important questions in long dispute, of the discovery that old wood may change its direction so as to give a specific chai'acter to the main branches or skeleton of the tree, and incidentally to show that we gain a great point in biology when we note how striking variations may occur by varying degi'ees of vital energy, and without calliiig in tlie aid of survival, hybridism or of any external agency. 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35 Observatioits on the Flowering of Lobelia cardinalis AND Lobelia syphilitica. In my garden during tlie past year, 1900, I had some fifty plants •each of Lobelia syphilitica and Lobelia cardinalis in rows side by side. They were so near each other that some of the flower stems of the latter fell over and seemed to be blooming among the plants of the former. It surprised me one day to note that while numer- ous winged insects visited the blue-flowei'ed species, none cared for the scarlet ones. This excited an interest that led to a continuous observation through the whole flowering period. At no time did I see an insect visitor on the cardinal flower, while every day the blue-flowered species had abimdant attention. On one occasion I found a humming-bird, Trochilus colubris, at work on the cardinal flower, and the zest with which numerous flowers were examined by the bird attested to the presence of nectar, a fact which my owTi test subsequently verified. The bird is not numerous on my ground, and with an abundance of flowers of various kinds over many acres of ground, it may be inferred that it was not a frequent visitor to the cardinal flower. I observed it only on this occasion. It whoUy neglected the blue-flowered species, that seemed so attractive to the insects. Toward the end of the season the foreman in charge, Mr. Hemming, captured specimens of all that were visitors to Lobelia syphilitica during one day. These were identified by Mr. William J. Fox as follows : Xylocopa virginica, Bombus penn- sylvanicus, Bombus fervidus, Bombus americanorum var. pallidus, Apis mellifera, and a sand wasp, Scolia dubia. It is worthy of note that the honey-bee did not visit the flowers till late in the season. About fifty yards away from these plants was a large bed of Sedum spectabile, which at the earlier stage of these observations were crowded by this well-known honey gatherer. It may be inferred that as long as they lasted they collected all needed from these flowers. Honey-bees at any rate are not numerous in this vicinity. At the end of the season no difference could be observed in the fertility of the two species. Every capside seemed abundantly seed- bearing. The presence or absence of insect visitors had no effect. Dissecting the flowers from time to time, and in various stages before and after authesis, some original and interesting phenomena 36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., were observed. At tlie period when the autliers havi readied tlieir fiill development a rest is taken, apparently till the next day. Then the style elongates until it seems to be held fast by the united anther cap. After a short rest it is again in motion, the anther-cells burst, and the pollen is ejected so forcibly through the crown as to some- times cover the scarlet petals with powder. In the case of the blue- flowered species, bees occasionally get a portion of the pollen shower. Aside from the interesting fact in regard to the forcible ejection of the pollen, and the free fertility under self-fertilization — for, not- withstanding the freedom of insect visitors. Lobelia syphilitica is absolutely self-fertilized — note may be taken of differing observa- tions. Of Lobelia fulgens, which is essentially identical with Lobelia cardinalis, Mr. Darwin says, in his " Cross and Self- fertilization in the Vegetable Kingdom " : " This plant is never visited in my gaixlen by bees, and is quite stei'ile ; but in a nursery garden at a few miles' distance I saw humble-bees visiting the flowers, and they produced some capsules." Mr. Darwin once stated that one might as well use organic dust as to endeavor to get seeds of Linum perenne by the aid of its own pollen. I found Linum perenne of our Rocky Mountains abundantly fertile with own-pollen, and said so in one of my papers. Mr. Darwin took this to be an attempt to discredit his observation, and naturally felt aggrieved. ]My thought is rather that plants and insects behave differently under different conditions, and that failure or facture in perfecting seeds should often be referred to phases of nutrition aside from the action of insects. The facts here recorded afford a valuable lesson on this matter. Lobelia syphilitica, Avith its shorter and more open corolla, could be moi'e easily rifled of its nectar, and as the flowers were in great abundance, and fresh flowers opened daily, the insects worked in the easiest lines. In the case of the Sedum it will also be noted that the bees continued their easier work on this, before seeking the more difficult Lobelia. The failure of Mr. Darwin's Lobelia to produce, while mine were fertile, is obviously due to nutritive conditions. He was mistaken in referring the failure to the absence of insects, but no one would for a moment discredit his observation. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37 A NEW BAT OF THE GENUS GLOSSOPHAGA. BY JAMES A. G. REHN. Along with several other bats recently submitted to me for exam- ination by Dr. J. Percy Moore, of the University of Pennsylvania, were three specimens of the genus Glossophaga. On comparison with a "series of specimens from northern South America, loaned from the collection of the United States National Museum through the kindness of Mr. Gerrit S. Miller, Jr., of that institution, it was found that they represent a northern form of G. soridna Pallas,^ and do not appear to closely resemble any of the other species of the genus. From longirostris and elongata Miller it is well separated ; from the former it is immediately differentiated by the broader posterior portion of the bony palate, from the latter by the much shorter skull. On examination of the names usually placed as synonyms of G. soridna I find that none are available for this form. Glossophaga soricina antillarum n. subsp. Type.— 'No. 6,619 Collection Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Port Antonio, Jamaica, December 30, 1890. Female. Collected and presented by Dr. J. Percy Moore. Distribution. — Jamaica and Bahamas. The collection of the Academy contains a skull fi'om the latter locality. General characters. — Larger than typical G. soridna, the skull much more elongate, the rostrum narrower, and second upper molar larger. Size. — Large, the forearm considerably greater than in true soricina. The ear and foot show an increase in size, while the hmd tibia is practically the same length. 1 As Pallas gave no locality for his Vespertilio soricinus (Misc. Zool., p. 48), the typical form must be restricted by other means. In his figure (tab. V) the species is represented with a comparatively short rostrum, and as this is characteristic of the form from northern South America (and possibly others from that continent). I have restricted the name soricina to the form occurring in that region. 38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb. Color. — As far as cau be judged from the alcholic Jamaicau specimens, the form appears to have a more reddish appearance, the fur being waluut-brown, while the available alcoholic specimens and one skin of G. soricina are between a clove-brown and sepia. This appears to apply also to the membranes. Skull. — Large, comparatively slender, the rostrum narrower than in 0. soricina. Posterior bony extension of the palate rather broad. Teeth. — Essentially as in G. soricina, but the second upper molar has the internal lobe longer, thas making the tooth heavier and more quadrate. Remarks. — This northern form of G. soricina is very distinctly differentiated from typical soricina as restricted. The greater general size and more elongate skull, with the slender rostrum, immediately separate it. With G. longirostris and elongata, as shown above, no comparison is necessary. Specimens examined. — Three alcoholic specimens from Port Antonio, Jamaica (type and cotypes). Skull from Bahamas. Comparative measurements. 6. s. antiUarum. O. soricina Length of forearm Length of hind tibia Length of foot Length of ear Extent of interfemoral membrane Length of skull , Length of rostrum from interorbital constric tion Width of brain case "Width of rostrum at canines 13.5 9.5 13.5 13.5 22.5 11 11.2 9.2 4 14 9 12.5 15 20 10 84.7 13.2 9 13 14 21 . 9.5 8.5 4 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39 A NEW GENUS AND THREE NEW SPECIES OF CHILOPODS. BY RALPH V. CHAMBERLIN. Heretofore no ScoIopendricUe of the sub -family Cryptopiuse have been reported from the Pacific States, and in consequence the author's present announcement of the finding of two new species belonging to this group in California will be of interest to myriapo- dists. Of these two species one belongs to the genus Theatops, making the third known from the United States, while the other represents a new genus, in some respects intermediate between Cryptops and Theatops. But two mature specimens of the latter species being in the collection, no detailed examination of the mouth parts has been possible, and accordingly a complete descrip- tion of the genus is not now presented. Its general relationships will be understood from the diagnosis assigned in the analysis. The new Lithobius here described belongs to that group in which the coxal pores are arranged in several series {Bothopolys) . Its nearest relative, as seen from the key to the American species, is Lithobius xanti (Wood), which is found in California and Oregon, itself coming from the AVahsatch Mountains, Utah. Analysis of the Genera of Cryptopinoe, tti. — Last dorsal plate not enlarged ; anal legs but little crassate. 61. — Ocelli present, single, . . . Eremops Bollman. 1. 63. — Ocelli absent or indistinct. Ci. — First and second tarsal joints of anal legs toothed below; claw of anal legs unarmed; last pleurse free, without processes ; anal and genital segment very short, without a dorsal scutum, Cryptops Leach. 2. c.^. — First and second tarsal joints of anal legs unarmed below ; claw of anal legs armed with two spines ; last pleurse not exposed laterally, with strong pro- cesses posteriorly ; anal and genital segment not shortened, dorsal scutum present, Anethops gen. nov. 3. a^. — Last dorsal plate twice as long as the preceding; anal legs strongly crassate, Theatops Newport. 4. 40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., Anethops oocidentalis gen. et spec, no v. Brown or fulvous brown, the feet paler; head punctate with moderately small punctae, suboval, the posterior margin rounded; basal j)late exposed ; doi'sal scuta lightly punctate, impressed with two deep marginal sulci, and upon the middle portion with six sulci, the two outermost and the two innermost indistinct, the inter- mediate ones deep; ventral scuta densely minutely punctate, each plate, excepting the three anterior and the three posterior, with a cruciform impression, the longitudinal sulcus wide and much deeper. Antenn£e rather long, swollen at base, attenuated distally ; articles 17, mostly rather short ; densely clothed with short stiff bristles which become very short on the distal joint*. Prosternal margin without teeth or spines, glabrous; coxal tooth small, black, acute. Legs sparsely aculeate distally ; the first tarsal joint, excepting in the last pair, armed beneath with one spine and above with two, the second tarsal joint armed beneath with a spine, claws of all legs armed at base with two spines, tibise not armed. Anal legs scarcely swollen, not shortened, the third and the fourth joints not armed with teeth or spines. Last ventral plate wide, covering the pleurae laterally, scarcely converging caudad, the posterior border widely sinuate; last pleurae narrow, wuth conspicuous processes posteriorly, each ending in a stout, acute black point. Length 33.5 mm., width 3 mm. ; length of antennae not quite 7 mm. Habitat. — San Gabriel Canyon, Los Angeles county, Cal. The type specimens were collected May 25, 1901, by Mr. Charles E. Hutchinson. Etymology. — Genus: Greek «, privative, fyfloo, character, and &(}', eye. Key to American Species of Theatops. Oj. — Femora of anal legs unarmed; none of the tibial or tarsal joints armed above ; all tarsal joints armed beneath except the last two ; processes of last pleurae unarmed with spines, posticus (Bay). 1. ttj. — Femora of anal legs armed with one or two spines at the supe- rior interior angle ; tibiae, except the last three, armed above ; tarsal joints, except in last two pairs, armed above and be- neath (first tarsal joint of first legs not armed beneath) ; processes of last i)leurte unarmed with spines, spmicaudns (Wood). 2, 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41 ttj. — Femora and tibise of anal legs armed with a single spine at the inferior angle; tibise, except of anal legs, unarmed; first tarsal joint, except in last pairs, armed above and below with one spine, second joint armed beneath; processes of last pleurae with a stout spine, , . californieiisis, sp. uov. 8. 1. Theatops posticus (Say). Cryptops postica Say (1831). TheatojJS postical^ew\)ort (1844). Opisthemega postica Wood (1862). Opisthemega crassipes Meinert (1886). Theatops crassipes Bellman (1888). Habitat. — Eastern United States, south of Virginia, Indiana and Illinois. 2. Theatops spinioaudus (Wood). Opisthemega spinicauda Wood (1863). Theatops spinicaudus Bollman (1888). Habitat. — Acapulco, Mex., and southwestern United States, extending northeast through Tennessee to Pennsylvania. 3. Theatops californiensis spec. nov. Brown, feet and autennse yellowish ; head sparsely punctate, sub- oval, posteriorly truncate ; dorsal scuta sublightly, sparsely punc- tate, deeply bisulcate, first plate triangularly impressed anteriorly; ventral plates sparsely lightly punctate. Articles of the antennae 17, terminal articles densely shortly hirsute, median and basal joints sparsely shortly hirsute. Prosternal teeth 3-3, large, short ; coxal tooth large, stout, obtuse. None of the tibise armed either beneath or above; first joint of tarsus, except in ultimate and penult pairs, armed below and above with one spine, the second tarsal joint armed beneath. Anal legs much crassate, contiguous, moderately short, claw long, strong, superior internal margin carinate; femur armed on the inferior interior margin with a single, rather stout tooth; tibia armed similarly to femur. Last ventral plate long, wide, the sides scarcely sinuate, strongly converging posteriorly, the posterior angles rounded, posterior border gently sinuate ; last pleurre wide, subsmooth, posteriorly Avidely sinuate, processes armed ^\ith a stout spine or tooth. Length 41-46 mm. ; width 4 mm. ; length of anal legs 7-8 mm. Habitat. — Near Quincy, Cal. Found at a mining claim, altitude 3,500 feet, by ^Iv. Edward Garner. 42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb , Key to American Species of Lithohius, having the Coxal Pores in several -series {Bothi'opohjs) . a,. — Posterior angles of none of the dorsal plates produced. b^. — Prosterual teeth 9-9; spines of first legs 2, 3, 1, of anal 1, 3, 2, 1 ; length 25-29 mm. bipunctatus (Wood). 1. bi. — Prosternal teeth 6-6; spines of first legs 2, 3, 2, of anal 1, 4, 3, 1-1, 4, 3, 2; length 18 mm., monticola Stuxberg. 2. a-i. — Posterior angles of the 9th, 11th and 13th dorsal plates produced. 6i.— Spines of first legs 2, 2, 1-2, 3, 1, of penult 1, 3, 3, 2; middle lobe of claw of genital forceps much longest, pointed ; inner lobe much reduced ; basal spines 3-3 ; antennae long, xanti(\Vood).'o. fej.— Spines of the first legs 2, 3, 2, of the penult 1, 3, 3, 1 ; middle lobe of claw of genital forceps not much longest, short and blunt, inner lobe subequal to outer, not reduced ; basal spines 2-2, anteunse short, permundus sp. nov. 4. ttj. —Posterior angles of 6th, 7th, 9th, 11th and 13th dorsal plates produced ; prosternal teeth 7-7 to 9-9 ; spines of first legs 2, 3, 1-2, 3, 2, of anal 1, 3, 2, 1-1, 3, 3, 2, multidentatus Newport. 5. 1. Lithobius bipunctatus (Wood). Bothropoli/s bipunctatus Wood (1863). Lithobius bipunctatus Stuxberg (1877). Habitat. — '' "West of Rocky Moimtains" (AVood) ; Salt Lake, Utah, and Uintah counties, Utah (author). 2. Lithobius montioola Stuxberg. Lithobius monticola Stuxberg (1875). Habitat. — Sierra Nevada Mountains (seq. Stuxberg). 3. Lithobius xanti (Wood). Bothropoli/s xanti Wood (1863). Lithobius rur/osus Meincrt. Lithobius xanti Stuxberg (1877). Habitat. — California and Oregon (Wood, Bollman, author). 4. Lithobius permundus spec. nov. Lithobius xanti Cliamberlin, Proc. U. S. N. Museum, Vol. XXIV, p. 24 (1901). Body robust, polished ; head but little wider than long, sparsely punctate, especially anteriorly, sparsely pilose ; dorsal scuta nearly glabrous except at margins, weakly furrowed, the furrows in part 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43 more or less converging anteriorly or parallel, not raised into rngse; ferruginous, the head and the last dorsal and ventral plates usually darker, coloration of head deeper immediately caudad to the frontal suture. Antennre rather short, pilose; articles 20-23, large, de- creasing in size from first to last. Ocelli on each side in an oblong to narrowly oval patch, 16-25 in number, arranged in 3-5 longi- tudinal series. Prosternal teeth 7-7 to 9-9, black, uniform. Spines of first legs 2, 3, 2, of penult 1, 3, 3, 1 with 2 claws, of anal 1, 3, 2, 1 with the claw single; coxse of the last two pairs of legs armed beneath and also laterally with a stout spine. Coxal pores usually of several sizes, numerous (often 25 and over), arranged in 2-4 series. Claw of genital forceps of female tripartite, the middle lobe a little longest, the lateral subequal, all short and blunt ; basal spines 2-2, moderately stout, the outer pair longer and stouter than the inner. Length 19-27 mm. ; width 2-3 mm; length of anal legs 8-11 mm. ; length of antenna; 8-11.5 mm. Juvenis. — Specimens 13-15 mm. long measure 1.5 mm. in width; length of anal legs 4.5 mm. ; length of antennae 5 mm. Color brown. Ocelli 10-15 in 2—3 series. Prosternal teeth 5-5 to 7-7. Spines of the first and penult pairs of legs normal , those of the anal pair normal or'l, 3, 2, 0. Coxal pores 6-12 in 2-3 series. Habitat. — Along the middle and lower courses of canyon streams throughout the greater extent of the Wahsatch Mountains, Utah. Etymology. — l^o^im. pervmndus, very elegant. 5. Lithobius multidentatus Newport. LitJioUus multidentatus Newport (1845); id. Gervais (1847). Bothropolys nohilis Wood (1863). Bothropolys multidentatus Wood (1865). Lithobius multidentatus Stuxberg (1877). Habitat. — Eastern United States, south from Missouri, Illinois Michigan and Pennsylvania {seq. Wood, Bollman et al.). 44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb. CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE HYMENOPTERA OF BRAZIL, NO. S.-EUMENID^, continued (GENUS ODYNERUS). BY AVILLIAM J. FOX. As in most of the preceding papers of this series the work is based upon material collected by Mr. Herbert H. Smith, and which lias now become the property of the Carnegie Museum, Pitts- burgh, Pa. The types of all the new species described in these papers^ will thei'efore be under the care of that Museum, Odynerus (Stenancistrocerus) apicipennis u. sp. ?. — Black, clothed with a grayish pile, especially on abdomen; anterior orbits below emargination, dot on tegulse posteriorly, inter- rupted line on postscutellum anteriorly, line at apex and at sides of first dorsal segment, and sometimes an obscure line at apex of second, yelloAV ; fore tibise internally yellow, the tips of all femora with a yellowish or reddish spot ; antennse reddish beneath toward apex ; w'ings black basally, especially in costal region, clear apically; head with a fovea behind ocelli, and on each side of fovea a small patch of stiff hairs ; front deeply punctured ; clypeus broader than long, subpyriform, shallowly punctured, emarginate so as to present two acute, separated, teeth ; scape fidly as long as foUoAving four joints united; space between hind ocelli, if anything, slightly less than that between them and eyes ; pronotum margined, obtuse laterally ; dorsulum with strong, rather close punctures, the scutellum less closely punctured, flat, subquadrate; postscutellum subtriaugular, entire ; middle segment Avith strong, separated pimc - tures, not so coarse as on dorsulvun and becoming sparse apically and on sides, broadly depressed down middle, not ridged, presenting two convex surfaces ; carina of first segment not very strong, the longitudinal furrow of upper surface rather feeble, the surface behind carina strongly punctured, anterior to it sparsely so ; dorsals 2-5 strongly punctured, the punctures becoming closer and coarser from apex of segment 2, the last dorsal witli shallow punctures ; ^ Except those described in Paper No. 6, which are in the Museu Paulista of Sao Paulo, Brazil. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45 ventral segments Avith separated punctures ; nervui-es black, stigma ferruginous. Length 11 mm. d^. — Sculpture coarser, especially at apex of second dorsal seg- ment ; in addition to the yellow markings of female the male has two yellow spots on clypeus apically, and there is a greater amount of red and yellow on legs ; clypeal teeth larger, the emargination triangular ; space between hind ocelli, if anything, slightly greater than that between them and eyes; anteunse hooked at end, the last joint acuminate, slightly curved, barely as long as joint 11 ; postscutellum crenulated; second, or second and third segments obscurely margined with yellow at apex, and the apex of middle segment marked with that color ; in one example there are three lineated macula on pronotum, which may indicate that this part is sometimes margined with yellow posteriorly. Length 9-10 mm. Chapada (March, December); Corumbd (April). Two ?, three d specimens. Odynerus (Stenancistrocerus) convolutus n. sp. ?. — Black, with a thin grayish pile; scape, flagellum beneath, mandibles, clypeus, eye-emarginations and the orbits below them, spot between antennae, larger one at summit of cheeks, pronotum, tegulse, mesopleurse above, and a large spot on the postero-lateral angles of middle segment, rufous ; hind margin of pronotum, base and apex of tegulse, a dot beneath the latter, dot near each antero- lateral angle of scutellum, postscutellum entirely, and the apex of first and second abdominal segments rather broadly pale yelloA\- ; forelegs reddish-brown from just beyond base of femora ; other legs black, with a spot near apex of medial femora, and a stripe on the four hind tibiae, pale yellow ; wings dark subhyaline, fuscous along costal margin and in marginal cell ; nervures and stigma black. Head with deep, separated pimctures, especially above ; a rounded fovea behind ocelli ; hind ocelli bordered internally by a smooth tubercle, the space between them perhaps a little less than that separating them from the eyes ; clypeus convex, with shallow punc- tures, pyriform, triangularly emarginate at apex ; pronotum with deep, sepai-ated punctures, scarcely margined, but dentate laterally; dorsulum and scutellum with larger i)unctures, those on meso- pleurse smaller ; postscutellum entire, somewhat angular posteriorly ; middle segment deeply punctured, smooth at base of sides, broadly 46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., depressed medially, the depression extending from base to apex, not margined, no horizontal surface medially, the postero-lateral region convex ; first dorsal segment deeply punctured on its hori- zontal siurface, which is rather long, the carina, when viewed from the front, highly arched ; second dorsal less strongly and closely punctured, shallowly so beneath, the apical margin slightly reflexed, the ventral surface is slightly swollen transversely, but not much, near base ; the third and fourth segments are punctured on apical half only, and much more finely ; apical segment smooth. Length 8-9 mm. c?. — Differs chiefly in the pale yellow clypeus, mandibles, spot between antennae and eye-emargination ; the reddish base of flagel- lum and much more swollen base of second ventral segment ; hind tibiae suddenly enlarged wuthin at apex; first hind tarsal joint having a twisted and sinuous shape ; antennae hooked, the terminal joint curved, about as long as the eleventh joint, which in turn is about one-fifth longer than the tenth ; clypeus narrower ; four hind legs partly brownish. Length 8-9 mm. Corumba (April). Two ?, seven d" specimens. Apparently related to 0. Fariasi and 0. incommodus. Odynerus (Stenanoistrocerus) suffusus n. sp. cf. — Black; clypeus, spot on mandibles, scape in front, line between antennae, and eye-emargination pale yellow ; spot on cheeks above, hind margin of pronotum, dot behind tegulae, and apical margin of segments 1-6, bright yellow; that on segments 2-6 quite broad, in fact segments 3-6 appear entirely yellow above ; apical segment brownish; pronotum anteriorly, spot beneath wing, post- scutellum and on middle segment postero-laterally, rufous and yellow ; tegulae brown ; sides of abdominal segments 1 and 2 more or less suffused with rufous ; legs reddish, anterior coxae and most of hind femora black, the remaining coxae yellow anteriorly, as well as a stripe on the fore and medial femora and a spot on hind pair at apex ; flagellum reddish beneath ; head with strong deep punc- tures ; front presenting two convex surfaces ; each hind ocelli mar- gined internally by a tubercle ; no fovea behind them ; clypeus lozenge-shaped, longer tlian broad, roundly emarginate; antennae hooked, the terminal joint flattened and strongly curved, barely as long as the eleventh joint, which in turn is fully one-third longer than the tenth joint; thorax deeply punctured, most closely so on 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47 pronotum, sparsely so on mesopleurse ; pronotum subdeutate ; post- scutellum slightly crenulated ; middle segment broadly depressed or subconcave, not margined, with but a slight trace of a horizontal surface medially, postero-lateral region convex, especially above; hind tibiae and tarsi as in c? of convolutus ; abdomen much as in convolutus^, but the second segment moi-e reflexed at apex, the ven- tral swelling less strong and the punctuation stronger ; wings as in that species. Length 8-9 mm. Corumba and Pedra Branca (April). Eight specimens. Odynerus (Stenancistrocerus) areatus n. sp. cf. — Black; clypeus at base and two parallel lines apically, scape beneath, spot at base of antennse, in eye-emargination, and at top of cheeks, line on mandibles and on pronotum posteriorly, some- times a spot on mesopleurse above, and a line at apical margin of all segments, including last, yellow ; flagellum beneath fulvous ; tegulse variable, black or yellow testaceous; legs black-brown, knees and tarsi lighter, anterior tibise yellowish in front ; head very deeply punctured, especially the front; hind ocelli not margined internally by a tubercle, the space between them about equal to that which separates them from the eyes; clypeus with shallow punctures, subpyriform, almost as broad as long, sharply and tri- angularly emarginate, the teeth acute and each bearing a tolerably distinct carina extending back toward middle of clypeus ; antennaj hooked, the last joint curved, rather slender, about as long as joint 11, which in turn is about one-fifth longer than 10; thorax deeply punctured ; pronotum dentate laterally ; scutellum impressed ; post- scutellum entire, triangular ; middle segment broadly concave, no horizontal surface medially, the postero-lateral angles prominent, above and on sides rugosely punctured, in the concavity deeply punctured ; hind tibise and tarsi not modified ; fii'st segment strongly punctured, and behind the carina, laterally, there is a large, smooth, depressed area ; second segment not so strongly or as closely pimctured above, not reflexed, the ventral surface with shallow punctures, prominent in a transverse way, near base ; remaining segments strongly punctured apically, finely so toward base ; wings dark subhyaline, more fuscous along anterior margin ; nervures and stigma dark brown. Length 9 mm. Chapada (March, December). Two specimens. 48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., Odynerus abdominalis n. sp. ?. — Black; a narrow, medially interrupted line at base of clypeus, spot at base of antenna and another at summit of cheeks, line on scape, anterior and posterior margins of pronotum narrowly, dot behind tegulse, line on postscutellum, line on middle segment postero-laterally (sometimes absent), and apex of all abdominal segments, yellow; legs dark brown, anterior tibiae yellow in front; head deeply punctured; a distinct medial fovea behind ocelli; clypeus longitudinally rugoso- punctate, a little longer than broad, subi)yriform, subtruncate, a lateral carina terminates in a minute tooth ; flagellum short ; thorax deeply punctured, mesopleurjB less strongly; scutellum not impressed; postscutellum entire; middle segment broadly concave, coarsely punctured above, finely rugose in the concavity, postero-lateral angles prominent, a very slight horizontal surface medially; first segment behind the fine sharp carina broader than long, with tolerably strong punctures becoming sparse anteriorly ; second segment strongly punctured apically, the punctures becoming sparser and feebler toAvard base, between mid- dle and apex there is a distinct transverse depression and the apical margin is distinctly produced medially into a tooth ; ventral surface depressed medially, transversely swollen near base, the punctures similar to those of the dorsal moiety laterally; wing subfuscous, paler apically, darkest along anterior margin ; nervures black, stigma dark brown. Length 9-10 mm. Chapada (INIarch, December). Three specimens. Odynerus (Stenancistrocerus) dentiformis n. sp. ?. — Black, with silky pile, especially on the abdomen; arcuate line on base of clypeus, spot at base of antennse, in the eye-emar- gination, base of mandibles, and at summit of cheeks, scape ante- riorly, anterior and posterior margins of pronotum, postscutellum except apex, spot beneath tegulse and a small one behind them, two semicircular spots on posterior surface of middle segment the two so placed as to almost form a circle, a spot before apex of middle and anterior femora, a line on all tibise, apical margin of abdominal segments 1-5, rather broadly, and last dorsal segment entirely, bright yellow ; tegula; reddish-brown, margined with yellow ; flagel- lum not pale beneath ; legs Apical margin of second dorsal segment sharply angulatc or dentate medially, 7 T), Only two abdominal fascia; pronotuni rufuus, '" co)ivolutus 9 &. All the segments fasciatc; pronotuni not rufous, ... (> 6. First segment behind carina longer than broad, no transver>o smooth area behind carin;', suffusus d'. 68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., First segment behind carina broader than long, a broad trans- verse smooth area behind carina ; clypeus sharply emarginate, areatics cf- 7. Abdomen with deep punctures; tegulse reddish; a yellow spot under wing, the latter yellowish along costa, dentiformis ? d"'. Abdomen with fine, much shallower punctures; tegulse black; no spot under wing, the latter dark, . . abdominalis ?. 8. Middle segment without a horizontal surface, .... 9 Middle segment with a more or less developed horizontal surface, 10 9. Head and pronotum orange ; all abdominal segments fasciate, fulvimaciil'us ? . Head and pronotum red; only two abdominal fascia, rnfiviacuhts ? d^. 10. Vertex not elevated, as usual, 11 Vertex strongly elevated, strongly tuberculate near the ocelli ; first abdominal segment with an additional carina, . . 21 11. Horizontal surface of middle segment very short, almost want- ing medially; form graceful, Polybia-Vike, .... 12 Horizontal surface well develoj^ed, 13 12. Segments 1 and 2 fasciate; second ventral segment trans- versely prominent before base, atrij^es ? S . All the segments fasciate ; second ventral segment not promi- nent basally, rather evenly convex, . . covjundus $ cJ'. 13. Second segment distinctly reflexed at apex, . reflexus ? cf'. Second segment not or but slightly reflexed, . . . . 14 14. Wings yellowish, paler apically; segments broadly fasciate, Herhertii ? c?. Wings subhyaline, 15 lo. First abdominal segment without a transverse, depressed area behind the carina on each side, 16 First abdominal segment with a transverse, depressed area behind the carina on each side, 17 1 6. Clypeus pyriform, bicarinate in ? , these carinse ending in two sharp teeth (not carinate in cf, shorter and bidentate); abdomen shining, with strong separated pimctures; scutel- lum not yellow, male coxre dentate above basally, coxalis 9 d. Clypeus cordate, not carinate, with a not deep triangular emar- ginatiou; abdomen subopaque, finely and closely punctui-ed; scutellum with yellow line, cordatus ?. 17. Females, 1 -yjj and ^j, and open in the usual way on the pharyngeal pad. As a re- sult of great development of muscular tissue all of the dissepi- ments between the last septal gland and the tesles somite — that is ^^' ^f^' ^ ^^^ ~^i — ^^'^ much thickened. The spermathecfe (fig. 1) occupy somite YI, and open to the exterior in the furrow y^ on a level nearly midway between the dorsal and ventral setre- buudles. The duct is a simple thick-walled tube having a length about equal to the flask- shaped ampulla, into the bulbous base of which it opens on the latero-dorsal aspect, from which a striking asymetry of the en- tire organ results. Uni- cellular glands, Avhich are such a conspicuous feature of the sper- mathecal duct of E. albidus, are altogether absent from the exam- ples here described. The G ampulla is regularly tlask-sh!4)0(l, with 82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., a nearly spherical base aud a cylindrical neck slightly dilated at its free dorsal extremity. The two. parts are of about equal length, the base being about three times, and the neck one and one-half times the diameter of the duct. The ampulla stands vertically by the side of the oesophagus, above which the neck rises. The bul- bous base is in contact with the side of the oesophagus and the con- tiguous tissues of the two are continuous, but whether an actual communication between the cavities of the two organs exists could not be demonstrated beyond question. A few spermatozoa are present in the cavities of both ampulla and duct of the specimen sectioned. A lateral view of the right spermatheca is shown in fig. 1, which sufficiently exhibits the general cellular constitution of its walls, and its topographical relation to the oesophagus, which is shown in outline. Although its distortion prevents an accurate measurement, the sperm funnel appears to be only two and one-half times as long as wide; highly glandular. The vas deferens is coiled and reaches to the posterior end of XV before returning to the male pore ; it has a total estimated length of from six to eight times the fimnel. Its two limbs have an equal diameter, which is about one-tenth to one- twelfth of the body at the same point. The brain is anteriorly slightly concave, posteriorly nearly straight, with a slight median concavity and feebly prominent postero-lateral lobes." Some of the characters used to distinguish E. marinus from the widely distributed E. albidus Henle, 1837 (= Halodrillus littoralis Verrill, 1874), are doubtless due to the immaturity of the speci- mens, but this cannot be true of the absence of the pepto-nephridia, the form of the spermatheca, and the peculiarities of the setae. I have repeatedly studied E. albidus at Wood's Hole (where it abounds) and elsewhere, and have found no connecting variations. Prof. Verrill writes that the species was common in the upper littoral zone, below the tide mark of ordinary tides, at Coney Island, but was not noticed elsewhere. The collection contains two specimens labeled " No. 940, High-water mark, Bermuda, 1898." Pontodrilus arenae Mich. This species ajjjjcars to be of common and very general occur- rence at and below high-tide mark. In almost alKcases the intes- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83 tine is filled with coarse coral and shell sand, the grains of which are frequently upward of .5 mm. in diameter. The ornamentation on the sette is extremely faint. No. 939, 1898; No. 965, Hungry Bay, April 13, 1901; No. 966, Elbow Bay, March, 1901. Pheretima scliinardae (Horst) Mich. Prof. Verrill remarks upon the great activity (so characteristic of the genus) of this and the next species. When captured they writhe like active lizards, as a result of which most of the speci- mens are broken in two. They occurred imder stones only in the neighborhood of a house said to be 250 years old. The intestines were filled with a very fine reddish eaith. P. schviardce has not previously been i-eported from the Bermudas, and in the West Indian region is known only from the Barbadoes. No. 964, Walsiugham, May 5, 1901; No. 962, 1901. Pheretima rodericensis (Grube) Mich. This widely distributed species, described by Beddard (under the name of Perichceta dycri) from Jamaica, Trinidad, etc., is repre- sented in the collection by a single example from the Bermudas, to which islands it is new. A peculiarity of the gizzard of this species appears to have escaped notice. The organ in question occupies somite X and a small part of XI. From near its pos- terior end on each side a stout tapering band or column of muscle arises and passes obliquely caudad to the body wall at the setae line of somite XI. These form powerful retractors and dilators of the gizzard, and may be the remains of the septum ^~, as Beddard has suggested in the case of a somewhat similar structure described by him in P. taprobmice, and especially P. bermudensis. A delicate membrane runs from the muscles mesiad and dor- sad to the dorsal blood vessel and appears to be continuous with the peritoneal sheaths of both of these organs. The diverticula of the sper- matheca show considerable variation. The foldetl portion becomes successively longer from before backward and at the same 84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., time chauges from a spirally coiled condition to a tortuous folding in one plane. An abnormality of the second spermatheca of the left side is shown in fig. 2, as viewed from behind. The ampulla is divided into two portions, each of which has the form, but little more than one-half of the diameter of the normal. Each has a short duct which unites with its fellow into a common one much enlarged at the point of union. One perfectly normal divei'ticiilum springs as usual from the cephalic face of the ampullar duct, but it is diverted to a mesial instead of the usual lateral position. A second much smaller diverticulum arises from the caudal face of the common duct and for about one-third of its blind end is reflected on itself. No. 961, 1901. Eudrilus euginae (Kinberg) Mich. Three large examples. Xo. 936, 1898. Onychochaeta windlei Bedd. One small specimen. No. 962, 1901. Eisenia foetida (Sav.) Mich. One specimen of this now cosmopolitan species. No. 938, 1898. Helodrilus (AUolobophora) chloroticus (Sav.) Mich. Common. No. 937, 1898; No. 962, 1901; No. 965, Hungry Bay, April 13, 1901, just below high tide. This last record of the label, if correct, is of intei-est as indicating the occurrence of this species on the littoral zone. Many of the posterior setae of these specimens are missing, the bundles being reduced in such cases to single seta. Helodrilus sp. A very small Helodrilus, No. 963, 1901, coidd not be deter- mined at all; a larger example. No. 961, 1901, while exhibiting characters of an undescribed species, is too immature for satisfac- tory description. 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85 STRUCTURE AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE THYROID GLAND IN PETROMYZON. by albert m. reese. Introduction. The material with which the following work was doue was of two, or possibly three, species. The first species was Petromyzon jjlaneri, the small lamprey that, in the adult condition, reaches a length of about six inches only. This first lot of material was collected by Dr. R. G. Harrison at Naples. It included stages from the re- cently fertilized egg to the swimming larva, in which the yolk was no longer externally visible and in which the mouth was separated from the pharynx only by a thin partition of cells. This oldest stage was killed fourteen days after fertilization. The second lot of material was obtained at Ithaca, N. Y. , and probably mcludes larvse of both P. dorsatus, Wilder (lake lamprey) and P. branchialis (brook lamprey), as both species are known to spawn in the same nest, and it is impossible to tell to which species the larvse belong. Part of this lot of material was sent me through the courtesy of Prof. S. H. Gage, of Cornell ; the rest I myself obtained from one of the ' ' nests " in a stream at Ithaca, New York. I wish to express here my gratitude to my friend. Dr. Ross G. Harrison, for placing at my disposal the material from which the younger stages of development were made out; to Prof. Simon H. Gage for the really considerable amount of trouble he took in aiding one Avho was, at the time, wholly unknown to him, to obtain the older stages for this work ; and to Prof. Brooks for much valuable aid and many suggestions during the progress of the work. I obtained the best results by killing in corrosive acetic (95 cc. saturated solution of HgCl^ and 5 cc. glacial acetic acid), harden- ing in the usual alcohols and staining in toto with borax carmine, and on the slide with Lyon's Blue. The greatest technical diffi- culty experienced was in obtaining good i)reparations of the long 86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., gland cells. Embryos were fixed iu a number of ways, but in no single case was a good preparation of the gland cells obtained. Maceration was tried also, but with no success. Some difficulty was experienced also in sectioning the earlier stages, on account of the mass of yolk, but with later stages there was no trouble of this kind. The figures referred to are on Plates IV-VII. All the sections were drawn with a camera, though in most cases the details had to be filled in from a series of sections. Development of the Thyroid Gland in Petromyzon. (llth day.) — The thyroid begins, in Petromyzon, as a simple pit or groove, pushed out from the ventral Avail of that part of the digestive cavity which may be called the pharynx, though at this time there are no gill openings connecting this cavity with the exterior. This groove, or beginning thyroid, was first found, in P. planeri, in an embryo eleven days old — that is to say, eleven days after fertilization. The external appearance of this embryo is seen in fig. la. At this stage there is no external indication of gill-slits, the mouth is deeply pitted in, though not yet broken through, and the yolk still forms a large, round mass at the posterior end of the embrj^o. As is seen by the figure, the embryo is distinctly retort -shaped, the yolk -mass forming the body of the retort, while the neck of the retort is represented by the head and neck regions of the embryo. The stomodseum is seen as a pit in the head region, and, at a slightly older stage, the first external indication of gill-clefts is seen as a series of shallow transverse grooves in the narrowest part of the neck of the flask. The thyroid groove, at its anterior end, is broad and deep, so that, with its thick walls, it is half as large, in cross section, as the part of the pharynx from which it is derived. lis Jateral walls, throughout its length, are very thick, and are composed of a single row of greatly elongated cells, each cell with a large nucleus near its centre. The ventral Avail is usually much thinner and is composed of shorter, even cubical, cells. As the groove is followed posteriorly, it is found to become gradu- ally narrower and also somewhat more shallow until it finally dis- appears. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 87 Fig. le, though representing a slightly older stage, may be taken to represent a transvei'se section through the middle of the gland very shortly after its first appearance as an evagination from the floor of the pharynx (phar.). The thick lateral walls and much thinner floor of the thyroid are shown in this section. Anterior to the point represented in this figure, the th>Toid groove is somewhat wider, while posterior to this point it is slightly narrower and gradu- ally becomes more and more shallow imtil it finally disappears. The thyroid at this stage, then, is a groove, relatively larger, perhaps, than at any other time, and opening along its entire length into the pharynx. (V2ih day). — On the twelfth day the thyroid begins to be shut off from the pharynx by the growth of two horizontal partitions, one roofing over the anterior end, the other roofing over the poste- rior end, of the thyroid groove. These partitions or septa are shown, at a slightly later stage, in fig. 3, which is a sagittal section through the anterior end of a thirteen-day embryo, cutting the thyroid almost medially and pass- ing slightly to the side of the medial line of the mouth invagina- tion. The anterior septum (a. h. I. ) is seen to be further advanced than the posterior one, which is ju^st beginning (p.h.l). In this figure the cells of the thyroid evagination are stippled to distinguish them from the remaining cells of the pharyngeal wall. That the section represented in fig. 3 did not cut the thyroid in an exact median plane is shown by the much elongated cells which form the floor of the groove. The section was probably somewhat oblique. The body wall of the embryo is shown in outline (b.w.), and tlie first indication of gill clefts is seen as two or three evaginations of the pharynx, dorsal and anterior to the thyroid (v.c). A transvei-se section of the twelve-day embryo, through the anterior end of the thyroid (through the line ab in fig. 3), shows that it is now a closed cavity (fig. lb) with thick walls, lying just beneath the pharynx and between two large blood ves- sels. Throughout the mesoblast that surrounds the thyroid are scattered numerous yolk granules, the mesoblast cells themselves being rounded and very different in shape fx'om what they will be in later stages. The cells in the floor of the phaiynx are not so sharply differentiated from those in the roof of the thyroid as is indicated in this figure. The cells of the body wall are very simi- 88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., lar in i^ize and shape to those lining this part of the pharjTix. Fig. Ic is a section cut posterior to fig. 16 (through the line a'h' in fig. 3) and passes through the part of the thyroid which is still open to the pharynx. In fig. \b only the cells of the thyroid are dotted, while in fig. Ic the cells of both thyroid and pharynx are dotted. The only change since the eleven-day stage is the begin- ning of the horizontal septa, the anterior end of the thyroid being converted into a closed tube by the backward growth of the anterior septum. The septa seem to be formed by a rapid growth at the points where the most anterior and the most posterior epithelial cells of the thyroid merge into those of the pharynx, causing these two pro- jections to be pushed out, the upper layer of each septum apparently being derived from the pharyngeal epithelium, the lower fi'om what may be called the epithelium of the thyroid (fig. 3). The thyroid, though closed in anteriorly, is still entirely open above for a greater part of its length. As is seen in fig. 16, the dorsal w^all of the thyroid is closely pressed against the ventral wall of the pharynx, so that it is difficult to distinguish the two walls. It will be interesting to compare the thyroid of Petromyzon at this stage Avith the thyroid at a corresponding stage in Amhlystoma (figs. 8a and 86). A section through the anterior end of the thy- roid of Petromyzon (fig. 16) shows it to be a closed cavity, while posteriorly it is still an open groove (fig. Ic). In Amhlystoma, on the other hand, the open groove is anterior to the closed part of the gland, the closing in taking place, apparently, in a i)Ostero-anterior direction. (loth and 14th days.) — At about this time the lateral walls of the thyroid, especially toward the anterior end, become greatly thickened by the increase in length of the columnar cells of which they are composed. At the same time an invagination of these thickened walls occurs as a longitudinal groove, pushing inward and upward from the outside of the gland (fig. 26, i.v.). This invag- ination becomes still more marked in later stages, and extends further in a posterior direction. At this stage the extreme anterior end of the thyroid is forked, so that a section through this region would show two distinct cavi- ties with thickened lateral and ventral walls (fig. 2a). This is plainly seen in sections and in a wax reconstruction of the thyi'oid 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89 made from a series of sections of this stage. These two divisions of the anterior end of the gland are separated by a vertical parti- tion of mesoblast. The two parts of the thyroid are more widely separated by the mesoblast than they will be at later stages, but at this stage the separation extends only a short distance from the anterior end of the gland. The thyroid is here not so closely pressed against the pharynx as was the case in previous sections, being separated from the wall of the pharynx by a collection of mesoblast cells. The cavity of each half of the gland is crescentic in cross section, and on the left side is seen the beginning of the lateral invagination. The thyroid cavity is closed in, now, for about two-fifths of its entire length, both anteriorly and posteriorly, so that its opening into the pharynx is reduced to a slit extending only one-fifth the length of the gland. Sections through the thyroid, anterior to this opening (fig. 2b) but posterior to the divided portion of the anterior end, show the ca\aty to be considerably complicated by the thickening and folding of the Avails. The simple, circular cavity of the preceding stage (fig. lb) is now reduced, by the growth and invagination of the Avails, to a narroAV vertical slit Avith lateral diverticula aboA'e and beloAv, giving the cavity, in cross section, somewhat the shape of a distorted letter T. The dorsal Avall of this caAdty (tig. 26, d.L) is comparatively thin, being composed of a single layer of rather short columnar cells, and is Avhat Dohrn calls the ' ' Decklamelle. ' ' The ventral Avail is also comparatiA'ely thin, and shoAAS in the centre, at the extreme anterior end of the unpaired cavity, a slight upward projection (fig. 26, m.L), Avhich Avould seem to be the first indication of the medial longitudinal partition that will later divide the gland into two lateral parts. According to Dohrn, this medial lamella is formed as far back as the opening of the gland, before the lateral iuA'aginatiou takes place, but in my material this is certainly not the case, as is s ho ami in fig. 2b. The lateral invaginations extend posteriorly to a point a little behind the anterior edge of the slit-like opening into the pharynx, fig. 2c being from a section that cut through the extreme posterior part of the iuA'agination in the right side, but Avas too far posterior to cut that of the left side, either because the section was somewhat oblique or because the right invagination had proceeded further than'tlie left. 90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., It is well to get a clear idea of these lateral invaginations in the pimple condition represented in fig. 26, as the more complicated later stages will thus be more easily understood. Were the lateral walls straightened out, thus obliterating the lateral invaginations, the thyroid would be reduced to a more or less cylindrical body, as it was in fig, 16, though with a much larger cavity. The long cells of the lateral walls are divided by the invagination into two groups, which become more and more distinct as development pro- ceeds. In fig. 26 one of these groups, on each side, lies between the invagination and the perpendicular part of the cavity of the gland ; the other group lies between the invagination and the dorsal, horizontal part of the cavity (compare fig. be). The cavity of the thyroid, between this point and the posterior edge of the opening into the pharynx, is simply a deep and narrow groove slightly expanded at the bottom, where a narrow space is left, on either side, between the thick lateral and thin ventral walls (fig. 2c?). Along this groove-like pai-t of the thyroid the cells of the pharynx and gland pass quite insensibly into one another, and are not sharply distinguishable, as might be supposed from the stippling in figs. 2c and 2d. The portion of the thyroid posterior to the opening is a simple tube-like structure, nearly circular in outline and with a vertical slit-like cavity (fig. 2d). The walls here are of nearly the same thickness on all sides, and lie in conta;ct with the epithe- lium of the pharynx above and with that of the body Avail below: in fact, throughout almost the entire length of the gland this is the case. On each side of the thyroid, throughout its entire length, lies a pseudobranchial arteiy {art.) (" Sprit zlocharterie " of Dohrn). There is no indication, as yet, of the ciliated grooves, " Pseudo- branchialrinne." The stages of development which follow were obtained from Ithaca, and the larvse, it will be remembered, were possibly of two species, neither of which was identical with the material from Naples, P. planeri. The next change that is noticed in the thyroid gland is the devel- opment of the median vertical lamella (fig. 4a, 7n.l.), which is formed by the invagination of the thin dorsal and ventral walls, beginning at the anterior end and gradually extending posteriorly until, at this stage, the gland is separated into two distinct lateral parts, from the anterior end about half-way to the opening to the 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91 pharjTix. Fig 4a is a section through the extreme posterior edge of the partition, showing the invagination of dorsal and ventral walls. The once simple tube is complicated now by four invagina- tions of its walls. The two that have been spoken of as the " lat- eral invaginations" (i.v.), pushing into the thick side walls in a dorso-median direction, are not very different from what we saw in fig. 2b. The other two push toward each other from the roof and floor of the gland (fig. 4a, m. I. ) until they meet and fuse, thus separating the thyroid into two distinct lateral halves. At a later stage of development mesoblast cells press in between these halves to form a thin mesoblast ic partition. At this stage the mesoblast is composed still of closely packed, rounded cells, and contains a few scattered yolk granules. It is at this time, also, that the first trace of the ciliated grooves (the '* Pseudobrauchial- rinne ' ' ) makes its appearance as a groove in the floor of the pharynx, extending anteriorly a short distance from the opening of the gland (fig. 46, v. e.g.). At this stage no cilia could be seen, and the groove was much wider than it was at later stages of de- velopment. The cavity of the gland, in the region represented in fig. 46, still retains, in cross section, its resemblance to the letter T. This section is anterior to the duct, but posterior to the median lamella represented in fig. 4a. The other changes noticed at this stage are the closing of the slit-like opening into the pharynx until only a small circular canal is left (no section through this opening is represented), the thinning of what we shall hereafter call, after Dohrn, the "cover" cells (" Decklamelle") (fig. 46, d.L), and the thickening and deeper invagination of the "gland" cells (" Druseulamelle " ) (fig. 46, g.L). The part of the gland pos- terior to what we may call now the ' ' duct ' ' remains about as in the preceding stage (fig. 4c). The larvae of the next stage were about 9 mm. long, and showed all the outward characteristics of the normal Ammoccetes. An outline drawing, from life, of the side of the head is shown in fig. 5a. Being drawn under the microscope with a camera, the rela- tive size and position of the thyroid are accurately shown. The gland is seen to extend from the first to the fifth gill-arch, and to be closely wedged in between the pharynx above and the body wall below. The upwardly curved ends did not show in the living animal, except as indicated by the upward bending of the longitu- ^2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., iliual grooves ; neither did the duct leading to the pharynx, so these features were omitted in this illustration. The longitudinal grooves are exaggerated somewhat in the drawing. The gland, in life, had a faintly yellow color, while the rest of the larvse, except the blood, was nearly white, with numerous many-branched, black pigment spots resembling very complicated nerve cells. The living larva of this age is quite transparent, so that the pulsation of the heart and of the velum (v. ) and the circulation of the blood through the branchial arches can be seen easily under a low power. The thyroid, being rather more opaque than the rest of the animal, shows very plainly by contrast. In the figure the outlines of the pharynx and the positions of the arches are shown by the broad dotted lines. The characteristic hood-like projection over the mouth is also shown. With the exception of the eye (e), no attempt has been made to represent any of the other organs of the larva. A ventral view of the larva of this age shows the thyroid as a clearly defined elongated body, lying against the ventral wall of the pharynx. By this time great advances have been made in the development of the thyroid and of the ciliated grooves. Fig. 56 is a transverse .section a short distance anterior to the thyroid. It shows the spinal cord (.s/>.c. ), notochord (c^. ), body wall (b.tv.), etc., in outline, while the cell structure of the pharynx (phar. ) is shown. This section, on the right side, passes through the ciliated groove at the point (I) where its anteriorly directed ventral branch (v. e.g., on the left) turns dorsalward to run posteriorly as the dorsal groove (d.c.g., on the left). On the left of the section the two branches of the groove are distinct as a dorsal {d.c.g.) and ventral (v. e.g.) groove. These grooves are lined with cells which are much higher and more columnar than the cells of the rest of the pharyngeal wall, so that they are easily followed, by sections, throughout their course. Their cilia are short and indistinct. The mesoblast (mes. ) surrounding the thyroid and pharynx is now quite different from that of earlier stages, being composed of .scattered angular cells instead of closely packed, more or less oval cells. The yolk has disappeared. The outline of the pharynx is represented in a somewhat diagrammatic manner, though it was traced as accurately as possible under a camera. 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCKS OF PHILADELPHIA. 93 Fig. 5e sliows the wide separation of the dorsal and ventral branches of the ciliated grooves, so that the two dorsal branches are now quite near together at the mid-dorsal line (d.c.g.), while the two ventral branches also are seen to approach each other as they pass posteriorly along the walls of the pharynx (v.e.^r. ). The dorsal grooves continue to approach each other gradually as they are followed posteriorly until they are separated only by a median ridge of ciliated columnar cells (fig. od). At a point a short dis- tance anterior to the thyroid, the grooves disappear and the medial ridge continues posteriorly, though diminished in height, as the cilixited dorsal ridge (fig. 5^, c.d.r.). This ridge continues to the extreme posterior end of the pharynx and enters the oesophagus, of which it forms, for some distance, the ciliated dorsal wall. Tlie ventral grooves, as has been said, approach the mid-ventral line of the pharyngeal wall until they unite and lead into the duct of the gland (figs. 5e-i). Posterior to the opening into the thyroid they are continued on the floor of the pharynx as a single, shallow, median groove (figs, ^j—k), which finally disappears, posterior to the thyi'oid, as a groove, but continues to the oesophagus as a ridge of thickened epithelium. In an embryo cut sagitally, so that the phaiynx may be laid open and exposed from above, the ciliated grooves may be seen easily Avith the naked eye, and still more plainly with a lens, but no indication of grooves or bands running from the dorsal ciliated ridge to the ventral groove is to be made out. A transverse section through one of the gill-arches showed the presence of ver}'' fine short cilia, but their arrangement could not be made out. This arrangement of ciliated grooves h quite different from that described by Willey in his interesting book, Amphioxus and the Ancestry of the Vertebrates. On p. 168 he says : ' ' These grooves curve forward and upward in front of the gill-clefts (after the obliteration of the first gill-pouches), and then proceed backward on either side of the dorsal middle line of the pliarynx as far as the commencement of the oesophagus. Here they appear to cun'e downward again, and, uniting togetlier, extend forward as a median ventral groove to the posterior lip of the hypo- branchial aperture. ' ' The arrangement of the ciliated bands and grooves, then, is briefly as follows: on the floor of the pharynx, beginning at or near the opening of the oesophagus, is a ridge of epithelium on 94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., which uo cilia could be made out. This ridge, after extending forward for a very short distance, becomes changed gradually into a shallow, median, ciliated groove that continues without change to the duct of the thyroid. Just anterior to the duct, the ventral ciliated groove splits into two grooves, which separate gradually on the floor of the pharvnx, and near the extreme anterior end pass upward on each side to the roof of the pharyngeal cavity. The grooves then converge as they pass backward until, at a point anterior to the front end of the thyroid, they unite again and form the median, ciliated dorsal ridge which extends backward to the oesophagus, of which it forms, for a short distance, the dorsal wall. In the gland itself the changes begun in previous stages have been carried now much further. The cover cells (figs. 5e-m, d. I. ) (Decklamelle) have shortened until they form a sort of mem- brane, while the gland cells (figs. 5f-m, g.L) have greatly elon- gated and their nuclei now lie near one end. The gland is com- pletely di\dded by the median lamella (figs. 5e-h, m.l.) from the anterior end as far back as the duct. From the duct to the poste- rior end (figs. 5i—k, m.L), the lamella is simply a partition rising from the floor of the gland but not reaching to the roof, its upper edge being swollen for a considerable distance posterior to the duct (figs, oi-k, m.l.'). The lateral invagination is very deep and important in determining the structure of the organ. Near the anterior end (fig. be, i.v. ) it has not changed greatly from the con- ditif)n in which it was at the last stage, but as we pass to sections furtlier back we find that the invagination forms a considerable cavity in each lateral half of the gland (figs. 5f-h, i.v.), and posterior to the duct the gland, in cross section, is seen to be divided into three distinct parts, a central and two lateral divisions (figs. 5i-k). In the posterior part of the invagination mesoblast cells are often seen (fig. 5i, mes.). The most extensive and complicated changes that have taken place are those of the gland cells (g.l.). The first among the changes to be mentioned is the separation of these cells into two groups, the ciliated cells and gland cells proper. The method of this separation is partly shown in fig. 5e. As seen in this section, the nuclei of the gland cells appear to have arranged themselves near the periphery of a somewhat oval mass of cells and to have 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 95 been pushed iu, at one point, by the lateral invagination (i.v. ). On the medial side of this oval mass of cells, lying parallel to the median lamella (^m.L), is seen a double row of nuclei, the lateral row {n.g.L) apparently having been separated from the medial row (n.f.L). The nuclei in the medial row become the nuclei of short columnar cells (fig. 5f, f.L), while the lateral nuclei remain in the gland cells proper (fig. 5/, g.l). A considerable space is formed between the ciliated cells and the gland cells, which becomes con- nected with the lateral invagination (figs, of-h, i.v. ) by the separa- tion in the centre (at the end of the line n.g.L, fig. be) of the nuclei of the lateral row (n.g.L ), and the joining of these separated ends with the nuclei of the adjacent sides of the invaginated double row of nuclei; the cells above (dorsal to) the line n.g I. (fig. be) joining with those above the invagination (i.v.), and the cells below (ventral to) n.g. I. joining the cells on the lower side of the invagination. In other words, the space formed between the ciliated cells and the gland cells becomes connected with the exte- rior by the breaking through (between the short parallel Imes at the end of the reference line n.g.L, tig. be) of the lateral invagina- tion. The nuclei that are connected by the short black lines, referred to above, will lie hereafter in adjacent gland cells. The result of these changes is not only the formation of a dis- tinct layer of columnar ciliated cells (tig. bf,f.L), but also the formation of four groups of gland cells in each half of the thyroid. Of these four groups of cells, two are large and have reached nearly their full differentiation at this stage (figs, be-j, g.r.) ; the other two (figs, be-j, g.r'.) are still very small and undeveloped, though even when fully developed they remain somewhat smaller than the first formed groups. The large groups of gland cells are somewhat fan-shaped, when seen in cross section, and are composeti of greatly elongated conical cells, whose nuclei lie at their bases. On account of the great difficulty in obtaining good preparations of these gland cells, as before mentioned, many series of sections had 1o be studied before any conclusion could be reached as to the minute stx'ucture of the cell groups. The pointed ends of the cells are directed toward the opening (o. ) of the cell group, and, in the later stages at least, are usually obscured by the mass of secretion which fills any space there may be in the centre of the cell group. In practically every instance there was a small protuberance at the 96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., opening of the cell group (fig. og and fig. 61, jj.s), which appeared to be a small mass of secretion which had been forced out of the cell group by the contraction of the gland at fixation. There was no secretion foimd in any other part of the gland, which fact could be explained only by supposing that the secretion was carried away as fast as it was formed, by the cilia. ^Vs seen in fig. 6^ (a camera drawing of a section of the next stage, magnified 925 diameters), the opening of the cell group is covered over by a membrane which is continuous with the membrane from which the cilia arise. As this membrane, in any given group, may be fol- lowed without a break through a long series of sections and the protuberance of secreted matter seen in each section, it is difticidt to see how the secretion gets on the outer side of the membrane, unless it passes through a series of holes in the membrane that, when filled as they are with secretion, are too minute to be seen, even under a magnification of 1200 diameters. In fig. 6^ may be seen, just under the basement membrane, a number of triangular condensations of the cell substance on each side of the opening. These inverted cones were seen in a number of sections that happened to be stained in just the proper way, but no explanation of their presence suggested itself. Roughly speaking, each half of the thyroid may be considered to be made up essentially of two large and two small cylinders of gland cells, each cylinder extending the whole length of the gland (fig. oe, (jr. and (//•'. ). The small cylinders (gr'.) are as yet so rudimentary that they can scarcely be recognized as such, but, as has been said, they w^ill acquire later the same structure as is now- possessed by the larger cylinders (gr.). Extending the entire length of each cylinder or cell group is a narrow baud of minute holes, mentioned above (fig. 5/, o., and fig. 61, ?».), through which the secretion of the gland cells escapes into the ciliated cham- bers and thence, through the duct, to the ciliated grooves of the pharynx. The remaining structural details of the gland may be understood from a description of the duct, which is somewhat complicated. As has been described above, the two ventral branches of the ciliated grooves run along the floor of the pharynx, getting closer and closer together, imtil they unite and form a single deep groove (figs, oe-h, v.c.g.). In fig. ")/" the ventral ciliated grooves (v. e.g.) 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97 have almost united, being separated only by a wedge-shaped por- tion of tlie pharyngeal floor. They are deep, aud so narrow that there would seem to be but little room for ciliary action. The cells lining the grooves are here somewhat shorter than the other cells of the pharynx, whereas more anterior sections showed the reverse to be the case, as was mentioned above (fig. ob-d). The single ciliated chamber (considering one side, only, of the bilaterally symmetrical gland) forms about three-fourths of a circle {m.c.h.) and is bounded by the cover cells {d.l.) on the one hand, and by the ciliated cells (/./.) on the other. The cover cells have become so much flattened that they form a mere membrane, and their nuclei are pressed far apart. The ciliated cells are of a typical ciliated columnar form, and are exposed, at their ciliated ends, to the cavity that has been described as the ciliated chamber, and, at their basal ends, to the space that is now a part of the lateral uivag- ination (i.v. ). Several large blood vessels are seen, surrounded by the angular mesoblast cells, and on each side of the thyroid, lying close to the body wall, is a large longitudinal muscle. Before reaching the point at which it opens into the thyroid, the groove spreads out at the bottom (fig. bg, p.) and resembles, in cross section, an inverted letter T. The cross arms of the T turn upward as they pass further backward (fig. 5 A, p. ) until they are closely pressed against the vertical part of the T. The way in which this curious groove opens finally into the thyroid is interesting. A short distance back of the point repi'esented in fig. 5/t, the cells of the ciliated and cover layers are interrupted at about the point marked b.r. (fig. 5A), and at the same time the side pouch (p.) of the groove (v. e.g.) becomes separated from the groove itself along the line x-y (fig. 5h). By the union now of the medial end (1.) of the ciliated layer with the end (1'.) of the adjacent side of the groove, and at the same time by the union of ends 2 with 2' and 3 with 3', we have a condition represented in fig. 5i. The end (4) of the cover layer unites with its fellow of the opposite side of the gland to form the swollen upper edge of the partition (m.l., fig. 5t) mentioned above. By a careful comparison of figs. dh and 5i, the relationships just described will become clear. In fig. 5i then we have represented a section passing directly through the duct of the gland, and we see that the secretion from the two groups of gland cells (g.r.) passes out of the gland in two 98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., ways : that from the ventro-mediau group passes into the central ciliated chamber (m.c.h.) and thence directly out through the duct (v. e.g.), while the secretion from the dorso-lateral group has to pass into the duct through the side pouch (p.). Anterior to the duct, the ciliated chambers (m.c.h. and l.c.h.) being one (fig. 5/, m.c.h.), the secretion from the different groups of cells may, of course, pass out either way. The duct is inclined, somewhat, in a postero-ventral direction and is lined Avith ciliated columnar cells. The point at the end of the line 1 (fig. 5i) indicates the place of union of the medial part (fig. 5/i, 1. ) of the ciliated layer with the adjacent side (1'.) of the deep ciliated groove (v. e.g.). Reference line 2 shows where the lateral part (2) of the cover layer joined the outer side (2') of the ciliated pouch (p.). Reference line 3 indicates the point at which the lateral part (3) of the ciliated layer joined the medial side (3') of the ciliated pouch (p.). m.l. is the median lamella formed by the union of the medial portions of the cover layers (d.l.) of the two parts of the gland; from this point it is an incomplete partition all the way to the posterior end of the gland. Posterior to the duct (fig. 5/), the medial portion (1.) of the ciliated layer joins .its fellow of the opposite side, above the median lamella (m.l.), while the outer part (3) of this layer remains con- tinuous with the outer part of the cover layer. By this arrange- ment the lateral invagination (i.v.) apparently completely separates a lateral from the central part of the gland, as has been mentioned before, and the mesoblast cells are found between the two divisions (mes. ). This is shown also in fig. om, which is a horizontal section of the entire gland. A section at this plane gives the impression that the lateral invagination (i.v.) almost completely separates the lateral from the central portion of the gland, but of course if the section were cut nearer to the dorsal surface of the gland, the lateral portion would be seen to be joined to the central portion anterior to the duct (to the left of m.l.), as has been seen in figs. ^ye-h. Fig. 5m shows the extent to which the gland is completely divided by the partition (vi.l.), and also the position of the gland in relation to the gill-arches (v. a. , 2-5), The cilia are omitted from this figure. In all the sections posterior to the duct, as seen in fig. 5/, there are three distinct ciliated chambers. The median ciliated chamber (m.c.h.), occupying the central division of the gland, is 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF rHILADELFHIA. 99 triangular iii cross section, and is pai'tially divided into two chambers by the median lamella (in. I.) which rises from the middle of its ventral wall. Into each half of the median ciliated chamber empty one of the lai'ge and one of the small groups or cylinders of gland cells. The smaller cell group, as has been said, at this stage is still in a rudimentary condition. The lateral ciliated chamber {l.c.h.) is crescentic in cross sec- tion, the lesser curve of the crescent being formed by the ciliated cells, the greater curve by the cover cells. Into the lateral chamber empty a large and a small group of gland cells. Dorsal to the gland are the two large blood vessels (art. ) and close above these the floor of the pharynx, with the ventral ciliated groove (v. e.g.), now much diminished in depth. Fig. 5k is of a section near the poste- rior end of the gland, passing through the upcurved portion. The reference line m.e.h. begins in the cavity of this upwardly bent part, which is cut through at the point where it is continuous with the central ciliated chamber of the gland. A section just anterior to this would show this upper space as a separate cavity. Dohrn says this marked bend at the posterior end, as Avell as the less marked one at the anterior end, is caused by the growth of the gland being more rapid than that of the space in which it is en- closed. The lateral portions of the gland at the point represented in fig. 5^ are very small. The central partition (m.l.) is still present, as seen in fig. 5/, and imperfectly at hi. T. in fig. om. The ventral groove (v. e.g.) and dorsal ridge (c.d.r.) are also very plainly seen in fig. dk. The blood vessels are followed easily and are usually filled with large nucleated corpuscles. In the last two sections (figs. ~)k and 51) the thyroid has diminished in size, and the arrangement of the glaud cells into the four gi'oups can be I'ecog- nizcd no longer. The lateral ciliated chamber is reduced to a nearly circular cavity, and the ventral ciliated groove is flattening out gradually, preparatory to changing to the low ridge mentioned in the description of the system of ciliated gi'ooves. The ciliated dorsal ridge is very prominent and partially embraces the aorta in its folds. The cell structure of the body wall and of most of the pharyngeal wall is omitted in these as in most of the preceding figures. In the following and last stage of development (tigs, i'ya-k), the 100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., gland lias appareutly reached its greatest complexit)', as the only noticeable change from the preceding and much younger stage, except increase in size, is the remarkable coiling of the posterior end of the gland, caused, Dohrn says, as has been pre\aously men- tioned, by the longitudinal growth of the gland being more rapid than the space in which it is enclosed. The larva from which this stage was taken had reached a length of about 15 cm., and a cir- cumference of about 2.5 cm. in the region of the thyroid. Fig. (y is a ventral view of the anterior end of a larva of this stage, the ventral integument ( b. w. ) of which has been dissected along the mid-ventral line and drawn to each side, so as to expose the thyroid gland {thy. ). The figure shows the shape of the gland as seen from the ventral side, and also its relative size and position. The cartilaginous bai's (c. 6. ) of the branchial basket are also shown, and it is seen that the large mid-ventral bar divides when it reaches ttie posterior end of the gland into two lateral bars, one of which lies close to each side of the thyroid throughout nearly the entire length of the gland. The longitudinal grooves (ventral and lateral invaginations) are quite indistinct because of the mass of white, fibrous-looking connective tissue which now surrounds the gland on all sides. At this stage, as is seen in fig. 6/, the gland extends from the middle of the first to the middle of the fourth gill -pouch (g.p.), and is about one-third the diameter of the entire pharynx. In a ventral view, the coil of the posterior end of the gland does not of course show, but at each end is seen a median groove which shows, even through the fibrous envelope ; these grooves are caused by the separation of the two parts of the gland, at each extremity, whereas throughout most of their length the halves are in close contact with each other. The numerous transverse folds in the seven pairs of gill-pouches are seen in this figure, and also the fibrous character of the anterior wall of the pharynx. The actual oral opening is not shown. Fig. GA; is a diagrammatic side view of the gland, to show the points through which the sections were cut, and also to show longi- tudinal space relations, such as size and position of duct, extent of coil, etc. Being carefully reconstructed and drawn by scale, it shows these relations with more or less accuracy. As is seen from this diagram, the duct lies a little nearer the posterior than the anterior end of the gland, though if the coiled posterior end of 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101 tlie gland were straigliteued out the duct would then be consider- ably nearer the anterior end. By comparing fig. 6c with this dia- gram, it will be noticed that the duct is now a longitudinal slit instead of a nearly circular duct, the lateral growth of the duct apparently not having kept pace with the longitudinal. Fig. 6k represents the actual relative longitudinal but not vertical dimen- sions of the duct. The actual increase in size of the gland may be appreciated by noting that, though all the sections were drawn with a camera, those represented in figs. 56-/ are enlarged 240 diame- ters, while those in figs. 6a-i are magnified only 90 times. A section through the anterior end of the gland, passing through the point marked a, fig. Qk, is represented in fig. 6a. The chief difference, besides that of size, betAveen this section and the corre- sponding one of the preceding stage (fig. 5/) is in the complete development of the cell-gi'oups (gr'.), which in the preceding stage were quite small and imdeveloped. We have now in each side of the gland, which is exactly bilaterally symmetrical, four groups of gland cells, the groups being arranged in pairs, one pair on each side lying near the middle line, the other being nearer the side (figs. 6e and k, m.c.g. and Leg.). This arrangement of the cell- groups into pairs is distinct from end to end of the gland, and for convenience they will be spoken of as the ' ' median ' ' and ' ' lat- eral " pairs of cell-groups. As has been said, the gi-oups gr'. never reach the size of the first developed groups gr. The ciliated cells have changed somewhat since the preceding stage. They have become relatively, as well as actually, more elongated at certain parts of the ciliated layer, while at other places they are still sliort and nearly filled with their large oval nuclei. The nuclei of the longer cells are small and circular in outline, and at certain places seem to be more or less regularly arranged near one end or other of the cells, while at other places there is no apparent regularity in their arrangement. In fig. 6a, the short cells with large nuclei are seen on either side of the slit-like openings (o. ) into the groups of gland cells. The ciliated grooves {v. e.g.), at the point where this section is cut, arc still some distance apart on the fioor of the pharynx, and are not noticeably changed from their condition in the preceding stage. They are separated by one large and two small folds in the fioor of the pharynx, which seems, at this point, to be very irregular in outline, probably caused partly 102 PROCEKDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., by shriukage at fixation. They are very deep and narrow and seem filled completely by their cilia. The connective tissue covering (e.t.) of the thyroid, spoken of in connection with the outward appearance of the thyroid, is seen, in section, to form a thick layer entirely around the gland and to form the central mass of median lamella (m.L). It also forms a thick coating around each branch of the large artery which Dohrn calls the Pseudobrauchial artery (Spritzlocharterie) (art.). The large and now nearly enclosed space (i.v. ), formed by what was called the " lateral invagination," is more or less completely filled by a sort of reticulated tissue with scattered nuclei. This reticu- lated tissue also fills the space between the floor of the pharynx and the thyroid. Numerous small blood vessels are found imbedded in it, both in that which fills the lateral invagination and in that which lies between the gland and the pharynx. This tissue is represented only in figs. 6a and 66, but the fibrous tissue is shown in all the figures of this stage. Fig. 06 represents a section cut a short distance anterior to the duct, at the point 6., fig. 6^, and about coi'responds to fig. 5^ of the preceding stage. The ciliated grooves at this point have imited to form a single deep groove, which is spread out at the bottom to form the side pockets ( p. ) described in the preceding stage. The lateral and median pairs of cell-groups have approached each other until their adjacent groups are nearly or quite in contact ; at the same time the ciliated layer (/./.) has increased somewhat in length, and at its dorso -median angle (at the end of the lines/./., fig. 66) its cells have changed from the tall columnar with small, round nuclei to short cells, almost completely filled ^nth their large oval nuclei and resembling the cells that lie close to the openings (o. ) of the groups of the gland cells. It is this group of cells, lying in the dorso-mediau portion of the ciliated layer, that sep- arates into two about equal parts, a little further posteriorly, to connect the gland with the deep ciliated groove, in the manner described in the preceding stage and shown in figs. 5h-i of that stage and in fig. 6c of tlie stage now under discussion. The ciliated layer is somewhat folded, as though it had increased in length very rapidly, or had been compressed by tlie shrinkage of the connective tissue (c.t. ) surrounding the gland. There is considerable space at this point between the i)havynx and the thyroid, which necessitates 1902.] NATURAIi SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103 the very deep ciliated groove shown in this and the next figure. The arteries (art. ) are very large and are bound closely to the gland by the connective tissue mentioned above. The cover layer {d.l.) iu these sections is reduced to such a thin membrane that it is often difficult to distinguish it from the connective tissue to which it is closely applied thi'ougliout. A section passing directly through the opening of the duct into the gland is represented in fig. 6c. The duct, a deep, narrow slit, is lined with short, ciliated columnar cells, similar to the shorter cells of the ciliated layer spoken of above. These short cells lead quite suddenly into the long cells of the ciliated layer (f.L). The lateral pair of cell-groups (Z.c.gf.) is now entirely distinct from the median pair (m.c.g.), and the pocket (p.) by which the lateral cell-groups are connected with the duct, as before explained, is continued to the extreme posterior end of the gland, the two lateral pairs of cell -groups taking no part in the posterior coil but continuing back of this for some distance (figs. %i and k). The median lamella {m.L), which back to this point has com- pletely divided the gland into two parts, is from this point merely a tall ridge (fig. 6c, m.l.) projecting upward into the median cili- ated chamber (m.c.h. ) and covered by the cover cells (d.l. ) (Deck- lamelle) of the two median pairs of cell-groups. As in the pre- ceding stage, the dorsal edge of this ridge is at times somewhat thickened. The space between the anterior end of the coil and the duct is short, as is seen by fig. Qk, and a section through the gland in this region (fig. Qd) differs very little from a corresponding section on the preceding stage (fig. 5/), except iu the particulars already pointed out for the anterior end of the gland. The median ciliated chamber (m.c.h.) is long and naiTow in a doreo- ventral direction and its dorsal part is made up of the shorter form of ciliated cells. The latei-al ciliated chamber (l.c.h.) is also much more extensive than in the preceding stage. The ciliated groove (v.c.g.) is seen above the gland in the floor of the pharynx. It is much less deep than it was, just anterior to the duct, and remains in about this condition to a point beyond the extreme posterior end of the gland. There is still a considerable space between the thyroid and the floor of the pharynx, which space is filled with the reticulated tissue mentioned above and shown in figs, (m and 66. 104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., Tlie following four sections (figs. 6e-h) all pass through the coiled posterior end of the gland, at the points indicated by the corresponding letters in fig. 6k. The apparent complexity of these four sections will be made plain by compaiing them with the dia- grammatic lateral view^ of the gland (fig. 6^). In all four sections, what we have called the lateral pairs of cell-groups (Leg.) remain the same and may be recognized by their long, curved, lateral ciliated chambers (l.c.h.). In fig. 6e the median pairs of cell-groups are seen in a mid- ventral position (m.c.g.) as they are followed in an anterior-poste- rior direction, again in a mid-dorsal position (m.c.g'.) as they are followed in a posterior-anterior direction, and again in nearly the centre of the gland at m.c.g". as they are followed toward the pos- terior end again. This is easily understood by noting the position of the line e in fig. 6^, which shows that the section is cut at the point where the posterior-anteriorly directed part of the median cell-groups (m.c.g'.) turns ventralward, to pass again toward the posterior (m.c.g".). The central ciliated chamber (m.c.h.) is thus seen, in this section, to be continuous from the dorsal (m.c.g'.) to the middle (m.c.g". ) position of the median cell-groups. The gen- eral character of the various groups and layers of cells remains about the same in all four of these sections, so that it will be only necessary to speak of their position and arrangement in the sections. The next section (fig. 6/. ) cuts the median cell -groups in four places, as is shown in fig. (Sk — at m.c.g. in the antex'ior-posteriorly directed portion, at?n.e.f/'. in the dorsal posterior-anterior portion, at m.c.g". in the part that is directed again toward the posterior end, and at m.c.g'". in the last whorl of ihe coil which is directed toward the anterior end of the gland. It will be noticed in this and in the other sections passing through the coiled part of the gland, that the median lamella (m.l.) extends into the coil only a short distance. It extends thi'ough the dorsally directed part of the coil shown in fig. 6 A, and for a shoi't distance in the posterior- anteriorly part lettered m.c.g'. Whether it was never found in this end of the gland, oi whether it was flattened out by compres- sion was not determined. The shape of the median ciliated cham- ber varies considerably in the different whorls of the coil, as is seen in fig. 6/, m.c.h. In its ventral position — that is, in the position lettered m.c.g. — the ciliated chamber has the same outline as in pre- 1902. j NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105 vious sections, and Ls divided by tlie median lamella (m.l. ). In its dorsal position (m.c.g'.) it is a large chamber undivided by a median lamella. In the middle of the coil, especially in the posi- tion lettered m.c.ff", the chamber is much diminished, apparently by the pressure of the surrounding whorls of the coil. By remem- bering that the groups m.c.g'. and m.c.g'". are inverted, as a comparison with the line/, in fig. 6 A* will show, it will be seen that the gland is in reality no more complicated than it was further forward. Nothing further need be said of this section. Fig. 6^ represents a section cut through the point where the posteriorly directed whorl (m.c.g".) turns dorsal ward, to pass ante- riorly as the innermost whorl (m.c.g'". ) of the coil. Fig. 6h shows the most posterior of the four sections passing through the coil. It passes through the point where the median cell-groups (m.c.g.) make their first bend dorsal ward to where they turn again to form the anteriorly directed whorl (m.c.g'.). As has been previously said, the lateral cell-groups (Leg.) take no part in the posterior coil but extend for a considerable distance posterior to the coil, somewhat diminished in size, and gradually approach each other until they are in close contact. Fig. 6i represents a section taken at a point about midway between the extreme j^osterior end of the gland and the posterior surface of the coil. It shows the two pairs of lateral cell groups (Leg.), each with its characteristically curved lateral ciliated chamber (Lc.h.). Just posterior to the coil the two large pseudo- branchial arteries, which wei'e seen on each side of the gland in all the preceding sections (figs. 6a-h, art. ), unite to form the one large artery seen in fig. 6i, art., lying between the gland below and the ciliated groove above. This artery is very large, being almost as great in cross section as the end of the thyroid below it. The wall of the pharynx is separated from the gland by a comparatively small space, so that it is evidently pushed upward by the large coiled end of the gland and sinks down again just behind this eleva- tion. The groups of gland cells have diminished somewhat, in cross section, but they are not greatly diminished even at their extreme posterior end. If, as Dohrn says, the coiling of the posterior end of the tliyroid gland is caused by its longitudinal growth being more rapid than the growth of the space in Avhicli it lies, it is difficult to see why 106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., the lateral cell-groups have not taken part in the coil, instead of projecting as they do for a considerable distance posterior to the coil. The Thyroid and Salivary Glands in the Adult Lamprey. The condition of the thyroid in the adult lamprey was studied in several large sea lampreys (Petromyzon marinus) taken at the her- ring fisheries of the Susquehanna river, and in a couple of brook lampreys (P. branchialis) fi'om Ithaca, N. Y. Willielm Miiller says' that the thyroid in the " sexually mature " animal extends underneath the long tongue muscle from the second to the fourth gill-sac, and is built up of a nvimber of closed follicles lined with intensely brown -yellow epithelium. He says it cannot be mistaken for the salivary gland, lying under the eye and open- ing by a duct into the mouth. A study of serial sections of a couple of recently transformed brook lampreys confirmed Miiller' s description of the position and anatomy of the adult thyroid, but careful dissection of one or two adult sea lampreys, and even sections of part of the floor of the pharynx, failed to show any trace of the thyroid. As the brook lampreys were, as has been said, only just transformed, while the sea lampreys were killed at sexual maturity, it is possible that the thyroid, which is ductless and a mere rudiment in any case, had nearly or quite disappeared in the older animals. As is seen in fig. lOffl, the thyroid, which in the younger larval stages was enormously large, proportionally, is a small group of follicles lined with col- umnar or cuboidal epithelium (fig. 106). It is surrounded by con- nective tissue and lies between the tongue muscle above and the median venti'al cartilaginous bar below, with a large blood vessel on either side. It extends, as Miiller says, from the second to the fourth gill-pouch. The follicles are generally filled with a secretion (not shown in the figures), and, with their surrounding cells, form, in cross section, an oval mass. Usually from four to six follicles are cut in each transverse section. Born was the first to describe correctly the salivary or basilar gland in the lamprey, Rathke having mistaken the basilar muscle, in which the gland lies imbedded, for the tissue of the gland, con- sidering the true gland as merely the cavity. ' Jenaische Zeitachrift, Bd. VII. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPIIIA. 107 The gland is paired, and each half lie*, as has just been said, imbedded in the tissue of the corresponding half of the large, paired basilar muscle. This muscle lies in the floor of the mouth and pharynx and is one of the muscles used by the animal in adhering to rocks or fish. By contraction of this muscle the sali- vary gland is compi'essed and its secretion thus forced out. In the large, adult sea lamprey the two parts of the basilar gland are easily discovered by dissection, lying in the medial sides of their corresponding halves of the basilar muscle. In the much smaller brook lamprey, the position and structure of the basilar gland may be made out by stained serial sections (figs. 9a and 96). Each half of the gland is a thin-walled ovoidal sac, about 2 cm. long and 8 mm. in cross section, in the sea lamprey. The epithelial cells of the walls are of a short columnar form, and the walls are thrown into numerous irregularly arranged papillse and short folds, which project into the cavity of the gland (figs. 9a and 96). From the medial side of the gland, a short distance back of its extreme anterior end, the duct leads forward, gradually approaching its fellow of the opposite side, but never meeting it, to open into the mouth cavity through a small papilla. Little or no secretion was seen in the gland. The posterior end of the gland is separated from the first gill-sac by a distance about equal to the space occu- pied by two gill-sacs. Fig. 9a represents a transverse section through the ventral part of the body of an adult brook lamprey. The large basilar muscle (b.m.) is seen on each side, between the body wall (b.tv.) below and the pharynx (jihar. ) above. Imbedded in this muscle is the basilar or salivary gland (b.g.) whose walls are thrown into irregu- lar folds and papillte, as has been mentioned. Fig. 96 is anterior to 9a and is drawn under greater magnifica- tion. One side only of the gland is shown, the section passing through it just anterior to the opening of the duct (d. ) into the gland. This figure shows that the folds in the wall of the gland are formed by invaginations of irregular form and at irregular intervals. The wall of the duct is of about the .same thickness as that of the gland, but is not thrown into folds. The duct diminishes in size somewhat as it passes forward. As no trace whatever of this basilar or salivary gland could be found in even the oldest larvce at hand, which nuist have been very 108 J ROCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., nearly ready to imdergo transformation, though several well pre- served and stained series were examined, it seemed possible that this gland might have been developed from the anterior part of the larval thyi-oid, or from the pair of deep ciliated grooves which run forward from the opening of the thyroid and which are not present, as such, in the adult condition. The similarity in the secretion and function of the larval thyroid to the secretion and function of a salivary gland seems to support this view. The author hopes, with the aid of proper material, to be able to prove definitely whether or not there is any relation between the larval thyroid and the salivary gland of the adult Petromyzon. Bibliography. Babes, 1881. Researches on the ]\Iinute Structure of the Thyroid Gland, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc, Loudon, 1881, pp. 577-608. Brooks, 1893. Origin of the Chordata in "Genus Salpa," pp. 178- 303. Mem. from the Biol. Lab. of Johns Hopkins Univ. BuJOR, 1891. Contribution a I'etude de la metamorphose de I'Ammo- coetes branchialis et P. planeri. Revue Biol, de Nord France ; 3eme Ann., No. 8, 305-315; No. 9, 325-339; No. 10, 365-390; No. 11, 417-426; No. 12. 474-486 ; 4me Ann., No. 2, 41-46. DoHRN, 1886. Thyroidea und Hypobranchialrinne, Spritzlochsack und Pseudobranchialrinne bei Fischen, Ammocojtes und Tunicaten. Mitt. zool. Sta. V. Neapel, Bd. VII, pp. 301-336. 1886. Thyroidea bei Petromvzon, Amphioxus und Tunicaten. Mitt. Zool. Sta. V. Neapel, Bd. VI, pp. 49-89. FiscHELis, 1885. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Entwicklungsgeschicbte der Glandula thyroida und Glandula thymus. Archiv. fur mik. Auat., Bd. XXV, 1885. FuRBRiKGER, 1875. Uutersuchungen z. Vergleichenden Anatomie d. Muskulatur d. Kopfskelets d. Cyclostomen. Jen. Zeitschr., Bd. IX, 93 pages. Gagb, 1893. Life-IIistory of Certain Species of Lamprey. Wilder Quarter-Century Book, 1893, pp. 420-479. JuLEiN, 1890. Vascular and nervous system, etc., and the metamorphic value of the thyroid body. Archiv. d. Biol., T. VII, pp. 759-yOiJ. KoHN, 1895. Studien fiber die Schikldriise. Archiv. f. mik. Anat., Bd. XLIV, 1895, pp. 3ti6-422. KuPFFER, 1888 and 1890. Development of the Lamprev (P. planeri). Archiv. f. mik. Anat., Bd. XXXV, pp. 469-558. Maurer, 1885. Mittheilung u. d. Schikldriise und Thymus d. Teleosts. Jen. Zeitschr., Bd. XIX. DE Meuron, 1886. Recherches sur le development du Thymus et de la gland thyroid. Recueil zoologique Suisse, Premier Series, T. III. Muller, W., 1872. U. d. Hypobranchialrinne d. Tunucaten und deren Vorhandensein b. Amphioxus u. d. Cyclostomen. Jen. Zeitschr., Bd. VII. Scott, 1887. Development of Petromyzon. Jour. Morph., Vol. I, pp. 253-310. WiLLEY, 1894. Amphioxus and the Ancestry of the Vertebrates. Mac- millan Co 1902.] NATURAL SCIENX'ES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109 Explanation of Lettering. a.h.l., anterior horizontal lamella. aort., aorta. art., pseudobranchial artery. b.g., basilar (salivary) gland. b.m., basilar muscle.' hr., point of separation of ciliated and of cover cells. b.w., body wall. C.6., cartilaginous bars. c.d.r., ciliated dorsal ridge. ch., notochord. c.t., connective tissue envelope. d., duct of basilar gland. d.c.g., dorsal ciliated groove. d.l., cover cells (Decklamelle). e., eye. f.l., ciliated cells. g.l., gland cells (Drusenlamelle). g.p , gill pouch. gr., primary group of gland cells. gr'., secondary group of gland cells. i.v., lateral invagination. I., loop of the ciliated groove. I e.g., lateral cell-group. l.c.h., lateral ciliated chambers. m., membrane over o. m.c.g., 711. eg'., etc., median cell- groups. m.c.7i., median ciliated chamber. I mes., mesoblast. i m.L, median lamella. : m.l'., extreme posterior end of ' median lamella. I 71 fl., nuclei of ciliated cells. n.gl., nuclei of gland cells. 0., slit-like opening of cell-groups. ces., oesophagus. p., side pouch of ventral ciliated I groove. i phar., pharynx. p.h.l., posterior horizontal la- mella. p.s., protuberance of secreted mat- j ter. ' s., secretion. sp.c, spinal cord. sto., stomodaeun. thy., thyroid gland. t.m., tongue muscle. U.I., upper lip. v., velum. v.a.l, 2, etc., 1st, 2d, etc., visceral arches. v.c , visceral clefts. v.c.g., ventral ciliated groove. x-y., line through which the sep- aration of the side pouch from the ventral ciliated groove takes place. Explanation of Plates IV, Y, VI, VII. All sections draicn with a Zeiss Camera Lucida. Fig. la. — Larva of P. pla7ieri, 11 days after fertilization, to show the external appearance of the larva at the time of the first trace of the thyroid. (Mag. 65 diam.) Fig. 16. — Transverse section of 12-day larva of P. pla7iei-i, through the anterior end of the thyroid, just anterior to the opening into the pharynx. Shows the gland as a circular cavity lined with columnar cells, lying under the digestive cavity. (Mag. 325 diam.) Fig. Ic. — Transverse section posterior to fig. \b, through the anterior part of the opening of the thyroid into the pharynx. (Mag. 325 diam.) Fig. 2a. — Transverse section through the extreme anterior end of the thyroid of a 14-day F. platieri. (Mag. 325 diam.) Fig. 26. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 2ar., but anterior to the opening of the gland into the pharynx. Shows beginning of lateral invagination. (Mag. 325 diam.) Fig. 2c. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 26, through the anterior part of the opening of the gland into the pharynx. (Mug. 325 diam.) Fig. 2d. — Transverse section posterior to, fig. 2c, through the posterior part of the opening of the gland into the phar^'nx. (Mag. 325 diam.) Fig. 2e. — Transverse section through the gland, posterior to the open- ing into the pharynx. (Mag. 325 diam.) 110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., Fig. 3.— Sagittal section through the liead of a 13-clay P. planeri, passing almost through the median plane of the thyroid and somewhat to one side of tlie centre of the stomodtBum. Shows the beginning gland as an evagination of the floor of the pharynx. The anterior and poste- rior horizontal hvmellaj, which finally separate the gland from the pharynx, are just beginning to be formed. (Mag. 325 diam.) (Figs. 4-7 are taken from the material obtained at Ithaca, N. Y., and are therefore either of the lake or of the brook lamprey, or perhaps of both.) Fig. 4a. — Transverse section through the anterior end of the thyroid, passmg through the extreme posterior edge -of the vertical lamella. Shows beginning of difterentiation of cells into "gland" and "cover" cells. (Mag. 240 diaui.) Fig. 4b. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 4a, cutting the gland just anterior to the duct, and showing the first trace of the ciliated groove. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 4c. — Transverse section near the posterior end of the gland, pos- terior to the duct and to the lateral invaginations. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5a. — Lateral view of the head of a 9 mm. larva, to show tbe relative size of the thyroid gland and its position in relation to the gill- arches, etc. (Drawn'from the living animal under a magnification of 50 diam.) Fig. 5b. — Transverse section through the head of a larva of Petromy- zon, anterior to the thyroid, through tlie point where (on the right side) the ciliated groove turns from the dorsal toward the ventral side of the pharynx. The section cuts exactlj^ througli the end of the loop on the right side, but somewhat posterior to this point on the left side. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5c.— Transverse section a short distance posterior to fig. 56 to show how the dorsal branches of the ciliated grooves approach each other, on the roof of the pharynx, as they pass toward the posterior ; and the same for the ventral branches on the floor of the pharynx. (Mag. 240 diam. ) Fig. Of/. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 5t" and just anterior to the gland. Shows the dorsal ciliated grooves separated only by a ridge of cells, which, a short distance further toward the posterior, becomes the ciliated dorsal ridge. The ventral grooves also are seen nearer together. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5e. — Transverse section through the anterior end of the thyroid. Shows the still nearer approach of the two ventral grooves. The cover cells are flattened out into a thin membrane, while the gland cells are very long, are splitting off from their nucleated ends the cells to form the ciliated layer and begin to show an arrangement into the four cell- groups. The lateral invagination deeply indents each of the halves into wliicli the gland is divided by the median lamella. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5/. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 5e. The ciliated grooves are nearly joined, the ciliated layer of cells is now distinct, as are two of the four cell-groups. The lateral invagination is very deep. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5g. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 5/ but still anterior to the duct. The ciliated grooves have united to form a single deep groove which is here spread out at the bottom, giving it the shape, in cross section, of an inverted letter T. The structure of the gland is now about the same as in the preceding section. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5h. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 5*7 and just anterior to the opening of the duct. The structure of the gland is the same as in fig. 5g, but the shape of the ciliated groove has changed somewhat. (Mag. 240 diam.) 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Ill Fig. 5i. — Transverse section through the opening of the duct into the ciliated groove. Shows that the median ciliated chamber opens directly into the deep ciliated groove, while the lateral ciliated chambers open into the ciliated groove tlirough the side pouches noticed in the last two preceding figures. The lateral invaginations, from this point to the pos- terior end, divide the gland into three distinct parts, a median and two lateral parts. The median lamella is no longer a complete partition and shows a decided swelling on its dorsal edge, (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5;'. — Transverse section a short distance posterior to the opening of the duct. The ciliated groove is still present but much diminished in depth. (Mag, 240 diam.) Fig. 5^. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 5j, passing through the beginning posterior coil. Shows the now broad and shallow ciliated groove close to the top of the gland, and ciliated dorsal ridge on the roof of the pharynx. (Mag. 240 diam. ) Fig 51. — Transverse section through the extreme posterior end of the gland. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 5m. — A horizontal section through the thyroid, showing the extent of the complete median lamella, the relative position of the vis- ceral arches, etc. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 6a. — Transverse section through the anterior end of the thyroid of a 10 cm. larval Petromyzon. All four groups of cells are now fully developed, and the gland has increased greatly in size, as is shown by the fact that figs. 5a-m were magnified 240 diameters, while the larger figs. 6a-i were magnified only 90 times. This figure about corresponds to Fig. 5e of the precedmg stage. Fig. 6b. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 6a and just anterior to the opening of the duct. Corresponds to fig. 57i of the preceding stage. (Mag. 90 diam.) Fig. 6c. — Transverse section through the duct of the gland. Corre- sponds to fig. 5i of the preceding stage. The lateral ciliated chambers are much more extensive than in the preceding stage. (Mag. 90 diam.) Fig. M. — Transverse section just posterior to the duct. Corresponds to fig. 5j of the preceding stage. (Mag. 90 diam.) Figs. Ge-h. — Transverse sections through the coiled posterior end of the gland, cut in the planes indicated in fig. Q/c. (All mag. 90 diam.) Fig. 6i.— Transverse section through the thyroid, posterior to the coiled posterior end of the gland, to show tlie manner in which the lateral pairs of cell-groups extend for some distance behind the coiled median cell- groups. The pseudobranchial arteries are seen in this section as a single large vessel. (Mag. 90 diam.) Fig. Gj. — Ventral view of the head of a 15 cm. larva, with the ventral integument drawn to each side to expose the thyroid gland. The relation of the gland to the bars of the brancliial basket is shown. (Mag. 3 diam.) Fig. Qk. — Diagrammatic lateral view of the thyroid gland, recon- structed by measurement to show, more or less accurateley, the lonrji- tudinal relationships of the various parts of the gland. The doited lines indicate the planes through which tlie sections (fig^- 'on-i) pass. Fig. Ql. — Section through the opening of one of the cell-groups, highly magnified to show details in structure. (Mag. 925 diam.) Fig. 7. — Larva of a stage between those represented in figs. 5 and 6. About 2 J cm. in length. Fig. 8a.— Transverse section through the pharynx and anterior end of the thyroid in Amblystoma, showing the latter as a deep, ciliated groove in the floor of the former. (Mag. 240 diam.) Fig. 86. — Transverse section posterior to fig. 8a, showing the thyroid as an enclosed tube lined witli cilia. (Mag. 240 diam.) 112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., Fig. 9rt. — Transverse section through the ventral half of the head of an adult brook lamprey, to show the position and relative size of the paired salivary or basilar gland. (Mag. about 17 diam.) Fig. 9i.— Transverse section through one side of the salivary or basilar gland and its duct, just anterior to the opening of the latter into the former. (Mag. 50 diam.) Fig. 10a. — Transverse section through the ventral half of an adult brook lamprey, cutting through the fourth gill-sacs, to show the position and relative size of the thyroid gland. (Mag. 30 diam.) Fig. 10Z>.— Transverse section through the tliyroid at about the plane of the section rei)resented in fig. lOr/. (Mag. 4^0 diam.) 1902.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 113 March 4. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Thirty persons present. A paper entitled ' ' Karyokinesis and Cytokinesis in the Matura- tion, Fertilization and Cleavage of Crepidula and other Gastro- pods," by Edwin G. Conklin, Ph.D., was ordered to be printed in the Journal. The death of Francis W. Lewis, M. D. , a member, was announced. The JS^eurofibrUlary Theory and its Bearincjs upon Localization of Function in the Nervous System. — Dr. Charles K. Mill8, after referring to the correlation of nerve enei'gy with the other forms of physical energy, spoke of the reception and differentia- tion of stimuli by peripheral end organs, and the manner in which the neurofibrils or their elementary constituents transmit nervous impulses, holding that the elementary fibrils in which is stored neural energy not only conduct or transmit nervous im- pulses, but by means of the special manner in which they are arranged in the nerve centres as well as in the periphery, deter- mine the intensity and character of the dischai'ge. He regarded the fibrillary coils and bundles as representing a complicated in- duction apparatus. Localization of function is brought about by means of special arrangements of intracellular and intercellular neurofibrillary coils and plexuses in the particular regions called centres. March 11. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair, Eleven persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : " The Germination of the vSeeds of Carapa guianensis Aubl.," by John W. Harshberger, Ph.D. " Revision of the Japanese Yiviparidte, with Notes on INIehinia and Bithynia," by Henry W. Pilsbry. 8 114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, :\rARCII 18. ]\[r. Lewis Woolmax in the Chair. Eight per.sous present. The death of Carlos Berg, a correspondent, was announced. March 25. Mr. Charles Morris in the Chair. Nineteen persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : " A Collection of ^Mammals from Sumatra, with a Eeview of the Genera Tardigradus and Tragulus, ' ' by "NVitmer Stone and J. A. G. Eehn. " ^Mammals Collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott in the Region of the Indragiri River," by Gerritt S. INIiller, Jr. Miss jMadeline Dahlgren was elected a member. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115 EEVISION OF JAPANESE VIVIPARID^, WITH NOTES ON MELANIA AND BITHYNIA. BY HENRY A. I'lLSBRY. My work on these groups has been based largely upon material supplied by Mr. Y. Hirase, of Kyoto, Japan. VIVIPARIDJE. The ViviparidcB of Japan, so far as their appearance in the field of literature is concerned, are involved in mind-destroying chaos. This has been due partly to the intrinsic difficulty of the subject, but chiefly to a failure on the part of authors to correctly identify the older Oriental species. Mr. T. Iwakawa,^ of Tokyo, has pub- lished a lucid essay upon the subject, in which the natural divisions or species are for the first time correctly set forth. Owing, how- ever, to the fact that he used the names for the species given by Kobelt" (as there is probably no library in Japan sufficient for the verification of the German author's statements), the nomenclature adopted by Iwakawa requires revision. This implies no criticism of Ihe Japanese ualuralist's admirable essay. The source whence his nomenclature was draAvn was tainted; but the names aside, his grasp of the facts of nature was sound. Pseudo -Japanese species. In my opinion, the following species do not occur in Japan : Paludina oxytropis Benson, Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, V, 1836, p. 745, type locality Sylhet. Figured in Conchologia Indica, PI. 70, fig. 5, and Conch. Iconica, fig. 9. -\- P. pyramidata v. d. Busch in Philippi, Abbildungen, etc., I, p. 113. PI. 1, figs. 3, 4 (1844). Type locality, Bengal. Paludina inqallsiana Lea, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1856, p. 110. Fig- ured in Observations on the Genus Uuio, etc., XI, p. 74, PI. 2'Z, fig. 9. Type locality, Siam. Not P. ingallsiana Reeve ! I am satisfied that those who will compare authentic specimens of ' Notes on the Paludina-species of Japan, in Aanotationes Zoologica Japonenses, I, Part 3. pp. 83-93, PI. V, 1897. '^ Fauna MoUuscorum Extramarinorum Japonioe, FraukRirt, 1879. 116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, Ihese species, or in their absence the figures referred to above, will agree with me that no specimens referable to either of them have been made known from Japan. Viviparn stelmaphora Bourguignat, Rev. et Mag. de Zool., Mar.e, 1862, PI. 6, figs. 7, 8 ; Spicil. Malac, p. 135, PL 10, figs. 7, 8. Type locality, Pekin, China. While close to the Japanese V. malleatus (Rve. ), this species differs in its comparatively longer spire and smaller aperture. It seems to me related to V. lecythoides (Bens.). Its introduction into the Japanese list was due to the three spiral punctured lines, which stelmaphora has in common with several other species. Japanese species. With the above-mentioned Continental species out of the way, we find the following described from Japan : Paludina histrica Gould, 1859. Paludina japonica v. Mart., 1860. Paludina lata v. Mart., 1860. Paludina malleata Reeve, 1863. Paludina abbreviata Reeve, 1863. Paludina nitens Reeve, 1863. Vivipara sclaieri Frauenfeld, 1865. Of these seven names, three or four stand for species ; the others being sjTionyms or varieties. Viviparus malleatus (Reeve). ' PI. IX, figs. 6, 7. Paludina malleata Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. XIV, PI. 5, fig. 25 (February, 1863). Paludina abbreviata Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. XIV, PI. 5, fig. 26 (February, 1863). Paludina stelmaphora Kobelt, Fauna Moll. Extraniar. Jap., p. 122, PL 11, fig. 4. Paludina stelmaphora Iwakawa, Annot. Zool. Jap., I, p. 85, PL 5, figs. 1-4. Not V. stelmapJiora Bgt. I " Shell swollen, egg-shaped, thin, smooth, with a greenish epi- dermis; spire low wilh an obtuse apex usually worn out in old specimens. Whorls quite rounded, separated by deep sutures, each whorl wound x'ound with three punctured lines. "^ These lines bear short bristles in young or perfectly preserved adult shells. They are sometimes very faint, in part obsolete, but I believe always visible on some part of the shell. Two are on. the upper surface and one near the periphery. Even when the early whorls are preserved, there are no angles or spiral ridges on the shell, such as ' I can do no better than to quote Iwakawa's words. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 117 usually occur in the next species, though specimens ' ' often present hammered -like sculpture on the surface," hence the name malleatus. Mr. Iwakawa has traced this species from the Province Mutsu, at the north end of Nippon, to the middle Riukiu Islands. Mr. Hirase sends specimens from the islands also. Fig. 6 represents a specimen from Kagoshima, Satsuma. Fig. 7 is from a very smooth and glossy shell from Okinawa. This species is more globose than the Chinese V. stelmaphora, the tube enlarging more rapidly, producing a lower spire and larger aperture. Paludina Iceta v. Martens {Malak. Bldtt, VII, 45), described from a specimen or specimens collected by Siebold, and not figured, is a glossy form with some pimcture-lines, as in the smooth form of V. malleatm. The type has 6 whorls, and measures alt. 23, diam. 21 mm. The last whorl is distinctly angular. I think this is likely to prove to be a form of V. malleatus. \\ so, the name has priority. Viviparus japonicus (v. Martens). PL IX, fig. 1. Paludina jnponica v. Mart., Malakozoologische Blatter, VII, 1860, p. 44. Reeve, Conch. Icon., fig. 13. Kobelt, t. c., p. 120, PI. 11, fig. 1. Paludina oxytropis var. japonica Iwakawa, t. c, p. 88, PI. 5, fig. 17. Paludina oxytropis var. sclateri Iwakawa, t. c, p. 89, PI. 5, fig. 14. Large, pyramidal, dark olive-green and glossy. The earlier whorls are encircled by two keels, later becoming mere angles, and then usually disappearing on the last whorl or two. There may also be some oblique malleation in places. The last whoi-1 is obscurely angular, the angle darker. There are no puncture-lines, as in V. malleatus, though there are fine, subobsolete spiral striae. The specimen figured is from Omaki, Yamashiro. The type locality is not known, the specimens brought home by Siebold being merely labeled Japan. Viviparus japonicus var. iwakawa nov. PI. IX, fig. 3. Paludina oxytropis Bens., Kobelt, t. c, p. 123, PI. 11, figs. 6, 6a, (exclusive of synonymy). P. oxytropis Bens., Iwakawa, t. c., p. 88, PI. 5, figs. 12, 13. Not Paludina oxytropis Benson, an Indian species belonging to an appreciably difterent group ! Differing from V. japonicus chiefly in the persi.steuce in adult shells of the keel at the periphery, giving the shell " the shape of a 118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, double cone, ' ' aud the greater prominence of several spiral cords or angles above and below. Iwakawa has abundantly proven that this form intergrades perfectly with the typical V. japonicus — a fact manifest in the series before me. He holds also that it intergrades with the form called ' ' P. sclateri ' ' by Kobelt, but which is far from being the typical V. sclateri of Fraueufeld. He also gives reasons for believing that this cariuate form ' ' represents the ances- tral species whence the several varieties have arisen." It seems to be confined to the northern third of Nippon, so far as existing data show. Types of var. iwakawa ai-e from Furukawa, Rikuzen, No. 80,639 Coll. A. N. S., from No. 61 of Mr. Hirase's collection. I have not yet seen specimens of the form called sclateri by Iwakawa. It occurs in the same area as var. iwakawa, and so far as we know not in southern Nippon, where the true V. sclateri and where Kobelt' s sclateri live. Viviparus histricus (Gould). PI. IX, fig. 5. Faludina histrica GlcL, Proc. Boston See. N. H., VII, p. 41 (June, 1859); Otia Concli., p. 106. f Paluclina nitens Reeve, Conch. Icon., fig. 59 (April, 1863). The shell is umbilicate, pyramidal, brownish-green, and glossy when clean. There are no puncture-lines, though faint spiral striae exist. The whorls are cariuate at the periphery, the keel usually projecting above the sutures, but reduced to a mere low cord on the last whorl. A well-grown specimen measures, alt. 31, diam. 21 mm. Figured specimen is from Kagoshima, Satsuma. Viviparus sclateri Frauenfeld. PI. IX, fig. 4. F. sclateri Ffld., Verli. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, XV, 1865, p. 531, PI. 23, upper figures on left side. ? Paludina ingalUianus Eeeve, Conch. Icon., XIV, PI. 7, fig. 39 a, b (1863). P. ingalUiana Reeve, Kobelt, t. c, p. 124, PI. 10, fig. 14-18; PI. 11, fig. 2. P. ingallsiana Reeve, Iwakawa, t. c, p. 86, PI. 5, figs. 5-7 (not typical). fP. sclateri Kobelt, t. c, p. 121, PI. 11, fig. 3. Not P. ingalUiana Lea, 1856 ! . A pyramidal, brownish species, with strongly angular periphery and several low angles above it. The shell attains a large size, the specimen figured measuring alt. 45, diam. 30 mm., though eroded above. V. sclateri is, perhaps, a variety of V. histricus, but as I have not seen specimens connecting them, I allow it to stand here as a species, pending fuller information. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119 So far as we now know, its area of distribution does not overlap that of the carinated form of V. japonicus. Mr. Iwakawa writes : " This excellent species has hitherto been known only from Lake Biwa, to Avhich I will now add two more localities : Lake Suwa in Prov. Shinano, and Nagoya in Prov. Owari, on the strength of specimens contained in the Imperial ^luseum." " In tlie north- eastern provinces of Hondo I could not obtain a single specimen of this species, in spite of my efforts to collect during the excursion of last summer. It is very desirable to ascertain its range of distribu- tion in middle Japan and also in the southwestern provinces, where it probably also occurs." Paludina sclateri of Kobelt's Fauna seems to be an ecarinate form of this species. It is far fi'om being typical sclateri. MELANIID^. Melania reiniana var. hidachiensis nov. PI. IX, f5g. 2. Shell moderately slender, greenish-yellow above, the last whorl olive-brown under a blackish incrustation. Whorls strongly con- vex, sculptured with strong, slightly curved ribs, rather wide-spaced, 11 or 12 on the penultimate whorl, those on the last whorl becoming smaller and closer, not extending below the periphery ; the Avhole surface sculptured with spiral lirse, about 15 on the last whorl, those below the periphery continuous, those above more or less obsolete between the longitudinal ribs, conspicuous upon them. Length 23, diam. 9, length of aperture 8^^ mni. ; (> whorls remaining. Length 20, diam. 9, length of aperture 9^^ mm. ; 4^ whorls remaining. ]\[anabe, Prov. Hidachi (Mr. Y. Hirase). Types No. 80,680 Coll. A. N. S., from No. 145 of Mr, Hirase' s collection. This form has quite convex whorls, while they are flat in M. multigranosa. The ribs are strong, especially above, as in a strongly marked Goniobasis plicifera, and the spirals of the base are numer- ous and equal. M. multigranosa Bttg. is a species closely related to M. niponica Smith, and like that, known only from the neigh- borhood of Lake Biwa, while the present form is from Hidachi province, on the e^st coast northward from Tokyo Bay. It is far more strongly sculptured than 31. reiniana, which is clearly only an extreme form of M. libertina. The somewhat con)plex relationships 120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, of this group of species may be roughly expressed in a diagram, thus : Few aud coarse spirals ; strongly plicate : biwae multigranosa bidachieusis i ^ " reiniana plicosa cancellata libertina ja'ponica Many spirals ; folds obsolete : boniuensis M. hidachiensis is thus to be regarded as a modification of tlie libertina stock parallel to multigranosa, without direct genetic connection with the latter. 31. libertina var. plicosa is a central or intermediate form, whence modification in the dii'ection of stronger folds and in the opposite direction of weaker and then complete loss of folds has taken place. Melania libertina var. latifusus nov. PI. IX, fig. 8. Shell wide, with comparatively short, conic spire and produced base; evenly striated throughout or with the middle smoother, without a trace of longitudinal folds; olive or brown. Length 33, diam. 15, length of aperture 17 mm. Mino, Settsu (Mr. Y. Hii'ase). The forms tenuisulcata aud ambidextra are simply variations in development of the spirals, and not of racial import. In Ameri- can Melanians we now recognize that the same species is frequently dimorphic, having a smooth and a spirally striate form existing together in one locality, usually with all possible intervening forms. The same is unquestionably true of this Japanese species. In the varieties decussata and plicosa longitudinal folds appear, and lead the way to 31. reiniana Brot, which is strongly plicate like Gonio- basis plicifera of our West, with close spirals. Gould's description of 3f. libertina applies especially to the forms with spii'als but Avithout folds, though some of the original specimens now before me have the folds of "plicosa." Neither of the localities " Simoda and Ousima " given by Gould arc in China, as Brot and Kobelt suppose. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121 Simoda (.or Shimoda) is at the southern end of the Izu peninsula and ' ' Ousima ' ' is Oshima, a large island northeast of Okinawa, in the " Riukiu Curve." There is also an Oshima (Izu-no-Oshima) at the mouth of the Sagami Sea, one of the ' * Seven Islands of Izu. ' ' The name, meaning " big island," is somewhat common in Japan. M. retifera Tryon is a rather small form of Uhert'ma, with some- what coarse spirals but no folds. M. hakodadlensis Hartman is normal llhertina with even and rather fine spirals. The types of both are before me. M. honinensis Lea, of which two of the origi- nal lot, given by Lea, and several collected by ^Ir. S. Yoshiwara, lie before me, is a dwarfed island form of the libertlna stock, dis- tinct by its small size and somewhat attenuated contour. It has erroneously been referred to a separate section of the genus by some authors. AMNICOLID^. Bithynia striatula var. japonica Pilsbry. PI. IX, figs. 9, 10, il, 12. These Proceedings for 1901, p. 405. Figs. 9, 10, 11 are from specimens of the tyi)e lot, from INIanabe, Hidachi. Fig. 12 is the smoothest specimen of a series from Osaka. The operculum has a distinctly spiral nucleus in this species. This feature has twice been made the basis of generic distinction, but I prefer to retain the species in Bithynia imtil a thorough study can be made of the opercula of the group. Probably several stocks have independently changed from the spiral to the concentric type.* EXPLANATION OP PLATE IX Fig. 1. — Viviparus japonicus v. Mart. Omaki, Yamashiro. Fig. 2. — Melanin hidachienm Pils. IManabe, Hidachi. Fig. 3. — Viviparus japonicus var. Iioakawa Pils. Furukawa, Kikuzen, Fig. 4. — Viviparus sclateri Ffld. Near Kyoto. Fig. 0. — Viviparus histricus Gld. Kagoshima, Satsiima. Fig. 6. — Viviparus malleatus Rve. Kagoshima, Satsuma. Fig. 7. — Viviparus malleatus Rve. Okinawa, Riukiu Islands. Fig. 8. — Melania libertina var. latifusus Pils. Mine, Settsu. Figs. 9, 10, 11. — Bithynia striatula var. japonica Pils. Mauabe, Hidachi. Fig. 12. — Bitliynia striatula var. japonica Pils. Osaka. * Dr. O. von Mcillendorff has referred B. striatula to the genus Fossa- rulus Neumayr, and has discussed the status of Pere Ileude's Chinese species in a paper which came to hand since the above was written. Anmiaire du Musec Zoologique de V Academie Iinperiale des Sciences de St. Petersbourq, VI, 1901, Binuen-iuolluskeu aus West-china and Ceutral- asien, p. 101 (1902). 122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, THE GERMINATION OF THE SEEDS OF CARAPA GUIANENSIS Aubl. BY JOnX W. HARSHBERGER, ril. D. The genus Carapa (nat. ord. Meliacece) comprises a number of tropical forest trees with pinnate leaves and flowers borne in few- or many-flowered axillary panicles. The following species of ihe genus are recognized by the Index KeAvensis, viz. : Carapa guiane)isis Aubl. from Guiana and tropical Africa; C. moluccensis Lam. from the Malay archipelago; C. nicaraguensis C.D.C. from Central America; C. procera D.C. from Asia and tropical Africa; C. surinamensis Miq. from Guiana. Carapa molucceusis is a mangrove, and Karsten has removed this species from the genus Carapa, placing it under the generic name Xyloearpus. The fruits of the plants of the genus Carapa are spherical or ovoid capsules, thick, woody, mostly waned, opening by septifragal dehiscence into five valves. The seeds are large, thick, angular, with woody brown seed-coats (PI. VIII, fxgs. 1, 2, 3, 6). The food substance in the form of endosperm is wanting, and the cotyledons are thick and conferruminate (fig. 8a). The only illustrations of the fruits and seeds of this genus, as far as the writer has been able to ascertain, are those published by Engler and Prantl,^ Avhere the flowers, ovaiy and fruit of Carapa procera D.C. are shown, but not in germination. Lubbock and Karsten have studied the germination of the seeds of several related genera of the same order, 3Ieliacece, and the substance of their studies is here briefly given by way of summing up our knowledge concern- ing the sprouting of the seeds of the plants of this family. Lub- bock" describes and figures the germination and seedlings of Melia azedarach L. and Walsura piscidia Roxb. In the pride of China {Melia azederach L. ) the cotyledons are linear-oblong, obtuse, narrowed to a short petiole. The first leaves are opposite, tripar- tite ; the succeeding leaves are compound pinnate. The cotyledons ' Die natilrlichen PJlamenfamilien, III, 4, s. 277. "^ Lubbock, Contributions to our Knowledge of Seedlings, I, 335. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PIirLADELnilA. 123 leave the seed and become aerial. The cotyledons of Walsiira piscidia Roxb. are fleshy, remaining in the seed. The first pair of opposite leaves are reduced to small brown scales, the third to the sixth are small, oval, emarginate and entire. The seventh to the ninth are much larger, oval, emarginate and entire. Engler and PrantP illustrate the germination of the seeds of a species of Xyloearpns (Carapa moluccensis) , the illustration being copied from a paper by Karsten.* From the figure (i?), it would appear that the cotyledons remain enclosed in the seed, the hypocotyl being thick and fleshy. The radicular part, from which the secondary roots arise, is swollen and bulb-like. The first twelve pairs of leaves are opposite and scale-like. The stem arises from the point where the hj'pocotyl emerges from the seed. The following descrip- tion of the germination of the seeds of Carapa guianensis Aubl. from material obtained in July, 1901, at Castleton, Jamaica, and preserved in two per cent, formalin, is, therefore, given as in part a contribution to the biology of the order Meliacece. The capsule of this plant is large, about the size and shape of a cocoanut. It is ridged with four prominent warty-looking ridges which come together in a heavy apical protuberance. There are four valves, thick (^ inch) and woody, separating from each other from the base upw^ard to the apex. The capsule is filled with angular seeds (figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6), with a smooth or slightly wrinkled, brown outer seed-coat. Ten or a dozen of these large seeds are snugly packed away inside the woody fruit walls. Germination begins after the capsule has dehisced and while the fruit still lies upon the surface of the ground beneath the parent tree. The seeds start to germinate (fig. 6) before they fall out of the capsule, and later they are held in place by the intricately woven mass of secondarj'^ roots which grow in all directions be- tween the closely wedged seeds. The stem elongates some four to six inches and emerges from the interior of the partially opened seed vessel between the slightly sprung edges of the valves (figs. 4, 5). All of the seeds of a single capsule may germinate in situ, and the complex of roots makes it a rather difficult matter to sep- arate the seeds from each other after germination has once begun. It Avould seem that the seeds lose their vitality more or less quickly ' Engler and Prantl, Die naiurlichen Pflanzenfam., Ill, 4, 279. * Karsten, BibUotheca Botaniea, XXII, 21, Pis. 7 and 8. 124 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, if allowed to remain for some time in a dry place. Some seeds that were left in a cool but dry room began to lose water and to decrease in weight, so that it seems that immediate germination is a means of insuring the perpetuation of the species. The period of germination is gone through quite rapidly. The seeds sprout quickly and in about a month's time the plants are a foot high with several well-developed pinnate leaves of a rich, glossy green color (fig. 9). The seeds are about an inch to an inch and a half in diameter with sharp angular edges (figs. 1, 3). They are tetrahedra, with one of their faces, that applied to the rounded interior of the capsule, with a spherical curvature (fig. 3). The seed-coats are woody and about ^ inch thick. The interior of the seed is filled up with the fleshy couferruminate cotyledons, which are of a yellowish-white color in section (fig. 8a). The parenchy- matous cells of the cotyledonary masses are large, with compara- tively thin cell walls. Sections of the cotyledonary tissue treated with glycerine cleai's the material and lozenge-shaped crystalloids are seen imbedded in the protoplasm of the cells (fig. 86). Other sections treated with chloroform and then with iodine show these crystalloids quite clearly by the brownish-yellow hue that they take, the protoplasm staining a bright yellow color. At first it was thought that globoids were present because of the aggregated rounded masses found in the cells that were treated Avith alcohol. The application of chloroform and ether showed these masses to be oily in character. The oil dissolves readily in the chloroform, but tardily in the ether. In some old seeds, here and there, paren- chyma cells were found to be filled with a yellowish resin-like sub- stance, but more careful investigation failed to demonstrate the resinous nature of this substance. Starch is absent as a reserve material from these seeds. The materials, therefore, stored in the cotyledon consist of oil, proteid bodies (crystalloids) and proto- plasm. This determination is substantiated by the fact that from the seeds of Carapa procera, C. guianensis, a commercial oil is obtained, having a slightly unpleasant smell and a bitter taste. This oil is known variously as Carapa oil, Talliconah oil. Crap oil, Carap oil, Andiroba oil, Touloucouna oil, or Coondi oil. The natives of Guiana rub their bodies with it as a protection against mosquitoes. Germination begins by the cracking of the testa, or outer seed- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125 coat, -with the lifting off of flaky pieces (figs. 4 and 5). The tegmen is also broken through by the knob-like protruding por- tion of the embryo (figs. 4, 5). The radicle first protrudes as a roughened thick tubercular mass about one-fourth of an inch long, and from this arise six to ten secondary roots (fig. 4). The phmiule, which points away from the tip of the ladicle, lies in a cup-shaped depression formed by the swollen petiole-like bases of the conferruminate cotyledons (figs. 7, 8a). It is about two-fifths of an inch long. The base of it appears as a small knob through the slit left between the bases of the cotyledons. The hypocotyl is about one-fourth of an inch long. As the radicle grows out and down, the plumule straightens out by first assuming a U-shaped form (figs. 8, 8o). Later it becomes straight and grows upright. The radicle of Carapa guianensis does not assume the rounded, tuber- like form of that of the mangrove plant {Xylocarpus granatum Koen., Carapa moluceensis Lam.), figured and described by Kars- ten, nor does it show the horizontal aerating roots which develop vertically horn-like upgrowths with numerous lenticels for breathing purposes. The germination of the seeds of these two species is somewhat similar. The greatest difference lies in the formation of tuber-like radicle and the pneumatodes in Carapa moluceensis, the latter being developed as an adaptation to the conditions of a littoral life and growth in the water. Carapa guianensis, a land plant, in not possessing these structures during germination, shows that it is more primitive than the tree of mangrove habit which lives with its roots submerged. The stem of the seedling rapidly elongates, bearing at first closely appressed scale leaves (fig. 10). After a time, there arises a pair of opposite, abruptly pinnate, bijugate leaves; the stem becoming woody at the base. Then succeed a pair of sub-opposite leaves which are large and monojugate. Each leaflet has a swollen pul- vinus-like base. The succeeding leaves are bijugate; each leaflet has a pulvinus and thick dark-green blade about three inches wide and five inches long. 126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, EXPLANATION OF PLATE YIII. Fig. 1. — Side view of seed of Carapa guianensis Aubl. Fig. 2. — Idem, end view of seed. Fig, 3. — Seed of tetraliedral form from centre of the capsule. Fig. 4. — Seed with craclced seed-coats and protruding radicle. Fig. 5.— Seed showing roots, radicle, hypocotyl and stem papilla (p). Fig. 5«.— Longitudinal section of the lower part of the embrj-o. Fig. 6. — Seed which has just started to licrmiuate. Fig. 7. — Seed that has germinated (partially diagrammatic), showing the lower bent ends of the two conferruminate cotyledons. Fig. 8. — Seed in natural view, showing stem bent in U-shaped manner and the radicle. Fig. 8a. — Longitudinal section of seed and embryo, showing solution of the reserve food. Fig. 86. — Several parenchyma cells from ungerminated seed, showing protoplasm and crystalloids. Fig. 9. — Phintlet somewliat advanced. Fig. 10. — Plant independent of reserve food ; cotyledonary scars shown at (a). 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 127 A COLLECTION OF MAMMALS FROM SUMATRA. WITH A REVIEW OF THE GENERA NYCTICEBUS AND TRAGULUS. BY WITMER STONE AND J. A. G. REHN. The Academy of Natural Science;* of Philadelphia has recently- received, through the geuerosity of ^Ir. Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller, a valuable zoological collection from Suma- tra, which was made by them during their exploration of the island, from August to November, 1901. The mammals contained in this collection form the basis of the present paper. The authors are also indebted to the U. S. National Museum for the privilege of examining certain specimens in con- nection with their study of the genus Nycticehus, the material having been loaned by Mr. Gerrit S. Miller, Jr. , Assistant Curator of Mammals. The Harrison and Hiller collection comprises sixty-five speci- mens, secured mainly at Goenong Soegi, Lampong District, at an elevation of less than 500 feet, and partly in the highlands of Padang Bovenland, at Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, 1,500 to 3,000 feet. Sus vittatus Mull, and Schl. Sus vittaius Miill. and Schl., Vecli. I, p. 172, Pis. 20 and 32, fig. 5. Two head skins and skulls, male and female, loaned for exam- ination by Dr. Hiller appear to belong to this species. Tragulus napu (Cuv.). 3/oschus napu (F. Cuvier), Hist. Nat. dcs Mum., IV, livre 37, November, 1822. Three specimens, Goenong Soegi, Lampong District, October- November, 1901. These agree very well with the figure in the Hist. Nat. des Mavi.; the color of the dorsal surface, the limbs and the sides agreeing very closely, the only difference being the presence of a well-defined transverse gular bar which is absent or else very faintly defined in the figure. 128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, Tragulus kanchil (Raffles). 18:i-2. Moschus kanchil Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XIH, p. 2(52. ^ The relationship and synonymy of tliis species are discussed below. There is one skin in the collection from Goenong Soegi, Lampong District, Revision of the Genus Tragulus. — The consideration of the proper specific appellation for the above species has led to a study of the nomenclature of the entire genus, the results of which are given below. The synonymy of the Chevrotains has long been in- tricately involved, although Blanford in his Mammals of British India has simplified it to a considerable extent. The main faults with his revision are his failure to recognize two apparently well- marked species and his misapplication of the name javanieus. Exclusive of the new forms recently described by Mr. G. P. Miller, Jr., which are accompanied by such detailed diagnoses and exact localities that they can easily be identified, there seem to be six distinct species of Tragulus from the Indo-Malay region. These may be considered in groups as follows : (1) The mottled T. viem i7in a Erxl., about which there is no con- fusion. (2) T. stanleyanus Gray, M'hich is equally distinct. (3) The " Napu," the largest of the group, and the one called by Blanford and other authors " T. napu." (4) Three small species which Blanford unites under the name ' ' T. javanicus. ' ' One of these three is unquestionably the Moschvs javanicus of Gmelin, which has for its basis the description of Pallas, Spicil. ZooL, XII, p. 18. And as Blanford considered the three as rep- resenting but one species, he did perfectly right in adopting this name, which was apparently the oldest known to him. The trouble is that Osbeck, in 1765, independently described a Chevrotain as Cervus javanicus, and by those who begin with the tenth edition of Linnseus this name must be considered. Osbeck's description is far from satisfactory, but applies without question to a species of Tragulus.^ He comments on the lack of horns and describes the dentition of what he considers the male, though the ' His " nine back teeth " are accounted for by the ridges of the poste- rior molars, each of which he evidently took for a separate tooth ! 1902.] NATURAL SUIExNUES OF PHILADELPHIA, 129 length of the upper canines (equal 1o the incisors) indicates a female, then he says, " Die Farbe ist braunrothlich. Der Bock . . . . ist grosser als das Thier, und hat weisse Seiten streifen, die der Liinge nach laufen. ' ' Taken altogether there seems little doubt that he had a female of the ' ' Napu ' ' and a female of the smaller Chevrotain of Java, The former from its larger size he regarded as the male, and the white stripes could easily be accounted for by the whitish mottlings and lighter bases to the hairs on the sides of the " Napu," which produce the appearance of irregular stripes when the skin is wrinkled or the hair disturbed, and contrast strongly with the uni- form coloration of the sides of the smaller species. If this view be accepted, the name T. javanieus Osbeck will have to be applied to the " Napu," as the whole of Osbeck' s description applies to the " Buch " or larger of his specimens. This view we propose to follow. If, on the other hand, it is claimed that Osbeck' s description is not sufficiently clear to refer it to a definite species it will neverthe- less preclude the use of the later javanicus Gmeliu, since Osbeck certainly described some species of Chevrotain. The larger animal (the " Napu") will then be known as T. napu Cuvier and the smaller one as T. pelandoe (Ham, Smith), His description ^ and reference to the plate of the " Pygmy Musk" in Shaw's Natural- ists' Miscellany, I, PI. Ill, seem to sufiliciently indicate the small Javan Chevrotain, but the further description given by Blvth' leaves no doubt about the animal that he had in view. Whether the "Napu" of Java is identical with that of Sumatra we are unable to say, but from the tendency it has to vary in each island, as shown by G. S. Miller's recent papers, it seems hardly likely, and we prefer to use Tragulus napu Cuvier for the Sumatran animal, leaving T. javanicus Osbeck for the Javan form. Should they prove identical the latter name of course must prevail. Having disposed of the imme java)iicus and the two species upon which it has been bestowed, we come to the consideration of the relationship of the three small Chevrotains which are united under " Tragulus javanicus" in Blanford's work. The Javan species we have already shown must be known as Tragulus pelandoe Ham. ^ Vide Griff., Anim. Kingdom, IV, p. 66, 1837. ' Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1858; p. 277. 130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Marcll, Smith. The Sumatran animal, the Mosehus kanchil of Raffles, seems from specimens before us to be perfectly distinct. It is well described by Raffles* and by Blyth,^ and can always be distin- guished by the fact that the two dark stripes on the throat are joined together anteriorly while in T. pelandoc they are separate, never forming a complete A. The third species which Blanford has apparently failed to recognize as distinct is the Tragulus rufi- venter of Gray® an animal resembling T. kanchil in pattern of markings, but of a very different color, being very bright tawny with nearly the whole of the belly distinctly fulvous. Gray attrib- utes this species with a query to Malacca and the Indian Peninsula, while a specimen. No. 642 Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci., acquired many years ago, is simply labeled " India." The following table will give an idea of the relationship of the several species — exclusive of those recently described by Mr. Miller : a. — Body spotted, chin and throat hairy, . . . T. vieminna. b. — Body not spotted, chin and longitudinal strip between the rami of the mandible nearly or quite naked. I. — Larger, length 25 ins. or more. a'. — Color above brilliant orange-rufous, hairs tipped with black from the shoulders back, a black median lon- gitudinal stripe dowTi the face and a dark line from the eye to the nose. Hair on neck above and below coarse and rough. Diagonal orange lines on lower neck broad and united posteriorly by a trans- verse band, forming a triangle open at the apex, a pale-buff band down centre of belly, branching out to the base of the limbs, . . T. stanleyanus. h'. — Color above blackish with fulvous bases to the hairs. Head and neck mixed with buff, darkest on top of head, down the middle of the face and a band down the nape. Sides of body becoming nearly white at base of hair with dark-brown tips, rest of lower parts white except marks on neck, which are of the same pattern as in the last, but diagonal stripes longer and narrower, T. napu. Perhaps identical with this is . . . jT. javanicus. II. —Smaller, length 18-21 ins. General color yellowish-brown with black tips to the hair, lighter on sides, imder parts white and forelegs distinctly orange -rufous. * Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 262. * Proc. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1858, p. 276. 6 P. Z. S., 1836, p. 65. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 131 a'. — Sides of neck, diagonal stripes and back nearly the same color, top of head darker and a strongly marked black longitudinal stripe on the nape from the occiput to the shoulders, where it shades into the general color of the back. Diagonal stripes on the neck united anteriorly as well as at the base, making a complete triangle, a slender brown median stripe between the forelegs, T. kanehil. h'. — Similar, but sides of neck and diagonal stripes on lower throat distinctly gray, contrasting with the A'ellow- brown of the back, darker nape band obsolete, and diagonal stripes always seimrated anteriorly, T. pelandoc. c'. - Very different, and smallest of the group. Prevail- ing color dark orange-rufous, most of the hairs Avith black tips, producing a rich brown appearance on back and top of head ; stripe on nape black, in sharp contrast to the sides of the neck ; diagonal stripes orange-rufous mingled with black-tipped hairs joined anteriorly and posteriorly, leaving only a narrow white median stripe, a transverse rufous baud at the base of the mandible ; middlle of belly uniform light orange-rufous, leaving only the inside of the flanks and a spot on each side at the base of the forelegs white, . T. fulviventer. Tragulus meminna (Erxl.)- 1777. Moschus meminna Erxl., Syst. Reg. An., p. 322. 1843. Meminna indica Gray, List Mam. Brit. Mus., p. 172. Hah. — Peninsular India and Ceylon. Tragulus stanleyanus (Gray). 1836. Moschus Stanleyanus Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc, p. 65. Hah. — Malacca, Java. Tragulus javanicus (Osbeck). 1765. Cervus javanicus Osbeck, Raise nacli Ostindien und Ciiina, p 357. 1858. Tragulus fuscaius Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Benjr., XXVII, p. 278. 1843. Tragulus javanicus Gray, List. Mam. Brit. Mus., p. 173. Hah. — Java. Tragulus napu (F. Cuv.). 1822. Moschus napu F. Cuv., Hist. Nat. Mam., PI. 329. 1822. Moschus javanicus ^di.{\\es, Traus. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 262. Hah. — Sumatra. 132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, Tragalus pelandoc (Ham. Smith). 1827. Moschus Pdandoc Ham. Smith, Griff., Aaim. Kingdom, IV, p. 60. 1788. Moschus javanicus Grm., Syst. Nat., I, p. 174 (nee. Osbeek). Tragulus javanicus Auct. Hah. — Java. Tragulus fulviventer (Gray). 1836. Moschus fuUitenter Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., p. 65. Hab. — " Malacca aud Indian Peninsula ?" Tragulus nigricans Thomas. 1893. Tragulus nigricans Thomas, Ann. Mag. Nat. Ilist., 6th Series, IX, p. 354. Hab. — Philippines (no specimen examined). Tragulus mimenoides Hodgs. Jour, As. Soc. Bengal. Tragulus malaccensis Gray, Cat. Mam., 1843. These are nomina nuda and have no standing. Eusa unicolor equinus (Cuvier). 1833. Genus equinus Cuvier, Ossemens Fossiles, 3d Ed., IV, p. 45. One skin of a young male. Goenong Soegi. Mus alexandrinus Geoflfny. 1818. Mus alexandrinus Geoffroy, Description de I'Egypte, Mam- miferes, p. 733. Five specimens in spirits. Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, Pa- dangsche Bovenland. August-September. Sciurus vittatus Raffles. 1833. Sciurus vittatus Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, London, XIII, p. 359. Two specimens, male and female. Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, Padangsche Bovenland. August or September. Mr. Bonhote, in his recent review of this group, ^ states that the red tip to the tail is a conspicuous and constant mark. The male of the above pair has it, but the female has not, so that it would seem to be of doubtful value as a diagnostic character. Sciurus prevostii harrisoni subsp. nov. One specimen. No. 6,651, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila. Goe- nong Soegi, Lampong District, Sumatra. Coll. Alfred C. HarrLson, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. October-November, 1901. Apparently very similar to S. prevostii bangkamis of Schlegel, as ' Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 7th Series, VII, pp. 444-445. 1902.] XATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 133 defined by J. L. Bouhote,^ but with slight grayish wliile tips to the hairs of the tail, from near Ihe base to within about an inch of the tip. Very distinct from >S. p. rafflesi. Pure black above, bright " orange-rufous " (Ridgway) below (contrasting strongly with the color of raffesi, which is nearly the " bay "of Ridgway). White stripe on the side as in rafflesi, though the orange-rufous comes higher up on the outside of the hind legs. Sides of face iron-gray, but lighter than in rafflesi, almost white on the sides of the nose, chin of the same color as the cheeks without the longitudinal black line of rafflesi. A number of black hairs on the sides of the body adjoin- ing the white stripe are tipped with orange-rufous, and those farther back with white ; hairs of tail tipped with grayish- white as above described. Dimensions as in S. p. rafflesi. We should hesitate to describe another race of these squirrels were it not for Mr. Bonhote's statements regarding their constancy within geographic limits and the fact that no rufous-bellied member of the group has apparently been hitherto found on Sumatra. The occurrence of this animal side by side with >S'. p. rafflesi makes us strongly suspect that the two are specifically distinct, but without more material it woidd be impossible to decide upon the proper arrangement of all tlie members of the group, should tliat vieW' be accepted. Sciurus prevostii rafflesii (Vigors and Horsf.). 1828. Sciurus Bafflesii Yigors and Horsf,, Zool. Jour., IV, p. 113. Five specimens from Goenong Soegi, Lampoug District. Octo- ber-November. Funambulus insignia (Desmarest). 1823. Sciurus insignis Desmarest, Mammalogie, 11, p. 544. One male. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October and November. This specimen seems to approach to F. i. divcrstts Thomas,® being indeed quite red on the sides and the white of the under part dis- tinctly red-tinted. We have no other specimens for comparison, however. ^Ann. Maq. Nat. Hist.. 7, VIT, pp. 171, 177. *Ann. and Mag. (7), 11, p. 248. 134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [M:\rch, Eatufa bioolor hypoleuca (Horsfield). 1824. Sciurus hypoleucos Horsfield, Zool. Res. in Java (pages not numbered). One specimen. Goenoug Soegi, Lainpoug District. October and November. As compared witli two Javan examples, this specimen seems quite distinct. It is decidedly lighter, the central dorsal region being straw color instead of dull ochraceous, the rump pale-brown with ochraceous haii's interspersed instead of blackish-brown with silvery hairs ; the under fur of the upper parts is smoky-gray instead of blackish-brown, and the ventral surface almost pure white instead of tinged with pale ochraceous. Horsfield' s specimen came from Sumatra and seems to agree with the one in hand. Eatufa affinis (Raffles). 1822. Sciurus affinis Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc,, London, XIII, p. 259. Two specimens, male and female. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October and November. The male is darker than the female, especially the tail, which is nearly chocolate color instead of ochraceous brown ; the white of the head is also more clearly defined. Tupaia tana Raffles. 1822. Tupaia tana Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, London, XIII, p. 257. Six specimens. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October and November. These specimens seem lo be all referable to the above species, although they present considerable variation in color and size. The largest is nearly black above with an underlying tint of maroon, while the hairs of the head and shoulders are finely annu- lated with buff ; below it is didl maroon, the tail a brighter shade of the same. Another nearly the same size is lighter above with the buff annulations prevailing over the shoulders, and extending back nearly to the tail on some of the hairs. Tail bright maroon above and below, under parts bright tawny with a tinge of maroon. Two small specimens, apparently young, have a still greater admixture of buft" on the head, shouldere and back, while the under parts are more tinged with buff. The skulls are nmch shorter with the protruding maxillaries less developed. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 135 Galeopithecus volans (Linn.). Five specimens of this iuterestiug animal were obtained. They exhibit some variation in the oolor of the back, one being distinctly browner than the others, but without material for comparison it would be impossible to say whether they are identical with speci- mens from other parts of the Malay region. The nomenclature of the animal is somewhat involved, and a number of proposed names would have to be considered if a subdivision should be deemed desirable. Geoffroy ^^ proposed three species, rufus, variegaius and ternatensis. The descriptions are very brief and for only one is the type locality given, i.e., T. variegaius from Java. G. ternatensis is based upon Seba's plate, which was also in part tlie basis of Linnaeus' Lemur volans. Temminck, in the introduction of his Monogr. Mammalium, states that there are only two species of Galeopithecus, and that Geoffroy' s three species are not valid. He does not, however, name his " two species." Fischer also recognizes two species, calling the Malay one volans and the Philippine one variegatus Geof . , in spite of the fact that the latter name was based on a Javan specimen ! He also mentions that Temminck recognized two species, " (?. variegatus, from Java and islands of the Indian Archipelago, and O. marmoratus, from Sumatra and Borneo." Where Temminck described G. marmo- ratus we have been unable to discover, though Wagner in Schreber's Saugthiere, Suppl. I, p. 324, says " fauna japon. auct. Siebold." Blainville, in his Osteographie, fasc. 3, p. 48, also quotes Tem- minck's two species giving the latter one as " macrurus .'" Waterhouse first clearly separated the Philippine species as G. pJiillppensis,^^ and at the same time named the species of the Indian Archipelago G. temmincki. Wagner in Schreber's Saugthiere also proposes G. undaius for an animal which he thinks may be the same as G. marmoratus Temm. The Sumatrau animal, if distinct, should bear AVagner's name, unless it is found that Temminck actually did publish a diagnosis of his G. marmoratus. The othef names, it seems to us, must all be regarded as synonyms of G. volans Linn., except, of coui-se, G. philippensis Waterhouse. 1" Cours d' Eist. Nat., 1829, p. 37. "P. Z. S., 1838, p. 119. 136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, Pteropus vampyrus (Linnaeus). 1758. [ Vcspcrtilio'] vampyrus Linnncns, Syst. Nat., X ed., p. 31. Six specimeus, five iu spirits, one skin. Batu Sangkar, Tauah Datar, Padangsche Boveuland. August or September. One skin. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October or November. Cynopterus titthaecheilus (Temminck). 1827. Pteropus titthcBcheilus Temminck, Monogr. Mamm., I, p. 198. Two alcoholic specimens. Batu Sangkar, Tauah Datar, Pa- dangsche Bovenlaud. August or September. One alcoholic specimen. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October or November. Pipistrellus tenuis (Temminck). 1827. Vespertilio tenuis Temminck, Monogr. Mamm., 11, p. 229. One alcoholic specimen. Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, Pa- dangsche Bovenlaud. August or September. One alcoholic specimen. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October or November. Felis bengalensis Kerr. 1792. Felis bengalensis Kerr, Animal Kingdom, p. 151. Three kittens in spirits. Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, Pa- dangsche Bovenlaud. August or September. Arctogale leucotis BIyth. 1851. Horsficld's Catalogue, East India Mas., p. 66. One adult male. Putorius nudipes F. Cuv. 1823. Putorius nudipes P. Cuv., Mam. Lith., Ill, PI. 149. 1863. Oymnopus leucocephalus Gray, P. Z. S., p. 119. One specimen of a bright golden-yellow with grayish-white head. From Lampong District. This animal is unquestionably the leucocejihalus of Gray, and since he refers to Cuvier's earlier name I have no doubt but they are identical, though I have not been able to consult Cuvier's j^lale. Revision of the Genus Nyctice^s. — The identification of tlie specimens of Slow Loris in the collection has led to a study of the several allied species and the nomenclature of the genus, with some interesting results. These Lemurs fall naturally into two very distinct groups : ( 1 ) 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 137 The Slender Loris, " Loris gracilis" of most authors; and (2) the Slow Loris and its allies, "Nydieebus tardir/radus " Auct, The first specific name to be proposed for any of them was Lemur tardigradus.^'^ This was based upon the following references: (1) L. ecaudatus, 3fus. Ad. Fr., I, p. 3. (2) Simla ecaudata unguibus indicis subulatis." (3) Animal cynocephalum tardigradum. " (4) Animal elegantissimum robinsonii.'^ The first I'eference seems to refer exclusively to the Slender Loris, the habitat being Ceylon and the characters given " uaso produc- tiore brachiis manibus pedibusque longis tenuibus." The second is a mere catalogue name. Under the third come two plates of Seba with long descriptions ; the first unquestionably refers to the Slender Loris, while, although the text to the second plate seems to refer in part to the Slow Loris, the figure itself looks more like the Slender Loris. The last reference is again the Slender Loris from " Ceylon," and the produced rostrum is especially mentioned. It will thus be seen that, with the exception of the second plate of Seba, which is of rather doubtful application, all of the quota- tions upon which Lemur tardigradus Linn, are based refer to the Slender Loris, "L. gracilis" Auct., and it is remarkable that the name should have been so imiversally applied to the Nycticebus. Another important point brought out in our investigation is the failure of apparently all authors to consider Boddaert' s observations on these animals, Elenchus animalium, p. 67 (1784). He there proposes a genus Tardigradus with two species, T. loris = Slender L(jris and T. coucang = Slow Loris, and correctly refers Lemur tardigradus Linn, to the former. As this is the first attempt to establish a separate genus for these animals, the name Tardigradus must be adopted for the Slender Loris. Furthermore, coucang being the first name proposed for the Slow Loris must be adopted for it. Geoff roy did not propose his genus Loris until 179G, ui Magasia Encyclopedique, Vol. I, pp. 48-49. This work being inaccessible to us, we are indebted to Mr. Outram Bangs for a transcript of '2 Linnaeus, Syst. Nat, X, p. 29. " 8yst. Nat., 5, n. 2. ^"■Scb. Mas., I, p. 55, t. 35, f. 1, 2 ; t. 47, f. 1. ^'^Ray. Quad., p. 161. 138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, the reference, from a copy in the Boston Public Library. From this it seems that Loris Geoff, is a synonym of Tardigradus Bodd. , being based upon the same two animals, L. gracilis = Slender Loris and L. tardigradus = Slow Loris. Although Geoff roy undoubtedly had the Slow Loris in mind for his second species, as shown by his reference to Vosmaer, whose plate is excellent, nevertheless in referring it to L. tardigradus Linn, he originated the unfortunate error which has been almost univei-sally followed by subsequent authors. The genus Nydicebm proposed by Geoff roy in 1812 was unquestionably based upon the Slow Loris, and will hold for it and its allies, unless Bradycebus Cuv. et Geoffr. is avail- able. Their genus is said to be published in 3fem. Class. Mamm. and in Mag. Encyclop., but we have not yet been able to locate it. We shall have (hen the following synonymy for these genera : TARDIGEADirs Bodd. 1784. Tardigradus Bodd., Elenclius Anim., p. 67 (type T. loris Bodd. = Lemur tardigradus Liun.). 179R. Loris Geoff.. Mag. Encyclop.. I. pp. 48-49. 1811. Stenops Illig., Prodrom. Syst. Mam. et Avium, p. 73. NYCTICEBirS Geofif. 1812. Xycticebus Geoff., Ann. du Mus. Paris, XIX, p. 162. Type. ? 1795. Bradycebus Cuv. et Geoffr , Mem. Class. Mamm. After stud}'ing a number of specimens, partly from the Acad- emy's collection and partly loaned by the U. S, National Museum through Mr. G. S. Miller, Jr., Assistant Curator of Mammals, it appears that the variation in the Slow Lemurs, recognized by Anderson and Blanford as simply varietal, is worthy of a more definite treatment. It would .«eem from the material at our disposal that there are five distinct forms, which we would regard as subspecies rather than as species, as they are olivioasly geographic races of one species. The N. menagensis of the Philippines has not been considered, as no specimens are available and it is therefore impossible to judge of its relationship with the ^Malayan group. The forms may be distinguished as follows : a. — General color ashy-gray, slightly tinged with rufous. Crown of head without an extensive patch of bro\vn. b. — Head with indistinct lines extending to the eyes and ears. Dorsal line fading away on crown of head, coueang Boddaert. 1902.] NATURAL SCrEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 139 bb. — Head with four distinct lines extending to a common centre on the crown of the head. Dorsal line distinct on the crown of head, . . c. javanicus E. Geoffrov. aa. — General color rufescent gray. Crown of head with a consid- erable blotch of brown. b. — General tint pale rufescent; dorsal line and crown patch not very distinctly marked and of a rufous tint, the latter involving the eai-s, . c. malaianu-'< Anderson. bb. — General tint deep rufescent; dorsal line and crown patch very distinct and of a deep chestnut tint, the latter not involving the ears, . . . c. natuine n. subsp. bbb. — General color chestnut rufescent, more or less washed with gray; dorsal line very distinct, deeply colored; crown patch large, fading into the general surrounding tint, c. hilleri n. subsp. Regarding the Teuasserim form^® we can say nothing, as no speci- mens from that region are available. Nycticebus couoang hilleri n. subsp. 1822. Lemur tnrdigradus Raffles (not of Liuii.), Trims. Linn. Soc. London, XIII, p. 247. Type, d, No. 6,590, Acad. Xat. Sci. Phila. Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, Padangsche Bovenland, Sumatra. August or Sep- tember, 1901. Collected and presented by ■Mr. A. C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. Distribution. — Specimens from the type locality only have been examined, but it is possible the form is found throughout the island. Characters. — This form is most nearly related to malainus and javanicus, but diffei*s from the former in the much more strongly marked doi-sal line, and in the predominance of chestnut-brown and not ochraceous in the general tint. Yvoui javanicus it diffei*s in the much less definite head bars, in the broad crown patch and in the gradual transition from the latter to the surrounding tint. Color. — General color of the upper parts reddish-cinnamon (between Ridgway's russet and cinnamon), more or less washed with ecru, the more noticeable toward the extremities. Dorsal line very distinct, seal-brown and more or less visible to the caudal region. Crown patch broad, mai-s brown with the four head bare not well marked, all merging gradually into the general hoary tint which suffuses the head ; eyes suiTounded by the customary black ring; interocular stripe clear white; cheeks whitish, sometimes " Vide Blansford, Mavim. Brit. Ind., pp. 45 and 40. 140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Marcb, slightly suffused with blackish-gray. General color of the lower surface pale fawn, throat whitish. Specimens examined. — Three in spirits, all from the type locality. Nycticebus coucang javanicus (E. Geoffroy). 1812. JYi/cticebiis javanicus E. Geoffroy, Ann. du Museum, XIX, p. 164. Type locality and distribution. — Java. Two specimens examined : Java, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Nycticebus coucang natunae u. subsp. 1894. Nijcticebas tardigradus Thomas and Ilartert, Novitates Zoolog- icifi, I, p. 655. 1895. Nycticebus tardigradus Thomas and Ilartert, Novitates Zool- ogicfe, II, p. 489. 1901. Nycticebus tardigradus Miller, Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., Ill, p. lo8. T)Tpe. c^, No. 104,599, United States National Museum, Bun- garan, Natuna Islands, July 28, 1900. Collected and presented by Dr. W. L. Abbott. Distribution. — As far as known only the type locality. Characters. — Comparison of this form with any others of the specifis is vmnecessary as the color and pattern are quite distinctive. Color. — General color of the upper parts rich russet brown (close to mars brown of Ridgway), palest on the limbs, strongest on the shoulders. Dorsal line rich vandyke brown, tending toward seal brown, the stripe brown on the shoulder, decreasing in width and intensity posteriorly, becoming almost obsolete on the rump ; general tint on each side of the dorsal line is overcast with a silvery " bloom," which is caused by the tips of the hairs being of that tint." Crown patch broad, rich burnt umber, extending from ear to ear, but not involving them, anteriorly sending a broad bar to the upper margin of the customary black ocular rings; cheeks suffused with dusky brown. Anterior limbs with the extremities much lighter in color than the remainder of the limbs. Lower surface pale cinnamon, throat silvery white. Specimens examined. — One, the type. * ' The hair on all the dorsal surface is more or less tipped with silvery, but this character is much more apparent in the portion mentioned above. The presence of the silvery suffusion near the dorsal line is shared hj javanicus, but in that form distinct longitudinal bars are formed. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141 Nyoticebus couoang (Boddaert). 1783. Tardigradus coucang Boddaert, Elenchus Animalium, p. 67. 1812. Nyctkebus hengalensis £. Geoft'roy, Ann. du Museum, XIX, p. 164. 1867. Nyctieebus cinereus Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arcliiv. du Mu- seum Bull., Ill, p. 11. Type locality. — Bengal. Distribution. — According to Anderson/^ this form is found from Assam through Upper Bunna to Siani. No specimens are available for examination. Nyctioebus coucang malaianus (Anderson). 1881. Nyctieebus tardigradus var. malaiana Anderson, Catal. ISIamm. Ind. Mus., I, p. 95. Type locality. — None stated. Distribution. — Chittagong, through Arakan at least as far .south as Tringanu, Lower Siam. • Two specimens examined: "Bengal," Acad. Nat. Sci. Phi la. ; Tringann, Malay Peninsula, U. S. N. M. Semnopithecus melalophos (Raffles). 1833. Simia melalophos Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, London, XIII, p. 345. Two specimens in spirits. Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, Pa- dangsche Bovenland. August or September. These specimens still retain the milk dentition, and the dusky suffusion of the upper parts extends along the upper surface of the tail. One skin. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October or November. This specimen has the upper parts much lighter and more uni- formly colored than the alcoholic specimens. Semnopithecus maurus (Schreber). 1775. Simia maura Schreber, Siiugtliiere, I, p. 107, PI. XXII B. Two skins. Goenong Soegi, Lampong District. October and November. Semnopithecus mitratus (Esch.). Adult female and young. Lampong. 1* Catal. Mamm. Ind. Mus., I, p. 95. 142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, Symphalangus'-' syndactylus (Raffles). 1822. Simla syndactyla Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XIII, p. 241. One old male, preserved entire in spirits. Batu Saugkar, Tanai Datar, Padangsche Bovenland. August or September. And two males and a female, Goeuong Soegi. October and November. The first specimen measures : Length, crown to anus, 531 mm. Extreme reach from tip of longest fingers (approxi- mately), 1536 mm. Length of forearm, 309 mm. ^'For the adoption of Symj)halangus Gloger {Hand.-u. Hilfsb. Natxtr- (jesch., I, p. 34, 1841) in place of Siamanga Gray {List. Mam. Brit. Mus., p. 1, 1843), see Palmer, Science, n. s., X, p. 493, 1899. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143 MAMMALS COLLECTED BY DR. W. L. ABBOTT IN THE REGION OF THE INDRAGIRI RIVER, SUMATRA. BY GERRIT S. JMILLEK, JR. During Augu.st and September, 1901, Dr. AV. L. Abbott vis- ited the Indragiri river, eastern Sumatra, and the two large islands opposite its mouth, Linga and Sinkep. The valuable collections which he secured were all presented to the United States National Museum. This paper contains an account of the mammals, and is published here by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Linga Island was visited by Dr. Abbott and Mr. C. Boden Klott in July, 1899. At this time nine species of mammals were ob- tained:^ Tragulus " napu'' (= T. pretiosus), Sciurus tenuis, S. notatus, Mus lingensis, Tupaia tana, T. malaccana, Pteropus vampyrus, Macacm " cynomolgus," and Semiiopithecus matirus. In 1901 the list was nearly doubled by the addition of Tragulm javanicus, Sus vittatus, Ratufa notabilis, Rhinosciwus laticaudatus, Mus fremens, Mus finnus, Viverra tanghmga and Arctogalidia simplex. The presence of all of these, except the Rhinoscmrus and the two rats, was, however, suspected during the earlier visit. Hitherto the mammal fauna of Sinkep Island has been quite unknown ; and I cannot find that any of the accounts of the manmials of Sumatra refer specifically to the region of the Indragiri river. Manis javanica Desmarest. An adult female was dug from a burrow in a hillside on Sinkep Island, September 1, 1901. Total length, 440; head and body, 220; tail, 220. Weight, 4.7 kg. The uterus contained a f wtus 92 mm. in length. In this specimen the tail measures only 25 mm. The outlines of the scale are clearly marked on head, body and tail, but very indistinctly on the legs. Tragulus javanicus (Gmelin). Five skins from Sinkep Idaud and eleven skins and three speci- mens in formalin from Linga. Traguli of this and the two follow- 1 Miller, Proc. Washington Acad. Sci., II, p. 242, August 20, 1900. 144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, iug species were trapped iu the jungle by natives and brought in considerable numbei's for sale. The series from the two islands show very little individual varia- tion. The constancy of coloring iu this species as compai'ed with the extreme plasticity of the napu is very striking, particularly when it is remembered that the ranges of the two coincide, and that the animals are everywhere exposed to like conditions of envi- ronment. Tragulus pretiosus sp. nov. 1900. Tragulus napu Miller, Proc. "Washington Acad. Sci., II, p. 227, August 20, 1900. Not of F. Cuvier. Type.— AcMt male (skin and skull), No. 113,031 United States National Museum. Collected on Liuga Island, South China Sea, August 27, 1901, by Dr. W. L. Abbott. Original number 1,238. Characters. — A richly colored yellowish member of the napu group. Throat markings normal, the anterior white stripes not elongated or margined with black, the dark stripes brown. Neck yellowish-brown with narrow median black stripe. Belly heavily shaded with yellowish-brown. Color. — Upper parts orange-ochraceous, darkening toward ochra- ceous-rufous on sides of neck and outer surface of legs, and light- ening to orange-buff on sides of body, the hairs everywhere ecru- drab at base and black at tip. The black tips are most conspicuous over middle of back, where they produce a heavy dark shading slightly in excess of the orange-ochi-aceous. On sides of body they are much less noticeable, and on sides of neck and head and outer surface of legs would readily pass unnoticed. Crown and median line of neck black, the latter noticeably sprinkled with ochraceous- rufous. Throat markings normal, the hairs of the dark bands blackish at base and heavily annulated with dull ochraceous-rufous. Collar narrow but distinct, its color like that of sides of body. Under parts behind throat markings mostly orange-buff mixed with drab. There is always, however, a pure white patch on chest between front legs, and another iu hypogastric region between hind legs, the former generally continuous with narrow white line on inner side of leg, the latter always so. The two white patches occasionally spread toward each other so that they meet along median line. Tail rather dull ochraceous-rufous above, pure white below and at tip. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145 Skull and Teeth. — The skull and teeth are similar to those of Tragultis canescens. The supposed peculiarities* of the first speci- men obtained by Dr. Abbott prove to be merely the result of senile changes. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 625 ; head and body, 545 ; tail vertebrae, 80 ; hind foot, 1 42 ; hind foot without hoofs, 125. Weight, 3.4 kg. Average of five specimens from the type locality: Total length, 654 (625-670); head and body, 566 (545-580); tail vertebrae, 88 (80-95); hind foot, 141 (140-142); hind foot without hoofs, 126 (125-127); weight, 3.7 (3.1-4.3). Specimens Examined. — Ten (one in alcohol), all from Liuga Island. Remarks. — Examination of the extensive series of Tragulus iu Dr. Abbott's second Linga collection convinces me that I was wrong in referring the specimen obtained during his first visit to the island to T. napu.^ The reasons are briefly as follows: The animal described and figured by F. Cuvier was much more gray than the Linga species ; the outermost of the white throat stripes was con- siderably longer, extending " beyond the cheeks;" and both of the lateral white stripes were bordered with black. The throat pattern is now known to be so constant in each local form of this group that the very striking characters mentioned by Cuvier cannot be regarded as due to mere individual variation. Finally, the marked differences between the napu of Linga and that of the neighboring island of Sinkep furnish additional ground for the belief that a third form occurs in Sumatra. Tragulus nigriooUis sp. uov. 2\/pe.— Adult male (skin and skull), No. 113,121 United States National Museum. Collected on Sinkep Island, South China Sea, September 6, 1901, by Dr, W. L. Abbott. Original num- ber 1,292. Characters. — Similar to Tragulus pretiosus but slightly larger; color of body lighter, but neck and dark throat markings black, inconspicuoasly speckled with brown. Color. — General color as in Tragulus pretiostis, but ground tint everywhere a shade less yellow, that of the sides scarcely darker ^ See Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, XIII, p. 180, December 31, 1900. 'P/-OC. Washington Acad. Set., II, p. 227, August 30, 1!)0J. 10 146 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Maich, than the cream -buff of Ridgway. The black clouding of the back i? never in excess of the orauge-ochraceous. As if to compensate for the relative lack of black on the body, the entire neck is of this color, as in Tragulm bujiguranensis, its unifoi-mity scarcely broken by an inconspicuous speckling due to the presence of a narrow yellowish-brown annulation on many of the hairs. These annulations are more numerous at sides of neck, but a few may be found even along median line. Throat markings normal and exactly similar to those of Tragulm pretiosus, excejjt that the dark streaks are black, speckled with yellowish-brown to about the same extent as sides of neck. Collar well defined and coarsely grizzled, it^* light ground color nearly the same as that of sides of body though a trifle more yellow. Skull and Teeth. — Except for their slightly greater size the skull and teeth of Tragulus nigricollis do not differ appreciably from those of T. pretiosus, though there appears to be a tendency toward greater narrowness in the general form of the skull. 3feasurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 620; head and body, 540; tail vertebrae, 80; hind foot, 138; hind foot without hoofs, 123. Weight, 4 kg. Average of five speci- mens from the type locality: Total length, 647 (620-670); head and body, 566 (540-590); tail vertebra, 81.6 (77-85); hind foot, 142 (138-147); hind foot without hoofs, 126 (123-130). Weight, 4.4 kg. (4-4.6). Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 116 (108);^ basal length, 109 (101); basilar length, 104, (95); occipito-uasal length, 103 (99); lengdi of nasals, 34 (33.6); diastema, 11 (10); zygomatic breadth, 50 (49); least interorbital breadth, 31 (29); mandible, 92 (88); maxillary toothrow (alveoli), 40 (36); mandibular toothrow (alveoli), 45.4 (42). Specimens Examined. — Five, all from Sinkep Island. Remarks. — In general appearance Tragulus nigricollis more closely resembles the black-necked T. bunguranensis than it does T. pretiosus. It is readily separable from the Bunguran animal by its somewhat paler general coloration and by its normal throat markings. The series shows no individual variation worthy of note, except that in one specimen (cf, No. 113,124) the white * Measurements in parentheses are those of the type of IVagulus pretiosus. 1902.] NATUKAL SCIEJSCKB OF PHll^AUtLrHlA. 147 throat stripes are interrupted by the brown, producini; a pattern suggestive of that of T. bung\iranensis. Su8 vittatus MiiUer and Schlegel. A female pig from Linga Island and a similar specimen from the ludragiri river, Sumatra, appear to be referable to the Sumatran representative of Sus vittaliis. They are small animals, scarcely exceeding Sus nicoharensis in size, therefore quite distinct from Sus cristatiis. Sus oi Miller. 1902. Sus 01 ^tliller, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, XV, p. 51, March 5, 1902. The discovery of the nang-oi, the Sumatran representative of Siis barbatus and Siis longirostris, is one of the most interesting results of Dr. Abbott's work in the East Indies. The animal is among the largest of wild pigs, the type specimen, an adult but not aged boar, weighing 113 kg. (250 lbs.). Its measurements are as follows: Total length, 1,870; head and body, 1,575; tail, 295; height at shoulder, 850 ; height at rump, 800 ; ear from meatus, 88 ; ear from crown, 97 ; width of ear, 75. Skull : Greatest length, 480 ; basal length, 405 ; zygomatic breadth, 162. Although only one specimen was secured, the nang-oi is abundant in the forests and sago plantations along the banks of the Indragiri river. Its footprints may always be distinguished from those of Sus vittatus by their much greater size. Ratufa palliata sp. nov. Type. — Adult male (skin and skull), Xo. 113,162 United States National Museum. Collected on the Indragiri river, eastern Sumatra, September 23, 1901, by Dr. W. L. Abbott. Original number 1,327. Characters. — In general similar to Ratvfa bicolor of Java, but yellow areas less bright, blackish of tail appearing conspicuously at surface, and whole back from shoulders to hips light yellowish brown in striking contrast with blackish thighs, neck and outer surface of front legs. Skull with nasals shorter and broader than in the Javan animal. Color. — Back and sides uniform cream-buff a little tinged with clay color, especially along median dorsal region. Posteriorly this darkens abruptly through dull ochraceous-rufous to the clear blackish-brown of thighs and ouler surface of hind legs. In J 48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, median line (he dull ochraceous-rufous extends hetween thiglis to cover ahout 100 nnu. of base of tail. Anteriorly the light mantle darkens much more gradually through the same dull ochi'aceoas- rufous to the dark reddish-brown neck and blackish outer surface of front legs. Forehead and anterior portion of crown like man- tle. At region jusl in front of ears the abrupt change takes place to color of neck. Under parts, cheeks, sides of neck and inner surface of limlis light yellow. The exact shade is very nearly the cream-buff of Ridgway (like that of mantle, but without the tinge of clay color), except on chesl, throat and inner surface of front legs, where it brightens to buff. On belly the cream-buff is some- what obscured by the appearance at surface of the dark slate-gray basal portion of hairs. Feet blackish-brown, the cream- buff of inner surface spreading conspicuously over wrist and forearm, and slightly just below ankle and on ouler edge of sole. Tail (except proximal 100 mm.) dark bistre throughout, the hairs everywhere with whitish cream-buff tips, 10-15 mm. in length. These tips nowhere conceal the bistre, which by contrast appears nearly black. On under surface they are so arranged as to form a grizzled yellow- ish-white border to the clear bistre median stripe. Above they cover the surface almost uniformly, producing a frosted appearance, through which may be detected a faint indication of dark cross bars, ten of which are distinguishable in favorable light. Skull and Teeth. — Skull similar to that of Ratiija bicolor, but braincase more arched and rostrom shorter. The nasals are dis- tinctly broader posteriorly, and as a result the nasal branches of the premaxillaries are narrower. Teeth as in Ratufa bicolor and R. melanopepla. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 770; head and body, 345; tail vertebrae, 425; hind fool, 84 (78). Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 68 (69);* basal length, 57 (58); basilar length, 53 (54); length of nasals (along median suture), 21 (23) ; breadth of both nasals together ante- riorly, 12 (13) ; breadth of both nasals together posteriorly, 9 (5) ; least interorbital breadth, 29 (27) ; zygomatic breadth, 42 (43) ; mandible, 42 (45); maxillary molar series (alveoli), 12.8 (13); mandibular molar series (alveoli), 18.8 (14). ^ Measurements in parentheses are those of an adult female Ratufa bicolor from western Java. 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149 Specimens Examined. — Three, the type; also two otlier specimens from Sumatra, exact locality not known. Remarhs. — The three specimens show no marked variation in color. The type is rather lighter than either of the others, both of which are in somewhat worn pelage. Both of these have the base of the tail nearly black, and in one the pale mantle is divided by an indistinct dark-brown dorsal line about 30 mm. in breadth. In Ratufa bicolor the back is black, thickly sprinkled wilh yellowish- white hair tips, particularly on posterior half. There is thus no indication of the pale mantle of E. pcdliata. The tail in the Javan animal is clear buff above, the black bases of the hairs not appearing at surface except at tip. The Javan and Sumatran forms are, therefore, readily distinguishable. Eatufa affinis (Raffles). Twelve specimens from Sinkep Island. These are not distin- guishable from true Ratufa affinis, but the material representing the latter is not wholly satisfactory and the Sinkep form may event- ually prove to be distinct. Ratufa hypolecua (Horsfield). 1824. Sciurus hypoleucos Horstiekl, Zoological Besearclies in Java and tlie neigliboring islands (pages not numbered). Three adults (d", No. 113,163; d". No. 113,164, and ?, No. 113,165) were taken in heavy forest on the banks of the Indragiri river, September 24, 1901. They represent a whitish-bellied species closely related to Ratufa affinis, but readily distinguishable by the darker ground color of the upper parts (approximately cin- namon in hypolexica, Isabella color in affinis) and by the gi'ayish- white cheeks and face which form a strong contrast with the crown and sides of neck. As the type of Horstield's Sciurus hypnleucos was obtained by Raffles, it was probably taken near Bencooleu, on the southwest coast of Sumatra. It is not improbable, therefore, that the Indragiri form may prove to be distinct, though so far as can be determined from the original description Dr. Abbott's specimens closely resemble those examined by ?Iorsfield, The measurements of the three individuals arc as follows (arranged in order as above) : Total length, 705, 700 and 700 ; head and body, 330, 320 and 330; tail vertebra, 375, 380 and 370; hind foot, 77, 78 and 79; hind foot without claws, 70, 71 and 73. Cranial measurements of adult male TNo. 113,163): Greatest length, 62 150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, (61);" basal length, 52.4 (52); basilar length, 4«» (49); length of nasals, 19.0 (19.8); lea.st interorbital breadth, 26 (26); zygomatic breadth, 39 (39); mandible, 38.4 (37); maxillary molar series (alveoli), 12 (12.8); mandibular molar .-cries (alve- oli), 13 (14). Ratufa notabilis sp. nov. Type.—Xd\At male (skin and skidl), N.x 113,064 United States National INIuseum. Collected on west coast of Linga Island, August 24, 1901, by Dr. W. L. Abbott. Original number 1,210. Characters. — Size large, fully e([ual to that of R. bicolor and R. melanopepla. Upper parts uniform rich dark-brown ; under parts, feet, cheeks and face yellowish- white in conspicuous contrast. Color. — Upper parts and outer surface of legs burnt umber, slightly variegated by the faint tawny annulations which are pres- ent on most of the hairs. These annulations are less distinct than in R. pyrsonota, but nevertheless quite evident, particularly on neck and shoulders. On middle of back and in lumbar region many of the hairs are buffy white, producing a faint lighter cast. Under parts, feet, cheeks and inner surface of legs clear cream-buff, more yellow over middle of belly. Muzzle and face somewhat less yellowish, but distinctly grizzled by a fine admixture of brown, par- ticularly on anterior portion of crown and in region between eyes. Tail with the hairs everywhere whitish cream-buff at base. On doi'sal and lateral surfaces of tail the terminal half is burnt umber, but ventrally the cream- buff is clear, except for the darker line caused by the appressed short hairs, many of which are brown. Skull and Teeth. — The skull resembles that of Ratufa melan- opepla in size, but in form appears to be slightly less elongate, a difference which may readily prove to be inconstant. Teeth as in R. melanopepla. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 780; head and body, 345; tail vertebrae, 435; hind foot, 82 (73). External measurements of an adult female from the type locality: Total length, 770; head and body, 335; tail vertebrae, 435; hind foot, 80 (72). Cranial measurements of type : Greatest length, 68 ; basal length, " Measurements in parentheses are those of an adult male Ratufa affinis from Singapore, the type locality. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151 r)^ ; basilar length, 5.) ; length of nasals, 22 ; least iuterorbital breadth, 27.4; zygomatic breadth, 44; mandible, 45; maxillary molar series (alveoli), 18; mandibular molar series (alveoli), 15. Specimens Examined. — Two, both from the type bcality. Remarks.— Ratufa notabilis is such a conspicuous, easily recog- nizable species that it requires no comparison with its allies. The Javan squirrel described by Desmarest under the name Sciurxis albiceps has a similar whitish face; but Desmarest' s animal was much smaller than Ratufa notabilis, and will doubtless prove to be the Javan representative of jB. hypoleuca. The two specimens are in all respects similar to each other, except that the tail of the female is just beginning to change from the bleached pelage to the fresh coat of the bi-eeding season. On the body the change is completed. The anuulations on the hairs of the back are moi-e dititinct in the female than in the male, but the latter has the more noticeable sprinkling of whitish hairs over the lumbar region. Soiurus vittatus Raffles. Two skins from Linga Island, four froni Sinkep Island, and six from the Indragiri river, Sumatra. The Sinkep specimens are slightly paler than the others, and the black lateral stripe is a little less well defined. The characters, however, are too inconstant to be regarded as of much importance.' Sciurus tenuis Raffles. An adult male and female from the Indragiri river, Sumatra. They are in every respect indistinguishable from the Singapore animal. Sciurus melanops sp. nov. Type. — Adult female (skin and .skull). No. 118,152 United States National Musuem. Collected on Indragiri river, eastern Sumatra, September 15, 1901, by Dr. W. Jj. Abbott. Original number 1,807. Characters. — A member of the ;S'. /;rew>.s^it group. Color exactly as in S. humei (Bonhote), except that the cheeks are black, scarcely grizzled with gray. Color. — Tail and entire dorsal surface of head and body clear shining black. Cheeks and sides of neck lilack, but the color dulled by a very faint admixture of gray and rod. This grizzling 152 rUOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Marcll, is so inconspicuous as to be scarcely noticeable when a specimen is held at arm's length. A faint grayish patch immediately behind ear. The whiskers spring from a sharply defined grayish white area about 15 nmi. in diameter. A similar whitish patch, 3 mm. in diameter, surrounds roots of suborbital bristles. Lateral stripe huffy Avhite. As in S. humei it extends from axillary region to heel and includes entire outer surface of hind leg. Under parts, feet, inner surface of hind legs and entire lower portion of front legs a bright brownish-red, intermediate between the chestnut and rufous of Eidgway. On outer side of hind leg the red comes in contact with the white lateral stripe, but on inner side it is separated from the white by a line of black about 10 mm. in diameter, which extends as far as heel. Shoidder and outer surface of humerus orange-ochraceous, sharply defined from the black contiguous area, but fading gradually through various shades of ochraceous into the buffy Avhite of the lateral stripe. Skull and Teeth. — The skull is similar to that of Sciurus humei, but the audital bullae are slightly smaller and the interpterygoid space is a trifle narrower. Molars uniformly smaller than in the species from the Malay Peninsula, the difference parlicidarlv noticeable in the posterior lower tooth. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 505; head and body, 255; tail vertebrae, 250; hind foot, 60; hind foot without claws, 58. Two other adults measure : Total length, c? o:^b, 9 500 ; head and body, d" 270, 9 255 ; tail vertebra, c? 265, 9 245; hind foot, c? 64, 9 60; hind foot without claws, cJ* 60, 9 56. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 57 (60);' basal length, 51 (53); basilar length, 48 (50); palatal length, 26 (26.6); length of nasals, 18.8 (19.4); interorbital breadth, 23 (24.4); zygomatic breadth, 34 (37); mandible, 38 (41); max- illary toothrow (alveoli), 11 (11.8); mandibular toothrow (alveoli), 11.4 (14). Specimens E.tamined. — Three, all from the type locality. Remarks. — This squirrel is so readily distinguishable from its allies by the coloration of the cheeks that no further comparisons are necessary. The three specimens show no individual variations worthy of note. ' Measurements in parentheses are those of an adult female Sciurus humei from Trong, lower Siam. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153 Nannosciurus pulcher s^p- nov. ' Type— Adult female (skin imd .. Monnops Peters, Monatsber. K. Preuss. Akad. "Wissensch., Berlin, p. 410. Generic Characters. — Crown of the head greatly elevated above the face line; ears actually or nearly united basally by the internal margins ; nostrils not margined by extensive cutaneous develop- ments. Facial portion of skull bent strongly upward, the basi- cranial and facial axes being thus almost at right angles. Denti- tion i. l2l, c. \Z\, p. -Il, m. §5|. History. — The genus Mormoops was founded by Leach in 1820' on his species M. blainvilUi, which was described from Jamaica. In the same work, having precedence by a few pages (p. 70), is a ' Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XIII, p. 76. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161 genus Aello, which Leach described from a mutilated specimen of Mormoops blainvillii, according to Dobson/ who examined the type. While the genus and species Aello cuvieri have page priority oyer Mormoops blainvillii, the very poor definition and absolute uniden- tifiability of the former (Avithout a close examination of the type such as Dobson has made) should give occasion to use the belter defined, almost simultaneous and universally recognized name. Gray/ in speaking of the occurrence of the genus in Cuba, placed Mormoops and the genus Chilonyderis in the tribe Nodilionina in the vicinity of the Taphozoi, on accoimt of the possession of no true nose leaf. In 1840, Gimdlach^ described a specimen of this genus from Cuba as Lobostoma einnamomeum, and Peters^ and Saussure'' both con- fused Leach's species with another form of the genus to which Petei*s later" gave the name of megalophylla. Saussure, in the above-mentioned paper, placed the genus in a subtribe of the ' ' Xoctilioniens, ' ' which he designates as the * ' Mormopsins, ' ' and associates Chilonyderis with it in the same division. In 1865, Peters,® in a revisionary table of the order, placed Mormops (^Mor- moops Leach), Chilonyderis and Pteronotus in a subfamily 3Ior- mopes of the family Phyllostomata. Dobson' considered these allied genera as constituting a subfamily Lobostomince and group 3Ior- m^pes of the Phyllostojnatidce. Quite recently Miller^" has de- scribed a form allied to J/, megalophylla, inhabiting the island of Cura9ao, as Mormoops intermedia. General Relations. — The three genera, Mormoops, Chilonyderu and Dermonotus (Pteronotus Auct."), comprise a well-defined sub- family, the differential characters of which are the absence of a dis- tinct nose leaf and the presence of leaf-like appendages on the lower lip. The former character is shared by the genus Centurio, but the latter chai-acter easily distinguishes the group from the Centurionince. The genus Mormoops may be distinguished from ^ Catal. Chiropt. Brit. Mus., p. 454. '^Ann. Nat. Hist., IV, p. 3, 1839. * Wiegmann's ^rc/i. /. Naturgesch., VI, bd. I, p. 3.57. '" Monatsber. k. 7)rf7z««. Akad. Wissensch., Berlin, 18o6, pp. 410-415. Abhandl. k. preuss. Akad. Wissensch., Berlin, 1856, i>p. 28T-3U1. ^ lie cue et Marjasiii de Zoologie, 2d ser., XII, pp. 290-293. "< Monat.sber. k. preuss. Akad. Wissensch., Berlin, 1864, p. 381. ^ Monatsber. k. preuss. Akad. Wissensch., Berlin, 1865, p. 257. » Catal. Chiropt. Brit. Mus., pp. 44G-447. '0 Proc. Biol. Soc. WasJdngton, XIII, p. 160. ^' Vide Gill, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, XIV, p. 177. 11 162 PROCEEUIXGS OF THE ACADEM-J OF [IVIarcll, the other two genera by the greatly elevated brain-case, which throws the basi-crauial axis almost at right angles to that of ros- trum, and in the presence of prominent internal, basally annectant, flaps to the eai's. After a study of the names applied to this section as a group, I have concluded to designate the subfamily, containing Mormoops, Chilonycteris and Dermonotus (Pteronotus Auct. ), as the Mor- moopince, which term I have used in a previous paper. '^ The name Lobostomince of Dobson is not available as Lobostoma is a synonym of Mormoops and Chilonycteris. Key to the Forms. a. — Chin pad slightly divided. Cutaneous lap connecting the inner side of the conch with the supraocular region united with its fellow of the opposite side. b. — Greatest thickness of the first upper premolar centrally located, the tooth being crudely rhomboid in outline, blainvillii Leach. ^5. — Greatest thickness of the first upper premolar posteriorly located, the tooth being subconoid in outline, b. einnamomea (Gundlach). act. — Chin pad considerably divided. Cutaneous lap connecting the inner side of the conch with the supraocular region not united with its fellow of the opposite side except at the extreme base. b. — First upper premolar narrow, centrally constricted, the posterior margin well separated from the second pre- molar, e. — Second upper premolar triangular in basal outline, equally broad as long, the internal lobe of the tooth moderately developed, megalophylla (Peters). cc. — Second upper premolar much broader than long, the internal lobe of the tooth very much developed, m. senicula Ivehn. hb. — First upper premolar rather broad, subrectangular in outline, in contact Avith or very slightly seimrated from the second premolar, . . . m. intermedia ]\Iiller. Mormoops blainvillii Leach. 1820. xVello Cuvieri Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc. Loudon, XIII, p. 71 (founded on a badly mutilated specimen). 1820. Mormoops Blainvillii Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XIII, p. 77, tab. VII. ^^Proe. Acad. Nat. Sci. PMla., 1901, p. 297. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163 1872. Morniops Blainvillii Peters, Monatsber. k. preuss. Akad. Wissensch., Berlin, p. 359 (part). 1878. Jformops blainvillii Dobson, Catal. Cliiropt. Brit. Miis., p. 456. ' Tyjye Locality. — Jamaica. Distribution. — Jamaica. General Characters. — Size rather small; ears with the prominent internal wing united with its fellow ; lower margin of chin-lappet with two central projections ; labial fold very deeply cleft centrally. Head. — Broad, long and shallow. Ears very large, the lower margins extending forward to the commissure, thus, with the ante- rior trend of the internal connecting membrane, forming a cavity in which is located the rather minute eye ; internal connecting membrane carried forward and connecting with its fellow posterior to the nasal region ; the apex of the ear mth. a concave emar- gination ; internal ridge well developed, extending to the tip of the ear, inferiorly rather deep, the tip broadly rounded ; antitragus high, apex circular; tragus rather large, apically with an addi- tional sublanceolate, subpetiolate process, inner border with a median emargination, outer border inferiorly emarginate, centrally with a rounded process. Eye with wart near both the anterior and posterior corners. Nostrils opening in the lateral portions of a fleshy disk, which has the superior margin concavely emarginate, below which the didk bears a median ridge; nasal apertures sur- rounded by slightly raised margins; the central formation laterally flanked by rectangular fleshy processes; upper lip deeply notched opposite the first upper premolar, an acute process projecting for- ward from the commissure. Chin-lappet of lower lip subquadrate, upper margin with a central concavity, lower margin with a pair of small processes in the center ; surface papillose. Labial fold ample extending much below the chin-lappet, deeply divided into four portions by incisions, one median and two lateral. Limbs. — Forearm moderately long, considerably bowed; third finger rather long, very slender, the latter character applying to all the digits ; thumb delicate. Femora, tibire and feet long and veiy slender ; calcanea long, about equaling the tibiae. Membranes and Fur. — Membranes very thin and semi-trans- parent, very finely tucked and wrinkled by cross nerves, the pattern of the latter being very regular; propatagium large, the anterior border totally free; uropatagium ample, extending (juite a distance 164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Marcll, beyond the tail. Fur loug, soft and silky, the posterior part of the ueck with a collar of longer hair; throat and chin with short floccose fur; ectopatagium considerably furred; forearm not furred ; upper lip heavily haired. Cofor.— General tint above and below orange-rufous, slightly darker over the shouldei*s, palest around the head and on the throat. ^^ Membranes pale chestnut. Skull. — Rather light and fragile; cranial portion abruptly ele- vated and thrown forward ; foramen magnum very large and wholly above the level of the orbital region. Brain-case comparatively large, and forming a right angle with the line of the face ; auditory bullre moderately prominent, projecting under the glenoid fossae, the latter being large and subquadrate. Rostrum low, the upper surface deeply channeled centrally; palate considerably excavated, pos- terior projection narrow, the cleft acute-angulate with narrowly rounded apex ; zygoma slightly projecting, sublamellate. Man- dible rather long, thin, moderately deep ; condyle greatly elevated ; coronoid process low. Teeth. — Central pair of upper incisors much longer than the small lateral pair, flat, the cutting edge bilobate; upper canines loug and falciform, the tips slightly spread ; first upper premolar with the basal outline of the tooth crudely rhomboid ; second upper premolar with a large caniniform, posteriorly placed cusp; upper molars broad, the first and second with W-shaped arrangement of the ridges, the protocone being more strongly developed on the first than on the second molar ; third molar transverse, with N-shaped fold ( para-hypoconoid) and a marked protocone. Lower mcisors equal in size, trilobate ; canines moderately long, the bulk of the tooth being anterior ; premolai's with the same general unicuspidate form, the cusp of tlie first being placed anterior to the centre of the " The color is best seen by examining the specimen while immersed in alcohol, the wet specimen taken from the preservative appearing much darker. ;Mr. Osborn {Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1865, p. 73) de- scribes the fur of a freshly killed specimen as being bright chestnut, above rather paler. The same writer (p. 73) observes that the tint varies from a sandy bulf to deep reddish-brown. It is possible from this that two marked phases exist. Since writing the above I have been enabled to examine a skin from the collection of the United States National ]\Iuscum. My notes on it are as follows : General color a rufous-orange lint, suft'used above with smoky brown, this tint restricted to the tips of the hair, and strongest on the lateral portions of the back and rump ; long hair on the interscapular region naturally parted showing a i)atch of the lighter general color. Membranes browuish-black. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165 tooth, cusps of the first and third of equal length, longer than the second ; molai"s with five cusps, the anterior one low and not promi- nent, the posterior four tall and sharp. Measurements. — Average of two Jamaican specimens: Lenglh of head and body, 50 mm.; head, 15.7; tragus, 4.2; foreai-m, 44.5; thumb, 6.2; third finger, 81.5; tibia, 20; calcaneum, 19.5; foot, 8.1; tail, 28.3. Remarks. — This species is not liable to be confused with any other form except the subspecies cinnamomea, which is distin- guished by the outline of the first upper premolar. From M. megalophijlla and its subspecies this species is immediately distin- guished by the form of the ears, the chin-lappet and the labial folds. Specimens Examined. — Two alcoholic specimens and one skin: Jamaica (Coll. Biological Survey) ; Moneague, St. Ann, Jamaica (Coll. Biological Survey) ; Kingston, Jamaica (skin) (Coll. U. S. Nat. Mus.). Mormoops blainvillii cinnamomea (Gundlach). 1839. Mormops Blainvillii Gray (not of Leach), Ann. Nat. Hist., IV, p. 3. 1840. L[obostoma'] cinnamomeiim Gundlach, Wiegmann's Archiv. fiir Naturgeschichte, VI, bd. F, p. 357. 1873. 3Iormops Blainvillii Peters, Monatsber. k. preuss. Akad. Wissensch. Berlin, p. 359 (part). 1873. M[ormops] Blainvillii Gundlach, Anales Socied. Esp. Hist. Nat., I, cuaJ. 3, p. 244. Type Locality. — Casetal St. Antonio el Fuudador, Cuba. Distribution. — Cuba, San Domingo and Mona Island (in the Mona Island passage between San Domingo and Porto Rico). General Characters. — Similar to the Jamaican J/, blainvillii, but the fii-st upper premolar attains its greatest thickness posteriorly, the outline of the toolh being subconoid with the apex directed forward. Membranes, ears and olher external characters as in Mormooj)S blainvillii. Teeth. — The fir^^t upper premolar greatly expanded posteriorly on the internal portion, the cingulum forming a heavy raised border to a deeply impressed valley; the whole structure giving the tooth a subconoid or subpyriform outline, the apex being formed by the anterior border of the cingulum. Color. — General tint walnut-brown above, ecru-drab beneath, 166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, the hair of the upper sux'face basally the same tint as the lower surface. Ears and membranes blackish-bi'own. The ;Mona Island si^ecimens are all imiformly colored, but a San Domingo specimen (No. i^SI Field Columb. Mus.) is ochraceous above, slightly darker toward the lips of the hair, the tint of the lower surface being tawny ochraceous ; two Cuban specimens exam- ined are identical with true blainvillii iu coloration. From the evidence available it is seen that this form presents two color phases, one brownish, the other ochraceous. Measiirements. — Average of ten specimens : Length of head and body, 51.2 mm,; head, 16.8; ear, 15.1; tragus, 4.4; forearm, 44.5; thumb, 6.6; third finger, 83.1; tibia, 19.5; calcaneum, 19.4; foot, 8.5; tail, 25.8. Remarks. — The difference iu the form of the first upper premolar exhibited by this form is quite striking, and is constant in the series of specimens examined. No diffei'ence can be detected between the specimens from Mona Island and those from San Domingo. While no inlergradation is known to occur with M. blainvillii, in view of the slight differentiation I prefer to call this form a race and not a species. Specimens Examined. — Twelve — three skins, nine alcoholics : Baracoa, Cuba. Two alcoholics (Coll. U. S. Nat. Mus.). Mona Island, Porto Rico. Seven specimens — two skins (with skulls), five alcoholics (Coll. U. S. Nat. Mus.). San Domingo. Two alcoholics (Coll. Acad. Nat, Sci. Phila. ). Aquacate, San Domingo. One skin mih skull (Coll. Field Columb. Mus.). Mormoops megalophylla (Peters). 1856. JI[o7'mops'i blainvillii Peters (not of Leacli), Monatsber. k. preuss. Akad. Wissenscli., Berlin, p. 411. ("Cuba.") 1856. Mormoops Blainvillii Peters (not of Leach), Abliaudl. k. preuss. Akad. Wissensch., Berlin, p. 289, taf. 1, figs, 1-5. ("Cuba.") i860. Mormops Blainvillii Saussure (not of Leach), Revue et Mag- asin de Zoologie, 2e ser,. XII, p. 290, PI. XV, lig. 5.^* (Mexico.) 1864. Mormops mcgalojyhylla Peters, Monatsb. k. preuss. Akad. Wissensch., Berhu, p. 381. (Mexico.) 1873. Mormops merjalophylla Peters, Ibid., p. 359. (Mexico and Venezuela.) 1878. Mormops megalopJcylla Dobson, Catal. Chiropt. Brit. Mus , p. 455. (Dueiias, Guatemala, Colombia and South America.) " There is no way of telling to which form of the species this reference properly pertains. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167 1879. Mormops megalophylla Alston, Biol Ceut.-Amer., Mamra., p. 37. (Part.) (Mexico [form?]; Tehuantepec.) 1893. Mormops megalophylla Tliomas, Journ. Trinidad Field Nat- uralists' Club, I, No. 7, p. 163. (Trinidad.) Type Locality. — As originally noticed (see above) this form was supposed to have come from Cuba, but Peters in his paper, in which the name megalophylla was proposed, shows that the species is from Mexico. Examined in the light of present material, it is seen that the typical form of the species is limited in INIexico to the southern portion and Yucatan, which section shoidd be regarded as the type locality. This is ascertained by an examination of Peters' figure mentioned above and by comparing it with specimens ; the differential characters of the races would be visible in the figure, but it clearly represents the form to which I have limited it. Distribution. — Southern Mexico and Yucatan, south as far as Colombia, northern Ecuador," Venezuela and Trinidad. Some specimens recorded from ' ' South America ' ' no doubt came from the northern portion of that vast continent. General Characters. — Internal connecting membrane of ear not united with its fellow of the opposite side, except at extreme base ; chin-lappet broadly and deeply divided. Skull with the rostral portion much inflated. Head. — Ear large, not high ; apex subtruncate ; the internal connecting membranes rather low, only confluent at the extreme base on the rostrum, this section developing a pair of subcircular appendages which conceal the anterior aspect of the point of attachment; internal ridge rather high, moderately haired; lower external margin of the ear voluminous, forming a very consider- able pocket, which when extended projects a distance on each side of the head equal to the thickness of the same; antitragus longi- tudinal, low, rounded; tragus with the apical appendage subspatu- late, the median whorl thickened internally, basal lobe trmicate and more developed than in M. blainvillii. Eye small, with a large V-shaped warty projection placed posterior to it, below the axis of the ocular opening. Nostrils oval, slanting upward and outward, the whole arrangement of callous pads being similar to M. blainvillii, but the interuasal pads more robust and the laterals oblong instead of subcircular. Upper lip very fleshy, tlie incision near the commissure being wide and rounded. Chin-lappet roughly ^* Oldfield Thomas in epist. 168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [March, the same iu outline as M. hlainvillii, but the lower margin deeply divided between the two processes, the incision being widened at the end, the margins adjoining these processes but slightly eraarginate with the lower angles rounded; surface of lappet similar to M. hlainvillii. Labial fold very much as in the above- mentioned species.^® Limbs. — Forearm long, metacarpal of the third finger not reaching the elbow; thmub short and weak. Tibia and femur slender. Fur. — Fur rather sparse in the region of the nape, the crown, of the head being devoid of hair. Upper fur silky, under fur woolly. Color. — Upper surface prout's-brown, the hair lighter basally, which under tint shows in the sparsely haired region of the nape, imparting a dull ochraceous touch to that portion. Membranes clove-brown. Under surface varying from wood-brown to taAvny- olive. Skull. — Rather large, strongly inflated, brain-case capacious, gently curving down into the rostrum which is strongly inflated posteriorly. Zygoma not bowed, widest posteriorly. Basi-crauial axis forming an obtuse angle with the facial axis. Teeth. — Middle upper incisors broad, with a faintly bilobed cut- ting edge ; outer upper incisors minute, placed in close proximity to the middle incisors. Lower incisors aiTanged in a semi-circle, each finely trilobed. Upper canines long, slightly divergent at the tips. Lower canines rather long, divergent, with the cingulum well marked posteriorly. First upper premolar low, conical, slightly directed inward; second premolar with the external cusp long, hastate, the internal portion forming a low roimded shoulder, the basal proportions of the tooth being longer (on the external mar- gin) than wide. Lower premolars conical, the second shorter iu lateral outline than the first or third, the latter more attenuate than the others. Upper molai-s broad, the first and second w4th AV-shaped external cusps, the internal paraconoid ridge heaviest anteriorly, posteriorly low and free from the external cusps; third molar with a V-shaped pattern, the metacone not being developed, " Dobson's figure (Catal. Chiropt. Brit. Mus., PI. XXIII, fig. 5) of this Bpecies shows the chin-lappet quite diflferent in form from that of 31. blainvillii. This is not so aiiparent in my specimens and was probably due to a disarrangement iu the specimen figured. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169 and the internal cusp parah}^oconoid in relation. Lower molai'S each with five cusps, the W-shaped disposition not being so strongly marked as in the upper molars, the metahypoconoid and protopara- conoid cusps more elevated than the remaining connecting ridges. 3feasurements. — Average of three dried skins : Length of head and body, 71mm. (67.5-74.7); forearm, 53.2 (52.7-54); tibia„ 21.1 (21-21.5); foot, 9.6 (9.5-10). Remarks. — This species can be readily distinguished from hlain- villii by the characters given above. From m. intermedia it is separated by the freer and less-crowded first upper premolar. The subspecies senieida is distinguished by the form of the second upper premolar. Specimens Examined. — Three skins with skidls : Merida, Yucatan (two) (U. S. N". M.). San Juan Bautista, Tabasco, Mexico (one) (U. S. N, M. ). Mormoops megalophylla senioula n. subsp. 1870. Mormoops (Blainville ?) Duges (not of Leach), La Naturaleza, I, p. 137. (Guanajuato.) 1879. Mormops megalophylla Alston, Biol. Cent.-Amer., Mamm., p. 37. (Part.) (Mirador ) 1900. Mormoops megalophylla Mearns (not of Peters), Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., XIII, p. 166. (Fort Clark, Texas.) Type. — Adult ? ; Fort Clark, Kinney coimty, Texas. No. 84,801 U. S. National Museum. December 3, 1897. Collected by Dr. E. A. Mearns. Distribution. — Southern Texas (type locality only known record), northern and central Mexico, probably intergradiug with the typical form to the south of the central plateau country. General Characters. — This form differs from the typical form of megalophylla in the much heavier and broader second upper pre- molar, which bears a very heaA'y and wide internal shoulder. The forearm seems to average slightly longer, but this was rather unsat- isfactorily determined as all the available specimens of the typical form a.'-e skins. Teeth. — Essentially as iu megalophylla except for the form of the second upper premolar. This tooth is broader than the length of the labial border, the internal portion of the tooth is much more extensive, a broad rounded shallow shoulder being formed, which development is comparatively slight in megalophylla. Color. — Upper parts broccoli-brown, the whole with a faint I'O PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Marcll, silvery suffusion ; hair of the nape and upper part of the head basally pale ecru, which tint shows through the general color, pro- ducing a lighter appearance in those regions. Lower surface wood-brown, becoming ecru on the sides and flanks. INIembranes hair-brown. Measurements. — Type (collector's measurements): "Length, 90;'" tail vertebrre, 28; alar expanse, 373; finger (longest), 90; head, 17; forearm, 56 mm." Average of thirteen alcoholic speci- mens: Length of head and body, 58.8 mm.; head, 16.7; ear, 15.9; tragus, 6.3; forearm, 53.3; thumb, 7.6; third finger, 93.1; tibia, 21.6; calcaneum, 21.8; foot, 9.5; tail, 25.8. Remarl-s. — This form can readily be distinguished from typical merjalophjlla and m. intermedia by the form of the second upper premolar. Its distribution seems to coincide with the tableland of j\Iexico (and its more northern remnant), though two specimens from Tampico are perfectly typical. Specimens Examined. — Seventeen — two skins, thirteen alcoholics, two skulls — all from the United States National Museum : Fort Clark, Tex. (1). Tampico, Tamaulipas, Mex. (2). Guanajuato, Guanajuato, Mex. (1). Mirador, Vera Cruz, Mex. (8). Orizaba, Vera Cruz, Mex. (2). Morelos, Mex. (3). Mormoops megalophylla intermedia (Miller). 1900. Mormooi^s inlermedia Miller, Proc. Biol. See. "Washington, XIII, p. 160. October 31, 1900. Type Locality. — Cave at Hatto, north coast of Curacao, West Indies. Type, adult female, No. 102,174 Coll. U. S.' National Maseum. Distribution. — Apparently limited to the island of Curacao, where it frequents ' ' caves and rock crevices in all parts of the island. ' ' General Characters. — Differing from typical megalop)hylla in the smaller general size, and the greater size and general cro.wded con- dition of the first upper premolar. Teeth. — Essentially as in M. megalophylla, but differing in the thicker and heavier first upper premolar, which tooth is crowded " This without doubt includes the tail. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171 between the canine and second premolar, completely filling the space. Color. — In describing the color one cannot do better than quote the original description — " Brown phase: entire dorsal surfac© sepia, the fur paler beneath the surface and each hair tipped with light drab. The drab tips produce a distinct bloom in certain lights. Under parts very pale yellowish broccoli-brown, lightest on belly, flanks and pubic region, faintly darker across chest. Red phase : like brown phase but entire pelage suffitsed with cinnamon. Pale phase : light salmon-buff above and below, becoming more red about shoulders and head. Ears and membranes dark brown in all three color phases." The brown phase appears to be simply an intermediate between the two extremes. Measurements. — Average of seven alcoholic specimens: Length of head and body, 55.5 mm.; head, 16.7; ear, 14.5; tragus, 5.4; forearm, 50.8; thumb, 6.3; third finger, 86.9; tibia, 20.9; cal- caneum, 21.7; foot, 9.7; tail, 23.7. Remarks. — In view of the slight differentiation of this form I prefer to consider it a subspecies and not a full species. Future study may show that it is strictly insular and that no intergrada- tion occurs, but I prefer to treat it on the same basis as the other newly recognized form of this group, the dental characters of which are even more striking, though the difference in size is not so apparent. Specimens Examined. — Fourteen — six skins, seven alcoholics, one skull — all from the U. S. National Museum: Cura9ao, West Indies (14). 172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACApEMY OF [March, •l{}93} qjJAV 81B Ci ^ lO -IBd JO qipiAV •aaniBJOj iBd o o 5C o to ^ o ■■juB niojj ajB -IBd JO qjaaai CO 00 00 00 t- nonoujsuoo iBj 00 o ta -BiBd JO qapiAV ,_l .rH •aSBO-UlBJq in JO iqSpH t- t- 00 00 ■JBiomoJd pz JO c- eo asBq IB iqSpH eo -* JO lO o •q5pi.tt. *^ Oi ■<*< IBiiqjoaajtii •>* ^ LO w LO •qjpiAV onBtn -OS.te JS9lB9Jf) lO «? 1« =^ CO 00 o6 OS OS OS « JO q^Snai psjox ■* s »o ^ 1 C-i =" ai ti_. «M OT •—1 o m 0:5 o w Is 11 ^ to ll O II II II < 1 CO -* 00 t- •IPX 00 eo !*< ■'"' t- « t- t- •p^aH lO eo «o «o ^poq puB oo IfS pB3q JO qiSaai g »o g ta 03 ' .— > 3 S il =1 11. 1^1 111 on -^ C3 .2 2 IP O *>H verage of thirteen mens of Al. m. set Texas, north and c Mexico. . (Ale.) g^^ s^-^ 1^1 as tM -q 0 CN-/ > Cr^ > o.a > cO < «< . and B. Two, Borneo. No. 5,816 has the body completely encircled by alternating rings of brownish-black and pale-yellow, the dark rings being widest on the back and the light ones exactly the reverse ; whole head ])a\e- yellow; length 172 mm. (tail 13). This corresponds to the form described by Guuther as C. flaviceps. Hypsirhina enhydris (Schn.). Two, Kapuas river. No. 2,561 has ventrals 157; subcaudals 31. Hypsirhina dorise (Peters). No. 2,311, Kapuas river. The example which I refer to this species corresponds nearly to Peters' description and plate. It has, hoAvever, but 27 rows of scales. The head shields are quite anomalous ; the left internasal is divided, as is also one of the parietals, and the anterior temporal on one side. Length 810 mm. (tail 95); ventrals 160; sub- caudals 44. The yellow of the ventral surface extends to the four outer rows of scales, where it becomes reddisli, as it does ou botli .series of labials. Dipsadomorphus dendrophilus (Boie). Three, Borneo. Dipsadomorphus cynodon (Boie). Two, Baram; one, Kapuas river; one, Borneo. Psammodynastes pulverulentus (Boie). No. 2,569, Kai)uas river, length 625 nun. (tail 128); ventrals 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181 164; subcaudails 70. No. 2,567, same locality, length 51o mm. (tail 120); ventrals 161; subcaudals 69. Psammodjmastes pictus Gunth. Three specimens from Kapnas river. No. 2,236 is 518 mm. long (tail 118) ; ventrals 159; snbcaudals 80. Body slender and stripes only indicated. In form and pro- portions this species is very closely approached by No. 2,567 (P. pulverulentus), and the distinctness of the two species appears to me question able. Dryophis prasinus Boie. Ten specimens ; Kapuas river, Kuching, Baram. Chrysopelea ornata (Shaw). No. 5,690, Baram district, 898 mm. (tail 250); ventrals 213 (the last one divided) ; subcaudals 135. The light spots on the back are confluent into an almost continuous vertebral stripe, be- coming obscure toward the tail. The ventrals are immarked, and the subcaudals have narrow black margins. Enhydrina valakadien (Boie). One, Baram ; one, Borneo. The Baram specimen, 840 mm. long (tail 115), has a pair of elongated shields detached from the inner border of the parietals, immediately behind the frontal. The color is greenish-gray above in one specimen, and lead color in the other; beneath, yellow. Bungarus fasciatus (Schn.). One, Baram ; one, Borneo. Bungarus flaviceps Reinh. One, Baram. Collected by Charles Hose. Naia naia (L.). One, Kuching. Dark-olive, without markings except side of head and throat yellowish. Laohesis wagleri (Boie). Thirteen specimens; Kapuas river, Kuching, Baram. There is much variation in the color of these specimens. Some are green, many dorsal scales and the ventrals with yellow borders; others are green above, some scales with yellow centres, the wliollv green ones 182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Aliril, being arranged in narrow crossbands, the ventrals yellow, edged with dark-green. No. 2,337, from Baram, 355 mm. long, is bluish-brown on the body, green on the tail, all the scales with narrow pale margins ; ventrals greenish-white with pale borders. Lachesis sumatranus (Raffles). One, Baram. Collected by Charles Hose. BATRACHIA. ECAUDATA. Rana macrodon Kuhl. Two, Borneo. Rana tigrina Band. Nine, Baram river ; Borneo. These specimens are all young ; the head and body in the largest measuring ])ut 65 mm. Rana erythraea (Schl.). One, Kapuas river ; one, Baram ; two, Borneo. Length of head and body in the largest 67 mm. ; hind limb 108 mm. Rana everetti Boul. Cat. Bat. Sal. in Brit. Mus., p. 73, PI. VI. Two, Borneo ; one, Baram river. These specimens correspond closely to Mr. Boulenger's description and plate. No. 5,768 is the largest and measures 78 mm. from snout to vent; hind leg 127. In each of them the anterior end of the vomerine teeth is about even with the inner anterior border of the choanse. Rana glandulosa Boul. Cat. Bat. Sal. in Brit. Mus., p. 73, PI. VII. No. 5,778, Baram river; No. 5,767, Miri, Sarawak; No. 5,764, Borneo. The three specimens Avhich I refer to this species have the inter- orbital space rather wider than it is figured by JNIr. Boulenger. The color is either dark -brown or olive above, slightly spotted or marbled with black ; beneath yellow, spotted with black, most heavily on the throat and under surface of thighs ; jaws black, with three or four vertical yellow bai's, the largest of which is between the eye and the tympanum. The Miri specimen, 55 mm. head and body, is much more distinctly marbled with black on both surfaces 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183 than the two older examples; the legs are dislinctly crossbanded with black. Khaoophorus maoulatus (Gray). No. 5,808, Borneo, measuring but 32 mm. head and body, is referred with some hesitation to this species, both (he tympanum and digital disks being small. This may be a juvenile character. Calophrynus pleurostigma Gunth. One, Borneo; three, Baram river (collected by C. Hose). Bufo melanostictus Schn. Four, Baram river (coll. by C. Hose) ; two, Borneo. The largest is 112 mm. head and body; hind leg 160. No. 5,776, but 43 mm. long, is probably the young of this species. Bufo biporoatus Gunth. Ten specimens ; Baram river, Kuching, Tegora. No. 5,783, from Baram, and 5,769, 40 mm. long, might about as well be assigned to B. divergens Peters, but with the small amount of material at my disposal, I am not inclined to separate them. Bufo asper Graven. Seven specimens; Kapuas river; Baram river (collected by C. Hose) ; Miri, Sarawak; Borneo. The largest measures 140 mm. snout to vent; hind leg 185. LOO CHOO ISLANDS. The collections of Drs, Furness and Hiller in the Loo Choo Islands, in 1896, were made in Ooshima and Okinawa; the collec- tors' labels unfortunately do not distinguish between the two local- ities. REPTILIA. Lacertilia. Hemidaotylus frenatus D- and B. No. 5,722, ? ; 5,723, d, Loo Choo Islands. Gehyra intermedia sp. nov. Head large and ovoid ; snout a little longer than the distance from eye to ear opening, about once and a fifth the diameter of the orbit. Forehead concave. Ear opening small, bi'oadly oval. Body somewhat depressed ; no lateral membrane on body, limbs nor 184 rEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, tail. Digits short, not webbed; inner ones well developed, but without a claw ; inferior lamellre double, oblique and separated by a groove. Upper surface covered with small rounded granules, largest on the snout ; ten or eleven series of small round tubercles on the back, extending on the base of the tail,; no tubercles on the head. Abdominal scales larger than the tubercles, flat and slightlv im- bricated. Eostral nearly twice as broad as high, without distinct groove above. Nostril formed by the rostral, first labial and three nasals, of which the upper is largest and separated from its fellow by a small scale. Upper labials 9-10 ; lower 10-11. Mental large, pentagonal, the postero-lateral angles obtuse. Chin shields small, hexagonal and in several transverse series, the anterior largest, the others gradually decreasing in size lo the small throat granules. Tail rather short, rounded and covered above with flat scales rather larger than the granules of the back ; beneath with a median series of large scales. Nine preaual pores in an angular sei'ies, meeting centrally. Color: dark-brown above, lighter beneath. Each lower labial with a dark spot in the centre. Total length 104 mm., tail 46. Length of head 16, breadth 12. Body 42. Type No. 5,721, Loo Choo Islands. Collected by Drs. Furness- andHiUer, 1896. This species differs from the rest of the genus by the presence of dorsal tubercles, such as are found in most Hemidadylus. In most details of scutellation it closely resembles H. inarmoraitts HailoweU, ^ and I would be disposed to regard them as identical, but the fact that HaUowell refers his specimen to the section dactyloteles of DumerU and Bibron, which included only species with fully clawed digits, makes such a conclusion impossible, and HaUowell' s type being lost, no further investigation is now practicable. Japalura polygonata (Hallow.). Nos. 5,742, 5,743, 5,745. Two have eight upper labials, one has seven. Tachydromus smaragdinus Boul. No. 5,786. 'Proc. Acad. Nut. Sci. Phila., 1860, p. 491. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185' Lygosoma pellopleurum (Hallow.). Nos. 5,739, 5,740, 5,741. The largest measures 100 mm. Color: rather pale-brown, with a narrow^ indistinct, dark vertebral line beginning on the neck, and a wider lateral stripe beginning at the eye. Eumeces marginatus (Hallow.). Eiyht specimens. No. 5,737 has two postmentals, and the third supraocular is longitudinally divided. Ophidia. Dinodon semicarinatus (Cope). Nos. 5,724, 5,725. The scales in the black crossbands are- mostly marked on their centres with the pale ground color. The small basal keels and apical pits are barely distinguishable. Lache&is flavoviridis (Hallow.). Eleven specimens; the largest measures 1,710 mm. (tail 272). BATRAOHIA. ECAUDATA. Rana gracilis W^ieg. Seven specimens, the largest measuring but 48 mm. Rhacopliorus viridis (Hallow.). Folypetades viridis Hallow., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliila., 1860, p. 500. Nos. 5,718, 5,719, 5,720 are unquestionably to be referred to this species, and as Hallowell's description is very meagre, I give the full characters. Vomerine teeth in two slightly oblique series, beginning at the inner anterior edge of the choanse. Head rather large; snout short and blunt ; canthus distinct and rounded ; loreal region slightly concave; nostril near the end of the snout; interorbital space nearly twice the width of upper eyelid; tympanum two-thirds the horizontal diameter of the eye. Fingers half, and toes two- thirds webbed ; finger disks neai'ly as large as the tympanum, those of the toes smaller; subarticular tubercles rather small; inner metatarsal tubercle elongated; outer absent. Tibio-tarsal joint reaches to the snout in the largest specimen and just beyond the eye in the smallest. The skin on the back is smooth, on the belly and 186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, under side of thighs strongly granular. A slight fold from orbit to shoulder above the tympanum. Upper surface pale-olive in spirits (probably blue or green in life) ; underneath yellowish, with small irregular dark spots on the groin. The anterior and postei'ior surfaces of the thigh are whitish, with small dark spots which extend on the inner tarsus, and in one specimen on the dorsum of the foot. Largest specimen : snout to vent 83 mm. ; hind limb 125. Next largest: snout to vent 76 mm. ; hind limb 114. Microhyla undulata sp. nov. Nos. 5,726, 5,727, 5,728 are referred to this genus, although they show no trace of a transverse ridge between the choanse, a condition Avhich may be due to immaturity. The snout is short ; iuterorbital S})ace wider than the upper eye- lid. Fingers and toes blunt, but not distinctly dilated ; first finger shorter than second ; toes nearly half webbed ; tubercles small ; outer and inner metatarsal tubercles distinct. The tibio-tarsal joint reaches beyond the eye. Skin smooth. Color : light-olive above, with an undidating dark-bro^vn dorsal band, beginning on the vertex and broadening on the rump, with a narrow prolongation running forward to the snout, and a transverse one to the upper border of each eyelid. A dark stripe from the orbit through the shoulder and a little beyond. Hind legs light-olive, lighter beneath, crossbanded with black on the anterior side of lower leg and tarsus, and an indistinct dark stripe on the anterior border of the thigh. Ventral surface brown, without spots. In 5,728 the markings are obscure. 5.726. Length of head and body 23 mm. ; hind limb 34. 5,728. " " '' 20 " • " " 34. 5.727. " " " 17 " ; " " 28. This species much resembles the Indo-Chinese Mici'ohyla ornata D. and B. in color pattern, but the toes are more extensively webbed and the legs are longer. Caudata. Molge pyrrhogastra ensicauda (Hallow.). * Six specimens. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187 ON PHYLOGENETIC CLASSIFICATION.^ by thomas h. montgomery, jr. Introduction. The great diversity in plans of classification is, in part, the result of the diversity of standpoints held by their framers. Whether the observer is conscientious in endeavoring to represent the facts as they are, or whether he with more elastic couscience disregards all which do not coincide with his preconceived standpoint, the consequence is a bewildering confusion of individual, AvhoUy sub- jective interpretations. While one relies upon embryological data to great extent, another trusts to the evidence of comparative anatomy, and a third unites a combination of these two methods in such a manner as he sees fit. All unite in holding similarity in structure to represent phyletic affinity, but they depart from one another on the question as to what constitutes similarity. And again, among the comparative anatomists, some attribute more value to this organ or organ system, others to that, and while some contend that similarities may be determined by the study of one particular conservative character, otliers argue that no character should be neglected. And he who finds only likenesses is to be ranked little or no better than he who sees only differences. As one scheme of classification follows upon another, and in its return receives emendation and perhaps subsequent lack of support, Ave may well inquire Avhether, after all, phyletic classification may ever be earnestly considered as more than speculation. Yet those who maintain this view forget that classification is interpretation, and that interpretation here is as allowable as in any other series of facts. Classification is a grouping of concepts necessary for the mind to make, in order to secure a foothold among the enoi'mous mass of facts of structure Avhich no one man can grasp. And the reason for the diversity of the interpretations is the enormous num- ber of the organisms themselves ; the greater the array, the more ' From the Zoological Laboratory of the University of Penosylvauia. 188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [A-pHl, difficult the explanation. Lamarck pointed out that no groups existed in Nature but only individuals, yet he arrayed these indi- viduals into certain mental groupings, such as was necessaiy for an understanding of them. Classification, orderly arrangement, is demanded, so that the field of facts may be better surveyed from the vantage points thus gained. But a purely arbitrary and artificial classification, such as many museum curators of an earlier time invented in order to arrange an animal according to superficial examination alone — and such as is still used by many who would avoid patient toil of thorough examination of all the parts — is not a help to the mind, for it does not represent the organisms in their natural relationships, and hence it and the morphology nmst be memorized separately. Phyletic classification shoidd be an epitome of our knowledge of the genetic relations of organisms, and many tireless workers are striving to make it so. Insomuch it may be regarded as the state- ment of our knowledge of the succession of evolution, and conse- quently, therefore, one of the main aims of zoological research. It is not only a naming and arranging of the individuals we study, not only a subservient preliminary to such study, but in its per- fected condition a statement of all Ave have learned about the organisms. All careful, accurate observation of structure and function, and of the ecological phenomena which help to explain these, must eventually be considered in such classification, by a gradual and critical synthesis of all these facts. All that we learn is expressed in its relations, and we define one organism in terms of another. Thus there arises a Avhole con- nected representation of the data, and whether Ave Avalk by the anatomical, the embryological, the physiological or the ecological path, all must use the same method to test their conclusions, namely, comparison. The classification that Ave striA^e for is based upon comparison, and is to represent the path of eA^olution as far as the facts alloAV us to determine it. There has been shoAvn by a more modern school of investigators a spirit of disapprobation if not of disgust against the plotting of " genealogical trees." To some extent they are justified in this disapproval, Avhen Ave note the A'ariety of opinions as to the relationships of many groups of animals. Thus, how few are the groups Avhich have not been called upon to serve as the ancestors of 1902. J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189 the Vertebral es ! Any one cau recall the manifold opinions as to the affinities of the Rotifera, of Macrobiotus and the Gordii, of the Diplopode ]\Iyriopoda, of Limidus, of the Pyenogonida, and of Sagitta and Pentastomum ; indeed, these examples could be much increased, and we could say that only in regard to very few groups is there any unanimity of opinion. Yet the phylogenist may well, in his turn, note the lack of unanimity in the conclusions reached in other lines of investigation. Has the cause of variation been explained, or have the phenomena of cleavage and differ- entiation, or those of cell division and inheritance, and how much is known of the interaction of sense organ and central nervous sys- tem ? The phylogenist does not answer his critics in a vindictive spirit, but to show that he as well as they must reach correct interpretations slowly. A view disproved is, after all, something gained, for it serves to narrow the field. , The phylogenetic classifi- cation of animals is perhaps the greatest task that a naturalist has before him, the aim to represent the sequence and relations of all known organisms, which presupposes a thorough knowledge of their structure and an understanding of the phenomena of growth and change. AVhether such a perfect classification can ever be obtained or not, it is the part of the naturalist to aid in its pursuance, even if not by working upon it directly. One does not stop before a task for fear he cannot complete it. When one looks upon it not only as a determination of relationships, but also as involving an under- standing of growth phenomena, it is found to be a project demand- ing the highest mental effort. It seems that perhaps more logical and true ideas of the relation- ships of animals may be gained by a critical consideration of the standpoints employed — of attempting to eliminate those that may be erroneous. If the standpoints can be logically lessened, the amount of the present confusion would be reduced. The animals noAV living do not i*epresent more than a fragment of the forms that have once existed, and very few of the latter have been preserved geologically. For the vast number of forms, most of those of softer structure, no paleontological remains can be expected ; and thei'e- fore for the determination of the ancestry of those now existent we must rely upon the study of the anatomy of the hitter. This may be the anatomy of the adult stage or of the earlier stages; 190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, aad the present contribution is in the main a discussion of the values of tlie comparative anatomical and of the embrj'ological methods in the determination of phylogeny. The materials that the phylogenist has before him are, first, the animals themselves; and second, the accumulation of previous studies upon their morphology. If the latter were always accurate repi'esentations, they Avould give one, in a short space of time and with a minimum of labor, the facts he needs ; but very few of the large array of morphological monographs are even tolerably accu- rate, and because of this one frequently goes astray in trusting to the descriptions of others. Hence, first and foremost, our ideas of morphological details must be accurate — i. e., without preconceived bias of interpretation — and, as far as possible, we should ourselves study the organisms which we compare. In the next place the whole method must be synthetic, comparing object with object until gradually a connected mental superstructure is formed, all the jmrls of which have been separately studied. This by no means implies the avoidance of working theories, for it has been the expe- rience of the naturalist that such theories are exceedingly fruitful in directing research; but it does imply that the Avorkiug theory should be considered as such and as nothing more, until it can be demonstrated that there are no overlooked facts Avhich may be in contradiction to it. At every point the method should be tested as well as the observation. By adding comparison to com- parison, provided we are working with a method in whose relative correctness we can feel confidence, we may expect fuller unanimity of result and gradual lessening of confusion in interpretation. I. The Possible Modes of Classification. A classification is necessary to enable a concise grouping of the facts ; a phylogeuetic classification should be the statement of the origin and transformation of organisms. Obviously there is a necessity of considering whether the study of structure alone is sufiicient for determining this racial progress, or whether the other attributes of organisms should be considered. In a word, why should the strictly morphological classification, the one dominant in present thought, be granted precedence ? Any of the following classifications might be instituted, liesides the morphological : ( 1 } Physiological, one based upon the degree. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191 kind, aud mode of interaction of those activities of parts known as functions. Here would presumably be found a progress from the more generalized to the more specialized, accompanying the evolution of the organism, just as in structural relations. (2) Physical or Dynamical, one based upon the so-called physical ener- gies or motions ; for such motions might be found to show successive complexity, according to changes within the organism. (3) Chemical, for increasing complexity and instability of the sub- stances composing the organism might go on parallel with the course of racial development. (4) Ecological, based upon the relations of the organism to its environment, its kinds of habits and their modifications, its geographical distribution, its general responses to environmental stimuli. (5) Psychical, dealing with its mental operations (this might be classed with the physiological). Now these possible kinds of classification fall into two gi-oups, the physical and chemical, and the morphological, physiological, ecological and psychical ; for while the physical phenomena of an organism may be considered by themselves, and the chemical equally so, all the other kinds of phenomena are closely correlated. We might term the physical and chemical aspects inorganic, and the others organic, were these expressions not now becoming some- what obsolete. There may have been an evolution of the " inor- ganic " as well as of the " organic " energies of organism, so that d priori a phyletic classification might be based upon the physical or the chemical phenomena. But how much has been determined of the evolution of physical and chemical energies ? Certain of their present actions are becoming explained, by gradual synthesis many com|X)und substances have become built up, and in change in the substances possibly the physical movements of these substances become changed; but are there facts to show that all substances have been derived from one primeval substance, or that all kinds of physical motion are referable to one ancestral kind ? The uncer- tainty on these points, the lack of relatively positive facts, the great hiatus in our knowledge of physical and chemical relations as studied particularly in organisms, are sufficient reasons for neglecting at the present time any attempt to base a phyletic classification of or- ganisms upon such relations. Until all the phenomena of growth and structure in organisms can be expressed in purely physical and chemical terms, which so far has not been possible, it would be in- 192 PROCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, correct to build upon classifications which would neglect many of the energies and phenomena of organisms which particularly dis- tinguish them from non -organisms. There then remain to be compared the morphological, physiological, ecological and psychical classifications, and to be determined which of them can be most profitably employed in tracing the course of evolution. All these are closely related, for the nervous system, e. g., shows a structure, a function, a relation to habits and envi- ronment, and to so-called mental phenomena. The living structui e and its activity are inseparable, and both have close connection with the envii'onment. The fact that they are all so closely and insepar- ably correlated that in treating of an organism the naturalist is obliged to regard it in all of these aspects, would argue that a classification might be based equally well upon any one of them. Much more has been determined in regard to structural than to physiological, psychical or ecological relations of organisms, so that a morphological, classification, having more facts at its command, is at present more practicable than any other. In time the mor- phological classification must be tested by the others, and now no phyletic classification is justifiable which wotild not regard the functions and the interactions to the environment, for these have modified the structure. Function has produced structure, and structure so formed in turn tends to restrain change of function, and the stimuli of the environment are the strong masters of the organism. Hence structure, function, relation to environment, each mirrors the others, any one of them might be the basis of the classification ; and if we now select the morphological charac- teristics as the basis for determining the phylogcny, it is because they offer us at present the richest material. But starting as we do with a classification based upon similarities determined on structure, we are not to consider that on structure alone our ultimate phylelic classification is to rest; for to understand the phylogeny of organ- isms we should not view them as seen in certain instants of time only, but must explain the continuous change that has occurred between those instants by analyzing the phenomena of growth and of reaction to en^^ronmental stimuli. The phenomena of structure, when the comparisons have been rightly instituted, may go far toward explaining the path of evolution, but the change produced l^y evolution, wliich is equally necessary for our ideas of phylo- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193 geny, can be delennined only by considering in addition the ener- gies and activities of organisms, and their interaction with the environment. II. The Individual. Organisms are living entities, yet, since each organism is known fo be composed of parts, there arises the necessity of determining the degree or kind of individuals that are to be classified. In Nature occur only individuals, as was clearly pointed out by La- marck, and is generally acknowledged at the present time, species and other groups being arbitrary concepts. Hence it is individuals that are to be classified and mentally arranged into groups characterized by similarity of structure ; but before this can be done it is necessary to decide what is meant by the term " indi- vidual. ' ' The primary idea of an individual is independence, as in saying ' ' an individual is that which is capable by itself of performing all the activities necessary for its existence" ; or " that which cannot be subdivided without ceasing to be." But neither of these state- ments are quite correct, for no organism is wholly independent of other organisms and of its environment, and experiment has shown (in cases of regeneration) that what are commonly kno^vu as individuals may be subdivided, and yet not cease to exist ; the independence then is one of relative degree. Another criterion is that of structural disassociation : an indi\'idual is an organism struc- turally complete in itself, not a part of a larger structural whole ; though in practice this definition is often found of little value, as in organisms forming corms and stocks, yet perhaps it is as far- reaching as any that can be offered. Another criterion would be the ability of reproducing itself through an ontogenetic cycle simi- lar to that by which it had been formed. Yet, with this definition difficulties at once arise. For while, e. g., the ovum of a bird, once fertilized, can form an adult bird containing ova in its ovary, the last-named ova are unable to give rise to a second gener- ation of adult birds until they are first fertilized. And the adult hen bird cannot produce a new generation until its ova are fertilized by spermatozoa from the male. The ovum of a bird, deposited outside the body of the mother, would generally be regarded as an individual, and so would the adult hen or cock ; but the ovum can - 13 19-i PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, not reproduce itself without being fertilized, nor can the hen or cock reproduce themselves without mutual union of their reproduc- tive elements. In other words, this criterion makes no allowance for the general occurrence of organisms which complement each other in ensuring px-ocreation. It is doubtful whether any organism can reproduce itself indefinitely without at least occasional interac- tion with another organism ; in the Metazoa the dioecious condition would appear to be the primitive one ; accordingly, the lowest organ- isms at some period in their reproductive cycle, the highest organ- isms at each period of reproduction, need cooperation with coinple- meutal individuals in order to insure successful reproduction. Whether the complemental individuals are structurally alike, as in the Infusoria and hermaphroditic Mollusca, or whether they are struc- turally dissimilar, as in most dioecious forms, it Avould still hold that the single organism would not be capable by itself to reproduce itself. And again, accidentally infertile organisms or normally infertile organisms, such as the worker females of the Hymenoptera, could on this definition not be classed as individuals since they are unable to procreate themselves ; yet, no one would maintain that an ox or a worker ant is not an individual.^ Therefore this criterion of individuals, the ability by itself to reproduce itself, must be changed to " ability, on interaction with complemental individuals, to reproduce itself.'' But this definition will not enable us to determine the individuals to be considered in phyletic classification, as we shall proceed to show. There are found among organisms, as has been so frequently reiterated, many degrees and kinds of individuals. For each more complex organism must be decided what is the higher individual, and what the individuals of lower grades. The ideas of corm, stock, person, organ, intergrade, sometimes- for the same organism, almost always when we compare complex organisms of different kinds. Thus we may term ' ' colony ' ' or " corm ' ' the connected individuals of the protozoan Glohigerina, a proliferating H3'droid stalk, the unified bundles of spermatozoa of an Isopod Crustacean, or a compoimd Tunicate. And yet how these several organizations '^ This objection to the definition is not, however, perfectly fair, since ni classification we deal with normal and hot accidentally mutilated organisms, and since a worker ant may in one sense be considered embryonic, becanse its genital organs and ova do not attain a complete development, bnt are arrested in their growth. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. IBo differ structurally! In the Tunicate organization itself a great series of " individuals " may be distinguished, as one will. Thus (1) a cellular individual, such as a chromosome or a centrosome; (2) a tissue individual, a cell; (3) an organ individual, a tissue or some specialized part of the organ ; (4) what is generally spoken of as an organ, such as the heart or the intestine; (5) an organ system, such as the body wall; (6) what is generally regarded as the individual in this particular case, and (7) what is termed the corm. For the cytologist, the embryologist and the anatomist th^ idea of what constitutes the individual will differ. Likewise, there are many possibilities of interpretation of the organization of a Siphonophore ; and in the ease of a proliferating Hydra or Mlcro- stomum, it is practically impossible to decide at just what time two individuals appear in the place of the original one. All the preceding bears out what each naturalist finds in his own experience, that there occur many degi'ees of individuals, and that a sharp definition to cover all cases is practically impossible. Per- haps the nearest to it is foimd in the idea of structural disassociatiou, though this too breaks down when we consider the various kinds of conns and colonies found in organisms, and 1 he cases of intimate sym- biosis (such as the Turbellarian Convoluta with its enclosed plant cells). And yet to work upon our phyletic classification, it is necessary to know Avhat are the individuals which should be the materials of the study ; perhaps they may be more closely deter- mined by the following line of reasoning. Progressive evolution is a change from the more simple and generalized to the more complex and specialized in both the indi- vidual and the race. In the evolution of the race we consider the organism as a Avhole. This gives us the working criterion of indi- vidual, which is concisely the largest disassociated whole. And it is in this sense that the term individual is generally employed hy phylogeuists — that is, " individuals" are the units which make up our concept of "species," as the latter term is usually employed by naturalists. This definition will not apply to all cases, as, for instance, certain corms; but in many, if not all, such cases the ' ' individual ' ' and the ' ' colony of individuals ' ' may be eventually distinguished by comparison of undoubted single individuals with corms of imited individuals of genetic affinity with the former. And it is necessary wherever possible to distinguish an individual from a corm, so that relatively similar units may be compared. 196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, III. The Organism and the Stage at which it is to be Classified. For purposes of phylogenetic classificatiou it is perhaps best to regard " organism " as synonymous with " individual " — i. e., the largest disassociated whole. Yet under the idea of ' ' organism ' ' have been grouped living imits of different values, just as we have seen to be the case with the idea of " individual." And on this account it is necessary to see what these degrees of organisms are, and why a particular degree of organism should be made synony- mous with a particular degree of individual. In a multicellular animal parts of a cell have been regarded as organisms. Thus Altmann has considered certain granules, which according to him compose the living substance, to be each of them separate organisms, so that the cell would represent a symbiotic state of many organisms.^ The centrosome is frequently spoken of as an organism, and by Eisen the nucleus, the cytoplasm and the attraction sphere have been regarded as three distinct organisms in a state of symbiosis. Chromosomes, by those who have cor- roborated the original position of Boveri, are looked upon as cellular individuals, though it is recognized that th-ese elements stand in intimate functional connection with the rest of the cell. But what concerns us here most particularly is the standpoint of those who consider the multicellular animal to be an aggregate of organisms, the cells ; and the view which regards an Annelid to be composed of a chain of organisms, its metameres or segments, or a Cestode to be made up of a row of organisms, its proglottids. Now these various degrees or kinds of " organisms " would not be so confused if a distinction were drawn sharply between "organism" and "element of an organism." Under " organ- ism" we should Ihen understand " the largest disassociated whole," and its parts, as organs, tissues, cells or parts of cells, would be the ' ' elements ' ' which compose it. Whitman in his paper. The Inadequacy of the Cell- Theory of Development, has pointed this out most incisively. There he shows that structure is dependent upon the genei'al organization, not upon the particular nature of the^cell components; acellular and cellular organs may be com - 3 That the protoplasm of the cell is an aggregate of miaute but visible separate granules, as Altmana endeavored to prove, has not been cor- roborated by the more careful studies on the cell. 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF rillLADEEPHIA. 197 pared, unicellular with multicellular, and intracellular with inter- cellular. In other words, we might say that it is not the cells which make the organism, but the organism which makes the cells. This thought maybe carried further: the cell contains particular parts or elements, such as chromosomes, centrosomes and cytoplasm, but is more than a mere aggregate of these; and the Annelidau organi- zation contains parts, such as the metameres, but the latter are not separate organisms. Thus the Metazoan is not a mere symbiotic aggregate of cells regarded as individual organisms, but these cells are merely subservient parts of the whole organization. Under " organism " then we must consider the whole organization, if we would not confuse entities of different values; and for the parts of such organisms the terms ' ' structural element " or " micro- organism." The organization as a whole is, then, of primary importance, not its elements. And by employing ' ' organism ' ' to mean the " organization as a whole," we are justified in classing " organ- ism" as synonymous with " individual," as defined above, namely, ' ' the largest disassociated whole. " It is the organism defined in this sense that is the unit to be treated in phylogenetic classification. It is necessary to be clear upon this point, and not to regard parts of cells, or cells, or tissues, or organs as the primary materials to be treated in classification. The organisms or individuals of our classification are then primarily the kind which are mentally grouped under what we generally understand as "species." And since a species is simply a mental association of similar individuals or organisms, it cannot be perceived ; so that species are not the materials for classification, but the perceptible individuals or organ- isms which compose them. This conclusion as to what are the organic units primarily to be classified is further emphasized when we come to consider at what stage of its life-history the organism should be classified. The organism may be treated at any or all stages of its cycle, in order to understand its structure and growth phenomena ; but it must be determined at what stage it is to be classified, in order to sliow its phyletic progress. Now classification must represent not only similarities of descent, but divergence from the original ancestor ; must show how far each organism has progressed in its evolution. The stage at which it is 198 PROCKEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^pn', to be classified, arranged iu the genealogical system, would then be that of its perfected condition, for then is to be found its furthest degree of specialization. And to classify it at an earlier stage would be to neglect the full degree of its evolution. This is a conclusion of importance when we consider certain attempts to clas- sify organisms considered wholly at embryonic and larval stages, as in the so-called " embryological classifications." No objection is made to consider organisms at any stage, as an ovum, an embryo, a larva, or an adult, nor yet to consider a particular organ by itself in any of these stages, for such examination is necessary for under- standing structure and growth ; but these considerations are prelim- inary to the phyletic classing of the organism, which must be done Avhen it has attained its full development and is most different from other organisms. Organisms at their perfected stages are then the materials to be classified. But it is difficult to determine just what is the perfected or mature stage of an organism. In general the period of reproduction may be said to be the perfected stage. This would especially be the case for many free-living organisms which die after reproduction, as the males of most insects immediately after copulation, and the females of many after oviposition. In these particular cases the organisms attain their fullest development at the period of reproduc- tion, and die without passing through further structural phases. But in other free-living animals there are several periods of genera- tion before the animal dies ; and in some animals, as in certain birds, the dimensions of the body and the character of the plumage change with each reproductive period — that is, the size and color changes more or less with each prenuptial moult. And in mam- mals, those whose reproductive period may extend over several years, a gradual change of the whole organism takes place during this time, so that in the stage of its last reproductive period it may be quite different in its characters from what it w'as at the first. Also, in species with individuals cai)able of reproduction occur some- times individuals with arrested genital organs, such as the worker Hymenoptera ; ft)r the latter reproductive activity cannot be consid- ered the criterion of structural perfection or maturity. Then, in cases of neotenia, the reproductive elements may attain their full growth before the other parts of the body : the organism here is reproductive! y mature before it is somatically. Again, at the stage 1902.] NATURAL SCIEN'CES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199 of reproductive activity the orgauism may be less differeQtiated structurally than at preceding stages, as in some extreme cases of endoparasitism. Where alternation of generations (metagenesis) occurs, there may be, as in the case of certain Hydrozoa, two generations, each reproductively active, and the individuals of which are structurally different : which of these is the perfected stage ? And finally, when it is recalled that for certain organisms there is a succession of stages of senility, it will be seen how diffi- cult it is to define Avhat is meant by maturity or perfection of organization. We have just seen that the period of reproductive activity does not always fix sharply the stage of greatest perfection of the organ- ism. This stage, from the phyletic standpoint, is that when the organism has attained the end of the period which precedes senile modification. This may be the stage of greatest structural differen- tiation of the organism, or it may not. In the case of an extreme parasite, such as certain of the highly degenerated Cii-ripedes and Copepods, the larval stage may be the most perfect, from the stand- point of general structure, for then the locomotory appendages, sense organs and separateness of the nietameres are clearly pro- nounced, while they degenerate later. But, if such a degenerate parasite were classified at its earlier, non -parasitic, more structurally perfect stage, such a classification would not represent the degree in which its evolution has diverged from that of its relatives, and would therefore rank the organism in a more primitive stage than it deserves. It is the end stage w^hich shows how far the individual has proceeded in its evolution, whether progressive or regressive, while classification at an earlier stage, even though then the organ- ism be structurally more complex, would not show the whole path of descent. Maturity, from the phyletic standpoint, is the stage preceding senility. It is not my purpose here to define senility, or what characterizes it, and indeed, senility may appear in one part before another has reached its full development, and at its first appearance is difficult to detect. But we would say that the organ- ism as a whole is not senile so long as it continues the power of reproduction; and if there are several periods of reproduction, we should not consider the organism to be senile as a whole until after the last period. Thus, in the cases of birds which show successive nuptial plumages and structures, or of mannnals which change 200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, more or less with each successive period of reproduction (as the male deer which multiply the number of prongs upon their antlers), it would be the last period of reproduction at which the individual should be classified. In a case of excessive parasitism, many organs (»f the body may have been in degeneration before the time of reproductive activity, yet the organism should not be classified before it is functionally reproductive. And it is correct to consider the organization as a whole as non-senile up to the time of the repro- tluctive activity, since non-senile powers of growth are transmitted to its ova. In cases of complete successive hermaphroditism, where the individual is first functionally male, then hermaphrodite, then female (protandry), or where the succession is the reverse (pro- terogyny), the terminal stage also would be the one at which the individual should be classified, even though, as in many pulmonate Gasteropods, certain organs have during the reproductive period become degenerate (as the genital organs characteristic of the first functional stage). Accordingly, in cases where alternation of generations does not occur, the mature or perfected stage from the phyletic standpoint would be found not before the last reproductive period. Generally it would be at that last period, if not always. For even in the case of neotenia, where the reproductive cells are mature before the somatic structure is fully differentiated, such procreative precocity in parasites is evidently only an adaptation to accidents inducing a pre- cocious departure from the body of the last host (as in Gordius), and as a rule the soma has time to differentiate fully before the reproduc- tive elements are deposited. In mammals, neotenia may be said to occur, since considerable somatic differentiation takes place after the first period of reproduction ; but in mammals the case of neo- tenia need not perplex us, since, as has been shown, a mammal is to be classified at the time of its last reproductive period. The organization as a whole is then non-senile until after the last repro- ductive period ; the individual is to be classified at that period, and not before, for classification at a preceding state would not show the full extent of its development. Classification after that stage is not permissible, unless for some cases of neotenia, since cessation of reproductive activity denotes the beginning of senility (catalysis of the organization as a whole), and since after such cessation further changes of the organism could not be transmitted to the offspring. lOOli.J NATURAL SCIE>'CES OF PIIILADELnilA. 201 There remain to be considered the cases of alternation of genera- tions (metagenesis), where the individuals of one generation differ struct urally from those of the next generation, as in many Hydro- zoa, where from the polyp is produced a medusa, from the medusa a polyp. Each generation here is reproductively active, so that the state of such activity does not decide for us whether the classification should consider primarilythe polyp or the medusa condition. Kow, in the Hydrozoa many variations are fouud in the cycle of genera- tion. Hydra can produce new polyps asexually, by buddiug, and also by fertilized eggs, i. e., sexually; here there is change of gen- eration, but not polymorphism of the successive generations. In certain Hydromedusse there is true change of generation, with free- swimming medusse budded off from the polyp individual (" meta- genetic " Hydrozoa j; in others the change of generation is not so clearly marked, but the medusoid individuals remain attached to the polyp as medusoid buds or gonophores (Hydrozoa with masked change of generation) ; in still others there is no polyp stage, but a medusa develops from the egg, and the latter becomes another medusa ( " hypogenetic " forms, with suppression of one genera- tion). Again, while most medusse are incapable of asexual divis- ion, and reproduce by ova and spermatozoa, certain of them repro- duce also asexually, by budding. In the Hydrozoa is fouud a fund of differences in the degree and kind of generation, such as no other metazoan group evinces (not even the Trematoda), and on this account they furnish a broad field for examination. Now in such Hydrozoa as show no change of generation, the individual should be classified at its last stage of reproductive activity, in order to represent its degree of racial development. Where true change of generation occurs and the different generations aie sepa- rated individuals, such individuals should be classified as stand at the end of each metagenetic cycle. This is a consequence of the argument given before, to show that the organization as a whole is most advanced and perfect, and therefore expresses most fully the phyletic divergence of the organism from its ancestors, at the time of the last period of reproduction. Where the change of genera- tion appears less pronounced, by reason of the egg-producing indi- viduals remaining attached as gonophores to the body of the polyp, the same conclusion would hold — i. e., that the egg-producing indi- vidual should be tlie one classified, provided tliat such a medusoid 202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADExMY OF [April, bud -or gonophore be sufficiently specialized in structure from the polyp condition to be regarded as another individual and not merely a part or organ of the polyp. For, granting the correctness of the general view that such gonophores represent modified medusae, which at an earlier racial period led an independent, free-swimming existence, they may in extreme cases lose all the original medusoid characters except that of producing eggs, show no independence of the polyp stalk, and, in fact, be more correctly considered organs (gonads) of the latter than separate individuals. This would be a case where a part once cut off as a sej^arate individual with an independent existence has been gradually reduced to the state of an organ. In such a case, then, where the gonophore shows no inde- pendent existence, but is a part of the polyp stalk, the whole organization — i. e., the polyp stalk with its gonophores — should be the one classified, because all together represent one organization. This whole organization should be classified when its reproduc- tive organs, the gonophores, are in functional activity, that being the period of the greatest perfection of the organism. The difficulty in putting this principle to practice is to be found in those cases where it is hard to determine Avhether the egg-producer is to be considered an independent medusa or an organ of the polyp stalk. But at present we are considering only the principles of classification ; two j)rocesses or states which in their extreme conditions are easily separated, are often found in natural phenomena to be connected by gradual steps ; this is to be expected in any gradual evolution. Each case difficult of decision must then be considered in turn. The principle, then, in cases of pronounced change of genera- tion, whex-e the successive individuals are structurally different, is to classify the organism at the end stage of each cycle. A cycle is in a sense a circle, without beginning or end ; yet a little thought convinces that there must have been a commencement to every cycle. In the case of a Metazoan, where from the egg develops the mature organism, and from that an egg again, we commonly speak of the mature organism as the end and the egg as the beginning ; and with right, since development is from the more generalized to the more specialized. Or regarding only the germ-cells of a Metazoan, apart from the soma, we find also a cycle : n generations of ovo- gonia, a stage of synapsis of the chromosomes, a stage of matura- tion, a stage of conjugation (fertilization), all constituting one r,i02.] XATL'RAL SCIENXES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203 cycle, which is followed by another like it. This germiual cycle too must have had a commencenieiit, and, as I have attemp- ted to show elsewhere, the period of fertilization (conjugation of ovum and spermatozoon) is to be considered the starting point. In the case of change of generation for the particular objects under examination, the Hydrozoa, the polyp stage is generally regarded as the beginning, and the medusa as the end of the cycle. This has its justification, for the medusa is more complex in structure than the polyp, that is, has passed through a longer ontogenetic stage. Here, too, however, the cycle really begins with the fertilized ovum, and ends with the stage that produces ova, if we would draAV a parallel to the gei-minal cycle of INIetazoa. In the metagenetic Hydrozoa it is the medusa which produces the ova. If, on the other hand, greatest complexity of stnicture should not coin- cide with the end of the reproductive cycle, such complexity would of course not be a criterion of this stage of the cycle, which never- theless should be the one classified. Such a case would be an organism with, change of generation, but with a regressive develop- ment in the latter part of its ontogeny (as might be induced by parasitism), so that the terminal stage would be less complex than some preceding one. No such case is known, however; so that with the facts at hand we are justified in concluding that greatest com- plexity of structure is the test of the last stage of the cycle in alter- nating generations ; and it is that last stage which is the one to be classified. IV. The Classification of Polymorphic Individuals. In the preceding section have been considered such polymorphic individuals as succeed each other in alternation of generations In many species are found together in the same generation individuals which differ from each other, as either in sexual dimorphism or in polymorphism. The former shows the distinction singly of males and females, and is found in dioecious species ; while the latter shows the males and females in several different forms (as the polymorphic Hymenoptera). Polymorphism also may show in the same species a distinction of sexual from asexual individuals, as in certain corms. Sexual dimorphism and polymorphism are the results of a division of lal)or between the individuals of a species, as the structural differences in the parts of one organization are due to a similar 204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, specialization between them ; in the one case the units are indi- viduals, having physical disconnection, while in the other they are not individuals, but parts of one whole. In the former they com- pose not a perceptible but a thinkable whole, which we term a species. The question is, accordingly, where the individuals of a species are heteromorphic, on which of them should the classification be based ? On the males or on the females, on the sexual or the asexual individuals ? Our classification must start Avith the single individual, and proceed next to an arrangement of the individuals into those lowest groups known as species. If all the individuals of a given generation of a species are monomorphic, the consideration need not pass beyond any one individual, for each individual would show the full characteristics of the species. And since this is not the case in species in which the indiA^duals are heteromorphic, in such species all the component individuals must be studied before the species can be mentally defined. In other words, while indi- viduals are the primary materials of classification, species are the primary group units and so must be defined as to include all the kinds of individuals composing them. Starting then with the principle that individuals ai'e to be first considered, and that a classification of the most primary groups — i. e., species — demands a knowledge of all the individuals which compose such species, Ave must not in classification neglect the con- sideration of any individual. Therefore classification must be based upon all individuals, since otherAvise our concepts of the loAA'est group Avould be incomplete. To the systematist are known many instances of species Avith sexual dimorphism, Avhere the indiA'iduals of one sex are less valua- ble than those of the other Avith regard to closely related species. Thus among the insects, the females of Disptera are, as a rule, difficult to distinguish specifically, Avhile in the less conservative males specific characters are much more clearly pronounced, and in this particular case much of the classification has been based upon the genital armature of the male.^ In birds also the males generally show greater differences than the females ; this is observed *If the genital armature of the female, which is to greater or less extent adapted to that of the male, be examined more thoroughly than it has at present, perhaps it, too, would afford good specific distinctious. 1902.] XATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205 also in niauy mammals, as the Cervidae, in the Gordiacea, and in uumeroas other groups. Bui while a description of a new species is in practice often based upon individuals of one sex, in cases where those of the other sex have not been seen, yet such a descrip- tion is only a partial characterization of the species, for the comple- ment al individuals have been neglected; it is not, strictly speaking, a description of a species, but of only one kind of individuals of that species. Now, let us consider two species, A and B, each with sexual dimorphism, the females of the two not appreciably different, while the .males show marked differences. Then on comparison of tlie females alone, one would conclude that they composed only one species; of the males alone, that they composed two perfectly dis- tinct speci&s. The error of basing the characterization upon either sex by itself Is then ob\'ious, for A and B are neither one species, nor are they c^ear^j/ distinguishable species ; the similarities of the females of the two show that the species are very closely related, while the differences of the males show that they are nevertheless distinct. The species would then be characterized, " females indis- tinguishable, males differing in such and such characters."^ Tills reasoning, based upon cases where neither sex is markedly degenerate, may be, to a certain extent, a guide also for such cases where either the male or the female is degenerate in comparison with the other sex. Such cases are numerous, as the degenerate charac- ter of the male in the Rotatoria, in the Echiurid Bonellia, the marked sexual dimorphism in the Coccidse and some parasitic Copepoda, etc. If in these the classification were based upon the more degenerate individuals, the species would be ascribed too low a phyletic rank, and if upon the less degenerate alone, too high a rank. For here, as for the other cases, the characterization of a species must be the sum total of the characterization of its differ- ent individuals. In such a species the male and the female may have had a corresponding ontogenetic development up to a certain point, then the one developed regressively and the other progres- sively, a difference in mode of life beiug the determining factor * In the particular case used for discussion we have excluded the pos- sibility of the occurrence of two kinds of males coinplemental to a single kind of female, i. e., dimorphism of tlie males. When females appear indistinguishable, however, after a thorough study of all their parts, while the males are easily distinguished, the classifier should disprove that it is not a case of male dimorphism before he founds two species. 20G PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OE [April, (as it probably is in most cases of sexual dimorphism in the lower animals). If both sexes had a parallel ontogenetic development, we should not hesitate to classify the individuals at the terminal stage of their reproductive activity, whether the development had been progressive throughout or in part regressive. AVhen there has been a divergence in the ontogeny of the two sexes, the males and females being complemental individuals, the species contains both jirogressive and regressive individuals, it is to be classified at the time of repi'oductive activity of the two sexes, and is to be ascribed a rank intermediate between that of the conditions of the two sexes. Unless this principle of considering all the kinds of individuals in a species be strictly enforced, great confusion woidd ensue in the ranking of a species, depending as to whether the classifier con- sidered the males alone or the females alone, or asexual individuals alone, or all together. It is necessary that all the individuals of a species be knoAAni befox-e such a species can be thoroughly character- ized, and for only a comparatively few species of certain animal groups have such broad definitions been given. It will of course be understood that the writer does not imply that species would be perceptibly delimitable, were it not for the extinc- tion of or our lack of knowledge concerning intermediate species. ' * Species " is a mental concept for a primary group of individuals of the closest genetic connection. If in any phyletic series we could know to-day all intermediate stages, so that the Avhole would be a continuous line of development, and assuming that such a develop- ment were perfectly gradual, nevertheless we should have to project the concepts of species into that whole, arbitrary though such con- cepts would be, in order to secure certain fixed points for observation and interpretation. Thus we study a section through the body of an animal if we cannot understand this animal in its entirety, and by supplementing our knowledge with sections from other regions of the body gradually reconstruct the whole. A species is a mental section of a line of evolution, and is necessary to enable us to inter- pret the whole. That is Avhat is here understood by the determina- tion of a species, AVhere, through extinction, we find disconnected species, we have sections made for us by Nature. V, The Kinds of Homolocjies. Before considering the methods of treatment of structural char- acters, and comparing the anatomical and em bryological methods of 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207 determining genetic relation^^hips, it will be Avell to discnss briefly the kinds of structural relations known as " homologies." The working principle of the phylogenist who is studying a line of development represented to-day only by fragments, and who has not the resource of fossil remains of the extinct members of that line, is that similarity in essential particulars denotes genetic affin- ity. This principle would seem the more probable the more com- plex the organisms treated, for it Avould not be probable that two complex forms from very different beginnings could come to resem- ble each other in all particulars. The less complex and more plastic the organization, the more complete could be the convergence of sti'ucture. This principle is a necessary postulate, and though it remains to be thoroughly proved, yet it is allowable so long as the known facts do not contradict it. Without its aid no phylogenetic conclusions would be possible. There have been distinguished various kinds and degrees of structural smiilarities or homologies. Owen, in his Lectures on Vertebrata, 1846, defines; "Analogue, a part or organ in one animal which has the same function as another part or organ in a different animal. Homologue, the same organ in different animals under every variety of form and function." This distinction, generally accepted to-day, terms ' ' analogical ' ' a similarity of function, and " homological " a similarity of structure. He distin- guishes further three kinds of homological relations. Special homology, " correspondency of a part or organ, determined by its relative position and connections, with a part or organ in a different animal ; the determination of which homology indicates that such animals are constructed on a common type." Genei'al homology, " a higher relation of homology .... in which a part or series of parts stands to the fundamental or general type Thus when the basilar process of the human occipital bone is determined to be the 'centrum' or' body' of the last cranial vertebra." Serial homology or homotypy, the relation of segmentally arranged parts of the same organism. " In the instance of serial homology .... the femur, though repeating in its segment the humerus in the more advanced segment, is not its namesake — not properly, therefore, its ' homologue.' I propose, therefore, to call the bones so related serially in the same skeleton ' homotypes ' and to restrict the term 208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, 'homologue' to the corresponding bones in different species.® And in his paper On the Archetyjye and Homologies of the Vertebrate Skeleton, in 1848, he states: " Homological relationships .... are mainly, if not wholly, determined by the relatiye position and connection of the parts, and may exist independently of form, proportion, substance, function and similarity of deyelopment. " Owen implied by " liomology " an essential agreement in struc- ture and connections, a relation of essential structural agreement. But, as Cu\der before and L. Agassiz after him, he held the view of the occurrence of diffei'ent plans or types of structm-e among ani- mals which could not intergrade and were not gradually evolved. Under the present dominance of the theory of descent, the idea of separately created ' ' types " or " plans ' ' has been relinquished, so that while we retain the term " homology," we define it as a rela- tion of genetic descent. Of the kinds of homologies distinguished by Owen, the general and serial homologies are of not the same direct value to the phylo- genist as the special. Kelations of two sides of the same body to each other, of anterior to posterior end, of one antimere or meta- mere to another, of the right arm to the left arm, or of an arm to a leg, etc., are all relations between the parts of one organism. In phylogeny we are immediately concerned with the relations of differ- ent organisms, and with general homologies, including under that term also serial homologies, only in so far as they serve to explain the former. With the treatment of structural characters we shall have to consider general homologies, and now simply mention some kinds of special homologies. Under the idea of ' ' special homology ' ' is nov/ generally under- stood a relation of genetic afiinity. " Homologie neunen wir eiue Uebereinstimmung, die auf gemeinsamer Abstammung der betreffen- den Organismen beruht. Der Ausdruck Homologie wird demnach voUkommen im Siune der Homophylie gebraucht. " '' And so we must employ it, with the working theory of " unity of develop- ment ' ' in the place of the earlier ' ' unity of plan. ' ' In order to understand the relations of two organisms as wholes, it is generally first necessary to commence by comparing them part by part ; the * Vicq d'Azyr was the first recognizer of serial homology : Parallele des OS qui comjwsent les extremites, Mem. Acad. Sci., 1774. ' Hatschek, Lehrbuch, 1888. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209 correspoudeucs of one part in organism A with a similar part in organism B is a special homology, when interpreted as a proof of genetic affinity, A special homology is then our interpretation of the similai'ity of the parts of two organisms as denoting homophyly, or likeness of genesis. Various degrees of special homologies have been distinguished. Thus Gegenbaur:^ complete homolocjy, when the organ in position and connection is retained unaltered ; defective, when a part oi'igin- ally present has been lost ; augmentative, wdaen a part not originally present is added ; imitatory, as when one metamere produces a struc- ture characteristic of a metamere further anterior or posterior (the three last being classed by Gegenbaur as i)icomplete homologies). Frequently also the distinction is made between adult and embryonic (or larval) homologies, a distinction based upon the stage of the iudi\'idual in which the homology is determined. Another grouping of homologies, due mainly to the study of cell lineage, is actual homology, when at the stage considered the relation is found ; pros- pective, as when two blast omeres (of different organisms) are con- sidered homologous because they give rise to similar organs in the adults ; and retrospective, as when two adult parts (of different organisms) are considered homologous because they are derived from corresponding cells or. regions of the embryos (or larvse) of these organisms. Still further classifications of homologies are possible, but these are sufficient for our present purpose. Under the idea of "homology" we shall then understand ' ' homophyly, ' ' and restrict in Avhat is to follow the term * ' homol- ogy " to the idea of " special homology," unless otherwise specified. In the determination of homologies we may proceed with the adult structure (the anatomical method), or with the embryonic or larval structure (the embr3'ological method). And we shall have to decide, if possible and without bias, which of these methods is the correct one : the one of Owen which lays stress upon the adult rela- tions of structure, or the one which lays primary importance upon ontogenetic similarities, and has been defined by Darwin'' as follows : " Homology. — That relation between parts which results from their development from corresponding embryonic parts, cither in different animals .... or in the same individual." ^ Vergleichende Anatomie der Wirbelthiere, I, 1898, " Orirjin of Species, Glossary 14 210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, VI. Structural Characters, and the Determination of THEIR Relative Values for Phylogenetic Classification. The coufliction of the judgments of different morphologists in regard to lines of evolution is due to the differences in their opinions as to what structural cliaracters should be used as the basis of compari- son. If there were some well-founded principle in determining the relative values for phylogeny of such characters, the number of ]ioiuts of view would be lessened and greater agreement therel^y attained. But, as the case stands to-day, with each new point of view ideas of phylogenetic relationships are changed ; and since in those whose standpoints have become fixed there is no adoption of the new points of view, the latter simply bring in additional schemes of classification, and will continue to do so until all possible points of \dew are exhausted. This oncoming of new interpreta- tions is of the highest value in the study of morphology, and he sees best who can, unbiassed, consider facts under many standpoints. A new interpretation is a light strong in proportion as it is main- tained by the facts. Yet too often the conclusion is reached before the thinker has taken time to consider the objections — before he has sought to prove his conclusion by first trying to disprove it. There is in every worker more or less of a tendency to defend his point of view and to be slow in relinquishing it; and this is good for the clear expression of the point of view, but bad for the thinker and his science when he continues to abide by it after it has been dis- proved. Each new point of view is to be welcomed, since we cannot say which one is right until all have been examined, pro- vided that it has not been hastily conceived. In the following we shall endeavor to express certain principles in the search for homologies, and to determine the general method in the search for them ; bearing in mind that it is simply an attempt to reduce the confliction of opinion, rather than an essay of a new point of vieAV. (a) The Organization and its Components. In Section III it has been shown that the organism is not a colony of relatively independent units, but is one whole containing parts; and that the whole gives its impress to the parts, rather than the paits to the whole. And then it was shown that an " organism " and an "organization," both terms being employed in the broad sense, are svnonvmous. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211 The organizatiou being then one closely united whole, we reach the principle that the organization as a whole must be studied ; and hence that any scheme of classification based upon one kind of organs alone is erroneous in its method.^" The truth of this is fur- ther borne out by the following reasoning : The organization being one closely connected whole, there is a perfect physiological and mor- phological correlation of its parts ; and although some of them have a greater value to the whole economy than others, yet each part is dependent upon the others. The parts are not individuals, in the sense in which the individual has been defined (Section II), since they are normally incapable of separate existence. ^^ When we say ' ' a gland cell of the intestine of a snail, ' ' we speak in succession of a part of a larger part of a whole. Not only from physiological facts does this correlation become apparent but from morphological as well, for none of the parts show sharp demarkatious. A vertebra of an adult mammal might be considered at first as a well circum- scribed part; yet besides being one of a series of vertebrai, all developed from one anlage, its fibrous sheath passes over gradually into the tendons of the muscles attached to it, and its nerves and blood vessels are mere portions of the nervous and vascular systems of the whole organization. Similarly with a limb, a sense-organ, a limg, etc. For none of the parts of the whole organization can sharp boundaries be found ; even the cells are either connected by a fusion of their contiguous membranes or processes, or by a common intercellular substance. '" The parts of the organization are then not individuals, since between all the parts exists the closest correlation ; and the ' ' largest disconnected whole ' ' is the organism of phylogeny. Further, no part can be understood alone by itself, but the place which it occu- pies in the whole organization must be considered. It is not to be wondered at that the paits of organisms are not '"A case in point is Huxley's brilliant paper On the Classification of Birds, 1867, wherein birds are primarily grouped according to the structural characters of one region of the skull. " The germ cells, however, in their mature stages come under a dif- ferent point of view, for they are then individuals of a second generation which have not yet left the body of the first. In tlie present discussion, wlien not otherwise stated, only the somatic parts are considered. ''^ The migratory cells of the body of Metazoa show perhaps more uule pendence than the other cells, yet they too are iutluenccd by the state of the organism as a whole ; and even such blood and lymph cells are normally incapable of existence outside of the organism. 212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [-M^^il, cui^ily tlelimitcd, since they are but local specializations of a whole. And tlic relative kinds of parts intergrade, so that it is purely- arbitrary to distinguish, e. f/., between organ and organ system, between raetaniere and region, etc. Though it is necessary to give distinctiue names to particular parts, for purposes of description, it must be kept in mind that the parts or ' ' organs ' ' in being not sharply delimitable are purely arbitrary distinctions. Thus, an ' ' organ ' ' is more of a concept than an organism, since it is not so perceptibly delimitable; though less of a concept than a species, since the connection of its components is perceptible. In one organization we find the general body plan, the major parts which compose this, and the minor parts Avhich compose the latter. In a radiate body plan, as shown by a star-fish, the body is composed on the principle of converging rays, the autimeres; each of the latter is bilaterally symmetrical, with a distinction between dorsal and ventral, and contains a series of ' ' organs ' ' ; and each of these organs has its minor parts. In a trematode there is a bilaterally symmetrical body plan, without antimeres; in an annelid, a bilaterally symmetrical united with a metameric, the larger parts being here the segments or metameres. Other body plans are the monaxonic, where there is more or less strictly radial grouping of the parts along one long axis ; and the homaxouic, very rarely found, where all the axes passing through the central point are of equal length. But still other distinctions of body plans are possible. Thus : that in which the two ends of the body are dissimi- larly developed, as head and tail, which might be known as the antipolar; where the body axis is straight and where it is bent, (Homaxonic and Heteraxonic, Hatschek) ; and various others which may be arbitrarily distinguished. Therefore there are many kinds of general body plans." Of the major components of these body plans we may distinguish antimere and metamere, anterior and pos- terior, right and left, dorsal and ventral, etc. The major compo- nents of the latter are what are generally called ' ' organs, ' ' such as "Though we use here the term body plan, we cannot any longer restrict its use to that of Cuvier, von Baer, and L. Agassiz ; the four fundamental body plans distinguished by these naturalists represented to them four separate ^ais of creation, which were unbridgeable. In the li"-ht of modern Phylogenj' we know that animals were not created separ- ately in four separate moults, and know that gradations are found between the ditierent body " plans " or " types." 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213 nephridia, nerve coi'ds, gonads, gills, etc." Thex-e are finally parts of these organs. Now we find from this brief examination that there are different degrees of structui-al parts in the organization, beginning with the general body plan and proceeding to the minor parts which compose it. Shall the relationship of two organisms be determined by the comparison of their body plans, or of their major organ complexes, or of the smallest complexes ? And how is this comparison to be carried out, and on what kind of parts is the comparison to be instituted ? We may immediately proceed to the discussion of these questions. (b) The Criterion of Morphological Value. It is not justifiable to give any a priori decision as to what parts are of value in determining questions of relationship, since the criterion must be empirically souglit. As essential similarity is interpreted as denoting genetic affinity, so also there is a second principle in determining phylogeny, namely, that conservatism or fixity of a structure implies morphological value. By conservatism or fixity is implied the continuance of a part with relatively little change through a long line of evolution. If in a line of evolution leading from a type of organization ^ to a type N, a certain structure should be found in N little changed from its appearance in A, it would be called conservative; if it had become much modified or even lost before the stage of type N, it would not be conservative. The value of a structural characteristic for phylogenetic purposes depends directly upon how fully it con- serves ancestral characteristics, and the less completely it conserves them the less value it has. This is the well-based working proce- u •< Organ " is employed in comparative anatomy in a very loose sense, as is necessitated by the practical impossibility of sharply distinguishing the intergrading kinds of structural elements. As generally used for the Metazoa, it is not applied to an autimere or to a metamere, but to more segregated portions of them. Physiologically, it is a part with a partic- ular function to perform ; morphologically, a specialized part of partic- ular structure. While no sharp definition "is possible to cover all cases, we find that "organ" is generally employed by phylogenists in the sense of "the largest specialized part in an organization performing a particu- lar function"; thus the respiratory organ of a vertebrate would be not a lung cell, but the whole complex of lung cells. And it is well to define the various degrees of structural jiarts as closely as possible, in order to compare in different animals only such parts as relatively correspond. 214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, (lure of the iihylofrcnist. A character which leads far back into the ancestry is the guiding line in interpretation of descent. If, through the continuous change which a race of organisms undergoes during the process of evolution, a particular part becomes much less rapidly changed than the others, that part certainly represents the ancestral characters most fully, and for the phylogenist its persis- tence or conservatism is the criterion of its morphological value. A character which persists through a very long racial period must do so by virtue of being of particular value for the economy of the organization, or for the perpetuation of the race. Structures of less value are more readily modified, or substituted, or even lost. It is then clear that the first step to take in determining the char- acters on Avhich classification should be based, is to find out the rela- tive stability or conservatism of these characters, at the same time recalling that no characters should be neglected in the examination, but that they be ascribed value in the order of their conservatism. The ever-recurring problem to the classifier is that of determin- ing the interrelationships of, e. g., these organisms. A, 5 and G, when A agrees with B in character d, but differs from B in charac- ter e, while agreeing with C m character e but differing from C in character d: is the value of character d of greater or less value here than that of character e f The answer may be a purely arbi- trary one, such as Avould best suit the classifier's preconceived views; or it may be made less arbitrary and more logically precise by the application of the principle of conservatism as denoting value. The application of this principle would seem at first sight very simple, but in practice it has been found very difl^cult. For in a racial progress, as Kleineuberg has shown so Avell for the individual development, one organ may become gradually substituted for another, so that it is diflicult to decide at what point the first disappears and the second takes its place. A case in point is the substitution of one kidney system for an earlier one, and of a third for the second, in the evolution of the Vertebrates. In this case a persistence of the first kidney (pronephros) is found even when the second kidney (mesonephros) has been substituted in its place, and even in the organization showing the substituting third kidney (metanephros) a small portion of the first is still retained. The case becomes more difficult to interpret when not separately arising parts succeed each other, but Avhen in the progress of the race 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215 from an early ancestral organ of diffuse arrangement one part change? into one set of organs, another part into another set. Thus from the gastrovascular system of a simpler Cnidarian -with, e. cj. , a structure like Hydra, are found in higher forms developing intes- tine and gonads (e. (j., Turbellaria). In all such cases where the substitution of parts is gradual, it is obviously difficult to determine where one organ ends and another begins, and hence to determine how far back into the pliylogeuy an organ extends. And the sub' stitution is generally gradual, so that the new organ either arises from a part of the first, or the first becomes gradually moulded over to form the new; much more rarely is the first completely lost (ontogenetic development of the Diptera). It is not probable that a part in any case is completely lost without first aiding in the forma- tion of another part ; and this is the more true Avhen we consider that accidental mutilations are probably not inherited. And further, it must be borne in mind that a character which is essentially con- servative throughout one group may be variable in another : thus the external cuticle is comparatively uniform in structure throughout the Nematoda, but very variable in the Gordiacea (in some species of Avhich it differs even in the two sexes). A word may be said just here as to the value for classification of the statistical study of individual variation. The examination of the relative amount of variation in different parts of the same species shows of course which are most and least variable. It shows also that in some species there is less general variation than in others. The modern school of statistical variation has not brought to light any new points of view, but it has the advan- tage of deriving its statistics from a large number of individ- uals, and of reproducing these statistics in concise mathematical forms. Before its oncoming observers contented themselves with such loose expressions as ' ' very variable " " slightly variable, ' ' etc. The accurate recording of individual variations is the scien- tific method of showing which parts are most conservative, and a character (e. g., number of joints in an antenna) which has been shown to be veiy variable cannot be regarded as of much value ; that is to say, such a character should be considered of little value in the diagnosis of the species. Yet in closely related species such a character may be eminently stable, so that in general no deduc- tions can be drawn from these variation statistics to species other 216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [April, than those on which they were determined ; they niay be interpreted to show the mathematically probable further course of development of this species, but they do not show anything with regard to other species. In one way this statistical study of variation may be of great service, namely, in regard to the distinguishing of " varieties" or * ' races " of a species. If the degree of variation between the individuals in one and the same portion of the area of distribution of a species be fully as great as the degree of variation between the individuals at the most separated points of this area of distribu- tion, then it is not permissible to speak of ' ' varieties ' ' within such a species. Or, conversely, it is only allov,able to distinguish " varieties," when in a portion A of the geographical area of a species the individuals show a different average of variation than in a portion B. Davenport^^ has pointed out that the plotting of variation curves affords a criterion by which varieties may be distinguished from species, thus determining the indices of divergence — " if either of these indices is less than a certain number we have varieties; if above that number, species." But even with this method it is necessary to select a particular character as the " chief differ- ential," and it is just with regard to this point that there is as yet no mathematical precision, and hence this method does not furnish a " precise criterion," though it is certainly a step in the right direction. (c) The Components of the Organization, that are of Most Importance in Phylogeny. We have seen that the organization as a whole must be considered. The whole, however, can be understood only by synthetically con- sidering the parts of which it is composed. These parts are of very different relative values, from the protoplasmic alveoli or microsome on the one hand, to the organ, organ system and general body plan, on the other. This leads us to the question, which category of parts should be considered in determining phyletic relationship ? Is it immaterial whether we base the classiiicatiou upon cell structure, upon tissue structure, upon organ structure, or upon arrangement of the organs ? Or are there good reasons for using as the basis of examination a particular category of parts ? ]5 air are less than their own diameter from the posterior margin of the head and so far apart as to be partly laterad in posi- tion. The anterior ai"e slightly larger, separated from the extreme anterior margin by less than their own diameter, and latero-ventral in position. Median tentacle absent, its ceratophore of large size and marked by a conspicuous chocolate-colored band. Lateral tentacles arise at a level quite below the dorsal surface of the head lobes and partly overlapped by the ceratophore of the median tentacle. They have a length of about one and two-thirds the width of the head, are slender and tapering, with a brown pigmented subterminal enlarge- ment and a rather long filiform tip. The single palpus remaining on the type specimen is an elongated, almost whip-like structure eight times as long as the head. It bears a single line of cilia on the medial side, while much shorter clavate cilia are scattered over the general surface. Its cuticle is remarkably ii'idescent, a condi- tion not found elsewhere in this worm. Frontal ridge bi'oad and low. The tentacular cirri are missing. Typical para2)odia are long and slender, the neuropodiura promi- nent and bearing near its base the small lobe-like notopodium. The dorsal border of the former is straight and slopes gently downward, to pass without angulation into the dorsal edge of the acicular lobe, the base of which is met abruptly by the sharply u])turned ventral margin. The aciculum projects but slightly. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265 The uotopodium is merely a dorso-anterior lobe supported by a slender aciculum, which lies close to the ueuropodial aciculuni, but terminates far short of it. The large base of the dorsal cirrus, with its double wing-like lobes, further overshadows the uotopodium. The cirrus itself has the usual form and bears numerous slender cilia, which, on the dorsal side, have a length nearly equal to the diameter of the cirrus and about four times that length ventrally. The ventral cirrus is about one-fifth the length of the dorsal. The first ventral cirrus (somite II) is, however, as usual larger and formed like the dorsal cirri; moreover, its ventral surface bears numerous truncate cilia as long as one-half its diameter. Although few in number and arranged in only eight very definite rows, the ueuropodial setse, because of their large size and rich golden color, are very conspicuous. They increase in length to the sixth row, but their spinous ends continue to elongate to the most dorsal (8th) row. All are stout and have abruptly enlarged ends (PI. XIII, figs. 17-19) with long, slightly curved, and rather blunt-pointed, smooth tips. The spinous region is remarkably short, particularly on the most ventral setse, which bear only four pairs of coarse teeth and seldom a trace of lateral fringes. The middle setse have six or seven pairs of such spines with short lateral fringes, and the dorsal setse as many as fifteen or twenty rows of spines, of which the basal ones are very fine. The smooth tips of these dorsal setse are relatively and absolutely shorter as well as more slender. The notopodial setse (PI. XIII, figs. 14-16) are of a pale hay color and rather lustreless. They are extremely numerous and arranged in many nearly horizontal ranks, from which they spread fan-like in a nearly horizontal plane outward and slightly back- ward, so that these worms present none of that shaggy appearance which characterizes some Polynoidse. These setse are so long, so numerous and keep so well together, that the parapodia are scarcely visible from above. This species is distinguished from other species of the genus by the fact that all of the notopodial setse, without exception, bear long capillary tips. The longer middle and ven- tral setse are spinous for about one-third of their exposed length and become excessively slender toward the gently .curved tip, which bears a smooth, tapering and flexible filament about one-fourth of the length of the spinous portion. The very numerous rows of fine 266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF piay, spiues are about equidistant for the entire length, but increase in height to near the tip where they again diminish. The bristles pre- sent a very strongly serrated profile, especially at the point where the tapering shaft has a diameter less than the height of the pro- jecting spines. The dorsalmost and ventralmost setse are shorter and bear nuich shorter capillary tips ; the former are also strongly curved and the latter straight and very slender. Somite I has the parapodium supported by a single stout aciculum which passes between the bases of the dorsal and ventral tentacular cirri. It bears a tuft of four or five notopodial cirri of the extreme dorsal pattern. II bears a nearly normal tuft of notopodial and a small group of long-spined and slender neuropodial set re. A single elytron (the right one of somite VII) was found m situ on the type specimen, and is represented on PI. XIV, fig. 20. It is narrow and strongly reniform, Avith the external half broader than the internal. Close to the anterior emargiuation, but rather to its external side, is the area of attachment. Closely i)laced cilia extend all around the posterior and external margin and increase in size and frequency from within outward, while here and there one or two of the larger cilia are replaced by much smaller ones. Coarser cilia are scattered sparingly over the greater part of the postero-exterual region, and, like the marginal ones, are longer externally. With the exception of a very narrow antero-internal marginal area the entire surface bears numerous horny papillse which, as usual, increase in size slightly, but decrease in number toward the posterior margin. In this case the papillse or spines are of largest size and most numerous in a narrow area along the middle of the scale. Along this area their summits are distinctly thick- ened and bispinose. A line of tall, slender cylindrical ones with prominent bifid tips runs from the point of attachment of the scale to the outer margin, and a few similar ones are scattered elsewhere. Just in front of the posterior margin is a row of seven prominent conical papillre with broad bases and truncate roughened summits. These are also covered with a horny cuticle, but appear to be softer than the small spines and papillse, like which they are of a pale- brown color. Three specimens. McCormick Bay, P. R. E. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267 Lagisca multisetosa sp. nov. Like other species of Lagisca this is slender, with llie widest part of the body far forward at somite VI, behind which it diminishes gently, while the anterior end is broadly rounded. The type speci- men consists of the twenty anterior somites and measures 11 mm. in length, 3.2 mm. in width of body at VI, 5.3 mm. to tips of feel, and 8 mm. to tips of the setse at the same place. It will be obseryed that the parapodia are here relatively short. The head is three-fourths as long as wide, Avith a gently couyex posterior border, lateral margins prominently bulged at the middle, and the anterior fissure deep, with a narrow furrow continuing it back to about the middle of the head. The two halves of the head are produced forward around the base of the middle tentacle, and the prominent peaks in which their outer sides end are widely separated from the latter. The frontal ridge is strong and high. The posterior eyes are situated close to the posterior margin of the head and separated by four times their diameter. They are black, circular and look upward and slightly outward. The ante- rior eyes are of the same shape and color, but about twice the size of the posterior. They are situated relatively far back, not more than their own diameter in advance of the posterior pair, but on the ventro-lateral surface, though they may be seen through the tissue of the head from above. Of the cephalic appendages the median tentacle is absent, but its deep chocolate-colored base remains. The lateral tentacles have a length about equal to the width of the head, and are slender and tapering, the distal half being filiform. They arise entirely below the level of the median tentacle and their bases aie almost in con- tact in the median line. The palps are about two and one-half times the length of the lateral tentacles, taper to a very acute tip, and bear two dorsal lines of very small cilia, with a few of the same kind scattered over the surface. The dorsal tentacular cirrus about equals the palp in length; the ventral is slightly shorter. Both taper from the base to a very slight subterminal enlargement bearing a short terminal filament. Short truncate cilia are spar- ingly scattered over the surface, being rather more numerous just below the subterminal enlargement. Although the setae are long the parapodia themselves are short, the tenth, for example, being somew^hat less than one-half the width 268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^l^ay, of Ihe body. In shape the foot is easily distinguished from that of Lagisca rarutpina by the much smaller notopodium. The neuro- podium is broad, with a prominent aeicular lobe, from the end of which, above the projecting aciculum, is produced a long, slender, tentacle-like process, quite as long as the lobe itself. The noto- podial aeicular lobe beai-s no such process, and is much shorter. The doi-sal cirri resemble the tentacular cirri, except for the longer filiform tips and longer, more numerous and clavate cilia. Ven- tral cirri slender, reaching nearly to the end of the neuropodial aeicular lobe and bearing a few very short, nearly globoid cilia. Only the anterior elytra are present, and these have the normal arrangement as far as the tenth pair on somite XIX. The first is circular, five or six succeeding pairs (PI. XIV, fig. 29) reniform, and the others ovate-reniform. They are thin, membranous, translucent and fairly adherent. The area of attachment is small, elliptical and very mucli nearer to the anterior and external borders than to the posterior and internal, A rather wide and clearly defined area internal to the hilum and along the anterior border is en- tirely free from spines. Anteriorly and internally the spines are low and nipple-shaped, but over most of the surface are sharply conical, becoming elevated and acute in certain regions, notably i.i a broad irregular band which passes across the middle of the scale in its long direction. Enlarged spines are also scattered singly or in groups here and there over the surface toward the posterior and external borders. Twelve or fifteen prominent soft papilla (PI. XIV, fig. 31) of various heights and with rounded summits appear just in advance of the posterior margin, and a few similar ones on other parts of the surface. Marginal cilia appear to be absent, but a few large ones are scattered over the surface in the external third. On the first scale soft papillse extend more than half-way aroimd the margin, and an area of particularly strong spines occurs above the area of attachment. The neuropodial setae (PI. XIV, figs. 32-34) are long and slen- der, with very long and but slightly enlarged spinous regions. The smooth tips are very short; the principal point rather strongly curved, but not hooked; the accessory process far out, running first parallel to the principal point and then diverging from it, very slender, sharp-pointed and long. These setae are very fragile and but few are found with the tips intact. The spines are long and 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 269 fine, except at the base. The number of rows varies from nineteen on the most ventral setse to twenty-four or twenty-five on the middle and thirty-one on the most dorsal. The neuropodial setae are arranged in numerous rows, there being at least twelve subacicular and six supraacicular series. The notopodial setae (PI. XIV, figs. 35, 36) are also rather long and slender, gently and regularly curved and tapering to the rather acute points. As usual in Lagisca, the rows of spines are long, numerous and close, the spines themselves being fine and a few in (he middle of each row enlarged. The neuropodial set re of II differ very little from the normal types in typical parapodia, except for their smaller size and longer spines. I bears no neuropodials, and in the specimen examined only two nolopodials, which have the characteristic form. The elytra are pale mottled brown, the sette all a pale but glisten- ing hay color. The dorsum of the body is light brown, with a yellowish line across the anterior end of each somite and the ante- rior somites each with a median spot of dark brown. The bases of the parapodia are pale yellowish, the cirri white with dark rings above and below the enlargement. The head is light-colored and iridescent with brown cloudings, the base of the tentacles choco- late color, and the palps buff. The under surface of the body is pale and iridescent. One specimen. McCormick Bay, P. R. E. Lagisca rarispina (Sars) Malmg. The anterior pair of eyes is borne on the anterior face of prominently outstanding lobes, which give to the head a very char- acteristic form not shown in any of the published figures. These ocular lobes are situated slightly posterior to the middle of the head, which is very much narrower anterior than posterior of them. A specimen 12 mm. long has only seven somites posterior to the last elytra pho re, whereas one of 43 mm. has fifteen. McCormick Bay, Dr. Benjamin Sharp ; Northumberland Island, O. 11, 10-15 fath. ; Olridir Bay, O. 29 and 49, 7-25 fatli. Actinoe sarsi Kinb. McCormick Bay, P. R. E. ; Granville Bay, O. 39, 30-40 fath. ; Olridir Bay, O. 49, 15-20 fath. 270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Harmothoe imbricata (Linn.) Malmg. This species occurs in considerable numbers and from many localities, most abundantly in material gathered in shallow water. The examples from ]McCormick Bay are of large size, and the set£e are nearly black instead of the usual rich amber color; the elytra also are marked with nearly black spots. Many varieties, both in color and structural features, are represented. The elytra vary from those without any trace either of horny papillae or soft mar- ginal papillse, to very rough ones with numerous hard prominences easily visible under a magnification of five diameters and soft papillae so close together that they crowd one another in the mar- ginal rank. McCormick Bay, Dr. Sharp; Godhavn, Dr. Hayes, Godhavn, O. 2, 8 fath. ; Saunders Island, O. 9, 5-10 fath. ; Barden Bay, O. 45, 10-40 fath.; Orlidir Bay, O. 45), 15-20 fath.; Robertson Bay, O. 52, 5-15 fath. ; Foulke Fjord, O. 54, 5 fath. ; Sarkak, O. 57, 9 fath. Harmothoe (Laenilla) glabra (Malmg.). McCormick Bay, P. R. E. and Dr. Sharp; Northumberland Island, O. 11, 10-15 fath. ; Barden Bay, 0. 45, 10-40 fath. Harmothoe (Evane) impar (Johnston). The single specimen from McCormick Bay is typical. In this the soft marginal papillae have the rounded form shown by Malm- gren, not the truncate and lobulated appearance of Mcintosh's figures. The hard papillae are mostly elevated and divided at the summit into two short, blunt divergent processes. The other speci- mens are referred doubtfully to this species, from tj^pical examples of which they differ in the following details: The median and lateral tentacles and the tentacular cirri have the tapering and filamentous portion relatively longer than in INIcIutosh's figure; the scales are rougher, with spinous-tipped horny papillae and few cilia, of which the longer ones have bulbous ends; four examples lack the large, soft papillae altogether, while the fifth one beare a single minute one on one scale only; the neuropodial setae have the spinous tip longer . and the accessory pi-ocess nearer to the extreme end. McCormick Bay, Dr. Sharp; Saunders Island, O. 9, 5-10 fath. ; Olridir Bay, O. 49, 15-20 fath. 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 271 Harmothoe (Eunoa) nodosa (Sars) Malmg. Two examples approach nearer to Eunoa cerstedi in many respects. The distinctness of these two species has been already- called in question, but is generally upheld by the highest authori- ties. The scales exhibit the dense external ciliation of E. nodosa, but are rougher even than cerstedi. The large pavillse are spinous at the apex, and many even of the smaller ones, especially toward the outer margin, bear a number of conical or bifid divergent spines. Around the posterior margin, and more or less elsewhere, many of the papillae become low, rounded and mound-shaped, and bear numerous small spines in clusters. Anteriorly the roughness of (he scales increases and a detached scale, which, being circular, is regarded as the first, bears around its entire margin a narrow band of large, irregularly globoid bosses, produced into numerous processes, each of which bears a tuft of spines at its summit. A smaller group occurs at the middle of the scale and papillae of smaller size are scattered between. All of these papillie are hard and horny and supported on horny basal plates of various and irregular shapes. The ventral setse have the form figured by Mcintosh, and the dorsal also resemble his figure of E. nodosa, except that the short tips are sculptured in much the fashion of the smaller notopodial setse of Harmothoe tnmcata. They resemble the apex of the green fruit of Lireodendron or a winter leaf-bud, but are less regular and the smaller ventral ones especially have fewer scales or ridges. The ventral setse of II resemble Mcintosh's figures of a'rstedi rather than nodosa. Several discrepancies appear in the published accounts of the species of Eunoa. Malmgren figures the smooth tips of the noto- podial setse of nodosa as the longer of the two species; Mcintosh both describes and figures the reverse, but neither indicates the sculpturing. Mcintosh in one place^ (p. 292) describes segmental papillse in Eunoa, in two other jDlaces (pp. 291 and 293) he states that they are absent. In these specimens they are nearly as well developed as in Harmothoe Imbrlcata, for example. The head and its appendages conform almost exactly to Mc- intosh's figure. The anterior eyes arc (j[uite dorsal in position, situ- ' Monograph of British Annelida, Part II. 272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ! iMaj, ated well posterior and but little farther separated thau the posterior pair. lu many respects these specimens resemble the figures of Har- mothoe scabra (Oersted), especially those of the scales given by Wire'n.- The anterior elytra of Polynoa {Harmotho'e) islandica Hensen also approach the character of these, but the entire absence of those belonging to the posterior region renders it impossible to determine if they possess the peculiar ragged appendages present in Hensen' s species, in which also the first elytron is reniform. IMcCormick Bay, P. R. E. Harmothoe (Eunoa) trunoata sp. nov. This well-marked species is known only from a single imperfect specimen, consisting of the head with twenty-four somites. The elytra, dorsal cirri, all but one tentacular cirrus and the tentacles are missing. Viewed from beneath the body is truncate anteriorly, widest at X or VI, and with nearly parallel sides, narrowing very gently posteriorly. The third and fourth somites together form a broad swollen area which bounds the mouth posteriorly. Rather prominent but short, projecting nephridial papillae begin at VI, and continue to XXIV at least. Scars for the attachment of elytra are present on the usual somites back to XXIII. The head is slightly broader thau long, with a well-marked median anterior fissure and slightly produced, obtusely pointed peaks. A small posterior nuchal lobe is inseparably connected with the head, but by analogy probably belongs to the folloAving somite. The two pairs of eyes are black, circular and of equal size. The posterior are close to the posterior margin, and are separated by a space of five times their diameter. The anterior are placed later- ally on the widest region of the head, and distant about twice their diameter from the tips of the cephalic peaks. There is nothing peculiar in the place of origin of the tentacles. The palpi are about five times the length of the head, with a swollen basal half, a slender distal half and a short terminal filament. In the typical foot the neuropodium has nearly straight outlines terminating at a nearly right angle, with a projecting acicular lobe. The aciculum projects but little and its end is suddeny contracted in a peculiar way. The notopodium lies a little to the anterior of ^ Vega-Expeditionena Vetemkapliga lakttagelser, II. 1902.] NATURAL SCIE>XES OF PHILADELPHIA. 273 the plaue of the neuropodium, but scarcely overlaps it. Its acicu- lum projects farther thau the neuropodial, like which it is suddenly narrowed at the end. The nem-opodial sette (PI. XIV, figs. 21, 22) are grouped in eight rows, of which five are ventral, two dorsal and one opposite to the aciculum. They are of large size, the longest doi-sal ones about equaling the longest notopodials in length. Like the latter they are stout. The spinous portion is relatively short, but there is the usual increase in length dorsad. On a typical seta from the middle of a bundle the five or six terminal pairs of spines are of large size, little or not at all divided and with no lateral fringes. They rapidly diminish in size and become finely ctenoid as the fringes appear, and soon become continuous with the latter. Prox- imally the spines become very fine and the rows crowded. On the dorsahuost setoe the number of fine rows increases and the transition from the coai-se to fine is much more gradual. The number of spinous rows is about fourteen in the ventral, nineteen on the mid- dle and thirty on the dorsal setse. On all of the neuropodial setre the smooth tip is long, simple, strongly hooked and shai-p-pointed. On the ventral setie it nearly equals in length the spinous region and even on the dorsal ones is about one-third as long. The largest of the notopodial setse (PI. XIY, figs. 23 and 25) are remarkable for their size and truncate ends. They are long, stout, slightly curved and bear for fully one-half of their exposed portions numerous close and long rows of excessively fine teeth, which are frequently worn away over considerable areas. Except near the tip they extend nearly around the shaft. The tip has a peculiar frayed-out appearance, as though the fibres of the setre had separated and spread apart. The peripheral layer is a whorl of elongated scales surrounding a fibrous bundle, from the midst of which a central point appears more prominently. Around the base of these scales is a very dense fringed whorl. The very large setje are few in number, not more than eight or ten in a bundle. The most usual form of the seta tip is shown in fig. 27. In such the outer scales embrace the central style more closely, so that a rough, blunt point is formed. Somewhat similar are the tips of the strongly curved antero-dorsal setse (PI. XIV, figs. 24 and 26), but these have very short scales. The slender, sharp-pointed an- terior ventral setie (PI. XIV, fig. 28) approach more nearly the 18 274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, usual type of uotopodial setse found among the polynoids, but even these have the points somewhat divided. On the extreme anterior feet all of the dorsal setoe are blunt- pointed, having much the appearance of the conventional architectural pineapple. The first foot beai-s a group of five or six setse of this type and no neuro- j)odials. The ueuropodials of the second foot are slender, tapering and provided with very long spines. One specimen. McCormick Bay, P. R. E. Melsenis loveni Malmg. McCormick Bay, Dr. Sharp ; one ^^pecimeu. Pholoe minuta (Fabr.) Malmg. Godhavu Harbor, O. 2, 8 fath. Phyllodoce citrina Malmg. Northumberland Island, O. 11, 10-15 fath. ; one specimen. Phyllodoce greenlandica Oersted. Bardeu Bay, O. 45, 10-40 fath. Some fine example?:, the largest measuring 390 mm. Phyllodoce mucosa Oersted. Foulke Fjord, O. 54, 5 fath. Three specimens, all of which exceed Oersted' s original examples in length. The largest measures 94 mm. Autolytus longisetosus Oersted. Cape Chalon, O. 25, surface. Nereis pelagioa Linn. Godhavn, Dr. Hayes. Nereis zonata Malmg. Granville Bay, O. 39, 30-40 fath. ; one specimen. Lumbriconereis sp. McCormick Bay, P. R. E., 10 fath. A fragment of a large individual of an undetermined species. Northia conchy lega (Sars) Johnson. This species must be extremely abundant at some points, as at Olridir and Granville Bays. The characteristic tubes are flattened and of an elongated rectangular form, measuring up to 80 mm. long, 10-12 -mm. wide and 3 mm. thick. The lumen is about twice as wide as high, and is completely filled by the worm. Judg- ing from the fact that attached tubes of Spirorhis, Serpula, 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275 together with biyozoaus, tunicates and hydroids are coufiued chiefly to one side, it is probable that tiiey are fixed to the bottom, resting on one of the flat surfaces. The material of which they are composed diffei-s with the character of the bottom. Those from Olridir Bay are uniformly formed of coarse grains of red, black, yellow and colorless sand, with here and there a small lamellibranch shell or a fragment of a larger one. The Granville Bay examples, on the other hand, are composed of flattened pieces of black or occasionally gray shale, with numerous large pieces or even entire shells, bits of sea urchin tests, etc. Many of the bits of shell are very thin and translucent (like Anoinia), permitting the form of the worm to be distinctly seen. In many cases the fragments of shale are as much as 15 mm. in diameter, and the pieces of shell are still larger. Granville Bay, O. 39, 30-40 fath., and O. 40, 20-30 fath. ,- (31ridir Bay, O. 49, 15-20 fath. Scalibregma inflatum var. corethura Mich. Whale Sound, O. 41, surface. Flabelligera affinis Sars. Cape York, O. 34, 10 fath. • Flabelligera infundibularum Johnsou. This species, recently described by H. P. Johnson from the Puget Sound region, is represented by one specimen which differs slightly from the Pacific coast examples. The capillary sette have a greater number of cross nodes, the infundibular setse appear to be some- what shorter, and the stalked sense organs have a different form, which, however, is probably merely the result of a different state of preservation. McCormick Bay, Dr. Sharp. Axiothea catenata Malmg. Barden Bay, O. 45, 10-40 fath. Cistenides granulata (Liun.) Malmg. Godhavn Harbor, 0. 2, 8 fath., and O. 3, beach; Sarkak, O. 57, 9 fath. Cistenides hyperborea Malmg. Banlen Bav, O. 45, 10-40 fath. 276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Amphitrite cirrata Miiller. Barden Bay, O. 45, 10-40 fath. A few tube* of au Amphxtrite were also dredged al Foulke Fjord, O. 12, 8o fath. Nicolea arctioa Malmg. Very abundantly represented iu the collections from Northum- berland Island. Melville Bay, O. 6 ; Northumberland Island, O. 11, 10-15 fath. Scione lobata Malmg. Granville Bay, O. 39, 30-40 fath. ; Barden Bay, 0. 45, 10-40 fath. Axionice flexuosa (Grube) Malmg. Saunders Island, O. 9, 5-10 fath. ; Granville Bay, 0. 39, 30-40 fath. Thelepus circinnatus (Fabr.) Malm.i,'. Next to Harmotho'e imbricata, this species occurs most frequently in the collections of Dr. Ortmaun. It is not represented in the material from McCormick Bay. Godhavn, Dr. Hayes ; Godhavn Harbor, O. 2, 8 fath. ; off Gape Chalon, O. 27, 35 fath.; Foulke Fjord, O. 32, 14 fath.; Gran- ville Bay, O. 39, 30-40 fath.; Olridir Bay, O. 49, 15-20 fath., Robertson Bay, O. 51, 35-40 fath. ; Kaniah, O. 50, 30-40 fath. Chone infundibuliformis Kroyer. Olridir Bay, O. 29, 7-25 fath. Serpula sp. Tubes of a small Serpula were found attached to the tubes of Northia conchylega from Olridir Bay and other places, Spirorbis granulatus (Linn.) MGrch. Found only attached to the tubes of Northia conchylega and Thelejnis circinnatus, and especially abundant on the former in Olridir Bay. A number of examples were noticed iu which the last turn of the tube was elevated and free. The thick tube is sometimes marked with one, sometimes with tv,o, longitudinal angu- lar ridges; these become quite evident in young individuals of .5 mm. diameter. Foulke Fjord, O. 32, 14 fath. ; Granville Bay, O. 39, 30-40 fath. ; Olridir Bay, O. 49, 15-20 fath. 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 277 Spirorbis verruca (Fabr.) Morch. Found only with the last, than which it is less conunoii, attached to the tubes of Northia. Specimens measuring 7 to 8 mm. across the spiral were found. Spirorbis spirillum (Linn.) Miuch. In addition to the typical open spiral form there have been re- ferred to this species numerous examples which, while having, so far as could be determined, identical characters of sette, operculum, etc., have the tube usually coiled in a flat spiral of smaller size and less pellucid character. This form occurs abundantly in com- paratively shallow waters, attached in the manner of Spirorbis borealis, from which the tube is distinguished at once by the reverse direction of its coil, to Laminaria and other resistant thalloid alga?. "When attached to a clean surface of the alga the plane of the spiral is always perfectly flat ; when, however, as frequently occurs, the annelid is associated with an incrusting growth of bryozoaus, the coil of the former immediately becomes elevated and open, approach- ing the typical form which is found in deeper waters associated with hydroids and branching bryozoans. As noted by Michaelsen, this species reaches a much larger size than has been recorded by Levinsen and other students of Arctic Pol ych seta. One of the largest examples, occurring in the collections from Olridir Bay, measures 8.5 mm. in height of the spiral. The typical form is represented from the following localities : South of Cape Alexan- der, O. 26, 27 fath. ; Olridir Bay, O. 49, 15-20 fath. ; Karnah, O. 50, 30-40 fath. ; Robertson Bay, O. 51, 35-40 fath. The flat form occurs as follows: Upernavik, C). 4, 5-10 fath.; Saunders Island, O. 9, 5-10 fath.; Northumberland Island, O. 11, 10-15 fath. ; Robertson Bay, O. 51, 5-15 fath. ; Foulke Fjord, (). 54, 5 fath. Spirorbis vitreus (Fabr.) Morch. A single example attached to the tube of a Northia conchylega from Foulke Fjord, O. 39, 14 fath. 278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^lav, EXPLA.NATIOX OF PL.VTES XIII AND XIV. Plate XIII. — Oattyana senta : Fig. 1. — Outline of the right parapodium, without sette, of X ; posterior aspect, X 14. Fig. 2.— Right elytron of XIII. x 14. Figs. 3-5. — Dorsal, middle and ventral notopodiul seta, respectively, frourthe left parapodium of X. 12 mm. have been cut out of the drawing of the middle setoc to permit of its being shown entire on the same scale as the others. X 75. Fig. 6.— Tip of dorsal notopodial ; left, X. X 335. Fiffs. 7 and 8. — Tip and basal portion of middle uotopodial, respec- tively ; left, X. X 335. Figs. 9-11. — Tips of ventral, middle and dorsal ueuropodial setae, respectively, from the left parapodium of X. x 75. Figs. 12 and 13. — Extreme tips of the ventral and middle sette shown in figs. 9 and 10 respectively. X 335. Gattyann ciliata : Figs. 14 and 15. — A dorsal and a middle notopodial seta from X. x 75. Fig. 10. — A portion of a typical notopodial seta, X 335. Figs. 17-19. — Tips of ventral, middle and dorsal neuropodial setce, respectively, from X. X 75. Plate XIV, fig. 20. — A typical elytron of GaUyana ciliata. VII, right. X 14. Harmothoe trtincata. — All setae are from the right foot of X : Fig. 21. — Typical middle neuropodial. X 75. Fig. 22.— a' portion of the same seta. X 335. Fig. 23. — A large middle notopodial. X 75. Fig. 24. — A dorsal notopodial, entire. X 75. Fig. 25.— Tip of a large middle uotopodial. X 335. Figs. 26-28. — Smaller dorsal, middle and ventral notopodials respec- tively. X 335. Lagisca multisetosa. — All seta? are from the right parapodium of X : Fig. 29. — A typical anterior elytron, x 14. Fig. 30. — A small portion of the middle of the dorsal surface of the same. X 75. Fig. 31. — A small portion of the posterior margin of the same. X 75. Fig. 32, a, b and c. — Ventral, middle and dorsal neuropodial?. X 75. Figs. 33 and 34. — Tips of ventral and dorsal neuropodials. X 335. Fig. 35. — A middle notopodial. X 75. Y\k. 3f.,— Tip of the same, X 335. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279 THE CLASSIFICATION OF THE ALEYRODIDil. BY T. D. A. COCKERELL. The Americau species of this homopterous family have been well treated by Quaiutauce (Tech. Bull., 8, Div. Ent., Dep. Agric, 1900); in the following essay au attempt is made to classify and catalogue the species of the world. ALEYRODIDJE Westwood, 1840. Adults of both sexes with two pairs of wings, which are rounded apically and appear more or less mealy ; the edges of the wings are ornamented with a distinct sculpture or little bunches of bristles. Autennse simple in form, seven -jointed ; first two joints short and stout. Legs six, all well developed. Eyes often constricted in the middle, or even completely divided. Tarsi with two claws. Size always small. Egg elliptical, with a short peduncle (fig. 9). Larva oval, with short, stout legs. Pupa quiescent, oval, often with a waxy fringe. INIargiu vari- ously scidptured (figs. 4, 5, 6). Abdomen sometimes with large secretory pores (fig. 4). On the dorsal surface of the abdomen is an orifice, known as the vasiform orifice, provided with a more or less rounded flap, the operculum, and a usually elongate narrow two-jointed structure, the lingua (fig. 3). Adult with the median vein of wings forked ; pupa with the lingua large, Aleurodkts. Adult with the median vein of wings not forked ; pupa with the lingua usually small, Aleyrodes. ALEURODICTJS Doufrlas. Aleurodicua Douglas, Ent. Mo. Mag., Ser. II, Vol. 3 (1892), p. 33. All the species belong to the warmer parts of America, except A. hohnesii from Fiji, which was, I suspect, introduced fi'om America with the Pddium on which it feeds. The adults are easily recog- nized by the venation of the wings (fig. 1), although Aleyrodes 280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF '[May, often has a fold which simulates a branch. The snbmedian vein has usually been considered a branch of the median, but it appears to have in every case a separate origin. The pupa of Ahurydicus is rather easily recognized by its large lingua, and the nearly uni- versal possession of very large secretory pores along the sides of the abdomen. The margin of the pupa is often provided with hairs at rather distant intervals, 1. cocois (Curtis), 7. ornatm Ckll., fig. 1. 2. a7ionce Morgan. 8. pidvinatus (Mask,). 3. d ug esii CkW. 9. altissimm (Cliiaint.). 4. iridescens Ck]]. 10. persece ((^immt.). 5. mira6i7is (Ckll.), figs. 3, 4. 11. holmesii (Musk.). 6. minimus Quaint. 12. jamaiceiisis n. sp., fig. 2. Aleurodicus jamaicemis was collected by the writer at Kingston, Jamaica, in 1893. The pupa is small (hardly 1^ mm. long), with vertical walls, margin resembling that of j^^f-^vinatus ; color bright yellow, with a brownish dorsal cloud, and a diamond-shaped black patch just anterior to the vasiform orifice. Other characters are shown in fig. 2. Subg. DIALEURODICUS n, subg. Pupa without any profuse secretion or wax rods ; no large secre- tory pores; adult with short spotted wings, the branch of the median vein more basal than usual. Type Aleurodicus cockerelli Quaintance, from Brazil. ALEYRODES Latreille. Aleyrodes Latreille, Hist. Nat. Crustaces et Insectes, Vol. XII (1804), p. Ml. Tyjje A. proletella (L. ). The species average smaller than Aleurodicus and the median vein is not forked. The pupje often have a lateral fringe of waxy rods or ribbons. As at present understood, the genus is cosmo- politan. (1) Pal.earctic Species. 1. aceris (Baer. ). 5. carpini Koch. 2. avellancb Sign. 6. dubia Hegeer 3, brassiae Walk. 7. fragariie Sign. 4. caprece Sign. 8. fra.vini Sign. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281 9. immaculafa Hegeer. 16. ribiinn Dougl. 10. jelivel-ii Frauenf. 17. rubi Sigu. 11. lonicerce Walk. 18. ruhicola Dougl. 12. phillyrea Halid. 19. spir(vjrff/. This name is proposed for an American series (including pergandei, variabilis, fitchi, ruborum, vittata, erigerontis, etc.) in which the apical segment of the lingua is strongly crenulated. The posterior end of the vasiform orifice is often bifid. SubK. TETRALETJRODES n. subg. Type A. ^yerileuca. Pupa extremely dense, black, with a fringe of radiating waxy ribbons. Vasiform orifice shovel-shaped. Margin of pupa very regularly and strongly beaded; dorsum keeled. Includes also A. melavops. Occurs on the upper side of leaves of Quercus. Southern California and Texas. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV. Fior. l.—Aleurodicus ornatxs (imago). — A. Venation of upper wing. B. Claw. C. Margin of wing. Fig. 2. — Aleurodicus jamaicensis. — A. V.asiform orifice, etc. B. mar- gin of pupa. C. Side view of pupa. I). Abilomiual pore. Fig. 6. — Aleurodicus mirahilis. — Diagram of vasiform orifice, etc. Fig. 4. — Aleurodicus mirahilis. — A. I'upa, sliowing involuted margin, B. Edge of pupa (involuted). C. Abdominal pore. Fig. 0. — Aleyrodes gelatinosa. — Margin of pupa. Fig. 6. — Aleyrodes vinsonioides. — Margin of pupa. Fig. 7. — Aleyrodes variabilis. — Vasiform orifice, etc. Y\g. S.— Aleyrodes berbericola. —A. ]\[argiu of pupa. B. Margin of wing. Fig. 9. — Aleyrodes gelatinosa.— Ilgg from body of female. 284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^r^Xj ABSORPTION AND SECREnON IN THE DIGESTIVE SYSTEM OF THE LAND ISOPODS.' BY JOHN RAYMOND MURLIN, PH.D. I. Introduction. II. Material and raetliods. III. Description of the digestive system. 1. Gross structure/ (I) The intestine ; (2) Glands. 2. Microscopical structure, (1) Growth of the intestine ; (2) Origin of the typhlosole ; (3) Syncytium — i. Cyto- plasm, b. Nucleus, (an) Form, (bb) Structure; (4) Moult- ing— a. Changes in the cells incident to moulting. 3. Summary of structure. IV. Feeding experiments, 1. Etlects of starvation. V. Absorption of proteids. Table I, giving changes in the cells ; Table II, precipitation of proteids. VI. Function of the typhlosole. VII. Absorption of carbohydrates. VIII. Absorption of fats. IX. Secretion in the hepatopaucreas — a. Relation of secretion to feed- ing. X. Summary and conclusions. I. Introduction. While the teudeucy at this day is to approach physiological problems chiefly from the experimental and the chemical standpoints, there is yet need of many morphological observations to supplement these more ultimate researches. The chemical history of the trans- formation of foods into tissues has advanced considerably beyond the morphological history, becau.se until recently no means has been at hand for identifying them by morphological methods. Such determinati(jn has been begun by Fischer (1)- in his studies on the effects of flxing fluids on vari:nis proteid bodies and their deriva- tives. Proteid foods have often been traced to the intestinal absorbing cells, and have been identified in the blood of many animals after having traversed the cells ; but their course in passing through the intestinal epithelium and their relation to the various cell constitu- ents have been little known. With the hope of throwing some ' Contribution from the Zoological Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. ^Numerals in parenthesis refer to bibliographical list at the end of the paper. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285 light oil these aiid kindred problems, the present study was under- taken at the suorgestiou of Prof. E. G. Conklin, in the Zoological 't-b Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. It is a pleasure to expi-ess at the outset my gratitude to Prof. Conklin, both for turning over to me a subject on which he had made many observations and for rendering great assistance by suggestion and direction throughout the course of the work. II. Material and Methods. Several features combine to make the digestive organs of the land isopods especially favorable for a study of this kind. The digestive glands are simple tubes made up of a single-layered epithelium, which is bathed by the coelomic fluid. I'rom this the cells derive directly the substances elaborated into the ferments; and the secretion discharged at their luminal surface is poured into the anterior end of the intestine, where it is mixed with the food, partially at least, as it enters. That portion of the intestine which performs an ab- sorptive function likewise possesses a single-layered epithelium composed of very large cells. Without going into details here, it is enough to say that the size of the cells is equaled, sof ar as is known to the writer, by those of a similar absorbing organ of only one other animal, the larva of Ptychoptera contaminata (2). In a word, the plan of organization which is shared by the digestive sys- tem of all Arthropoda, has here been carried out with diagram- matic simplicity. Whether we regard the organization of the intestine as an adap- tation to the mode of life or the feeding habits as an adaptation to the organization, there is plainly a very nice relation between the two. Microscopical examination of the intestinal contents shows that in proportion to the quantity of digestible matter a very large part is wholly indigestible. Bits of dead leaves, wood fibres and various other masses of thick-walled vegetable cells, some clearer, tliiu- walled cells, which I take for hyphal cells of fungi, are among the most commonly observed substances.'* In addition there are in the intes- tine numei'ous crystalline Iwdies, doubtless of an inorganic nature, the skeletal remains of insects, and micro-organisms. But the * I have frequently seea pill-bugs eating edible mushrooms and have observed that they shun poisonous species. 286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, scanty pi'oteid content of such food is compensated for by the very efficient absorbing surface. Judged by the number of pellets of waste, the quantity of food eaten seems prodigious. An animal kept in a clean dish on a piece of moist bark will cast from twenty to fifty in twenty-four hours. The number is about the same for all the species. Brought fresh from the natural state and deprived of food the number cast in a single night (about fifteen hours) averages, for a large number of counts, between five and six ; in the next twenly-four hours the average number decreases to three. (This decrease is explained by the fact that only the anterior half of the " mid-gut" is provided with strong musculature. In the absence of muscles strong enough to empty the posterior portion, and with no fresh food to crowd back the remainder, its progress is very much slower ; some of it, indeed, may lodge just anterior to the sphincter for as long as two or three weeks, where it may be recognized as a little black mass in the region under the first abdominal segments. ) The anterior por- tion is emptied, as can be seen by holding the animal up to the light, during the first night. Since then five or six pellets repre- sent the contents of the anterior half of the " mid-gut," the animal must eat, in the course of twenty-four hours, an amount which fills the intestine from two to four times. The several indigenous species of terrestrial isopods are equally favorable. Those which I have used are Porcellio spinieornis, Porcellio scaber, Onisciis asellm, Philoscia vittata and Cilisticus convexm. A reserve stock of animals, renewed from time to time, has been kept in the University Vivarium surrounded by the natural objects among which they were found — bits of bark, dead leaves, etc. Placed in large glass evaporating dishes, covered with a glass plate, on the under side of which was kept moist filter-paper for preserving the proper humidity of the atmosphere, the animals behaved in eveiy respect as in the natural state. In the feeding experiments, to be described later, it was necessary first to empty the intestine of all food. The method commonly employed for this was merely to isolate animals in dishes covered as above described and cleaned once or twice daily. No difficulty was experienced in keeping the animals alive in this way so long as starvation was not Moo pro- longed, provided only the atmosphere was kept moist by daily 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF THILADELPHIA. 287 renewal of water in the filter- paper, aud care was takeu to leave uo large drops of water iu the bottom of the dish.* Several observers have remarked the prolonged starvation which the isopods can withstand (Ide (3), Conklin (4), McMurrich (5), Schonicheu (6) ). Xo attempt has been made here to determine the ultra- maximum time; but in the course of the study an isolated ani- mal has frequently been starved for more than a month. When several are starved together in the same dish, the time of absolute deprivation seldom reaches a month ; some are sure to moult, or to become greatly weakened, or to die from some cause, when the legs and soft parts are then eaten by the others. While this does not necessarily terminate the fast for all, it does make impossible that determination of the fasting period which is often desirable. The only way to obtain this datum with certainty is to isolate the animals. For this purpose small flat-bottomed vessels of various dimensions, preferably all of the same height, so that they could be covered with the same sheet of glass and filter-paper, have been employed. Various methods of removing the intestine have been tried. *The latter precaution was necessary to guard against drowniug.^ When by chance the breathing appendages are covered with water, it the animal is m its natural habitat or on filter-paper or other object which will take up the water readily, it very rapidly frees Uselt by dipping the abdomen, just as one might remove an extra drop ot mk from a fountain pen by touching it to an absorbing surface. Kept on clean glass, however, the drop is not always removed, and the animal may die from suffocation or over-exertion, or both. A greater difficulty was experienced iu cases of prolonged starvation from cannibalism. Although iu the main vegetable feeders, or scavengers at most, and particularly iuofteusive toward other species of animals, these Crustacea will eat one another, if driven by hunger to this extremity. While some signs of offensive attack have been seen, such as a vigorous nip by one animal at the dorsum of another, plainly sufficient to inflict considerable pain, it would be unsafe to regard an act of this kind as a deliberate attempt to kill. Moreover, very young animals have been kept alive in the same dishes with adults through a month or six weeks of starvation. Individuals isolated in small stender dishes have often been seen to moult and to survive the ordeal just as in the state of nature. But if one moult (Sec. iii, (4) ) in a dish with other starving ani- mals or is greatly weakened by its efforts to remove a drop of water, it may fall an easy victim to the hunger of its starving companions. Ihe cannibalism to be guarded against is, tlierefore, of an accidental sort, and arises from an instinct to keep the intestine fall. The same instinct prompts the animal in similar circumstances to eat anything it_ can swallow, although it is not intended by this to imply that no choice is exercised in the selection of its natural food. 3Iention will be made in a later section of the care necessary to induce animals which have been fasting a long time to eat the pure foods with which it is de>irable to feed them. 288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Dissecting under fluids iu the ordinary manner is not satisfactory because of the small size of the animals. McMurrich's (5) method of placing the animal iu the killing fluid, and with a needle in each end pulling him asunder; or that employed^by Conklin (4) of first removiug the head, and then pulling out the intestine by catching the tail segment with a pair of forceps, is much more rapid. In either case the intestine breaks at the junction of the anterior por- tion, or stomach, with the middle portion, or " mid-gut." For obtaining the intestine and the glands with their connection pre- served, the posterior one or two segments are cut off with scissors and the organs removed by pulling on the one or two anterior seg- ments with forceps. The whole mass is easily handled, and the normal relation is preserved through all the fluids. I have usually dis.sected off the harder chitinous parts of the head iu oil just before embedding. It has been necessary to give special attention to the means and methods of fixation. As will appear more clearly later, the form and relation of the cellular constituents depend upon the direction of penetration of the killing fluid, as well as upon the strength of the fluid employed. By the usual method of plunging the organs directly into the killing fluid the penetration is, of course, from the coelomic toward the luminal side of the cell. For the purpose of obtaining penetration from the luminal toward the coelomic side of the intestinal cells an hypodermic syringe was filled with killing fluid, and the needle, made blunt by turning back the point, was inserted through the mouth into the anterior portion of the mid- gut. Then the posterior segment having been cut off as before to free the posterior attachment of the intestine, all the segments back of the second thoracic were slipped off together by holding the anterior end with one pair of forceps and pulling with another. In a few cases I was able to obtain a fairly good injection by inserting the needle after extracting the intestine; but since it always suffers more or less from handling, and it is always difficult to insert a needle into a collapsed intestine without tearing it, the former proved the safer if the more cruel method. The following killing fluids have been used : a, ninety-five per cent, alcohol; b, saturated aqueous solution of corrosive sublimate; c, the same with addition of two per cent, acetic acid; d, picroaoetic after Lee, and e, after Omklin; /, Zenker's fluid; g, picro -formal in ; /(, formo-alcohol ; i, osmic acetic; j osmic-bichromate (Altmann's); 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289 k, Flemming' s ; I, Hermann's, and m, Hermann's without acetic (one per cent, platinic-chloride 15 parts, one per cent, osmic acid 4 parts). For minute cytological details I liave relied most on a, 1% I, m, because these are most faithful to the structure in fresh cells. Further consideration of the effects of fixation on the different cell constituents and the metabolic contents will be taken up under the appropriate heads. For studying the structure in fresh cells, the organs were mounted in the blood of other animals of the same species, as follows : Upon a slide a small rectangular fragment of cover-slip was supported by a fragment of glass of suitable thickness, the other end resting on the slide. The blood was now squeezed out of a decapitated ani- mal in the form of a large drop, which, applied to the edge of the cover-glass, was drawn under by capillarity. From one to two dozen animals, according to the size, are required to furnish suffi- cient blood for a single intestine. The medium having been thus prepared, the organs were drawn out of the animal, placed on the slide, and arranged near the supporting glass parallel to the junction of the two fragments. The quantity of blood was then noted by a mark indicating its level on the cover-glass, and this level was maintained by adding distilled water as water was lost by evapora- tion. The chemical changes accompanying coagulation of the blood do not seem to affect the cells at all within the first half -hour. Post-mortem changes, however, do occur after an hour or two. Consequently no structure as seen by this method has been trusted beyond thirty minutes from the time of preparation. Most of my observations have been made on serial sections pre- pared in the usual manner. Both " liver " and intestine were sec- tioned, stained and mounted on the same slide. The stains upon which most reliance has been placed are iron-hsematoxylin, Biondi- Heidenhaiu, Flemming's triple, Hermann's triple and Altmann's acid-fuchsine-picric-alcohol. The effects of these on the various parts will be mentioned from time to time. III. Description of the Digestive System. 1. Gross Structure. It will be necessary to recall the gross structure of the digestive system, as this can be made out with the luiked eye or a dissecting microscope. 1. The intestine takes the most direct course possible from the mouth to the anus. Three chief divisions are generally recog- nized : the anterior, consisting of the (esophagus and grinding stomach {kaumagen, poche malaxatrice) ; the middle (" mid-gut," intestine moyen'), in which three divisions will be recognized, and 19 290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, the posterior oi- rectum, Ouly the middle intestine coucerus us iu this paper. Its anterior portion is of slightly larger diameter than the posterior (fig. 1). The lateral walls are perfectly sti-aight; Sph PostSpii Rec Fig. l. — Oniscus asellus (male, 12 mm.) X 10.— (In this and follow- ino- figures mm. refers to tlie length of the animal, measuring from the anterior margin of the head of the segment to the end of the uropods. ) Slio-htly diagrammatic drawing to show relation of the digestive organs. Ant., Med., ^'ost., anterior, median and posterior portions of tlie "mid- gut"'; 3Ius., muscular coat of intestine, shown only at extreme anterior end of "mid-gut"; Tyi)h., typhlosole ; Ilej)., hepatopaucreas ; Tes., testis; Eec.S., receptacle of sperm; Vas., vas deferens ; Sph., sphincter muscle; Post Sph., post-sphincter; Bee, rectum. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291 the transition from the anterior larger to the posterior smaller por- tion is very gradual. The only break in the uniformity of the wall ])ack to the sphincter is a dorsal longitudinal furrow, bounded by two slightly projecting ridges, which extends from the extreme anterior end of the "mid-gut" to a point opposite the junction of the fifth and sixth thoracic segments. At the anterior end of its posterior third the structure thus presented widens out so that, as Ide (3) says, "it terminates like a spatula." The furrow is due to an infolding of the epithelium along the mid-dorsal line (fig. 3), which then spreads out laterally within the lumen, fitting into or covering the secondary grooves formed by the projecting ridges. Following Conklin (see Sec. vi), I shall call the entire structure, grooves and ridges, the typhlosole. The " mid-gut" is uniform in size from the posterior end of the typhlosole to the region of the fourth abdominal segment. Here it is considerably con- stricted by a strong sphincter muscle pinching off, so to speak, a small posterior portion of the " mid-gut," which has already been spoken of as the post-sphincter, and which moulds the pellets of waste befoi-e they are ejected. The typhlosole and sphincter mark off three convenient subdivisions of the ' * mid-gut ' ' : the anterior, containing the typhlosole and reaching to its posterior end ; the median, from the end of the typhlosole to the sphincter muscle, and the postenor, including that portion covered by the sphincter, and the post-sphincter portion as far as the rectum. 2. Glands. — Huet (7) has described for Ligia a pair of salivary glands lying on the posterior ventral wall of the oesophagus and opening by an extremely narrow aperture into this portion of the canal. He has demonstrated that they are salivary glands by dis- secting them out in alcohol (which does not destroy diastase) and placmg potato starch in a watery extract. Dextrose was detected after twenty -four hours. Ide (3) considers these glands as cutaneous appendages, disputing their connection with the oesophagus, although admitting that they may be concerned in digestion. On account of their very small size and the uncertainty of their morpho- logical nature, no attention has been given them in this study. The only other digestive gland with which we have to do in the isopods is the hepatopancreas. It consists, in the forms studied, of two pairs of blind tubes, placed a pair on each side of I he intes- tine, into which they open, at the anterior end, by a l-shuped 292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^lay, aperture. The two tubes ou the same side imite into a transverse canal which joins that of the other side at the aperture. The tubes extend ahiiost the entire length of Ihe body cavity, their tapering blind ends reaching into the abdominal segments (fig. 1). It is to "Weber (37) that we owe the recognition of the mixed na- ture of this gland and the application to it of the name hepato- pancreas, introduced by Krukenburg (24) for the analogous organ of fishes. 2. Microscopic Structure of Intestine. The wall of the " mid -gut," as of the other divisions of the intestine, is made up of four coats which have been recognized by all the later writers. Beginning with the outer or coelomic side, these are the muscular coat, the basement membrane, the epithelium and the intima or cliitinous lining. The muscular coat has been fully de- scribed by Ide (3) and Schouichen (6). It consists of two layers, an outer longitudinal and an inner circular. Over the anterior portion of the " mid-gut " (i. e., as far back as the typhlosole ex- tends) the outer is imposed upon the inner ; posterior to this both layers thin out so that the fibres are quite widely separated from one another, each one running in the groove between adjacent rows of cells. They also fuse together and anastomose freely, so that a muscular network is formed, through the meshes of Avhich the cells project. The sphincter, according to Ide, is an additional layer lying outside the longitudinal and constituting a second circu- lar one. The inner circular layer is very much reduced at this place, so that only a few fibres appear. The other coats, as McMurrich has indicated, properly belong to the epithelium. Both the basement membrane and the chitinous lining are formed by the epithelial cells. The former is a smooth membrane of uniform thickness which accommodates itself to all the irregularities of the outer surface, dipping into the dorsal fur- row and keeping closely applied to the cells. We have already men- tioned the very large size of the epithelial cells. As Ide observed, they are often to be seen with the naked eye. They are repre- sented in fig. 1 for Oniscus asellus, 12 mm. long, magnified just ten diameters. Those in the median portion of the ' ' mid-gut ' ' are most easily seen, because only partly covered with muscle. Their ends, projecting freely into the coelome, appear as little mounds on the 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 293 contour line. Another striking feature of the epithelium Is the rectangular arrangement of the cells in longitudinal and transvei-se rows. One exception occurs at the posterior end of the typhlosole, at which point the longitudinal rows converge, so as to form, as Schonichen says, " parallel parabolas, making a picture in optical section not unlike a longitudinal section through a vegetative point." While the rows elsewhere are rectilinear, they are not often continuous from one end of the " mid-gut" to the other. I have often seen longitudinal rows which terminate some distance from the end. Discontinuous transverse rows have also been seen. Ide's fig. 19 shows these features, which are supported further by his statement that only the median two ventral rows can be followed uninterrupledly from the anterior to the posterior end. (1) Growth of Intestine. At first sight the number of rows of cells appears definite and constant enough that one might name the cells as city blocks are named, and might even find cell homology between different indi- viduals. This character has been mentioned by all the authoi-s since Lereboullet (8) (Huet, Ide, Conklin, IMcMurrich, Schonichen), and ^NlciMurrich has attempted to show that the number is constant throughout the life of an individual. McMurrich's attempt is based on the non-occurrence of cell division. No observer except Lee (9), who regarded certain deformed nuclei stretching from one cell to another as remains of the spindle {fiiseau de regression), has seen any sign of mitosis, and McMurrich says : " I have never been able to satisfy myself that normal amitosis actually occurs." He seemed to be justified, therefore, in the attempt (which by his own confession is not wholly successful) to show that growth of the intestine takes place by enlargement of the cells rather than by multiplication. Amitosis. — In young individuals amitosis is by no means rare. Fig. 2, A, B and C, show some of the stages which are easily found at this time. Fig. 2, A, is a longitudinal section exhibiting the relative sizes of cells whose nuclei have just divided, and of those recently constricted off. Conklin (I. c.) has rightly interpreted this constriction of the cells, and has figured what he regards as an amitotic division. It would appear from fig. A and fig. B (which is a horizontal section showing division in the transvei"se direction) that the nuclei may com})letely divide and move some distance apart before constriction of the cytoplasm takes place. From one or two observations made on very young porcellios in process of moulting, I am led to think that the constriction may even be 294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, postponed until the next moult of the inteslinal lining. The old intinia evidently would present considerable resistance to the forma- tion of a furrow, which is always to be seen in the intima between Fig. 2. — A, longitudinal section of intestine of a young Porcellio (3 mm.); B, transverse section of the same ; C, optical "section of intes tinal cells of young Porcellio (1.8 mm.) immediately after moult of the posterior half. All these figures illustrate growth of the intestine by amitosis. A and B X 280, O X 600, nuclei in G show post-mortem changes. cells. Moreover, there is nothing to indicate that the|nuclei] repre- sented as already separate in these figures {A and B) have not been so for a considerable time, while the frequent occurrence of two nucleated cells, with no other sign of division, would speak strongly for this. Several authors have reported cells with two or three nuclei, and Carnoy (10) finds as many as ten to thirty nuclei in the intestinal cells of Cirolana. So large a number is due, I have abundant reason to believe, to fragmentation of the nuclei, not to amitosis, as Car- noy states {I. c. ). Schonichen discredits JNIcMurrich's evidence (to the same effect as my own), holding that the fragmented nuclei resolve on focusing carefully into the nuclei of the muscle fibres. He evidently has not seen the phenomenon reported by McMurrich. Space does not permit an account of the unquestionable cases of fragmentation which I have seen. A whole plate of figures might 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295 be given of cells coutaiuiug from a dozen to twenty-five fragments of the nucleus. No explanation of the phenomenon can be given at present further than to say that there are many reasons to regard it as pathological, or " degenerative" in Lowit's sense (see page 296). I have found the intestine of a young Porcellio, 1.8 mm. in length, which had recently moulted the posterior half (Sec. iii, (4) ), to be literally filled with amitotic division, both longitudinal and transverse, throughout its length (fig. 2, C). ^Eany miclei were in process of division ; those already separated were approximately half the volume of others not yet beginning to constrict. There can be no doubt that the large nuud^er of divisions was correlated with the increase in size of the intestine immediately following the moult. It seems equally plain that two nucleated cells which are larger than adjacent ones, as in fig. 2, A, may represent precocious nuclear divisions, the constriction which will divide the cell being deferred to the next moult, W'hen the luminal end of the cell will be free to cover the new furrow, as well as the old surface, with chitin. It is evident that amitosis has been seen in the isopod intestine by a number of observers. Carnoy (10) claims to have seen " the constriction of the nucleus in the epithelium of the intestine of the Crustacea, e. g. , Oniscus asellus, Ligia, A nnadillo asellu.'^, Idotea, Cirolana, etc." He figures amitosis in the testicle cells of the isopod, and says these represent exactly what is to be seen in the nuclei of intestinal cells, so far as the phenomena of division are con- cerned. It is possible, however, that Carnoy, as ^IMc^Iurrich and Schonichen think, may have mistaken distortions of the nucleus for amitosis. Indeed, v. Bambeke (11) refers to one of the figures given by Carnoy as a deformed nucleus. Ziegler and vom Rath (12) say that the " mid-gut " of Oniscus, Porcellio, Cymothoa and Anilocra show amitotic nuclear divisions with special clearness and very abundantly (" besonders deutlich uud recht hiiufig"); but as will be seen imder the subject of the nucleus later, and as was recog- nized by Schonichen, it appears probable that they, too, confused with amitosis certain distortions of the nucleus. Conklin says, speaking of elongated nuclei extending into two cells, " some of these, I am convinced, are amitotic divisions of the nucleus." Since these observations have been called in question by jMcMurrich on the basis of the very frequent misjudgment of irregularly shaped nuclei, it has seemed worth while communicating my own observations. In conclusion, I may say there is no possible doubt that amitosis does actually occur in the growing intestine, nor any doubt that it has here the same significance which Frenzel (13) ascribes to the phe- nomenon in the mid-gut of Astacus and other decapods, namely, a true cell multiplication (" nicht einzig und allein cine Kcrnvermeh- rung, sondernebensowohlaucheine wahreZcllvermehrung," p. o59). 296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, In other words, it is a " regenerative ' ' as distinguished from a de- generative process. Lowit (14) distinguishes between these two iu the following: " Die erste fiihrt nacli nieine Auffassuug zurNeubil- duug von Kern und Zelle, die letztere kann mit sekretorischen und assiniilatorischeu Vorgangen ini Zellleibe zusainmenhangen und durfte wahrscheinlich in vielen Fallen der ausdruck eines bevor- stehenden Kern und Zelltodes sein," (2) Origin of the Ti/phlosole. — In specimens of Porcellio spin- icornis 1.8-2 mm. long I have been able to follow the origin of the typhlosole. This structure, as we have seen, is but an infolding of the mid-dorsal wall of the " mid-gut," accompanied by a secondary Fig. 3. — Transverse sections of empty intestine of a young Porcellio (1.8 mm.). X 180. A. At extreme anterior end of the "mid-gut"; B. Sixth section (.04 mm.) posterior to A.; Typh.Ev. Primary evagination in formation of the typhlosole ; Typh.lnv. Secondary invagination of median two rows of cells which form the middle portion of the typhlo- sole. outfolding on either side which appears as a ridge; but it is so definite in form as to be })laiuly a specialization as well, and my observations show that its development is a progressive one. Cross sections of the anterior portion of the " mid-gut" in ani- mals just hatched show a perfectly uniform imfolded wall, the typhlosole not yet to be seen. In fig. 3, A, of a specimen 1.8 mm. long (taken in February and therefore probably several months old), the section is from the extreme anterior end ; the next (fig. 3, B) is only six sections (about .04 mm. ) farther back. The latter shows the earlier stage. The mid -dorsal portion of the wall is bulged out over a considerable extent of the circumference. The cells composing the bulged iX)rtion are very open iu structure, like 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297 those found in the extreme posterior end of the adult typhlosole. They are larger in all dimensions than those in the rest of the wall, so that the effect is such as would be produced by swelling. Since I have found the structure identically the same in five different individuals of the same age, killed in three different fluids, it seems certain that the swelling is normal and due to some intrinsic growth energy. Fig. 3, A, shows that the evagiuated or Indged portion on the dorsal side is but preliminary to an invagination of the median two cells whereby the mature form of the typhlosole is approached. These cells have only to grow farther into the lumen and to expand laterally, so as to cover or fill the inner grooves formed at the sides, in order to attain the adult form. The invag- ination may involve more than these two cells ; the stalks separate at their bases later, as shown in fig. 4, A, so that the division between these and the next cells must be purely arbitrary. In the anterior portion the cells rapidly recover from the swell- ing which is so plain a feature at the first evaginatiou (figs. 3 and 4), while in the posterior portion they retain this loose structure permanently (fig. 4). Here also the middle cells are not turned Fig. 4. — Transverse sections intestine of young Oniscus (4.4 mm) X 270 : A, througli iinterior portion of the typhlosole ; B, through posterior end of the typhh)sole, same magnification ; Oh., channel for passage of secretion or liquid food; Cg., coagulum of secretion of heiialopancreas. B shows the elFects of killing tluids on tiie large cells of the typhlosole. in so far, while the lateral extension at their luminal border is rather wider than it is farther anterior. The posterior portion of which we have been speaking is the spatula-like enlargement men- 29? PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^aj, tioned on mge 21)1). It will appear evident from figs. 4, A and B, that six rows of cells, counting by the nuclei, are involved in the typhlosole. (8) Syncytium. The very large cells which compose the adult " mid-gut" were recognized by Huet to be without distinct parietal walls, but to be bounded by rows of fibres. Ide figures cell walls for Onisciis murarius, and thinks Huet was in error or overlooked them. Almost simultaneously Mc^Eurrich and Schonichen put forward the view that the epithelium is in reality a syncytium, the walls being replaced by fibres which run from the intima to the basement membrane. Both authors show that what Ide saw is undoubtedly the chitinous lining, dipping in between the anterior cells on the luminal side and the basement membrane, Avhich has a similar relation to the coelomic side of the median cells. The syncytial nature they argue further from the facts that the cells cannot be separated by maceration in potash (a thing which Ide claims to have accomplished) ; that neither silver niti-ate nor other stains differentiate cell walls ; and finally, that the nuclei may be squeezed through from one cell into another. Eyder and Peuuiugton (15), who described these movements of nuclei as a natural phenomenon (see page 304), figure cell walls, but do not state what becomes of them when the nuclei pass through. Conklin, in showing that the changes of position on the part of the nuclei are due en- tirely to rough treatment, says : ' ' The parietal walls are so thin that they cannot be distinguished." jNIy own observations confirm those of the later writers. In the majority of cases of adult intes- tines w'here I have looked for them, no sign of a wall is to be seen. Figs. 15 and 16 represent the cytoplasm as perfectly continuous from one cell to another. We have already spoken of the grooves which separate the ante- rior cells on the luminal side. On account of these grooves the inter- cellular fibres are shorter than the cell axes. The same is true for the cells of the median portion and for those of the transitional re- gion, but for a slightly different reason, While the intima does not dip in between the median cells, the latter project into the ccelome at their centres more than at the edges (fig. 12). The cells in the transition region immediately posterior to the typhlosole show an intermediate condition ; the intima does not dip in so deeply between 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299 the cells as iu the anterior (fig. 21), and the cells do not project so far into the ccelorae as iu the median portion. The intercellular fibres consequently are again shorter than the cell axis. Inside the cells, as has often been described, occur other fibres taking the same course from the intima to the basement membrane. Their disposition is varied, sometimes in bundles, as in fig. 4, or singly, as in fig. 9. Again they may be strong throughout their length, as iu fig. 4 (usually so iu the typhlosole), or may thin out at one end, as iu fig. 9. In sections they cannot often be followed continuously from intima to basement membrane because their course is not often straight. They are more frequently straight iu the typhlosole where they are thicker than elsewhere (figs. 3 and 4). Where the fibres approach the intima or basement membrane they are parallel and nearly always straight. This gives the so-called ' ' striated ' ' border which has so often been described for the ' ' mid- gut " of isopods (Lereboullet, Leydig (16), Huet, Ide, McMurrich, Conklin, Schonichen). The great regularity of the fibres along the intima is due to a thickening of them for a short distance in, thereby producing what Schonichen calls the ' ' Balkchenzone. ' ' Both Mc- ]\Iurrich and Schonichen regard this thickening as due to a deposition of chitin on the fibres, basing their conclusion on a refractive index in the fresh condition, and on a staining reaction in the preserved material, similar to that of the inner border of the intima. Practi- cally all authors agree that the thickened ends are continuous with the intra-cellular fibres. I shall designate this zone of thickened fibres by the term palisade, by which I would emphasize merely the parallel arrangement of the fibres at their ends. Very often the spaces between the thickened ends are empty of cytoplasm, which of course strengthens the impression of a separate zone. This zone does not have definite limits, as can be seen in starved cells, where it may extend into the cell as far as the nucleus. In such a case the only difference discernible in the course of the fibres is n .Gy v> Fig-'IO.— Sections X 270 from "mid-gut" of: A, Oniseus asellns, 16 hours after feeding with raw heef, fixed in Flemming's fluid ; B, Porcel- lio scaber, 4 hours after feeding with raw beef, fixed in 1 percent, platinic chloride 15 parts., 1 per cent, osmic acid 4 parts ; Zym. Or., zymogen granules appearing about the nucleus. arrangenaent. Often the masses are in actual contact with the nucleus. When the nuclei are broken or shrunken, granules indis- tinguishable from these are found about the nucleus or opposite the break. There seems good reason, therefore, to state that this sub- stance is being given out by the nucleus. I cannot satisfy myself, however, that the nuclear membrane disappears or that the nucleus suffers any visible change in the process. Fig. 10, A (No, 20 of table), shows aggregations which are decidedly more definite. Figs. 11, A and 5 (Nos. 8 and 21 of table),'" exhibit some variations in the form of these masses. All the figures thus far referred to are '"Tables I and II follow at end of paper. 314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF {.^^J, of the auterior cells. lu the column of the table devoted to these cells, wherever ' ' small granules in masses ' ' are mentioned, refer- ence is made to the substance here spoken of. It will be observed from this column also thai in all fixations, except those which blacken the cell contents, the granules are yellowish or brownish even after staining. With the osmic fixations they are always black. After such fixations they take the stains used. The median cells have not, up to sixteen hours after feeding, undergone visible change. ^IdGr'^ Sru-^/ * ■■ V!*t' - Afi^^jvS c/ Fig. 11. — Cells X 600 from anterior portion of "mid-gut" of Porcellio scaber : A, 8 hours after feeding ; B, 18 hours after feeding, both fixed in 1 per cent, platinic chloride 15 parts, 1 per cent, osmic acid 4 parts. Alb. Gr., albumose granules ; Zym. Or., zymogen granules. In figs. 11, J. and B, are seen numerous other larger and deeper staining granules scattered in the finely granular substance of which we have just been speaking. In fig. A particularly they seem to be quite definitely aggregated with reference to this substance. The small granules come from the nucleus, and there can be no doubt as to the origin of the large ones. Fig. B contains the same kind of granules in the lumen of the intestine, mixed with the coagulum which represents the secretion of the hepatopancreas. Since the food is almost pure proteid, and we know from the researches of Huet that the secretion of the ' ' liver ' ' is capable of changing proteid to "peptone" (albumose), we may presume that some product in this process may be found here. Fischer's researches 190fi.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 315 on the effects of different killing fluids on proteid bodies enable us to decide this question v,-ith a high degree of probability. He classes albumoses among the " Granulabildner " — that is to say, they are precipitated in the form of granules insoluble in water by tannin, chromic acid, sublimate, platinic-chloride, formal- dehyde, osmic-acetic, Fleraming's and Hermann's mixtures; and they are precipitated in the form of granules soluble in water by alcohol, acetone, picric acid, picric acid-alcohol, picric-sulphuric acid {loc. cit., p. 33). The fixation method of determining the presence of albumose would then be: (a) Precipitation with some one of each of the two classes of fixatives (Fischer recommends osmic-acetic and Hermann's for the first, and alcohol and picric acid for the second); (6) washing both in water; (c) staining with some dye which has a strong affinity for albumose (Fischer recommends Altmann's acid-fuchsine-picric-alcohol). If albu- mose is present it will be found in the first case, and will be washed out in the second. Figs. 1 and 2, Plate XVI, are from the same region of two intestines fixed twenty-four hours after feeding, the former in Hermann's fluid, the latter in alcohol; both were washed a long time in water (the former twenty-four hours, the latter fifteen) ; they were carried through the same reagents together, and finally stained in precisely the same manner, namely, in 15 per cent, acid-fuchsine in aniline water for five minutes at 54° C, then differentiated in picric-alcohol. (The effect of the picric- alcohol cannot be shown in the figure. ) Figs. 3 and 4, Plate XVI, are from intestines treated as above after fifty hours from time of feeding. In order to test Fischer's results more fully, I have performed a number of experiments similar to his on proteids obtained directly from Griibler's Laboratorium in Dresden. A summary of these experiments is given in Table II. It will be seen that my results confirm Fischer's in most respects essential to the precijntation of albumose. There is but one noteworthy difference, namely, that whereas Fischer obtained from Griibler's heniialbumose (prot- albumose) a granular precipitate essentially like that from deutero- albumose, I find only coagulum by HgCl.^. " Peptone (depur. sice, aus Fibrine, Griibler) seems to be a mix- ture of albumoses and true peptones. It is altogether likely that ^1 Several other fluids gave the same. 316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, such a mixture occurs in the cells during absorption. I was unable to get a precipitate of the true peptones, after the removal of albu- moses by (NH4),S0<, even by the strongast fluids (HgCl,, Flem- ming's fluid, 1 per cent, chromic acid), which also is in agreement with Fischer. We may safely conclude that the large granules above mentioned contain albumose, and as such they will be desig- nated hereafter. '- The exact nature of the flnely granular substance, previously mentioned as coming from the nucleus, may now be considered. The very strong evidence that it is derived from the nucleus, and the fact that it is associated with albumose granules in the cell, both speak for a substance elaborated for the purpose of acting on the food. Fig. 14, sixteen hours after feeding, from a fresh iutestine stained fifteen minutes in dilute Bismarck-brown, shows masses of granules about the nucleus. The appearance is strongly suggestive of zymogen esis (see figs. 20 and 21). Granules are very often seen about the nucleus in fresh intestines not previously stained, such as in fig. 1 4, and are not therefore to be ascribed to the effect of the fluid used. Since proteids can enter the cell only in the form of solutions, we can scarcely suppose that we are dealing with any stage of the food. If we may speak of the substance tentatively as zymogen, what further evidence have we that it is destined for ferment action ? When the lumen of the intestine contains secre- tion from the hepatopancreas, as is always the case Avhen this body appears in the cells in large quantity, it is difficult to be certain whether or not these granules are poured out to mix with the secre- tion. If the quantity in the cell is great it is sometimes found on the luminal side; but the definite aggregations, which occur most often near the nucleus, are not found here, nor does one ever see distinct evidence of a streaming through the intima. Now, considering that inter-alveolar substance, with which Ihis is to be classed, is capable of being moved by the killing fluids, and that the penetration in the cases mentioned is toward ihe lumen, it should be found on that side in greater quantity if it is destined for action in the lumen. Notwithstanding this evidence, however, and the further fact that, although it is plainly different from the "liver" zymogen, no secretion different from that of the " liver " can be distinguished '^ It will be understood, of course, that the granule is in reality a com- pound of albumose with the precipitating fluid. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 317 in the lumen, I would not go so far as to say that it may not escape from the cell. The structure of the cell plainly admits this possi- bility. All we can say at present is that where we might expect evidence oi its passage into the lumen, no evidence is obtained. To sum up the evidence thus far : The granules as such come from the nucleus; they are associated with food (albumose) in the cytopkism; they stain only with difficulty; finally, there is no clear evidence that they escape from the cell. All these indicate an intracellular ferment. If it is such we should expect that it would appear in the cell before the food does, or even before feeding. Fig. 10, B, four hours after feeding, contains no albumose; it rarely appears in the cell earlier than the eighth hour after feeding. In the table. No. 3 is one of several intestines from animals starved two weeks and not fed before killing; small granules were found in considerable number which do not take the Biondi-Heidenhaiu stain. Again, McMurrich reports for starved specimens of Annadillldium some yellowish granules (which he regards as disin- tegration products appai'ently identical with these). Finally, if it is an intracellular ferment it should be found in all absorbing cells. The definite aggregations of granules which are found in the anterior cells are seldom met with in the cells of the median part. However, No. 44 of the table, killed in sublimate, stained in Biondi-Heidenhain, exhibited in these cells " small poorly staining granules on the coelomic side" (also Nos. 13 and 18). In neither of these cases are the granules in masses ; they are scat- tered all through the coelomic end of the cell. While, therefore, the granules are abundant and definitely aggregated in all stages of absorption only in the anterior cells (see Table I), they do occur in all absorbing cells. There is evidence, which I shall consider presently, that some of the small granules of feeble staining capacity may represent a stage in the transformation of the food itself. From eight hours onward to one hundred and twenty hours after feeding, albumose granules may be found in greater or le^^s quantity in all the cells. The amount met with in any particular cell will depend upon the accidents of its formation in the lumen. The coui-se it takes, once in the cell, seems to have no distinct refercuce to the organization of the cell, except so far as that may influence it mechanically. Fig. 2, Plate XVI, twenty-four hours, and Fig. 9, fresh, show the granules arranged in rows, following in a general 318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, way tlie coui'se of the fibres. In these cases the albumose is plainly not influenctid by the nucleus. If absorption goes on continually for some time a mass of granules will be found after fixing, on the coelomic side of the nucleus (Figs. 12, sixteen hours, and 4, riate XVI, fifty liours). Fig. 12. — Absorbing cell X 600 from median portion of "mid-gut" of Oniscus asellus, 16 hours after feeding, fixed with Hermann's fluid. Intima is torn off. Alb. Or., albumose granules ; Pal., palisade ; Inter./., intercellular fibre, showing continuity with the basement membrane. It has been shown by Fischer (Z. c, p. 36 et seq.) that the size of the granules of albumose depends upon the strength of the solution, and upon the strength — i.e. , precipitating power — of the killing fluid. Thus he finds the average diameter of the granules precipitated by Altmann's osmic-bichromate mixture from a 10 per cent, solution is l;jL to 3,a; from a 3 per cent, solution, .Ifito 1.5//; from 1 per cent., .5fi to .7/jL. Again, the average diameter from a 10 per cent, solu- tion precipitated by Flemming's fluid is .7fi to 1;j.; by Hermann's, .7n (fairly uniform); by 1 per cent, platinic-chloride, .7,« to Ifi; by 7 percent, sublimate, .4,'i to l,a and smaller. Those represented 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319 iu fig-s. 8 aud 9, Plate XVI, and iu many other cells of the same iutestiue, measure from .5,u to 2,u; they were precipitated with picro- acetic.'' The granules iu fig. 12 and several other cells of the game intestine measure from .5,a to 1.5//; they were precipitated with Hermann's fluid. It is not important to attempt an exact determination of the strength in wliich the albumose may exist in the cells ; but the above figures indicate that it may be as strong as a 10 per cent, solution, making allowance for the fact that Fischer's measurements were made for pure solutions, whereas iu the cells they are of course mixed with other interalveolar substances. Fischer notes that albumose in mixture with an albumen pi'ecipi- tates larger granules than from pure solutions. He also observes that precipitated from such mixtures they are not uniformly dis- tributed through the coagulum of the albumen, but are collected into small and large nests (" Anhaufung in Nestern "). Figs. 8 and 9, Plate XVI, and others show this arrangement. ^ B Fig. 13. — Granules of Peptone (depur. sice, aus Fibrine), (Giiibler) X 925. A, 2.5 per cent. ; B, 5 per cent, solution precipitated on cover-glasses by Chromic acid (1 per cent.), stained in Irou-Htematoxylin. See Table II, Nos. (5) and (6). The occurrence of little spaces about each granule of albumose in a coagulum of albumen, which Fischer has figured (/. c. Taf., figs. 2, 3,- 4), is confirmed also by my figs. 6, 8 aud 9, Plate XVI. This fact enables one to determine with clearness the relation of the granule to the alveolar structure of the cytoplasm. Thus, if the granule were precipitated within the alveole, and the structure were ^' Picroacetic is said by Fischer to precipitate albumose iu a soluble form. I find this to be true if the fixation is followed by washing with water, but if followed with 70 per cent, alcohol the granules are not dissolved m this or subsequent fluids. The same is true of picro-sul- phuric. 320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, U()t destroyed by the fixation, the space should correspond to the neighboring alveoles in size — i. e. , in such cells as that represented in fig. 6, where the alveoles are so evident, the granule would be plainly seen encased by the alveolar wall. Such an appearance is seldom met with — indeed, the granule is often larger than the alveole (figs. 9, 11, B, 9, Plate XVI). Again, in favorable places (figs. 6, 8, Plate XYI), the alveolar walls can be seen intersecting the space about the granule. ^* The space does not correspond, therefore, to an alveole, but represents the area in the interalveolar substance influ- enced by the kiUiug fluid to form a single granule. It appears, therefore, that the soluble food is independent of the cytoplasmic structure. Fig. 14. — Outliue drawing (with camera X 90) of au optical section of anterior cells, "mid-gut" of Oniscus asellus, fed with raw beef; intes- tine mounted in blood and stained 15 minutes in dilute Bismarck brown (1 : 20,000) 16 hrs. after feeding. The granules about the nucleus take the stain and appear to be coming from the nucleus. This is precisely the appearance of zymogenesis in the hepatopancreas when treated in the same manner (figs. 20 and 21). Having distinguished the albumose granules from the rest of the cell contents, we may inquire whether further chemical stages of the food appear in the fixed and stained sections in a form distinguish- able by the microscope. It was mentioned farther back (p. 317) that evidence might be found for regarding some small granules of feeble staining capacity as a stage in the transformation of food. In the first place, it must be stated that the digestion of the food (raw beef) is pancreatic (i. e., alkaline'^) (see Sec. ix, a); and " Cf. Hardy's figures, loc. cit. ^^This we have on strong comparative evidence also. Thus Plateau (24) demonstrated (a) that the reaction in the crop of the Carabidse and Dytiscid* may be neutral before feeding, but is always alkaline after; (6) that the reaction in the "mid-gut " of the carnivorous chilopod Litho- bius is alkaline, in that of the herbivorous diplopod Julus may be acid. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321 according to Neumeister' s (27) scheme, the first bodies chemically recognizable in the tryptic digestion of proteids are deutero-albu- moses. Now, deutero-albmnoses, according to Fischer and this study, behave as we have described under the general name album ose (see p. 815). If granules appear before albumose is formed, therefore, it is not probable that they represent food. May those in question, however, not be albumose in a weaker solution, seeing that the size of the granules depends upon the strength of the solution ? In answer to this question two facts may be mentioned : (a) whereas albumose granules take stains readily, these granules stain with ditficulty; (b) where only a small number of albumose granules are present they are usually very much larger than these (figs. 8 and 9, Plate XVI). If, then, any of the granules designated as "small and poor-staining" (see Table I) are food, they must represent a stage following albumose. Fischer has found the true peptone (in Kiihne's sense) very difficult to precipitate, and I have been unable to get any precipitate at all with killing fluids from the filtrate after treating Griibler's preparations of albu- moses with (^114)2804. If the true peptone were precipitated in the cell, the granules would in all probability be very small, and Fischer finds them also very difficult to stain (wenig tinctionsfiihig). Both these properties are exhibited by the granules in question. It is possible, therefore, that some of the small non-stained granules occurring with the albumose, or after albumose may be expected to have been formed, are true peptone. Granting this, however, we should still have to account for a, the appearance of the granules of this description in the starving cells, and b, the origin of many granules found in the living cells and in the fixed material imme- diately about the nucleus. The ferment hypothesis is still necessary to account for both these facts. The attention of the reader will have been arrested by the densely staining mass represented in figs. 6 (text) and 8, Plate XVI, lying on the luminal side of the nucleus and extending toward the lumen. It will be seen to cou.sist of densely staining strands (fig. 8), matted Hoppe-Seyler (35) found ihe action of the "liver" ferment of the cray- fish Astacus fludiatilis to be pancreatic and not pei)tic, although the reaction was sliglitly acid. Krukeiiburg (26) has sh»)wn the same to be true also of several Brachyura. Fuially, the general adoption of the name hepatopancreas for the digestive gland of the Arthropoda was in recognition of the pancreatic nature of its secretion. 322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, together and enclosing some albumose granules. In fig. 6 it con- sists, for the most part, of a homogeneous deeply staining mass enclosing a few granules. For a time I regarded these masses as the food, and the strands stretching toward the lumen as direct eWdence that substances were being taken up by the nucleus. In such cases as that shown in fig. 8, Plate XVI, which are numerous with various fixations, there seemed to be good reason for thinking that the substance of this mass is passing into or from a granular form, under the influence of the nucleus. Where, as in this cell, the nucleus lies far out in the coelomic end, the mass seemed to be crowding it in that direction. A number of considerations have led me to abandon this view. In the fii'st place, it Avas evident from Fischer's results that the food, when it enters the cell, ought to ajjpeai", according to Neumeister's scheme, in the form of granules, not as a heterogeneous mass; secondly, when the origin of the fine granules was traced to the nucleus, another constituent of the mass was accounted for ; thirdly, when the alveolar structure was made out with certainty, the homogeneous constituent was seen to be interalveolar in position. In such cases as fig. 6, where the alveoles are particularly distinct, the strands are not to be distinguished from the fibres except by their extent. Not until the injection experiments, mentioned on p. 300, were tried was it possible to account for the position of the mass with reference lo the nucleus. Fig. 8, Plate XVI, is from an in- testine killed in the ordinary way by penetration from the coelomic side ; fig. 7, A, is from one which was injected with the killing fluid. Since we know that the interalveolar substance, lo which all of the constituents of this mass belong, is free to move about in the cell, it is clear that the position of the mass is referable to the purely mechanical effects of penetration of the killing fluid. The nucleus acts as an obstruction to the streaming set up by the fluid ; and in some cases a kind of eddy of the interalveolar substance is formed behind it. In other cases the mass projects beyond the nucleus; here it is possible that the interalveolar substances have been checked by reaching the limit of concentration allowed by the spaces, and have been ' ' fixed ' ' in that position. Only by some such supposition can I explain the remarkably straight edge pre- sented by the mass on the side from which it came (figs. 6 and 8, Plate XVI). Still a further evidence that the mass is wholly artifact 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 323 is that it occurs with clearness only in the elongated cells, whose free ends are unprotected by a layer of muscle. We mast conclude, therefore, that what in the fii-st instance appeared to be so clear a case of cellular individuality in absorption, turns out to be only an artificial massing together of several of the cell constituents. To return to the albumose, we have seen that it accumulates on the coelomic side of the cell. It may be in contact with the base- ment membrane, and practically fill the whole cffilomic end. The next subject to consider is its fate. It has long been known for mammals that neither albumose nor peptone occurs in the circu- lation ; in other words, the peptone is changed back to proteid before it reaches the blood stream. We might expect that such would be the case here also. The morphological support for this view is positive, so far as it goes. In extracting and fixing intestines some of the coelomic fluid is invariably found precipitated on the outer surface ; and in studying whole intestines, I have had occasion to precipitate large quantities of the coelomic fluid on the slide: in no case have I seen albumose granules in the coagulum. In several intestines the coelomic end of the median cells Avas filled with a precipitate which might be described as mottled in appear- ance. There were no definite granules (Table I, Nos. 31 and 45), nor could the formation be described as a coagulum. Inasmuch as both these cases occur a considerable time after feeding, forty-two and one hundred and twenty hours respectively, we may suppose that the stage of the food represented is beyond albumose. Whether, however, the mottled precipitate is an imperfect granule formation, and this, instead of the small non- staining granules, represents the true peptone, or represents an intermediate stage in the inverse process toward albumen, I cannot say. In either case we would have good evidence that the food undei'goes some change inside the cell. The intracellular ferment or ferments (for the zymogen gran- ules may be of a complex nature) may be concerned in this change, in which case its association with albumose granules would l)e ex- plained. VI. Function of the Typhlosole, We may pi'operly discuss here the function of the infolded groove of cells which has been spoken of as typhlosole. The first mention of this structure which I have found in the literature is by Brand and Ratzeburg (28), where it is spoken of as a " furche "in which 324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, the anterior part of the heart lies. Lereboullet {loc. cit) described it as well as could be expected with the raagiiifyiug powers at his command, and recognized that it must be of some considerable sig- nificance in the function of the intestine. He says: "On ne saurait admettre que les rigoles soient destinees a augmenter I'ampleur de 1' intestine; leur etroiteness et leur etendue limitee sembleut eontraires a cette opinion. Je ne crois pas qu'on puisse les regarder corame des organes particuliers de secretion ou d' ab- sorption " (loe. cit, p. 91). * ' Le seul usage probable de ces rigoles nie parait etre de recevoir une portion de la bile pour la couduire dans It; milieu de 1' intestine, afin que ce liquide se trouve repartir d'une maniere plus uniforme dans toute 1' etendue du ventricule chylifique. En effet quoique les rigoles ne se continuent pas directment avec les deux embouchures des utricules biliaires cependant ou comprend que dans les mouve- ments de contraction de I'estomac, une partie de la bile puisse s'^couler par ces canaux. On remarquera d'ailleurs que le ventri- cule chylifique est presque toujours entiferement rempli d' aliments, en sorte que la bile peut eprouver de la difficulte a se parter jusqu' a I'extremite de ce long boyau " (p. 92). Ide says: "Nous n'avons recueille aucune donnee positive au sujet de la fouction de la baude dorsale. On peut dire sans heresie que cette productiou augmente la surface d' absorption de I'iutestiue; nous avons constate en effet, que les aliments au moins la partie la mieux trituree penetrant dans les deux raiuures qui longent la band" (loc. cit, p. 189). Conklin was the first, so far as I am aware, to apply the term typhlosole to this structure. By analogy with other invertebrate intestines, this name implies that the function of it is to increase the absorbing surface. Schonichen finally ascribes to the structure a possible secretory or excretory function, and supports this view by the fact that the dorsal blood-vessel breaks up into a plexus at the place where the ' ' Riunen-apparat ' ' ends. The observations with reference to the function of the typhlosole made in the course of this study are as follows : in the first place, the cells of the typhlosole are looser in structure than the other cells of the intestine (see p. 297). On this account they are very pro- foundly affected by the killing fluid. When artifacts do not occur in any other part of the intestine, it is a common thing to find the 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325 typhlosole greatly ruptured (figs. 4, B, and Plate XVI, fig. 9). As will be seen from the same figures, the killing fluids act most power- fully on the inturued cells, just where the two streams of fluid, sep- arated by the descending strip of muscle, are somewhat concentrated in their action. Often with sublimate- acetic and other very powerful reagents the upturned cells present horizontal " streams" of coagu- lated substance, which seems to indicate a movement of the cell con- tents toward the outside groove. I mention these artifacts because I was led by them at first to ascribe a special absorbing function to these cells. - Fig. 9, Plate XVI, represents albumose granules fixed in tlie course of passing through the cells of the typhlosole. We have then direct evidence that these cells share the functions of the othei*s in the anterior end of the intestine, and confirmation of the view, expressed explicitly by Ide and implicitly by Conklin, that the infolding is for the purpose of increasing the absorbing surface. The quantity of both kinds of granules, however, is small as compared with that found in other cells. Tliis may be due to the fact that in artificially fed animals the intestine was not gorged to the same degree of full- ness which is common in the natural conditions. On the other hand, the fact that liquid food or secretion, or both, are often foimd in the grooves of the typhlosole in such intestines would indicate that these are not so highy specialized in these functions as the others, and Avoukl lend weight to the view expressed by Lere- bouUet that the furrows provide a means for the more ready passage of the secretion to the middle of the intestine, insuring thereby a more uniform mixture of the food and secretion. The direct evi- dence (exhibited in Table I) that the secretion is being poured into the intestine as long as forty-eight hours after feeding, and the facts, further: that under natural conditions the anterior end is often clogged up with bits of dry food ; that in a freshly dissected animal whose intestine is full, the inner grooves are seen to stand up above the surface of the remainder of the intestinal wall, as if filled with something — plainly not solid food; that the character of the food, consisting as it does of substances often very difficult of penetration by the digestive fluids, requires the most thorough distribution of the secretion (which could scarcely be insured at the time of entering the intestine) ; and, finally, that the form of the typhlosole, narrow in front and widening behind, so that the grooves may permit the 326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, escape of the fluid secretion all along the line, and must do so at the extreme posterior end (figs. 3, 4), is such as the distribution of the secretion would require — all these considerations seem to the writer to constitute a strong chain of evidence that Lereboullet' s view^ is the correct one, namely, that it is the primary purpose of this structure to distribute the secretion. That it did not develop on the ventral side in direct connection with the opening of the glands, in- stead of on the dorsal side, is remarkable. Certainly, this would seem to be the more natural position for a structure concerned in the distribution of a secretion which enters on the ventral side; because it would be the more certain of finding its way into the channels if they occurred on this side. ' ' Nevertheless, ' ' as Lere- boullet says, " one can understand that in the movements of con- traction of the stomach a part of the secretion (bile) may flow by these canals." VII. Absorption of Carbohydrates. Tliis class of food substances is not at all favorable for a study of absorption by morphological methods. It is evident that none of the reagents ordinarily employed as fixatives act on carbohydrates in solution so as to render them visible to the microscope. A word on the digestion of starches, however, may not be without interest in this connection. Huet has found that the salivary glands (which Ide calls cutaneous glands) of Ligia produce diastase, and it is evidently to the secretion of this organ rather than to that of the hepatopancreas that he would ascribe the diastatic action in the intestine.^® No effort has been made to confirm either Huet's or Ide's conception of the nature of the glands in question. It seems unlikely that a gland so small could have much to do with the action which we have now to describe. Starved animals were fed on various kinds of starch, — cold-boiled potato, corn starch, dry bread, etc. The former proved to be espe- cially palatable for some very large specimens of Onisetis which happened to be on hand at the time. They were allowed to eat freely of it for half an hour, in which time the intestine was com- pletely filled. Twenty-four hours after they were killed, and the whole intestine subjected to Moore's test for sugar. Splendid *' Since he found the diasUxtic action of the "liver" secretion of Ligia only slight. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF nilLADELPHIA. 327 reactions for dextrose were obtained in a number of cases. Inas- much as an effort was being made at the time to locate the dextrose in the cells, the other ordinary tests which require an alkali and heat were of necessity excluded. However, the reaction was con- trolled by trying intestines from animals known not to have eaten starch; and no indication of dextrose was obtained. Intestines were tested again fifty hours after feeding; and good indications were obtained. Intestines like the above were tested also with iodine both twenty- four and fifty hours after feeding. In several cases the median arched cells gave a ' ' port-wine ' ' color at their free ends, indicative of either dextrine or glycogen, with the presumption in favor of glycogen. VIII. Absorption of Fats. In studying the absorption of fats the same feeding methods have been followed as for the absorption of proteids. Animals were isolated and starved from four to ten days, then fed with butter, Fig. 15.— Section involviug parts of two cells X 600 from anterior por- tion, "mid-gut " of PorcelUo scaber, fed with butter, and fixed after 8 hrs. in 1 per cent. Platmic chloride 15 pts., 1 per cent. Osmic acid 4 pts. All black granules outside the nucleus are fat. F.gl, fat globule encased by spherical film ; Mus., muscle, circular layer inside, longitudinal fibres^outside ; Nuc, nucleus. beef suet or olive oil (the latter mixed with boiled potato, to enable the annual to grasp the food with the maudibles), all of which gave 328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^^ay, good results. As might be expected from the habits of land isopods, not all of the fat taken from a pure diet of this kind in the course of ten minutes' continuous feeding is absorbed. Pellets of waste containing a large proportion of fat were found forty-eight and seventy-five hours after feeding. But enough of the fat is absorbed, as may be seen from the figures, both to demonstrate the fat-digesi ing power of the hepatopancreas ferment and to follow the fat tlirough the absorbing cells. Animals live indefinitely after eating the above-mentioned foods, and liave been seen to eat the same repeatedly. The digestion of pure fat, like that of pure proteids, is rather slow as compared with the action in mammals. At eight hours after feeding fatty globules may be seen in the epithelium of fresh intes- tines without the agency of stains. Fig. 15 shows an anterior intes- '..•®; Fig. IG. — Section involvino- parts of two cells X GOO from intermediate portion, "mid-gut" oi Porccllio spmicornis, fed witli butter: intestine lixed after 12 lirs. as in fig. 15. All black granules outside the nucleus are fat. Int., intima ; Pal, palisade. tinal cell from an animal fed with butter for fifteen minutes, the intestine fixed after eight hours in Hermann's fluid Avithout acetic acid. The sections were stained in iron-hsematoxyliu. The size of the globules varies greatly, the larger ones being doubt- less due to the fusion of several small ones. It will be seen also that no large globules are found near the free luminal edge of the cell, but that in general there is an increase in size Avith tlie distance from this edge. Tliis is typical of the appearance presented by all absorbing cells at an early stage in the absorption. Later, as is shown in fig. Ifi (12 hrs. ), there is not so much difference in size. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329 From twelve hours after feeding onward, just as in the proteid absorption, the food is usually aggregated mainly on the coelomic side of the cell (figs. 17, 16 hrs. ; 19, 115 hrs. ), although as in figs. 18 (50 hrs.) and 10, Plate XVI, (24 hrs.) it matj be still widely Fig. 17.— Section of cell X 600 from median portion, "mid-gut" of PorcelUo scaier, fed with butter ; ibtestine fixed after 16 hrs. as in fig. 15. All black granules outside the nucleus are fat. Nucl., nucleolus : the chromatin is precipitated in short radiating strands immediately about its periphery. scattered through the cell at a much later period. The difference here is due in part to the different kinds of fat used — butter in figs. 15, 16 and 17, beef suet in 19 and olive oil in 10, Plate XVI — and in part to the difference in form of the cells in anterior (15), in- termediate (16) and median (18) portions of the " mid-gut."^' Just as in the absorption of proleids, the passage of food through the median cell is facilitated by the relatively easy exit from the cell into the coelome, while from the anterior cells the passage is hin- dered by the investing muscle layer. Consequently at any given time after the digested product has reached all the cells, the median 1" The position of the fat in the cell is not affected by the direction of penetration of the killing fluid, as nmy be seen from the fact tliat fig. 18 is from an intestine injected from the posterior end with Hermann's fluid. There has been no movement of the fat on account of penetration from witliin. 330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF P^ay, cells show a more advanced stage of absorption. Here also the amount of food found at any given time in any particular cell is dependent on the accidents of position, of form and of digestive action iu the lumen. The relation of the fat globules to the cytoplasmic structure is again interalveolar (figs. 18 and 19, A). In both these figures T :.--.J^l Fig. 18. — Section of cell X 600 from median portion, "mid-gut" of Porcellio scaber, fed with butter ; intestine fixed after 50 hrs. in Her- mann's Huid by injection from the posterior end. Nucleus is imper- fectly fixed, and cytoplasm is slightly diagrammatic. Fat globules seldom inside alveoles. Pal., palisade ; intima torn ott". fat globules appear to have penetrated the nucleus. This appear- ance is due in the former to imperfect fixation, the chromatin not being all precipitated (see section on structure of the nucleus) ; in the latter the globules are in reality above, i. e., at a higher focus than the nucleus. No fat granules are ever found in the nucleus. This last statement may fairly raise the question of the identifica- tion of fat globules. In sections from intestines treated with osmic acid and stained in iron-hsematoxylin (fig. 18) how, it may be asked, are blackened fat globules to be distinguished from stained chromatin granules ? Or, more broadly considered, can the fat be distinguished at all by color reactions ? This question is important 1902.J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 331 because upou its answer depends, largely, the physiological inter- pretation of the facts here presented. In the first place, it should be said that the choice of iron- hsematoxylin stain for the study of fat absorption was for the sake of very decided advantages from the morphological standpoint. The demonstration of the alveolar structure of the cytoplasm, for example, is much more satisfactory with this stain than with any other I have used. Fat globules may be quite clearly distinguished from other granules, black after osmic acid and iron-hsematoxy- lin, by merely destaining to a considerable degree with the 1 per cent, iron-alum solution. Blackened deeply by osmic acid, they retain their color after other granules blackened only by the stain Fig. 19.— Sections of two cells X 600 from median portion, "mid- gut" oi Porcellio scaber, fed with beef suet ; intestine fixed after 115 his. in Flemraing's fluid. Bl.cg., blood coagulum ; Bm., basement mem- brane ; Leuc, leucocytes containing fat. All black globules outside the nucleus are fat. lose the color. This is the case in fig. 18 ; the black color in the fat granules is due solely to the osmic reaction. Secondly, with acid fuchsine stain it is an easy matter to dis- tinguish granules from fat globules. In fig. 10, Plate XVI, they are shown retaining the osmic color, while all the other cell parts are red. The nuclei which are not shown in these two cells were also red. Figs. 17 and 19 likewise are from sections stained in acid fuchsine ; the fat globules were all black, the nuclei red. It has been seen (p. 315) that albuniose granules take the acid fuchsine in aniline water even after an osmic fixation. It is consequently easy also to distinguish the fat globules from albumose granules. The food was pure fat or fat and carbohydrates mainly, and sec- tions treated in the same manner as those in which albuniose was 332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, demonstrated by this stain (namely, two to three minutes in a 7-15 per cent, sokition in aniline water) always exhibit the blackened granules only. In fig. 10, Plate XVI, some small red granules are seen near the free edge of the cell ; these may be due to the small amount of proteid in the boiled potato with which the olive oil was mixed, or may represent small globules composed in part only of fat. Thirdly, the final test of fats is always the action of fat solvent — ether, xylol, benzole, etc. After most fixations, as is well known, fat is easily dissolved out by prolonged immersion in xylol or ether. Thus the intestine from an animal known to have eaten only fat after a starvation of one week was fixed after twenty-one hours, first in 1 per cent, platinic chloride, washed in water and carried through the alcohols in the usual way to harden. Instead of im- bedding at once, it was subjected to the solvent action of xylol for forty-eight hours. On sectioning and staining in acid-fuchsine no blackened globules were found in any of the cells. But after osmic acid fixations the authorities are not agreed as to the solubility of fats in the ordinary solvents. Heidenhain (29) argued that certain black granides in the absorbing cells of mam- malian villi and in the lymph corpuscles were not fat l)ecause they did not dissolve in xylol and ether, and on this fact he based cer- tain far-reaching conclusions. Altmann (30), however, and Moore in Schafer's Text-book of Physiology (Vol. I, p. 458, note 5), state that prolonged treatment with osmic acid tends to render fat in- soluble. This I can confirm from the following experiment con- cerning fat globules in cells : Intestines from animals which ate butter for eight minutes after a starvation of one week, fixed in Hermann's fluid without acetic acid after sixteen hours and treated with xylol, exhibit abundant blackened granules. In one case (fig. 18) the intestine was fixed in Hermann's fluid, and after the sections were moimted one of the slides of the series was sketched with the camera while in oil of cedar in preparation for balsam. The position of every globule in the cell was noted. It was then placed in ether over night (fifteen houi-s) and was again examined in oil of cedar. No change in the globules had taken place. The slide was then placed in benzole for four or five hours and again carefully examined ; no globules had dissolved, although the color had faded noticeably. There is no possibility of confusion with albumose granules in this case, as the animal was carefully isolated for nine days before feeding and was then allowed to eat onlv butter for ten minutes. It was killed and 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 338 the intestine was fixed after fifty houi-s, when many globules are still to be seen in other slides of the series. The first experiment mentioned above furnishes additional proof that the globules found in the cells are fat. Since there can be no question about the identity of the globules in the second experiment, it shows that osmium-fixed fat globules are practically insoluble in ordiuary fat solvents. This is not true of fat outside the cells — that is, while still in the lumen. Sections of intestine of an animal fed for twenty minutes on butter and fixed after seventy-five hours in Flemming's fluid with- out acetic acid, were mounted and stained in acid-fuchsine in the usual way. Instead of mounting in thick balsam, a large amount of oil and a little balsam wei'e placed on the section. The next day the fat, densely blackened and enclosed by the epithelial wall, was seen to be diffusing out, and in a week it was entirely dis- solved by the excess of cedar oil. The cells of the epithelium, however, still contained abundant globules blackened by the osmic acid. That the globules last mentioned did not dissolve may be ex- plained by supposing the fat inside the cell to be mixed with some coagulable substance. Butter spread on a cover-glass and treated with Herman u's fluid for fifteen hours, then with ether (after dehydration), leaves a coagulated residue which retains its black color for more than two days in the solvent. Again, in teasing out in Hermann's fluid an intestine whicli had been filled with olive oil, it was observed tliat the oil, mixed with the secretion of the hepatopancreas, on escaping in the form of globules, took a brownish color at the jieriphery and the densely black color within. The brown color may have been due to fatty acid or to a film of the coagulated secretion. Finally, as Altmann has observed, decomposition products or other diluting substances are probably responsible for the different degrees of intensity with which the osmium-blackening occurs or remains after treatment with solution agents (loc. dt, p. 98). It is scarcely possible to suppo.se that the globules of fat inside the cell are wholly unmixed with the albuminous fluid contents of the cell, or with the immediate products of digestion. The whole evidence for fat in the cells may be summarized as follows: (a) Oily globules are seen in the cells of fresh intestines from animals fed with fat; (6) these globules are dissolved by xvlol after fixation in PtCl^ (and certain other reagents — HgClj, 334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, chromic acid, etc.); (c) they slain densely black after all osmic fixations; (d) they retain this color after staining with acid -fuchsine in aniline water, and are thus distinguished from albumose gran- ules; (e) they retain the black color after iron-hjematoxylin and deslaining with iron-alum, and are tha? distinguished from chroma- tin granules, so that the granules inside the nucleus, which phj^sically very much resemble the blackened granules in such preparations, are never oily in nature — in other words, the fat does not penetrate into the nucleus in appreciable quantities; (/) the insolubility of these granules in xylol and ether cannot be taken as an indication that they are not composed in part at least of fat, for, as Altmann observes, the solubility depends on the purity of the fat. Finally, the insolubility of globules in such cases may be due to admixture with some albuminous fluid which precipitates in the formation of the globule and constitutes its insoluble portion. Granting now that the globules found in the absorbing cells after feeding with pure fats are really fatty in nature, it may be inquired how they came there, whether they are absorbed as such or whether they were synthesized from chemical products of digestion. In short, for which theory of fat absorption — the emulsion or the solu- tion theory — do the facts speak ? Without going into a history of this controverted question here, it may be pointed out, by way of introduction to the interpretation of what follows, that the morpho- logical evidence is scarcely crucial evidence in point. For, on the one hand, it is claimed by the adherents of the solution theory that if fat globules are not demonstrable in the luminal border of the cell, but only after a portion of the cell has been traversed, then fat did not enter the cell as such, but has been synthesized some- where in its course since entering. The emulsionists, on the other hand, say it is just as reasonable to suppose that the emulsion parti- cles are so small that at the time they enter the cell they cannot be seen with the highest powers of the microscope, and become visible only when a number of them have fused together, as they plainly do. The isopod, because of its small size, is not favorable for a chemical study of digestion. Consequently I have not attempted to supplement the morphological study by that means. Nevertheless, it seems worth while pointing out that the appearance here pre- sented is all that is required by the solution ists for morphologica 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335 support to their view ; while it is difficult to reconcile it with the emulsion view. Pfluger (31) has used Heidenhain's figures to show that fat does not appear in the striated border of mammalian epithelial cells, and he declares, quoting Funke (32) and Will (33), that it has never been so demonstrated except by Kolliker (34), who, as Pfluger says, wanted to see fat particles to substantiate his theory that the striae are pores. My own observations on this point in the isopods were begun with the purpose, primarily, of demonstrating the pores in the chitinous lining (see p. 310). It was hoped that if fat is absorbed in the form of emulsion, it would blacken densely in the intima after osmic acid. Consequently particular attention has been given to this point. About twenty-five intestinef^ from ani- mals in all stages of digestion, from four hours to 145 hours after feeding, have been sectioned and each one examined carefully with this point in view. In no case have I seen a single cell whose intima contained demonstrable fat globules. (Note that in fig. 10, Plate XVI, the intima is stained with acid-fuchsine. ) It has been previously mentioned that the globules on the luminal side of the cell are always small in size, while they increase gradually farther up the cell. This is manifestly what is required by the solution theory, as has been recognized by Funke, Will, Altmanu, Krehl (35), Pfluger and others. If fat enters the cell in the form of fatty acid and glycerine, or soap and glycerine, and these are then synthesized into neutral fats under the influence of the cell, the neutral fat would naturally appear first in small globules at the luminal edge, and these would increase in size or in number, or both, the more the products of digestion Avere brought under the synthesizing action. It cannot be denied, as urged by Heidenhain and others, that if fat did enter the cell in the form of a fine emulsion, and were then to fuse into larger globules, the same appearance might be presented; but there is no assignable reason then why larger globules are not formed in the membrane (intima of isopods) or on the luminal side of the cell. In line with Will's results, it may be remarked further that beef suet does not melt at the temperature of the isopod body (about 25° C. ), and cannot therefore be emul- sified. Hence the globules in fig. 19 must result from synthesis. On the question of what effects the revei*se action — the synthesis of the products of digestion into neutral fats — I can do little more than conjecture with others. Until recently no attempt has been 336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, made to seek out this agency further than to ascribe it to the epithelial cells (see Moore's review of the subject in Schiifer's Text-hook of Physiology, Vol. I, p. 452). Recently, however, Kastle and Loeveuhart (36) have shown that the ferment lipase extracted from the pancreas of the hog has the power of bringing about the synthesis of ethel-butyrate from ethyl- alcohol and butyric acid — a reaction evidently equivalent to the symthesis of palmatin or stearin from glycerine and palmitic acid or stearic acid. In considering the fate of albumose in digestion of proteids (see p. 317), I have ventured to ascribe a ferment nature to certain gran- ules derived from the nucleus. It may be conjectured that some of these granules represent a ferment which has a fat-synthesizing action. Prof. ^Nloore, in Schiifer's Text-book (Vol. I, p. 457), says it is agreed by all authors that " fat passes from the epithelium .... in the form of an emulsion," and my acquaintance with the litera- ture confirms this statement. I have found nowhere any intimation that the fat does not pass out of the cells as such. Even Levin (37), who maintains that the water-soluble products of fat digestion in the dog are taken up liy the lymph cells only, and are by them conveyed directly to the lacteals, while the epithelial cells are stimulated by the bile and pancreatic juice to take up the fat itself, leaves the infer- ence that the fat reaches the lacteal in the form of an emulsion. The evidence for this very general opinion is plainly that fat is always found in the form of globules on the way from cell to lacteal, either in the parenchyma cells of the villus or in the lymph cells. Hei- denhain, Schiifer (38), Levin and many others have figured fat in transit in this form, and the very name of the vessel which receives the fat is witness to the multitudinous observations that the fat reaches it in the form of tiny globules or an emulsion. Does it, however, follow that because the fat reaches the lacteal as an emulsion or is found on its way thereto in this form, that it therefore leaves the cell as such ? Does not the very physiological reason for the spliuing of fats into fafty acids and gh'cerine pre- clude the possibiliiy of its passage through the basement membrane, uuicfS we assume with Briicke (31)) that there are discrete channels for the passage of the food to the lacteal ? If it is true, as ]\Ioore inti- mates, that fat leaves the cell as such, then it ought to be preserved 1902,] NATUEAL SCIENCES OF THILADELPHIA. 337 in the basement membrane by the osmic reagents. I have exam- ined carefully all my preparations with the hope of finding some such evidence, but have not found a single cell in an intestine known to have contained fat which presented the expected appear- ance. In one or two cases where the animal was fed with raw beef, in which there may have been a slight trace of fat, the basement membrane was found filled with small granules which blackened densely with osmic fixations ; but as judged by the number of glob- ules in the cells after a full meal of fat, there were entirely too many of these for the small quantity of fat which it is possible to suppose may have been contained in the beef, since particular care was being exercised at the time to feed with lean meat free from fat. Moreover, the cells presented coinci dentally with these glob- ules fragmented nuclei, — probably a sign of degeneration (see p. 294). It is significant that while I was confidently expecting to find fat globules in the basement membrane, none of the drawings made at that time and reproduced here shows blackened globules even in contact with the membrane, while some of them (fig. 18) show a gradation in size downward from the region of the nucleus to the basement membrane. At this time — sixteen hours after feeding — fat was passing through the membrane, probably in small quantity only, but in fig. 19, ^ and B, both from the same intestine, 115 hours after feeding, it must have been passing in considerable quan- tity. In B of the last figure, fat globules are seen lying against the membrane on the outside of the cell ; but here, it must be said, the blood was precipitated on the intestine by removing the dorsum and fixing the intestine in situ. Only in such cases have I found fat globules immediately against the membrane in the coagulum outside the cell. This coagulum is often found in this position even on intestines fixed after removal from the body. The morphologi- cal evidence, therefore, is against the passage of fat through the membrane as fat The conclusion must be that it is again split up in the cell and resynthesized in the ccelomic fluid. ^^ The same figure shows several leucocytes containing fat globules. Their position along the membrane cannot, of course, be taken 10 indicate a special agency in removing the fat from the cell, for 1® Sliortly after reaching this conclusioD I received Loevenhart's (40) paper, setting forth the same view from very diU'ereut considerations. 23 338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, they are plainly subject to the physical action of the fixing fluid. The fat globules are inside the cells, however, and this must be accepted as evidence of their ability either to appropriate fal in their o^vn metabolism, or to transport it in the metabolism of the body. I have seen nothing which would enable one to decide whether this action is anabolic or katabolic. IX. Secretion in the Hepatopancreas. Weber (41), who first accurately described the hepatopancreas, re- cognized in its walls four distinct layers : The serous membrane outer- most, the muscular between this and the basement membrane, and finally the epithelial layer. While it is the last named only with f ran \ '^^s; .^ym'g Fig. 20. — Section of a single tube of the hepatopancreas of PorcelUo scaber X 120, showing discharge of secretion hj fragmentation and hy rupture of the cell membrane. Frag., fragments of cell passing into the huuen ; Mzym., mature zymogen passing into the lumen by rupture of the cell membrane ; Y.zym., zymogen in a young secreting cell ; Zyvi'g., ZN'mogenesis in a young cell ; Nuc, nucleus of a mature cell. which we are specially concerned here, it may be mentioned in pass- ing that Weber's explanation of the form of the tubes by the arrangement of the muscles is important as bearing on the dis- charge of the secretion into the intestine (fig. 1). He shows in his figure that the spiral twist which the tube appears to have 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339 undergone is due to the collection of muscle fibres into a more or less distinct band which takes a spiral course. INIauifestly the peris- taltic wave, beginning at the distal end and proceeding with greatest vigor along this band, will be more effective for producing a uni- form and constant motion of the fluid contents than would the successive contractions of many separate bands. The epithelium in the average physiological condition is com- posed, morphologically speaking, of two kinds of cells, namely, tall conical cells which project well into the lumen (often, indeed, Fig. '21. — Section of single tube of the liepatopancreas of Porcellio scaher X 120, showing discharge of secretion bj'^ fragmentation of the cells. The cell a is represented with higher magnification in fig. 22. almost meeting each other so as to obliterate the lumen) and, between these, lower cells which project less — often not at all (fig. 20). At both extreme ends of the tube the two forms of cells merge into one another and thereby constitute a uniform epithelium which, at the distal end, terminates in a proliferating mass of indifferent cells, and, at the proximal, passes over into the epithelium lining the grinding stomach. The cells of the hepato- pancreas reveal a ground structure in .some points like that of the 340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, intestiual cells. Examined fresh, large oily-looking globules are always to be found iu the projecting cells, which, after most fixa- tions, are represented by mere vacuoles. These increase in size from the base toward the apex, and often quite completely occupy the apical end, displacing the ground structure itself (fig. 22). Between the vacuoles, in well fixed cells, are to be seen small alve- oles which, if the vacuoles be large and close together, are more or less distorted by the pressure. Between the alveoles and covering them, often so densely as to obscure them, are tiny granules repre- senting interalveolar substance and alveolar contents. After some Fit?. 22.— Cell a of fig 21 X 600. Escape of the secretion by rupture of tlie membrane at the free end of the cell. Vac, vacuoles from which the globules of zymogen have been dissolved by the fixing fluid and other reagents ; Zym., zymogen granules disintegrating. fixations, notably those containing sublimate, the cells appear to have a coarse fibrillar structure ; but as this is not to be seen either in the fresh cell or after Hermann's, Flemming's, or Hermann's without acetic, it has been regarded here as an artifact similar to that produced in the intestinal cells. ^' liver " cell of the He does not, how- ever, figure this ior Oniscus'murarius, on which he used osmic acid. •'■•Frenzel (46) sees a fibrillar structure in the marine isopods, relying on picro-sulphuric fixation 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341 Each secreting cell has one or two, rarely three, nuclei. When there are two, which is by far the most common number, they are most often abreast of each other, at the same height from the base and at equal distances from the lateral walls (fig. 23). The form Fig. 23. — Section of a mature cell, X 600, of the liepatopancreas of Oniscus asellus, only moderately filled with zymogen. The gradation iu size of the granules from base to apex of the cell i* well seen here. Fixation, Flemming's fluid. Observe a space about each of the larger globules. Compare fig. 15. of the nuclei in the fresh condition is ellipsoidal or spherical. After several fixations it may present processes of various size and extent, but these again are to be ascribed to the unilateral penetra- tion of the fluids (p. 305).=" 2"Prenant (42) has mentioned such processes toward the base of the cell as occurring after Flemming's fixation, and has interpreted them as analogous to those which were described by Conkliu in the intestinal cells; also to those described by Korschelt for the nuclei of silk glands of the Lepidoptera and of the egg cells of Dytiscus. The fact that tlie pro- cesses are turned toward the source of nourishment and opposite the direction of penetration lends some probability to Prenant's view, whereas, in line with the results obtained by injection into the lumen of the intestine, one would expect the processes in this case to extend toward the lumen if caused artificially. In the absence of positive evi- dence from the experiment of injecting into the lumen of the liepatopan- creas, which is very difficult on account of the small size of the tubes, it might be urged further in explanation of Prenant's observation, first, that Flemming's fluid is known to cause processes in the nuclei of the intestinal cells ; secondly, that occasionally in these cells processes are 342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, The constituent which gives chai-acter to the cells under considera- tion is the zymogen (figs. 20-23). In the fresh condition it is always seen as a dense mass of spherical yellowish granules sur- ?-ounding the nuclei of the smaller cells. They are but rarely seen in the tall cells, the most obvious constituent of these being, as we have observed above, the oily-looking globules. On this account Weber called the smaller the " ferment cells," as opposed to the larger or "liver cells." Rosenstadt (44) for Asellus, Giard and Bonnier (45) for the parasitic Isopods and Frenzel (46) for the marine forms, as well as for Oniscus murarnts, do not admit this distinction made by Weber. Claus says they are only extremes of the same kinds of cells, in no way to be distinguished. Frenzel regards the smaller as young cells and the larger merely as a later or older phase. He concludes, therefore, that the isopods are to be classed with the Phronimidse, in that they produce both ferment and fat in the same cell, as over against the decapods, the Gammarida9 and Caprellidse, which produced these in separate cells. Ide is in- clined to adopt the view of Weber. My results confirm Frenzel, as will appear in the following discussion. The behavior of the zymogen granules with reference to reagents is as follows. As was observed by Huet, they are speedily dissolved out by both water and alcohol. Reference to Table I, v/here are brought together data from a long series of different physiological conditions, shows that they are not preserved by alcohol (Nos. 24, 36, 38), only partially by picro-acetic (29, 43), and sometimes not by sublimate (28, 31), nor by sublimate-acetic (3, 9, 11, 13, 22, 41, 42, 44), nor formo-alcohol (32). They are always preserved by Flemming's, Hermann's and Hermann's without aectic (also osmic-acetic and osmium-bichromate, Altmann's). It will be seen also from the table that they are sometimes preserved in the small cells and not in the large ones (Nos. 11, 13, etc.), sometimes again in both kinds of cells, where they appear precisely alike (Nos. 15, 18, 26, etc.). With the osmic fixations, particularly the platinic-chloride-osmic acid mixture, they behave a little differently in the two kinds of cells. The densely aggregated granules about the nuclei of the small cells come through the stains wholly un- seen extending opposite to the direction of penetration, while they are also occasionally seen in tiie cells of the hepatopancreas, extending to- ward the lumen after fixation ; thirdly, as was remarked in the begin- ning, nuclei in the fresh condition are regularly curvilinear. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343 affected, exhibiting a broAvn color, plainly the characteristic osmic color. Those in the base of the large cells, on the other hand, take the stains. Thus in Nos. 21, 25, etc., stained in irou-hsema- toxylin, they appear brown and black respectively, while in No. 35, stained in acid-fuchsiue, brown and red. After picro-formalin also (No. 16) those in the large cells stain red in Biondi-Heiden- hain, while those in the small cells remain unstained. In Nos. 1 and 2 there is a complete transition from one color to the other, some retaining no stain, others retaining only a light shade or only a peripheral ring of black, still others holding it densely. Moreover, the transition does not stop at granules of the same size ; among those in the large cells which hold the stain most tenaciously thei'e is a perfect gradation from small granules to large globular masses (fig. 20). The latter correspond to the contents of the vacuoles mentioned above (fig. 22). We have evidence, therefore, that the two kinds of cells are, as Frenzel holds, but the young and mature phases of the same kind. Our evidence goes a step farther. Frenzel found both zymogen granules and fat globules in the same cell, and from this concluded that all the cells produce both, the ferment during the early life and fat later. Now we have been able to trace a complete transition from the zymogen granules to the large globules, merely by securing a good fixation for all the cell constituents. The indication is, therefore, that we have to do not with two distinct products, but with different stages in the formation of a single product. Before going farther with the present discussion it will be neces- sary to present the changes which the cells undergo in secretion. Fig. 21 represents a cross-section of No. 10 (Table I) preserved twelve hours after feeding — this following a fast of eleven days. In this case the large globules are not preserved, only their vacuoles being seen. At the bottom of the cells are masses of zymogen granules, some of which are becoming less distinct in outline, others are represented merely by a dense mass of small granules. Fig. 20 (No. 20), sixteen hours, after a fast of twenty-one days, shows the large globules preserved. In the former case, as well as in the latter, the ends of some cells have broken down and are undergoing a process of disintegration. Sometimes the whole end of the cell is involved in this destruction, or the end may break up into large or small fragments, or finally break off as a whole, and the larger or smaller pieces are then found in the lumen as far down as the canal 344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, which leads to the intestine, where they may lodge for a time and temporarily block the passage. In other cases still the globules only seem to be set free ; while the small zxjmogen granules seldom come near the discharging end. The nuclei are not lost, nor is any part of the cytoplasm below them,-^ After complete discharge the cells diminish rapidly in height until they are quite flat. Even at this size they are easily to be distinguished from young cells, which may as yet be no taller than they, by the absence of small zymogen granules about the nucleus, by the shape of the globules or globular spaces, and by a thickening of the free edge (when this is not lost). The last two effects are caused by a retraction, as if the cells were elastic. When dis- charged the spaces occupied by many of the globules are obliterated, and a thickening or moving together at the free edge occurs, form- ing a layer which always stains densely (fig. 21) (this is the thick- ening just mentioned). Those globules Avhicli are not discharged suffer a change of form by compression, so that they are always laterally elongated. I have not so far been able to follow the fate of the discharging cells further than this, or to obtain further evi- dence that they are completely destroyed and replaced by new cells. It will be observed from the table that discharging cells may occur at any interval after a single meal up to 124 hours (No. 44), although there is a marked decrease in the number after forty- eight hours, and iu some cases hardly any are to be found at ninety hours (Nos. 40, 41, 42). In a single case (41) some of the young cells seem to be dis- charging a fluid substance ; but as the fixation is one which does not always preserve the zymogen, and it has not been confirmed by any perfectly trustworthy fixation, no account has been taken of it here. By whatever process the discharge takes place — fragmentation, dissolution, or mere evacuation — in every case there issues the fluid whose precipitate gives the characteristic coagulum. Fig. 20 shows some of the globules maintaining their identity for a time, but sooner or later dissolving. They are not the only source of the fluid, for, as in fig. 22, which contains a very abundant interalveolar substance, this as wtll as the alveoles of the cells contx'ibute to its formation. As we have already observed, small zymogen granules, ^' In one or two cases of excessive feeding, where tlie cells become enormously gorged with a substance which stains blue in Biondi-Hei- denhain, after Zenker and sublimate, tlie nuclei may be displaced and lost in broken-off fragments (Nos. 14 and 46, table). 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345 which are readily distinguished by color, do not contribute directly. Some of these appear to dissolve without being confined to a globule (as in the bottom of fig. 15), to be added to the interalveolar sub- stance which precipitates in the form of very fine granules. Close comparison of this with the precipitate fi'om the globules, as well as close scrutiny of the precipitate found in the lumen, fails to reveal any difference corresponding to granules and globules. It would be unwise to attempt, from the facts thus far reached, to show that there is no chemical difference between the various cell constituents which ultimately share in the formation of the secre- tion, or still more that no corresponding differences are retained throughout the existence of the secretion. There is every reason for thinking that the secretion is far fi-om simple in nature. So far as they bear on the occurrence of fat, however, the facts just re- hearsed seem to speak very positively. Both Weber and Frenzel base their assertion that the globvdes contain fat on the osmic reac- tion and on the action of fat solvents (ether). Nothing is here urged against the facts alleged by these authors. What seems fatal against concluding therefrom that the substance in question is pure fat is that, as we have seen, it is never represented in the coagulum of the secretion by globular spaces such as fat ought to leave, and such as it always does leave when dissolved after fixation. The globular masses which sometimes come out of the cell as such, and do exist in the fresh secretion as oily-looking drops, invariably, so far as my observation goes, precipitate as a dense coagulum, not to be distinguished from the remainder of the secretion. What then is the nature of the globules ? Aside from their oily appearance, nothing occurs in the literature reviewed which throws much light on their nature as they are to be seen in the fresh condition. Sufii- cient prominence has not been given either to the fact that in this condition they are to be seen in all sizes. They are usually much clearer looking than the zymogen granules, but even in this respect the limits are not sharp. Frenzel mentions the fact that the oil globules in lone, Gyge, Iclotea hedlca and Sphceroma have almost always a definite color, " namely, in the first three greenish-yellow (ivle das Secret), in the least one a brownish -yellow." The conclusion which appears very evident from the foregoing is this : zymogen granules are merely young stages of the large glob- ules or, conversely stated, the globules are but a matured state of the zymogen granules. The difference as to form, color, behavior 346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, toward fixing fluids and staining capacity is due to a differ- ence in purity. The granules, densely packed about the nuclei of the young cells, are in a nascent state, consisting of a pure ferment-forming substance. lu the larger cells — that is, as the young cells mature — the zymogen takes up falty substance from the cytoplasm, and this dilutes the ferment-forming body, at the same time rendering it more soluble in certain reagents and improving its capacity for certain stains. a. — Relation of Secretion to Feeding. The column of Table I headed " Secretion in lumen " exhibits the relation of the quantity of secretion in the lumen and its pas- sage into the intestine to the stages of absorption of proteids (raw meat) exhibited in the last columns. Owing to the method of removing from the animal tne intestine and hepatopancreas, by which their connection is often broken, the later datum was not in all cases to be had. It will be seen, however, that beginning with fresh condition — that is, animals taken quite at random from the natural habitat— and passing through the starved condition (No. 3) up to 124 hours after feeding, and to an animal kept a whole week on raw meat, there is almost always an ' ' abundance ' ' of the secre- tion in the lumen. In a few cases, as No. 3 (starved) and 42 (ninety-eight hours after feeding), the quantity in the proximal end of the tube is small. There is no very marked decline, although it might well be expected in the course of another day or two of fasting. The chemical reaction of the secretion, as determined by leasing the ' ' liver ' ' on litmus paper, is slightly alkaline for animals taken from the natural state. The staining affinity of the secretion seems to vary. Thus in 13 and 22, both of Oniscus, starved twenty-one days and killed sixteen and twenty hours respectively after eating in the same fluid and treated precisely alike (stained in Biondi- Heidenhain), in the one case the secretion takes the methyl green, in the other the plasma ssain and comes out red. A number of such intestines have been seen, and both colors have been seen in the same intestine. If the staining is a chemical reaction, and there seems to be no doubt of it in this case, we must conclude that the reaction of the secretion must vary from acid to alkaline (as deter- mined by Biondi-Heidenhain stain as an indicator). Not enough cases have been noted to establish any cycle of such change, or to relate it in any way with the quantity or kind of food. It is inter- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347 esting, iu this couuectiou, to note that Krukeuburg (26) has fouud a similar difference for Cavcinas mcenas. Huet has showu that the secretion of the hepatopancreas acts on the proteids (muscular fibre and albuminoids generally, white of egg, coagulated protoplasm of vegetable cells, etc.) iu Porcellio scaber and hcvis ; on starch very slightly in the case of lAgia ; while on fats he obtained only negative results (slightly emidsifies oil of olives). He concludes that the secretion is " not a true bile." It has been seen in the section on the absorption of proteid that albumose appears in the intestinal cells in eight hours (in one case it was detected in four hours) after feeding. No attempt has been made to establish ultra-minimum time for the appearance of dex- trose in the intestine after feeding with starch. The least time noted was twenty-four hours. There is good evidence that the ' ' liver ' ' secretion accomplishes the hydi-olisis of fat. We may conclude that the secretion of the hepatopancreas contains ferments which act on all classes of foods. X. Summary and Conclusions. 1. The apparatus concerned in the absorption of foods and the production of secretion iu the land isopods consists essentially of simple tubes, the intestine and hepatopancreas, bathed and separated by the blood. 2. That part of the intestinal wall concerned in absorption is a single-layered epithelium composed of very large cells. That part of the hepatopancreas concerned directly in the formation of secre- tion is a single-layered epithelium, composed of smaller, young cells and larger, maturing or matured cells. 3. The intestine in the freshly hatched individual, a simple tube, grows by amitosis, especially at the time of moulting, as well as by enlargement of the cells. In tlie mid-dorsal line of the an- terior portion a folding of the wall occurs later, giving rise to a structure which we have called, after Couklin, the typhlosole. The typhlosole arises in Porcellio spinicornis by a primary evagination of the median six longitudinal rows of cells; there is then a sec- ondary invagination of the median two rows, which project into the lumeu and extend laterally by their free margin so as to cover the lateral inner grooves formed at the sides, thereby cutting off, except at the posterior end of the typhlosole, two channels, more or less completely separated from the remainder of the lumen. 348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [MaV, 4. The iutestiual epithelium is a syucytium, the cytoplasm being continuous from one cell to another. Intercellular fibres, together with furrows in the basement membrane and intima, serve to mark off the cells distinctly. 5. The cytoplasm of the intestinal cells is alveolar in structure. Between the alveoles is a homogeneous substance which precipitates as a finely granular coagulum. Intracellular fibres run between the alveoles; at the luminal side of the cell they are parallel and are greatly thickened so as to form a palisade from the intervals in which the cytoplasm may be excluded. 6. The nucleus of the intestinal epithelial cells is normally spherical in all physiological conditions ; it is alveolar in structure in the fresh condition, and contains in "perfectly" fixed material numerous large granules of chromatin. 7. In the moult of the chitinous lining of the intestines the coelomic side of the epithelial cell rarely suffers any change. The luminal side undergoes the following changes : the thickened ends of the fibres disappear; the alveolar structure at the same time becomes concealed by a fluid substance which precipitates in killing fluids in the form of fine granules. The new chitin is j)robably formed by some process of hardening this substance. After the new lining begins to appear, delicate fibres are seen on the luminal side of the cell. The strength of the palisade on the luminal side varies directly with the time from the last moult. 8. The land isopods after a period of starvation will eat various kinds of pure foods. 9. Starving for a considerable time (three Aveeks) produces the following changes in the intestinal cells : the interalveolar substance is reduced in quantity; the cytoplasm may Avithdraw from the luminal side, leaving elongated spaces between the fibres ; vacuola- tions may appear elsev^here in the cytoplasm. 10. After feeding a starved animal for ten minutes on finely chopped raw beef, before any food is visible in the cells, definite masses of fine granules appear about the nucleus. Some of these at least come from the nucleus. They increase in number up to thirty hours after feeding. We have designated this granular substance as an intracellular ferment. 11. Eight hours after feeding a starved animal with finely chopped raw beef, albumose appears in the intestinal cells. The 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349 course of the albumose through the cells is uninfluenced by the cell structure, except in a purely mechanical way. In traversing the cell it behaves independently of the cytoplasmic structure. Albu- mose may accumulate on the ccelomic side of the cell from sixteen hours onward after feeding. Judging by the size of the granules formed by precipitation with killing fluids, albumose may exist in the cell in as great as a 10 per cent, solution. Albumose has not been found in the coelomic fluid. It is probable that the intra- cellular ferment is concerned in the change of food from the albumose stage to a later stage of the hydrolisis (peptone) or to a stage in the inverse process toward albumen. 12. The cells of the typhlosole absorb soluble foods. The primary purpose of the structure, however, is to provide channels through which the secretion of the hepal opaucreas may flow, un- obstructed by solid food, to the median portion of the intestine. 13. Dextrose is found in the intestines of animals which have been starved, fed on potato starch, then killed in twenty-four hours from the time of feeding. 14. Microscopical study of the absorption of fats indicates : (a) That this class of foods is hydrolized by the digestive secretion of the heatopancreas ; (b) that they are absorbed in the form of cleav- age products, and (c) are at least partially s}Tithesized into neutral fats under the influence of fei'ment action inside the cell; (d) they leave the cell not as discrete fat particles, but probably in the form of cleavage products; (e) they appear in the blood coagulum and in the blood corpuscles as neutral fats, reducing osmic acid and not staining with acid-fuchsiue. 15. The hepatopaucreas contains but one kind of secreting cells. In a young stage these cells contain zymogen granules in nascent condition, densely massed about the nuclei ; as the cells mature the zymogen granules take up from the cytoplasm fatty substance, wdiereby they become larger, looser in structure, more soluble in many fixing fluids and more receptive of certain stains. The fer- ment thus matured is set free into the lumen by (a) fragmentation of the cell, (6) dissolution of the cell, (e) evacuation from the cell. 16. The secretion of the hepatopaucreas thus elaborated con- tains ferments which act on the three classes of foods — proteids, carbohydrates and fats. 350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, 5 8 o _^ 5 -5 ^ d c s*^ cj S =c o J ^.2 C5 s ;::, ^ f= c . o a; s cs <^ 5^ -O S'o S 2 rt c ?; c£ n 2 C3 o -2 1 S CC 5 < 1 c p-1 s 1" C 111 11 c3 CO ^hJ 1 ='1 II 1 11 1-1 to .5 H. II ;5' Is _c: r-' ^ = C ^1 ac <^.5 o o o c- '^ - c? . ^•S a O tc-^ a a^ s _g ^ -3 s^ •sjq JO -OK o o o S o o •pOAJB^S S;£B(I « c5 CM 07 . s • -• = o o a gcs § cS rt £- 5 5 g ^ • '5:=-^S„a-^- 6.S ';i_:z a '^ <^ -c at a fcC a j: o . -i .S13 .S a ^ s p^ ?^ .9 a a; a a'" "^ ■?? P « a a ^ c o " u=t; bo id. nt. ages harg ^-a £ 5^3 •^ o t^ .2 ^ c > 1 3 O C C3 o II v^ 3 S^ a ^3 I— 1 !2; g ^ bb t3 fcJD tc >> ■ o § a 1^1 l5 aPn ^/^ to . 5 3 < III a a c« o •1 o ,a ^ a _a 3 g 1 •^2 2 ? d CO off* 1 .2 a 1 c3 . 3 a 2« o il ,a i •Sni] 333J J3)JB Ol # T*< -* s • mnao ^ o C o O C •on O o _ ■^ CO 00 190 .] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355 mi a 5ZN -^^32 jD "- S '^ s Orau. very a also sn g o m. o sn gra abu ^ OH S-s^ TjJ s S tfi ;£ = 3^5 «c C3 ^ =3 C tC = X . = ': 3 =i > X 61 ;i ■-'■- ^ 5] -^ = 12 Ps, ^ ^ '/} ^ to S 5:C > ? ^ = .= >H fcc ::'^ =i^ .a i^S i en "^ i a: -'" = ~ I 2 - 3 ^-^ -^^ .S?o^ «.- !=»2 so § g ?: t^ o § § s « § o 2; ■^ ■V ^ ^ Ch - i. Oh 0 356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, 1 § c , c tea 5 1^ , s 112 >inc very rge gran. Ibumose). 2 ■s ^ e £"5 5 §s" i 3^ SzJW --otS = ^•~ , — . 1 1 1 < c c ^ s c ^ E 1 » S [g IP cc tOci br, ^ — S a cc 11 -• a c . ^ tf..^ - "o -SB'S d a c 1 JZ' ^ — ^- -e a -C tD = = II. ti > o c.S ■• > >> 1^" s n cc ^ * Tf ^ so 00 •TOuao i^ o O PU O •ON u cc •^ in «o 1 t 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 357 « 2 1 : .1 r- O t« S M S 2 >■« •is « . -- .2 "" ^ 'S ^ <1 < m •< < d M «o" "! tb s§ «3 3 > ^_a a s a "to ;: c3 Si 0) ci o tn fl ^ ID > S-^ -^ « 1^ rO cs a ji c3 1 ll ^ 3 1 II o Ofe o 0 ^^ =3 ^ to -^ < < |& 'a «' o 3 ic a • b=^ 3 •S.S P' r a 10 s e ,-, a a o .:: o .; l-q -5 -H^ ^ Q o ^ ^ ^ ^' 5 .9 a S^ a "^ o .a « 2 — r- TS =* t^s « a p J ,a « g « osK >> -«. o a ^ w w - to 1 s C s 1 5- X X fill 364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Tomisato. Kii. Types No. 82,485, A. N. S. P., from No. 764a of ;Mr. Hirase's collection. It occurs also at Nachi, Kii. This species is related to C. sublunellata and C. opeas, both described by Dr. von ]Mollendorff from the mountains around Nikko, Prov. Shimotsuke. Compared with the description of C. sublunelfnta, the present species is less slender, with fewer whorls and a larger ajierture. C. opeas is a smaller and much more slender species, with much smaller aperture. A remarkable variation occurs in one of the specimens of the tj-pe lot ojjened, which has two short palatal folds above, not con- nected with the lunella (fig. 19). In a specimen from Nachi opened, the single upper palatal fold is connected with the lunella (fig. 18). This specimen measures, length 27, diam. 6.8 mm., and has nearly 10 whorls. Clausilia subulina var. leucopeas nov. ri. XVIII. figs. 28, 29, 30, 31, 32. Shell rimate, fusiform or somewhat cylindric, whitish-corneous or greenish -corneous, densely and finely but sharply striate, glossy. Spire tapering and attenuated above, though rather large at the » summit. Apex obtuse. AVhorls 10, convex, the last somewhat flattened, not more coarsely striate. Aperture somewhat oblique, piriform, the peristome continuous, very shortly free above, a little notched at the position of the superior lamella ; white, reflexed and a little thickened within. Superior lamella rather strong, oblique, continuous with the spiral lamella, which extends inward to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella receding, inconspicuous in a front view or forming a slight columellar fold ; thickened and rather straightly ascending within, penetrating as far as or a little further than the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella usually emerging to the lip-edge (fig. 30), but sometimes immersed (fig. 29). Principal plica strong, visible deep in the throat, extending to a latero-ventral position. Below it there is a short, oblique upper palatal plica, weakly connected with, or almost separated fx'om, the rather narrow lunella, which is stronger below than above (and sometimes reduced or almost wholly wanting). IxMigth 15.7, diam. .'i.H, length of aperture 3.5 mm. I>ength 16, diam. 3.2, length of aperture 3.5 mm. I^ingth 14, diam. 3.3, length of aperture 3.3 mm. Clau.silium (PI. XVIII, figs. 31, 32) long and parallel-sided, 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365 tapering-rounded and thin at the apex, hardly excised on the coki- mellar side of the fihaiiient. Ikoma, Kii, Types No. 82,484, A. X. S. P., from Xo. 7666 of Mr. Hirase's collection. Also Tomisato, Kii, Xo. 766a, and Samotonaka-mura, Kii, Xo. 766c (Mr. Hirase). This form seems to be related to C. subulina Mlldff., an un- figured species described from Lake Chusenji in Shimotsuke Prov- ince, west of beautiful Xikko. It is apparently somewhat less slender than that, not especially rugose striate on the last whorl, with a better developed lunella. I have not seen C. subulina. Old specimens become dull and opaque, and lose much of the fine striation by wear. Some of the shells from Tomisato are of a light brown tint, others being whitish-corneous like the types. In two specimens opened from Ikoma (Xo. 769) the lunella is so weak as to be hardly perceptible. The indistinct vestige would not be noticed in these shells were it not better developed in others of the species. It is apparently an abundant shell in the Province Kii. Clausilia sericina var. rhopalia Pilsbry. PI. XVIII, figs. 23, 24, 25, 26, 27. Pilsbiy, these Proceedings for 1901, p. 624 (February 6, 1902). Figures are here given of the types of this subspecies, not hitherto figured. It is a lai'ger and stouter shell than C subulina var. leucopeas, and the inferior lamella forms a more or le.ss prom- inent columellar fold. It is from Mikuriya, Suruga. Compared with the description of C. sericina Mlldff., from Lake Chusenji, these specimens differ in the emerging inferior lamella and the palatal armature, which, if von ^Mollendorff' s description is correct, must be quite different, as he states, after mentioning the deeply placed principal plica, that it has two palatal plicae, the upper short, second punctiform or obsolete, the lower and the lunella wanting. In rhopalia there is a single short upper palatal plica and a long, narrow lunella. In external contour the two forms agree. The type of C. sericina was in the Hungerford collection, and its present location is unknown to me. Group of C. validiu^cula. Clausilia carystoma Mlldff. PI XVII, figs. 1, 2. Molleiulorrt', .Tourn. Asiut. Soc. Bengal, LI, pt. 2, i>. G, PI. 1, fie;. 5 (1882); LIV, pt. 2, p. G5 (1885). Specimens before me from Kobe, Setsu, the type locality, agree 366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, well with Molleudorff' s description and figure, except in having 10 whorls instead of 9, and in being a trifle larger. The very short lunella is connected with the lower palatal plica in the specimen figured (figs. 1, 2), but in another it is a short fold exactly as figured for var. jayi (PI. XVII, fig. 3). The figured shell meas- ures length 15, diam. 3.7 mm. The spiral and inferior lamellae are of equal length, reaching past the ventral side to a lateral posi- tion on the left side. The species is somewhat remarkable for the nearly ventral posi- tion of the palatal plicae, a point which von ]\[6llendorff has empha- sized. They are placed quite as in Tyrannopluedusa, while in Hemiphcedusa these plicae are generally lateral or latei'o-dorsal. The long spiral lamella is also a Tyrannophaedusan character. The clausilium is narrow-, parallel-sided, rather straight, notice- ably oblique at the distal end (but not thickened there as it is in Tyrannophcedusa), and excised on the columellar side near the filament. It is like that of var. jayi. C. caryostoma is known only from Kobe, Setsu. The specimen figured was sent by the late Mr. B. Schmacker (No. 60,378, A. K S. P.). Clausilia caryostoma var. jayi nov. PI. XVII, figs. 3, 4, 5, 6. Shell rimate, fusiform, moderately attenuated above, glossy, broAvn, distinctly and finely striate, a little more coarsely so on the latter part of the last whorl. Whorls 10, moderately convex, the last flattened and tapering. Aperture ovate-trapezoidal, the brown- tinted peristome continuous, reflexed and thickened, shortly free and not emargiuate above. Superior lamella rather small, oblique, slender, marginal, continuous with the spiral lamella, which pene- trates inward past the ventral side. Inferior lamella receding, in- conspicuous in a front view, rather low and obliquely ascending within, as long as the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella vary- ing from immersed to weakly emerging. Principal plica very long, extending from a ventral position above the sinulus nearly to the lip. Palatal plicae three, nearly ventral, the upper and lower long, the intermediate one short and small. Length 13, diam. 2.9, length of aperture 3 mm. Length 12, diam. 2.8, length of aperture 2.8 mm. Clausilium (PI. XVII, figs. 4, 5) narrow, a little obliquely 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367 tapering at the apex, deeply excised on the columellar side of the filament. Jo, Kii. Types No. 82,476, A. N. S. P., from No. 770c of Mr. Hii'ase's collection. Also Yamaguchi, Tajima. This form differs from C. caryostoma chiefly in being smaller, less coarsely striate and more slender, with a larger aperture. Named for Dr. John C. Jay, author of one of the earliest papers on Japanese shells. Clausilia gracise Pilsbry. PI. XVII, figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11. Shell very small, slenderly fusiform, pale brown, finely striate, a little more coarsely so on the back of the last whorl. Upper half strongly attenuated, penultimate whorl somewhat swollen, latter half of the last whorl compressed and tapering, the position of the principal plica marked by a shalloiv but distinct sulcus. Whorls 9, the first rather globose, the rest moderately convex. Aperture slightly oblique, ovate-piriform, the peristome continuous, shortly fi'ee above, reflexed, and strongly thickened within. Superior lamella small and vertical, continuous with the spiral lamella, whicli ascends past the middle of the ventral margin. Inferior lamella receding, inconspicuous in a front view, but seen to form a distinct fold when viewed obliquely in the aperture; straightly and obliquely ascending within, penetrating as far as the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella deeply immersed. Principal plica long and strong, extending from a latere -ventral position nearly to the lip. There are two long, strong and oblique lateral palatal plicw, with a strong, short limella between them, not connected with either. Length 9.3, diani. 2.2 mm. Length 7.7, diam. 2 mm. The clausilium is narrow and parallel-sided, tapering at the distal end, and abruptly, deeply excised on the columellar side of the filament (figs. 7, 8). • Nachi, Kii. Types No. 82,458, A. N. S. P., from No. 794 of Mr. Hirase's collection. This species shares with C. hirasei and C. euholodoma the dis- tinction of being one of the smallest known from Japan. It is not closely related to any of the described forms, standing nearer C. aulacophora, C. pigra and C. tosana than to other siwcies now known. It is much smaller than C. caryostoma or the variety jayt. 368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, The diminutive stature together with the several charactei's itali- cized above readily distinguish the species. Some specimens taper more slowly and regularly than others, as the figures show. Group of C. aulacophora. This group passes into the group of C. validluscula by such an easy transition that it is rather difficult to draw a line between them, although typical forms are so different. In the latter group there are several palatal plicse standing between the upper and lower ones, while in the former these plicte are united, and thereby trans- formed into a lunella. Clausilia pigra n. sp. PI. XXI, figs. 73, 74. Shell rimate, rather slenderly fusiform, strongly attenuated above, light reddish-brown, finely striate (or smooth by wearing or erosion of the surface in some specimens). Spire very slender above, the first whorl rather globose, several whorls following not increasing in diameter (but in eroded individuals it is acute and tapering). Whorls 10 to 10|-, convex, the last compressed laterally, tapering; becoming free for a short distance in front, and grooved above the position of the superior lamella. Aperture piriform, sub vertical, the distinct sinulus retracted. Peristome continuous, white, reflexed and thickened, sinuous above. Superior lamella marginal, rather small, sub vertical, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates past the ventral side. Inferior lamella immersed, deeply receding, thick, straightened, branching and obliquely ascending within, penetrating as far as or less deeply than the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella deeply immersed. Principal plica long, extending from the ventral side nearly to the aperture. Upper and lower palatal plicre are connected by a straight lunella, forming a barrier shaped like the letter I, and exactly lateral in position. Length 15.5, diam. 3.3, length of aperture 3.4 mm. Length 14, diam. 3.3, length of aperture 3 mm. Length 15, diam. 3, length of aperture 3 mm. Clausilium narrow and parallel -sided, abruptly and deeply excised on the columellar side of the filament. Kashima, Harima. Types No. 82,455, A. N. S. P., from No. 306c of Mr. Hirase's collection. By the shape of the aperture and the forwardly built, shortly 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369 free last whorl, this species is related to C. tosana Pils. ; but it differs from tosana in the more deeply penetrating lamellae and principal plica, the distinct lunella connecting the two palatal plicae I-like, and the larger size of the less slender shell. ^Moreover, the clausilium is deeply excised on the columellar side near the filament, as in C. harhnensis, while in tosana it merely tapers there. C. pigra is probably not closely related to C. aulacophora, although by parallel evolution it has attained the same type of palatal armature. At Nametoko, lyo, on Shikoku Island, a form of C. tosana occurs in which there is an imperfect lunella in place of the intermediate palatal plicsc, at least in some specimens (No. 82,288, A. N. S. P., from Mr. Hirase's No, 5506). Group of C. awajiensis. Tavo remarkable additions are made to this group in C. agna and C. caloptyx, the first veiy glossy and smooth, the second beautifully sculptured with strong riblets. Clausilia subignobilis Pilsbry. PL XIX, flgs. 33, 34, 35, 36. These Proceedings for 1901, LIII, p. 655, footnote No. 9 (March 1, 1902). Shell fusiform, attenuated above, very pale reddish-brown or gray-brown, somewhat glossy, finely striate, on the last half of the last whorl more coarsely so. Aperture trapezoidal -ovate, slightly oblique. Peristome well expanded, continuous, shortly free and concave or notched above. Superior lamella small, marginal, dis- connected from or barely connected with the spiral lamella, which penetrates barely to the ventral side. Inferior lamella dec[)ly receding, slender and vertically ascending within, about as long as the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emerging to the lip-edgo, and bounded by grooves. Principal plica short, lateral, the lunella bow-shaped, its upper and lower ends bending strongly inward. Length 15.2, diam. 3.5 mm. Length 13, diam. 3.1 mm. Clausilium narrow, parallel-sided, rounded at the apex, some- what excised on the columellar side of the filament. Hirado, Hizen, in Avestern Kyushu. Types No. 82,954, A. N, B. P., from No. 733 of Mr. Hirase's collection. Close to C. shikokaemis, in which, however, the spiral and infe- 24 370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |~May, rior lanielloe are longer, the principal plica longer and stronger, the snbcoluniellar lamella is immersed, and the lunella is strictly lateral. In C. suhignohilis the subcolumellar lamella emei'ges strongly, and the lunella is somewhat doi-so-lateral, Mr. E. R. Sykes, who kindly compared it with the type of his C. ignobilis, now in the British Museum, writes that ignobilis is "a yellower shell with more cylindrical and larger earlier whorls, more like C. ischna and C. iotaptyx." Moreover, if the figure of C. ignobilis is correct, the lunella is lateral, not doi-so-lateral, as it is in subignobilis. The three species, C. ignobilis, C. sJiikokuensis and C. sub- ignobilis, agree in the shape of the lunella, and are evidently closely related. Clausilia tantilla Pilsbry. PI. XIX, figs. 43, 44. These Proceedings for 1901, LIII, p. 655, footnote No. 10 (March 1, 1902). Shell very small, fusiform, attenuated above, the last three whorls rather large; dull reddish-brown or gray, without cuticle in adult shells; striate, but worn smoothish, the last whorl more coarsely striate behind. Whorls 8J, the first rather large, last compressed. Aperture slightly oblique, trapezoidal-ovate. Peristome reflexed aiid thickened, continuous, very shortly free above. Superior, lamella small, abruptly lower where it joins the low spiral lamella. Inferior lamella receding, vertically ascending within. Sub- columellar lamella usually wholly immersed (but in one specmien of five emerging Aveakly to the lip-edge). Principal plica dorsal and lateral. Upper palatal plica short, a straight oblique, lateral lunella joining it in the middle. No lower palatal plica. Length 9.5, diam. 2.5 mm. Length 8.3, diam. 2.2 mm. Goto, Hizen. Tj^^es No. 83,023, A. N. S. P., from No. 813 of Ml'. Hirase's collection. The locality was erroneously given " Goto, Uzen," in a former communication. A very small form, differing from other known species of the group of C awajiemis in the straight lunella, which does not curve inward below, and in the diminutive size of the shell. Clausilia bigeneris Pilsbrj-. PI. XIX, figs. 37, 38. These Proceedings for 1901, LIII, p. 656, footnote No. 12 (Marcli 1, Shell fusiform, moderately f-olid, pale reddish-brown, apparently 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 871 deprived of cuticle; surface lustreless, weakly striate: acutely tapering above to a small and rather acute apex. Whorls 10, moderately convex, the last compressed. Aperture shortly ovate, but slightly oblique. Peristome continuous, shortly free above, moderately thick and broadly flaring, reflexed, excavated at the sinulas. Superior lamella marginal, subvertical, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella deeply receding, subvertical within the last whorl, a little thickened below, not extending inward as far as the superior lamella. Subcolumellar lamella deeply immersed. Prin- cipal plica strong, approaching the lip, extending slightly past the middle of the lateral position. Upper palatal plica short, oblique, slightly disconnected from the lunella. Lunella dorso-lateral, straight above, curving far inward below. Length 14.3, diam. 3.5 mm. Clausilium narrow, rounded at the apex. Goto, Hizen. Types No. 82,956, A. N. S. P., from Xo. 818 of Mr. Hirase's collection. The locality was incorrectly given as Goto, Uzen, in my preliminary description. This species recalls C. subaurantiaca somewhat. The lip is imusually developed. The slight notch between the lunella and the short upper palatal plica is unlike the allied species, and re- minded me at first of some species of the group of C. suhlunellata, but the strong inward bend of the lower end of the lunella shows clearly that it belongs to the group of C awajiensis. Clausilia agna n. sp. PI. XIX, figs. 39, 40, 41, 42. Shell fusiform, moderately solid, the penultimate whorl widest, preceding and last whorls a little narrower, those above tapering to a somewhat obtuse apex. Brownish-yellow, somewhat transparent. Surface brilliantly glossy, as though varnished, showing some faint growth wrinkles under a lens. Whorls 7-8, moderately convex, the suture often appearing margined by transparence. Last whorl not differently sculptured. Aperture subvertical, squarish-ovate. Peristome expanded and narrowly reflexed, hardly thickened, the upper margin adnate or barely free from the preceding whorl. Superior lamella compressed, marginal, continuous with the spiral lamella, which does not reach (juite to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella deeply receding, a little thickened near its lower end, straightly ascending, not penetrating as deeply as the 372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella weakly eiuergiug. Principal plica short, visible withiu the mouth, exteudiug inward past the lunella. Upper palatal plica very short, connected with a rather low, nearly straight, slightly dorso-lalei*al luuella, the lower end of which curves abruptly inward. Length 10.2, diam. 2.5 mm.; whorls 7f. Length 8.6, diam, 2.3 mm. ; whorls 6f. Clausilium (PI. XIX, figs. 39, 40) parallel -sided, nearly straight, rounded apically, deeply excised on the columellar side of the filament. Yakushima, Osumi. Types Xo. 82,959, A. N. S. P., from Xo. 663c of Mr. Hirase's collection. This species resembles Zaptyx in texture and general structure, as well as in the form of the clausilium, but it differs in wanting the sutural plicse and the accessory lamellae of that group. It is remarkable for the varnish-like gloss of the surface. Clausilia caloptyx n. sp. PI. XIX, figs. 45, 46, 47, 48. Very small, fusiform, pale corneous-brown, solid and strong, rather rapidly tapering above to a rather obtuse apex. Surface regularly sculptured icith strong, straight ribs, very coarse for so small a shell. AVhorls 7J, convex, the last somewhat compressed, with the ribs a little more separated. Aperture squarish-ovate. Pei-istome white, continuous, reflexed, thickened within, very shortly free above, notched at the position of the superior lamella. Superior lamella marginal, compressed, subvertical, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates scarcely to the ventral side. Inferior lamella receding, invisible in a front view, but appearing as a strong, deeply placed fold in an oblique viev; in the aperture ; straightly ascending withiu, not penetrating quite so deeply as the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emerging. Principal plica short, extending from near the lip to a lateral position. Upper palatal plica very short, connected with the rather weak luuella, which curves inward at its lower end, and is dorso-lateral in posi- tion. Length 6.8, diam. 1.9 mm. ; whorls 7^. Length 7, diam. 2 mm. ; whorls 7^. Length 8, diam. 2.4 mm.; whorls 8 (larger form; see below). Clausilium (PI. XIX, figs. 45, 46) parallel-sided, the distal third straightened, the rest strongly curved ; distal end slightly 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 373 oblique and a little thickened ; columellar side excised near the filament. Yaku-shima, Osumi. Types No. 82,958, A. N. S. P., from No. 894 of I\Ir. Hirase's collection. Very distinct from any knx)wn Japanese or Riukiuan species. The strength and coarseness of the sculpture is remarkable in so small a shell. The lamellae and plicre penetrate less deeply than usual. One specimen (PI. XIX, fig. 49) is larger and more obese than the others of the type lot, but it agrees in other characters. The ribs are shown a little too much spaced on the last whorl of fig. 48. Group of C. aulacopoma. Shell similar to that of the group of C. awajiensis, except that a nodule-like lower palatal plica is developed inward from the termi- nation of the lunella. Clausilium strongly curved, channeled on the outside at the apex. The single species at present composing this group is strongly individualized by the peculiar modification of the clausilium, Clausilia aulacopoma Pilsbry-. PI. XVII, figs. 12, 13, U, 15, 16. These Proceedings for 1901, LIII, p. 656, footnote No. 11 (March 1, 1902). Shell fusiform, strongly attenuated above, brown, the surface lustreless, finely and weakly striate, more strongly so on the back of the last whorl. Whorls about 9^, convex, the apex small. Aperture trapezoidal -ovate, a little obliciue. Peristome reflexed and thickened. Sinulus distinct and slightly retracted. Superior lamella marginal, small and low, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella deeply receding, straightly ascending within the last whorl, distinctly thickened and a little sinuous near its lower end, a little shorter within than the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emerging to the lip-edge, though sometimes but weakly, and bounded by grooves. Principal plica extending from the dorsal nearly to the ventral side. Upper palatal plica short, united in the middle to the strong oblique, latero-dorsal lunella, which is straight above and curves inward below, its inner end being contiguous to a strong short, nodule-like lower palatal plica. 374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Length 13.5, diam. 3 mm, Length 12.5, diam. 2.7 mm. Length 12, diam. 3 mm. Claasilium (PI. XVII, figs. 13, 14) rather narrow and parallel- sided, very strongly curved, pinched into a channel or spout at the apex, abruptly and deeply emargiuate on the columellar side of the filament. Hirado, Hizen, in western Kyushu. Types No. 82,980, A. N. S. P., from No. 7336 of Mr. Hirase's collection. There is some variation in the degree of apical attenuation and in the emphasis of the subcolumellar lamella. Fig. 16 represents the type. Some specimens, as that drawn in fig. 12, are more swollen. The shell resembles species of the group of C. awajiensis in most of its characters, except for the nodule -like lower palatal plica, but it is very distinct in the specialization of the clausilium, which is channeled apically, much as in C. crenilabium, the channel apparently fitting over the lower palatal j^lica. Sectioa TYRANNOPH^DUSA Pilsbry. Group of C. mikado. The forms described and illustrated below complete the illustra- tion and description of the species and varieties now known of this section. Clausilia aurantiaca Boettger. PI. XX, figs. 50, 51, 52, 53, 54. Boettiier, Clausilienstudieu, p. 68 (1877); Syst. Verz., p. 57 (1878); Jalirb. (1. D. Malak. Ges., V, p. 101, PI. 4, fig. 5. Kobelt, Fauna Moll. Extramar. Jap., p. 95, PI. 9, fig. 11 (1879). This species Avas described from the " interior of Nippon " from specimens collected by Rein. Probably the types came from some province near the eastern end of the Inland Sea. The shell is very solid for its size, fusiform, moderately attenu- ated above, the early whorls quite small. The subventral luuella is straight, connecting the two palatal plicae like the letter I, but it is usually placed ol)li(iuely, crossing the line of the external strioe. The superior lamella is continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates inward across the ventral side to a point further inward than above the sinulus. The inferior lamella is equally long. The subcolumellar lamella typically emerges to the lip-edge. The shell usually is more or less orange-tinted brownish in color. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375 Specimens from Kobe, Setsu (B. Sehmacker), are gray-brown or_^' reddish-brown, worn, with 8^10 whorls, and are about 13 mm. long. The subcolumellar lamella emerges. Nohara, Yamato. Specimens measure from 12.3 x 3.3 mm. with 9^ whorls, to 14 X 3 mm. with 10 whorls. The subcolumellar lamella emerges. Aiga, Kii. Glossy, orange-brown, transparent enough to show the lunella and plicse through; whorls 9^10^; length 11^ IS^ mm. Subcolumellar lamella emerging. Nachi, Kii (fig. 51). Brownish dark-red, opaque. Whorls 10 to 11 ; length 12f to 14 mm. The subcolumellar lamella emerges weakly or is immersed. Kurozu, Kii. Whorls 10, length 12^13 mm. The subcolumel- lar lamella emerges slightly or is immersed. Ikari, Awaji (fig. 50). Color and texture as in last. Whorls 10; length 13-14 mm. The subcolumellar lamella emerges. Suimura, Awa, Shikoku (figs. 52, 53). Kather light chestnut- brown, some specimens showing the lunella and plicse through. Length 12-15 mm. The subcolumellar lamella emerges. Obi, Huga. The shells are gray-brown or i*eddish-brown, and measure 13 mm. long, 3 wide, with 10 whorls. The connection between the superior and spiral lamellie is very low, almost inter- rupted, and the lunella is somev^'hat arcuate. The subcolumellar lamella emerges weakly. The clausilium of a specimen from this locality is figured (fig. 54). Clausilia aurantiaca var. erberi Bttg. PL XX, figs. 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60. Bcettger, Syst. Verz., p 57. Moellendorff, J. A. S. B., LIV, pt. 3, No. 1, p. 65. C. a. minor Mlldff., Jouru. Asiatic See. Bengal, LI, pt. 2, No. 1, p. 9 (July, 1882); types from Nara, Yamato. Smaller and somewhat more slender than C. a^irantiaca, the sub- columellar lamella immersed ; lip narrower ; lunella not quite reach- ing the upper palatal plica. This small form is usually fairly distinguishable from the typical aurantiaca. It extends from Ilarima to Yamato or Kii, specimens being before me from the following localities : Tomisato, Kii. Whorls 8-9; length 10-lU mm. The sub- columellar lamella barely emerges. It is not typical erberi. Per- haps referable rather to atirantiaca proper. 376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Gojo, Yamato. Length 10^, diani. 2 mm. ; whorls 9^. Sub- cohmiellar lamella immersed. Nara, Yamato. Length 9^, diain. 2 mm. ; whorls 9. Sub- columellar lamella immersed (PI. XX, fig. 55, the palatal arma- ture represented as though showing through, but the shell is opaque). This and the preceding are typical erberi. Chikubu-shima, an island in Lake Biwa, Omi (fig. 56). Length varying from 10 to 12| mm. ; whorls 9-10. The sub- columeUar lamella is immersed. Though some specimens are rather large, their characters are otherwise as in the smaller ones with them. The shell figured in outline is 10.3 mm. long. Kashima, Harima (PI. XX, figs. 57-60). Glossy, handsome specimens, 10^ to 11|- mm. long, with 10 to lOJ whorls. The subcolumellar lamella is immersed; the palatal plicse are long, but the lunella is very short in some examples (fig. 59), while in others it is as long as in shells from Yamato. Clausilia aurantiaoa var. plicilabris (A. Adams). PI. XX, figs. 61, 62, 63. C. plicilabris A. Ad., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4 ser.), I, 1868, p. 469. Pfr., Monogr., VIII, p. 476. Kobelt, Fauna Moll. Extra- mar. Jap., p. 98. C. aurantiaca var. hypoptycMa Pilsbry, these Proceedings for 1901, p. 652, footnote No. 7. Shell fusiform, moderately swollen, distinctly attenuated above, slender near the apex ; whitish under a pale-brown cuticle, all of the specimens seen being more or less eroded on the surface. Closely striate. Whorls about 10 J, the last one tapering. Aper- ture piriform. Peristome pale brown or dirty white, thick and somewhat broadly reflexed, crossed by several unequal folds in the suhcoluynellar region. Superior lamella rather strong, becoming low within, barely continuous with or disconnected from the spiral lamella, which penetrates just past the ventral side. Inferior lamella very deeply receding, nearly as long within as the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emerging to the lip-edge, accom- panied by one or several accessory folds. Lunella joining the lower palatal fold near its inner end, scarcely connected with the upper palatal fold. Length 15, diam. 3.4 mm. Length 13.7, diam. 3.3 mm. Length 16, diam. 3.3 mm. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 377 Kashima, an island near Tanabe, Kii. No. 82,459, A. N. S. P., from No. 782 of Mr. Hirase's collection. As in other Tyrannophcedusce of the typical group, there is a slight depression behind the outer and basal lips. It is more slender above and more swollen below than C. ortJiairacta Pils. Further study of Adams' description convinces me that the form I named C. aurantiaea var. hjpoptychia can be nothing else than C. plicilabris A. Ad., described from Tanabe, Kii, the descrip- tion of which, so far as it goes, agrees exactly with the shells sent by Mr. Hirase. By " lunella inconspicua" Adams merely meant that it was not visible through the shell. The degree of plication of the subcolumellar region varies within wide limits, as I have shown to be the case in several other species of Tyrannophcedusa. I do not give the name plicilabris precedence over aurantiaea, because the description published by Adams was not sufficient for the recognition of the species until specimens from the type locality came to hand. One specimen which was sent with v. plicilabris (PI. XX, figs. 64, 65) is much larger than the others, measuring, length 19, diam. 3.8 mm. It is densely and sharply striate, and has 13 whorls. This may perhaps prove, when more material is received, to be a distinct species. It is No. 83,134, A. N. S. P. Group) of C. bilabrata. Clausilia dalli Pilsbry. PI. XXI, figs. 75, 7C, 77. Tnese Proceedings for 1901, LITI. p. 656, footnote No. 13 (March 1, 1902). Shell many whorled, awl-shaped, the tipper half much attenuated, lower half obese, pale brown, rather thin, scarcely glossy, all the specimens having the cuticle slightly worn below, wanting above; finely striate, more coarsely so on the back of the last whorl. Whorls 14^ to 15|, moderately convex, the first whorl rather globose, next 5 or 6 whorls scarcely increasing in diameter, those following enlarging slowly, the last three whorls forming about half the length of the shell, the penultimate whorl widest, last whorl narrower, compressed. Aperture trapezoidal -ovate, slightly oblique. Peristome continuous, thickened and reflexcd, white, the right margin crossed by a single fold (the subcolumellar, fig. 76) 378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, or having a group of folds in Ihat region (fig, 77). Superior lamella oblique, attaining the margin, rather widely separated from the spiral lamella. Spiral lamella continued inward to a point above the sinulus. Inferior lamella deeply receding, though often continued to the lip-edge, obliquely and straightly ascending within, and continued inward a little beyond the termination of the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emerging to the lip-edge, and usually bounded by grooves. The principal plica is about a half- whorl long, extending from a dorsal to a ventral position. The lunella is strong, latero-ventral, its upper end curving inward, lower end united to the lower palatal plica at or near its inner end. Length 19, diam. 4.1, diam. of second whorl 1 mm. . Length 17, diam. 3.8, diam, of second whorl .8 mm. Clausilium narrow, oblique at the distal end, thickened along the columellar margin and distally, as usual in Tyrannophcediisa. Tairiuji, Awa, Shikoku Island. Types No. 82,957, A. N. S. P., from No. 819 of Mr. Hirase's collection. This pecidiar species resembles C. mikado Pils. in its much attenuated, concave-sided spire, which is more slender than that of C. iotaptyx Pils. It stands between iotaptyx and mikado in the number of whorls. The aperture is formed about as in C. iotaptyx, not being built forward as in G. 7nikado. From both of the species named it differs in palatal armature, the lunella being like that of C. hilabrata Smith. The spire is apparently not subject to self-amputation, the apex being entire in the six sj)ecimens before me. The clausilium is of the shape usual in Tymnnophcedusa. C. dalli is named for the Honorary Curator of the Department of Mollusks of the U. S, National Museum. Section EUPII^DUSA Boettger, Clausilia holotrema ril.sbry. PI. XXI, fig. 72. Pilsbry, these Proceedings for 1901, p. 654, footnote No. 8 (March 1, l'J02). Shell rimate, fusiform, the upper third rapidly tapering to a minute apex ; vinous brown, with a wide corneous zone beloiv the su- ures, which is largely covered with tvhitish j^^pery cuticle (like that of Helicostyla) ; some interrupted spiral lines of the same appear- ing upon the dark color, and oblique streaks on some earlier whorls. The base of the last whorl is pale-corneous. Surface somewhat 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379 glossy, evenly thread-striate obliquely. Whorls a trifle over 8, convex, the last well rouuded beneath. ApeHure wide, oval, vertical, the peristome expanded, subreflexed, somewhat thickened within, continuous, in contact with the preceding whorl above. Superior lamella tvholly wanting, the spiral lamella arising far within. Inferior lamella forming a small and deeply-placed but prominent subhorizontal fold. Subcolumellar lamella deeply immersed. Principal plica short, dorso-lateral. Moderately long upper and lower palatal plicse are developed (but apparently no limella). Length 12, diam. 3.1, length of aperture 3.2 mm. Nachi, Kii. Type No. 82,454, A. N". S. P., from No. 789 of Mr. Hirase's collection. A single specimen of this remarkable Euphcedusa was sent by Mr. Hirase, with the remark that it seemed different from any other species. It stands in the middle between the "group of C. kun- ge7-fordiana" and that of C. euholostoma, as defined in my last paper upon this topic. Both of these groups have the superior lamella absent or vestigial, represented by a slight thickening of the peristome, and there is more or less whitish, papery cuticle, in streaks and spiral lines. C. holotrema resembles C kungerfordiana in Ihe palatal armature, but is more like euholostoma in the squarish-oval, not in the least piriform shape of the aperture. The dark, wide, wine-brown belt, contrasting with the corneous, white-variegated band above, makes it a conspicuous species. This belt terminates short of the outer lip, as shown by transparence in the figure. The single specimen received has not been opened, but this is the less essential because the palatal folds show through the thin shell. Section STEREOPII^DUSA Boettger. Group) of C. una. Similar in general characters to tlie group of C. japonica, but with the right margin of the lip plicate, and having a short lunella developed in connection with the lower palatal plica; no interme- diate palatal plicse. 380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^ay, Clausilia una Pilsbry. PI. XXI, figs. 66, 67, 68, 69. These Proceedings for 1901, LIII, p. 656, footnote No. 14 (March 1, 1902). Shell regularly tapering above, attenuated near the apex, very solid and strong, pale yellowish, slightly glossy, regularly, closely striate, the striation becoming much coarser on the back of the last whorl. Whorls 11^ to 12, moderately convex, the penulti- mate widest. Apical whorl globose, the next 2 or 3 whorls hardly increasing in diameter, last whorl a little compressed. Aperture ovate, hardly oblique. Peristome thickened and reflexed, continu- ous, shortly free above, a little notched or emarginate at the position of the superior lamella, the entire upper and right margins closely and deeply plicate. Superior lamella slender, subvertical, mar- ginal, continuous within with the spiral lamella, which is high laterally, and continues inward to a point above the sinulus. In- ferior lamella bifid, appearing as a double fold below, ascending in a wide spiral, and continued inward as far as the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emei'ging to the lip-edge. Principal plica over a half -whorl long, visible deep in the throat and extending inward to the ventral side. There is a small upper palatal plica, lateral in position and converging inward toward the principal plica, and a much longer, arcuate, lower palatal plica, from the middle of which a very short, rudimentary lunella arises. Length 23, diam. 5.3 mm. Length 21.5, diam. 5.2 mm. Clausilium (PI. XXI, figs. 68, 69) broad distally, irregularly rounded and strongly thickened at the apex, somewhat emarginate on the columellar side of the filament. Goto, Hizen. Types No. 82,955, A. K S. P., from No. 816 of Mr. Hirase's collection. The habitat "Goto, Uzen," given in my preliminary note, was erroneous. Clearly a Stereophcedusa by its clausilium, strongly spiral inferior lamella and palatal armature, yet unique in that section by the beautiful plication of the right margin of the peristome. No other species from Japan proper has such sculpture, a few forms of Tyrannopha'diisa alone having it much less developed and confined to the subcolumellar region ; but in the section Luchuphcedusa of the Riukiu Islands similar interlamellar plication exists. The double fold of the inferior lamella is also a rare structure, but it occurs in CI. excellens Pfr., also a Riukiuan species. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381 Group of C. entospira. Clausilia daemonorum n. sp. Pi. XXI, figa. 70. 71. Shell small, fusiform, rather Ihin, finely substriate, the latter part of the last whorl more coarsely so ; glossy. Early whorls lost iu the specimens described; the last whorl is laterally compressed, flattened, the base convex, full and somewhat sack-like. Aperture oblique, irregularly ovate, the peristome continuous, very shortly free above. Superior lamella small, marginal, short, not continuous with the spiral lamella. Inferior lamella receding, becoming very high and approaching the superior lamella in the throat; and within the last whorl it ascends in a broad spiral curve. Subcolu- mellar lamella emerging to the lip-edge. Principal plica rather short. Lunella rather short and arcuate. Clausilium unknown. Length of specimen with 4f whorls remaining, 8.2, diam. 2 mm. Length of specimen with 4^ whorls remaining, 7.8, diam. 2.2 mm. Kikaiga-shima, Oshima group. Types No. 82,981, A. N. S. P., from No. 874 of Mr. Hirase's collection. A fossil of the laud-shell bed. It has the form, size and surface of a Ziq-)tijx, but is unlike that group in the widely spiral ascent of the inferior lamella within. Whether the species is allied to C. en- tospira, which I have placed in Stereophcedusa, or is an Eupkedusa I am not prepared to say in the absence of the clausilium ; for it has something in common with both groups — the spiral inferior lamella approaching the superior iu the throat, the superior lamella not connected with the spiral, etc. ; but provisionally, and merely to ]mt it somewhere, I refer the species to the group of C. entospira. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVII— XXL Plate XVII, Figs. 1, 2.— Clausilia caryostoma MlldtT. Kobe, Sctsii. Figs. 3, 4, 5, G. — C. caryostoma var. j((i/i Pils. Jo, Kii. Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.— C. gracicB Pils. Nachi, Kii. Figs. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16. — (7. aulacopoma Pils. Hirado, Ilizeu. Plate XVIII, Figs. 17, 20, 21, 22.— C. heteroptyx Pils. Type. Tomisato, Kii. Fig. 18.— C. heteroptyx Pils. Nachi, Kii. Fig. 19. — C. heteroptyx Pils. Tomisato. Kii. Figs. 23, 24, 25, 26, 27.— C. sericina var. rliopalia Pils. Mikuriya, Suruga. Figs. 28, 29, 80. — C. subulina var. leiicopeas Pils. Ikoma, Kii. Figs. 81, 32. — C. subidina var. leucopeas Pils. Saniotonaka-inuia, Kii. 382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF pMay, Plate XIX, Figs. 33, 34, 35, 36.— C. subignohilis Pils. Hirado, Hizen. Figs. 37, 38.— C. higeneris Pils. Got5, Hizen. Figs. 39, 40, 41, 42.— C. agna Pils. Yaku-shima, Osumi. Figs. 43, 44.— C. tantilla^Wi. Got5, Hizen. Figs. 45, 46, 47, 48.— C. caloptijx Pils. Yaku-shima, Osumi. Fig. 49. — C. caloptyx Pils., an obese form from the same locality. Plate XX, Fig. 50. — G. aurantiaca Bttg. Ikari, Awaji. Fig. 51. — C. aurantiaca Bttg. Nachi, Kii. Figs. 53, 53. — 0. aurajitiaca Bttg. Suimura, Awa (Shikoku). Fig. 54. — 0. aurantiaca Bttg. Clausilium of a specimen from Obi, Huga. Fig. 55. — 0. aurantiaca var. erberi Bttg. Nara, Yamato. The shell is opaque, the palatal armature being represented diagrammatically in this figure. Fig. 56. — 0. aurantiaca yar. erberi Bttg. Chikubu-shima, Omi. Figs. 57, 58, 59, 60. — C. aurantiaca var. ei'beri Bttg. Kashima, Harima. Pigs. 61, 62, 63. — C. aurantiaca var. plicilabris A. Ad. Kashima, near Tauabe, Kii. Figs. 64, 65.— C. aurantiaca var. plicilabris A. Ad. Large form from the same locality. Plate XXI, Figs. 66, 67, 68, 69.— C. tina Pils. Goto, Hizen. Figs. 70, 71.— C. dcemonorum'Pils. Kikaiga-shima, Oshima group. Fig. 12. — C. holoti-ema Pils. Nachi, Kii. Figs. 73, 74. — C. pigra Pils. Kashima, Harima. Figs. 75, 76, 77.— C. dalli Pils. Tairiuji, Awa (Shikoku). 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383 DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO SPECIES OF EXTINCT TORTOISES, ONE NEW. BY O. P. HAY. Testudo atascosae sp. uov. ^ In the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia the writer has found certain bones Avhich belong apparently to an undescribed species of the genus Testudo. These bones are accompanied by a label to this effect: " Miocene, E. W, Maruock, Atascosa county, Texas." How this matei'ial came to the Acad- emy there is no record. Mr. Witmer Stone has suggested that it may have been derived from Dr. Leidy's collection; we know also that Mr. Marnock collected in Texas for Prof. Cope, but beyond ihis there is no indication that these bones were ever in the hands of either Prof. Cope or Dr. Leidy, These remains consist of the left half of the anterior lobe of the plastron and Ihe greater portion of the left side of the hinder lobe. Figures of these parts are here presented. Fiaj. 2. Fig. 1. The species has been one of considerable size. The xiphiplas- tron has had a length of about 110 mm. ; the whole posterior lobe a length approximately of 120 mm. The anterior lobe has had about the same length. We may perhaps safely estimate 200 mm. 384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May for the length of the bridge, thus making the plastron 440 mm. long. •The anterior lobe (fig. 1) has been close to 200 mm. in width. The interclavicle, or entoplastron, has had a width of 100 mm. ; its length has probably been about 80 mm., but its hinder border is missing. The gular scutes encroach on its anterior border. A broad rounded lip has projected beyond the gulo-humeral sulci about 28 mm. It has had a Avidth of 80 mm., and is not notched in front. The whole border of the anterior lobe is acute, through the beveling off of the upper side. Fig. 2 is a section through the lip Fii Fig. 5. at the midline, and shows this beveling. The greatest thickness at the lip is 23 mm. ; at a point halfway to the axillary notch this thickness has been reduced only to 21 mm. ; near the notch it is about 10 mm. Superiorly the lip extends back about 50 mm. From the summit of the lip two ridges, with a shallow valley between them, run toward the axillary notch, diverging gently. There has evidently been no thoracic excavation beneath the lip behind. Such an excavation is found in T. laticaudata, T. hexa- gonata and in the living T. polyphemus. The posterior lobe (fig. 3) has been broadly notched behind, the notch having a width of about 90 mm. and a depth of 85 mm. The terminal lobules are direcled outward and upward, somewhat 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 385 earlike, somewhat as they are in T. polyphemus, but uot so narrow as they are in the latter. From the midline behind, the border is acute around the lobules and as far forward as about 35 mm. be- hind the hypo-xiphiplastral suture. Here it rather suddenly be- comes broadly rounded, as shown by the cross-section (fig. 4). At the suture mentioned the thickness of the bone is 30 mm. The wall thus formed continues backw^ard, descending somewhat, and meets the midline 15 mm. or more in front of the bottom of the notch. Fig. 5 represents a section through one of the lobules in a direction from its tip toward the centre of the hinder lobe. The greatest thickness is 22 mm. The femoro-anal sulcus runs from the midline outward, so as to make the outer end of the anal scute somewhat wider than the mesial end. Antero-posteriorly, at the middle of its width, the scute is 40 mm. long. It is probable that the deposits in which this tortoise was found belong to the Pliocene. Terrapene eurypygia (Cope). This species was described by Prof. Cope in 1869 (Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, XIV, new series, p. 124), the type specimen being a small portion of the rear of the carapace. It was regarded as distinct from the common Terrapene of the region on account of the appar- ently greater width of the vertebral scutes. This seemed to be indicated by the contact of the last vertebral with the ninth mar- ginal scute. No figure Avas made of the specimen, and nothing in addition was afterward published. The type has been examined by the writer. In 1899 (Jour. Pliila. Acad., XI, pp. 193-267) Prof. Cope described various remains of the vertebrates which had been col- lected by ^Messrs. Dixon and ]\Iercer in the Port Kennedy cave. Among other things there were three tortoises found, viz., Clemimjs insculpta, C. pererassa and Toxaspis (Terrapene) anguUiulata. There belonged to the collection, however, another box- tortoise which was not meniioned by Cope, and was perhaps not seen by him. Through the kindness of the management of the Academy this has been put in my hands for examination. These remains consist of almost the whole of the plastron and of various frag- ments of the carapace and the right humerus. An examination of these bones sliowod that they holoiiged either 25 386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, to Terrapene Carolina or to a species closely related to it. It was soon observed that Ihe ninth marginal comes into contact with the last vertebral (fig. 6), a condition Avhich recalled Cope's Cistudo eurypygia, and a close comparison proved that they are identical, one of the portions of Ihe Port Kennedy specimen being fortunately the right margin of the rear of the shell from near the midline to the hinge. The question therefore arises whether or not the new material confirms Cope's view of the distinctness of the species. The unusual width of the fourth and fifth vertebral scutes is proved by Cope's type and confirmed by the Port Kennedy speci- men. Belonging to the latter is a fragment of the carapace pre- senting a part of the nuchal, a part of the first and second costals and the first and second peripherals (fig. 7). In T. Carolina the fii'st vertebral does not usually encroach on the first peripheral bone; in the fragment alluded to above the vertebral reaches over on the first peripheral nearly to the sulcus between the first and second marginals. The anterior vertebral must have been 34 mm. wide, about 6 mm. wider than in a specimen of T. Carolina at hand. We must conclude that the other vertebrals were wider than they commonly are in T. Carolina. An estimate makes it probable that the fourth vertebral in T. eimjpj/gia, type, was about 42 mm. wide. A comparison of the plastron of the Port Kennedy specimen makes it evident that this portion of tlie t-hell was almost every- where thicker than in the corresponding parts of the living species. Nearly the whole of the border of the anterior lobe is thicker and with a more rounded edge. The hypoplasti-on of T. Carolina at the hinge is 3 mm. thick; that of T. eurypyc/ia, 4 mm. The thickness of tlie sloping, scute-covered l>ordcr c.f the hinder lobe, at the June- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387 tiou of hypoplasl and xiphiplast, is iu T. Carolina 5 mm. thick; iu T. eunjpygia, 7 mm. thick. This border is also wider in the latter species than in any specimens of the living species at hand. No doubt all or nearly all the characters appealed to for the separation of Cope's species are more or less variable, but it appears unlikely that there should be so many deviations from the normal in one or two specimens. An examination of eighteen specimens of T. Carolina revealed the fact that in one the fifth vertebral was in contact with the ninth marginal on both sides, while in another specimen these scutes were in contact on one side. In both cases, Fig. 7. however, some of the scutes in the region were somewhat abnormal in their development. Leaving this out of view, we have the eon- tact in about eight and one-third per cent, of cases. It appears unlikely that the only two specimens that we have of the fossil species would belong among this small minority. In the Port Kennedy specimen the anterior lobe is 51 mm. long, and 68 mm. wide at the hinge. In front of the hinge the width increases to 72 nnn. The posterior lobe has had a length of at least 80 mm. Fig, 6 presents a view of the fragment of the rear of tlio plas- tron of the Port Kennedy specimen, the interrupted lines having been added iu order to sliow tlie- position of tlie frngmeut. The 388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, crossing of the sulci ou the upper portion of the drawing indicates the presence of a small scute cut off from the fifth vertebral, a slight abnormality. In fig, 6 the peripherals are numbered, ' but not the marginal scutes. The ninth scute is the one lying pt.-rtly on the ninth peripheral and partly on the tenth. In both figures the bony sutures are represented by zigzag lines, while the sulci Ix-tween the scutes are shown bv dotted lines. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389 TWENTY NEW AMERICAN BATS. BY GERRIT S. MILLER, JR. This paper, published here by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsoniau Institution, contains descriptions of twenty new American bats, the types of nineteen of which are in the United States National Museum. Six of these belong to the series of Mexican bats in the Biological Survey collection, kindly placed at my disposal, together with those in his private collection, by Dr. C. Hart Merriam. Antrozous minor sp. nov. Tijpe.— Adnli (skin and skull), No. 79,096, United States National Museum (Biological Survey collection). Collected at Comondu, Lower California, Mexico, September 20, 1895, by J. E. McLellan. Characters. — Color as in the large Antrozous paeificus or slightly darker; size rather less than that of the small A. palMus. Color. — Dorsal surface buff, everywhere washed with wood- brown, but particularly on region behind shoulders. Under parts clear buff, paler than that of back and fading to cream-buff on middle of belly. Ears and membranes dark brown. Skull and Teef/i.— Skull narrower than that of the other species, the difference particularly noticeable in the posterior region of the braincase. Crown of upper premolar and of first and second upper molars much shorter in proportion to their width than in A. palli- dum and A. paeificus. The lower molars are uniformly smaller than those of A. pallidus, but not different in form. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 93; tail, 35; tibia, 20; foot, 10 (9); forearm, 48; thumb, 9.6; second digit, 40; third digit, 80; fourth digit, 68; fifth digit, 63; ear from meatus, 23; ear from crown, 19; width of ear, 16; tragus, 11.4. Cranial measurements of an adult male from tlie type locality 390 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [^fay, (No. 06,491): Greatest length, 19 (21);^ basal length, 17.6 (19); ba.silar length, 14 (15.4); iuterorbital constriction, 4(4.6); zygomatic breadth, 11 (12.8); mastoid breadth, 9 (10); breadth of braincase above roots of zygomata, 8.6 (9); mandible, 13 (14.8); maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 6.8 (8); man- dibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 7.6 (8). Specimens Examined. — Five (four skins), all from the type locality. Remarks. — Autrozons minor is a well-marked local species, com- binmg the dark color of A. pacifieus and the small size of A. pallidus with a peculiar form of the molar teeth. Pipistrellus oinnamomeus sp. uov. Type.— Aduh female (skin and skull), No. 100,231, United States National Museum (Biological Survey collection). Collected at Montechristo, Tabasco, Mexico, May 4, 1900, by E. W. Nel- son and E. A. Goldman. Original number, 14,136. Characters. — La i-gest known American Pipistrellus ; forearm, 37; greatest length of skull, 15. Ear shorter than that of P. sub- flaviis, but much nari-ower. Color uniform cinnamon thi'oughout, the individual hairs of the back with practically no ti'ace of tri- color markings. Ears. — The ear resembles that of Pipistrellus suhflavus in general form, but it is shorter and very much narrower. Tragus straight, much like that of P. suhflavus, but narrower. Fur, Membranes, etc. — The fur is shorter and less woolly than that of P. suhflavus, and it lacks the abundant sprinkling of long hairs characteristic of the latter. At middle of back the hairs forming the body of the fur are about 5 mm. in length. Inter- spersed with these are others 1-2 mm. longer, but quite unnotice- able except on close examination. In distribution of fur, as well as in other characters of external form, Pipistrellus cinnamomeus appears to be identical with P. suhflavus. Color. — Fur everywhere cinnamon, slightly more yellow than that of Ridgway, particularly on the under parts. The individual hairs are dark slate color at base, but this does not appear at surface unless fur is disarranged. In favorable lights the cinnamon of the hairs on the back may be seen to become lighter as it approaches ^Measurements in parentheses are those of an adult female Antrozous pallidus from Silver City, New Mexico (No. 66,110). 1902.] NATURAL SCIKNCES OF PIIILADELl'IIl A. 391 the (lark basal area, thus ilislanlly .suggesling a tricolor pattern. Ears and membranes brown, the free edge of the wing apparently lighter, but this is perhaps due to some irregularity in drying. Skull. — The skull is much larger than that of Plpidrellus siib- flavus, in this respect slightly exceeding tliat of Myotis lucijufjus. In form it is longer and narrower than in the other American species of Pipistrcllus, a difference which is particularly noticeable in the rostrum and palate. Thus, while the length of the bony palate is 1.4 mm, greater than in a fully adult P. subjiavm, the width between middle molars is no more and the distance between roots of upper incisors is probably a little less than in the smaller species. Lachiymal foramen large, its centre over posterior root of large premolar; distance from its lower edge to rim of alveolus less than width of large premolar measured along cingulum. In P. subflaviis this distance is distinctly greater than width of tooth. Bony palate more produced behind line of last molar than in the allied species, the median projection large and well developed. Audital bullse of same relative size as in P. subflavus. Teeth. — Aside from their much greater size, the teeth do not differ notably from those of Pipistrcllus subflaviis. Inner upper incisor distinctly smaller than outer, not approximately equal to it as is the case in P. subflaviis. First upper premolar as large as outer incisor, slightly internal to toothrow, but plainly visible from outer side. First and second upper molars with a distinctly indicated hypocone, no trace of which is present in P. subflaviis. Lo\\er incisors crowded into a continuous row between the canines, the crown of the outermost subterete. Other mandibular teeth essen- tially as in P. subflavus, except for their greater size. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 99; tail, 44; tibia, 15.4; foot, 9.6 (8); forearm, 37; thund), 6.8; second finger, 35; third finger, 63; fourth finger, 53; fifth finger, 47; ear from meatus, 11.4; ear from crown, 9; widlli of ear, 7. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 15 (13);- basal length, 14 (12); basilar length, 11.6 (9.8); palatal length (median, but posterior spine not included), 6 (4.8); width of palate between middle molars, 3 (3) ; intei'orbital constriction, '^Measurements in ))arenthescs are Wxosq oi a,n».(\.\\\t Pipistnllus aub- flavuH horn Raleigh, N, C. (Xo 30,655). 392 rROCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^Tav, 4 '(3. 8); zygomatic breadth, 9 (8); broadth of braincase above roots "of zygomata, 7.2 (6.4); mandible, 11.4 (9.8); maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 5.8 (4.0); mandibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 6 (4.6). Specimens Examined. — One, the .dl. Amcr. M'is. Kat. Hist., XIII, p. 91, May 12, 1900. 394 ITvOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, api)ear:iuce may have been slightly altered by drying. It is quite different in form from that of N. europs, and not thickened at the edge as in N. laticaudatus. Antitragus large, in form exactly like that of N. Jemorosaccus, therefore higher in proportion to its width than in N. laticaiulatm and N. europs. Tragus as in iV. femoro- saccus. Color. — Dorsal surface uniform vandyke-brown, the hairs whitish at base, but not sharply bicolor. In certain lights the extreme tips of the hairs show a faint wash of wood-brown, and in others there is a strong sheen of bluish ecru-drab. Under parts like back, but strongly tinged with wood-brown. Ears and membranes dark brown. Skull. — The skull is intermediate in size between that of Nydi- nomops europs and the larger N, laticaudatus and N. jemorosaccus. In form it shares to a certain extent the shortening of the rostrum that characterizes the Brazilian species, but this peculiarity is not carried as far, nor is the cylindric contour of the interorbital region noticeably impaired. The orifice of the anterior uares is more tul)ular than in N. europs, but less so than in N. Jemorosaccus. Teeth. — The teeth agree in all respects with those of Nyctinomops europs except that the upper incisors are larger and more closely set. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 98; tail, 42; tibia, 12.4; foot, 9 (7.8); forearm, 42; thumb, 8; second finger, 40 ; third finger, 81 ; fourth finger, 60 ; fifth finger, 42; ear from meatus, 15; ear from crown, 11.6; width of ear, 17; tragus, 1.8. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 17.2 (16.6);^ basal length, 15 (14.8) ; basilar length (to posterior edge of pala- tal emargination), 13 (12.4); interorbital constriction, 3.4 (3.4); zygomatic breadth, 10 (9.4); greatest breadth of braincase above roots of zygomata, 8.8 (8); mandible, 12.4 (11.4); maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 6.4 (6.2); mandibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 7 (6.8).'"' Specimens E.vamined. — Twelve, all from the type locality. ^Measurements in parentheses are those of a paratype of Nyctinomops eicrops (9, No. 101,502). *Some of tlie nieusurcnients of a skull of Nyctinomops femorosaccus from Fort Iluachuca, Arizona (No. 36,0:38) are : Greatest length, 19 ; l)asal leng'h. 17 ; zygomatic breadth, 10; maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 7.G. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395 JRemarks. — Although Nyctmomojjs yueatanicus is iu many respects intermetliate between the small N. europs and the larger N. lati- caiidatus and N. femorosaccus, it is a very distinct species. Its relationships are evidently with the larger forms, though super- ficially it bears a close resemblance to N. europs. Mr, Nelson and Mr. Goldman secured the specimens in crevices of the ruins at Chichen, Kza. A bat which they supposed to be the same was seen at Tunkas and ]Merida. Molossus nigricans sp. nov. Type.— Adult male (skin and skull), No. 90,941, United States National Museum (Biological Survey collection). Collected at Acaponeta, Tepic, Mexico, August 2, 1897, by E. W. Nelson and E. A. Goldman. Original number, 11,433. Characters. — Slightly larger than 3Iolossus rufus from Paraguay; color blackish-brown, the shoulders frequently though not invari- ably grayish. Red phase uncommon, brighter than that of J/. rufus, but apparently less so than iu M. pretiosus. Color. — Type: Upper parts a uniform very dark seal-brown, interrupted on shoulders by a crescentic area of broccoli-brown about 10 ram, in width. This lighter color appears again as an ill-defined wash on head between ears. Under parts like back, but everywhere lightened by a wash of broccoli- brown, this most conspicuous on Ihi'oat. Eai-s and membranes an indefinite blackish- brown. Red phase: The few specimens in the red phase have been immersed in alcohol for ten years and are therefore not to be trusted as regards color. They are now a uniform tawny, ratlier less bright than M. 2}retiosus in the same pelage. Variation in color, as shown by the skins iu the dark phase, is slight, and such as occurs is mostly a mere darkening of the general tint and the partial or complete obliteration of the shoulder cres- cent. In the majority of specimens, indeed, this crescent is absent. Skull and Teeth. — The skull is about the same size as that of Molossus rufus, but the rostrum is heavier and the interpterygoid space and the palate are wider. On the other hand, the sagittal and lambdoid crests appear never to reach the extreme development seen in Molossus rufus. Teeth as in Molossus rufus, but distinctly heavier throughout. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 145; tail, 53; tibia, l.S.H; foot, 12 (11); forearm, 52.(5; thumb, 396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, 9; second finger, 48; third finger, 100; fonrth finger, 80; fifth finger, 51. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 23.6 (23) ;' basal length, 19.8 (20); basilar length, 17.4(17.4); median palatal length, 7.2 (7.2); interorbital constriction, 4.8 (4.2); zygomatic breadth, 15.2 (14); breadth of braincase above roots of zygo- mata, 11.4 (11); greatest height of sagittal crest, 2.2 (3); man- dible, 17 (16.6);- maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 8.8 (8) ; mandibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 10 (9). S])echnens Examined. — Forty-six, from the following localities in ^Mexico: Chiapas — Huehuetan, 1, Touila, 1; Co lima — City of Colima, 17; Jalisco — Teuchitlan, 1; Oaxaca — Llano Grande, 1, Tehuantepec City, 2 (1 skin) ; Tamaulipas — Alta Mira, 1 ; Tepic — Acaponeta, 8 (3 skins) ; Tuxtla — San Andres, 1 (skin) ; Vera Cruz — Catemaco, 7 (3 skins) ; Yucatan — Chichen Itza, 7 (skins). Remarks. — That this bat is numerous in parts of Mexico is shown by the following extract from the collectors' field notes : ' ' Common about the houses in Acaponeta. During the day they conceal them- selves under the tiles of roofs. One man told us that he had killed over three hundi-ed of them shortly before our arrival while at work on his roof. ' ' Molossus pretiosus sp. nov. 1901. Molossus rufus Robinson and Lyon, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXIV, p. 156, October 3, 1901. Tyjie. — Adult male (skin and skull), Xo. 102,761, United States National Museum. Collected at La Guaira, Venezuela, July 13, 1900, by Wirt Robinson and M. W. Lyon, Jr. Original number, 106. Characters. — Distinctly smaller than Molossus rufus from Para- guay; color rich dark reddish-brown, the shoulders frequently though not invariably chestnut. Red phase common, much brighter than in Molossus rufus. Color. — Type: Upper parts seal-brown, somewhat more tinged with red than that of Ridgway. Shoulders washed with rufous. Under parts like back, but not as dark, and even more tinged with red. Chest sprinkled with whitish hairs. Ears and membranes blackish. ^ Measurements iu parentheses are those of an adult male Molossus rufus from Sapucay, Paraguay. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397 There is niucli variation iu color, as pointed ont by Robinson and Lyon. The young and a few adults are practically black. In others Ihe rufous is more conspicuous than in the type, sometimes invading the entire pelage to the exclusion of the dark brown. In the completely red specimens the exact shade varies from burnt umber to a rather dark tawny. Skull and Teeth. — The skull and teeth are much smaller than in true Molossus rufiis, but I can detect no tangible difference in form, beyond the rather less development of the sagittal and lamlidoid crests. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 123; tail, 44; tibia, 18; foot, 11.4 (10.8); forearm, 45.4; thumb, 8.2; second finger, 42; third finger, 90; fourth finger, 70; fifth finger, 47. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 21 (23);'' basal length, 18 (20); basilar length, 16 (17.4); median palatal length, 7 (7.2); interorbital constriction, 4 (4.2); zygomatic breadth, 13 (14) ; breadth of braincase above roots of zygomata, 10.6 (11.4) ; greatest height of sagittal crest, 1.8 (3); mandible, (16.6); max- illary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 8 (8) ; mandibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 8.8 (9). Specimens Exammed. — Seventy-one (44 skins), all from the vicinity of La Guaira. Remarks. — Specimens from Sapucay, Paraguay, essentially topotypes of Molossus rufus, which have been received within the past few mouths, show that the bat from northern South America is an easily recognizable form. The Paraguay skins are all a uni- form reddish-brown, very near the raw umber of Ridgway. They are very uniform in color and show no tendency to>vard the bright tints of Molossus pretiosus in the corresponding phase. jSTeither is there any suggestion of a black phase. As far as can be dete?'- miued from the material now at hand, we have a large southern form, true Molossus rufus, which apparently lacks the black phase and in which the red phase is very dull; a large northern form, M. nigricans, in which the red phase is rare, and a small foriii, intermediate iu range, with both phases of pelage well devel- oped and characterized by great richness of color. * Measurements in parentheses are those of an adult male Molossus rufus from Siipucuy, Piiragua}'. 398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Nyctinomus antillularum sp. nov. Type.— Aduh male (iu alcohol), No. 113,188, United States National Museum. Collected at Roseau, Dominica, W. I., August 5, 1901, by H. Selwyn Branch. Characters. — In general similar to the common Nyctinoinus of the Greater Antilles, but size even less, the length of forearm (iu sixteen specimens) ranging from 36.5 mm. to 38.5 mm. Form, Color, etc. — In color and external form this species shows no peculiarities as compared with the common representative of the Ntjd'momm brasiliensis group, occurring in Cuba, Jamaica and Porto Rico. As in the latter, the ears are relatively smaller than those of the continental members of the genus, extending, when laid forward, just to nostril instead of distinctly beyond end of muzzle. The usual brown and red color phases are represented, but as all but two of the specimens at hand have been preserved in alcohol no exact comparison can be made. Skull and Teeth. — The skull and teeth do not differ appreciably from those of Cuban specimens of the larger West Indian form. The first lower premolar is very minute and without distinct ciugidum. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 83; tail, 30; tibia, 12; foot, 6.6 (6); forearm, 47.4; thumb, 7; second finger, 38 ; third finger, 70 ; fourth finger, 58 ; fifth finger, 40; ear from meatus, 15; ear from crown, 11.4; width of ear, 15. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 16; basal length, 14.8; basilar length, 12; median palatal length, 6; inter- orbital constriction, 3.8; zygomatic breadth, 9; breadth of brain- case above roots of zygomata, 8 ; mandible, 1 1 ; maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 5.8; mandibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors) 6. Specimens Examined. — Twenty-one, from the following islands: Dominica, 2 ; Montserrat, 1 ; St. Kitts, 6 (2 skins) ; St. Lucia, 1 1 ; Tobago, 1 . Natalus major sp. nov. Tijjje.— Adult male (in alcohol). No. 101,395, United States National Museum. Collected near Savaneta, San Domingo, W. I., by W. M. Gabb. Characters. — Like Xatalus stramineus, but much larger: Fore- arm, 42; longest finger, t that the interorbital region is narrower and more distinctly concave. Anterior nares a little mo'-e produced backward than in the larger species. Teeth as in V. vittatus, bul uuilormly much smaller, the outer upper incisors excepted. These are actually as well as relatively larger than in the larger animal. Measurements. — External measurements of type (from skin) : Head and body, 70; tibia, 24; foot, 13 (12); forearm, 56; thumb, 17; second digit, 4fi; third digit, 130; fourth digh, 93; fifth digit, 88; ear from meatus, 19; width of ear, 11.4. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, — (30) ;" basal length, — (28); basilar length,- — (24.4); median palatal length, 16 (16.6); interorbital constriction, 7 (7.6); zj^gomatic b.'-eadth, 18 (19); mastoid breadth, — (16); breadth of palate between middle molars, 8 (8.4) ; mandible, 21.8 (22.4) ; maxillary toothrow ((Exclusive of incisors), 12 (12.6); front of canine to back of second molar, 11.6 (12); mandibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 13 (13. 4).''^ Specimen Examined. — One, the type. Remarks. — This species is readily distinguishable from Vampyrops vittatus by its smaller size, lighter color, and by the faintness of the face markings and dorsal line. In size it approaches V. reeifinus and V. infascus, though it is larger than either ; forearm, 56, as opposed to 41 in V. reeifinus and 52 in V. infuscus. From the latter it differs in the presence of the white dorsal line. The upper incisors probably show the first suggestion of the form found in Vampyrops zarhinus and V. reeifinus, as the middle pair are smaller than in V. vittatus. They are, however, practically in contact with each other, though with a lens a slight space between them can be detected. " Measurements in parentlieses are those of an adult female Vampyrops vittatus from Valparaiso, Santa Marta region, Colombia (No. 15,101, Am. Mus. Nat Hist.), kindly loaned by Dr. J. A. Allen. '5 Some of the cranial measurements of the type of V. reeifinus given by Thomas (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 7th ser., VIII, p. 193, Septem- ber, 1901) are as follows ; Greatest length, 24 ; basal length, 19 ; front of canine to back ot second molar, 8.4. 1902.1 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Stenoderma luoiae sp. nov. Type-Mn\t female (in alcohol), No. 110,921, United States National Museum. Collected on Santa Lucia Island, West Indies, FebmaiT 4, 1901, by H. Sehvyn Branch. , ,, . . -,, C/iaracfers. -Larger than Stenoderma nlchoUsi of Donunica, its nearest geographical ally, and inner upper incisors more noticeably bifid. J^Iuch smaller than S. montserratense, and with a distinct white shoulder spot. , , , , i f ,i,^ fnr Color —After a year's immersion in alcohol the color of the fur is a uniform clay color, that of the back, limbs and membranes strongly washed with wood-brown, that of the under i^arts some- what lightened by faintly paler hair-tips. A small but yery dis- tinct whitish spot on shoulder at point where menibrane joins bod>. Ear. and noseleaf light-brown. Membranes dark-brown through- out, except that the antebrachium has a distinct V^^^J^ovdev extend- ing from base of thumb halfway to shoulder. Bones of fingers and distal half of forearm much lighter than membrane Ears, Membranes, etc. -The ears, membranes and external features in general are as in a topotype of S. mchollsi tL^^-Ihe skull is distinctly larger than that of Stenoderma nMlsi, but of essentially the same form throughout Teeth much more robust than those of S. mcholUi The inner upper incisor is yery distinctly bifid, in this respect differnig nota- Trom that of the related species. Crowns of first and second mkars rather broader relatiyely to their iength than in S.n.<^^ Posterior molar minute, its area scarcely more than half that of middle incisor. Second lower molar with outline of crown more nearly square than in S. nichollsL body 65 (53) ;» Ubia, 1!) (16.4); foot, 12.1, (12); foot wUhou daws 12 (11 ; ioreann, 47 (44) ; thumb, IS ("•«): -^l t"; 41 (36)' third anger. 110 (96); fourth finger. ,6 (H1); mfingor. -1 (66); ear from meat.., 18 (18); ear f,-on, crown, 14 (13.6); width of ear, 14 (14). ,.,,,, ,x i ,,.i Crania measurements of type : Greatest length, 23 , 20.4 ; bu.al length. 20 (17); basilar length, 17 (15); ^^'^^-^'^, 6 (5 4) ; zygomatic breadth. 15 (18.6) ; mastoid breadth. 12 (D , b..adtWf palate betweenmiddl^™!^^ 408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, 13.4 (12); maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 7.6 (6.4); frout of cauiue to back of second molar, 7.2 (6); maudibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 8 (6.8). Specimens Examined. — Four, all from the type locality. Remarks. — Stenoderma lucice is readily distinguishable from aS. montserratense by its smaller size and white-spotted shoulder, and from S. nichollsi by its larger size, heavier teeth, and distinctly bifid inner upper incisors. Hemiderma tricolor f^p. nov. Tiipe.—XdnW. ? (skin and skull), No. 114,005, United States National Museum. Collected in cave at Sapucay, Paraguay, December 5, 1901, by William Foster, Original number, -589. Characters. — Size and general appearance as in Hemiderma per- spicillatum, but fur longer and more silky in texture and the three color bands on the hairs of back strongly contrasted. Color. —Hairs of dorsal surface with three sharply defined color bands. Beginning at base these are (a) hair-brown, much darker than that of Kidgway, 4 mm. ; (6) grayish- white, 5 mm. ; and (e) hair-brown like that of base, 2 mm. The extreme tips show a faint silv^ery-gray wash which varies in intensity according to light. As the fur is loo.se and silky in texture and everywhere glossy and variable with light the combination of colors is difficult to describe. On crown of head, sides of neck and region between and imme- diately behind shoulders the grayish-white appears conspicuously at surface, but elsewhere the hair-brown is in excess. The slightest disarrangement of the hairs brings the light band prominently into view. The color pattern of the back may be traced across under surface of neck, though much dulled. On chest and belly the basal area is a dull brownish slate color, succeeded by a narrow silvery- grayish band and a still narrower terminal strip of broccoli-brown. The extreme tips have the same gloss as those of the back, but the general color is broccoli-brown. Skull and Teeth. — The skull and teeth do not differ appreciably from those of Hemiderma perspicillatum. Measurements. — External measurements of type : Head and body, 68;" tibia, 16.4; foot, 13 (11); forearm, 42; thumb, 13; second finger, 32; third finger, 91; fourth finger, 65; fifth finger, 66; ear from meatus, 20. '" From fresh specimen, by collector. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409 Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 22.4; basal length, 19.6; basilar length, 17.6; interorbital constriction, 5.6; mastoid breadth, 10.8; mandible, 15; maxillary toothrow (exclu- sive of incisors), 7.4; mandibular toothrow (exclusive of in- cisors), 8. Specimens Examined. —Six, all from the type locality. Remarks. —Adults are very uniform in coloration, the five speci- mens showing no variations worthy of note. A half -grown young is dark sooty brown above, dull slaty below. The tricolored pat- tern of the "hairs of the back is nearly as distinct as in the adults, and much more so than in Hemidenn-L perspicillatmi. Brachyphylla nana sp. nov. 2'ype.__Skull 1^0. 103,828, United States National Museum. Collected at El Guama, Cuba, March 10, 1900, by William Palmer and J. H. Riley. Original number, 108. C/iamc^ers.— External characters not known. Skull much smaller than that of any other described member of the genus, its basal length only 22 mm. Skull— In general form the skull closely resembles that of true Brachyphylla caveriiarum from the island of St. Vincent, but the interorbital region is less rounded and the interpterygoid fossa extends forward to within 1 mm. of posterior outline of palate. yee«A.— The; only teeth preserved are the anterior maxillary molars. These differ very conspicuously from the corresponding teeth of B. caveriiarum in their much smaller size and in the rela- tively greater breadth of the palatal side of the crown. 3feasurements.— Basal length, 22 (28);^^ basilar length, 21.6 (25); median palatal length, 10.4 (14); zygomatic breadth, 14.6 (17.4) ; breadth of braiucase above roots of zygomata, 12 (13) ; interorbital constriction, 6 (6.8); lachrymal breadth, 8.4 (9); distance between outer edges of anterior upper molars, 9.8 (11); distance between inner edges of anterior upper molars, 5 (5.6) ; maxillary toothrow (alveoli, exclusive of incisors ), 9 (11); crown of first upper molai, 3 x 2.6 (3.4 x 2.8). Specimen Examined.— One, the type. Remarks.— The single skull on which this species is l)aso(l was found in a pellet of the Cuban barn owl. This and other ■ i« Measurementshi^'pareTiTh^ses areUiose of a topotype of Brachyphylla cavernarum {^, No. 106,085). 410 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [May, pellets of the same birds contained remains of Arlibem, Phyl- lonyderis poeyi and Mus alexandrhms. Monophyllus cubanus sp. nov. Type.—M\\\t male (skin and skull), No. 113,()74, United States National Museum. Collected at Baracoa, eastern Cuba, February 6, 1902, by William Palmer. Original number, 645. Characters. — Nearest the Jamaicair Monophyllus redinani, but size less and skull with narrower rostrum and less deep posterior portion of mandible. Color. — Upper parts broccoli-brown, rather darker than Ridg- way's Plate III, No. 15, except in region across shoulders. Be- neath ecru-drab, much tinged with dull brown. In some skins the brown of the upper parts approaches prouts-brown. Ears and membranes blackish. Skull and Teeth. — The skull resembles that of Monophyllus red- viani in general appearance, but the rostrum is much more slender, a character equally noticeable whether viewed from above or below. Zygomata similar in form to those of M. redmani, but more lightly built. Mandible more slender than that of M. redmani, the difference particularly noticeable in the posterior portion, where depth at a point midway from coronoid process to condyle is much less relatively to distance between these points than in the Jamaican animal. Teeth as in Monophyllus redmani. Measurements. — External measurements of type: Total length, 67; tail, 8; tibia, 16; foot, 11 (10); forearm, 38. 6; thumb, 11 ; second finger, 35 ; third finger, 80 ; fourth finger, 57 ; fifth finger, 50; ear from meatus, 13; ear from crown, 11.4; width of ear, 7.6. Cranial measurements of type: Greatest length, 21.4 (22.4);^** basal length, 20 (21.4); basilar length, 18 (19.4); zygomatic breadth, 9.6 (10); least interorbital breadth, 4 (4); breadth of rostrum at space between premolars, 3.2 (4); greatest breadth of braincase, 9 (9) ; maxillary toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 8 (8.6); mandible, 14 (15 4); mandibular toothrow (exclusive of incisors), 8.4 (9). Specimens E.vamined. — Fifty-six (9 skins), all from the type locality. '* Measurements in parentheses are those of an adult male Monophyllus redmani from Kingston, Jamaica (No. 64,480). 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. "A^l Remarks.— Momphyllus cubanu.s is readily distinguishable fro... M. redmani bv its small size and lightly built skull. In the general form of both 'skull and teeth it is, however, more closely related to the large Jamaican species than to the smaller members of the genus. Monophyllus luciae sp. no v. Type.-A.dn\t male (in alcohol). No. 106,095, United States National Museum. Collected on Santa Lucia Island, West Indies, February 4, 1901, by H. Selwyn Branch. Characters.— ^iost nearly resembling Monophyllus plethodoii of Barbados, but larger and with less crowded teeth. Color —After about a year's immersion in rum the specimens are rather darker and more tinged with red than in Moaoph>jlltcs cubanus, but this character may be the result of the action of the preservative fluid. Skull and Teeth.— In general form the skull agrees with that of Monophyllm plethodon, and differs from that of M. redmam and M. cubanm in the large, inflated braincase, broad interorbital region and short rostrum. The zygomatic arches are strong and well developed, more so, apparently, than in 3/. plethodon. Ros- trum broader tbau in the Barbados species. Teeth as in Monophyllus plethodon, except that the first upper premolar is separated from the canme and also from the second premolar by a narrow space, of much less extent, however, than in the other members of the genus. Measurements.— Externa\ measurements of type: Total length, 80- tail, 15; tibia, 19; foot, 11 (10); forearm, 42; thumb, 11; second finger, 35; third finger, 88; fourth finger, 05; fifth finger, 55; ear from meatus, 15; ear from crown, 11; width of ear, 10.4. Cranial measurements of tvpe: Greatest length, 24 (21.6);=" basal length, 22 (19.4); basilar length, 19.6 (17.8); zygomatic breadth, 10 (9.8); least interorbital breadth, 4.4 (4.6); breadth of rostrum at space between premolars, 4.6 (— ); greatest breadth of braincase, 9.8 (9.8); maxillary toothrow ^exclusive of » Measurements in parentheses are those of the type of Monophyllus plethodon. 4T_> PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, incisni-s), 8 (7.2); mandible, 15 (14); mandibular toolhrow (ex- clusive of incisors), 8.4 (7.8). Specimens Examined. — Sixteen, all from the type locality. Remarhs. — As might be expected, the Monophyllm of Santa Lucia is nearly related to that of Barbados, Its larger size and less crowded teeth readily distinguish it. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 413 THE MOLLTJSCA OF THE MT. MITCHELL REGION, NORTH CAROLINA. BY BRYANT WALKER AND HENRY A. PILSBRY. This report is based upon material collected by :\Iessrs. James H. Ferriss and Bryant Walker in the summer of 1901. The results of the " Pentadelphian " expedition of 1899 to the Great Smoky mountains^ demonstrated the fact that these moun- tains, notably in their higher portions, possessed a fauna peculiar to themselves and quite distinct from that of Roan jNIountaiu which lies about seventy-five miles to the northeast. And in connection with this, it was stated that " the mountain region between the Nolachucky and Clingman's Dome is wholly unknown malacologicallj'. The expedition of 1901 was undertaken primarily for the pur- pose of exploring Mt. Mitchell, the highest peak of the Appa- lachian range, with an altitude of 6,711 feet, of whose fauna nothing was known except a few species collected by Hemphill m a hurried visit nearly twenty years before, and incidentally to deter- mine, if possible, whether the valley of the French Broad river, which here breaks through the mountains, is the dividmg hne between the Roan and Great Smoky faunas. The party consisted of Messrs. Ferriss and Walker and two ladies. Leaving the railroad at Paint Rock, N. C, a little station on the French Broad river just over the line from Tennessee, alti- tude about 1,200 feet, two days were spent in exploring the banks on both sides of the river. From there the route lay almost due south for ten mountain miles to Bluff mountain, which is the highest of the range lying south of the river for a considerable distance. It took the wretched crowbaits which hauled the camp ecpiipagc in a wagon that weighed more tlian the load, all hands pushing up the steep grades, nearly all day to reach Baker's, an old lumber camp, which marked the end of wagon travel. Here camp was made, and the next moru- 1 Vide these ProceeiUngf, 1900, p. 110. 414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, ing the party " toted " themselves and their luggage to the summit. Bluff mountain derives its name from the long, narrow plateau nearly three-quarters of a mile in length which forms its top, the highest point of which is about 4,700 feet above the sea. The State line between Tennessee and North Carolina crosses its western extremity. The forest here is entirely of hard wood, and the greater part of the plateau is covered by high trees. IMost of the underbrush has been cleared off from the summit, which is fre- quently used for camp meetings and other public gatherings. Most of the collecting here was done along the sides of the cove on the Tennessee side, where \yolf creek heads. The southern exposures, as usual, were too dry for satisfactory work. Three days were sufRcieut to satisfy the party that the faima was substantially that of the cove region, and that the mountain was too low for the development of any special fauna, such as had been found on the higher summits both to the north and the south. And, as the mountains immediately north of the river offered no better prospect, it was decided to return to Paint Rock and proceed directly to INIt. Mitchell. From Black Mountain station on the Southern Railroad, the journey was made by wagon to Tyson's, an ancient inn at the foot of the Black ^Mountain range. Here the baggage was loaded on horses for the teu-mile climb to the summit of Mt. Mitchell. The road followed up the course of one of the branches of the North Foi-k cf the Swannanoa river to its headwaters, from which a sharp ascent leads to the top of the ridge at Patton's Knob, at an elevation of 6,000 feet. From there the trail leads nearly due north around Potato Top, directly over Clingman's Peak (Mt. Gibbs on the map of the Topographical Survey), which is only a few feet lower than Mitchell, and where Ferriss " drew the first blood" by finding the long-sought Vitrea clingmani under a log beside the trail, and then winding around the Hallbach, and across Wilson's Gap on up to Mitchell. Here the summit is a small " bald," in the centre of which is the grave and monument of Prof. Elisha Mitchell, who lost his life while exploring this moun- tain in 1857. Camp was pitched just beyond the summit, at the liead of a grassy slope and near a fine spring of the purest water. The forest extends clear to the lop of INIitchell, and in some places the tops of trees have been cut off to allow a view from the 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415 "'bald" which crowns the summit. It is ahnost wholly spruce aud balsam, a few birches beiug found here and there. Open places are quite frequent, and are often covered with a dense growth of the hellebore, the favorite food of Pohjgyra andrewsce. The ground is saturated with moisture and I he rocks aud fallen trees are covered with thick moss, Avhich needs only to be sat upon to remind one of a sponge. Two days were spent exploring the upper slopes of the moun- tain. Then Ferriss, with one of the guides, left on a three days' trip, following the Black Mountain chaui to the north, along which five great peaks Avere to be seen ranging from 6,300 to 6,600 feet, and which seemed from the camp to be higher even than Mitchell itself. Following bear tracks along the ridge, he went as far north as the fourth peak (Cattail), from which he descended along Cattail branch to the Caney river, and thence up through Wil- son's Cove to Mitchell, stopping for a short time at :Meadow Cove. Two days were spent by the parly in Wilson's Cove, which is heavily timbered with great basswoods and buckeyes, and most of the material was collected there. An attempt to follow down the northeast slope of the mountain along the headwaters of Rock creek, a tributary of the Toe river, was blocked by a high fall in the creek and was also conchologically a failure. After spending a week on Mitchell, the party returned to Pal- tou's Knob. Here Walker left to return home, and Ferriss con- tinued the work alone. He explored Potato Top (6,600 feet), aud crossing the gap which separates the headwaters of the Swan- nanoa river from those of the Toe, ascended the Pinnacle of the Blue ridge (alt. 5,600 feet), reaching the headwaters of the South Toe river on its easterly slope. Returning again to Patton's Knob, he followed along the ridge to the west, camping at Balsam Gap, between the Ivy and Swan- nanoa rivers (alt. 5,000 feet). " Here the spruce forest ceases and the buckeyes and beeches set in." From this camp he went down the west slope of the gap to the Ivy river. Leaving the gap, he coutmued south along the ridge of the Great Craggy mountains as far as Big Craggy, where he camped until he was literally drowned out by the great storm of August 12 to lit. It rained almost continually while on Craggy, so that but little collecting was done. But he got down into Bee Tree Cove on the wcst side while 416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, there. " Timber was scarce on the tops of the Cniggies. There was much pasture, and some of the red rhododendron. Wide * balds,' but exceedingly rocky, the most mouutaiulike of anything I have seen" (J. H. F.). After the return from Craggy, the remainder of the time was spent in exploring Tyson's Cove. The Fauna. So far as the material before us affords a basis of judgment, it goes to shovv: First— Thsit the French Broad river is not in itself the dividing line between the Eoan and Smoky faunas. Second. — That in all probability there is no sharp line of de- markation anywhere. But that in the intermediate region lying between these faunal centres, the species peculiar to each mingle to a greater or less extent, according as they find acceptable condi- tions of environment. Third. — That in the French Broad river region there are a number of 'peculiar forms which tend to show that it has, at least, some of the characteristics of a distinct faunal ai^ea. Thus, in the species which inhabit the lower levels between the mountains, and which may be considered as the cove fauna, we find that the great majority are species common in the Appalachian range along its whole extent. Occasionally, however, in these, such as Polygyra tridentata and Pyramidula alternata, local races are developed, which are eminently characteristic of the different regions. In addition to these species of general occurrence, we find others which are apparently restricted to narrower limits and which, with the local races above mentioned, give these areas the peculiar features, which taken in connection with the still more differenti- ated elements occupying the higher levels, justify their separation as distinct faunas, or rather faunulas. Taking the whole region from Roan to the Great Smoky moun- tains into consideration, however, we find that so far as the cove species are concerned, the differences are not so great as they appear at first sight, and that in reality they are comparatively small though sufficiently well marked. The only species peculiar to the coves around Roan are the large and small forms of Polygyra tridentata, Pyramidula hnjanti, Polygyra subpalliata and Ompha- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 417 Una rugeli. Of these, the first three are found as far south, at least, as the French Broad, and the last two are offshoots from the summit fauna slightly modified by more favorable conditions of environment. In the same way, of the species inhabiting the coves of the Smoky moimtains, only Polyyyra christyi, P. depilata,^ Pyramidula altcrnata costata, Omphalina fuliginosa polita, Ompha- lina Icevigata latior and perlcevis, Zonitoides patuloides and Punctum hlandianum have not as yet been found to range far enough to the north to mingle with the southern extension of the Roan species. Polygyra chilhoiveensis, P. jyilula, P. monodon cincta and Strobilops labyrinthica strebeli extend at least as far north as the French Broad river, and some of them much further.^ Thus we find a large proportion of what were supposed to be the characteristic cove species of these two regions mingled together in the valley of the French Broad. On the other hand, just as there are some species peculiar to each of these regions, so we find in the coves tributary to the French Broad drainage a few characteristic forms, which seem to be (without exception) lacking in the coves both to the north and the south. From Bluff mountain to Mitchell, throughout this region, there appears a peculiar form of Polygyra andreivsce, which is inter- mediate in size and shape between the typical andrewscd of Roan and Mitchell, and the larger variety normalis, which inhabits the coves from Roan to the Little Tennessee river, and is decidedly characteristic of the French Broad region. It extends, however, north into the lower coves of the Roan region. The beautiful and long-lost Pyramidula alternata mordax is apparently restricted to a small portion of this area. The almost total absence of typical Gastrodonta gularis, so abun- dant in Roan and in the Smoky mountains, and its replacement by two peculiar forms, var. theloldes A. D. Brown and var. decussata P. and v., is also another striking feature of this region. Again, we find in the French Broad valley a number of species, mostly common and Avidespread, which are found in the Roan region, but 2 The "P. depilata" collected at Johnson City, Tenn,, by Rhoads (P. A. N. S. P., 1896, p. 493) is P. stenotrema nuda. {Vide these Pi-oceed- zngs, 1900, p. 129.) '■^ P. cMlhoweensis, Campbell Co., Tenn. (Wethcrby), and Carysvillc. Campbell Co., Tenn. (Walker and Clapp coll.). 27 418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, wbicli seem to be missing in the coves of the Smoky mountains. Such are : Polygyra infleda. Polygyra clausa. Polygyra sayii. Vitrea hammonis. Polygyra altispira. Omphalina fidiginosa. Polygyra profunda. Several of these species have a range along the Cumberland plateau considerably further south. But the assiduous collecting of Ferriss and others during several years has wholly failed to discover them in the coves of the Great Smoky range. Whether the valley of the French Broad is practically the southern limit of the range of these species along the main chain of the Appalachians is not known, as the region south of Bluff mountain is as yet wholly unexplored. But, from the comparatively few specimens found in 1901, it would seem to be a fair inference that such was the case. Taking all these factors into consideration, we would say that as a whole, the cove fauna of the French Broad valley is more closely related to that of the Roan region than to that of the Great Smoky mountains. The same general fact appears also when the fauna of the higher elevations is considered. The characteristic species of the Roan summit fauna are : Polygyra andreivsce (typical). Gastrodonta capsella jilacentula. Polygtjra wheatleyi. Gastrodonta gularis. Polygyra .-I'bpalliafa. Gastrodonta accrra. Polygyra altispira. Gastrodonta andreivsce. Omphalina rugeli. Gastrodonta ccelaxis. Omphalina suhplana. Gastrodonta lamellidens. Vitrinizonites latissimus. Philomyms ivetherbyi. Vitrea sculptilis. Philomycus hemphilli. Vitrea carolinensis. Sucdnea ovalis. Gastrodonta capsella. Of these, Polygyra wheatleyi. Vitrea carolinensis. Omphalina subplana. Gastrodonta gularis (in its vari- Vitrinizonites latissimus. ous forms). Vitrea sculptilis. Gastrodonta acerra. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419 Gastrodonta capsella. Philomyciis hemphillii. Gastrodonta cajisella placentula. Succinea ovalis, Gastrodonta lamellidens. are all toiuid on the summits of the Smoky mouutains aud nearly all of them ou Mitchell or Bluff mountain. Of the remainder, Pohjgijra andrewsce is the characteristic species of Mt. jNlitchell, and Polygxjra altispira and Gastrodonta andrewsce Avere found generally distributed in the French Broad region, so that Polijgyra suhpaUiata, Omj^halma rugeli, Gastrodonta coelaxis and Philomycus wetherbyi are really the only species peculiar to the Roan summit. Upon the higher levels of the Smoky mountains, on the other hand, we find a larger number of peculiar species which do not seem to extend so far north as the French Broad. These are : Polygyra ferrissii. Omplialina andrewsce montivaga. Polygyra clarkii. Vitrinizoiiites lasitismiis. Vitrea petrophila. Vitrinizonites uvidermis. Vitrea pentadelphia. The apparent poverty of the higher peaks of the French Broad region in peculiar species was both a surprise and a disappointment. The probability that Mt. Mitchell, the giant of them all, would at least furnish a rival to the beautiful Polygyra ferrissii seemed so great, that the failure to find one was scarcely compensated by the rediscovery of the rare little Vitrea clingmani Dall. This seems to be the only species peculiar to jNIt. ^Mitchell, and the expedition felt like engraving on its highest pinnacle the old proverb: "montes parturiunt, nascitur ridiculus mus." The following list of all the species known from the mountain region lying between Roan mountain and the Little Tennessee river will show the general range of each species in the three districts ,that have been explored, upon which the foregoing remarks have been based : 420 proceedings of the academy of Comparative List. R. =Eoan ; F. = French Broad ; S. = Smoky, [May, Helicina 'occulta Polygyra tridentata tridentntn tennesseensis. frauduleiita rugeli inflecta profunda sayii chilhotceensis albolahris albolabris major exoleta ferrissii suhpalliata palliata appressa perigrapta clarkii andreiDSce andrewsce normalis andrewscB altivaga andreiosm intermedia . . . thyroides clausa loheatUyi christyi edwardsi edwardsi magnifumoaa. . stenotrema depilata hirsuta pilula altispira monodon cincta Strobilops labyrinthica stre beli Bifidaria contracta pentodon Vertigo boUesiana CocJilicopa lubrica , Gircinaria concava Omphalina kopnodes , fuliginosa Omplialina fuliginosa polita. IcBvigata IcBvigata latior Imvigata perlmvis rugeli subplana andrewscB andrewsce montivaga. . . . Vitrinizonites latissimus latissimus umdermis Vitrea hammonis icheatleyi cUngmani petropliila pentadelphia. indentata rJioadsi sculptilis carolinensis carolinensis wetherbyi. . . ferrea approxima vanattai Euconulus sterkii fulmis ? chersinus Zonitoides arboreus patuloides minusculus miliuin elUottii Gastrodonta intertexta acerra demissa cerinoidea ? ligera gularis gularis lawcB gularis tJieloides . . gularis decussata , gularis cuspidata. suppressa cndaxis * P. clausa was not found in Smoky mountains. It occurs, however, at Hayesvillc, N. C. ^This species also occurs at Lickstone mountain, near Waynesville, N. C. fi Cited by Wetherby. We have seen no specimens, and it is quite probable that the identification is erroneous as the group had not been differentiated when Wetherby's list was published. 'These species were cited by Wetherby in 1881. As they, are not included in his later paper (1894), it is probable that he found that his former identification was erroneous. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 421 Oastrodonta interna andrewsoB multidentata lamellidens clappi walkeri significana f capsella capsella placentula . AgrioUmax campestris. . Philomycus carolinensis. tcetherbyi hemphUli R F 8 XXX X X X XXX X X x' X X X X X XXX X XXX Pyramidula alternata alternata fergusoni ? . . alternata costata .... . alternata mordax perspectiva , hryanti Helicodiscus lineatus , Punctum pygmcEum blandianum Sphyradmm edentulum Succinea ovalis CarycMum exigunm List of Species. HELIOINID^. Helicina occulta Say. Wilson's Cove, Mt. Mitchell. A few large specimens, diam. 7;^ to 8 mm., were found under the dead leaves around the roots of the basswoods and buckeyes ; all were of the uniform deep reddish-yellow color characteristic of the species from other localities. There was no apparent tendency to the great variation in color noted by Weth- erby in the Roan mountain specimens. HELIOIDJB. Polygyra tridentata (Say). With the exception of the large variety found at Paint Rock mentioned below, this species, which was found nearly everywhere, shows but slight variation fi'om a common type, which seems decidedly characteristic of the whole region from Roan to the Smoky mountains. It is usually rather small, varyhig froni 12i to 14 ram. in diameter at Roan to 17 to 18^ at Bluff mountain. The size seems to increase quite regularly from the north to the south, specimens from Cat-tail (14 to 15) being smaller than those from Wilson's Cove (13| to loj), while these are decidedly smaller than those from Paint Rock and Bluff mountain. This race, for it hardly seems to be suflScieutly differentiated to be entitled ^Specimens from Roan before us beloug to the smooth form herein- after meationed, but are not typical fergusoni. Wetherby's specimena were probably the same. 422 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF ' [May, to varietal rank, is characterized by closely coiled whorls and usually rather high spire, in this respect showing some approach to P. fraudulenta. But the aperture is usually quite typical in the position and shape of the lip teeth. Occasional specimens exhibit a slight tendency to " dishing" of the upper portion of the lip, but in such instances the deepest concavity of the lip is bet\^een the labial teeth rather than opposite the UDper tooth, as in fraudu- lenta, nor is there any rounding out of the upper lip so character- istic of that species. The shell is usually of a deep i-eddish horn color, with a rose-tinted lip, and closely and rather heavily striate. Wetherby (Journ. Gin. Soc. K H., 1894, p. 211) has called at- tention to this form as peculiar to the Roan region, and the material b«^fore us shows that it extends through this whole region with but slight variation except in size. The "buttressed" lower tooth developed in the Smoky mountains'* seems peculiar to that region, as no tendency in that direction appears in any of the shells col- lected in the French Broad drainage. Three of five specimens from Bluff mountain have an unusually heavy wide flat white lip, which sensibly diminishes the aperture. In addition to the locali- ties already mentioned, Ferriss reports it from Tyson's Cove, Meadow Cove, Ivy river. Toe river and Bee Tree creek. Polygyra tridentata tennesseensis n. v. At the foot of the high bluffs which line the south side of the French Broad river below Paint Rock, just over the line in Ten- nessee, there occurred a very distinct form of P. tridentata, char- acterized by its large size, depressed complanata-Y\k.Q form, but closely and regularly striated. The lip is that of the typical tridentata, with rather small marginal teeth. Of twenty specimens the smallest was 19 and the largest 24 mm. in diam., the average being 22|-. Only two were less than 21. This form is probably the same as that mentioned by Wetherby" from Braden mountain, Campbell county, Tenn., and is the same described by Clapp" from Oakdale, Morgan county, and Concord, Knox county, Tenn. It is also the same form found at Elizabethton, Tenn., and errone- ously by one of us referred to var. complanata.^^ The Elizabethton 9 Vide these Proc, 1900, p. 117. ^'^ Journ. Cincinnati Soc. JS. H., 1904, p. 212. 1' These Proceedings for 1900, p. 117. ^"^ Nautilus, XII, 120. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 423 examples are ligliter iu color than the Paiut Rock specimens and rather smaller, being from Id^ to 21 J mm. iu diameter, in this respect resembling the Moi'gan county shells, described by Clapp. Polygyra fraudulenta Pilsbry. jNIeadow Cove, a single typical example, diameter 15 mm. Polygyra rugeli (Shuttl.). Of general occurrence, but not so abundant as in the Great Smoky mountains. At Paint Rock, south side, where it occurred with P. tridentata tennesseensis, the specimens were uniformly large, 13|^ to 14J mm. in diameter. Another lot from the same side, collected later by one of the guides, but probably further dowTi the river, were smaller, 11 to 12;^ mm. Similar specimens were found at Paint Rock creek, on the north side of the river. This seems to be the prevailing size throughout the French Broad region, and only occasional specimens from Bluff mountain, Tyson's Cove and Wilson's Cove exceeded 13 mm. in diameter. Ferriss found a few specimens also at Meadow Cove, Ivy river. Toe river and Bee Tree creek. Polygyra inflecta (Say). At Paint Rock, on the south side of the river, all the specimens were small, 9 to 9 J mm. in diameter, with the whole shell more or less tinged with pink and frequently the lip as well. In the coves aroimd Mitchell, Cat-tail, Tyson's and Wilson's, all the specimens were albinos and quite large, 13^ to 14 mm. in diameter. Not a single normally colored individual was found in any of these localities. While occasional albino examples are not uncommon in nearly all the American Helicidse, this occurrence of a race wholly albino inhabiting a large extent of territory is quite w^ithout precedent. Why this one species should be affected in this way is difficult to imderstand. Koue of the other species in the district exhibited any tendency to albinism to any greater extent than is likely to occur anywhere. It forms one of the striking peculiarities of the Mitchell fauna, and is analogous to the occur- rence of Polxjfjyra suhpalliata at Roan, which is always of the same pale -green color. Polygyra profunda (Say). Paint Rock, south side, two specimens only; evidently scarce. 424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Polygyra sayii (Binn.). Paint Eock, south side, and Wilson's Cove, a few specimens with no special characteristics. Polygyra chilhoweensis (Lewis). Paint Rock creek, on the north side of the river. Two speci- mens only. This extends the range of this species considerably farther north than has hitherto been recorded." Along the Cumberland plateau it has, however, a range consid- erably farther north, having been found in Campbell county by Wetherby." Similar specimens are now in the collections of G. H. Clapp and Bryant Walker. It seems probable that the French Broad valley is about the northern limit of the range of this species along the Aj^palachians. Polygyra albolabris (Say). This species occurred only at Paint Rock, on the north side of the river, where it is apparently quite abundant. AJl the specimens are more or less deeply tinged with rose and one is obscurely banded below the suture. They are very similar to the Cade's Cove examples mentioned in the report on the " Pentadelphian " ex- pedition. Polygyra exoleta (Binn.). Paint Rock, south side, two specimens. Cat-tail branch, one example. Polygyra palliata (Say). Paint Rock, south side, four specimens, 22 to 24 mm. in diam- eter; quite typical. Polygyra appressa perigrapta Pilsbry. Paint Rock, on both sides of the river. Bluff mountain and Wilson's Cove. Koticeably smaller and more compressed than those from the Smoky mountains. Of fifteen specimens from these localities, the smallest was 15 J mm. in diameter, the largest 17^, average 16^ mm., while those from the Smoky region range " In the J, H. Thompson collection, now in the possession of one of us, are two specimens labeled " Roan Mt. ex auctore." As the species is not cited bj' "Wetherljy from Roan and there are no specimens from that locality in the Lewis collection, now owned by jNIr. G. H. Clapp, it seems probable that there is some mistake in regard to the Thompson sliclls "Jbwr. C. ,9. N. n., 1894, p. 212. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425 from 19 to 21^ mm. and are in every way larger and finer speci- mens. Polygyra andrewsae (W. G. Binn.). Tlie typical form of this fine species was quite abundant all along the ridge from Clingman Peak to INIt. Mitchell. It is partial to the hellebore ( Veratruyn viride) which grows rankly in the open spaces, and was usually found either roosting beneath the large leaves or hidden in the grass around the roots. The shells are exceedingly fragile and w'ere often crushed between the fingers in the slight pressure occasioned by lifting them from their hiding- places. They are uniformly of a dark olive-green color, with a thin, narroAV, concave lip. Of sixty-five specimens the largest was 27^ mm. in diameter, the smallest 22^, average 2Aj^. Compared with Roan mountain specimens they differ only in size, being on the average slightly larger. Of thirty-nine Roan specimens the smallest was 19, the largest 22iV. The shells from both localities are alike in the extreme fragility, narrow lip and shape. And in both places this form is found only on the highest parts of the mountain. Polygyra andrewsae normalis Pilsbry. This form is purely a cove dweller and is rarely found at an elevation of more than 5,000 feet. From 1,200 to 4,000 is about its usual range. It occurred sparingly on both sides of the river at Paint Rock (alt. 1,200 feet), and on Bluff mountain as far up as Baker's (alt. 3,000 feet). These specimens were of the usual type and varied from 35J to 37J in diameter. It also occurred at Tyson's Cove (alt. 4,000 feet), Meadow Cove and Wilson's Cove (alt. 3,500 feet). Those from Wilson's were the largest yet seen. Of thirty-seven specimens, the largest was 40^ mm. in diameter, the smallest 34, average 37 J. They vary con- siderably in shape, frequently becoming subconical as shown by the following measurements: 37-^ x 32, 41 J x 35J, 39:} x 35 and 38.} X 28}-. Occasional pale-green albinos occurred. Polygyra andrewsae intermedia n. subsp. Throughout this region, occupying the higher levels from 3,500 to 5,000 feet, and thus ranging above the var. normalis, but below the typical anclrewsce, w^as found a well-marked race which cannot be satisfactorily assigned to any of the recognized varieties. It is 426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, intermediate between tlie typical form characteristic of the higher altitudes of Eoan and INIitchell and subsp. altivaga, which similarly occupies the summits of the Smoky mountains. In texture, sculp- ture, color and character of the peristome it is nearer to altivaga, but in shape is more like the typical andreivsce. On the whole, however, it is more nearly related to the former. It may be char- acterized as typical in shape, but larger, with a stronger, thicker shell, closely and regularly striate, lighter in color being usually with a strong yellowish tinge, frequently pale green, and occa- sionally tinged with red ; the lip is decidedly different from the typical andrewsce, being broader and flatly reflected ; in many cases the reflected portion is decidedly convex, bemg rolled back so that the center of the face of the peristome projects beyond the outer edge. Compared with var. altivaga it is decidedly less globose, being wider in proportion to its height. The aperture also is propor- tionately wider than in altivaga. It was first met with on Bluff mountain at Baker's, and ranged from there to the summit. Of eight specimens, the largest was 30J mm. in diameter, the smallest 26^, average 28| mm. The largest example compared with a Thunderhead specimen of the same diameter, 30 J mm. , will show the following difference in height and breadth which is characteristic of the race : Dlam. Total Alt. Alt. of Axis. Bluff mountain {intermedia), . . 30|- 22 15J Thunderhead (altivaga), ... 30^ 22 16J Potato Top (4,000 feet), six specimens, largest 30 x 20|-, smallest 26^ x 20, average 28|^ mm. Vance's branch, North fork of the Swauauoa river, two speci- mens, rather heavier than usual, 26 x 20 and 26^ x 20 mm. Bee Tree creek. Craggy mountains (alt. 3,500 feet), three specimens similar to those from Vance's branch. Shells as thick as those of subsp. normalis. These specimens are very close to subsp. altivaga, and have the notch at the upper end of the peris- tome as in that form. They measure 25, 27 and 27^ mm. in diameter. One of them is decidedly reddish horn-colored. On Craggy, Fei'riss found intermedia all along from 4,500 to 6,000 feet. He remarks that its habits are similar to those of Polygyra exoleta and solitary. Two specimens from Balsam Gap, Ivy river (alt. 3,500 feet). 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427 are more nearly allied to the typical form, both in texture and the width of the pei'istome. But in one example this is decidedly reflexed, and in the other the whole shell is strongly tinged with red. They measure 25^ and 26^^ mm. in diameter. There is no evi- dence of any tendency to bands, nor to the development of a parie- tal tooth so characteristic of altivaga, in any of these specimens. This form extends as far north as Roan moimtain. Four speci- mens from Roan mountain R. R. Station are as heavy as an ordi- nary P. albolabris, with a broad, thick, flattened or convex lip, and of a decided yellow-horn color. They measure 27|- x 28, 27^ x 22, 26 X 19f, 27i X 21 mm., and approach var. altivaga very closely. Polygyra thyroides (Say). Paint Rock, north side; Tyson's and Wilson's Coves. Scarce. Polygyra clausa (Say). Two specimens only at Paint Rock, ou the south side of the river. Polygyra wheatleyi (Bland). This species was found nearly everywhere and usually in abuud- ance. There is no apparent tendency to develop a smaller race on the higher portions of IMitchell as on the peaks of the Smoky mountains, although three-fourths of the specimens from Mitchell and Cat-tail were edentate, while those from Bluff mountain were all dentate and with the outer margin of the lip dark colored. These varied from 13| to 16 mm. in diameter, while those from Mitchell and Cat-tail averaged larger, running from 14^ to 16. Ferriss found it also at Paint Rock, Tyson's, Wilson's, Meadow Cove, Great Craggy, Bee Tree Cove and Toe river. Polygyra stenotrema (Fer.). Common ou both sides of the river at Paint Rock. One only from Wilson's Cove. All these have a rather wide lip notch, otherwise typical. Polygyra altispira Pilsbry. "Stenotrema hirsutum Say. An elevated, somewhat carinated var- iety," Wetherby, Some "Notes on American Land Shells, No. II, p. 7, No. 33, in Jour. Cmcinnali Soc. N. II., IV. 1881, p. 329. Natural History notes from N. C, No. 2, in Jour. Ciu. Soc., 1894, p. 212. Polygyra hirsuta altispira Pilsbry, Nautilus, VII, p. 141 (April, This species was first noticed in 1881, by Mr. A. G. Wetherby, as a variety of the widespread P. Jiirsuta Say. Compared with 428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, P. hirsuta it differs in the following respects : P. altispira is more elevated, the spire being conical, with an additional whorl; the notch in the basal lip is wider, with a well-developed tooth on each side in place of an even edge, and the ' ' fulcrum ' ' is much smaller. These differences are constant in a large series of each examined and, in the absence of intermediate forms, warrant us in giving altispira specific rank. P. altispira is usually larger than the other species. It is densely hirsute or bristly above and below, the bristles erect and standing about as close as in P. hirsuta. P. depilata of the Great Smoky range differs from P. altispira chiefly in the shallower notch of the basal lip and the totally divei^se character of the surface. Mt. Mitchell, mostly large, 6^x 9 to 9x11 mm., spire lower than in Roan mountain types. Many of the lots are larger shells than at Roan mountain, with the spire less raised. P. altispira seems to range along the eastern slope of the moun- tains as far south at least as Swain and Jackson counties, where a small form occurs at Balsam mountain and elsewhere. The region lying between Asheville and these counties is wholly unknown conchologically. Balsam mountain, 5^ whorls, diam. fully 8 mm. Smallest from Jackson county, 5^ whorls, diam. 7 mm. As small as hirsuta, but have the wide notch, small fulcrum and rather harsh or stiff pile of altispira. The character of the bristles separates this small form from magnifwnosa. P. altispira was not found at Paint Rock, where it is apparently replaced by P. piliila ; but nearly everywhere else it was found in considerable abundance. The localities comprise Bluff mountain, Mitchell, Cat-tail, Wilson's, Meadow Cove, Tyson's, Ivy river and Bee Tree Cove. Polygyra pilula Pilsbry. Polygyra hirsuta pilula Pilsbry, Proc. A. N. S. Phila., 1900, p. 132. Paint Rock, on both sides of the river. This species was origi- nally described as a variety of Polygyra hirsuta. Its occurrence at Paint Rock was quite imexpected, and gives it a much more ex- tended range than was anticipated when first noticed. This fact and the evident stability of its peculiar characteristics, as shown by the specimens before us, without any apparent tendency to merge into the typical hirsuta, justify us in according to it specific rank. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429 Polygyra monodon cincta (Lewis). Paint Rock, south side, one specimen, witli the umbilicus some- what smaller than in the types. Bluff mountain, two specimens, with umbilicus almost closed. The occurrence of this species in the French Broad valley, far north of any previous records, was one of the surprises furnished by the collection of 1901. Strobilops labyrintMca strebeli (Pfr.)- Uelix strebeli Pfr., Malak. Blatt., VIII, 71, t. 1., figs. 5-8 (1861). Paint Rock, south side, a single specimen only. This is much farther north than previously recorded and, like the preceding species, is a striking example of the mingling in the French Broad valley of the southern species with those coming from the north ACHATINIDu^. Cochlicopa lubrica (Mull.). Potato Top, where Ferriss found typical examples, is the only locality represented in the present collection. "Walker found it, however, several years previously on Town mountain near Ashe- ville. CIRCINARIID^. Circinaria concava (Say). Paint Rock, on both sides of the river; Bluff mountain, Wil- son's, Tyson's, Cat-tail and Ivy river. Common everywhere and of good size, ranging from 17;^ to 21 f mm. in diameter. ZONITID^. Omphalina fuliginosa (Griff.). Typical specimens were found on both sides of the river at Paint Rock. Omphalina laevigata (Raf. Beck). One mature specimen, 19 x 13^ mm., and several innnature ones were taken on the north side of the river at Paint Rock. Omphalina subplana (Blnney). This was one of the most abundant species, both at Bluff moun- tain and ]Mt. Mitchell. Very large fine specimens were found on 430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, the soulh side of the river at Paint Rock, frequently reaching 22 and 23 mm. in diameter. Both here and at Bluff mountain a peculiar form was found with more convex base, not excavated around the umbilicus, and approaching 0. mgeli W. G. B, Many of the specimens from these localities were quite green. Found also at Tyson's, Potato Top, Ivy river, Toe river, Wilson's and Cat-tail. Omphalina andrewsse Pilsbry. Very rare, apparently at about the extreme of its northern range, but quite typical. Mt. Mitchell, 2; Wilson's, 1 ; Potato Top> 2, and Tyson's, 1. Vitrinizonites latissimus (Lewis). This species, which was not uncommon on Mt. Mitchell, was found only sparingly at other localities. Those from Bluff moun- tain were considerably larger than those from Mitchell, reaching 1 9^ mm. in diameter. It occurred also at Paint Rock, south side ; Tyson's, Wilson's, Meadow Cove and Bee Tree creek. Vitrea carolinensis (Ckll.). Vitrea carolinensis 01^11., Nautilus, XIT, p. 120. Zonites carolinensis Ckll., Biuney, Bull. M. C. Z., XXII, p. 167, PI. Ill, fig. 7. The type specimens as described by Cockerell have 5 whorls with a maximum diameter of 10 mm. This form occurred in 1901 only at Paint Rock. It is not found in the Great Smoky mountains, and from present information it seems to be a rare form of very limited distribution. Vitrea carolinensis wetherbyi Ckll. Nautilus, XIV, p. 45 (1901). Pamt Rock, Bluff mountain, Tyson's, Wilson's, Mt. Mitchell, Cat-tail, Pinnacle of the Blue ridge. Toe river and Potato Top. In the report of the expedition of 1899 the specimens of V. carolinensis were found to belong to a small race, ranging from 5^ to 7 mm. in diameter. Cockerell has since distinguished it under the above varietal name. With the exception of some from Paint Rock, all the specimens collected in 1901 belong to this smaller variety, which, though not found anywhere in abundance, occurred in nearly every locality. It is intermediate betAveen typical V. carolinensis and V. indentata. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. "iSl Vitrea sculptilis (Bid.)- A single specimen, diameter 8^ mm., was taken on Bluff moun- tain. Vitrea hammonisCSuom.). Pi. XXIll, figs. lO. n, 12. Paint Rock, south side, one specimen. The shell figured for comparison ^vith the following species is from ISIohawk, N. 1. Vitrea clingmani Dan. PI. XXIIL figs. 1.2 3. yi^rea icheatleyi cUmjmcnn ^all, Nautilus XI WO (1890) Vitrea clingmani Dall, Proc. A. N. S. 1 ., 1900, p. 15U, Q,. As stated in Pali's description cited above, the types of this rare species were taken by Hemphill at or near Clingnian's Peak or Mt Gibbs according to the map of the Topographical Survey 111^ firs specimens in 1901 were found on Mt. Clingman, beside the trail just north of the summit. Four specimens were found under one og a short distance below the summit of Mt. Mitchell on the northeast side It is evidently rare on Mitchell, as most careful search failed to bring any more to light. A single specimen was taken on A\ il- son's Cove and another on Cat-tail. -„ , rp i , •. Ferriss found it in some greater quantity on Potato Top, but it appears to be rare even there. _ V. clmgmani is peculiar to Black mountain range. It is one of the largest of the Yitreas and, once seen, is easily recognized, ihe animal is dark bluish-black, and when alive the_ whole shell appears black; in this respect it reminds- one of Zomtoides nihdm Mall When cleaned the shell varies from a yellow to reddish horn-color, but occasional specimens are tinged with green as stated in Dr. Dall's description. Vitrea approxima W. and P.. n. sp. PI. XXIII, figs. 7, 8, 9. _ Shell about the size and shape of F. hamnonu ; glossy, smok> greenish horn-color, tinged with pink above; umbilicus round and deep- slightlv convex above, whorls 4^ regularly increasing, sur- face Iculptui^d above with irregularly spaced radial grooves similar to those of V. haMmonis, but less crowded and with microscopic revolving impressed lines ; aperture trausver-sely rounded -lunate. Alt. 2, greater diam. 4^ mm. . , , -i Two specimens only of this species, which cannot be satisfactorily assimilated with any of the described species, were taken m >N il- son's Cove, Mt. Mitchell. It is closely related to V. hammonis in 432 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF PVCay, shape, and in the regularly increasing whorls, but differs in color, in the less crowded sculpture of radial grooves, the presence of microscopic revolving sculpture, which is absent in hammonis, and in having nearly a whor] additional. In the examination of these forms for the revolving sculpture a compound lens of at least 100 diameters is necessary for satisfactory results. V. xoheatleyi and F. petropliila pentadelphia, which have similar sculpture, differ in having a more open umbilicus and in the rapid enlargement of the last whorl. It differs from V. rhoadsi by the smooth base ( V. rhoadsi being radially grooved beneath), the closer radial grooves, M^ider umbilicus, and in color. Vitrea vanattai P. and W., n. sp. PI. XXIII, figs. 4, 5, 6. Shell rather narrowly umbilicate (the umbilicus about one-sixth the diameter of the shell), depressed, thin, honey-yellow and trans- lucent. Sculpture of many deeply impressed, irregularly spaced radial grooves, much less conspicuous beneath, and very fine, rather faint, close spiral lines. Whorls 5, slowly increasing, the last much wider. Aperture oblique, broadly lunate, the peristome simple and thin as usual. Alt. hardly 2, diam. 4.5 mm. Mt. Mitchell, two adult specimens and one young. This species belongs to the same group as the preceding, from which it differs in color, the more depressed body-whorl, less crowded and deeper radial grooves, which are more distinct beneath, in having a half»-whorl more and a wider umbilicus. In V. hammo7iis the sculpture is much closer, the grooves of V. vanattai resembling those of the species of the section Glyphyalinia. It resembles V. cllnginani, but with the same number of whorls the shell is much smaller, and the shape of the aperture differs somewhat. It is named for Mr. Edward G. Vanatta, in recognition of his long and careful work upon the smaller Zouitidse of the collection of the Academy. The group of V. hammonis, clingmani, approxima and vanattai ■consists of species similar in general form and in the coarser sculp- tui-e. V. hammonis differs from all the others by the smaller number of whorls and less depressed contour ; V. clingmani, with the same number of whorls as the following species, is conspicuously larger. V. approxima and V. vanattai have about the same num ber of whorls, but the former is greenish, less deeply sculptured, 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 433 au(l with a narrower umbilicus than V. vanattai, which is yellow and less fragile. V. dinrjmani was drawn on a smaller scale than the other species on the plate. Zonitoides arboreus (Say). Paint Rock, on both sides of the river, Bluff mountain ; Mitchell, Cat-tail, Wilson's, Tyson's, Potato Top and Ivy river. In Tyson's Cove this species was found in great abundance. It was also com- mon on Potato Top. Elsewhere it seemed to be comparatively rare. In addition to the more obvious differences between this species and Vitrea hammonis, Z. arboreus under a glass of high power will be found to have the surface covered with numerous very fine, impressed revolving lines which are lacking in hammonis. Zonitoides elliottii (Rediield). Common at Paint Rock, on both sides of the river, and at Tyson's. A few were also taken on Bluff mountain and a single specimen in AYilson's Cove, Mt. Mitchell. Gastrodonta intertexta (Biuu.). Not taken in 1901. It occurs, however, at Asheville, where it was found by Walker on a previous visit. Gastrodonta acerra (Lewis). Paint Rock, Mt. Mitchell, Cat-tail, Tyson's, Potato Top, ^Meadow Cove, Ivy river and Toe river. Apparently not as abundant in this region as it is either at Roan or in the Smoky mountains. It was more numerous in tlu; Mt. Mitchell region than 'around Paint Rock and Bluff mountain. As usual in any considerable suite of specimens, there is considerable variation in the height of the spire. Those from Cat-tail were unusually fine, the largest examples of the two forms measuring 17.^ X 14 and 16| x lU mm. Gastrodonta demissa (Biun.). Not taken in 1901 . It has been found on Town mountain, near Asheville, by Walker. Gastrodonta suppressa (Say). This species did not occur in the collection of 1901. It has, however, been found at Asheville, on Town mountain (coll. Walker). It was also found at Spencer's Cabin on Thunderhead in 1899, but was overlooked at tlio time of making the report. 434 I'ROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Gastrodonta gularis (Say). At Paint Kock, ou the uortli side of the river, a form of this species was taken which is like the depressed examples from Hayes- yille, N. C, mentioned in the report of the Pentadelphian expedi- tion. Aside from this lot, no specimens were takeu agreeing with the form of gularis almost everywhere prevailing in the Great Smoky mountains. ^^ In its place, three well-marked subspecies of gularis occurred. Gastrodonta gularis theloides A. D. Brown, n. subsi). PI. XXV, figs, i, 2, 3, 4. Shell glossy, yellow, perforate, with mixlerately raised, dome- shaped spire, composed of 7^ to 8 narrow, closely coiled Avhorls; the last hardly regidar at the periphery in adult shells ; rather strongly striate above, nearly smooth beneath, with faint traces of spiral striae near the umbilicus, where the base is rather conspicuously excavated. Aperture somewhat triangular, the sloping basal lip being straight. The peristome is acute, strengthened within by a rather ivide, low callous rim. Adult shells are without teeth or laminxe. Alt. 4i-5, diam. 7^-8 mm. Young shells (5 to 6 mm. diam , PI. XXV, fig. 4) are nearly discoidal, with the umbilicus as wide as in adults, base glossy, sculptured like the adult shells, the aperture armed within with two long strong lamellae, the summit of the outer one c\irying toward the inner; there is also, in early stages, a smaller lamella peri- pheral in position. " North Carolina " (A. D. Brown coll., Xo. 56,914 A. X. 8.); Black mountains, X. C. (Henry Hemphill) ; abundant ou Bluff mountain; a few only at INIeadow Cove, Wilson's and INIt. Mitchell. Fig. 8 is from one of A. D. Brown's specimens; figs. 1, 2, 4 are from Bluff mountain shells, collected by Walker. This race was recognized by A. D. Brown many years ago and named in his collection (now in coll. A. X. S, P.), but it seems never to have been characterized by him. Various con-espondents in America and England have submitted similar shells to one of us, and had them so named ; owung to the desire to avoid overload- ing the nomenclature of a difficult group, the name has not hitherto been published. '■■ Vide these Proctedinrjs for 1900, pp. 142, 14:3. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF rHILADELPHIA. 435 The sjiecimens now l)ruught to light demonstrate the necessity of recognizing the race. It differs from G. g. Icnvce ( W. G. B. ) in the much narrower umbilicus ; from G. gularis of the Great Smoky mountains in being tootliless in the adult stage, and with a more excavated base and straighter basal lip. Xo adult .shell, in a large number examined, possessed internal laminre. Gastrodonta gularis lawae (W. G. B.). PI. XXV, figs. 10, 11, 12. Zonites placentuhis (ShuttL), W. G. Biuney, Terr. Moll. U. S , V., p. 124, fig. 44, PI. Ill, f. L, (dentition) and remarks, but not the description (1878). Zonites hismodon var.? W. G. Biuuev, Auu. X. Y. Acad. Sci., I, pp. 3i8-362, PI. 15, f. e. (1879). Zonites lawi \\. G. Binuey, 1st Supplement to Terr. Moll., Y, p. 142, PI. 2 (reprint of PI. 15, Auu. X. Y. Acad. Sci., I), fig. e (1883). Manual of Amer. Land Shells, p. 221, fig. 235. The shell is yellow, glossy, with moderately elevated, dome-like spire, composed of 8 closely coiled whorls; surface rather chjsely wrinkle-striate, the strise strongest near the suture, weaker below, where a few faint spiral strise may be traced. Last whorl rounded, hardly angular, even in front. Umbilicus wide, open, deep and well-like, the bases of the first whorls visible in its depth. Aper- ture small, irregularly lunate ; peristome acute, strengthened « ithin by a rather thin, diffused white callus, which becomes heavier within the columellar margin, making a slight convexity or low boss near the axis. Columellar margin somewhat straightened. Alt. 4.7, diam. 7.8 mm., width of umbilicus 1.3 mm. The above description and figures 10-12 represent the type shell, Avhich differs from most other specimens in being without internal lamellcTe. Binney (^Supplement, p. 143) mentions that "there is a variety in which is a heavy internal callous or plate-like teeth within the aperture, " and this (PI. XXV, figs. 14, 15, 16, 17) is certainly the prevalent form in the localities collected at in 1901. These den- tate specimens have the long, strong, arching basal lamella of G. gularis cuspidata. AVhether the lamina-bearing form will eventu- ally be separated from the toothless typical form remains for future investigation, the material now available being insufhcicnt for a decision. This race has not hitherto been defined, although Binney has figured it in three publications. The figures, however, were not good, and on account of its a.ssociation with the very different G. placentnla (Shuttl.), it has not been generally recognized by 436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Play, students of our laud snails. The toothless form occurs in ^Monroe county, Tenu., where it was collected by Miss Annie Law, together with specimeus provided with internal laminne. These were dis- tributed lo ]\Ir. Biuuey, Dr. James Lewis, and probably others. The Lewis collection was sold, and there are specimens fi'om this source in the collections of George H. Clapp, G. K. Gude, the Academy of Natural Sciduces, and perhaps others. The toothless specimen illustrated in figs. 10-12 is No. 294 of the Biuney and Bland collection, American Museum of Natural History, kindly lent by 3[r. L. P. Gratacap. It is the individual figured by Binney, referred to at the head of this account. The form was given specific rank by ]Mr. Binney, but in our opinion ir is merely a subspecies of the variable G. gularis, distin- guished by the wider umbilicus, and the absence of teeth in some aduil spacimeu;. G. gularis theloides differs from lawce by its very l^.iuiH umbilicu?. In G. lasmodon the umbilicus is still wider. The size of the umbilicus varies a good deal in the North Carolina specimens. Thus in specimens from Paint Rock, measuring 8 mm. diam., the umbilicus is from 1 to 1.7 mm. wide. The young shells are always toothed (PI. XXV, figs. 14, 15), there being a long outer lamella, a shorter baso-columellar, and in eai-ly stages a small supra-peripheral plait. The umbilicus is broad and the periphery situated high on the last whorl. The shell figured measures 5 mm. diam. It is quite common ou both sides of the river at Paint Rock. Two only on Bluff mountain. Gastroioata gaiaris decussata Pilsbry and Vauatt:). n. subsp. PI. XXV, figs. 5, 6, 7 S, 9, l:'.. Shell somewhat dull, brownish, narrowhj umbilicate, with moder- ate or high, dome-shaped spire, composed of 8 flat whorls, the last anfjul'ii- at the peripherij. Closely, sharply and strongly striate above, less so beneath, where there are usually traces of spiral strice near the periphery. Aperture lunate, peristome thin and acute, armed within with a blunt tooth ou the middle of the columella, and a high, short, erect lamella within the outer-basal margin. Alt. 5.5, diam. 7.8 mm. Alt. 5, diam. 8.2 mm. Young shells (PI. XXV, figs. 8, 13, diam. (> mm.) are bicon- vex, depressed, acutely angular or cariuate, more strongly striate beneath than adults, and wltli the stride on the outer half of the 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 437 base decussated by many impressed spirals (fig. 8j. The interual lamella; are loug, as iu the youug of other forms of the fjularis group. Most abundant on :Mt. Mitchell, the type locality. Fouud also at Tyson's, Wilson's, Potato Top, Cat-tail, Ivy river, Bee Tree Cove and Bluff mountain. This variety was first recognized several years ago l)y ^Ir. Vanatta and one of the present writers, among specimens collected by Mr. Hemphill, labeled " Black Mis., N. C." The specimens were fouud with G. gularis theloides. On account of the small number of specimens (two adult and one young), it was not defined at that time. The abundant material taken iu 1901 places the subspecies upon a secure basis. It differs from G. gularis and the racial forms subordinated to that species in the strong sculpture, comparatively dull surface, the decussation and acute carination of the youug shells, and the short, high, erect lamella of the adult stage. Compared with G. collkella Pils. , the var. decussata is seen to differ iu the closer and flat whorls of the spire, flattened instead of swollen base, carinate periphery, etc. Young shells resemble G. intertexta in sculpture. Gastrodonta interna (Say). Common on both sides of the river at Paint Kock and at Tyson's. A few were also taken on Potato Top, Cat-tail and iu Bee Tree Cove. Gastrodonta andrewsae (W. G. Binney). Very abundaut on Potato Top and not uncommon on Mt. Mitchell and Bluff mountain. A few were also taken on Cat-tail and at Bee Tree Cove, Toe river and at Paint Kock, on the south side of the river. One specimen from this last locality has the teeth fused together, forming a continuous rib across the cavity of the shell as in G. lamellidens. Gastrodonta lamellidens Pilsbry. A single specimen was taken on Bluff mountain, and another on the Toe river side of the Pinnacle of the Blue ridge. PHILOMYOID^. Philomycus carolinensis (Bosc). Not so abundant as in the Great Smoky mountains. A few only were seen on Blutf mountain and Mt. Mitchell. 438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Philomycus hemphilli (W. G. Binney). Comniou ou Mt. ^Mitchell, which is the type locality. ENDODONTID^ffi. Pyramidula alternata (Say). The typical form occurred only at Paint Kock, ou both sides of the river. Those from the north side have the ribs much heavier and farther apart than those from the south side. At Tyson's, Wilson's and Ivy river were found smoother, brighter forms, approaching fergusoni Bid. somewhat, especially in the gloss, but with the ribs more prominent. The spiral sculpture is well developed, the spiral lines being unusually prominent. This'micro- sculpture, however, is practically the same in morclax. Periphery )Ounded. This is a race of the region, unlike the Great Smoky forms and the antithesis of mordax. This form, according to "NVetherby^" (who refers it to var. fergusoni), is the only form of alternata foimd at Koan mountain. Koan specimens, however, though more lightly }-ibbed than those from ^Mitchell, are nearer to them than to the typical fergusoni. The same form also occurs at Elizabethtou, Tenn., and Scott county, Va. In the latter locality it is said to be " found only on trees high up on the mountains " (G. H. Clapp). This tree-climbing habit is also noticed by "Wetherby, but vras not observed by any of the party in 1901. Pyramidula alternata mordax (Shuttleworth). In 1852, Shuttleworth" described his Helix ))iordax from speci- mens collected by Kugel in the mountains of North Carolina, The original description was reprinted by W. G Binney in Terr. Moll., Ill, p. 19, but by a clerical error the dimensions of Zonites placen- tula, which was described at the same time, were included in the description of mordax. Shuttleworth' s description may be trans- lated as follows : " Shell widely and perspectively umbilicated, depressed, sub- lenticular, carinate, thin, yellow horn-color, ornamented with inter- rupted red streaks in bands, beautifully sculptured with strong flexuose ribs above and below; whorls 5^, flat; aperture very oblique, angularly crescentic, oval; peristome simple, acute. Greater diam. 18, lesser 16, height 6 mm. '6 /our. Cincinnati Soc. N. H., 1894, p. 75. ^- Dern. Mittheil., 1852, 195. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENX'ES OF PHILADELPHIA. 4:]9 12 spei " Hab. iu the mouutains of Xortli Carolina; more thti meus taken by Rugel. " Obs. very close to H. alter nata, but distinguished by the stronger ribs which are 1 mm. apart. U. cumberlandiana Lea (perhaps a wholly abnormal form) in which the carina is similar, diffei-s (according to the figure) iu having the >;hell only lightly striate, not cost ate." ^Nlany attempts to identify this form liave been made by Binney and others, but, as stated by one of us,^^ the shells usually labeled mordax are referable to another strongly ribbed form of alternatf, and do not fulfill the requirements of Shuttleworth's diagnosis given above. As this was the only species of land snail belonging to the East- ern fauna that had uol been satisfactorily determined, the discovery by Mr. Ferriss of specimens agreeing almost exactly with the orig- inal description of viordax is a matter of great interest. These specimens were found in Tyson's Cove (alt. 4,000 feet), whicli lies between the Great Craggy mountains and the Pinnacle of the Blue Ridge and at the southern extremity of the Black mountain chain, and in Bee Tree Cove (alt. 3,500 feet), which lies just west of the Great Craggy mountains. As both Tyson's and Patton's Knob were Avell-known resorts long before the Civil War, it is quite likely that this is the original locality. Of course this is a mere supposi- tion, but the fact that the form has never been fomid elsewhere, and that in Shuttleworlh's time the locality was one of the few accessible to the ordinary traveler, would seem to i-endcr it quite probable. There would seem to be no question but these shells are the long- lost mordax. They agree exactly with Shuttleworth's description in having heavy ribs, fully a millimeter apart at the periphery, and which extend on the under side into the umbilicus. The carina is 18 Nautilus, XV, 440 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^^Y, Avell developed, tliougli rather more roimdcd tlian in var. carinata Pils., but the under side just below the carina is distinctly concave, as in Pyramidula hryanti. This disappears somewhat in full-grown specimens toward the aperture, but is always evident on the first Iwo-lhirds of the last whorl, and is particularly marked in the young shells. The micro-sculpture is well developed, consisting of very fine irregular lines of growth between Ihe ribs, which are cut transversely by numerous fine revolving lines. The only difference observable in these shells is that of size. Of our sj)ecimens none equals the dimensions given by Shuttleworlh. Our largest example has a greater diameter of 17^, lesser 15, with an altitude from the base of 6| mm. If Shuttle worth's types measured only 6 mm. from the basal lip, they are more lenticular than any form of alternata yet known, and the true morclax yet remains to be dis- covered. It is probable, however, that Shuttle worth followed Pfeiffer in measuring the height from the base of the axis. The form here figured as P. a. mordax seems to be confined to a particular zone on the mountainside, and does not appear to mix with the smooth form of alternata. " It has the same habits as the com- mon form, around old basswood and tulip tree logs, but the two were never together Mordax dwelt in the tulip tree belt, and the common form was both above and below, but never in . that belt" (J. H. F.). Pyramidula perspectiva (Say). Paint Rock, on both sides of the river, fairly abundant; scarce in Wilson's Cove, and a single specimen only from Cat-tail. Pyramidula bryanti (Harper). The original description of Harper'" is not as full in detail as could be desired. Wether by 's observations^** are far more exact and give a better idea of the specific characters. As he states, " the whorls are heavily ribbed above and below, the rib termi- nating at a sharp angle on the upper and uiider outer edges of the body whorl, leaving a concave space between, which is compara- tively smooth." In occasional specimens, however, toward the aperture the ribs, in a less developed form, are carried across from one carina to the other. The types came from Mitchell county, N. C, and probahly from Roan mountain. At any rate. Roan mountain .specimens are quite typical in every respect. Typical ^''Jour. Cincinnnti Soc. lif. H., 1881, p. 258. ■'"Jour. Cincinnati Soc. N. H., 1881, p. 338. Reprint, p. 7. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 441 examples were found not uncommon at Paint Rock, on the south side of the river, and specimens nearly so, differing, however, in the less acute development of the lower carina, occurred in Wilson's and Tyson's Coves, On Cat-tail and Potato Top and in Bee Tree Cove, the specimens have both the keels less acute, and are more striate l)elow the per- iphery. This form is intermediate between the typical hryanii and the Mt. Mitchell form which has the characteristics of a well- marked subspecies, the base being regularly costulate, the keels blunt and the intercarinal concavity nearly obsolete, much as in perspectiva. Young shells, however, are less specialized and resem- ble the intermediate form mentioned above. But the internal columellar tubercle, exceedingly constant in per'spediva, is wholly wanting. It is a peripheral form, probably at the geographic con- fines of the range of bryanti. SUOOINEID^. Succinea ovalis Say. A single young specimen was taken at Paint Rock, on the south side of the river, and two examples of the thin mountain form were found in the gap between Mt. Mitchell and Clingman's Peak. The foi-m here referred to is that commonly known as S. obVqua Say. Say described Succinea ovalis-^ in 1817 and S. ohliqua in 1824. ^^ Gould in 1841^^ referred the form commonly known as ovalis to Say's ovalis of 1817. Say's types of ovalis are in the collection of the Academy and belong to the form usually known as ohliqua. This being so, ovalis has priority and must consequently be used, ohliqua falling into the synonymy. The use of ohliqua for Say's species was inaugurated arbitrarily by Dr. Amos Binuey" in an " attempt to reconcile the differences " in the use of the names by retaining ovalis for Gould's species and applying to " Mr, Say's species his second name ohliqua." This, of course, he had no right to do. AMNICOLID^. Pomatiopsis lapidaria (Say). A pale-green form of this species, ratlicr more slender than the common northern form, was taken at Paint Rock, on the south side of the river. =" J. A. N. S.R, I, 15 (181 T). ^'^ Long's Exped., II, 260 (18-^4). '^■^ Invert. Mass., 194. -'' Terr. Moll, II, 64. 442 PROCEEDINGS OF TFIE ACADEMY OF [May, PLEUROOERID^. Goniobasis proxima symmetrica (Hakl.). Paint Rock creek, X. C. This was the only species of fluviatile niolhisk found during the trip. Xo indications whatever of Unionidre or Pleuroceridre were found iu the French Broad at Paint Rock. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXIV AND XXV. [f:uuATA. — References to "Plate XXIII" on pages 431 and 4o3 should read Plate XA'/K] Plate XXIV, Figs. 1, 2, ^.— Vitrea cliiujmnni Dall. Potato Top, Black Mts., N. C. No. 83,262 A. N. S. P. Figs. 4, 5, Q. — Vitrea mnattui P. and W. Mt. ]Mitcliell, N. C. No. 83.201 A. N. S. P. Flo's. 7, 8, Q.— Vitrea approxima W. and P. Mt. Mitchell, N. C. No. 83.261) A. N. S. P. Figs. 10, 11. 12.— Vitrea Jiammonis (Strom). MohaAvk, N. Y. No. 53 A. N. S. P. Plate XXV, Figs. 1, 2.—Gustrodonta gularis theloides (A. D. B.). BlutF Mt., N. C. No. 83,263 A. N. S. P. Fig. 'd. — G. (J. theloides. Aperture of a specimen from A. D. Brown's collection. No. 50,914 A. N. S. P. Fig. 4. — G. (/. theloides. Basal view of a young shell from Bluff ]Mt., N. C. No. 83, 263 A. N. S. P. Figs. 5, 6, l.—G. (J. decassata P. and V. Three views of the type, Mt. Mitchell, N. C. No. 83,265 A. N. S. P. Fig. 8. — G. g. decussata. Much enlarged view of a segment of the base^of a young specimen from BluflF Mt., N. C. No. 83,264 A. N. S. P. Fig. 9. — G. (J. decxissata. Another specimen from the type lot, Mt. Mitchell. No. 83,205 A. N. S. P. Figs. 10, 11, 12.— G. g. lawce (W. G. B.). Three views of the type specimen. Diam. 8 mm. No. 294 of the " Binney and Bland Collec- tion." American Museum of Natural History, N. Y. Fig. 13.— Cr. g. dcenssata. Young shell from Bluff Mt., N. C. Same specimen shown in fig. 8. Figs. 14, 15.— (?. gAaioce. Young shell from North side of the French Broad river at Paint Rock, N. C. No. 83,206 A. N. S. P. Fiss. 16, \1.— G. q. lawee. Adult shell of the laminate form. North side French Broad fiver, Paint Rock, N. C. No. 83,266 A. N. S. P. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILAUELPHIA. 44'-] SYNOPSIS OF THE AMERICAN MARTENS. BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS. Tlie results summarized iu the followiug paper arc based on a rather extended examination of skins and skulls of Mudela americana from representative localities throughout its wide range, from the northern United States to the treeless regions of the Arctic zone. This study was primarily begun to determine the status of the southeastern marten, in connection with my recent work on the mammals of Pennsylvania and New Jersey. It has resulted in classing the southeastern animal as the most depauperate and light- colored representative of the group, and belonging more strictly to the type which Turton named from pale examples probably obtained from southeastern or central Canada. For purposes of nomencla- ture I have restricted typical americana to this region, making the east and west coast forms and the northern race, described by later authors, of subspecific value. Owing to the wide variation of color in this animal — skins from such widely separated habitats as the Pacific and Atlantic coasts at the same latitude being often foimd alike, and apparent dark or light races well known to the fur trade coming from isolated localities not correlated with fauual and floral environment in the zoogeographic sense — I have made such characters of subsidiary value to those of size and relative propor- tion in body, tail and foot measurements, in the character of pelage, and, above all, to cranial characters. As the latter have been largely made the basis of the examinations of Brandt, Baird, Gray, Cones and Allen, the chief monographers of the group, my own remarks will be the more pertinent from this standpoint. The number of American specimens of skins and skulls ujiou which I have based these studies has been much larger than ever before brought together. They may be roughly listed as follows : Pennsylvania and jNIaine, 15; Quebec, 1; Ontario, 8; Xorth Labrador, 4; New Brunswick, 33; Colorado, 6; Mackenzie prov. , N. W.T. = Great Slave lake to ^Mackenzie bay, 26; Alaska, 7; British Columbia, Rocky mountains, 2; Cascade mountains, Washington, 30. For the use of this fine series I am indebted to 444 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Plaj, the officers of ihe Aniericau ^Museum of Natural History, Field Columbian Museum, U. S. National Museum, ^Museum of Com- parative Zoology and the Academy of Natui-al Sciences, Phila- delphia. Only skulls of the oldest adult males have been used in the com- parative cranial diagnoses and measurements, viz., those in which the upper cranial sutures have so disappeared that the nasals are indistinguishable from the premaxillaries. I am aware that Dr. J. A. Allen has long ago {Bull. U. S. Geol. Sur. Territ, 1876, Vol. 3, pp. 328-330) arrived at the same conclusions that I have reached concerning the small size of southern American martens by an independent investigation, in part, of the same specimens. But his researches were chiefly directed to a consideration of the differences between the American and Old "World martens, and did not include specimens from Labrador and the Cascade mountains. I have been fortunate in securing several specimens, from the TJ. S. National IMuseuni and the Academy of Natural Sciences, of Old World martens tyjiical of M. foina, M. martes and 31. zibellina, and am thus enabled to discuss their relationships with those of America. A series of thirty skulls from Kamschatka merit special mention. As I now understand their relationships, the North American martens consist of three si:)ecies and three subspecies, viz., the South Canadian marten, Mustela americana Turton ; the Arctic marten, 31. a. aciuosa Osgood ; the British Columbia marten, 31. a. abietlnoides (Gray) ; the Labrador marten, 31. a. brumalis (Bangs); the Newfoundland marten, 31. atrata Bangs; the Cas- cade mountain marten, AI. caurina Mei-riam, and the Rocky mountain marten,' 31. c. origenes Rhoads. Mustela americana Turton. South Canadian Marten. 1802. [Mtistcla] americanus Turton, Liunseus, Syst. Naturnc, Vol. I, p. 60. 1819. Mustela vulpina Rafinesque, American Jour. Science, 1819, p. 82. (Upper Missouri river = i/. americann with vvliite-tipped tail.) 1820. Mustela leucopus Kuhl, Beitriige Zoologie, p. 74. ("In Canada "= J/, americana with white-tijiiied feet.) 1823. Mustela luiro F. Cuvier, Diction. Sci. Naturelles, Vol. 29, p. 256. (Restricted types from tlie habitat of the Huron Indians, fide ^lilbcrt, viz., region cast and south of Georgian baj', west peninsula of Ontario := J/, americana ti/j^icus, pale form {"blond clair "). Tyj^e Locality. — Turton says his M. americanus " inhabits North 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445 America." Undoubtedly his material was based ou gpecimeus from eastern Canada or the northeastern United States. He describes a light tawny, white-headed forai, which applies more distinctively to the martens of southeastern Canada and the eastern United States as contrasted with those from farther north or from New Brunswick and Labrador. On this basis and to more intelligently map out the distribution of the subspecies already described without overturning names i-ecently proposed, I restrict the type locality of americaiia to the region occupied by the small pale mar- tens of southern Canada and the northern United States. The type specimens on which Turton based his species probably came from Ontario or Quebec through the Hudson Bay Company. Faiuial Distribution. — The habitat of Mmlela americana ameri- cana is restricted to the forested areas enclosed by the following localities: Hudson bay, Northeast territory (of Labrador), Quebec, Nova Scotia, Massachusetts, northern Pennsylvania, south in the mountains to Colorada, Utah, eastern Oregon and Washmg- ton, eastern British Columbia, Alberta, Saskatchewan and southern Kewatin, south of latitude 55°. DescrijAion of Species. — Smallest and palest of the American martens. Pelage relatively short. Colors most variable of the group, ranging from white-headed, yellow-bodied individuals to blackish brown ones. Color of throat and breast patch varying from white to pale-orange, sometimes reaching from chin to ster- num and from base of ears to insertion of forelegs, sometimes con- fined to a stripe or scattei'ed spots across lower neck. These remarks in part apply to all our martens. The distinguishing color char- acteristics of typical americana may be stated to be the average paleness and yellowness of outer fur and the clear ash of basal under fur, as contrasted with all other races, and in the strongly contrasting colors of the fore parts with the hinder parts. The upper head, ears and neck are generally a j)ale drab-gray (Riclg- way's Nomenclature of Colors), this often reaching half-way down the back ; the lower back, thighs and rump are tinged with an unnamed shade of color combining pale-orange, rufous and yellow in an indescribable combination not found in other geographic races. This whole area is sparingly tipped with black. The bases of hairs are pale smoke-gray. The darker parts of fore and hind feet and logs and tail-brush arc 1)lackish seal brown. Certain areas 446 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, witliin tlie range of 3f. americana americana above given furnish martens whose average pelts are so dark as to give them a standard market value much above skins from the surrounding country. Such a region is the upper Nipigon territory of Ontario westward toward the Lake of the Woods. The local climatic conditions of this rocky, saturated and densely wooded area are responsible for this. It is loo local, however, to warrant a further subdivision. Respecting the cranial characters, upon which I have primarily based my examinations of this perplexing group, I begin by con- sidering Gray's fundamental separation of the New "World martens from M. martes, foina and zlhellina on the size and shape of the last upper tubercular molar. In americana this is stated by him, and in measure amplified by Cones and Allen, to be different, in its hour-glass shape and greater size of the inner bulb as compared with the outer. In americana this tooth has but slight constriction, with resulting reciangular shape, owing to the relative equality in size of the inner and outer bulbs. A very careful examination of the large series of American martens shows that the si)ecific separa- tion from Old World forms on this basis is fully warranted. It is further em ohasized by the character of the second lower true molar, Avhich in all the exotic forms has a strongly characterized inner cusp, as asserted by Allen. In americana, Allen says, this is " not found," or " only in a very rudimentary condition. " I have found it, however, in a more or less rudimentary couditiou in all typical americana skulls, except those so very old that it had been worn away. In rare instances this cusp is almost as well developed, pro- portionately to the smaller and narrower character of americana molars, as in martes. On this account its diagnostic value is less than that of the last upper molar. These remarks apply equally to all marten skulls I have examined taken east and north of the Cascade mountains, from Nulato, Alaska, to the coast of Maine. But when skulls horn, the Cascade mountain region and the Pacific coast are examined an intermediate condition is immediately noticeable. The shape of posterior upper molar corresponds more closely to that of the Old World forms, as also does the flat, rounded cranium and its broad, zygomatic width as compared with its length. In these combined respects it resembles the European beech marten, M. foina, more closely than it does the martens of the Rocky mountains and eastern Canada. Regarding the cranial 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 447 relatious of the Asiatic sable, 31. zihellina, to our West Americau martens, nothing seems to have been published. Brandt, who made a critical monograph on tliese subjects, seems not to have had any skulls of zibelllna. Neither did Baird, Coues, or Allen. Brandt (Beitr. Kennt. Sdageth. RussL, 1855) finds no differences between the external characters of the Asiatic and "West American martens, the ' ' sables ' ' of the ' ' Nischnaja Tunguska occupying an intermediate position between the dark Asiatic and yellow American sables." A fine series of sable skulls from Kamschatka, representing thirty-two specimens of the Old World zihellina, correspond exactly with the good figure of ziheUlna in Blainville's Osteo- graphie. C.'omparing these with American martens we find them larger than the largest skulls from Alaska, INIackeuzie aud Labrador, six old males averaging 82 mm. in basilar length aud 53 mm. in zygomatic expansion. In the largest Alaskan exami)]e the basilar length is 80 mm. A specimen from Peel's river, Mac- kenzie territory, the largest in my American .series, is 82 mm. long, Avhile the largest Kamschatkau skull is 85 mm. long. In both size and proportions, however, these crania of zihellina are remarkably like actuosa of Alaska and hrumalis of Labrador. But when the dental characters are examined there is a distinct separation between them, based, as above mentioned, on the great size and peculiar asymmetric saddle shape of the upper posterior grinder of zihellina as contrasted with the rectangular, transversely elongate shape of that tooth in americana. The distinction of relative size and the inner tuberculatiou of the lower sectorial in these Kamschatkau skulls is also a decided feature as contrasted with their nearest geographic allies in America. Comparing these zihellina skulls with three Swedish skulls, typical of martes, the close specific relationship between these two is emphasized in every character examined. On the other hand, foina specimens fi'om Germany are very distinct in cranial features. In foina we have a very short, broad and flattened skull, wholly lacking any sagittal ridge on the occipital crest, even in old age. The frontal constriction is relatively unprououuced. The posterior upper grinder is mora rectangular in shape than in the martes group, and owing to tlie short rostrum the premola:- teeth overlap at base instead of being separated by short diastcnue. In respect 448 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, of the size aud shape of the crauium, foiaa is fai- more distinct from viartes aud zihellina thau the latter are from auy American form except caurina. It is interesting to note in this connection that caurina resembles foina very closely in the small size and shape of its audital bullse and the breadth aud flatness of the brain -case, but in respect of the sagittal crest, frontal constriction aud character of the teeth, caurina is closer to zibellina. Its homologies connect it far more closely with the Eurasian than the American type of marteu, aud would indicate a closer genesis from the Old AVorld martens thau from tliose of the New World. As it does uot appear to intergrade with the latter, I am induced to consider it an isolated member of the martes- zibellina group. This peculiarity is uot williout precedent in the Asiatic character of other animals found in the habitat of caurina. Measurements. — Average of six adult males from Maine, Penn- sylvania and the Adirondacks : Total length, 575 mm. ; tail vertebrre, 175 mm.; hind foot, 82 mm. Skulls ditto: Basilar length (from inferior lip of foramen magnum to posterior base of upper median i.ucisors), 70.5 mm.; postorbital constriction, 16.0 mm. ; zygomatic expansion, 44 mm. Mustela americana brumalis (Bangs). Labrador Marten. 189S. Mustela brumalis Bangs, American Natnralist, Vol. 32, p. 502. Type Locality. — Okak, Labrador. Faunal Distribution. — Humid coast region of northeastern Labrador, Ungava bay to Straits of Belle Isle. lutergradiug westwardly iuto actuosa, southwardly into americana. Description of Species. — Mr. Bangs' description of this race wa.? based on three skulls, presumably of males, no skins being obtained. Since then he has obtained skins, two of which, an adult male and female, have been sent to me for examination. The character of the skull of brumalis as compared with that of americana from Maine is certainly conspicuous for greater size, but the relative liroportions when compared with specimens from Maine of same age and sex are not so marked as described by Bangs. I note that the skulls of brumalis are surprisingly identical in size and proportions with those of actuosa from the jMackenzie river district and Alaska, as shown by the fine series loaned by the U. S. National JMuseum. This is referred to by Osgood in his description of actuosa, but the 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 449 skull of hrumalis figured by him is smaller than the largest speci- men I have, so that the differences Osgood seeks to draw between the two in this regard are much less than Avould appear. The relative size of the audita! bulloj in actuosa and brumalis, where skulls of same size are compared, is so nearly the same as to make them of no diagnostic value, and the heaviness of dentition falls under the same restrictions. Taking these two races of americana and contrasting them therewith, the Pennsylvania and Maine speci- mens show an extreme diminution of size, being about 10 mm. shorter and relatively somewhat narrower than the northern races ; but we are unable to make these differences in size, great as they appear, of specific value, for the martens from the north shore of Lake Superior and from Tobique and Trousers lake. New Bruns- wick, are plainly intermediate and counectant in cranial characters, measuring only 5 to 6 mm. shorter than the largest skulls of actuosa and brumalis. No doubt skulls from western Labrador and Kee- watiu would complete the chain of gradation thus indicated. It may be remarked that the development of sagittal crest in actuosa and hrumalis, and the postei'ior angularity and expansion of their zygomse, are more or less in excess of any specimens of the southern animal ; but an examination of the cuspidatiou, size and outline of the teeth in all the forms except caurlna shows that so-called differ- ences are confined to individual variation, as proved by the unusually large series of crania now in hand. In color, brumalis is separable from any other eastern interior form on account of its dark shades. In the male specimen from Okak there is a close re- semblance to the specimen from Sullivan county, Penna., both in tint and pattern of coloration, the difference consisting almost solely in the greater length of the coarser long hairs of the over fur. Tliese are also blacker and the median (subapical) shade of upper back, sides and rump is less fulvous. The color of the under fur is a shade darker ash than that of the Pennsylvania specimens. In the female Okak specimen the whole body colors are much darker than in the male, being a blackish chocolate, and the fulvous cast of under fur seen in the male is replaced by a cinnamon or bistre shade in the female. In both, the head is lighter than the body. As compared with actuosa the Labrador form is nuicli darker, Mackenzie river actuosa being characterized from all others by the contrast of their light- hued sides and heads with the darkly cou- 29 450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, trasted browu-black of the median dorsal area. Au average of the actuosa series would class as " pale" in the furrier's uomeucla- ture, while brumalis would class as ' ' dark. ' ' On the other hand, actuosa is of a very different sort of " pale" from typical ameri- cana, such as we find in New Brunswick and Maine. These latter are termed * ' canaries ' ' by the furriers and are distinguished from the actuosa type by the pale-orange, buffy or ochraceous suffusion of back and sides, some of them assuming a peculiar golden hue. AU these pale color conditions of the southern animal, more on account of tint than paleness, detract materially from their com- mercial value as compared with those pale skins which are typical of the interior Arctic martens. Measurements of brumalis. — Total length of c?, 680 mm. ; tail vertebne, 195 mm. ; hind foot, 115 mm. : of ?, 585, 179, 91 mm. : both specimens from Lance Au Loup. Skull measurements of four adult males average : Basilar length, 79 max. ; interorbital constric- tion, 16 ram. ; zygomatic expansion, 52 mm. Mustela americana actuosa Osgood. Arctic or Alaska Marten. 1900. Mustela aynericana actuosa Osgood, North American Fauna, No. 19, p. 43. Type Locality . — Fort Yukon, Alaska. Faunal Distribution. — Bi'itish America, north of latitude 55° to Barren Grounds; east to westei'u Labrador peninsula (Northeast Territory) ; west to Coast Ranges of British Colmnbia and Alaska; south in Rocky mountains almost to northern boundary of the United States. Description of Species. — Osgood, tlie describer of this race, has correctly characterized it in his original description and figure as compared with americana typicus, but, as previously stated, he has emphasized too strongly the distinctions between it and brumalis, as now evidenced by the additional skulls of brumalis secured by Mr. Bangs. ^ Osgood's description of color characters of type may be quoted in part as follows : * ' Posterior half of upper parts pale ochraceous- buff, shoulders and anterior part of upper parts gradually be- coming grayish; entire upper parts except head overlaid Avith coarse brown hairs; head, including cheeks and throat, pale grajdsh-white, lightly mixed with brown, especially on nose and chin ; inside and edges of ears whitish ; outside and bases of ears 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 451 brown. Under parts similar to upper parts, but darker aud more brownish on chest." This description is taken from a lighter indi- vidual Avith more ochraceous cast than the average. Several of the Peel's river specimens have scarcely any ochraceous cast, but rather a drab-brown tinge ; but even in these the grayness and clearness of the brown from the " canary " shade of typical southern ameri- cana is very noticeable. For a fuller discussion of these differences see under 31. americana brumalis above, where the cranial charac- ters of both forms are also discussed at length. Also, see remarks under M. americana tyjncus. Measurements. — Avei-age of tight selected old adults, males, measured in flesh : Total length, 671 mm. ; tail vertebrse, 204 mm. ; hind-foot, 109 mm. ; ear height, 40 mm. Skull measurements (average of six adult males) : Basilar length, 80 mm. ; interorbital constriction, 16 mm.; zygomatic expansion, 51 mm. In the type of actuosa the occipito-nasal length is given by Osgood as 85 mm., and tlie zygomatic expansion 55 mm. This is larger than any of the rest of the large series belonging to the U. S. National Museum. Mustela americana abietinoides (Gray). British Columbia Marten. I860. [Maries (unericann'\ var. 1, abietinoides Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc, Loudon, p. 106. Type Locality. — " Rocky Mountains (Drummond and Lord)," Gray. As Gray's abietinoides thus included two distinct species, one of which was undoubtedly caurina (collected by Lord), I have now restricted it to the Rocky mountain specimens taken by Drum- mond. Drummoud's itinerary, as given by Richardson {Fauna Boreali Americana, Vol. I, p. xvi), shows that he did not collect specimens west of the Selkirk Range, hence not within the range of eaurina. The description of abietinoides by Gray evidently refers to dark specimens characteristic of the humid environment of the Selkirks, into which Drunnnond says he penetrated just before his recall home. The marten of the main arid chain of the Rockies is evidently a lighter colored animal. On these considera- tions I have seen fit to define the restricted type locality of abieti- noides to the edge of the humid western slope of the Rocky moun- tains, somewhere between Kicking Plorse pass and the Columbia river. It is significant that this is also the eastern limit of the "Abies" mertensiana or AVestern hemlock, .after which CJray named his so-called "variety" abietcnoides, pioba])ly on account 452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, of notes made by Drummond or Lord a? to the habitat of the type specimens of this marten, Faimal Distribution. — Humid interior region of British Colum- bia, peculiar to the Selkirk and Gold Ranges. Description of Species. — Gray's description reads: " Black- brown ; ears pale, head grizzled with white hairs, more or less gray ; throat yellow or yellow-spotted ; throat spot large or broken up into small spots ; the head sometimes with only a few gray hairs, and the throat with only a few distinct small spots." A specimen sent to me from Vernon, British Columbia, by W. C. Pound, a taxi- dermist with whom I became acquainted while in that place in 1892, is of especial interest in this connection. It was taken November 22, 1892, and no doubt was brought to Mr. Pound by an Indian trapper whom he dealt with, living in the Gold Range above Vernon. Such, at least, was the source of his supplies of larger game and furs during my residence there. The skull and skin of this specimen indicate it to be an adult, but not very aged, female. The naso-premaxillary sutures are not wholly obliterated, as in over-aged specimens, but the occipital crest is that of a fully matured marten, perhaps three or four years old. The color of this specimen answers exactly Gray's description of " black-broivn.'' In this respect it is instantly distinguished from all other of the specimens of marten I have before me, both by the quality and depth as well as the uniformity of its coloration. In terms of Bidgway's Nomenclature of Colors, this specimen is seal-brown throughout, both above and below, with exception of the sides of the head, the interior of ears and a small irregular throat patch. The shade of this seal-brown is blackest on tail, feet, legs and middle back. On sides, under parts, neck and head it is more of a vandyke-brown, but nowhere buffy, ochraceous or orange, as in all other martens I have examined.^ A cheek patch between ear and eye and the insides and margins of ears are grayish-drab, but the rest of head above and below is not noticeably paler than neck as in all others of the americana group found east of the Rocky mountains. Scat- tered white hairs are noticeable among the dark body pelage above and below, being more numerous about head, neck and breast. The narrow, irregular throat patch reaches from angle of lower jaw ^ The jSTewfoundland species, M. atrata, which I have not seen, is prob- nbly another exception. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. A~)0 to uear base of nock, being about two inches long and three- quarters of au inch broad in the widest part Its coh)r is ochrace- oiis-buff. The fulhiess, density and length of pelage is noticeable, and the slight contrast in color of the basal portion of the fur with that of the apical half is unique, so far as I have examined speci- mens. In even the darkest Labrador skins of hnunalis, the triple- zoned color pattern typical of marten fur is quite as marked as in lighter-hued races; but in abietlnoides, as illustrated by this Gold Range specimen, the subapical or intermediate color zone of the individual hairs is absent and their dark apices merge insensibly into the more ashy-brown of their bases. Taken as a sample, this skin would seem to me to indicate that the Selkirk mountain animal furnishes one of the most desirable marten pelts, from the furrier's standpoint, that can be found in North America. The skull of this specimen, as well as that of another, sexed female, from the same locality, show, in comparison with female skulls of same age from the Mackenzie river regions, that abietl- noides is not only specifically identical with M. a. aetiwsa, but tliat it is only slightly smaller in size, being intermediate iu tlie latter feature between M. americcma of Lake Superior and Arctic exam- ples of actaosa. As regards coloration, abietinoides is farther removed from actaosa than any other race of the americana group. It is allied most closely, as regards color pattern, with its geo- graphic ally, origenes of the main Rocky mountain chain. The teeih, audital bullae and the proportions and configuration of skull in abietinoides are precisely as in the americana, as contrasted with the caurina type of cranium. Prof. Oldfield Thomas, who examined for me the Drummond and Lord specimens of Mustela in the British ^Museum which formed the basis of Gray's abietinoides, agrees with me that the Drummond specimens should be considered the types iu a determinatiou as to the status of this name. As the use by Gray of one or more si)eci- mens, probably taken by Lord in the habitat of caurina, further necessitates this division, the natural course, as already somewhat explained under remarks on " tyjie locality," has been to retain caurina for these and restrict abietinoides to the very distinct race of ajuertcfma inhabiting the hemlock and cedar (Tsurja ct Thuja) forests of the western offshoots of the British Columbia Ivockie.s. Prof. Thomas states that a Drunmioud specimen in the British 454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Musouin is less dark thau some of the Lord specimens. Unless the exact locality were given, it is not improbable that some of Drum- mond's specimens (if there were many) may have come from locali- ties in the eastern Rockies, where that natnralist did most of his collecting. In such a case the question would seem to be compli- cated by specimens of origenes, which is almost undoubtedly the race found on the headwaters of the Red Deer river in the Purcell Range, where Drummond wintered. But the gist of the matter* shorn of these complications, is Gray's desire to designate by name a dark American marten found in the Rocky mountains by Drummond. As no special type from a series of British Columbia si^ecimens was designated by Gray, and as a special type or race agreeing with his description has been found to live in the habitat designated, it is within our province here to give it fixity by restriction and elimination, rather than ignore or reject it as a nomenclatural enigma. It may be added that an examination of J. K. Lord's itinerary shows that it is very unlikely he secured any specimens from the habitat of abietinoides as I have restricted it. His operations with the Boundary Commission in the Rocky moun- tains lay entirely south of the Selkirk and Gold Ranges. Measurements. — Made by collector from specimen No. 633, Coll. of S. N. Rhoads, ?, Gold Range, near Vernon, B. C, by W. C. Pound; taken November 22, 1892: Total length, 584 mm.; tail vertebrae, 178 mm. ; hind foot (dry measurement), 87 mm. Skull (of same specimen): Basilar length, 70 mm.; zygomatic expansion, 43 mm.; postorbital constriction of frontals, 17 mm. Measurements of the male, judging l)y analogy of the sexual differ- ences in other races, would nearly e(iual those given for aduosa and brumalis. Mustela atrata Bangs. Newfoundland Marten. 1897. Mustela atrata Bangs, Americau Naturalist, Vol. 31, p. 1G2. Type Locality. — Bay St. George, Newfoundland. Faunal Distribution. — Newfoundland. Description of Species. — I have seen no specimens of this form, which .seems nearly related in size and color, etc., to the dark mar- lens of the northern Rocky mountains. As it is confined to the island, it is considered by Mr. Bangs, its describer, as a distinct species, on geographic rather thau anatomical grounds. Its affini- 1902,] NATURAL SCIEXCE8 OF PHILADELPHIA. 455 ties with ainericana, however, judging by the original descrip- tion, are cranially much closer than to those of bnimalis, aduosa, etc. In such a case it would seem preferable to make exception to the arbitrary ruling of specific recognition (as contrasted with racial separation), based primarily on geographic isolation. The sub- specific differences of atrata, from the standpoint of coloration alone, appear to merit its sepambility from typical americana. The color of atrata is said by Bangs to be " Deep chocolate, becoming black on back, head, arms, legs, rump and tail ; a few white haii-3 scattered along back ; chest and under side of neck irregularly blotched with orange ; a median line of orange on belly ; ears black, narrowly bordei'ed all round with dull white." This indicates a much blacker and more orange-spotted animal than any other marten known to me except a specimen from near Vernon, British Columbia, in the interior region west of the Selkirk Range. In this last specimen, however, the orange spot is small, and does not extend below the base of neck. Bangs says further : ' ' Skull about the size of or larger than that of M. americana ; rostrum narrow, audital buUse much larger and deeper than in M. ameri- cana . . . . ; dentition rather weaker throughout, Avith greater spaces between premolar teeth than that of M. americana. Unfor- tunately, the skulls as well as the type skins were from females. But as other skulls, probably from males, were examined by him, it is likely his diagnosis includes them, showing the close affinity of atrata to typical americana from New Brunswick. Measurements. — Fide Bangs from two females, types: Average total length, 550 mm. ; tail vertebrte, 185 mm. ; hind foot, 88 mm. ; ear from notch, 42 mm. Skull of type : Basilar length, 69.2; zygomatic expansion, 42 mm. Mustela oaurina Merriam. Pacific Marten. 1890. Mustela caurina Merriam, North American Fauna, No. 4, p. 27. 1865. Martes americana, var. 1, (ibktiiioides Gray (in part; referring to J. K. Lord's specimens), Proc. Zool. Soc. Loud., p. 106. Type Locality. — Near Gray's Harbor, Chehalis county, Wash- ington. launal Distribution. — Humid coast and Cascade mountain region of western United States, British Columbia and probably southern Alaska, from northern California northward, east to sum- 456 PROCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^laj, mit of Cascade Range. Geographic connection with M. c. origenes problematic. Deficription of Species. — The Cascade mountain marten, as illus- trated by a very large series of skulls in my collection fi'om Lake Kichelos, Kittitas county, Washington, taken at elevations of 8,000 to 10,000 feel, shows cranial characters so different from any of the other American martens as to suggest a distinct species. It is significant, also, to note that their departure from the Mustela amerlcana type is in the direction of the Old World species, as originally observed by Brandt and INIerriam and confirmed by the exceptional series in my hands. As compared with skulls of 31. a. actuosa from Mackenzie, B. A., and M. americana from noi'th of Lake Superior (with the latter of which they correspond almost exactly in length), the following differences are prominently noticeable: The skull of caurina viewed from above is greatly broadened and flattened; the zygomatic breadth in an old male from Lake Kichelos is to the basilar length as 52 to 74; in a male skull of similar age and sagittal development from Lake Superior these proportions are as 47 to 74, the skulls in each case being the same length. In the largest skull from the Mackenzie river the zygomatic breadth only exceeds that of the largest Washington specimen by 1 millimeter, but its basilar length exceeds the latter by 6 mm. In conformity to this relative shortening and widening, caurina has a markedly wide brain-case and iuterorbital region, the postorbital processes being widely and bluntly developed and the frontals abruptly con- stricted behind them, so that while this constriction is as narrow as in actuosa, the greatest supraorbital width is 1 mm. greater than in the largest actuosa skull. The lowness or flatness of the cranium is also marked. In the skulls already alluded to, caurina has a maxi- mum height from the audital bullae to crest of occiput of 29 mm., while actuosa is 32 mm. high. Viewed from below, the audital bullae of caurina are instantly seen to be very small as compared with americana of same sized skull. They are also of a different shape, being flat, shortened and squared anteriorly, forming a sort of retangular outline, whereas americana and actuosa are more triangular, tumid and elongate. The last upper molar presents differences from all americana forms quite as radical and strangely similar to those claimed by authors as warranting the specific sep- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF rHILADELPIIIA. 457 aratiou of ihe americana group from Ihe Old "World martens. In all the adult representatives of caurina I have examined, this tooth is analogous in character to that of specimens labeled martes and foina in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences, and also to Blaiuville's superb figure of zihelUna in Plate 7 of the Osteo- graphie. The character alluded to is the relatively large size of this molar and the wide expansion of its inner bulb or saddle as contrasted with the exterior section of the same, giving the tooth a rounded, emarginate, triangular shape as contrasted with the narrow, rectangular lateral elongation characteristic of the ameri- cana series. In the latter the ratio of greatest breadth to length of tooth is as 5 to 8, in caurina it is as 7 to 9. In a specimen labeled martes from Europe this ratio is 7^ to 9, the numbei*s in all three cases being actual millimeter dimensions of the teeth. Another character in this tooth common to caurina, zihellina and martes is the tendency to a double median tuberculation of the inner bulb, instead of the single elongate tubei-cle always found in americana typicus and its races. This is clearly resultant from the greater width of the inner bulb in caurina and its Old World allies, thus allowing room for subdivision of the tubercle. A further analogy between caurina and the Eurasian, as contrasted with the American type of dentition, is seen in the lai-ge lower sectorial. In the former this tooth is much wider and heavier than in the americana group and the inner median tubercle is strongly developed. In americana it is generally rudimentary, but not always so. Some of these chai-acters are pointed out by Dr. Merriam in his original description of caurina, but his statement that the inner cusp of the lower sectorial is wanting in male caurina is disproved by my large series. The skulls of ]Mcrriam's types were not fully adult, however. In color, caurina is a richer brown than any of the americana group, more inclining to cinnamon in upper body color. This shade is more uniform throughout the entire length of upper parts to head, which is not so distinctly lighter in color as in all other average East American martens. The head is an almost uniform shade of pale Mars-brown, not lightening on cheeks and ears as in eastern americana types. A marked difference peculiar to caurina is found in the extensive area and rich tint of the dark orange-buft throat and breast patches. This area begins at the angles of the 458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, jtiw, readies up along sides of neck to and including inner base of forelegs, and stretches by spotted interruptions almost to vent, the main body of color terminating on lower breast. The rich coloring and great size of this pattern seem constant in a series of Cascade mountain skins before me. A tendency to scat- tered long silvery hairs through the upper pelage is noticeable as contrasted with americana. This feature is also in the direction of zibellina. In external character the relative length of the tail of caurina is greater than in any other form of American marten except orir/enes. This in a comparison made with my series of Lake Kichelos skins, which were measured in the flesh by collector, Mr. Allan Rupert. It appears likely, howev^er, that his measurements included part of the brush of tail, as the measurement of the dry specimens now seems to indicate. Allowing for this, however, the caurina specimens indicate a long-tailed marten, as the average below given of six old males indicates. See further discussion of cranial characters under 31. americana typicus. MeasuremenU. — Total length, 675 mm. ; tail, 270 mm. ; hind- foot, 90 mm. Deducting from this 50 mm. , the length of the body of tail pencil, leaves the total length 625 mm. , and the tail vertebrae 220 mm., Avhich is much greater relatively and absolutely than in other American martens whose size exceeds caurina. The length of the body, skull and hind foot are nearly identical with the medium - sized martens of southern Canada. It is to be regretted that Dr. Merriam gave no body measurements of his types of caurina. Skull measurements (average of six old males) : Basilar length, 74 mm.; zygomatic expansion, 51; iuterorbital constriction, 15. For relative dimensions of teeth, see above under description of species. Mustela caurina origenes- subsp. nov. Rocky Mouutain Marteu. Type, No. 112,170, young adult 9, collection of U. S. National Museum, from " Marvine Mountain" (Garfield county?), Colo. Collected by Ernest T. Seton (E. Seton Thompson), September 16, 1901. Faunal Distribution. — Southern Rocky mouutain region; higher ranges of New Mexico (?) northward; probably replaced in the '^ From the Greek, meaning " a mountain race." 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 459 Canada Rockies by a race of americana. Geogra])hic counectiou with caurina problematical. Description of Subsjjecies. — Strikingly different from all other xlmerican martens except caurina in the absence of Ihe light- colored cheek patches. Head relatively darker, as compared with upper body colors, than in caurina ; ears lacking a white border or inner lining cf white hairs. Gular and pectoral patch extensive, wide, connected by interrupted streaks along median abdominal line with well-defined narrow pre ventral area of similar color. Color of gular patch a peculiar buffy-orauge, as iu caurina, lightening some- what at armpits. Entire upper parts, including head, ears, legs and sides, and lightening somewhat on belly, " wood-brown," the longer, darker hairs of middle back and rump being " broccoli- brown," and the brush of tail and soles of feet " clove-brown." Ears edged with ochraceous-buff. Tail relatively long, as in caurina. The concolor a])pearance of origenes viewed from above is even more striking than iu caurina, the whole of head, excepting the ear-margins, being quite as dark as the neck and shoulders and these not noticeably darker than the back. The under parts show precisely the same color and pattern characters which distinguish caurina from aviericana. Indeed, it was these, together with the charactei-s of the skull, which upset my previous ideas (based on geographic reasons) that origenes was a race of americana. For- tunately there are five skins and three skulls of Colorado martens at hand, and these all show with remarkable uniformity the con- stancy of the characters of type as above given. It is to be regretted that no skin with skull of an adult male is available. An adult male skin, topotype, also collected by Mr. Setou the last of August, and a female collected on the Great Divide in Boulder county, fit the above description exactly. The skull of two females, one from Boulder county, the other the type, are not enough matured to give the maximum measurements, but the skull of an old adult female from North Park furnishes these, showing origenes to be of the same size and proportions as caurina of the same sex. Coming to an examination of the teeth our surmises, based on external characters, are so completely verified that any zoogeographic preconceptions we may have had as to afiinity of origenes with americana : re swept away. The peculiar saddle- shaped upper posterior grinder of origenes, with its widely flaring 400 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, iuner flauge, aud the relatively small, flattened aud rectaugular aiidilal biillre declare its affinities to be with caurina and not with americana. It is a pale race of caurina, seemingly out of place in its zoogeographic status, and presenting a puzzling thought as to the relationships of the animal living on the main chaia of the Rockies in British Columbia, which our present knowledge of abieiiaoides certainly indicates should be an ally of americana. Should the marten of the northern arid Rockies prove to be an americana form, as we would naturally predict, at what point then shall we look for the geographic gap which separates it from origenes and where the bridge which connects origenes with its kinsman caurina of the Pacific slope ? These are problems for the " next reviewer." Measurements of Type. — ? (recorded by collector): Total length, 612 mm. ; tail vertebrae, 210 mm. ; hind foot, 76 mm. Measurements of an adult male skin, topotype, collected by Setou (from dry specimen): Total length, 676 mm.; tail, 230 mm.; hind foot, 85 mm. Skull (of ? type) : Basilar length, 65 mm. ; zygomatic expansion, 40 mm. Measurements of an old adult ? skull from North Park, N^. 13,985, Coll. Amer. Mus. Kat. Hist., N. Y. : Basilar length, 65 mm. ; zygomatic expansion, 43 mm. ; i)0st- orbital constriction of frontals, 14 mm. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 461 two fungous diseases of the "white cedae. by john w. harshberger, ph.d. Prefatory Kemarks. The white cedar is a stately tree seveuty to eighty feet iu height, and one to four feet in diameter. It lives in the cold sphagnum swamps of the Atlantic and Gulf coast plains, where frequently the bases of the tree are flooded w-ith water. In Kew Jersey, and in the North generally, it forms an almost pure growth. It is associated in the South with the bald cypress, Taxodiwn. Ex- tending from southern Maine along the coast to northern Florida and then westward to the Pearl river in INIississippi, it never is met with far inland, being confined almost entirely to the coastal plains. The tree is not subject to any very serious disease. It is remark- ably exempt from both insect and fungal enemies, and conse- quently it should be looked upon as a promising tree for future systematic forestry in the eastern United States. It gives value to lands that without it would be useless, Sydow^ gives nineteen species of fungi living on Cupressus thyoides. To this number one additional fungus should be added, viz., Gymnosporang'mm Ellmi Berk. Of these, ten species are found growing on the leaves, causing no material injury to them, as the fungi are usually found on dead leaves. Five fungi are confined to the branches, one is found on the trunk, two grow on the bark, two are found on the wood and one fungus, Gymnosporangium biseptatum, occurs on both leaves and branches. The majority of these fungi are sapro- phytes living on the dead parts of the white cedar. Only two fungi may be called disease-producing, viz., Gymnosporangium biseptatum ^XWii and Gymnosporangium Ellisii (Berk.) Fallow. The latter species, Gymnosporangium Ellisii, was first described by 1 Stdow, Index Universalis et Loctipletissiimis Nominum Plantarum Hospitium Specierumque Omnium Fungorum, 1898, p. 375. 462 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^^ay, Berkeley- as Podisoma Ellisii. Farlow* tiausfenecl the species to the geuus Gymnosporangium, and gave somewliat in detail the ex- ternal appearance of .the witches' brooms caused by the growth of the fungas. It causes a fasciatiou of the smaller branches of the white cedar, which become more or less fan-shaped brooms. The external portion' of the fungus is smaller and less gelatinous than in any other species of the genus. Sargent, in the Silva of North America, enumerates in a footnote (X, p. 100) the more important fungi that live on the true cedars, mentioning Gymnosporangium Ellisii (Berk.) Farlow and the following parasitic plant, G. blsep- iatum Ellis, as of most importance from a pathological standpoint. HiSTOKICAL. The fungus Gymnosporangmm bi&eptatum was first described by Ellis* in the following words: " On branches of white cedar. Appearing in April, bursting through the epidermis in little reddish chestnut- colored velvet-like patches which, about the middle of May, pass into the tremelloid state, swelling out into gelatinous masses the size of large peas ; not so distinctly foliaceous as in G. junipieri. Spores long pedicellate, mostly biseptatc." Ellis, also in this place, referred to the appearance of the swellings pro- duced by the fungus. Farlow^ studied and described the fungus in a more thorough manner, but his account has largely to do with the botanical characters of the plant, the external appearance of the swellings and the variation of the spores. He referred in a casual manner to the fact that " the mycelium is found principally in the region of the cambium." Sorauer" described somewhat carefully in detail the life-liistox'y of the Gymnosporaugia and their corresponding Roestelia. As the basis of his remarks, he look Gymnosporangmm fuscum and Roestelia cancellata, described the botanical characters of both the teleutosporic stage and the ajcidio- sporic stage, and referred briefly to the other common species of the genus, viz., Gymnosporangium clavaricvforme, G. conicum, G. mac- ropus, G. hiseptatum, G. tr&nelloides, G. Ellisii. Wornle' inves- " Berkeley, Orevillca, III, p. 56. 'Farlow, Bulletin Bussey Institute, 11, p. 22G : The Gymuosponuigiii or Cedur Apples of the United States, 1880. * Ellis, Bulletin Torrey Botanical Club, 1874, V, p. 40. * Farlow, The Gymuosporaugia, etc., ])p. 19-20. «SoR\UKR, Pfiamenkrankhtiten, 188'j, II, jip. 233-239, taf. X. ' WoRNLE. Aiiatomische Untersuchung der durch Gymnosporangiou- Arten hervorgerufeneu Missbilduugeu. " Inaugural Dissertation." Bot- aniscJiea Centralhlatt, 1894, LX, pj). 280-2S3. 1902.] NATURAL SCIEN'CES OF PHILADELPHIA. 463 tigated more particularly the pathological symptoms produced in the host plants by the European species of Gymnoqyorangium, viz., G. junipermum, O. clavarueforme, G. sabime, and in a gen- eral way, with imperfect material at his disposal, the pathology of the American species of Gymnosporangium, viz., G. Ellkii, G. biseptatum, G. clavipes, G. macropus. He investigated the changes produced in the bast, the cortex and the wood of Juniperus nana and J. communis by Gymnosp)oranyium juniperinum {conicum); of J. communis by G. clavariceforme ; of J. sabina by G. sabince. He investigated in a most general manner the disease conditions induced by the American species of this genus of fungi. Hailig* described the botanical characters of the following species of Gym- nosporangium : G. conicum (^juniperinum'), G. clavarueforme, G. sabince (fusciim), G. tremelloides. ■ Frank^ described in a general way the botany and pathology of Gymnosjyorangium fuscum, G. confusum, G. clavariceforme, G. conicum, G. Ellisii, G. macro- pus, G. biseptatum, G. clavipes, G. globosum, G. nidus-avis, G. Cunning hamiamim. Plowright'" obtained some unexpected results by cultures made with the teleutospores and secidiospores of the three European species of Gymnosporangia, viz., G. clavarice- forme, G. conicum, G. fuscum, enlarging materially the list of plants upon which the Roestelia of these plants are found. Thax- ter," by numerous culture experiments, succeeded in most cases in working out the life -histories of the American species of the genus Gymnospiorangium, by connecting the recidial stage on rosaceous plants with the teleutosporic stage on various coniferous trees. San- ford^^ studied the structure of the twigs of the red cedar with refer- ence to the formation of the cedar apple. He made a detailed microscopic study of the cedar apple swelling, the spores and the spore-bearing filaments. A brief mention of these articles is suflficient to draw attention to the fact that very little work has been done on the pathological conditions produced by the American species of Gymnosporangium. ^ Hartig, The Dueases of Trees (Enslisli translation), 1894, p. 157. '■•Frank:, Die Pilzparaaitaren KrankheUeii der Pflamen, 189G, II, pp. 170-184. '"Plowrioht, British Heteroecious Uredines, Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., 1888, XXIV, p. 93. 11 TiiAXTER. Bot. Gaz., 1889, XIV, p. 163 ; Conn. State Exper. Stat. Report, 1891, p. 161. i'Sanford, Annals of Botany, 1887, I, p. 263. 404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^May, The atteutiou of the writer was drawn to the swellings a year or two ago, while botanizing in the coastal i^lain of New Jersey. Si>ecimeus of the swellings caused by the two fungi were collected in a cedar swamp at Island Heights Junction, N. J. Both the fanlike growth of the younger branches and the larger knotty growths on the older branches and the trunk of the trees Avere met with in this cedar swamp. The large knob-like swellings, a foot or more in diameter, girdling the trunk of large trees, were seen in a cedar sw^amp at Newfield, IST. J, Methods. Sections of the swellings caused by Gyvmosporangium biseptatum were made by means of a plane. The smaller sections w'ere mounted in the usual way on slides, and the larger sections were mounted on window glass with thinner pieces of white glass as covers, and these preparations Avere then placed over a steam radia- tor until the balsam was perfectly dry and hard. The covers were kept in place during the drying by spring-clip clothes pins, which suited the purpose admirably. Bismarck-brown, aniline-green and an admixture of acid-fuchsin and methyl-green Avere used with satisfactory results in the demarcation of the tissues. Appearance of the Savellings. The SAvellings produced by Gymnosporangium biseptatum Ellis are quite characteristic. The disease may appear on trees Avhich are from fiA'e to six feet high, Avith stem about an inch in diameter. In these young trees the sAvelliug surrounds the Avhole stem, being about three inches long and approximately spindle-shaped (Pis. XXII, XXIII, figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5). The bark is deeply fissured by longitudinal cracks, Avhicli are also someAvhat wrinkled at the bottom (fig. 3). In a stem three-eighths inch diameter, the AA'ood inA'oh^ed is quite sound, although in dried specimens of a more decided yellow color than the Avood of the stem below, Avhich is AA'hitish in color. As the mycelium of the fungus is perennial, these club-shaped enlargements keep constantly increasing in length and diameter from year to year. In another someAvhat larger specimen studied, the burl reaches a diameter of an inch and a half and is about six inches long. The fissures become much deeper, due to 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465 the abuonnal formation of the coi-k, until on one side of the stem the barky x-idge is one-half inch high, the groove being correspond- ingly deep. These ridges of bark covered with small lichens give to the swelling an extremely rough, cancer-like appearance (fig. 5). The wood assumes a brownish aspect and the annual rings, as seen by the naked eye, are more or less wavy. Occasionally the mal- formation appears as an enlarged excrescence. It would seem that this excrescence began its growth upon a young lateral branch, which afterward ceased its elongation and was covered up by the enlarging fungus-infested mass of wood. The burls are about three inches long and about two inches wide, with the bark fissured into deep grooves with rather broad corky flakes. The wood to the naked eye resembles in appearance the well-known curly or bird's- eye maple. In another specimen examined, the swelling seven inches long involves the main stem and one of its branches, so that the swelling, which is fissured in the characteristic way and two inches in diameter, may be said to have forked. The swellings produced by Gyvinosporangium Ellisii Berk, are confined to the smaller twigs and branches. Near the summit of young Avhite cedar trees where the branches grow upward, and are thus more or less crowded together, all of these branches may be involved (tig. 8). The result is the formation of fan-shaped mass of swellings, which assume a fasciculate character when closely crowded. The trees attacked by it may, therefore, be recognized, even at a considerable distance by the peculiar distortions, which consist in a dense fasciculation of the smaller branches in different parts of the tree, so that, viewed from a distance, one sees closely branching tufts of a corymbose outline, which appear to terminate some of the branches (fig. 8). On one lateral branch of white cedar, one-half inch in diameter, twelve smaller branches were all massed together into a witches' broom. The external appoaiance of the bark on these branches is somewhat different from tliat described for G. biseptatum. Here the bark is fissured transversely. With a few longitudinally directed cracks the reddish-brown bark is thus divided into a numl)er of plates, rectangular in shape (fig. 8). The smaller t^vigs are not thus affected, but instead have a somewhat rugose continuous surface. One or two of the branches involved by the fungus are dead. The swellings differ also from those formed by the preceding fungal species in tapering gradually 466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Play, from ihe basal end of the twig, where the swelling is largest, toward the distal end, where the growth merge? with the normal diameter of the branch (fig. 8 ). The abnormalities on the lateral branches of two other young trees of white cedar are marked, because the secondary branches have increased considerably in number and have assumed a fastigiate habit, radiating upward and outward from an approximately common point. As many as twenty small branches, all about six inches long, are to be counted in a single fasligiation (fig. 8). The surface of the Imrk in these specimens is raised into vesicular roughenings, which condition seems to precede the formation of the rectangular plates of bark by some interval of time. Normal 8tkm Structure of White Cedar. According to Prof. Sargent," " the wood of Cupressiis thyoides is light, soft, not strong, close-grained, easily worked, slightly fragrant, and very durable in contact with the soil. It seasons rapidly and perfectly without warping or checking ; it is light- brown tinged with red, with thin lighter-colored sap-wood, but grows darker with exposure, and contains dark-colored, conspicu- ous nari'ow bands of small summer-cells, and numerous obscure medullary rays. The specific gravity of the absolutely dry wood is 0.3322, a cubic foot weighing 20.70 pounds." The sections, made with a hand-plane, were stained with three different stains, viz., methyl-green, Bismarck -brown and a mixture of methyl -green and acid-fuchsin used as a double stain. The histological details of the stem in an uudiseased state are as follows : The pith of a twenty-one-year-old stem with wood three-eighths inch diameter is almost entirely absent. Its place is filled by the ' clo.sely aggregated spiral tracheee which compose the region known as the protoxylem. From this small contracted protoxylem radi- ate toward the cortex the primary medullary rays and the wedges of xylem. The medullary rays are numerous, but obscure. They consist in the cross-section of but a single row of thin-walled parenchyma cells which are six times longer than broad. The wedges of wood are narrow, their radial limits being defined by the medullary rays. The following table shows the variation in the size of the annual rings, as determined by a count under the microscope '' Sargent, Sihd of North America, X, p. 11-*. 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 467 of the uumber of traclieid.s iu a single radial liue, proceeding from the cambium to the pith. The striking feature iu this enumeration Table I. Number of Annual Rins:. Year. Number of Tracheids. Number of the Tracheids in the Autumn Wood. 21 1900 6 2 20 1899 10 3 19 1898 ; 21 5 18 1897 18 5 17 1896 18 4 16 1895 15 5 15 1894 12 3 14 1893 1 6 1 13 1892 ! 16 5 12 1891 1 12 4 11 1890 15 4 10 1889 12 5 9 1888 9 3 8 1887 1 6 2 7 1886 i ^ 2 fi 1885 ' 10 3 5 1884 9 2 4 1883 1 10 5 3 1882 6 3 2 1881 7 3 1 1880 1 of the tracheids is the uniformity of the growth (fig. 9). The diameter of the lumen and the thickness of the cell wall iu nearly all of the tracheids of the spring and summer wood is very nearly the same in all of the annual rings of wood. This, and the fact that the annual rings are not clearly delimited by the naked eye, and in some cases even with the microscope, argues for an ex- tremely uniform rate of growth. A uniform rate of growth pre- supposes environmental conditions of little variation. The factors which influence the growth of the tree and the formation of the wood are, therefore, fairly constant during the growing season, and it is not unlil near the time of the cessation of growth that a few tracheids of thick walls and narrow lumen are laid down as autumn wood. We would expect just such influ- encing environmental conditions in a spliagiiuiu bog. 468 proceedings of the academy of [may, Conditions Influencino the Growth of White Cedar AND its Parasitic Fun(4I. The temperature of sphagnum bogs is well kuown to be low, and the expression cold bogs is frequently met with in the descriptions in the manuals. European students Of bogs consider the low temperature as due to evaporation from the surface of the sphag- num which grows in the bogs, but this seems altogether inadequate to explain the phenomenon. Ganong" supposes it to be due ratlier to a persistence of the winter cold, which in such a non-conducting mass would last through the summer. In this explanation the writer entirely agrees with Prof. Ganong, although in Xew Jersey the winter cold does not persist throughout the entire summer. One ivould expect this from the more southern position of New Jersey, as compared with the northern latitude of New Brunswick, there being a difference of six degrees of latitude between the two stations. The difference in latitude hardly expresses the difference in climate, because of the exposure of New Brunswick to the descending polar currents. "It is easy to test these two hypo- theses ; for if the former be true there should be little change in the temperatui'e conditions after the summer average is once attained, or ev^en the bog might be somewhat low^er in temperature when the season is hottest, and hence evaporation most active ; if the latter be true the bog should steadily rise in temperature through the summer." Ganong took the temperature of the bogs studied by him and found that there was a perceptible rise of temperature during the summer, the temperature rising in two months an aver- age of 2° at one foot under the surface. The same author found on July 1, near the centre of the bog observed by him, sheets of ice six to eight inches thick and several feet square about a foot under the surface. All of these facts are of interest in connection with the character of growth of the white cedar. The persistence of the uniform temperature, i.e., the slow heating up of the soil and water of the swamps, regulates to a remarkable degree the character of the annual rings of wood. With rapid growth in the wet spring, ordinary dicotyledonous trees, as a rule, have well-defined spring elements with usually wide open lumen. As the summer advances '^ Ganong, Upon Raised Peat Bogs in the Province of New Bruns- wick, Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada, 2d Ser., Ill, p. 151. 1002.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 469 and the soil becomes drier and warmer, the xylem elements bee thicker walled and the Inmen smaller, forming the so-called autumn xylem. Where the spring growth is delayed until growth fairly commences and where the soil and ground water temperature remain almost constant, the tracheids approach a uniform thickness and size. The annual rings are consequently not well characterized, and it requires in many cases a microscopic examination to deter- mine the limits of the rings of wood annually laid down. We have in the white cedar, Cupressus thyoides, of the New Jersey bogs an exemplification of this character of ill-defined annual rings due to the influence of the uniform condition of growth. The question may be asked at this point. Why this digression ? The answer is, the whole question of growth has a very nnportant bearing on the entrance, growth and spread of the fungi which cause the disease conditions about to be described. It may be well here to preface the discussion of the diseases pro- duced by the two species of Gymnosporangia by referring to a case described by Ward^* which is apropos. The larch disease is due to the ravasres of a fungus, Dasyscyplia Wlllhommii, the hyphfe of which obtain access by wounds to the sieve tubes and Ihe cambium of the stem, finally producing a cankerous malformation. The larch fungus is to be found on trees in their alpine home, but there it does very little damage and never becomes epidemic except in sheltered regions near lakes and in other damp situations. " How then are we to explain the extensive ravages of the Larch disease over the whole of Europe during the latter half of this century ?' ' Ward asks. '' In its mountain home the Larch loses its leaves in Septem- ber and remains quiescent through the intensely cold winter until May. Then come the short spring and rapid passage to sunnner, and the Larch buds open with remarkalile celerity when they do begin — i.e., when the roots are thoroughly awakened to activity. Hence the tender period of young foliage is reduced to a minimum, and any agencies which can only injure the young leaves and the shoots in the tender stage must do their work in a few days, or the opportunity is gone and the tree passes forthwith into its summer state. In the plains, on the contrary, the Larch begins to open at varying dates from March to ^lay, and during the tardy spring encounters all kinds of vicissitudes in the way of frosts and cold 1^ Ward, Diseases in Plants, 1901, p. 152. 470 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, winds following ou warm days which have started the root action — for we must bear in mind that the roots are more easily awakened after our warmer winters than is safe for the tree. It amounts to this, therefore, that iu the plains the long-coutiuued period of folia- tion allows insects, frost, Avinds, etc., some six weeks or two months in which to injure the slowly sprouting tender shoots, whereas in the mountain heights they have only a fortnight or so in which to do such damage. ' ' May we not have a parallel case in the retarding influence of the conditions which surround the white cedar in its boggy home, and which influence is reflected iu the structure of the annual rings of wood already alluded to and the development of the disease about to be described ? Additional Facts Con'cerning the Normal Structure OF White Cedar Stems. Before beginning the pathological description, it may be well to say a few more words concerning the normal structure of the stem. The woody tracheids are elongated and marked with bordered pits in their radial walls. The bordered pits are large and well defined, both in the radial longitudinal section and in the transverse section. Eesin canals (fig. 11) are entirely absent from the wood, and in this the general resemblance of the xylem of the white cedar to that of the pine ceases. The absence of a well-defined pith in Cupressus thyoides is also noteworthy. The phloem or bast region of a twenty-one-year-old stem consists of alternate concentric rings of hard and soft bast. The hard bast consists of bast fibres with thick chromophobic'" walls and obsolete lumen. The bast fibres are arranged in a single layer of cells in each of the annual rings of bast fclements. Alternating with these are the soft bast layers, the layer latest formed being found next to the wood cambium. Numerous large circular and elliptical resin canals are found in the phloem region, breaking the continuity of the rings of hard and soft bast (fig. 11). A stem forty-one years old shows essentially the same structure with some differences in the cortical i-egion. The same uniformity in the size of all the tracheids is noticeable, there being no sharp I'A term proposed by ^loutgomery to describe the walls and proto- plasm of cells that are refractory to stains. 1902.] NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 471 delimitation of the annual rings of wood. An enumeration of the tracheids in a single row from pith 1o cortex is here given, as an expression of the relative size of each annual ring. The wood of the stem from which the enumeration is made is one inch diameter. Table II. Number of Annual Ring. Year. Number of Tracheids, Number of Tracheids in Autumn Wood. 41 1900 6 2 40 1899 i 9 2 39 1898 10 3 38 1897 14 2 37 1896 9 3 86 1895 6 2 35 1894 8 2 34 1893 8 2 33 1892 9 3 32 1891 9 3 31 1890 11 3 30 1889 13 3 29 1888 11 4 28 1887 13 3 27 1886 18 3 26 1885 15 3 25 1884 22 4 24 1883 18 5 23 1882 10 3 22 1881 10 8 21 1880 7 2 20 1879 15 3 19 1878 18 4 18 1877 14 3 17 1876 16 3 16 1875 19 3 15 1874 16 3 14 1873 17 3 13 1872 10 3 12 1871 13 2 11 1870 11 3 10 1869 11 2 9 1868 16 3 8 1867 16 3 7 1866 11 2 6 1865 21 4 5 1864 27 1 4 4 1863 22 3 3 1862 47 4 2 1861 22 ' 5 1 18C0 18 4 The tracheids of the first three years of growth are more rounded 472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, iu eoulour aud their walls are thicker thau those of subsequent years. The phloem of a forly-oue-year-old stem differs materially from that of a twenty-one-year-old stem in the absence of strongly marked layers of bast fibres. Bast fibres are present, but they are not in continuous layers. Even with the high power, it is difficult to trace their conliuuity. The resin canals occupy a definite area, viz., midway in the phloem. The medullary rays of the phloem are continuous with those of the xylem, running out to the active cork cambium (fig. 12). True cortical parenchyma is entirely absent from such stems. The cork is in several well-marked zones or bands. These bands are separated from each other by the sev- eral layers of cork cambium. Seven well-marked layers of cork cambium are met with in this forty-one-year-old stem. The outer one is about to be pushed off by the sixth layer of cork. The innermost cork cambium lies against the outer rows of phloem cells. Several old fuuctionless resin canals are included in the mass of dead exfoliating bark. They are conspicuous as rounded or ellipti- cal holes in the mass of cork cells. The external appearance of the bark of large trees is smooth than otherwise. It is usually from three-quarters of an inch to nearly an inch in thickness, light reddish-brown, and divided irregularly into narrow, flat connected ridges, which are often spirally twisted around the stem, and separ- ated into elongated loose or closely appressed plate-like fibrous Pathological Considerations. The pathological conditions which are followed by the striking increase iu the size of the stems are of long duration, as evidenced by a microscopic examination of the swellings. The fight for supi'emacy, if such it may be called, is a long-drawn-out one. A section was made across the smallest stem canker which com2)letely girdled the whole stem. It was found upon examining the abnor- mality that the same annual ring is not of a uniform thickness throughout, being thinner in some parts than in others. The rings are clearly much thicker than those of the normal stem. Sixteen rings in all were counted in the region of the canker. This in- creased width of the rings is due to an increase in the number of tracheids produced by the cambium. These tracheids, as well as 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 473 the cells of the inedullarv rays, are usually of a greater diameter thau the normal, which also accounts for the greater width of the rings formed at the canker. These observations agree with those of Anderson" upon the canker growth produced by Dasyscypha resin- aria. The medullary rays of the swollen areas of the stem seem to increase somewhat in diameter. This increase of diameter is not due to the increase in the number of parallel rows of cells, but is due to the increase in diameter of the single row of parenchyma cells which is met with in the normal cross -section. These cells stain more deeply than the normal cells because of the granular contents. Further reference to this change of content in the medullary ray cells of diseased sections of the stem will be made with a description of the longitudinal section of the diseased regions. If a number of tracheids in the annual rings of the swollen area of the sixteen years of growth be compared with the table display- ing the number of tracheids in the annual rings of twenty-one years' growth, a wide difference is at once observable. TJie num- ber of tracheids in the abnormal growth is clearly greater thau in the normal one. Table III. Number of Number of Year. Number of Tracheids Annual Ring. Tracheids. iu Autumn Wood. 16 1900 31 4 15 1899 24 6 14 1898 49 4 13 1897 54 5 12 1896 39 5 11 1895 50 7 10 1894 40 5 9 1893 29 4 8 1893 42 5 7 1891 25 4 G 1890 26 7 5 1889 21 4 4 1888 20 4 3 1887 12 2 0 1880 10 3 1 1885 10+px. 3 ' " Anderson, Alexander P., Dasyscypha reslnaria causing canker growth on Abies balsamea in Minnesota, Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, XXIX, pp. 23-34. 474 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, One of the most frequent results of the action of fungi is that of a stimulus given to cell division. Mention in this connection must be made of the swellings on the stems of silver firs, whose cortical tissues are infested by JEcidium elatinum; the increased growth of the cowberry through the attack of Melaimpora (Calyptospora) Gceppertiana ;^^ of the larch througli the influence of Peziza (Helotium) Willkon.mii.^^ Still more frequently the infested parts are stimulated to display abnormal growths. Flowers and fruits of various species of plants are transformed in a most peculiar manner by fungi belonging to the genus Exoaseus. The disease of the silver fir, however, caused by jEcidiwn {Perkier- mium) elatinmn is the most appropriate one to compare with the canker knobs produced on the white cedar by Gymnosporangiiun hisej)tatuin. The mycelium of this fungus, according to Hartig, is perennial in the cortical and bast tissues of the stem, and even penetrates the cambium and the wood. "With the spread of the mycelium, the swellings or canker spots increase in size, and if present on the stem of a vigorous tree, they may attain to large dimensions. At such places the tissues of the cortex and bast become fissured and dry up here and there, as far as the wood, giving the whole exterior of the swelling a rough, shaggy appear- ance. The swellings resemble much in external character those described by the writer as occurring on the white cedar in New Jersey. Anderson^" describes the changes produced in the cortex of Abies balsamea by Dasyscypha resinaria in the following quota- tion from his paper: " In the bark of the canker, the periderm as well as the primary cortex, and outer layers of the secondary cortex, are very soon cut off by the formation of a neAV phellogen layer. This causes the death of the cut-off layers of the bark, which dry up sooner than in the normal. The resin canals are also cut off and disturbed, and their resin contents begin to diffuse into the surrounding tissues, but mostly collect in the resin vesicles or ' blisters,' which are also formed sooner in the primaiy cortex of the canker than in the normal bark. The resin of the canker vesicles is forced out by the increased pressure on the vesicle, by the shrinkage of the surrounding dead layers of the bark, cut off by i"* ITartig, Text-Book of the Diseases of Trees, 1894, p. IGl. ''••PIartig, loc. cit., p. 120. '"Anderson, loc. cit., p. 29. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47o the new pheilogen. The resin thus forced out runs down the trunk of 1 he tree, the more volatile substances evaporating, leaving the solid resiu, which hardens and gives the trunk a glazed appearance easily seen at some distance from the tree." Feziza (Dasyscypha) Willkommil and jtJcldiiivi {Peridermium) elatinum cause similarly an increased growth of the cortex. In summer the growth of the mycelium of the former ceases and an unusually broad layer of cork is formed, for the protection of the tree, along the boundary between the sound and diseased tissues. Year by year the canker spot enlarges and the conflict between parasite and host plant may remain long undecided. Hartig found in the Tyrol lai'ches still alive with blisters of a hundred years' standing. The second fun- gus, whose mycelium stimulates giowth in a very marked manner, is perennial in the cortical and bast tissues of the stem, and even penetrates the cambium and the wood. The influence of the fungus is to induce the increased formation of the wood, but espe- cially the more vigorous development of the cortex. This account with reference to the inci'eased activity of the pheilogen (cork cambium), due to the fungi mentioned, describes in a fairly accurate manner the method of augmented growth in the white cedar caused by Gymnospomngium biseptaium. Four suc- cessive cork cambial layers have been developed in this sixteen- year-old stem, with the possibility of more that have been exfoliated. The newest pheilogen has developed inside the phlrem, cutting off from the more internal layers three concentric layers of hard bast. iSot only has the hard bast been cut off from the inside of the stem, but also the resin canals, with, however, only a slight exudation of resin, the corky flakes remaining almost quite dry. The three outer cork cambia have only affected the primary cortex, and between these layers of pheilogen the resin canals have ex- panded to their widest diameter. The layers of cork cambium take a somewhat sinuous course in running around the stem, so that they apparently loop in and out among the rapidly dying cells. The hyphre of the fungus live appai-ently in the cells of Ihe wood cambium and those of the phkem recently cut off from the cambium. This is evidenced by a study of the cells. The hyphre in cross-section occupy the lumen of the cells, for, in addition to the cellulose cell wall of the host, there are rounded or elliplical rings filled with granular matter (figs. 18, 19). These rings are the 476 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^lav, transversely or obliquely cut hyphse which, by their presence, stimu- late the cambium to increased activity. AVith the exception of these there seems to be no other attributable cause for the formation of the swellings, because the wood at this stage of the disease is free from all appearance of disintegration. It is, however, otherwise when the disease has progressed for some years. One remarks this on studying the sections of a canker that has progressed in develop- ment for some ten or more years. In all of the larger swellings studied by the writer, the cambium had been killed in a number of places. The dead spots vary in size in different cankers, but they seldom become confluent by extending completely around the stem or branch. When they meet so as to girdle the stem, the stem dies. More often the dead area is f-niall, remaining about the s-ame size for a number of years. The living cambium makes an effort to repair the damage, but this it is not able completely to do on account of the presence of the mycelium in the tissues. A cavity or pocket finally results at the dead spot with the increase in num- ber of the annual rings (fig. 14). As with the disease of Abies balsamea described by Anderson, often several such cavities are formed when the cambium has been killed at more than one spot, and these cavities or pockets contain hardened I'esin. In the white cedar a comparatively small amount of resin collects, but in Abies balsamea the amount is quite considerable. In stems of white cedar that have been long diseased and that are dead above the swelling the brown bark cracks off, exposing the wood, the exter- nal surface of which is ventricose (fig. 14). The sap-wood of such badly diseased swellings has become porous, partly rotten and divided up into plates by the pores, the cracks or the fissures that abound. The heart-wood is still firm. Under the microscope this breaking down of the sap-wood does not seem to follow an absorp- tion of the middle lamella of the cell wall by ferment action, but is due to a springing free of the lignified portion of the cell wall. Later the walls seem to break across and pieces of lignified cell wall, some U-shaped, some Y-shaped, hang free along the edges of the fissures thus formed. Here the disease has progressed to its fullest extent (fig. 32). The hyphse from the point of infection grow through the cortex and then spread vertically up and down through the phloem. By the second year they have established themselves in the cambium 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 477 and iu its immediate neighborhood (fig. 18). The patliological conditions set up by these hyplite have been described, but ini^addi- tion to the increase of the bast and tlie wood, we have an increase in the number of cells in the cortex and the bark. The course of the liyplise and their distribution throughout the swellings will be described more in detail. A brief mention at this point suffices to draw attention to them. The Plugged Tracheids. The wood of the abnormal regions of the stem shows in addition to the hyphffi brown -colored spots which are absent iu stems of normal proportions. Without discussing at this juncture the nature and significance of these brown spots, which are due to the plug- ging of the tracheids, it is appropriate to discuss the distribution of the spots throughout the diseased regions of the stems. Plugged tracheids are found in the swellings with sixteen rings of growth, beginning with the fourth annual ring of wood. Here they are seen in the spring wood. Counting the number of such plugged tracheids in a half-circle of the fourth annual ring of wood and in the rings of successive years of the same stem, we obtain the follow- ing numerical statement : Table IV. Number of Seasonal Wood. Year. Plugged Tracheids. 1 Summer. 2 18 3 23 Spring. 4 22 Spring and Svunmer. 5 32 Autumn. 0 18 Summer. 7 12 Spring and Summer. 8 11 Summer and Autumn 9 10 11 If) End of Spring. la 13 14 15 16 10 An inspection of the table shows that in small swellings the 478 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^lay, l)liigged tracheitis are confiued almost entirely to the summer wood, aud occur iu largest number in the first six or eight years of growth. Very few are found iu the annual rings subsequent to the ninth. Older stem cankers show these plugged tracheids more plentifully from the first annual ring of wood laid down to the last one (figs. 16, 17). The larger excrescences have them in greatest number. The smaller excrescences are without them. At the point, how- ever, where the tissues of the swellings join the main portion of the stem, these plugged tracheids are so numeroas that they form well-marked concentric bands. The following statement roughly expresses the position and abundance of the plugged tracheids in the several annual rings of a swelling with well-marked excres- cences. Second Year Wood. Summer. Abundant, forming a compact circular zone. Third Year Wood. Spring. Al)undaut, forming a loose zone. Fourth Year Wood. Summer. Sparse, except one area where the plugged tracheids are closely aggregated together. At this point the ring is much narrower, taking a U-shaped bend inw^ard. The autumn wood here is wanting. The fourth annual ring is, therefore, continuous except at this one point, where it becomes bent inward. Instead of the fifth year wood following this in- dented portion of the fourth year wood, it fills up the mdented area with additional tracheids, so that at the end of the fifth year the course of the autumn wood again conforms to a circular outline. Fifth Year Wood. Autumn. Sparse. Si.vth Year Wood. Late summer. Plenliful. Seventh Year Wood. Summer. Autumn. A few plugged tracheids are found iu the summer wood. More are met with in the autumn wood. Eighth Year Wood. Late spring. The plugged tracheids are very abundant and in a definite circular zone. — Summer. Abun- dant in two circular zones. Late summer. Scattered. Ninth Year Wood. Summer. Veiy few, but the plugged tracheids apparently become brown lines coterminous wilh the medullary rays. Tenth Year Wood. Autumn. Abundant and occupving in a circular zone the region of the autuiim wood. The same brown lines are traceable runniufr out to the cortex. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 479 Eleventh Year Wood. Late suininer. Plentiful iu a detiuite zone. A fe\r in the autumn wood. Twelfth Year Wood. Spring. In a definite zonal band, two or three tracheids deep. A few in the summer wood. A ring of scat- tered tracheids at the beginning of the autumn wood. Thirteenth Year Wood. "Whole year. Here the small excres- cence began its growth. It is limited on both sides by dead tissue. The plugged tracheids form several circular zones both in the spring and summer woods. Thiee well-marked circular zones of plugged tracheids are clearly distinguishable, forming with their aggregation an almost continuous area involving most of the tracheids of the spring and early summer woods. Beyond the area with the largest number of these plugged tracheids occurs the small excrescence which has grown over the adjacent bark at the dead areas, pro- ducing a characteristic fissure. The disposition of these plugged elements in concentric rings in the several annual cylinders of wood is somewhat analogous to the disposition of the resin canals in Abies balsamea, diseased by Dasijscypha resinaria, as described by Ander- son. This botanist finds that these are arranged in circular rows and in all cases follow the development of the above-mentioned fungus. According to the same author, Nottberg produced these resin canals experimentally in the wood and branches of Abies pectinata by fracturing the branches. The characteristic canal chains were formed in the wood near the fracture three mouths after the wound had been made.^^ The phlcem and cortex regions of the swollen areas are remark- able for the increase in the number of elements. The cork, hard and soft bast, representing the previous activity of the cambiar layers, are pushed off more rapidly than in a normal undiseased area (figs. 13, 14). New layers of hard and soft bast are formed constantly by the wood cambium, and the noteworthy features of such phloem is that the bast fibres do not form so continuous a circle of growth, but are isolated in patches. The cells of the soft bast are more irregular iu outline (fig. 13). The resin canals in such cross-sections are also more inconstant in outline. Some of them are large and of irregular shape ; others ai'e circular and small. The resin canals in the normal slate are, as a rule (not always), elliptical in cross- section. Where the cortex of the excrescence '-' Anderson, loc. cit., p. 31. 4.S0 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^Jiy, meets that of the unmodified stem it is much reduced in width, and there are no cortical cells where, by the folding over of the swelling, forceful compression occurs. The bast fibres in transverse section are, as a rule, rectangular with rounded coruei-s. The lumen has almost completely disappeared. In unstained mounts these elements have the luster of German silver. These fibres are more continuous in some places than in others. Their continuity is only broken by the cortical medullary rays. Longitudinal sections of two swellings were studied. The swell- ings used to make the sections may be described as follows : The first one forms a burl-like outgrowth on one of the smaller lateral branches which had grown through the activity of the fungus very considerably in size, the end being rounded and clubbed. The other swelling represents a malformation of the main stem and a branch, a section of which is in general Y-shaped. The thicker part of the swelling represents the stem of the Y. These sections were stained with methyl-green. The normal tracheids are chi'omo- phobic. The bordered pits are well marked in all of the tracheids. The plugged tracheids mentioned in the consideration of the transveree sections are well marked. They stain in general of a dark-green color, and the lumen seems to be enlarged and filled with granular contents. The ends of such tracheids are more rounded than the ends of normal ones. The cell-lumen is larger. The wall is more wavy and the course of the elements more irregular. In some of these plugged tracheids the contents seem to be more or less granular. These become dark-gi'eeu in color by the use of the methyl-green. That these longitudinally directed plugged tracheids correspond to the brown spot referred to in the description of the several cross-sections is easily demonstrated by observing their course in the sections of lateral branches found in the longitudinal sections of the swellings. It is observable that the longitudinally directed tracheids filled with granular matter take a sharp bend and run into the branch, Avhere they are seen in transverse section. The medullary ray cells also of such sections become deeply stained when methyl-green is applied. Tangential sections of the swellings show the medullary ray cells stretching across the tracheids in a gridiron fashion. The parenchyma cells of the medullary rays are long compared to their diameter. The ratio of 5 to 1 will express in an approximate manner the relative length and diame- ter of such parenchyma cells. 1902.] natural scfexces of philadelphia. 481 Contexts of Plugged Tracheids and Filled Medullary Ray Celi>;. The Unverdorben-Fraucliimoiit reaction with copper acetate was used as a special reagent to determine the presence or absence of resins and terpenes.'^- It was thought that the material plugging the tracheids and filling some of the medullary ray cells might he of a resinous nature. The reaction is indecisive as to the material in the tracheids. An emerald-green color is produced by the copper acetate in the area of wood most affected by the fungus and where the active formation of the wood and bast took place. This green color is confined to the newly formed sap-wood and to the immediate neighborhood of the most active mycelial growth. The appearance of the emerald-green color indicates the presence of resin, and, in fact, in thin longitudinal sections of the wood of the stem at the .swelling there is found a granular matter which stains a malachite- green. This material, which reacts to the copper acetate, occurs as a peripheral layer about the brownish matrix in the center of the filled medullary ray cells and the plugged tracheids, and this is most pronounced where the influence of the fungous parasite seems to be most marked. In some cases the green color indicates that whole medullary ray cells contain a resinous material. The con- tents of the resin canal cells of the phloem and of the cortex react to the copper acetale, and the dried resin which occurs on the surface of and in the fissures of the bark becomes of a striking malachite- green Qolor. These latter reactions confirm the Unverdorbeu- Franchimonl test. The green color imparted to the wood is con- fined to patches and is not generally distributed. The brown material in general of the plugged tracheids and medullary ray cells is not influenced by the copper acetate. That this reaction seems to indicate the presence of resin in the most diseased areas and another fundamentally different substance is indicated by the fact that adjoining cells will have their contents colored emerald- green, while others will remain uniformly uncolored. In a trans- verse section of the area of wood stained green, the contents of the plugged tracheids (figs. 16, 17) still retain their brownish- yellow color. Notwithstanding these facts, one point .-^eems to be definitely settled, viz., that the presence of the mycelium in the "ZiMMERMANN-HuMPHREY, Botaiiical Microtechnique, pp. 90, 91. 31 482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, saii-wood and cambium leads to the accumulation of resin, a brownish -yellow material which appears to be fungus gamboge, as indicated by the following test : A solution of ferric -chloride colors fungus gamboge olive-green or blackish-brown, and in the sections of white cedar so treated a decidedly blackish-brown color is obtained. The material in the tracheids is, therefore, named lentatively fungus gamboge. Besides this material, which seems to form the matrix, there are numerous small rouuded grains which plentifully till the medullary ray cells. These granules stain brown when iodine solution is used, green when methyl-green is used, and brown Avhen Bismarck -brown is applied. The substances which then collect in the diseased stems of white cedar through the meta- bolic changes stimulated by the fungus mycelium are tentatively the following: Proteid bodies, in small rounded granules; resin, ■which is confined to the areas of stem undergoing the most rapid histologic changes ; fungus gamboore, which with the other materials referred to fills the medullary ray cells and plugs the tracheids. Besides these, there are amorphous masses of substance in some of the medullary ray cells. These in the natural state are yellowish iu color. When the sections are stained with methyl -green, these masses become green in color. It is impossible to state at this time what these amorphous masses really are. With strong iodine solution the walls of the tracheids color a deep brow'nish-yellow, and this reaction is marked in both the longi- tudinal and the transverse sections. The Mycelium of Gymnosporangium biseptatum. A study of the mycelium yields some interesting results. These results become of importance when a comjiarison of the mycelia of the different species of Gymnosporangium is made with reference to their growth an duration. Farlow'-^ briefly sketches the character of the mycelium in the American species studied by him. " The mycelium does not differ much from that commonly found in the other Uredinere. It is irregular, much branched and cross parti- tions are rather numerous. Unlike, however, the mycelium of some of the Pucciuiie, that of the species of the present genus is limited in extent, and is not found throughout the whole of the ^*Farlow, The Gymnosporangia or Cedar Apples of the United States, 1880, p. 10. 1902.] SiTOEiL SUIE-NCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 4»3 plaut on which it is growing, but L, confined to certain portions of the stems or leaves. The mycelium of most of. the n««oy^J«; eunial-that is, the mycelium which has produced a crop of spore» (fi.~ 29, 30) one year, will the next year, under ordinary circum- stances, produce another crop in or near the same place. The explanation of the difference in the character of the cUtferent abnormal growths produced by the various speces 'of Gymno- sporangia i^ to be sought in the amount and extent of the n.ycehum tie rapiditv of its growth and hs dumtion. We have m a rap. Uy crown., annual species, viz., G. maa-opm, a large, rather spongy e^xcresclnce, which shrivels in drying. The excrescence is more deu.^ in the perennial species of slower growth, viz., G. ally in the region of the cambium, and acts rather as a stimulant than as a destructive agent. There is in G. EllUU . more 1---' - rapidly "rowing mycelium, which extends along the .mallei blthes'and is^abumlant enough to interfc wiUi the nutrition of the infected branches. The consequence is that the branches above become short and stubby, and at length densely '»-^'='»'^< • ^ "'^ branch below the fungus remains normal in character, so that in- steacl of a nodose swelling we have a tuft of short branches borne on the end of a normal branch." ,. ■ .i With this brief resume of the chai-acter of the mycelium m the different species of G,j«mo-n^ra,ujhm living in the wood of con- iferous trees, it is important to make a more de.adec study of Uie character of the mycelium and its relation to the cells of the ho^t n Gy,n„o>pora>vi,«n H,.pM.un., Very little of a definite charac- ter can be ascertained by a study of the transverse section of the diseased wood of the white cedar. Here and there the cut «ids of the hyph. are seen, and ocsionally the kunck e-l.ke porU.m of one thai is bent is seen in the cross-section (flg^. 18, W). Hk hyph*, which aie instrumental in stimulating the proiluction ot additional wood and bast, live in the cells of the wood cambium. -» See ante. 484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, section uppaveutly occupy the lumeu of the cells, for, iu addifiou to the cellulose cell wall of the host, there are rounded or elliptical rings filled with granular matter. The difficulty of clearly tracing the hyphie in a cro5S-section is almost entirely removed by careful study of longitudinal sections. Such longitudinal sections reveal the following distribution of the hyphae and their relation to the cells of the host : The hyphae are of a brown color, and can easily be traced by means of the contrast which this color affords to the colorless Iracheids and to tlie medullary ray cells which have stained a bright-green color with methyl-green. The mycelium is not abun- dant, and if we imagine the host cells to be macerated away, leav- ing the mycelium, it would form a I'eticulum of large open meshes much in appearance like a coai'se fish-net, only not so regular (fig 22). The hyphse are variously curved, gnarled or knuckled (fig. 22). Their course is somewhat sinuous, or an undulate one, although in many cases the lai'ger hyphal strands are perfectly straight. They occur in all parts of the wood of the swelling, and are associated in general with the plugged tracheids and the en- larged medullary rays, Avhich contain the yellowish granular matter to which reference has already been made. The plugging of some of the tracheids in the several annual rings of wood with yellowish granular material and the enlargement and filling up of the medul- lary ray cells seems to be correlated with the presence of the my- celium. The tracheids and medullary ray cells distant from the strands of the mycelium are -without these evidences of nutritive changes, followed by the filling of the cell cavity by the granular waste, or reserve (?) products. The hyphse are marked by numer- ous transverse partition walls, and these are sufficient to indicate that the fungus belongs to the higher series of fungal types. Some of these hyphal cells are long and. cylindrical. Others are shorter and more cheese -box-like in form. Relation' of Hyph.e to Host Cells. The hyi)hse grow into and through the medullary ray cells, and it is through these cells that the mycelium maintains its continuity from annual wood ring to annual wood ring. It is this growth through the medullary rays that accounts for the perennial habit of the fungus. At best the growth of the fungus is a slow one, as the 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485 hyphfe arc uowhere abundant, and where tliey do occur they seem to grow with the tracheids. The evidence of intracellular growth is clear. =■' In one set of medullary ray cells a hypha is found which forms an enlargement against a transverse partition wall before penetrating it by secretion of a ferment (fig. 22). Fortunately for clearness of observation, the end walls of two adjoining cells are slightly separated, leaving a lens-like intercellular space (fig. 23). Through this space the hypha, contracted to a narrow thread- like bridge, is seen to pass, enlarging again on the other side (fig. 23). The hypha which thus penetrates the cell wall passes to the other end of the same medullary cell, where it enlarges into a knob like extremity (fig. 23). It, however, gives rise to a branch in the middle of the medullary ray cell. This branch grows out transvei-sely by means of a bordered pit into the lumen of a wood tracheid, through which it runs to the next medullary ray lying parallel to the first. Here a new branch is found at right angles to its former course through the tracheid, which enters a medullary ray cell. This branch in turn produces another one at right angles to itself, and this again another one which runs into new medullary ray cells. The description of the course of this hypha, which is clearly traceable in the longitudinal section of the swollen stem, epitomizes the course of practically all of the hyphse studied in the several longitudinal sections. The hyphse enter the longitudinally directed wood tracheids through the path of least resistance, viz., through the membrane of the bordered pit (figs. 24, 24a, 25, 26). In several instances this mode of exit and entrance is clearly trace- able in the sections. By following the course of a hypha through the lumen of a tracheid it is found suddenly to dip down at the pointed extremity of the tracheid, opposite to the last bordered pit, and after disappearing from focus it again appears in another tracheid. By carefully focusing it is demonstrated that the liypha passes through the bordered pit, and after taking a U-shaped bend it appears again on the oi'iginal level in another tracheid (Hg. 22). The mycelium does not show any relationship to the nuclei of the host cells, such as has been demonstrated to be the case witli the " Farlow found in O. macropus the mycelium in the leaves where there are haustoria [sic] which enter the' parenchymatous cells. The fact that the mycelium grows in the leaves and not in tiic slt-m may account for this difference in growth. 486 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, liyphse of cndotropic mycorliiza. Groom'"'' and ^Magnus-' have lioth worked upon this problem, and Ijotli botanists have shown that in tlie case of the hyphse of mycorhiza fungi they enter a cell because they are attracted thither by a chemotropically active substance and grow toward the nucleus, because that substance is present there in optinuim proportions. These investigators conclude that the chemotropically active substance attracts the hyphje and is manufactured in the cell infected, and particularly in the vicinity of the nucleus of that cell. No clearly defined relationship of this kind is discoverable in the medullary ray cells of the white cedar. The hyphse run straight through many of the cells without devi- ating from their course. This distribution of the mvcelium in G. biseptatum seems to be similar to the distribution of liyphse in G. Ellisii. as described by Farlow. The mycelium of this species, according lo I'arlow, is of rather large size and in cross-sections of the stem is seen to follow the medullary rays, sometimes extending nearly to the center of the stem, and occasionally forming partial circles between the annual rings. The greater part of the mycelium in G. Ellisii, according to Farlow, is found near the cambium, it collects in masses in the bark to form the sporiferous bodies which originate at some little distance beneath the surface. JNIycelium of Gymnosporaxgium Ellisii. The mycelium of GymnosporaiKjium Ellisii is more copious than that of G. biseptatum, and its activity seems to be more marked in producing pathological changes in the tissues of the host. It may be traced in both radial and tangential longitudinal sections to the best advantage. The development of the hyphse of the my- celium in the sections studied by the writer is in a longitudinal rather than in a transverse direction (fig. 24). The main hyphse of the mycelium are longitudinal ones, and these anastomose with each other by the formation of short hyphse developed at right angles to the longitudinal ones. The course of the main hyphse is approximately a straight one, although of necessity there is some ^^ Groom, On Thismia Asero? (Beccari) aud its ^lycorhiza, Annals of Botany, IX, pp. 327-3()0. ^"Magnus, Wehnkr, Studieu an der endotroplien Mycorhiza von Neottia nidus-avis L., Jala-buchcr fur wissenschaflliche Bot., 19u0. p. 205. 1902.] XATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 487 bending from a straight Hue as they run from ti-acheifl to tracheid (fig. 25). Some annual rings are noted for the considerable num- ber of hyphre preseut. Others are marked by the small number and weak development of the hyphse. The color of the hyphre is an umber-brown, practically the same as that of the hyph?e of Gymiiosporangmm biseptatum. Occasionally hyphre in G. Ellisiia.ve found that are yellowish-brown in color. The hyphal strands are characterized by the well-marked transverse partitions, which are evident even under the low power of the microscope. It may be remarked here that the general coui"se of the mycelium can be clearly followed by the low power alone. The mycelium is more abundant in the cortex and comparatively less abundant in the xylem. Some peculiarities of structure of the hyphie of this species easily differentiate it from G. biseptatum. The hyphre of G. Ellisii form, as revealed by the high power of the microscope, a somewhat irregular reticulum (fig. 24). These hyphse are char- acterized by the presence of larger or smaller nodose or ventricose hyphal cells (figs. 25, 26, 27), which are found in considerable numbers in the length of each hyphal strand. These swollen or enlarged cells are found most frequently iu the irregular intercellular spaces, filled with brownish material produced by the pathological changes induced iu the host by the growth of the fungus. Occa- sionally these ventricose hyphal cells are found as lateral branches of the main longitudinally directed hyphse. Their shape may be sphei'ical, ellipsoidal, oblate-spheroidal, napiform or fusiform (figs. 25, 26, 27). They' are of the same umbei'-browu color as the other unenlarged hyphal cells, and are most numerous in the cor- tical region and in the aforementioned pathological areas filled witix l)rowu material. Relation of Hyph^ of G. Ellisii to Host Cells. The course of the hyphje in the stem may be briefly described as follows: The straight hypha runs through the lunaen of the tracheid until it comes to a bordered pit which lies iu the direction of its growth (figs. 24, 24a). This bordered pit is entered, and by a solution of the middle lamella of the cell wall at this point it crosses to a neighboring tracheid, when it again takes a longitu- dinal direction. Sometimes two or three tracheids are crossed by the hypha before it again takes an u[)-and-dowu coui-se (fig. 24). 488 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^^^Y, The hyplia, as it passes through the area of the bordered pit, en- larges to fill the space formed when the middle lamella of the cell Avail at this point is dissolved by ferment action (fig. 24a). The hypha at this point, therefore, becomes in shape like a double convex lens. Again, a hypha that runs in general longitudi- nally in the tracheids may leave these and enter a medullary ray cell, where it courses transversely, enlarging meanwhile in the medullary ray cell and giving off short rounded branches which may be called tentatively haustoria. A hypha that enters a tracheid in one direction may form two branches, one a short, lateral, downward -directed branch that ends in one of the large ventricose cells (fig. 27) to which reference has been made, and another branch which runs to the end of the tracheid and leaves it through a bordered pit to enler another tracheid. xinother hypha runs lengthwise until it comes opposite lo the pointed end of an- other tracheid, where a row of five bordered pits is seen in trans- verse section. For each of these bordered pits the longitudinal hypha gives off a branch (figs. 24, 24a). Each branch thus formed swells in the space of the bordered pit to form a lens like enlargement before the branch enters the contracted lumen at the pointed end of the other tracheid. All of these appearances are illustrated in the annexed figures (figs. 24, 24a, 25, 26, 27, 28). The course of the hyphse in the areas of stem that have been trans- formed pathologically into a broken-down mass of a brown color, forming pockets throughout the Avood, is more irregular. Here the hyphfe forming the mycelium bend and twist about, now form- ing an enlarged ventricose hyphal cell, and again producing such a swollen cell as the termination of a short lateral branch. Short stubby branches are also formed in the course of these same hyphie, consisting in most cases of a single short cell. The hyphse of these brown areas have also increased considerably in diameter, being much thicker than those of the mycelium Avhich grows in the tracheids. The larger hyphse are found in the cleft-like inter- cellular spaces and grow in and out between the dead and broken- down cells, as well as through the resin-like substance which fills the pockets to which reference has been made above. The hyphse in the smaller transverse sections of the diseased stem are also clearly traceable. They are seen as purplish-brown rings in the lumen of the tracheids (figs. 20, 21). Several adjacent 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 489 tracheitis will have hyphse coursing through them, and occasionally two or three hyphte are met with in a single tracheidal cavil y. Where these hyphse, ' by branching, cross transversely other tracheids, they are observed in cross-sections of stem as short threads, or as U-shaped or V-shaped elements of a purplish-brown color. Whenever these hyphse in their branching enter one of the brown areas with cleft-like cavities, they grow through the brown mass, enlarging meanwhile in diameter, and grow out into the cleft, where they branch and rebranch in an irregular manner, swelling here and there into the nodose or veutricose cells referred to above (fig. 27). Occasionally the hyphie are found growing outwai'd through the medullary ray cells, but this seems to be the exce])tion rather than the rule. This fact affords another of the characters of the mycelium of G. Ellisil which differentiates it from that of G. biseptatum, also found on the white cedar. The distribution of the tracheids containing the hyphte, disposed as above described, is for a transverse section of stem seven years of age, as given in the accompanying table. The number of tracheids in which hyphse are found is estimated for one-half of each annual ring. The widest annual ring is that of the third year, and this increased width is closely correlated with the diseased condition of the stem for that year : Table V. Number of Number of Tracheids 1 Number of Number of Tracheids with Annual Year. Tracheicis. in Autumn Hyphffii^ Ring. Wood. Annual Ring. 1 1894 22 2 13 2 1895 IG 3 6 3 1896 30 4 26 4 1897 10 3 17 5 1898 9 2 34 6 1899 5 1 21 7 1900 5(?) 12 0) The brown areas are by far the largest and almost confluent in the third annual ring of wood, and therefore only four continuous radial strips of healthy xylem are to be found in the growth of the third year. The enumeration for the seventh year is incomplete, 490 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [May, l)ocau.'CES OF nilLADELPinA. 491 lar wedge-shaped masses of a rich browu color, consisting of the bvokeu-dowu cells, a mass of hyphoe and a yellowish-brown matrix formed as a waste product by the host cells that are attacked l)y the fungal parasite. These masses of dead tissue jn-oceed radiately outward. Their inner side is more or less evenly rounded and conforms to the general concentric arrangement of the annual rings (fig. 31). Their outer edge is more or less irregular, as the disease progresses by proceeding outward along the wedges of wood between the medullary rays (fig. 31). These diseased areas may become more or less confluent as the pathological tissue increases in amount by the spread of the fungus antagonistic to the host (fig, 31). AVhere these wedge-shaped browu areas touch the cortex the cortical cells become involved, assuming a darker, richer browu color with the death of the cells attacked. As these browu patches increase in size, the hyphie which have grown out into them keep pace with the dissolution of the healthy tissues, until, as before mentioned, they form a complex of considerable extent. The breaking down of the tracheids begins much in the same manner as in the disease of the white cedar induced by G. bisej)- tatum, but the final result is different. The same springing loose of a part of the lignified cell wall is observable (fig. 32). When two adjacent tracheids have been thus affected, the middle lamella is dissolved away and a cavity, two tracheids in diameter, is formed. If three or four adjoining tracheids are involved, the space becomes larger (fig. 33). These spaces are filled with a brown residual material, and by the confluence of a number of smaller bi-owu diseased areas the wedged-shaped diseased spots are formed, which later become fissui'ed by the appearance of crack-like intercellular spaces. In older stems, the appearance of the diseased brown areas and the increase in width of the annual wood-rings seem to be correlated. The fifth and sixth annual rings in a stem eleven years old seem to be most involved, and here, with the excep- tion of one small unaffected patch of tissue, the brown tissue forms a continuous band of variable thickness and pathological appear- ance about the stem. The spring wood of the sixth year here seems to be most involved. From this ring arms of diseased wood radiate out through the seventh, eighth, ninth, and on one side of the stem to tiie cortex through the eleventh and last annual Hug of wood. An enumeration of the number of tracheids in a radial row 492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, from the fifth outward is presented iu tabular form, as showing the variation and increase in size of the several annual rings of wood in the abnormally developed tissues of the stem. The variation in the size, shape and color of the tracheids is a peculiarity of the twelve-year-old stem studied. These variations are most marked in the fourth and the eighth annual rings. The tracheids of the fourth annual ring of wood are thicker thau the normal, and of a decided yellow color. Those of the eighth annual ring are decid- edly variable in shape. Some of the tracheids are circular in cross section, others are elliptical, while others are rectangular and more or less irregular. This departure from the normal structure of the tracheids is directly traceable, the writer believes, to the stimulation produced by the presence of the fungus in the tissues of the host plant. Table VI. Number of Annual Ring. Year. Number of Tracheids. Number of Tracheids in Autumn Wood. 1 3 1889 1890 7+px. 7 3 1 3 1891 9 2 4 1893 39 3 5 1893 31 3 6 1894 33 5 7 1895 37 4 8 1896 33 5 9 1897 38 5 10 1898 33 5 11 1899 16 3 13 1900 33 3 A comparison, however, of the width of the several annual rings of older and jounger stems shoAvs that the increase in the number of tracheids is marked, especially in the immediate neighborhood of the hvphte. There is, however, not that marked increase which is noted for the stems abnormally swollen by the action of the myce- liiun of Gymnospormigium bi-septatum. The same brown patches of pathological tissue are seen in branches an inch and a quarter in diameter. Here, if the disease is confined more especially to the smaller branches, the brown areas are more rounded and appear as isolated brown specks when a cross-section is made. The smaller 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 493 branches, if early iufected, are more badly diseased, as evidenced by the larger size and confluent condition of the flead tissues, than the heavier branches, if infection takes place after the branch has reached considerable size. The writer has no evidence that the disease spreads down into the wood of the older portion of the branch from the smaller branches by the longitudinal growth of the hyphge, although it is within the range of probability that this downward growth does take place. C0NCLUDIN(; ReMAPvKS. That the metabolic activities of the cells invaded by the mycelia of ihe two parasites above described are changed from the normal condition is proved by the accumulation of material in the trach- eids and medvdlary ray cells influenced by the presence of the fungi. The nature of these accumulated substances has already been discussed. Not only are the metabolic activities of the host cells altered, but the cambium in which the mycelia lives is stimu- lated to increased divisional activity, and this stimulation may exert itself to some distance. Townsend"* has shown that " the influence of an irritation, due to cutting or other injury, is capable of acting through a distance of several hundred millimeters." It would seem, therefore, that plants that are victims to parasitic fungi may possibly be influenced as if they were wounded. How this increased activity of the host cells expresses itself in the increase in the amount of wood and bast has already been discussed. It appears that the fungi perennate in the wood of the canker, form- ing there a loose open reticulum, much like a coarse fish-net, and that they cause an alteration in the activities of the cells, obtaining for themselves thereby a suflicient amount of food for continued slow growth. The hyphae which are instrumental in the formation of the swellings clearly reside in the wood cambium and adjacent soft bast cells, being able to draw upon the supplies of that part of the mycelium which has lived longest in the stem. It appears then that the mycelium of the wood was once as active as the mycelium of the cambium, and that as the permanent tracheids and medullary ray cells were formed the ^^alls of the hyphte increased 28T0WNSEND, The Correlation of Growth Under the Influence of Injuries, Annals of Botany, XI, pp. 509-533 (18t)7). 494 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [^laj, correspondingly iu thickne.ss, and maintaiued for some time a slow growth through the wood and medullary ray cells. We have these changes iu the structure and metabolism of the cells of white cedar paralleled by examples recorded by other botanists. Halsted'-'* states that " one of the most striking instances of starch localization is found in the leaves of ordinary corn that are infested with the smut (Udllago maydis D.C. ). Pieces of leaves that were more or less distorted by nodules and projections of the smut-bearing tissue .... were placed in the iodine, when the blue color began almost immediately to appear iu the swollen tissue. ' ' Again : ' ' An interesting study in this direction was made of the cedar galls of Gymnosjjoranglwn macropus Lk., where the starch is packed away in the enlarged host cells to their utmost capacity, and thin sections through the centres of the large galls display a neat fan -shaped appearance after they had been in iodine for a few minutes. The ordinary wood of the gall-bearing twigs show with the same treatment only a small amount of starch." Other cases of this influence of parasite upon host might be cited, but the illustrations mentioned above sufficiently show that in most instances the effect is a marked one, not only altering the chemical nature of the cell contents, but also the activity of the process of cell division with the formation of additional tissue elements. Tabular Comparison of the Several Species op the Genus Gymnosporangium. Iu the table on pages 498-501 an attempt is made to pi-esent the characters of the several species of the genus Gymnosporangium, so that a comparison of the structure of these fungi can readily be made. Summary. 1. The v/hite cedar, Cujiressus thyoides, is a stately tree, ranging from southern Maine to northern Florida and westward to IMissis- sippi, and is not subject to any very serious disease. 2. There are nineteeu species of fungi that live, saprophytically or parasitical ly, upon this tree. -^ Halsted, Starch Distribution as Aftected by Fungi, Bulletin of the Tovrey Botanical Club, XXV, p. 573. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 495 3. Oiily two species of fungi, viz., Gymnosporangium hisep- tatum Ellis and G. EUisil Berk., may be considered as serious parasites. 4. Historically these two funguses have been studied largely from a moi'phologic standpoint, and not from a physiologic or his- tologic point Df view. 5. Wornle and Tubeuf give the most satisfactory accounts of the several known species of GijmiwsporatKjlum and the diseases produced by them. 6. The two diseases are prevalent in the cedar swamps of New Jersey, where Cupressus thyoides makes an almost pure stand of timber. 7. Sections of the swellings caused by the fungi were made by means of a hand-plane and stained with aniline-green, Bismarck- brown, and a double stain consisting of methyl-green and acid- fuchsiu. 8. The swellings produced by Gymnosporangium bisepiatum a?-e usually nodose, increasing year by year, until they may be brain - like in appearance and six to eight inches in diameter. 9. Those produced by G. Ellisil are never so thick, but the branches involved radiate out in a fan -like manner, assuming the character and appearance of witches' brooms. 10. The normal stem structure is described as a means of throw- ing light upon the abnormal structures produced by the fungi. 11. The stem structure in general is that common to other coni- fers, but the resin canals are confined to the bast and cortex. 12. The number of tracheids produced normally in a radial line are set forth in tabular form, as an expression of the variation in size of the several annual rings. 13. The environmental conditions are shown to have considerable influence in determining the spread of the diseases. 14. Sphagnum bogs are cold because the winter cold persists well on into the summer. lo. This persistence of the winter cold retards the dcvelo[)ment of the tree each year until summer is well advanced, and this retardation, it is thought, is reflected in the uniformity in size of the tracheids, there being litlk' well-marked autumn wood. 496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, 16. Tlie retardation of growth, witli the persistence of the win- ter's cold in the bog, also exerts an appreciable influence on the growth of the parasitic fungi, which cause the canker-like swellings on the white cedar. 17. It is assumed that the perennial habit and slow growth of the mycelia ai'e direct expressions of the inhibitory effect of the cold environment. 18. In considering the pathological transformations, a compari- son is instituted with the disease produced by Dixsyscypha resinaria in Abies balsamea. 19. By means of a table it is shown that the number of tracheids in a swelling produced by one of the fungi is vastly greater than in a normal stem of the same age. 20. The increased activity of the phellogen is also a marked feature of the disease due to Gymnosporangium hiseptatum. 21. Several additional well-marked layers of cork are laid down as a result of this activity of the cork cambium. 22. As the disease progresses these cork layers begin to slough off. 23. The formation of the excrescences through the death of the cambium in part, and the attempt made on the part of the host to repair the damage are minutely described. 24. Pathological changes in the wood due to G. hiseptatum result in the plugging of the tracheids and the final cracking of the sap- wood when the parasitic attack has been long maintained. 25. The number of plugged tracheids is shown by an enumera- tion to be extremely variable in the several annual rings of wood. 26. The material filling the plugged tracheids in the disease caused by G. biseptatwn is supposed to be fungus gamboge, from a number of chemical reactions obtained for the purpose of deciding this question. 27. Resin is also present in the most diseased areas, as deter- mined by the copper acetate (llnverdorben-Franchimont) reaction. 28. The mycelium of G. bisejMtum is desci'ibed as a loose net. The hyphse penetrate the wood, cambium and phloem cells, spread- ing longitudinally and horizontally. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 497 29. The hyphiB in growing from traclieid to tracheid take advan- tage of the bordered pits, the middle lanielhi of which disappears by ferment action. 30. The relation of the hyphjc to the host cells is carefully described. 31. The mycelium of G. Elllsii is more copious than that of G. biseptatum. It also grows through the cortex, bast and wood. 32. The hyphse of this fungus are characterized by the veutri- cose swellings produced, and by the fact that they grow into the intercellular spaces of the brown patches of diseased tissue formed in the W(jod. 33. The hyphfe of G. Ellisii grow through the lumen of the tracheids and from tracheid to tracheid by means of the bordered pits, much as in the other fungus described. 34. The distribution of the tracheids containing hyphse is pre- sented in tabular form. 35. The pathological conditions induced by G. Ellisii are more severe at first than those caused by G. biseptatum. 36. Patches of diseased tissue are found in the stems of white cedar as brown spots of a wedge shape. These brown areas become more or less confluent until they may involve the circumference of the stem. Into these brown patches the hyphre grow. 37. An enumeration of the tracheids in the diseased branches is also presented in tabular form, as a means of comparing the size of noi-mal and diseased stems. 38. The belief is expressed, in conclusion, that the fungi cause marked metabolic changes in the stem, accompanied by the accumu- lation of resins and other substances, products of increased cell activity. 39. A tabular comparison of the several species of the genus Gymnosporangium is presented to show the relationship of the fungi studied to other species of wide distribution. 40. The bibliography details the papers consulted in the prepara- tion of this paper by the writer. 498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Name of Fun- G ymnospo- Oymnospo- Gymnospo- Gymno spo- gus. rangium con- rangium fus- rangium El rangium clav- ic mn D. C. cum D. C. lisii Berk. ipes Cooke ( 0. juniperin- {0. sabince and Peck. w;^ Winter.) Winter.) Host Plants. Junip erus Ju nip eru8 Oupressus thy- Juniper us nana. mrginiana. oides. mrginiana. Junip erus Junip erus communis, communis, Junip erus Juniper ics mrgimana. sabince. Juniper Its oxycedrus. Habit of Fun- Long swell- Causing long Fan-shapedL ea ve s and gus. ings in the swellings of fasciculation branches pro- branches. the branches. distorting the smaller branches. ducing nest- like distor- tions. Duration of Perennial. Perennial. Perennial. Perennial ? Mycelium. Host Tissues Tissues of the Wood and less Medullary Leaves. Tis- Infected. branches. frequently in rays forming sues swell to the medul- partial circles twice original lary rays. in the annual rings. Large- ly in the cam- bium. size. Character of Much branch- Fine hyphae, Collected i n Abundant. Mycelium. ed, somewhat little branch- brownish knotted or ed, running spots. E X - balled. up and down and in toward the center of the stem. tends along the branches a distance of 18 inches. Sporiferous Subpyriform, Numerous, ap- Numerous, Subpyriform, Masses. or indefinite- proximated, cylindrical. irregularly 1}' expanded. brownish filiform. Or- globose, then Orange col- when dry, ange colored. indefinitely ored. ^ inch dark orange i inch high. expanded. high. when swol- len. i-^in3h high. Orange. ^ inch high. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF nilLADELPHIA. 499 Gymnosp 0-Oymn 0 spo- rangium ni- rangium cla- d u s - a V i s variceforme Thaxter. D. C. 1 Gymnospo-Gymnospo rangium bi-\ rangium glo septatum El-j bosum Y &y lis. ' low. Gy vino spo- rangium ma- cropuH Lk. Juni p erus virginiana. Leaves, bran- ches a u d trunks p r o - ducing bird's nest distor- tions. Perennial. Tissues of leaves, bran ches, trunk. Juniperus communis. Branches cau- sing long fu- siform swell- ings. Cupressus thy- oides, Libocedrus decurrens. Juniper ii 8 virginiana. Stems and Smaller bran branches ches produc forming large ing globose and small no-l swellings. dose swell- 1 ings. When young cushion - like, i r r e g ularly globose or oval, small and distinct o r elongate and conflu- ent, rich red- brown; moist and swollen, orange c o 1 - ored. Perennial. Wood forming a rim in the annual growth, fre- quently in the medulla ry rays. Fine hyphge little l)ranch- ed, growing up and down and inward Numerous, scattered o r aggregated, bright yel low when swollen. Perennial. Perennial. Juniperus virginiana. Attackin g leaves and smaller twigs and produc- ing spherical reddishswell- ings. lAnnual. C a m b iu m,lT issu es of woodandme-1 stem and dullary rays.] leaves. Hyphaj large, Abundant, brown, branched t o form a reti- culum. Flattened aud.G 1 o b o s e b r o w n i s b [ w hen d r y , j hemispheri- cal, yellow a n'd rugose when swol- len. ; ted. densely greg dark brown Av h e n dry, yellowish-or- a n g e when swollen. ^-^ inch high. Cellsofleaves. Abundant, producing h a u s t o r i a which grow intolcaf cells- Aggregated in globose masses, or- ange-yellow, cjlindrical, g e 1 a t i n o us. J-l m. long. 500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Name of Fun- gus. Gymnospo- rangium eon- icum D. C. ( O. juniperin- urn Winter.) Oymnospo- rangium fus- cum D. C. (G . s abince Winter.) Gymno spo rangium El Usii Berk. Gymno spo- rangium clav- ipes Cooke and Peck. Teleutospores Name of Ro3s telia. 15-18/i diam., 48-58 /i long, two-celled, constricted at septum. Rmstelia c o r nuta (Gmel) Fr. Inter mediate Sorbus Hosts >G e o g r a phic Distribution paria, Sorbus aria, C'ydonia vul garis, AmelancMer canadensis, Pirus malus, etc. Massacliu-Massacbu 15-22 /i diam., 38-53// long, two-cell ed, constricted at septum. Bees telia c> cellata{Ja.cq.) Rebeut. Gratosgus oxy- acantha, Pirus commu- nis. setts. New York, South Carolina, Northern and Central Europe. setts, Mary land, Europe, 10-16// diam., 75-190// long, three to four- celled, some- times one to five-celled. 32-38// diam., 40-60// long, two-celled, constricted at septum. Rcestelia trans- Bees telia au- formans Ell. rantiaca Pk. Pirus malus, Pirus arhuti- folia. Massachu- setts, New Jersey. Pirus malus, Pirus arbuti- folia, Am el an elder canadensis. E. Massachu- setts, New York, New Jersey, Penn- sy 1 va nia, North and South Caro- lina. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 501 Gymnospo- Gymnospo- Gymnospo- Gymnospo- Gymnospo rangium ni- rangium cla- rangium bi-\ rangium glo-\ rangium ma- d 11 s - avis varimforme septatum El- bosum Far- cropus h^s.. Thaxter. D. C. lis. low. .055X.025//, 13-19// diam., 15-20// diam., 19-21 // diam.. 15-20/^ diam.. two-celled. 55-90// longj 50-84// Ions,' 38-45// long,' 45-60// long, two-celled. two t 0 s i X - celled, or three to four- celled.. two-celled. two-celled, constricted at septum, with papilla at each end. RcdStelia nidus- Rcestelia lace- Rcestelia botry- Rcestelia lace- Rcestelia py - avis Thaxt. rata (Sow.) apites Schw. rata2 (Thax- rata (Schw.) Mer. ter). Thaxt. C y d 0 n i a Pirus commu- Cratagns to- Crataegus coc-\Crat(egus to- (quince), nis. mcntosa. cinea, \ meniosa. Amelanchier Cratagus oxy- 'Am el an elder Pirus ameri- \0 r at cb g u s canadensis. acantha, canadensis. cana, Douglasii, Cratmgu s \Pirus malus. Am el a n elder grandiflora, V y d 0 n i a\ canadensis. Crataegus san- (qui n c e ; Pints malus, guinea. pear), \Pirus corona- Cratcegua ni- Am elan chier\ ria. gra, etc. canadensis. \Pirus arbuti- 1 folia. Connecticut. Maine, Con- Massachu- M a s s a c h u -!M a s s a c h u - necticut, setts, New t^^etts to South setts to South Northern! Jersey and Carolina. Carolina, and Central, California. west to Mis- Europe. souri, Colo- rado, W i s - consin. 502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Bibliography. 18G5, Oersted. Botanische Zeitung, p. 291. 1874, Ellis. Bulletin of the Toney Botanical Club, V, p. 46. 1874-75, Berkeley. Grevillea, III, p. 56. 1877, KoRNiCKE. JMj'kologisclie Beitrage, Hedwigia, XVI, p. 22. 1880, Farlo-sv. The Gymnosporangia or Cedar Apples of tlie United States. Anniversary Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural His- tory, pp. 3-38, Pis. 1 and 2. 1886, Sorauer. Handbuch der Pflanzenkrankheiten, Zweiter Theil. Die parasitiiren Krankheiten. 1887, Thaxter. On Certain Cultures of Gymnosporangiuni, with Notes on RoesteliiK. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., XXII, p. 259. 1887-1888, Sanpord. Microscopical Anatomy of the Common Cedar Apple (Gymnosporangium macropus). Annals of Botany, I, pp. 263-268, with PI. XIII. 1888, Plowright. Experimental Observations on Certain British Het- ero^cious Uredines, The Gymnosporangia. Journal Linngean Society of Botany, XXIV, pp. 93-100. 1888, . Gj^mnosporangium macropus. Arkansas, Report of Experiment Station, pp. 127-130, fig. 3. 1889, Thaxter. Notes on Cultures of Gymnosporangium made in 1887 and 1888. Botanical Gazette, XIV, p. 163. 1890, Thaxter. Rust of Pears. Annual Report Connecticut Agricul- tural Experiment Station (New Haven), 1890, p. 98. 1891, Jones. Gymnosporangium macropus on Apples. Vermont Report, 1891, p. 133. 1891, Thaxter. The Connecticut Species of Gymnosporangium. An- nual Report Connecticut Agricultural Experiment Station, New Haven, pp. 161-165. Connecticut State Bulletin, 107, April, 1891, p. 6. 1892, Alwood. Gymnosporangium macropus. Nature and Treatment. Virginia Station Bulletin, 17, June, 1892, pp. 59-63. 1893, Tubeuf. lufektionen mit Gymnosporangium Arten. Forstl. Naturw. Zeitschr., p. 85. 1894, Halsted. Gymnosporangium macropus. New Jersey Station Report, 1894, p. 324. 1894, Kinxey. Gymnosporangium macropus. Rhode Island Station Report, 1894, p. 187, fig. 8. 1894, Hartig, tr. Somekville. Text-Book of the Diseases of Trees, pp. 51, 117, 157-164, 179. 1894, Wornle. Anatomische Untersuchung der durch Gymnosporan- gien-Arten hervorgerufenen Missbildungen. Forstl. Naturw. Zeitschr. Inaugural Dissertation. Botanisches Centralblatt, 1894, LX, pp. 280-283. 1895, Taft. Gymnosporangium macropus. Michigan Station Bulletin, 121, April, 1895, p. 22. 1895, Tubeuf. Pflanzenkrankheiten, pp. 396-415. 1896, Frank. Die Pilzparasitaren Krankheiten der Pflanzen, II, pp. 176-184. 1896, Underwood and Earle. The Distribution of the Species of Gymnosporangium in the South. Botanical Gazette, XXII, p. 255. 1897, Engler und Prantl. Gymnosporangium. Die natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien, I Theil. 1 Abt..** pp. 50-53. 1899, CzAPEK. Zur Biologic der holzbewohnenden Pilze. Ber. d. deutsch. hot. Gesellsch., XVII, p. 166. 1900, H. yoN Schrenk. A Disease of Taxodium distichum known as 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 503 Peckiness. Eleventh Annual Report Missouri Botanical Garden, pp. 23-77. with six plates. 1900, PI. VON ScHRENK. Two DisBuses of the Red Cedar. U. S. Division of Vegetable Physiology and Pathology, Bulletin, 21, pp. 22, with seven plates. 1900, H. VON ScHiiENK. Some Diseases of New England Conifers. U. S. Division of Vegetable Physiology and Pathology, Bulletin, 25, pp. 56, with fifteen plates. 1900, H. VON ScHRENK. Fungous Diseases of Forest Trees. Year Book United States Department of Agriculture, 1900, pp. 199-210, Pis. XXI-XXV. 1900, Shiiiai. Ueber der genetischen Zusammenhang zwischen Roes- telia Koraensis P. Henn. und Gymnosporangium japonicum Sydow. Zeitschrift fiir Pflanzenkrankheiten, X, pp. 1-5. 1901, H. VON ScHRENK. A Discase of the Black Locust (Robinia pseudacacia, L.). Twelfth Annual Report Missouri Botanical Gar- den, pp. 21-31, with three plates. 1901, Ward. Disease in Plants. London. 1901, Atkinson. Studies of Some Shade Tree and Timber Destroying Fungi. Cornell University Agricultural Experiment Station Bulle- tin, 193, pp. 199-235, fig. 56. 1902, Anderson. Dasyscypha resinaria causing Canker Growth on Abies balsamea in Minnesota. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, XXIX, pp. 23-34, with Plates 1 and 2. EXPLANATION OP PLATES XXII AND XXIII. Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. — Abnormal swellings on the white cedar (Cupressus thi/oides') caused by m5^celium of fungus, Gymnosporangium biseptatum. Fig. 6. — Larger gnarled, diseased condition of the branches of white cedar produced by O. Ellisii. Fig. 7. — Small swelling on twig of white cedar produced by the mycelium of O. biseptatum. Fig. 8. — Straight witches' broom produced by the perennial mycelium of a fungus, Gymnosporangium Kllisii. Fig. 9. — Normal tracheids of white cedar in transverse section. Fig. 10. — Cambium and adjacent cells from a normal stem. Fig. 11. — Normal resin canal from bark of white cedar, showing resin. Fig. 12. — Medullary ray cells and tracheids from a small abnormal swelling, such as the photograph depicted in fig. 7. Fig. 13. — Diseased wood and excrescence on a young stem of white cedar. Fig. 14.— Same section viewed entire. The depressed areas represent spots where the cambium has been killed. Fig. 15.— Medullary ray cell from a longitudinal section, showing appearance of brown contents. Fig. 16. — Tracheids filled with material under the stimulation of the mycelium of G. biseptatum. Fig. 17. — Tracheids situated between two medullary ray cells, show- ing those plugged with fungus gamboge. Fig, 18. — Cambial cells and outer wood tracheids, showing the presence of hj'phse in cross-section. Fig. 19. — The same much enlarged. Fig. 22. — Tracheids and medullary ray cells from the wood of white cedar, showing the course of the horizontal and longitudinal hypha;. Fig. 23. — Medullary ray cells, illustrating the manner in" which a hypha penetrates the cell wall. 504 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Fig. 24.— Section of stem diseased by the presence of fungus, Qynmo- sporangium ElUsii. The course of the hyphse from tracheid to tracheid is shown. The hyphse in several places are seen to grow through the bordered pits. Fig. 24a. — Course of a hypha which grows through the bordered pits. Notice that the hyphae become lens-shaped in the cavity of the bordered pit. G. Mlisii. Fig. 25. — Hyplia enlarged, showing the nodose or ventricose enlarge- ment of the fungal cells. Q. ElUsii. Fig. 26.— Details of hypha of G. ElUsii. Fig. 27.— The same from the wood. Fig. 28. — Bent and twisted hyphae growing in the brown areas of broken-down tissue, as shown also in fig. 29. Fig. 29. — Spores (several forms) ol Gymnosporanqium biseptatum (after Tubeuf). Fig. 30.— Spores (uni- and multicellular) of G. ElUsii (after Tubeuf). Fig. 31. — Transverse section of diseased white cedar stem, showing the diseased brown areas in the wood which have become more or less confluent. Fig. 32. — Tracheids from diseased wood of white cedar, showing the sprung lignified cell wall. _ Fig. 33.— Commencement of brown wedge-shaped areas of diseased tissue. Notice the abnormal size of the cells filled with granular matter. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 505 June 3. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Twelve persons present. The death of George S. Schively, M.T>., a member, Sept. 28, 1901, was announced. Phylogeny of the Species of Fulgur with Remarks on an Abnor- mal Form of Fulgur canaliculatum, and Sexual Dimorphism in Fulgur carica. — Mr. Burnett Smith communicated some prelim- inary results of a phylogenetic study of the genus Fulgur. The ornamentation on the whorls shows that changes occur in going from the protoconch to the adult whorl. In Fulgur the changes in orna- mentation agree in general with those observed by the Countess von Linden^ in dealing with marine gastropods in general. As in most gastropods where the early whorls can be studied, transverse ridges occur fii-st, except in certain forms where acceleration has taken place. Tliese are followed by a spiral row of nodes or spines, which in old age are apt to degenerate into a shoulder keel. Modi- fications of these stages may occur, but they can usually be detected. In the Miocene a tendency developed which resulted in the canal- iculate division of Fulgur. This division is probably an offshoot from the primitive non-canaliculate stock, of which F. carica is the modern representative. On the following page is a rough scheme showing the probable ancestry of the different races. The pyrum group seems to have sprung from a Fulgur canalicu- latum precursor which had transverse ridges on the whorl following the protoconch. In fact there is a Pliocene shell in the Academv's collection which tends toward fulfilling the requirements of this precursor. In all the young shells of the recent F. canaliculatum which I have examined, nodes occur on the whorl next to the pro- toconch and the transverse ridges are absent. This is probably a case of acceleration. In the non-canaliculate Fulgurs the recent F. carica shows well all tlie stages of ornamentation, from whorls with transverse ridges to whorls in which the spines degenerate into a shoulder keel. In the Caloosahatchie Pliocene both canaliculate and non-canaliculate divisions gave rise to smooth, bulboiis^,var- 1 Zeit. wiss. Zool, LXI, pp. 261-317. 506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Juiie, ieties. Mr. Joseph Willcox^ seems to consider that the bulbous F. 2 TV. Wagner Free Institute, I-II, December, 1889, p. 51. 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF THILADELPHIA. 507 the oruameut alien it is more likely that F. contrarium was derived from a precursor of F. perversum, of which the modern spinose form of that species is the living representative. F. contrarium would, according to the speaker's judgment, be a side branch, and not in the direct line of ancestry. Some sinistral INIiocene Fulgurs, after losing the primitive ornamentation, develop spines again on the rounded adult whorl, prf)ducing a form much like the modern typi- cal F. perversum. A tendency similar to this has been noted in Miocene dextral shells of the non -canaliculate division F. maximum. The abnormal specimen of Fulgur canaliculatum exhibited was found on the beach at Lougport, New Jersey, on March 18, 1902, after a storm. Some accident occurrins: when the sliell was young has caused it to grow so that the shoulder angle, so cliaracteristic of the species, has disappeared, and we get a shell with a rounded whorl nuich like Fulgur pyrum in appearance. The break in the shoulder occurred on a whorl which possessed the nodes character- istic of the earlier whorls of F. canaliculatum. After the break there is apparently an attempt to reproduce these nodes on the rounded surface of the whorl. The faint spiral ridge which occurs well over to the left on the last whorl has evidently been caused by another accident. On examining the soft parts of this specimen it appears to be identical with the normal male specimens, except that the shoulder angle is not present on the mantle. On examining a normal male Fulgur canaliculatum, it will be seen that the backward folded penis lies directly under the shoulder angle. In the abnormal specimen the penis, as Avell as the other oi'gans of the mantle cavity, all seem to be intact. The absence of the shoulder angle does not seem to be connected in any way with the underlying reproductive organ. It is interesting to note that the shoulder angle occurs equally well developed in the female of F. canaliculatum, though in this case it corresponds with no under- lying organ. No peculiai'ity in the mantle edge or other soft parts of this abnormal specimen, accounting for the change in shell form and ornamentation which has occurred, had been discovered. During the past winter, while searching for the young shells of our recent New Jersey Fulgurs, a series of F. carica was obtained which seems to exhibit sexual dimor})hism. The adult males are all smaller than the adult females. IJotli males and females have about 6^7 whorls, and show the adult characters of the swelling on the branchial siphon and the degeneracy of the spines on the last whorl. Accounting for the Depth of the Wyoming Buried Valley. — ^Ir. Bex.tamin Smith Lyman spoke on certain geological features of the Wyoming valley in Pennsylvania. It has long boon matter for speculation and serious practical iiK^uiry how the ancient Susque- hanna valley, buried under glacial rubbish near Wyoming and 508 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Juiie, Wilkes- Barre, could be at least 110 feet deeper than the apparently lowest possible outlet of the same valley near Bloomsburg, and ninety feet deeper than the one near Sunbury, as pointed out by Stale Geologist Lesley in the Pennsylvania State Geological Report G 7, 1883, p. XV, and by Assistant Geologist Prof. I. C. White, at p. 26. Later, in the Summary Final Report, Vol. Ill, Pt. I, 1895, p. 2019, Assistant Geologist A. D. W. Smith gives a still greater depth recently found in the buried valley, at two miles below Wilkes-Barre, namely, 220 feet below the present Blooms- burg outlet, and 200 feet below the Sunbury one. The complete understanding of the buried valley in question is of the weightiest practical importance to the operators of the Wyoming anthracite basin ; for the driving of coal mines unexpectedly into the glacial rubbish full of water has repeatedly caused loss of life and prop- erty, sometimes on a large scale. The consequent consciousness of danger and uncertainty about its conditions exact great caution ; and, perhaps, the guarding against unknown possibilities may occa- sion great losses that might to some extent be avoided if only the circumstances could be better understood. Several theories have, therefore, been devised in explanation of the observed facts; but none have proved to be at all satisfactory. It has, for example, been suggested that the glacier itself, before retreating and leaving the rubbish, may have scooped out the valley to that depth. But Lesley and others have repeatedly pointed out how insignificant is and must be the erosive action of glaciers; and, furthermore, it appears highly improbable that a glacier could not only scoop out a deep valley, but carry the vast amount of eroded material over the lip of the basin. In this case, too, that lip, near Bloomsburg, is about twenty miles beyond the nearest point ever reached by the glacier. In 1 883, Lesley, in the passage just cited, was momenta- rily persuaded that there was no escape from admitting that the result had been accomplished by " subglacial erosion — rivers beneath the ice sheet, charged with angular drift materials, plowing deep valley-grooves in the softer coal measures." But in the Summary Final Report, Mr. Smith states that Lesley " now regards his theory of subglacial erosion as wholly inadequate." Indeed, it would be hard to conceive how subglacial rivers could have main- tained an erosive current at such a depth below the outlet of the valley. Mr. Smith cites the opinion of "at least one prominent mining engineer," that the buried valley " has no connected channel, but that the deep places are formed by a series of pot holes." It is true, pot holes are a subordinate glacial feature of the buried valley, and extend below its bottom forty feet or more into the coal measures, as described by Ashburner in the State Geological Report for 1S85. But it is hardly conceivable that excavations on so grand a scale, as hundreds of bore holes have shown the buried valley to be, should have been effected, like pot 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 509 holes by rapid currents of water carry in.i? the materials com- nf ute7by means of swiftly whirling pebbhs qmte beyond he hmis of sLh enormously large hollows. The unmensi y of the currents required for such tren.endous action is wholly inadimsible It is hardly necessary to discuss the extravagant idea that the 1 trs of L now buried valley escaped to the -^ through .ome onginally deep subterranean crevice or channel, now l^>cWon farthe ?han ever out of sight bv the glacial accunudations. The idea has been resorted to merely'from the absence of any other thoroughly plausibk explanation/ in view of the evident impossibility o hoHowino- out a valley and carrying off the excavated ma enal over T distant border two hundred feet higher than the bottom. What seems, however, to bean extremely simple, natural and prob- able solution of the problem has hitherto been appai^ntly allo- Lther overlooked. The crumpling of the rock beds into folds by fhe contraction of the earth's crust in cooling must necessarily have been not a mere momentary movement, bu in general an ex lemeTv slow one, continuing for many ages, perhaps, to be sure, ^t^rmitteiUly, and moy probably slill be going on even in some very ancient basins. A comparatively trivial amount of .uch Ltion in the couple of hundred thousand years since glacia times would be ample to effect the observed results. For, if the \\^o- Z. basin had thereby been depressed by only the wholly insig- nificant average amount of half a foot in a thousand years, and Ue rock sadmes, or anticlinals, near Bloomsburg and Sunbury elevated at the same rate, the whole observed residt would by this time be accomplished, and the old glacial valley would be found Tit is. a couple of hundred feet lower than those lowest present outlets. A liberal allowance, too, can ensily be made to the deg^^^^^^^ which those outlets have been eroded since the glac al adion, and for the fact ihat they are not at the very ^ummi to the anticlinals Yet the movement woidd be a trifling one. In fact the obse'wl phenomena appear to be simply corroboration of wl^t mi-ht with the utmost reason have been expected to occur; and the rxSlanation is not by any means an arbitrary supposition of ^^^^^^^^ or depression, conveniently imagined in order to suit facts apparently difficult to elucidate. June 10. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Ten persons present. Prof Robert CoUett, of the University of Christiania, was dele- gated to represent the Academy at the meeting commemorating the services of Niels Henrik Abel to mathematical science. 510 proceedings of the academy of [j^^lj, June 17. Mr. Benjamin Smith Lyman in the Chair. Seven persons present. June 24. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Six persons present, Mr. Alexander MacElwee and Mr. John Vinton Dahlgren were elected members. July 1. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Seven persons present. July 8. Mr. Charles Morris in the Chair. Nine persons present. The deaths of R. S. McCombs, M.D., and Samuel K. Ashhnrst, M.D., were announced. July 15. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Six persons present. Southwestern Land Snaih. — Dr. Pilsbry spoke of the laud mollusks collected by Mr. James H. Ferriss during February of 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 511 this year, in Indian Territory, Texas, iNew Mexipo and Arizona. In the Huachuca mountains, Conservatory caiion, Ariz,, living specimens of Helix levettei of Bland were taken. They have been dissected by Mr. Vanatta, and prove to belong to the genus Ash- munella, having the genitalia characteristic of that group. The following species were also taken in Arizona : Sonorella rowelli (Newc. ). Patagonia mountains and Sanford. Sonorella granulatissima Pils. Spring canon. Ft. Huachuca, Huachuca mountains. Pyramidula striatella (Anth.). Huachuca mountains. Vitrea indentata (Say). Conservatory caiion, Huachuca. moun- tains and Patagonia mountains. ^^ Pyramidula ^^ scrigosa huachucana n. subsp. Conservatory caiion, Huachuca mountains. Shell with the general contour of typical strigosa, livid, fleshy-corneous, mottled with white, which may predominate beneath ; a narrow brown or purple-brown belt revolves a short distance below the subangular periphery. Nepi- onic whorls spirally striated. Umbilicus broadly open. Alt. 10, diam. 21^ mm., width of umbilicus 7 mm. Four or five shells out of about twenty -five collected are nearly uniform corneous brown. The specimens were received alive, and it apjieared at once that the species is no Pyramidula, but a mem- ber of the Helicidse. The P. strigosa series of Helices constitutes a new genus of Helicidce, having no afftnity to the Patuloid snails, but apparently is a much modified member of the Belogona Eua- denia. The Eastern P. solitaria (Say), with its northwestern dark race, is a true Pyramidula, in spite of its resemblance to some of the strigosa gi'oup. In El Paso county, Tex., Mr. Ferriss found Bulimulus dealbatus pasonis Pils. and Holospira roemeri (Pfr. ), and at Colorado City, Mitchell county, Tex,, were found Polygyra texasiana (Moric. ), Polygyra texasensls Pils. and Succinea luteola Gld. A new form of Polygyra, intermediate boiween P. indianormn Pils, and P. roemeri (Pfr. ), was taken in the Indian Territory : Polygyra indianormn lioderma. Shell similar in contour to P. roemeri, but always imperforate, with no parietal tooth, the lip narrow, more reflexed and less thickened within, the surface more distinctly finely striate, and with only faint traces of spiral lines. It resembles P. indianorum in the structure of the lip, but lioderma is smaller, less glossy, not so regularly striate, and the umbilical region is less sunken. P. divesta is a much more coarsely and strongly striate shell. Alt. 18, diam. 9 nun. ; whorls 4^. Alt. 17,o, diam. 8.7 mm.; whorls 4i. Red Fork, Creek countrv, Indian Territorv. Types No. 83,281, A, N, S. P., collected by Mr, James H. Ferriss, 1902. The largest shell of the series taken by ^Ir. Ferriss measures 18i mm. diam., and the smallest 16 mm. There is thus but little 512 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, variation in size at the type localit}^ wliicli is farther north than P. roemeri has been found. The average diameter of fourteen adult shells is 17.2 mm. July 22. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Six persons present. August 19. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Seven persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : " On Some Living and Fossil Snails of the Genus Physa found at Las Vegas, N. M.," by Ada Springer. "Additions to the Japanese Land Snail Fauna — VII," by Henry A. Pilsbry. " Descriptions of the Lycosidre and Oxyopidse of Philadelphia and its Vicinity," by Thomas H. Montgomery, Jr. " The Development of Gonionema Murbachii," by Henry Farn- ham Perkins. The deaths of Dr. James G. Cooper and of Mr. Edward B. Edwards, members, were announced. The following were ordered to be printed : 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 513 BY ADA SPRINCiEK. In the Plebloceae beds of the Arroyo Pecos at La^ V^gas, K M are found many fluviatile and terrestnal shells, melnd.ng the ^LZphysa. Li,La. Planorbu. Ancyln., Pi^idum, Sph.raun, Pupoides and Vallonia. None of the species, so far as known, are extinct bnl some u]l Sphoerium l,m« Sterki MS.) do not appear to ex,s any longer in the vicinity; while others exhibit vanelal character, vvh ch 'Ifto distinguish ihem ,nore or less from l^eir liv,ng rep^sen^^ tives The genus Phym is represented m those beds by very n™ erons indfviduals, differing considerably in form but ap^r- en In pertaining to a single species. This ^P^c- >>- >«*" dentified at the National Museum as Pkysa hu,»ero.aGoM, and ther is no reason to doubt the identity. The ongmal descr,pt»n Tp lnmero>a, kindly copied by Mr. C. T. Simpson, .s as follows; . ltrs„b;homboLa, solidula, polita, albida sptra acuta; anfrao 5, tabulatis; apertura 4 ad | long. test=e adeqttans, post ce itnL;; labro expanse; colmnella vix plicala, callosa, fere '"■■'T'"' 1 ,1 ' ™,11 • ht a ,„11. Found by Thmnas H. wl^rn'dVwTBlakirin t"he' Colorado desert and at Pecos ""fxhe broadly tabulated whorls, and the acute, elevated spire and foldtes pillar clearly distinguish this spec.es. It « '■ke P. ialuMa Gould, and the variety figured by Halden an ^ P. » miliaria ffi" 7), which he regards as a monstrosity; the deep "^ran'd the si'mple columella dis.ingidsh it f™™*- species^ The species was first published in B-oc. Bod. Soc. Aof. ««'. , VoT V ri26, February, 185.5. The National Mu.sei,m ,x>s^s ^H from ColoiJ, lake, received origUially ^o,„ B^ke (Lea Collection), which are supposed to be cotyi«s. Mi. Snnp*n 33 514 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, has kindly made a drawing of one of these. Dr. E. E. C. Stearns^ has figured a number of specimens of Physa from the Colorado desert; these are variously refei'red to humerosa, mexicana, etc. It would appear that the original hiivierosa was described from fossil or subfossil shells, such as are common in the Southwest in certain localities ; and fui'thermore, that the specimens taken as typical represented a rather extreme variation. In the series from the Arroyo Pecos Pleistocene, some shells agree well with the original humerosa, but these pass by insensible gradations into forms which agree with what has been regarded at the ]S;ational Museum and by Dr. Stearns as P. mexicana Philippi. "Whether these latter are the genuine mexicana may only be deter- mined when it is possible to study topotypes with the soft parts. It was also found that many shells from the Arroyo Pecos could not be separated from the common Physa still living at Las Vegas> though there were certain average differences between the living and fossil series. The living species has recently been described by Crandall - as P%.sa rhomboidea. Part of Craudall's original ma- terial came from Las Vegas; he says the species " is distinguished by its robust appearance, deep sutures, constricted aperture and umbilicus, which will be found in a large part of them. It is more like P. solida Philippi than any other species." It has impressed spiral lines like P. gyrina, etc. For purposes of comparison large uumbei-s of P. rhomboidea were collected from a pool in the Gallinas river at Las Vegas. The variation in this series, all from the same place, was very great, and selected specimens would readily be taken for distinct species. However, upon close comparisons, no difference could be found in the soft parts. Externally, the animals were the same ; internally, there were some variations, as in the length of the oesophagus, but these were not correlated with the differences in the shells, and were clearly not of specific value. The teeth were of ihe same tyi>e in all. In order to determine whether the teeth could be used in dis- tinguishing Western species of Physa, I examined P. virgata Gould, collected by Mr. Cockerell in Salt river, Tempe, Ariz., and a spe- cies identical with what has been regarded at the J^ational Museum 1 Proc. U. 8. Natl. Museum, XXIV, Pis. XXIII, XXIV. 'Nautilus, August, 19U1, p. 44. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. '^l'^ as P. lordi, collected by Mr. C. H. T. Townseud in the Organ mountains, N. M. It was found that these differed materially from one another and from P. rhomboidea, and also from P. gyrma as Number of specimens. 60 Number of specimens. ISO 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.0 1.' 1-8 1-y -•" ,, , „ Ratio of lenffth to breadth (average Ratio of length to breadth (average ^^^^^Jj^^ies 1.8). of whole series 1.0). rhomboidea, Gallinas river (re- P. humerosa, Arroyo Pecos (fossil). ^ 445 specimens. 145 specimens. ^ Frequency polygons. Fig.l. figured by F. C Baker. The following table indicates the nature of the differences : Lateral teeth witi, .lentklcs of two Au.. Umg ones alternating with LatemM^th will.' long -k""^'!-. n,„ obvionslyof two .i,.., . 2 1)1(5 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [August, 1. Lateral teeth with the longer denticles very long; median teeth broad, with the denticles in one transverse series, P. " lordi" (New Mexico). Lateral teeth with the larger denticles short, median teeth with the denticles in three groups, .... P. gyrina. 2. Lateral teeth with the denticles seven in number (counting the apical one), straight or nearly so; median teeth with the denticles in three groups, .... P. rhomboidea. Lateral teeth w^ith the denticles five in number, very oblique; median teeth with the denticles rather long, in one group, P. virgata. Individual teeth of any species may vary from the normal type, but it is easy to determine the normal character. Figs. 1 and 2 show the frequency polygons for the fossil (Arroyo Pecos) and recent (Gallinas river) series, based on the relation of the length of the shell to the breadth — the most obviously variable character. It is found that the mode, or point of greatest fre- quency, is the same in both, but the skew is toward greater breadth in the fossils, toward narrowness in the recent shells. It is con- cluded that all the shells belong to one species, which has been evolving from a broader to a narrower form, perhaps in consequence of a decreasing salinity or flow of the water. Plate XXVI shows a series of each type, including all the recognizable variations. The work represented by this paper has been done in the biologi- cal laboratory of the Normal University of New Mexico, under the direction of Mr. T. D. A. Cockerell, who has also revised the manuscript. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 517 ADDITIONS TO THE JAPANESE LAND SNAIL FAITNA-NO. VII. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. The description of new forms, chiefly supplied by :Mr. Y. Hirase, is herein continued. The results of a critical examination of the species of Euph(edusa and Pseudonenia also find place, together with a list of additions and errata to the " Catalogue of Japanese Clausiliidc^, " published in these Proceedings for 1901. Section HEMIPH^DUSA Bttg. Group of C. sublunellata. Clausilia paohyspira n- sp. PI- XXVII, flgs. 5, 6, 7. Shell club-shaped, the spire very thick, the apex large, obtuse ; thin; yellowish corneous-white; closely and finely striate, the striation not perceptibly coarser on the last whorl. Whorls 8 to 8J, moderately convex, the last strongly tapering. Aperture ear- shaped, oblique, rather narrow, extending above in a large, retracted sinulus. Peristome free and continuous, convex, very thick, white, notched at the position of the superior lamella, on the right side of which there is sometimes a low tooth. Superior lamelk marginal, vertical, continuous with the spiral lamella, which ascends to a position above the superior lamella. Inferior lamella deeply receding, forming a strong fold within the throat, vertically ascending, thick below, giving off a branch in the inter- lamellar area, which curves again towards and crosses the inferior lamella above. Subcolumellar lamella emerging, bounded by grooves Principal plica arising near the peristome and penet rating past the middle of the right side. Upper palatal plica sliort, joined iu the middle by a narrow, nearly straight, rather weak lunella, which becomes very weak below, but terminates in a snmll nodule. Length 13, diam. 3.2 to 3.3 mm. , , . , , Clausilium (PI. XXVII, fig. 7) narrow aixl parallel sided, sym- metrically tapering to the obtuse apex. 518 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, Miyai, Kii. Types No. 83,389, A. N. S. P., from No. 954 of Mr. Hirase's collection. Very distinct by its thick, club-like shape, peculiar aperture, the curved branch of the inferior lamella, and the palatal structure. It has the pale color and fine sculpture of other members of the group. Clausilia kurozuensis n. sp. PI. XXVII, figs. 1, 2, 3, 4. Shell fusiform, moderately tapering to an unusually thick apex, very thin ; white or grayish-white, the specimens being wholly denuded of cuticle; for the same reason, only faint traces of fine striation are discernible on the worn surface. Whorls about 9, but slightly convex, the last tapering, somewhat compressed. Aperture somewhat oblique, piriform, Avith a well-defined sinulus. Peri- stome white, continuous, reflexed and much thickened. Superior lamella short, oblique, marginal, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella receding, visible as a strong fold in an oblique view, giving off a branch toward the superior lamella; within it is a high, obliquely ascending plate, thickened below, penetrating inward decidedly deeper than the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emerging, bounded by grooves, but hardly extending to the lip- edge. Principal plica visible in the throat, extending inward to a lateral position, being about one-third of a whorl long. Palatal plicae four, nearly equal, the upper one less oblique (fig. 4), or the lower two may be quite small and nodule-like (fig. 2). - Length 20, diam. 4. 7 mm. Length 17.6, diam. 4.2 mm. Clausilium (PI. XXVII, fig. 3) narrow and parallel-sided, evenly tapering on both sides to the apex, tapering at the filament, but not excised there. Kurozu, Kii. Types No. 83,390, A. N. S. P., from No. 934 of Mr. Hirase's collection. By the palatal armature of some specimens this might be placed in the group of C. validiuscula ; the armature of others comes nearer that of C. sublunellata. The pale color and apparently fine striation cause me to place the species in the latter group. The specimens, though they have lost the original surface by erosion, were collected alive. Probably some other locality or station will supply unworn shells, and the color will be found to be pale yellow- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 519 ish or greenish. There is no evidence of coarser strialion on the back of the last whorl. The unusual thickness of the early whorls separates this form from C. suhulina var. leucopeas and C. seHcina var. rhopalia. C. heteroptyx is a much larger species with different palatal arma- ture. The unusual thinness of the shell also distinguishes C. kuro- zuenms, though this may be partly due to the worn condition of the type specimens. Section STEREOPHiEDUSA Bttg. Clausilia plagioptyx n. sp. PI. XXVII, figs. 8, 9. 10. Shell solid, fusiform, much attenuated above, the first two whorls being small and of about equal diameter, giving the shell an awl- like shape ; light-brown, the first whorls whitish. Somewhat glossy, closely and finely striate, the strije perceptibly more widely spaced on the last whorl. Whorls 9|, moderately convex, the last one somewhat compressed. Aperture rhombic-piriform ; peristome reflexed, thickened, white or jiale- brownish. Superior lamella marginal, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates to a point above the superior lamella. Inferior lamella approaching the superior, and equally long inside. Subcolumellar lamella emerging to the lip-edge. Principal plica lateral, about a half whorl long. Palatal plicse four, the upper longest, converging inward toward the principal plica, or parallel with it ; the second and third either subequal and short, parallel to the upper plica, or the third plica may be reduced to an elevated point. Loiver plica very obliquely descending, standing almost as a short, oblique and straight lunella. Length 17, diam. 4 mm. Goto, Hizen. Types No. 82,644, A. N. S. P., from No. 817 of Mr. Hirase's collection. This species is based upon specimens which I listed under C. brevior as from " Goto, XJzen.'" Upon opening specimens I find that the palatal structure differs iu a very characteristic manner. The exterior is almost exactly like C. brevior, but it is a less swollen shell than most specimens of that species ; but while C. brevior has a well-developed lower palatal plica about parallel 1 These Proceedings for 1901, p. 653. 520 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [AugUSt, to those above it, in the present species that plica stands obliquely, like a lunella, though not quite near enough to the vertical posi- tion to be called a lunella. In C. addlsoni I have shown a lunella to exist, but in combination with a normally developed lower palatal plica. 0. acldisoni is distinguished externally from G. plagioptyx by its stronger rib-striation. C. plagioptyx is a more solid shell than either hrevior or addisoni. The clausilium had fallen out of the two specimens of this species sent by Mr. Hirase. C hrevior, as I stated in a former paper, is not known from south or southwest of middle Hondo. It is a species of the region about Tokyo. At this time we have no Stereophcedusa of the hrevior type in southwestern Hondo, Awaji, Shikoku or northern Kyushu. C. addisoni is found in Higo and Satsuma, in southern, and C. plagioptyx in Hizen, in western Kyushu. Clausilia stereoma var. hexaptyx nov. Shell somewhat larger than stereoma, and thinner, much less strong ; dark reddish-brown or pale straw-yellow ; palatal plicae six, the upper and lower long, curved, the intermediate ones strong (as in 3Iegaloph(edusa) , though more or less unequal. Length 24.4, diam. 7 mm. Length 24, diam. 7.1 mm. Length 22.2, diam. 6.8 mai. Length 23, diam. 6.5 mm. Yaku-jima, Osumi. Types No. 83,302, A. N. S. P., from No. 670a of Mr. Hirase' s collection. Differs from the forms of stereoma already known by its strong Megalophsedusoid palatal folds. The clausilium is like that of C. stereoma. To what extent the forms of stereoma intergrade remains to be determined. Clausilia oostoma Mollendorff. PI. XXVII, figs. 15, 16, 17, 18. C. oostoma Mlldff., Journ. Asiat. See. Bengal, LI, pt. 2, p. 4, PI. I, fig. 3 (1882). Pilsbry, Proc. Acad. Nat. «ci. Pliila., 19U0, p. 607. 0. japonica var. surugm Pils., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 19U0, p. 447, PI. 14, fig. 4. C. eurystoma var. brachyptycMa Mlldff., Nacliriclitsbl. d. d. inalak. Ges., 1901, p. 41. Shell rather .solid, club-shaped, the upper three-fifths of the length tapering and somewhat attenuated, the outlines gently con- cave above ; apex rather large ; white under a yellow cuticle. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 521 Surface glossy, densely striate, more or less worn above. Whorls llj to 12, somewhat convex, the penultimate widest, convex, the last whorl flattened laterally, convex below. Aperture piriform, whitish within. Peristome thickened within and reflexed, white, very shortly free, and usually a trifle notched over the superior lamella. Superior lamella oblique and submarginal, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates to the middle of the ven- tral side. Inferior lamella forming a conspicuous, subhorizontal fold in the aperture, approaching the superior lamella, ascending within with a broad spiral trend, and penetrating deeper than the spiral lamella. Subcolumellar lamella emerging but not reaching the lip-edge. Principal plica short, arising about the middle of the dorsal side and extending past the middle of the right side, scarcely or not deeper than the inner end of the upper palatal plica. Palatal plicse two or one, the upper plica strong, converging inward to the principal plica, the lower plica xveah and low or ivantiiig. Length 26, diam. 5.8 mm. Length 25, diam. 5 mm. Clausilium (PI. XXVII, figs. 15, 16) broad below the middle, the distal fourth abruptly curved, nearly at a right angle with the middle portion, tapering to a rather acute, thickened apex, the palatal margin straight near the apex, and a trifle excised close to it. Above, it tapers to the filament, and is not excised or emar- giuate. Mikuriya, Suruga (Hirase; types of C. j. surugce and C. e. hrachyptychia) . Hakone, Sagami (Hungerford; types of C. oostoma). This species has been the subject of several notices by Dr. 0. von Mollendorff and myself, but it has not hitherto been ade- quately illustrated. Figures are now supplied for comparison with the related forms dactylopoma and goniapoma. The above descrip- tion and the figures are from the types of C. jajjonica var. surugw^ which is undoubtedly specifically identical with C. oostoma. Clausilia oostoma var. dactylopoma "ov. PL XXVH, figs. 19,20. Specimens from Kashio, Awaji, are a little shorter, witli 1 1 to 11^ whorls, and have the lower palatal plica well developed. Tlioy have the comparatively fine, even striation of the form from Miku- riya, Suruga. Length 22-25.5, diam. 5.2 nun. ''>22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AllgUSt, Clausilium (PI. XXVII, figs. 19, 20) with the apex strongly projectiug, finger-like, the palatal margin near it being strongly excised and concave; and it is deeply excised on the palatal side of the filament. This form approaches var. goniopoma, but differs in the fine stri- ation, and somewhat in the shape of the clausilium. Clausilia oostoma var. goniopoma n. sp. PI. XXVII, figs. 11, 12, 13, 14. Shell somewhat fusiform, the upper half tapering, attenuated, lower half somewhat swollen ; dull light-yellow. Sculpture of rather strong and separated folds or ribs, the upper whorls smoother, worn. Apex small. Whorls 11 to Hi, moderately convex, latter half of the last conspicuously compressed. Aperture subvertical, piriform, the peristome white, continuous and somewhat thickened. Superior lamella marginal, oblique, continuous with the spiral lamella, which penetrates to a point above the superior lamella. Inferior lamella forming a strong, subhorizontal fold, approaching the superior lamella ; inside it ascends in a broad spiral, and penetrates deeper than the spiral lamella. The subcolumellar lamella emerges. The principal plica is short, rather weak and lateral. Palatal plicse two, the upper of moderate size or small, the lower larger. Length 21, diam. nearly 5 mm. Length 19.8, diam. 4.5 mm. Clausilium (PI. XXVII, figs. 11, 12) very broad below, the apical end bent at a right angle to the rest of the plate, thickened, narrow and mucronate, excised and thin on the palatal side; above it is a little excised on the columellar side of the filament. AVakayama, Kii. Types ISo. 83,286, A. N. S. P., from No. 926 of Mr. Hirase's collection. In general external shape, as well as in the lamellse, this form resembles C. oostoma MUdff. (surugce Pils. ), but it differs in the far coarser sculpture and in the peculiarly bent and attenuated distal end of the clausilium. Whether the forms oostoma, dactylopoma and goniopoma are to be regarded as distinct species or as subspecies remains a subject for further investigation, as each is yet known from a single locality, and is constant in its characters, so far as may be judged by the material before me. The salient characteristics of the three forms may be succinctly tabulated thus : 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 523 Surface ratlier finely striate r oostoma ydaetylopoma Surface coarselj' plicate : goniopoma 'Lower palatal plica weak or wanting. Palatal side of the clausilium straight distally, hardly excised, columellar side not ex- cised near the filament. Lower palatal plica w^ell developed. Palatal side of the clausilium deeply excised distally, the col- umellar side excised near the filament. The ^hape of the clausilium is shown on the plate. In C. oos- toma it is not quite so strongly curved as in the other forms, there is only a slight trace of the excavation on the palatal side of the dLstal end, and there is no excision on the columellar side of the filament. In daclylopoma there is a deep excision on the palatal side of the distal end, which, however, passes gradually into the broadly dilated palatal margin. The latter is but slightly thick- ened. The columellar side is deeply emarginate or excised at the origin of the filament. In goniopoma the deep distal excision ter- minates somewhat abruptly at the end of a wide thickened rib which strengthens the rest of the palatal margin. The excision near the filament is slightly less deep than in daclylopoma. The excavation on the palatal side of the distal end of the clau- silium when retracted fits over the lower palatal plica in all of these forms. Section EUPII^DUSA Bttg. Euphcedusa is one of the most sharply defined of the numerous sections into which Prof. Dr. Boettger divided the heterogeneous group Ph(zdusa. At the time of the appearance of the classic Claxmlienstadien but five Japanese species were known, placed by Boettger in two groups typified by Chinese species. The number of Japanese species has now been more than doubled, and requires the arrangement proposed in my Catalogue, p. 654. This arrange- ment was based upon the following characters : I. — Superior lamella present. a. — Lunella perfect, Group of C. jos. b. — Lunt'lla incomplete or wanting, palatal plicic present. Group of C. shanghaiensis. c. — Lunella and i)alatal plictc wanting. Group of C. subgibbera. 524 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt , II. — Superior lamella wauliug, or represented by a slight thicken- ing of the peristome only. No lunella ; 2 palatal plicse. a. — Aperture piriform, . . G^^oup of C. Jmngerfordiana. b. — Aperture oval, hardly narrower above than below, Group of C. euholostoma. The groups are successively more aberrant in the ox'der given above, this phylum having its acme in the section Reinia. Two species, G. subgibbera and G. expaiisilabris, described by Boettger from Kein's collection, are not known to me by specimens, and their exact localities in Japan are unknown. All of ihe other species are represented in the collection of the Academy, and are described and figured, in this paper and preceding ones of the series. Group of C. shanghcdensis. Key to Species. I. — Superior lamella high; inferior lamella forming a co)ispicuous convex fold in a front view of the aperture ; subcolumellar lamella emerging; short upper and lower palatal plicse, but no trace of a lunella. Shell glossy, dark purplish- brown. 11.5 by 3 mm. Hachijo Island, Izu, . C. tryoni. II. — Superior lamella moderately developed; inferior lamella forming a low, convex fold in a front view, approaching close to the superior ; shell rib-striate. a. — Brown; length 13-14 mm., .... C. digonoptyx. a'. — Greenish -corneous; palatal plicse shoit, lunella incon- spicuous, almost wanting; length 10 mm., G. comes. III. — Superior lamella small or reduced to a low cord; inferior lamella showing in front as a low fold, not converging strongly toward the superior lamella; shell dull brown- ish, finely striate. a. — Superior lamella small but distinct; spiral lamella high; upper palatal plica long, connected in the middle with a J-shaped lunella, which is w'eak in the middle, and strengthened below into a nodule, .... G. tau. a'. — Superior and spiral lamellre reduced to a low cord; palatal plicse short. b. — Length 13-lfi, diam. 3-3.5 mm. ; upper and lower l)alatal plicse weakly connected by a low, imper- fect lunella, visible as a whitish streak exter- nally. Kyushu, G. subaeulus. b'. — Length 13.5, diam. 2.7 mm. ; small upper and lower ^. palatal plicte, but no lunella. Yesso, G. rowlandi. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 525 Clausilia subaculus n. sp. PI. XXVHI, 38, 39, 40. Clausilia aculus Benson, Boettger, Jahrbucher d. deutschen malak. Ges V 1878 p 49, PI. 3, fig. 3a, b. Kobelt, Fauna moll. exlramar. Jap!, p. 71, PI. 8. fig. 19. Not C. aculus Benson, cf. Boettger, Jahrbucher. VI. 1879, p. 108 ClamiUa proba A A^., boettger, Jahrbucher VI 1879 p. 108. Not U. proba A. Ad., Ann. Mag. N. H. (4), I, 1868, p. 471. Shell long-fusiform, the peuultimate whorl widest, those above regularly tapering, the spire slender above, lateral outlines straight, apex rather acute; color varying from yellowish-brown to pale olive-brown. Surface glossy, distinctly and somewhat coai-sely striate, the last whorl more strongly so. Whorls about 10, rather convex, the last shortly free in front. Aperture wide-piriforra, the upper margin a little sinuate. Peristome white, somewhat thick- ened, expanded and narrowly reflexed. Superior lamella merely a low cord terminating in a small thickening of the peristome, con- tinuous within with the spiral lamella, which penetrates nearly to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella receding, be- coming high within, only moderately approaching the superior lamella, and decidedly shorter inside than the spiral lamella. Subcokimellar lamella barely emerging. Principal plica chiefly dorsal, being visible in the throat and extending to but hardly past the middle of the right side. Upper palatal plica moderately long, oblique, connected near its lower end with an arcuate lunella, whrc'h is very low or almost interrupted in the middle, becomes distinct again below, where it is recurved in a short lower palatal plica. Length 16, diam. 3.5 mm. Length 13, diam. 3 mm. Clausilium (PL XXVIII, figs. 41, 42) strongly curved, wide below, rounded and somewhat thickened at the apex, the margins converging somewhat upward, rather deeply excised on the colu- mellar side of the filament. Nagasaki, in western Kyushu. Types No. 60,372, A. N. S. P., received from Mr. B. Schmacker. Prof. Dr. Boettger has already pointed out the differences between this species and C. tau. The superior lamella iu the former is lower, a mere cord; the striation is stronger, and the upper palatal plica smaller. The palatal structures do not shine white through the shell so conspicuously as in C. tau. Inside, the 526 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, spiral lamella is seen iu C. subaculus to be much lo\Yer than in C. tan. This is well shown in the views of the interior from behind, fig. 39 (subaculus) and fig. 43 (tau). In both species the subcolumellar lamella is noticeably dilated where it passes the lower palatal plica, shown in the same figures. C. digonoptyx is a more strongly striate shell, with the inferior lamella much more closely approaching the superior. This species was collected at Nagasaki in numbers by Prof. Dr. J. J. Rein, and at first (1878) identified by Prof. Boettger as C. aculus of Benson, a species originally described from Chusan. Subsequently (1879) Boettger recognized that the Japanese form was distinct from Benson's Chinese species, but trusting to sup- posedly authentic specimens labeled C. proba A. Ad. in Dohrn's collection, he substituted this name for the Nagasaki species. This determination, however, cannot stand, being contradicted by the terms of A. Adams' diagnosis of C. proba. He describes that shell as 5^ lines (11 mm.) long, with eight whorls, " lamella supera valida, compressa," whereas the Nagasaki species under discussion is larger, with about 10 whorls, and a remarkably loiv, weak and inconspicuous superior lamella. Moreover, the locality of G. proba is far removed from Nagasaki, being in Awa province, east of the entrance of the Bay of Yeddo. Whatever C. proba may prove to be, it is surely not closely related to C. aculus. Under these circumstances it becomes necessary to rename the Nagasaki species ; and iu so doing I have considered it best to give a new description, in order that there may be in future no uncer- tainty about the exact form intended. Clausilia rowlandi n. l^p. PI. XXVIII, figs. 28, 20, 30. Shell fusiform-turrite, the spire slender, nearly straight-sided, tapering to a small apex ; light-brown. Surface finely and rather sharply striate. Whorls 10, rather strongly convex, especially just below the suture, the last shortly free in front. Aperture narrowly piriform, the upper margin slightly sinuate at the position of the superior lamella, the well-marked sinulus a little retracted. Peristome white, thickened, expanded and reflexed. Superior lamella merely a small cord, terminating in a rather wide thicken- ing of the margin of the peristome, continuous inside with the spiral lamella, which penetrates nearly to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella receding, becoming high wilhni, approach- ing the superior lamella, shorter withiu than the spiral lamella. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 527 Subcoluniellar lamella immersed, visible in an oblique view in the aperture. Principal plica visible in the throat, extending past the middle of the right side. Upper and loiver palatal plicce quite small, no lunella between them. Length 13.5, diam. 2.7 mm. Clausilium wide below, somewhat thickened at the apex, but angular there, almost mucronate, by reason of an excavation of the palatal side near the apex. The margins converge somewhat up- ward, and it is excised on the columellar side of the filament. Garukawa, 10 miles from Sapporo, Ishikari, island of Yesso; collected by Mr. Paul Rowland, and communicated to me by INfr. Addison Gulick. Similar to C. subaculus in the low, cord-like superior lamella continuous with the spiral lamella, but conspicuously distinct by its narrowly pear-shaped aperture, more slender contour, the reduction of the palatal plicoe and the angular apex of the clausilium. C. monelasmu>^, of Ojima province, Yesso, is a smaller species with no superior lamella, there being only a marginal thickening of the peristome in its place. The shape of the mouth readily distinguishes this from all Japanese Euphcedime. The clausilium is also characteristic, no other Japanese Euphtedum having it subangular at the apex. It is named for Mr. Paul Kowland, wlio found the specimens and sent them to Mr, Addison Gulick. Clausilia tau Bocttger. PI. XXVIII, figs. 36, 37, 43, 44, 45. Boettger, Clausilienstudien, p. 58, footnote (1877); Jalirb. d. d. malak. Ges., V, p. 46, PI. 3, fig. 2. Kobelt, Faiuia moll, extramnr. Jap., p. 70, PI. 8, fig. 18. The shell is finely striate, becoming costulate-striate on the back of the last whorl, as in G. siihacxilus. The aperture is widely piri- form, the upper margin distinctly sinuate at the position of the superior lamella. The superior lamella is small, but decidedly higher than in C. subaculus. The principal plica is long, extend- ing inward beyond the lunella. The upper palatal plica is quite long, united in the middle with the lunella, which is low or inter- rupted in the middle, and curves inward below, terminating in a nodular lower palatal plica. The whole structure, as seen from the inside, has been aptly compared by Boettger to the Greek letter r. The palatal folds show whitish on the outside. Length 12^-15^ mm., diam, 3-3^ mm. 526 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, Kyoto (Rein, Hirase; type locality); Shirouo, Buzen ; Gojo aud Nohara, Yaniato; Takasaki, Kozuke (Y. Hirase); Yoko- hama and Tokyo (F. Stearns, purchased). Clausilia digonoptyx Boettger. Pi. XXVIII, figs. 31, 32, 33, 34, 35. Boettger, Clausilienstudien, p. 58, footnote (1877); Jahrb., Y, p. 45, PL 3, fig. 1; PI. 4, tig. a. Kobelt, Fauna, p. 69, PI. 8, fig. 17. A more glossy shell than C. toM, finely rib-striate, the superior lamella higher than in C. tau, the inferior stroiigly converging toward it in the throat. The upper palatal plica is shorter than in C. tau, and united with a very low limella, interrupted in the middle, and curving inward below in a short lower palatal plica. The plicae and lamella together form an arch or bow rather than a r-shaped figure. It does not attain quite the size of C. tau, but is larger than C. comes. The conspicuous approximation of the lamellae and the rib-striation are its most striking features. The conspicuous striation unfortunately did not come out well in the re- production of my figure 32. The types were collected by Rein, exact locality unknown, Mr. Hirase has sent specimens from the following localities : Manabe, Hitachi; Takasaki, Kozuke; Yamagaclii, Tajima; Nishigo, Uzen. Section REINIA Kobelt. €lausilia variegata var. nakadai nov. Shell very much smaller than variegata or nesiotica, length 7, diam. 2 mm. ; brownish, the upper whorls whitish or somewhat buff -streaked; whorls 6 J. Superior lamella short, widely separated from the spiral lamella, the other lamellae as in var. nesiotica. Hachijo-jima, Izu. Types No. 83,299, A. N. S. P., from No. 942 of Mr. Hirase' s collection. Section PSEUDONENIA Bttg. So far as the Japanese species are concerned, it is difficult to see tiny important difference between Pseudonenia and Eupha'dusa. Each has a claut«ilium of the broad type, either rounded or some- what acuminate at the apex, and the lamellae and plicae are of the same type in both sections. The Japanese forms referred to Pseudonenia I would therefore place under Eiijjho'dusa, but pend- ing a general revision of the groups in question, the generally accepted arrangement is here retained. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 529 Clausilia sieboldi Pfr. C. sieholdtii Pfr., Proc. Zool. Soc, 1848, p. Ill; Monographia Hel- Viv., II, p. 1G5; Conchylien Cabinet, Clausilia, p. 100, PI. 11, figs. 10, 11. C. sieboldi Pfr., Monogr., VIII, p. 520. Kobelt, Fauna moll, extra- mar. Jap., p. 73, PI. 9, fig. 1. A species collected by Siebold, and described by Pfeiffer as corneous-brown, with 10 whorls, a deep, arcuate lunella, visible outside through the shell, and one moderate palatal plica. The type measures 18 mm. long, 4 Mide in the middle. Kobelt described and figured specimens taken by Dr. Rein at Amakusa, and between Hiugo and Bugo HJungo ?). He gives the color as " dunkel hornbraun." " Die Priucipalfalte ist klein, htiufig gar nicht zu erkenuen, die iNIoudfalte ist klein oder breit, fast gerade, von der Priucipalfalte getrennt, und schicht unten einen Ast nach hinten ; die Gaumenfalteu fehlen oder es ist eine ganz kleiue vorhandeu, welche mitder ^Nlondfalte zusammenhiingt." The relation of this form to the next is a matter for further investigation, with more material than is at present available. Clausilia sieboldi var. diptyx iiov. PI. XXVIII, figs. 19, 20, 21. Shell fusiform or turreted, the greatest width being either near the middle or at the last whorl ; the spire rapidly tapering above to a rather small, acute apex, the outlines of the terminal portion straight. Dark purple-brown, fading to pale or yellowish -brown above. Surface glossy, sculptured with strong, close rib-striae, narrower than their intervals. AVhorls 9^, convex, the last some- what flattened laterally, convex beneath, showing a pale or yellow- ish curved streak in the position of the lunella. Aperture ovate, dark within ; peristome white, thickened within, rather widely reflexed, continuous, a little excavated at the sinulus. Superior lamella rather small, thin, and short, not reaching to the lip-edge; widely separated from the spiral lamella, which is a half whorl long, penetrating to the middle of the ventral side. Inferior lamella subhorizontal, thin, not extending upon the expanded lip, ascending in a wide spiral within, penetrating as deeply as the superior lamella. Subcolumellar lamella very deeply immersed. Principal plica about a third of a whorl long, latero-dorsal. Upper and lower palatal plicae rather short, subjjarallel, the upper one curved ; they are connected by a very low luuella, scarcely notice- 34 530 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, able, except for the absence of dark pigment in the shell wall at its position. Length 19, diam. 4-4.3 mm. Length 18, diam. 4.3 mm. Length 16.3, diam. 4 mm. Clausilium (PI. XXVIII, figs. 22, 23) rather wide below, strongly curved, the apex somewhat acuminate, a little thickened; dilated on the palatal side ; deeply excised on the columellar side of the filament. Nippon or Hondo Island : Toyonishikami, Nagato, type locality. Shikoku Island : Kashiwashima, Tosa. Kyushu Island : Yatsu- shiro, prov. Higo, and Sasebo, Hizen (Y. Hirase). This widely distributed form apparently differs from C. sieboldi as defined by Pfeiffer and Kobelt by its dark color, icell developed principal plica, hvo distinct palatal plicae, and the very low lunella. It differs from C. neniopsis by the less approaching superior and inferior lamellae, the former widely separated from the spiral lamella, the very deeply immersed subcolumellar lamella, and other characters. The specimens figured (No. 79,137, A. N. S. P.) are from the type locality in Nagato province, southwestern Nippon. Those sent by Mr. Hirase from Kashiwashima, Tosa, and Sasebo, Hizen, are similar. Specimens from Yatsushiro, Higo, are quite thin, somewhat smaller, with 9 whorls and the spiral lamella approaches near the superior lamella. Length 15-16^^, diam. 4 mm. Clausilia neniopsis n. sp. PI. XXVIII, figs. 24, 25, 26. 27. Shell fusiform, the penultimate whorl widest, the spire much attenuated above, the apex minute, first two whorls of about the same diameter, weakly convex, following whorls convex and rather rapidly increasing, the last two whorls forming more than half the total length, last whorl compressed laterally. The last two whorls are blackish purple-brown or dull red, spire reddish, the earlier two whorls nearly white. Surface somewhat glossy, sharply and closely rib-striate. Aperture ovate-piriform, dark within. Peristome continuous and free, rather broadly reflexed, somewhat thickened, white on both face and reverse. Superior lamella mar- ginal, vertical, thin, continuous with the spiral lamella which penetrates past the ventral side. Inferior lamella prominent^ 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. '"^Sl Strongly spiral, approaching dose to the superior lamella, aud peneU-atin! as far. Subcolumellar lamella eUher ba.. y vns.b^e Lm ia front or wholly immersed. Principal phca rather smaU lateral. Palatal plic.. two, lateral, the upper curved a li tie further inward than the straight, oblique lower one. No lunella. Clausilium (PI. XXVIII, figs. 26, 27) very strongly curved almost in a semicircle, wide, broadly rounded below, tapenng above, not excised at the filament. Length 18, diam. 4 mm. ; length of aperture 4 6 mm. Oshtma, Osumi. Types No. 83,305, A. X. S. P., from Xo. 932 of Mr. Hirase's collection. This species is somewhat more slender and graceful than C. ste- Mdi var. dipUj. of Kyushu, with more ^^^f f ;;; ^;: j);;:^;^ but it differs chieflv in the much closer approach of the mfeuor to tiL superior lamell. in the aperture, the continuity oi i^^^Ver^ ^vith the spiral lamella, and the deeper penetration of both spiral and inferior lamell.. As in C. sieMdi, ^J- PO-^ion of ^he wanting lunella is indicated by a pale area in the shelh The clausilium differs, being broadly rounded at the apex in a ne^- opsis, and without excision near the filament, while in C M var. dipty. the apex is angular and there is an abrupt exci.ion on the palatal side of the filament. X7.„,v, or Tlie converging lamellae in the mouth remmd one of Nema o. the allied genus Garnieria. Additions to and Corrections of the Catalogue of Japanese Clausiliid.e.' Section MEGALOPH.EDUSA Bttg. C. DUCALis var. decapitata Pils. Kashima, Harima. Section HEM1PH.EDUSA Bttg. C iNTERLAMELLARisv.Mart. (CataL, V 648). Thebcality Kirishima, Kyushu, is given by Boettger, Syst Verz y- o,. C. PLATYDERA V. Mart. A var. elongatu from Kobe is men- tioned by Bttg., Syst. Verz., p. 57. C. STRICTALUNA var. EMERSA Aucey. Ilitozaslu. C. AON A Pils. Yakashima, Osumi. ^__ "■^ See these Proceedings for 1901, pp. 047-650. 532 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, C. CALOPTYX Pils. Yakushima, Osumi, €. PACHYSPiRA Pils. Miyai, Kii. C KUROzuENsis Pils. Kurozu, Kii. Section TYRANNOPH^DUSA I'ils. C. AURANTiACA var. PLiciLABRis A. Ad., Pils. Kashima, au island near Tanabe, Kii. (Syn. : C. a. var. hjpoptychia Pils., Catal., p. 652; C. plicilabris A. Ad.) C. BILABRATA Sm. Forms mi)ior and integra are listed by Dr. Boettger from Kyushu. A synonym is C. bilabiata Sowerby, Conch. Icon., XX, PI. 14, fig. 135. Section STEREOPH^DUSA Bttg. C. PLAGiOPTYX Pils. Goto, Hizen. The locality " Goto, Uzen," is to be deleted from the range given to C. brevior, p. 653. C. oosTOMA var. goniopoma Pils. Wakayama, Kii. [ C. OOSTOMA var. dactylopoma Pils. Kashio, Awaji. C. STEREOMA var. HEXAPTYX Pils. Yakushima, Osumi. C. DiEMONORUM Pils. Kikaiga-shima, Osumi. Section PSEUDONENIA Bttg. C. siEBOLDi var. diptVx Pils. Southwestern Nippon, Shikoku and Kyushu. C. NENioPSis Pils. Oshima, Osmiii. Section EUPH^DUSA Bttg. C. SUBACULUS Pils. Nagasaki. This name replaces that of C. aculus Bens., Catal., p. 654, for the Kyushu form. C. ROWLANDi Pils. Garukawa, near Sapporo, Yesso. Section REINIA Kobelt. C. VARIEGATA var. NAKADAI Pils. Hachijo-jima, Izu. Species incertce sedis. C. LEWisii Ancey. Japan. 1902.] natural' SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 533 EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXVII AND XXVIII. [Note.— All figures of corresponding parts are drawn to the same scale.] Plate XXVII, Figs. l-d.—Clausilia kttroztiensis. Kurozu, Kii. Fig. 4. — Diagram of palatal armature of another specimen. Figs. 5-7. — Clausilia pachyspira. Miyai, Kii. Figs. 8, 9. — Clausilia plagioptyx. Goto Hizen. Fig. 10.— Clausilia plagioptyx. Palatal armature of another spe- cimen. Figs. \\-\^.— Clausilia oostoma var. goniopoma. "Wakayama, Ku. Figs. 15-18.— Clausilia oostoma MlldlF. (Type of C. japonica var. suritgm'FWs..) Mikuriya, Suruga. Figs. 19, 20.— Clausilia oostoma var. dactylopoma. Kashio, Awaji. Plate XXVIII, Figs. 1^-2'i.— Clausilia sieloldiYdiX. diptyx. Toyon- ishikami, Nagato. Figs. 2^21.— Clausilia neniopsis. Oshima, Osumi. Figs. 28-^0.— Clausilia rowlandi. Garukawa, near Sapporo, Yesso. Figs, ^l-'db.— Clausilia digonoptyx. Manabe, Hitachi. Figs. 36, Zl.— Clausilia tau. Clausilium of a specimen from Kyoto. Figs. 2,8-A2.— Clausilia subaculus. Nagasaki. Figs. A^-'^b.— Clausilia tau. Nohara, Yamato. 534 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, DESCRIPTIONS OF LYCOSID^ AND OXYOPIDiE OF PHILADELPHIA AND ITS VICINITY. BY THOMAS H. MONTGOMERY, JR.^ The present paper is based on a study of the following collections : that in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, a rich collection made by Mr. Witmer Stone, which was the basis of the first contribution on Pennsylvania Lycosidce, Mr, Stone's " Penn- sylvania and New Jersey Spiders of the Family Lycosidse, ' ' a small collection made by the Eev. Dr. H. C. McCook; and the author's own collection, specimens mainly from West Chester, Pa., from Philadelphia and its close vicinity. I would express my indebted- ness to the Academy of Natural Sciences, and to my friend Mr. Stone in particular, for the use of its collections. The greater number of the specimens examined are from Philadelpliia and from Chester county. Pa., others from various parts of Pennsyl- vania, from New Jersey, New York State and one from Maryland. The present contribution probably does not include all the species around Philadelphia, and much less all of Pennsylvania and New Jersey. The figures represent the copulatory organs, drawn with great care in regard to the details, for these organs are undoubtedly of first diagnostic importance. The epigyna are frequently difficult to see clearly in all their parts; it is always necessary to denude them of the hairs to make them more discernible, and in some cases to dissect them away from the body and study them by transmitted light. The other characters of importance are the arrangement of the eyes (including the relative extent of the dorsal eye area), the relative proportions of the dimensions of the cephalothorax and its form, the relative length of the legs, and the relative length of the superior and inferior spinnerets. Form and dimensions of the abdomen are of little value. Color is quite constant in some spe- cies, but highly variable in others, and sometimes there is quite a ^ Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 535 marked sexual difference in the coloratiou. Only sexually mature individuals have been considered. It is very difficult to recognize the American species described by C. Koch and "Walckenaer. I have examined Walckenaer's descriptions very carefully, and believe that ^Yith the exception of a very few forms, e.g., Lyeosa carolinensis, his species must be regarded as unrecognizable. Walckenaer based his descriptions on the manuscript notes and drawings of Bosc and Abbot; these drawings have never been edited, and until they are published they cannot rightly be granted any more priority rights than an unpublished description, unless we should grant manuscript drawings the value of type specimens. It would be as incorrect, in face of the generally accepted rules of nomenclature, to name species on the basis of unedited drawings as upon unedited descrip- tions. Hence these drawings are of no decisive importance at all until they are published, and Walckenaer's meagre verbal descrip- tions comprise all we know of his species. Hentz's descriptions are on the whole still less ample than Koch's and Walckenaer's, but Hentz has given figures which, in the main, are good, so that a considerable number of his species may be regarded as recognizable. It is right to be very thorough in endeavoring to recognize the species of a previous author, even when his descrip- tions are very scant; but when the description is so inprecise as to apply to any one of several species occurring in the locality of the specimens described, then the specicis based upon such a description must be considered unrecognizable and no further attention paid to it. If this rule is not followed, our nomenclature would be based upon a tissue of guesswork probabilities, and but for the date of the tenth edition of the Sijstema Naturce, we should logically seek in some earlj' source the names given by Adam. The works of the writers cited are arranged together in a list at the end of the paper. Family LYOOSIDiE Characters oj the Family. — Araneoe with one pair of lung books and unpaired trachsal spiracle ; with three claws on the feet, and legs in-order of length generally 4, 1, 3, 2, or 4, 1, 2, 3; eyes4n three rows, the first (most anterior) row of four small eyes, the second and thiid each of two larger eyes. 536 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, Key to the Herein Described Genera of Lycosidce. ^. — Third eye-row nearly on a line with the second. I. — Lateral eyes of the first row about equidistant from the second row and the anterior edge of the cephalothorax, Ocyale. II- — Lateral eyes of the first row at least twice as far from the anterior edge of the cephalothorax as from the second row, Dolomedes. B. — Third eye-row not nearly on a line with the second. I. — Superior spinnerets not longer than the inferior, dorsal eye area usually considerably less than one-quarter the length of the cephalothorax, legs usually well clothed with hair, chelicera usually fully IJ times the length of the head in front, . . . Lycosa. II. — Superior spinnerets slightly longer than the inferior, dor- sal eye area fully or nearly one-quarter the length of the cephalothorax, legs slender with long spines and few hairs, chelicera not longer than IJ times the height of the head in front, " . . Pardosa. III. — Superior spinnerets at least 1^ times as long as the inferior, dorsal eye area less than one-quarter the length of the cephalothorax, legs well clothed with hairs, chelicera comparatively small, Pirata. Genus LYCOSA Latr. Following Simon, I have included in Lycosa, and not granted separate rank, the genera Trochosa Koch, Arctosa Koch and Tarentula Ohl. and Tlior. In the species here described it is im- practicable to distinguish these genera, the interrelation of them is so close and intermediate forms so difiicult to classify. When genera become more difiicult to distinguish than the species which compose them, it is clearest to adopt one comprehensive genus for all. The following key will aid in distinguishing the species here described : ^.—Cephalothorax not more than 2.5 mm. in length, without a distinct median light band. I. — Sternum nearly twice as long as broad, .... nigra. II. — Sternum nearly round, suhlata. B. — Cephalothorax 2.7-4.6 mm. in length, with a distinct median light band. I. — Sides of cephalothorax brownish or yellowish, sterniun not darker than legs. 1902.] NATUKAL 8CIE>;CK9 OF PHlL.AUJiLjr'HlA. 537 1. — Submarginal light band of cephalothorax very flis- tinct, generally a dark annular mark on sternum, ocreata pulchra. 2. — Submarginal light band of cephalothorax indistinct, no dark markings on sternum, , . . relucens. JI. — Sides of cephalothorax blackish or dark-brown, sternum darker than legs. 1. — Sternum without hairs, under surface of coxre and abdomen black, sepulchmlis. 2. — Sternum with hairs, under surface of coxre and abdo- men not black, (a) — Legs comparatively thick, fourth leg not four times the length of the cephalothorax, labium deep black its entire length, . charonoides. (6) — Legs very slender, the fourth leg at least four times the length of the cephalothorax, labium lighter at its distal end. (1) — Legs distinctly banded, dorso-median band of cephalothorax constricted at its middle, stonei. (2) — Legs not distinctly banded, dorso-median band of cephalothorax not constricted at its middle, .... verisimilis, C. — Length of cephalothorax 5 mm. or more. I. — Abdomen with a distinct broad dorso-median dark band along its entire length. 1. — First leg thickest, not 2^ times the length of the cephalothorax, arenicola. '2. — First leg not thicker than the others, more than three times the length of the cephalothorax. (a) — Sternum black, pundulata. (6) — Sternum yellow, scniulata. II. — Abdomen above without a distinct broad dorso-median dark band along its entire length. 1. — Venter light without dark markings, middle eyes of first row considerably larger than the lateral, cinerea. 2. — Venter dark or with dark markings, middle eyes of first row usually not larger than the lateral. (a) — Cephalothorax not distinctly banded, or with a median band nuich narrower than the eye area. (1) — Middle eyes of the first row smaller than the lateral, .... caroliiiensis. (2) — Middle eyes of the first row larger than the lateral. 538 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, (2a) — Three dark bands on the venter converging toward the spin- nerets, .... inhonesta. (26) — Small dark spots on the venter, no dark bands, . . . nidicola. (2c) — A broad transverse dark band on the venter behind the lung books, . . . hallimoriana. (6) — Cephalothorax Avith a median light band as broad anteriorly as the eye area. (1)— Abdomen with a light dorso-median band enclosing a shorter dark band ante- riorly, lepida. (2) — Abdomen above with a large black spot or stripe at each antero-lateral margin. (2a) — Posterior eyes largest, cephalo- thorax with a pair of black longitudinal bauds, nigraurata. (26) — Eyes of second row largest, cephalo- thorax without black bands. (a) — Abdomen below with a large blackish mark, first leg not more than 2| times the length of the cephalo- thorax, . . frondicola. (/3) — Abdomen below usually without a distinct black- ish mark, first leg 2.9 times the length of the cephalothorax, purcelli. 1. Lycosa nigra (Stone). (PI. XXIX, fig. 1.) Pardosa nigra Stone, 1890. nee Lycosa funerea Hentz, Banks, 1891. (2 ? ?, types, Stone Coll., from Chester county. Pa.) Eyes. — First row shorter than the second, its middle eyes higher and larger than the lateral ; eyes of second row largest, less than their diameter apart; the third row widest, its eyes considerably nearer to the second row than to each other and placed upon tubercles. Dorsal eye area about one-fifth the length of the cephalothorax. All eyes relatively small. Form. — Sternum about double as long as \nde in one specimen, not quite so long in the other. Cephalothorax highest at the level of the dorsal groove. Chelicera fully 1^ times as long as the head 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. is high in front. Maxilto comparatively long and dcnder. Legs slourand short, without very long spines. DimeMions. -Length of cephalothorax 25 mm. Length of firet leg 5.-5 mm. Length of fourth leg 9 mm. Cofor-"Cephalothorax smooth and shmmg, uniform black ,vi,h a reddish'browu luster, no stripes vvhatev^-. Sternum and cox. similar, somewhat lighter. Abdomen black, md.^c^^, mottled with olive brown or gray, without any d.slmct pat te n though there is a more or less distinct light mecban stni>e on e Interior part reaching nearty to the middle. The s.des of « abdomen are black, thickly speckled with small gray do.s^ Be nel brownish, with no distinct markings. Mandibles and palpt 1 n g darkreddish brown, frontedge of cephalo.ho™x, ,us below the fir^t row of eyes, yellowish. Legs, femur dark shm.ng hU th cephalothorax, patella white; the first and second patrs ha. e the her joints entirely yellowish white, the third patr are smu a but with prominent black spines while the fourth pair have the tarsus banded with brown at the ends ' ' (Stone) . Comparisom.-A typical Lycosa in form of leg., small space occupied by the eye area, and shortness of the superior sp.nneiet», quite distinct from any other American species. 2. LyC08a!Ublatan.sp. (H.XXIX.Iig.2.) a 9 type. Stone Coll., Sand Barrens, Pt. Pleasant N. J.) k«. -First row fully as broad as the second lateral eye sliSy higher. Eyes of second row not quite the.r lamete alt Third row sli.htly wider than second, its eyes about the Te si., as those of the second row, and about equulis .ant from each other and from the second row. Dorsal eye area not o e-fifth the len-th of the cephalothorax, and the eyes relatively small Anl-Head low and sloping on the sides, length of chebcc a ,nore than twice the height of the head in fmnt. Sternum v ry sHghtly longer than broad, nearly round. Legs stout and ..la- tively sliort. _ Dmensio».. -Length of cephalothorax, 2.0 mm. Length of abdomen, 2.5 mm. Length of first leg, G.3 mm. Length of second leg, 5.9 mm. 540 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, Length of third leg, 5.9 mm. Length of fourth leg, 9 mm. Color in Alcohol. — CejjJialothorax clear reddish-brown, shining and without hairs, a little lighter on the antero-dorsal portion but with no distinct median stripe; a narrow black marginal line; forehead yellowish ; the second and third eyes on black tubercles. Sternum with a brown mai'gin, otherwise yellow like the inferior surface of the coxse. Abdomen above dark greenish-b own, a nar- row yellow median stripe pointed at each end on the anterior half of the dorsum, and on either side of it two rows of large yellow spots converging toward the spinnerets ; sides dark gi-eenish-browu wilh numerous small yellow spots; venter yellow in front of and around the lung books, this yellow area ending posteriorly in a point anterior to the spinnerets, and to either side of it greenish- brown marbled with yellow. Epigynum reddish-brown. Chelicera reddish-brown ; labium black with yellow distal end ; maxilke yel- low. Legs yellow, with distinct broad brown rings on all the joints except the metatarsi. Comparisons. — This species has some resemblance to L. nigra (Stone), but differs from the latter in epigynum, form of sternum, and coloration of abdomen and legs. The epigynum. is compara- tively small and simple, but evidently mature since it is distinctly elevated and dark colored. 3. Lycosa ocreata pulohra n. subsp. (PL XXIX, figs. 3, 4.) Lycosa ocreata Heutz, Keyserling, 187G. ? Lycosa ocreata Hentz, Emerton, 1888. Lycosa ocreata Hentz, Stone, 1890. t Lycosa ocreata Hentz, Banks, 1892. (Specimens from Philadelphia, York Furnace and Luzerne county, Pa.) Eyes. — First row narrower than the second, lateral eyes slightly larger and lower, middle eyes nearer to each other than to the lateral. Eyes of second row largest, less than their diameter apart. Eyes of third row circular, nearly as far from second row as from each other. Dorsal eye area less than one -quarter the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Cephalothorax rather narrow in outline. Length of chelicera about 1| times I he height of the head in front. Sternum considerably longer than broad, pointed behind. Legs slender, rather scantily covered with hairs. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 541 Dimensions.— Leugih of cephalothorax, d, 2.7 mm.; ?, 3.3 mm. Length of abdomeu, d, 2.8 mm. ; ?, 5.3 mm. Length of first leg, d, 8.9 mm. ; ?, 9 mm. Length of second leg, d, 8 mm. ; ?, 8.5 mm. Length of third leg, d^, 7.3 mm. ; $,8 mm. Length of fourth leg, d, 10 mm. ; ?, 12.5 mm. Color in Life.-Cephalothorax in the ? with a broad butf median band .videst at the middle and extending from the ante- rior eyes backward the whole length of the dorsum, and m it a short very narrow darker line between the posterior eyes and a similar line at the dorsal groove; on each side of this band a broad dark-browu baud, next a narrow buff line, then a submargmal band, composed of a single row of dark-brown spots, finally a narrow buff marginal line. Sternum pale yellow-brown with a darker marking in the form of a closed curve, rounded anteriorly and pointed posteriorlv, the extreme margin of sternum being brownish-black. Abdomen above a grayish-buff, with, on the anterior half, a median browu band pointed behind, there enchng at about the middle, and including a lighter band; to each side of this a rather indistinct brown band extending about to the middle and continued toward the spinnerets as a row of about five black spots with pale spots between them; sides of abdomen a lighter ground color, with numerous short brown stripes pointing caudad and a few dark-brown spots ; venter grayish-white, with two pairs of longitudinal rows of small brown spots converging toward spm- nerets 'the inner rows more pronounced in their anterior portions, the outer rows in their posterior portions. Legs yellowish, darker above, the palpi and maxillce the same color, the chehcera darker, and the labium black. Superior spinnerets pale gray, the mferior browu. In some females the dark stripes are lacking on the venter. The males are very similar in coloration, but darker, particularly on the abdomen, and the tibia of the first leg is densely covered with long black hairs, resembling the arrangement of bristles on a test-tube cleaner. ^ , . -o i Compari^ons.-l have made a new subspecies of this Pennsyl- vania form on the ground of tiie absence, iu all the numerous specimens examined, of dark annulatious on the legs. Hentz both 642 PR0CEf:DIN08 OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, defecribc-d and figured for his L. ocreata dark markings on the legs. His Hjjecimens were from North Carolina. L. ruja Keyserling is not the ? of this species, as Keyserling suggested it might be. 4. LycoBa relucens n. «p. (I'l. XXIX, figa. 5, e.) (1 ^^, 2 d'cT, types, Stone Coll., Germantown, Philadelphia.) Eyea. — First row straight, its eyes of equal size, narrower than the secfjnd row. Eyes of second row largest, more than their diameter apart. Third row widest, its eyes on V)lack tubercles and slightly nearer seconrl row than each otlicr. Dorsal eye area about one-fifth the length of the w;phaloth(^rax. Form. — Cephalothorax pointed in front and rounded behind. Chelicera not quite 1^ times as long as the head is high in front. Sternum a little longer than broufl. Max il lie more than twice as long as the labium. Ix'gs stout. Dimemiom. — Ix^ngth of cephalothorax, rj, .3.5 mm. ; ?, 3.4 mm. Length of abdomen, o'', 3 mm. ; ?, '>.2 mm. length of first leg, rj', 12.2 mm.; ?, 11 mm. J^ength of second leg, cJ', H.^ nit/j.; V, lO.o mm. Length of third leg, o''', 10.1 mm.; V, lO.'i mm. Length of fourth leg, rf, 10 mm. ; ^', 14.5 mm. Color in Alcohol. — Cephalothorax in the 5' light yellowi.--h- brown, eyes surrounded by black; a yellow median band, as broad as the space between the posterior eyes, ext^^nding from the seconrl eyes to the fiosterior end of the thorax ; extreme margin black. Sternum yellowish. Abdomen above browni.'h and darker than the w^phalothorax, an indistinct black mark at each antero-lateral angle, a black spot at the middle point of dorsum, and indistinct blackish spots on the margins of the jjosterior dorsum ; sides yel- lowish-brown with darker spots posteriorly ; venter lighter, yellow, with obscure dark markings on the margins near the spinnerets. Spinnerets yellow. Kpir/ynum very pale reddish -brown. Chelicera reddish -brown, with a darker line formed of blacki.sh hairs on the anterior aspect of each. Labium and maxilUz yellow. Lerja pale yellowi.sh-brown without darker markings, palpi similarly colored. In the (j the coloration is darker. CepJialothorax chocolate- brown; in one individual there j)ass from near the middle of each side of the median light band two radiating bands of the .same color to ttie more indistinct submarginal band, one of these radi- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 543 ating bands ff)llowing the line of the cephalo-thoracic groove, the other passing latero-caudad. Abdomen above in the brighter indi- vidual (type) with a large black spot at each antcro- lateral margin, a black spot at the centre of the dorsum from which two ver\' narrow black lines pass forward and diverge, and on each margin of the dorsum a row of about six smaller black spots, the most posterior incompletely connected with those of the opposite side by cross lines of minute black dots ; in the other c? these markings are very indistinct. Sides and venter as in ?. Lefj8 and palpi darker than in ?. Cf/mparuonsi. — This form is quite similar in general appearance to L. verisimilis n. sp. ; both have also the line of hairs oa the anterior .surface of the chelicera ; but the genitalia of the two are quite different, and relucem ha.s much stouter legs. 5. Lycoia gepulchralis n. sp. (PI. XXIX, fig. 7.) n i^, type, author's collection, Woodland Cemetery, Phila- delphia. ) Eyes. — First row very slightly broader than the second, its middle eyes slightly higher and larger than the lateral. Eyes of second row largest, more than their diameter apart. Third row slightly wider than .second, its eyes nearer to the .'^econd row than to each other. Dorsal eye area only about one-sixth the length of the cephalothorax. All eyes relatively .'•mall. Form. — Head rather low in front and its itulea oblique, Ce[)halo- thorax very broad in front, more than three-fifths its greatest diameter, highest just behind the pfjsterior eyes. Sternum longer than broad, Chelicera ma.ssive, their length about twice the height of the head in front, I^egs short, taf^iring in diMmctcr frorn proximal to di.*tal end. Dimensions. — Length of cephalothorax, 4.G nini. T>ingth of abdomen, 6,2 mm. Length of fir?-t leg, 12 mm. Length of .second leg, \().H mm. Length of third leg, 10.4 mm. Length of fourth leg, lo mm. Color in Life. — Cephalothorax black, a brown area surrounding the eye region and superior part of sides of head and forehead, thi- brown passing backward as a median band as broad as the eye area, constricted jast aut<;rior to the dorsal groove and forming a 544 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, narrow line on each side of this grove ; a narrow marginal line of brown. Sternum jet-black and shining, without hairs. Abdomen above brown, a slightly darker indistinct median band on the anterior half, a deep-black spot at each antero -lateral margin, and on each margin of the posterior half of the dorsum a row of five small spots of white hairs, the corresponding ones of opposite sides con- nected by transverse lines of black; sides finely marbled with brown and gray ; venter deep black including the epigynum and the region in front of the lung slits, this black area converging behind to the spinnerets and its lateral margins somewhat racemose. Chelicera, labium and maxillce deep black and glistening as also the under surface of the coxce ; the chelicera with few hairs and with a reddish prominence at the supero-lateral angle. Legs shining reddish-brown except the coxse which are black above and below, femora unhanded; first legs unhanded and darker than the others; distinct annulations of brown and black on the patellae, tibiffi and tarsi of the third and fourth legs, less distinct annula- tions on the second legs. Palpi blackish-brown. In alcohol the black on the venter shows indistinct lines of minute brown spots converging toward the spinnerets. Comparisons. — This species in the form of the head is somewhat intermediate betAveen Trochosa and Tarentula. It is very close to Lycosa (Tarentula) modesta (Keys.), from which it differs: (1) slightly in the form of the epigynum; (2) in the middle eyes of the first row being much less than twice as large as the lateral, and in that the eyes of the second row are separated from each other by nearly their full diameter; (3) in the black color of the ster- num and coxce and in different coloration of the dorsum of the abdomen. It shows also close resemblances to i. charonoides n. sp., particularly in the shape of the legs and the coloration of the superior surface of the abdomen; but the head is much narrower and its sides steeper in charonoides, and the two species differ in the form of the epigynum and in the coloration of the lower parts, 6. Lyoosa charonoides n. sp. (PI. XXIX, fig. 8.) (1 9, type, author's collection. Woodland Cemetery, Phila- delphia, ) Eyes. — First row narrower than the second, its lateral eyes very slightly lower and a little smaller. Eyes of the second row about ]^ times their diameter apart. Third row widest, its eyes as larg 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 545 as those of the second row, and about as far from them as from each other. Dorsal eye area less than one-fifth the length of the cephalothorax. iTonn.— Chelicera not 1^ times the length of the head in front, sides of head comparatively steep. Sternum longer than broad. Legs stout and tapering. Dimensiom.—Length oi cephalothorax, 4.2 mm. Length of abdomen, 7 mm. Length of first leg, 12.5 mm. Length of second leg, 12 mm. Length of third leg, 12 mm. Length of fourth leg, 16 mm. Color in Life.— Cephalothorax with a narrow median stripe of long buff hairs extending from the second row of eyes to the pos- terior end of the thorax, its anterior two-fifths divided into two by a black line; the remainder of the cephalothorax black with short brown hairs, and a few scattered long buff hairs on the posterior aspects of the sides. Sternum black with scattered long white hah-s. Abdomen above lighter than cephalothorax, very dark chocolate-brown, a tuft of long buff hairs at the anterior dorso- median edge and two very short stripes of similar hairs diverging backward from this tuft, between them a median blackish mark shaped like a spearhead and terminating in a point anterior to the middle, and on the outer side of each buff stripe an indistinct blackish band ; to either side of the mid-line a row of 4-5 minute spots, each composed of a few thick snow-white hairs; sides paler chocolate-brown, with numerous small white spots; venter buff with two lines of blackish color, converging from the lung books to the spinnerets, and two less distinct dark lines converging from epigynum not as far back as the spinnerets, and numerous dark small spots on the remainder of the venter. Lung books yellow, epigynal margins blackish, area around epigynum brown, spin- nerets blackish-brown. Chelicera deep black, a nearly white knoblike projection at the supero-lateral angle of each. Labium deep black. 3faxilla^ rufous-black like the under surface of the coxcB. Legs deep rufous-brown with white hairs and black spines, femora a little lighter than the other joints. In alcohol the black of the thorax and sternum becomes a 546 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, brownish- black, and au indistinct broad, paler marginal band becomes apparent on the thorax. Comparisons. — Cf. L. sepulchralis n. sp. 7. Lycosa stonei u. sp. (PI. XXIX, figs. 9, 10.) (Types of d and 9 in author's collection, from Philadelphia; numerous specimens from Philadelphia and its vicinity, and from AVest Chester, Pa.) Eyes. — First row shorter than the second, its middle eyes slightly higher than the lateral. Eyes of second row largest, a little more than their diameter apart. Third row widest, its eyes nearly equi- distant from each other and from the second row. Dorsal eye area nearly one-quarter the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Chelicera fully 1^ times as long as the head is high in front. Sternum longer than wide, rather pointed behind. Supe- rior spinnerets longer than the inferior. Legs long and slender, with short hairs and long spines. Labium barely half the length of the maxillse and rather conically pointed at its distal end. Cephalothorax narrow, in front less than half its greatest trans- vei-se diameter, highest at third pair of eyes. Sides of head steep. Dimensions. — Length of cephalothorax, c?, 3.1. mm.; ?, 3.1 mm. Length of abdomen, d, 3 mm. ; 2, 3.5 mm. Length of first leg, c?, 12.3 mm. ; ?, 10.1 mm. Length of second leg, d, H mm. ; ?, 9.8 mm. Length of third leg, d, 10.5 mm. ; 9, 9 mm. Length of fourth leg, cf, 14.5 mm. ; 9, 14 mm. An unusually large 9 has a total length of 9.5 mm. d. Color in Life. — Cephalothorax above glistening black, a median gray stripe (composed of long gray hairs which readily rub off) commencing anteriorly between the posterior eyes, where its width equals the distance between these eyes, and extending backward, usually with more or less of a middle constriction, to the posterior end of the thorax, where it is somewhat narrower ; a few similar light hairs around the middle eyes, and a narrow line of them at the extreme margin of the thorax. Sternum deep black with a narrow marginal line of short gray hairs. Abdomen above black with a broad median band, almost the width of the dorsum and broader than the thoracal band, composed of long gray- i.--h hairs and extending to the spinnerets; sides black; venter black 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 547 but with grayii-h haivrJ, these most densely grouped on the margins of the posterior half where they compose two grayish bands. L^uig books pale yellowish-white. Spinnerets dark at base and light at tips. Chelicera and labium deei) black, maxillce brownish-black. Legs : First leg with the coxa, femur, patella and tibia deep black, tarsus and metatarsus yellowish-brown, the tarsus with a black ring at its proximal end, short black hairs hide the claws of the metatarsus, the tibia thickly covered with long black thick hairs implanted on all sides, but most numerous dorsally and ventrally, each tibia thus resembling a black brush (but the hairs relatively not as long as in L. ocreata pulchra) ; second leg with the coxa, femur, patella and tibia black, tarsus yellowish -brown, with dark rings at the ends and one in the middle, metatai-sus yellowish- brown ; third and fourth legs with the coxa and femur deep black, the patella rufous-black, the tibia, tarsus and metatarsus yellowish- brown with dark rings ; the distal ends of all metatarsi black. Palpi black, except the tarsus, which is brownish-black. In alcohol the dorso-median thoracic appears red, that of the abdomen brownish. ?. Color in Life.— Cephalothora.c black, a broad median band conj posed of long gray-buff hairs (not nearly white as in the c?) extending from the posterior eyes to the posterior end of the thorax, broadest anteriorly where it occupies the whole space between the second and even extends a little lateral to them, filling the space between the third eyes and with a slight constriction at this point, enlarging slightly at middle and here more or less distinctly notched, narrower behind. To each side of this band the black color is hairless, but on the lower sides with rather sparsely scattered white hairs, such hairs forming also a very narrow marginal band. Sides of head, forehead and clypeus rusty black. Sternum a rusty dark-brown with a narrow pale margin. Abdomen above at base, next to pedicel, with a lransvei*se band of black, and when the abdomen is viewed strictly from the dorsum each end of this band appears as a large black spot at an antero- lateral margin, and in some individuals these spots are continuous with those jjlaced posteriorly; ground c(jIor of dorsum buff- brown, with large irregular spots of black on tiie margins converging toward tlie spinnerets, two pairs of tl)ese spots on the anterior half being particularly prominent, corresponding spots of opposite sides 548 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, trausversely connected by angular black lines each margined poste- riorly with a narrow line of white hairs, and at the middle point of each black transverse line a black spot; on the anterior half of the dorsum two small round spots, each black medially and white laterally, placed close together near the mid-line. Sides of abdo- men brownish w'ith numerous small white spots. Venter pale gray, with small black spots converging more or less as curved lines toward the spinnerets and variable in number and size. Lung books pale yellowish-white and very distinct. Epigynum rusty brown. Labium deep ferruginous, almost black; chelicera the same color on their anterior but a little paler on their posterior surface. Maxilke pale yellowish-brown like the ventral surface of the coxae. All the legs distinctly banded with buff and black above and below on all the joints except the metatarsi, which are yellowish-brown. Palpi similarly colored. In alcohol the buff markings and thoracal stripe in the 9 change to reddish, and the black of the cephalothorax, except around the eyes, to a deep reddish-brown. Comparisons. — This beautiful small woodland species I take l^leasure in naming for my friend, Mr. AVitmer Stone, who was the first to monograph the Lycosids of this vicinity. L. stonei shows a marked sexual difference in coloration, more than any other of the local forms, but as I have observed the copulation and mating, tnere is no doubt of the specific identity of the males and females here described. It is a very well-marked species, the thick brush of hairs on the first tibia of the c? being shared only by the cT of L. ocreata, while the epigynum is easily distinguished by the great breadth of its median piece. In the slenderness and great length of the legs, as well as in the size of the dorsal eye area, it resembles Pardosa, but in all other characters is a typical Lycosa. 8. Lycosa verisimilis n. .sp. (I'l. XXIX, figs. 11, 12.) (1?, type, Westchester, Pa. 1 d, type, Philadelphia ; author's collection). Eyes. — First row shorter than second, the middle eyes slightly larger and higher and closer together than to the lateral eyes. Eyes of second row circular and fully their diameter apart. Eyes of third row oval and nearer the narrower second row than each 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 549 other. Eyes not black but clear in color. Dorsal eye area a little more than oue-sixth the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Length of chelicera fillly twice the height of the head in front, a line of black hairs on the anterior face of each. Ster- num distinctly longer than broad. Legs long and slender with numerous fine hairs. Cephalothorax in front almost half its greatest transverse diameter, highest at middle, sides of head rather steep. Dimensio7is. — Length of cephalothorax, cf, 8.2 mm. ; 9, 4.2 mm. Length of abdomen, d^, 2.8 mm. ; $,4.1 mm. Length of first leg, d^, 9.9 mm. ; 9, 12.5 mm. Length of second leg, c?, 9 mm. ; 9, 11.8 mm. Length of third leg, cJ', 9 mm. ; 9, 12.1 mm. Length of fourth leg, d^, 12.5 mm. ; 9, 16. 7 mm, 9, Color in Alcohol. — Cephalotliora.v very dark reddish-browu, eye region black, a broad buff median stripe arising between the posterior eyes, widest in its anterior third and most anteriorly containing a narroAv black line, and extending caudad to the end of the thorax ; and there is a much narrower, interrupted sub- marginal stripe. Sternum dark reddish-brown, with a median lighter line anteriorly. Abdomen above considerably lighter than cephalothorax, brown and buff as follows: a dark-broAvn spot at each antero-lateral margin continued backward along the lateral margin of the dorsum as a bi'own line anteriorly and a row^ of brown dots posteriorly, between these brown margins a broad dark- buff band which, on the posterior half, is broken into 4-5 trans- verse buff arches separated by dark-brown aots, and in the anterior half contains a spearhead-shaped black mark terminating in a black spot just behind the middle of the dorsum ; sides dark-buff with numerous brown spots; venter light buff with small black spots arranged in a U-shape, the opening of the U directed cephalad and its curve just anterior to the spinnerets, while the space en- closed by it contains a few minute black dots, Epigynum and spinnerets dark reddish-bi'own ; lung book and region anterior to epigynum pale brownish. Chelicera dark reddish- brown, almost black; labium blackish at base and yellow at tip; maxillce reddish- brown, a little lighter at the distal end. Legs with black spines and short white hairs, reddish-brown and much lighter than the 550 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, sides of the cephalothorax, \\ith distinct auuulations on all joints except the metatarsi, the coxre beneath pale yellowish -brown. Palpi colored like the legs. d'. Color in Alcohol. — Much like the 9. Cephalothorax a very dark reddish-brown, median band clear reddish and broadest in its anterior third, extending from middle eyes to posterior end of thorax, in its anterior third divided by a median dark line broadest anteriorly, long whitish hairs being present on each side of this dark line; the median thoracal band is widest a little anle- rior to the middle of the cephalothorax (where it is not quite as wide as the distance between the eyes of the third row), is there constricted and narrower posterior to this constriction; there is also a rather indistinct broad submarginal band of reddish ; black bands connect the eyes of the second and third rows. Sternum as in ?. Abdomen above dull brown with a broad pattern of lighter yellowish-brown, this pattern broadest anteriorly, narrowing toward the spinnerets and enclosing in its anterior half a darker oval mark with narrow black border; sides dull brown with paler stripings ventrally; venter light reddish-brown, a line of indistinct small dark spots on each margin, a median dark band extending from the anterior edges of the lung books anteriorly to a distance of one-fifth the length of the abdomen from the spinnerets posteriorly, this median band concave anteriorly where it has a width equaling the distance between the yellow lung books, and narrowed poste- riorly where it ends blunth^, and to either side of this band minute yellov.'ish spots. Chelicera reddish-brown, labium a little lighter at tip, maxillae, yellowish-brown like th(} cox(je. Legs clear reddish- brown, without darker rings, metatarsi a little lighter. Palpi colored like legs. Comparisons. —A quite distinct species, resembling superficially the young of L. Jrondicola Em. 9. Lycosa arenicola Seudder. (PI. XXIX, fig. 13.) Lycosa arcnicoUi Seudder, 1877. Lycosa nidi f ex Marx, 1881. Lycosa nidifex Marx, Everton, 1835. Lycosa arenicola Seudder, McCook, 1888. Lycosa arenicola Seudder, Marx, 1889. Lycosa arenicola Seudder, Stone, 1890. Lycosa domifex Haneock. 1899. (Specimens from Caj^e May and Pt. Pleasant, N. J., in Stone Coll. , but no mature cf. ) 1902.] NATURAL SCIENX'ES OF PlIILADELnirA. 551 Eyes. — First row almost as bioad as the second, the centres of the lateral eyes of the first row lateral lo the centres of the lateral eyes of the second rows, middle eyes larger and slightly higher. Eyes of second row largest, more than their diameter apart. Third row widest, its eyes nearer to the second row than lo each other. Dorsal eye area a little moi-e than one-sixth the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Cephalothorax very high in front, its posterior declivity very gradual and beginning anteriorly close to the posterior eyes, moderately sloping on the sides. Chelicera more than twice as long as the head is high in front, and with an elongate protuberance at the supero -lateral angle. Sternum louger than broad. Fir^t leg much thicker and stouter than the others. Dimensions of 9. — Length of cephalothorax, 10 mm. Length of abdomen, 11 mm. Length of first leg, 24 mm. Length of second leg, 23 mm. Length of third leg, 21 mm. Length of fourth leg, 27 mm. • Colors in Alcohol, ? ?. — Cephalothorax above reddish -brown to almost black, a lighter median band as broad anteriorly as the eye area extending backward and constricted just anterior to the dorsal groove, narrow around this groove, constricted more deeply just behind it and enlarging again to the posterior edge of the thorax ; sides of the head sometimes as light as this band; extreme margin of thorax black. Sternum light -brown to blackish-broAvn. Abdo- men above light to dark -brown, a median darker band extending the whole length of the dorsum, but most distinct on the posterior part, its margins posteriorly deeply pectinate; sides yellowish-brown dor.so-posteriorly and with a black longitudinal band ventro- anteriorly ; venter yellowish-brown to blackish with a more or less distinct darker area from epigyuum lo spinnerets, and a dark semicircle around the spinnerets anteriorly. Epigynum reddish- brown. Superior spinnerets lighter than the inferior. Chelicera deep reddish-brown to black, a reddish prominence at the supeio- lateral angle. Labium and viaxillce reddish-brown with lighter distal ends, labium somewhat darker than the maxiUa'. Legs : First leg darker than second, black in some individuals ; second pair darker above than third and fourth, without annulations, 552 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, distal ends of tarsi and metatarsi black. Palpi of the same color as the posterior legs. Comparisons. —Easily distinguished from all others of the genus by the great thickness of the first legs. This is a character, united with that of the great lieight of Ihe cephalothorax in front, which would seem to warrant the establishment of a new genus for it. 10. Lyoosa punctulata Hentz. (PI. XXIX, fig. 14.) Lijcosa punctulata ITentz, 1841. Lycosa punctulata lleniz, Emerton, 1885. nee Lycosa punctulata Ilentz, Stone, 1890. Lycosa punctulata Hentz, Marx, 1889. (2 mature ?$, Philadelphia, author's collection.) Eyes. — First row shorter than the second, lateral eyes slightly larger and sightly lower. Second eyes almost their diameter apart, slightly larger than third eyes. Third row slightly wider than second, its eyes nearer second row than each other. Donsal eye ai'ea not one-fifth the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Cephalothorax comparatively slender, in front highest and not quite one-half as wide as the greatest transverse diameter. Sides of head steep. Length of chelicera about 1^ times the height of head in front. Sternum a little longer than broad. Legs rather stout, thickly covered with short liaii's. A prominence on the supero-lateral angle of the chelicera. Superior spinnei'ets about as long as the inferior. Dimensions. — Length of cephalothorax, 6.8 mm Length of abdomen, 9 mm. Length of first leg, 19 mm. Length of second leg, 17.2 mm. Length of third leg, 16 mm. Length of fourth leg, 23 mm. Color in Life. — Cephalothorax above pale chocolate-brown, two broad, parallel black stripes on the dorsum, separated from each other by about their own width, and extending from (and embrac- ing) the second and third eyes to the posterior margin of the thorax ; a narrow buff line between the second eyes ; a narrow black submarginal and a black marginal line on the thorax; region between the eyes blackish, and a narrow, short black line on each side just ventral to the dorsal eyes. Sternum black with pale hairs. Abdomen above with a broad dark-brown 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 553 median band extending the whole length of the dorsnin, widest at the middle and anteriorly with a black edging on each margin of it, on each side of this median band paler grayish-brown with a rather indistinct large brownish sj>ot at each antero-lateral margin ; sides mottled with gray and reddish-brown; venter with a trans- verse row of three large black spots just behind the plane of the epigynum. and a blackish area extending from them and converg- ing toward but not reaching the spinnerets, this black area bor- dered on each side by a line of contiguous buff dots; in the other ? the venter shows this blackish area in the same position, and scattered assymmetrically upon and around it about 1(5 deep black spots of varying size. Epigynum black, region about it yellowish. Spinnerets brown, Chelicera black, rnaxilkc and labium dark reddish-brown like the ventral surface of the coxce. Legs light chocolate-brown without darker markings, the dorsal surface of the coxse black. Comparisons. — A well-defined species, agreeing with Hentz's description and figures. The specimens labeled by Stone " punc- tulaia ' ' and described as such by him are individuals of L. scutu- lata in which the dorso-median band of the abdomen is not notchefl posteriorly. 11. Lycosa scutulata Hentz, (PL XXIX, iigs. 15, Ifi.) Lycosa scutulata Hentz, 1841. Lycosa scutulata Plentz, Emertou, 1885. Lycosa scutulata Hentz, Marx, 1889. Lycosa scutulata Hentz, Stone, 1890. Lycosa purti'tulata Hentz, Stone, 1890. Lycosa scutulata Hentz, Banks, 1892. (Numerous specimens from Philadelphia, Chester county, York Furnace, Pa. ; Pt. Pleasant, N. J. ) Exjes. — First row shorter than the second, the lateral eyes con- siderably lower than the middle. Eyes of second row largest, less than their diameter apart. Third row widest, its eyes nearer second row than each other. Dorsal eye area about one-fifth the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Cephalothorax narrow, in front not quite half its greatest transverse diameter, highest at the posterior eyes. Sides of head rather steep. Chelicera slightly more than 1^ times as long as the head is high in front. Sternum longer than liroad. Legs long and rather slender. 554 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, Dimensions. — Length of cephalothorax, cJ*, 7 mm. ; ?, 7.5 mm. Length of abdomen, cf, 8 mm. ; ?, 18 mm. Length of first leg, d, 28 mm. ; ? , 25 mm. Length of second leg, d". 25 ram. ; 9, 23 mm. Length of third leg, d", 23 mm. ; 9, 20 mm. Length of fourth leg, d, 33 mm. ; 9, 31 mm. Color m Life, 9. Cephalothorax pale grayish-buff, a brown- black broad baud on each side of the mid-line enclosing in front the eyes of the corresponding side and passing back to the end of the thorax, the buff line enclosed by these stripes much narrower than them and widest posteriorly; a narrow brown-black sub- marginal line, and a black vertical stripe from each lateral eye of the first row to the ventral margin of the head in front. Stermim pale yellowish with a darker margin. Abdomen above with a black-brown broad median band extending its whole length and widest at the middle, this band generally enclosing two or three oblique brown spots anteriorly and its margins indented by broAvn more posteriorly (though in some individuals such indentations are not present), and margined on each side by a narrower buff baud; sides streaked black-brown and buff above, paler yellow wath a few dai'k spots below; venter grayish-white with one or two pairs of narrow^ longitudinal, slightly darker lines converging from the lung books to the spinnerets. Spinnerets dark, epigymim blackish, lung books grayish-white. Chelicera pale-brown with a reddish prominence at the supero- lateral angle, and a line of darker hairs anteriorly. Labium a paler brown, and maxillce yellowish. Legs pale-brown, darker below than above, metatarsi of all a little darker, as also the distal ends of the tibia and tarsus of the fourth pair. Palpi colored like legs. In alcohol the dark-colored stripes appear dark reddish -brown, the legs reddish, and the buff and brown of the abdomen yellowish. Color in Life, d. — Similar to the 9 except in following ])oints: The anterior half of the medio-dorsal stri])e of the abdomen a deep black; the first leg black on femur (almost whole extent ventrally, the distal half dorsally), patella, tibia and proximal two-thirds of the tarsas. Comparisons. — A clfarly marked species, easily distinguished 1902.] NATUKAL SClKxNChJS OF PHILAUH-Lf HIA. 555 from L. pundulata, with which it has sometimes been coufouuded, iu both form and coloration. 12. Lycosa cinerea (Fabr.) (PI. XXIX, figs. IT, 18). Araneus cinereus Fabricius, 1793. Lycosa cinerea Fabr., Emertoii, 1885. Lycosa lynx Halin, 1831. Lycosa halodroma C. Kocli, 1848. Arctosa cinerea Idem. Arctosa lynx Idem. Trochosa cinerea Fabr., Marx, 1889. Trochosa cinerea (Fab.) Stone, 1890. Lycosa maritima Hentz, 1841. (Pt. Pleasant, Sea Isle, N. J.) Eyes. — First row as broad as the second, or the centres of its lateral eyes more lateral than the centres of the lateral eyes of the second row, its middle eyes from 1^ to 1^ times as large as the lateral. Eyes of second row largest, not quite their diameter apart, separated from the first row by the diameter of a lateral eye of the latter. Third row widest, its eyes a little nearer second row than each other. Dorsal eye area about one-fifth the length of the cephalothorax. i^orm. — Cephalothorax comparatively wide, its highest point a little anterior to the dorsal groove. Head low iu front, height of forehead from the dorsal margins of the .second eyes less than one- half the length of the chelicera. Legs slender. Sternum longer than wide. Epigynum very small, as also the tarsal joint of the d^ palpus. Spinnerets long. Dimensions (specimens from Pt. Pleasant). — Length of cephalo- thorax, d^, 6.5 mm, ; ?, 6,5 mm. Length of abdomen, d^, 6.6 mm. ; ?, 9.5 mm. Length of first leg, d", 19 mm, ; 9, 20 mm. Length of second leg, d*, 18,8 mm. ; $,18 mm. Length of third leg, d, 18.6 mm, ; ?, 18,8 mm. Length of fourth leg, d^, 25,7 mm, ; 9, 25,5 mm. Dimensions of d' from Sea Isle, — Length of cephalothorax, 5 mm. Length of abdomen, 5 mm. Length of fii-st leg, 15 mm. Length of second leg, 14.8 mm. Lenth of third leg, 13.9 mm. Length of fourth leg, 20 nun. 556 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, Color in Life (d" from Sea Isle). — Cep ha lot ho rax marked intri- cately with white, a^ray-browu aud black, as follows: Head white with a short black line passing downward and backward from each posterior eye ; a broad dorsal area of white margined with grayish- brown and black in inlerdigitating patches; sides mainly Avhite interrupted with grayish-brown lines, the extreme margin blackish. Sternum pale green. Abdomen with a medio-dorsal stripe of gray on the anterior half interruptedly margined with black, and on each side of the mid-line extending back to the spinnerets a row of 6-7 white spots margined with black aud brownish ; sides above white with black spots, below entirely white; venter immaculate white, lu7ig books faint yellow, spinnerets greenish-brown. Che- licera black with long white hairs on the anterior surface, and a pale prominence at the supero -lateral angle. Labium black. Maxillce pale brownish. Legs white with distinct brownish annula- tions and blotches on all joints except upon the brownish metatarsi, and more distinct above than below. Palpi colored like the legs, but the tarsi blackish. The females are colored like the males. Comparisons.— Tho, form here described is very probably the same as Hentz's Lycosa maritima. Whether it exactly agrees with the European L. cinerea I cannot decide from the descriptions of the authors, and have not had opportunity to see for myself speci- mens from Europe. If they should eventually prove not to be the same then Hentz's name would be applicable. Banks (1891) regards maritima Hentz as a synonym of cinerea (Fabr. ). The single c? I obtained at Sea Isle differs from the c^cf' in the Stone collection from Pt. Pleasant in its much smaller size, and in that the first row of eyes is placed exactly upon the front edge of the head and not removed from it by a distance equaling the diameter of its smaller eyes. It is possible there may be two geographical varieties on the New Jersey coast, 13. Lycosa carolinensis Walck. (PI. XXJX, figs. 19, 20.) Lycosa tarentula carolinensis Walckenaer (Bosc. MSS.), 1837. Lycosa (Tarentula.) Carolinensis 1 Bosc. M.S., Hentz, 1841. Lycosa carolinensis Hentz, Emcrton, 1885. Lycosa carolinensis Walck., Marx, 1889. Lycosa carolinensis Walck., Stone, 1890. (Specimens from Chester county, Pa., and Essex county, N, J.) Eyes. — First row ahnost as broad as the second, the lateral larger than the middle eyes aud slightly low^er. Eyes of second 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 557 row largest, circular, uot quite tlieir dianieler apart. Third row wider than the second, the distance between its eves considerably greater than the distance separating them from the second row. Dorsal eye area not more tlian one-sixth the length of tlie cephalotliorax. Form. — Ceplialothorax highest at the posterior eyes, in front a little more than one-half its greatest transverse diameter. Sides of the head steep. Chelicera less than twice the height of the head in front, massive. Sternum longer than broad. Legs stout, thickly covered with short hairs Dimensions. — Length of cephalothorax, cj', 11 mm.; 5, 12.5 mm. Length of abdomen, d', 9 mm. ; 9, 11 mm. Length of first leg, c?, 36 mm. ; ?, 35 mm. Length of second leg, c^, 33 mm. ; 9 , 32 mm. Length of third leg, d", 29 mm. ; $, 30 mm. Length of fourth leg, d^, 40 mm. ; 9, 40 mm. Color in Alcohol, 9. — Cephalothorax above dark reddish-brown Avithout distinct markings, blackish around the eyes. Sternum black. Abdomen above dull brown, a median darker (sometimes indistinct) broad band on the anterior half, this band widest ante- riorly and terminating bluntly at the middle ; sides above like the dorsum, below yellowish-brown ; whole venter behind the lung books black, epigynum reddish-brown as the spinnerets. Chelicera reddish-brown with black and orange hairs antei'iorly and a bright red prominence at the supero-lateral angle. Labium and maxillce black or deep reddish-brown with lighter tips. Legs dull reddish- brown, ventral surface of the coxre black, and each joint with darker ends. Palpi reddish-brown. Co/npari-son.?. — This is one of the few of AValckenacr's species which can be recognized with some certainty. 14. Lycosa inhonesta (Keys.). (PI. XXIX, figs. 21, 22.) Tarentula inJionenta Keyserlinp;, 187ilpi/> ~" sidei. it to be synonvmic with L. 6a6in3' '"f °^ only 9.2 mm.-, and in babmgtoni the fourth leg is actually and proporlionatelv shorter. Emerton mentions 9 mm. as the length o the cephalothira. in his specimens of nM.cofa. and P-umabl^ to is the measurement of his largest specimen. These are not grea differences, but it is necessary to examine Canadian «Pe«-- ° babmgtoui before the identity of the two may be regarded as ^^ell established. 16. Lycosa baltimoriana (Keys.) (PI. XXIX, fig. 25). Tarentula Baltimoriana Keyserling, 1876 Tarentula baltimoriana Keys., Marx, i»»»- n c?, Maryland, McCook Coll.) , . ,, i ^. Eyes -First row slightly broader than the second, its lateral eyes lowex- and less than half as large as its middle ^J^^' fy^^f .econd row largest, not quite their diameter apart. Thud rovN broaTest its eyes farther from each other than from the second 1 L..^ L area less than one-sixth the length of the cephalo- row. Dorsal eye area less than thorax j.,,^._Cephalothorax low for its diameter, head broad m fron and its sides rather oblique. Length of «-ra more than dou^ the height of the head in front. Sternum longer than bioad. Legs stout and hairy. Dimensiom.— Length of cephalothorax, 9 mm. Length of abdomen, 7.5 mm. Length of first leg, 31 mm. Length of sewmd leg, 28.5 mm. Length of third leg, 26 mm. Lcn^'-th of fourth leg, 33 mm. CoC in AlcohoL-Cephalothorax reddish-brown, a narrow white n.edkn-1 ne in the eye area, a lighter reddish area from the eyes ro th" dorsal groove and from the latter in radiations to the defthe reddish and the darker reddis.-brown there intergn.l- 562 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, ing, extreme margin black. Sternum black. Abdomen above light-browu witli gray isli -white markings that form a large spot at each antero-lateral angle, a pair of large spots just anterior to the middle, and a series of four broad, zigzag arches across the posterior dorsum ; the brown forms on the anterior half of the dorsum a median band that ends posteriorly notched. Sides gray, streaked posteriorly with oblique brown stripes. Venter yellowish -gray, with a broad transverse band of deep chocolate- brown extending across its entire width and from the lung slits in front almost to the spinnerets behind. Spinnerets yellowish -brown. Chelicera deep reddish-brown with pale yellow hairs superiorly, the supero-lateral prominence also deep reddish-brown. Labium black, maxillce a little lighter. Legs clear reddish-brown, tarsi and meta- tarsi of the first and second darker, patellae of sill legs dark- brown beneath, coxse below nearly as dark as the patellse, indistinct dark rings on the femora. Comparisons. — This specimen agrees perfectly with Keyserling's description, except that it is a little larger. 17. Lycosa lepida (Keys.). (PI. XXIX, figs. 26, 27.) Tarentula lepida Keyserling, 1876. Lycosa communis Emerton, 1885. Lycosa communis Emerton, Marx, 1889. Tarentula lepida Keys., Marx, 1889. Lycosa communis Emerton, Stone, 1890. Lycosa communis Emerton, Banks, 1893. t Lycosa lenta Hentz, 1841. ? Lycosa erratica Hentz, 1841. (Numerous specimens from Philadelphia, Chester county, York Furnace, Pa. ; Pt. Pleasant, N. J. ) Eyes. — First row much shorter than the second, its lateral eyes slightly lower. Eyes of the second row more than their diameter apart, not larger than those of the third row. Third row widest, its eyes nearer the second row than each other. Dorsal eye area not more than one-fifth the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Cephalothorax naiTOW, in front less than one-half its greatest transverse diameter, equally high at the middle and at the third pair of eyes. Sternum longer than broad. Chelicera mas- sive, their length nearly twice the height of the head in front. Legs rather slender. Dimensions. — Length of cephalothorax, c?, 5.2 mm.; ?, 7 mm. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 563 Length of abdomeu, d, 5.2 mm. ; ?, 8.5 mm. Length of first leg, d", 19 mm, ; 9, 19 mm. Length of second leg, cf, 17 mm. ; ?, 18 mm. • Length of third leg, cf, 16,5 mm.; ?, 17.2 mm. Length of fourth leg, d, 23 mm. ; ?, 23.3 mm. These are dimensions of unusually large individuals. In the same locality occur mature ? 9 with a cephalothoracal length of only 5.5 mm. Color ill Life, int anterior to the middle, and behind it a series of 5-4> trans- verse, broad yellowish arches extending to the spinnerets, each edged broadly with black anterioriy, and each containing a pair of small black dots: in some individuals these arches are very dis- tinct, in others barely apparent, and they are clearer on alcoholic than on living specimens ; sides streaked with brownish-yellow and blackish: venter yellowish or brownish, sometimes with an indis- tinct "iarker longitudinal band (or a pair of tiarker lines) behind the epigynum. Lung books yellow. Epigunum yellowish with brownii-red margins. Spinnerets yellow. Legs yellow, banded more or less distinctly with brown. Color in AleohoL f f. — Like the 9. but da^er. Cephalo- thorax black, the yellowish median band extending forward, some- times little farther than the dorsal groove, sometimes neariy as far as the posterior eyes, it is widest at its anterior end and ccmstricte«i as in the S ; an indistinct vellowish subsiarrinal band is sometimes 1902.] XATUEAL SCIEJfCES OP PflrLADELPHIA. 571 prefeent; forehead below the firsl row of eyes yellowth, or black with two or three yellow .'pot-. Sternum black. Abdomen above blackish, patterned as in the i ; sides blackLah; venter as in th^ ? , Legs as in the ? , except that the femora of the fir5?t pair are blackish proximally on the anterior edge. Palpi black on all the joints. Compariaowi — A distinctly variable form, particularly in the coloration of the abdomen and in the form of the epigj-num, two tvpes of which 1 have tigure*^!. Females with the abdominal mark- ings obscure are often difficult lo distinguish from females of L. minima, though the males of the two are rea'iily separated. It is the most abundant local specie- of the family. 22. Pardosa minima 'Keye.). (PI. XXX, fig?. i5, 36.) Lyrot.a (r:[i.[iu-i Kevserling, 1876. Vard 7 Emert'on. 1&S5. Lyt- : vserlin?. Marx, 1889. Pard ■ ^ / Emert'on, Marx, 18»<9. PardoiU alhopatMa Emerton, Stone, 1890. Pardoga albopaUUa Emerton. Banks, 1892. Pardoia minima Keys., Bank.?, 1891. (A few specimens from Philadelphia and Luzerne coimty, Pa. ) JS'^e*. — First row shorter than the .second, its lateral eyes slightly higher. Eyes of second row largest, more than H times their diameter apart. Third row a little broader than the .second, its eyes farther from each other than from the second row. Dorsal eye area one-<{uarter the length of the cephalothorax. Form. — Cephalothorax flattened above, highest at third pair of eyes, in front not quite one-half its greatest transverse diameter, sides of head steep. Chelicera weak, little longer than the head is high in front. Sternum longer than broad. L^ slender with rather long spines and few hairs. Dimensions. — Length of cephalothorax, -f, 2.3 mm.; 2, 2.4 mm. Length of abdomen, cf, 2.3 mm.; 2, 2.5 mm. Length of firsl leg, cf', 7 mm. ; 2, 7 .5 mm. Length of second 1^, rf, 6.5 mm. : 2 , 6.6 mm. Length of third l^, cf, 6.5 mm. ; 2, 6.7 mm. Length of fourth 1^, c?, 10 mm. ; 2, 10.5 mm. Color in Alcohol, d'-f . — Cephalothorax black, a rather narrow, pale median stripe arising behind the posterior eyes, broadest in front of and narrowed behind the rae!. Descriptions and Figures of the Araneides of the United States. Boston Journ. Nat. Ilist. 4 592 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [AugUSt, 1876. Keyseuling, E. Ueber amerikanische Spinnenarten der Unter- ordnung Citigradaj. Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien. 1836-1848. Koch, C. Die Arachniden. 1881. Marx. On some new tube-constructing Spiders. Amer. Nat. 1889. Idem. Catalogue of tbe described Araneaj of Temperate North America. Proc. Nat. Mus. WasMnqton. 12. 1878. McCooK H. C. Traris. Amer. Ent. Soc. VII. 1877. ScuDDER, S. H. The tube-constructing Ground Spider of Nan- tucket. Psyche. II. 1876. Simon, E. Les Arachnides de France, T. 3. Paris. 1890. Stone, "W". Pennsylvania and New Jersey Spiders of the Family Lj'cosidiB. Proc. Acad. Nat. Set. Philadelphia. 1875. Thorell, T. Notice on some Spiders from Labrador. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 17. 1837. Walckenakr, M. le Baron. Histoire naturelle des Insectes, Apteres. (Suites a Buffon.) Paris. Explanation of Plates XXIX and XXX. All t?ie figures are drawn with the aid of the camera lucida and reduced one-half. All the figures of (^ palpi exhibit the right palpi from the ventral surface, and in most of them the hairs have been omitted. Plate XXIX, Fig, 1. — Lycosa nigra (Stone), type, epigynum. Fig. 2. — Lycosa sublata n. sp., type, epigynum. Figs. 3, 4. — Lycosa ocreata pulchra n. subsp., types, epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 5, 6. — Lycosa relucens n. sp., types, epigynum, (^ palpus. Fig. 7. — Lycosa sepulchralis n. sp., type, epigynum. Fig. 8. — Lycosa charonoides n. sp., type, epigynum. Figs. 9, 10. — Lycosa stonei n. sp., epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 11, 12. — Lycosa verisimilis u. sp., types, epigynum, (J' palpus. Fig. 13. — Lycosa arenicola Scud., epigynum. Fig. 14. — Lycosa punctulata Hentz, epigynum. Figs. 15, 16. — Lycosa scutulata Hentz, epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 17, 18. — Lycosa cmerea (Fabr. ), epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 19, 20. — Ljycosa carolinensis Walck., epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 21, 22. — Lycosa inhonesta (Keys.), epigynum, r^ palpus. Figs. 23, 24. — Lycosa nidicola Emerton, epigynum, J^ palpus. Fig. 25. — Lycosa baltimoriana (Keys.), (^ palpus. Figs. 26, 27. — Lycosa lepida (Keys.), epigynum, (^ palpus. Plate XXX, Figs. 28, 29. — Lycosa frondicola Emerton, epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 30, 31. — Lycosa imrcelli n. sp., epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 32-34. — Pardosa nigropalpis Em., epigyna, (^ palpus. Figs. 35, 36. — Pardosa minima (Keys.), epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 37, 38. — Pardosa icita n. sp., types, epigynum, (^ palpus. Fig. 39. — Pardosa solivaga n. sj)., type, epigynum. Figs. 40, 41. — Pirata humicolus n. sp., types, epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 42, 43. — Pirata liber n. sp., types, epigynum, (^ palpus. Figs. 44, 45 — Pirata nigromaculatus n. sp., types, epig. (^ palpus. Fig. 46. — Pirata elegans Stone, type, ei)igyuum. Fig. 47. — Pirata marxi Stone, type, epigynum. Fig. 48. — Pirata procursus n. sp., tyi>e, epigynum. Fig. 49. — Ocyale undata (Hentz), e|)igynum. Fig. 50. — Dolomedfs uriuKfor Hentz, epigynum. Fig. 51. — Dolomedes idonetis n. sj)., epigynum. Fig. 52. — 0.ryopes salticm Hentz, ei)igyuum. Fig. 53. — Lycosa nigraurata n. sp., (^ palpus. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1002. PLATE XIII. /A WWw^W^'^^^ MOORE. NEW POLYNOID^. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1902. PLATE XIV. i-s<^i;^;t),N ■r X^ ,-y I J if »-t*' .1 MOORE. NEW POLYNOID/E. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1902. t). :---S -^ \ % COCKERELL. CLASSIFICATION OF ALEYHODID/E. PRCC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 190- PLATE XVI mmr't . .C ..'•H;.. '^^.'-i' v" 21 23 V 26 y^^ 25 -- ■' 28 I - 27 2tt 31 I 30 ^ 36 35 ^^ a t1 1 ^'-^ 32 41 34 •^'^ g. 4 8 40 '■'^ 42 ^^ 45 PILSBRY. NEW JAPANESE MOLLUSCA. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 190'^ PLATE XXIX. MONTGOMERY. LYCOSl D/E AN D OX YOPI D/E. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1902. PLATE XXX. MONTGOMERY. LYCOSI D^ AND OXYOPID.^:. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 593 September 16. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Ten persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : "On the Genus Phrynotettix Glover (Haldemanel la Auct.;," by James A. G. Kehn. " Notes on an Ant," by Adele M. Fielde. Neiv Land Mollusca from Idaho.—Dn. Pilsbry spoke of land mollusks collected in Idaho by the Rev. E. H. Ashmun, whose work in former years has added so largely to our faunistic knowledo-e of Arizona and New Mexico. Among other new and interesting finds, a new species of the Zouitid genus Pristiloma was found the easternmost of its kind. The following description was offered': Pristiloma idahoense n. sp. Shell imperforate, depressed, the spire low conoid, yellowish corneous, glossy, smooth except for faint growth-lines stronger near the suture. AVhorls 6, very narrow and slowly increasino- the last very obtusely angular at the periphery, very convex beneath, only slightly impressed at the axis. Aperture Very nar- rowly lunate, the peristome simple and thin, the columellar maro-in thickened within, suddenly but minutely dilated at the axial ins'er- tion. Alt. 2.1, diam. 3.4 mm. Steven's Ranch, Weiser Canon, Washington Co., Idaho tvnes No. 82,353 Coll. A. N. S. Phila. ; also Price Valley, Weiser CaCon m the same county, and Big Payette Lake, Boise Co., Idaho' collected by Rev. E. H. Ashmun, 1901. -. oin ^^® ^^y *° ^P®^^®^ °^ Pristiloma published by the S])eaker in 1899 (Proc. A. N. S. Phila., p. 187), this species would group with P. lansmgx and P. arctica. It differs from the latter in hav- ing more and narrower whorls, a higher periphery, and a narrower mouth. It differs from lamingi in the larger size, absence of any lip-rib (in over 100 specimens examined), the less rounded per- iphery, and the greater number of whorls. The death of William N. Lockington, a member, was announced. 594 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., September 23. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Ten persons present. The death of Rudolf Virchow, a correspondent, was announced. September 30. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Seven persons present. A paper entitled " Contributions toward a knowledge of the Orthoptera of Japan, T — Acndidse," by James A. G. Rehn, was presented for publication. The following were ordered to be printed : 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 595 ON THE GENUS PHRYNOTETTIX Glover (HALDEMANELLA Auct.) BY JAMES A. G. REHN. The genus Phrynotettix was erected iu 1872, ou the figure of a specimen from tlie Pecos river, Texas, in Glover's Illustrations of North American Entomology, Orthoptera (PI. VI, fig. 25), and has been entirely disregarded since, nearly all authors giving pref- erence to Saussure's later name Haldmanella. The original figure of Phrynotettix is clearly recognizable, and the absence of a de- scription should not militate against the adoption of it under such conditions. Four nominal species have been described, but a study of the descriptions proves that all are synonymous, while one quite distinct form from northern New Mexico appears to be uudescribed. PHRYNOTETTIX Glover. EpMppigera Haldeman -(not EpMppiger Latreille = Ephippigera Burmeister), Btansbury's Exped. to the Great Salt Lake, p. 371, 1852. Phrynotettix Glover, Illustr. N. Amer. Entom., Orth., PI. VI fio- 25 1872. ' a- ' EremoUa Thomas (not of Serville), Kent. U. S. Geogr. Surv. West 100th Merid., V, p. 886, 1875. Haldmanella Saussure, Addit. Prodr. (Edipodiorum, p. 153, 1888. Haldemanella Bruner, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII, p. 81, 1890. Haldemannia Townseud, Insect Life, VL p. 31, 1893. Type. —Phrynotettix verruculatus Glover = Ejohiypigera tshiva- vensis Haldeman. Key to Species (based on females). «• — Pronotum of female elongate-ovate, frontal cosla not mark- edly constricted dorsad and not separated from fastigiuni by a definite transverse carina, tshivavensis (Haldeman). aa. — Pronotum of female cordiform, frontal cosla considerably con- stricted dorsad and separated from fastigiuni by a "^single low callous carina, taosonus n. sp. 596 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., Phrynotettix tshivavensis (Haldeman). EjMppigera ishivnvensis^ Haldeman, Stansbury's Expecl. to the Great Salt Lake, p. 371, PI. X, fig. 3, 1852. (Chihuahua.) EpMppigera tscJiivavensis Walker, Cat. Derm. Salt. Brit. Mus., Ill, p. 545, 1870. (Utah.) Phrynotettix verruculata Glover. Illust. N. Amer. Entom., Orth., PI. VI. fig. 25, 1872. (Pecos River, Texas.) Eremobia magna Thomas, Rept. U. S. Geogr. Surv. "West 100th Merid., V. p. 886, PL XLIII, fig. 5, 1875. (Lower Arizona.) Hialdmanella] Tscliivaveiisis Saussure, Addit. Prodr. (Edipodiorum, p. 153, 1888. Ilaldemanella robusta Bruner, Proc. TJ. S. Nat. Mus., XII, p. 81, 1890. (Southern Arizona.) Haldemannia tscJiivavensis Townsend, Insect Life, VI, p. 31, 1893. (Las Cruces, New Mexico.) 1Ralde7nanella] tschivavensis Scudder, Catal. Descr. Orthopt. U. S. and Can., p. 44, 1900. Ilaldemanella verruculata Scudder and Cockerell, Proc. Davenport Acad. Sci., IX, p. 39, 1902. (Organ Mountains, New Mexico.) Distribution. — Previously recorded from Chihuahua, Pecos river, Tex. ; lower and southern Arizona, La Cueva, Organ moun- tains, and Las Cruces in New INIexico, besides a record published by Riley of one immature specimen from the Argus mountains, Inyo county, Cal., the latter specimen being now before me. The record from Utah, given by Walker and generally followed, is no doubt erroneous. Walker had no material himself, and the original specimen described by Haldeman came from Chihuahua. The locality Utah was probably assumed from the title of the work in which Haldeman published. The series examined includes the following localities : El Paso, Tex., March 31, 1902, and Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M., May 13, 1902 (Viereck and Rehn) ; Lake Valley, Sierra county, N. M. (Cope); Shovel Mount, Burnet county, Tex., July 31, 1901 (F. G. Schaupp). Synonymy. — An examination of the published figures and de- scriptions of the forms v/hich I have included under this species will show that they are identical, the slight differences which are apparent being mainly in the figures, and can be accounted for by the fact that several of them lack a considerable portion of the detail of the insect. The original figure by Haldeman is very good, in fact the best published, and Bruner' s lypes of robusta ^ In the original form of the species Haldeman introduced in the first syllable the Hebrew letter resh, to give the proper sound to the Latin- ized mime. Walker translated it sch, but s7i is sufficient. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 59 < (two of which I have examined) exactly fit it except for oue trifling character, whicli the series examined shows to be a very variable one, namely, the obtuse-angulate or rotundate character of the caudal angle of the lateral lobes of the pronotiim. Colora- tion appears to bear absolutely no weight as a diagnostic char- acter, and is only of interest in that the males are deeper and more richly colored than the females. Some measurements of the prouotum, in comparison whh that of the new species, may be of interest : Females. Length. Greatest Width. P. Uhivavensis : Chihuahua (from Haldeman), . . 14 mm. 9 mm. Lower Arizona (from Thomas), . 18.7 " 12.5 " Southern xlrizona (from Bruner), . 22 " 15 " Lake Valley, N. M., . . .' . 20 5 " 13 " Alamogordo, N. M., 23 " 15 " P. taosanus : Taos Valley, N. M. (type), . . 17 " 12.5 " Phrynotettix taosanus n. sp. Tijpe. — ^; Taos Valley, Taos county, N. M., June, 1883. Collection of the U. S. National ^Museum. The most important differential characters are given in the key of the species. The median carina of the metazona is also very apparent, while in tshivavensis it is obsolete ;" the transverse sulci are also more arcuate in taosana, and the central portion of the caudal region of the prozona more tuberculate. Body short and broad. Head with the vertex about equally long as broad (decidedly broader than long in females of tshiva- vensis), median carina distinct and extending to the tip of the fastigium; frontal costa compressed above and separated from the fastigium by a distinct rugose cariua, below the ocellus strongly compressed and obsolete, sulcate throughout; eyes rather small, very much shorter than the infraocular gense. Pronotum rather short, broad and cordiform in outline, the surface heavily rugose as characteristic of the genus, cephalic border subai-cuate, the lateral carina strongly constricted cephalad, the caudal margins straight ; median carina distinct but most developed on the meta- - In immature specimens this carina is very distinct, but the type of taosana is a fully adult female, and the presence of a distinct median carina cannot be laid to immaturity. 598 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., zona, tlie central region of the prozona heavily tuberculate, the posterior portion strongly developed ; transverse sulci arcuate, particularly the second and third ; lateral lobes with the ventro- caudal angle obtuse-angulate, the central portion of the lobe liearing a considerable depressinn which extends caudad and dorsad from the ventro-cephalic angle. Tegmina not exceeding the tip of the pronotum in length, the reticulations very close (in tshiva- vensis these are much coarser and the principal veins are more apparent). Abdomen not exceeding the hind femora in length, the dorsal aspect keeled. General color reddish-brown, the exernal faces of the femora marked with ochraceous. 3feasnreme?its. Total length, 34.5 mm. Length of pronotum, 17 " Greatest width of pronotum, 12.5 " Visible length of tegmina, 7.5 " Length of hind femora, 13 " Specimens Examined. — One, the type. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 599 NOTES ON AN ANT. BY ADELE M. FIELDE. There is no regeneration of the antennce. —A queen of Stenamma fulvum piceum^ deprived of her antennae in July, 1901, lived in one of my artificial nests with workers and other queens until January 5, 1902, and gave no indication of regenerating the lost organs. Of the many ants whose antennse were wholly or par- tially excised by me in 1901, in the experiments made upon the ants' sense of smell, ^ some lived several months, but none ever showed sign of regenerating any excised part. Ability to live in isolation.— On the 27th of August, 1900, I took three workers from an apple-core lying by the roadside and segregated them in a Petri cell, from which they were never re- moved. One died February 23, 1902; one died March 1, 1902, and one is still living, September, 1902, the survivor having lived alone more than six months. She busies herself with the inert young that I lend to her and reclaim before they hatch, and she appears to be healthy and happy. She is wholly tame, and evinces no desire to leave her cell when I take off its cover; but she seems to enjoy disporting herself upon my hand, or upon the hand of another person, where she will voluntarily stay for long periods. She appears to have, concerning human hands, unex- plained preferences which do not depend on acquaintance, tem- perature or race. Familiarity with the nest-aura does not reconcile aliens. — Two of my small nests,' one containing ants of the C colony, the other containing ants of the G colony, have stood in juxtaposition one year, and have been cleaned weekly with the same appliances, but 1 The writer is in lier third year of study of this ant. It is the species under consideration in this paper in every case, unless another species is named. 2 "Further Study of an Ant," Proceedings of the Academy of Sciences of Philadelphia, October, 1901. 3 "Portable Ant Nests," Biological Bulletin, Vol. 2, No. 2, 1900. 600 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [Sept., the inmates of the two nests continue to fight each other on meet- ing, as they did when first taken from their natural nests. Kings. — The kings have the distinctive odor of their blood rela- tions.— July, 1902, I isolated, each in a Petri cell, eight deiilated queens, more than one year old, and representing two communities. Into each of the cells I introduced, one at a time, several kings, but a few days or few weeks old, and with no previous association with any of these queens. In every case the queen was at once friendly, and continued for many days to be friendly, with all kings of her own colony, but was so hostile to kings of any alien colony that she avoided or killed every alien king introduced. She must have recognized colony odor in these kings. The kings appear to be deficient in the sense of smell. They at times, espe- cially in the light, and on warm days, become wildly amorous upon contact of the head Avith a queen, a Avorker or another king, regardless of the lineage of either. The kings are not clever, never follow a trail, never take part in the care of the young, and are at all times dependent. They can lap food for themselves; but I have seen so many as three kings feeding at the same time from the mouth of one worker, while other kings stood around as if waiting their turn to be fed. Queens. — It may be said of the queens tliat while virgin they manifest marked preference or dislike toward certain kings. Having once mated they afterward permit no close approach of an alien king. They condone the stupidity of kings of their own lineage, and tolerate from them attentions to which no response is conceded. It has been affirmed that workers remove the wings from fer- tilized queens. That a queen may drop her wings without assist- ance was shown by two living in my nests. Both were hatched on August 5, 1902, from pupse taken by me from the natural nest on ' August 3, and they both mated in captivity on August 22, when seventeen days old, with kings a few days old, and of their own colony. As soon as they had mated I again isolated each, and each dropped her wings within a few days upon the floor of her solitary cell. A queen may defer mating for a year at least, and then mate with a king a year younger than herself, and may, later on, begin the laying of eggs. Light and warmth appear to be required for 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 601 stimulation of the king and queen to mating, and it may be that queens hatched late in summer do not mate until the next succeed- ing summer. A winged queen taken by me from the natural nest of the C colony, August 22, 1901, had no opportunity to mate until September 24, when I put into the artificial nest where she lived several kings of the H colony, just taken from the ground. These kings all died within a few days, and the queen probably did not mate during 1901, as she retained her wings and laid no eggs throughout the winter of 1901-1902. She had no association with any king between September, 1901, and July 6, 1902, when I put into the Petri cell where she was then isolated a king of her own colony, five days old. She at once seized him gently by a wing, and presently licked him from end to end. She could not have mated earlier than July 6, and may not have mated until August, when I put other kings and also workers, all of her own colony, into her cell. On August 20, 1902, she lost her wings, having worn them a year or more. She laid her first egg on August 24, four days after losing her wings. Another winged queen, also taken from the natural nest of the C colony on August 22, 1901, had no opportunity to mate until September 21, when I put into her habitation two kings of her own colony. She probably did not mate with either of them, for she retained her wings and laid no eggs throughout the winter of 1901-1902. There were no males in the nest where she lived from September, 1901, to July 13, 1902. On the latter date, after she had been isolated one month, I put into the Petri cell where she then lived a king of her own colony, and several workers. The king was but four days old, but may have mated immediately with the still winged queen. She lost her wings on the 10th of August, having worn them nearly a year since her capture. On the 14th of August she laid her first egg, and on the 20th she had eight eggs. Memory. — Have the ants an intellectual memory ? Experiment a. — In one of my artificial nests were four deiilated queens of the C colony, taken by me from their natural nest near Wood's Hole, Mass., September 7, 1900, with workers. On the 23d of September, 1901, I put into this nest some pupseof Formica fusca subsericea, and five days later one of these pupje hatched, and was permitted to live with the resident Stenammas. The 602 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., Formica was somewhat larger than either of the Stenamma queens, and was very active. She remained in association, at times, with these queens until November 28, a period of two months, and was then finally removed from their nest. Five and a half months later. May 11, 1902, I put the 'four queens into a clean Petri cell, and introduced to their cell a Formica fusca subsericea from Cen- tral Park, New York City. The introduced Formica exhibited great fear in the presence of the Stenamma queens, and made energetic efforts to escape from the cell ; but the queens showed neither fear nor dislike of the Formica, and never opened their mandibles when I forced the Formica to touch them. The fears of the Formica gradually subsided, and after two weeks' residence she would touch antenuse with the queens in most friendly fashion. The Formica was thereafter often huddled with the queens, and she lived with them until May 31, 1902, when the four queens were killed by an accident. The Formica survived and I put her into a similar cell with C colony queens that had never fostered a For- mica. These queens separately and together attacked the Formica and killed her after two days' persecution. It is possible that the odor of the Formica remained in the nest inhabited by the four Stenamma queens, and that they had not to exercise memory in the case. But the odor of the Wood's Hole Formica and that of the Central Park Formica was not identical, for I put Formica fusca subsericea of these two places together and fovmd that they fought each other to the death. Exjieriment b. — On the 22d of August, 1901, I sequestei-ed pupse and larvie from the natural nest of the C colony, and then segregated ants hatched therefrom between September 4 and Sep- tember 10. These segregated ants had no association Avith any other ant. On the 26th of September a large Formica fusca sub- sericea hatched out from a pupa that I had put into their cell Ihree days earlier, and it was kindly cared for by the little Stenammas, although it was four or five times their size. On the 6th of Octo- ber, the Stenammas being about one month old and the Formica ten days old, I separated them, putting the Stenammas into one clean Petri cell and the Formica into another. The inhabited cells were respectively cleaned once a week,* and were cleaned seven * The cells were cleaned, after temporarily removing the ants to another clean cell, by washing the cell and its enclosed sponge Avith 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 603 times. On the 24th of November, after fifty days of separation, I put the Stenammas, now only two in number, into a clean cell, and introduced the Formica. The Formica was ii| as complete a panic as could have been one of its kind that had never seen a Stenamma. She ran from the Stenammas, snapped at them when forced into proximity, and gave starts of terror when coming inadvertently into touch with them. The Stenammas, on the contrary, showed neither fear nor dislike of the big foster-child that had been returned to them. The fear manifested by the Formica gradually diminished, and after about two weeks together the Formica would voluntarily approach and touch antennae with the Stenammas. 1 then took two Stenammas of the same size and lineage as these fostering ants, placed them in conditions in all respects similar, and introduced this same Formica to their cell. The Stenammas at once attacked the Formica, and would have slain her had I not intervened. I then returned her to the fostering ants, and left her with them one week longer. I then repeated the separation of the two Stenammas and the Formica, again keeping them apart fifty days, and likewise clean- ing the two cells once a week. On February 5, 1902, I again reunited the three ants, and this time found that the memory of each species for the other appeared to be perfect. There was no manifestation of fear nor repulsion on eiiher side. Perhaps the increased age of the Formica, or her longer residence with the Stenammas previous to the second test enabled her to better remem- ber them. She died a natural death the 10th of February. In order to ascertain the existence of fighting qualities in these two Stenammas, I put into their cell aliens of their own species and found that they retained the habitual aversion of their kind toward strangers. On the 11th of June, 1902, the same two Stenammas, then much engrossed in the care of pupse, fiercely attacked Wood's Hole Formica fusca subsericea that I introduced into their cell. This Formica was not of the same colony as the one that they had fostered. These two Stenammas seem to have remembered for fifty days soap in hot water, soaking in boiling water, and rinsing in running water. A full description of the cells used in these experiments may be found in "A Study of an Ant," Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, July, 1901. 604 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., an ant of a different subfamily from themselves. They had never met any other ant of that subfamily. Experiment c. — Ofi the 23d of September, 1901, I put into an artificial nest containing queens and workers of the C colony some pupae of Formica Jmca subsericea, and on the 29th of September one of these pu^^se hatched, and continued to reside with the Stenammas, On the 20th of October I removed the Formica to a Petri cell, which was cleaned weekly, and I kept her there uutil November 24, thirty-five days, when I introduced to her cell two queens and four major workers from the nest in which she had been hatched. The Formica exhibited great fear, as these ants usually do when brought into the presence of Stenammas ; but the Stenammas appeared to be wholly friendly to the Formica. It is possible that the Stenammas have a better memory than have the Formicas, or it may be that her odor had continued to be manifest in the nest of the Stenammas, modifying their action in regard to their former associate. These Stenammas are very discriminating concerning the odor of all ants introduced into their habitation, whether it be of their own or other maternal lineage. — An example of the persistent aversion of these ants toward the odor of an alien community was given by the residents in two of my artificial nests. In nest M, ants of the C colony, captured September 7, 1 900, had reared during the summer of 1901 pupse introduced from the E colony, and had also reared from the pupa-stage two Formica fusca subsericea. The fostered Avorkers of the E colony remained in the nest; the two Formicas were removed December 1, 1901. On the 6th of June, 1902, I took all the ants, including queens and workers, in this nest and put them into a similar artificial nest inhabited by queens aud" workers of the C colony that had had no association with other ants since their capture from the natural nest, August 22, 1901. There was instant battle between the residents and the introduced ants, and the fighting continued during the three following wrecks, until all the ants reared from the E colony pup?e had been exterminated. In other nests, where no ants of alien lineage had been reared, ants of the C colony immediately affilated after two years of sepa- ration. That the colony odor and not personal acquaintance deter- mines this affiliation may be illustrated by a single example. On August 14, 1902, I had an artificial nest where were many 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 605 queens and workers with inert young, all taken from tlie natural nest of the C colony, and established in my nest on the 7th of the preceding June. Into this nest I then introduced a young worker, the offspring of a C colony queen and an E colony king, whose whole existence had been passed in an artificial nest that had been established by me August 22, 1901. The inmates of this nest had never since its establishment associated with outside ants, nor enter- tained alien offspring. The young ant was amicably received in the nest into which she was introduced, and was not once nabbed during the succeeding half-hour, while she moved about fearlessly among the hundreds of residents. Her having had an alien father did not make her less acceptable to her mother's blood-relations. The male parent does not influence the odor oj the progeny. — Ants reared from pupie segregated before hatching, never having asso- ciated in any wise with other ants, and having their own odor as their sole criterion, manifestly find that criterion duplicated in the odor of ants of about their own age, when these ants are of the same lineage as themselves on the maternal side, regardless of their paternity. The hereditary odor descends through the mother, and is unaffected by the father, whether he be of the same lineage as the mother or of an alien colon}-. The mother alone determines the intrinsic odor of her progeny. In August, 1901, I arranged eight new artificial nests, for the rearing of ants having a recorded parentage. Into four of these nests I put virgin queens of the C colony with kings of the C colony ; and into four of the nests I put virgin queens of the C colony and kings of either the E or the H colony. About fifty workers of the C colony were put into each nest to act as nurses to the expected young. During the ensuing year young was pro- duced in all of these nests, and with these young ants I made ex- periments, as recorded below, during the year 1902. The ants used in the experiments were, unless otherwise indicated, hatched from pupre that had been removed from the nest several days before hatching, isolated or segregated in a clean Petri cell, and never brought into association with any other ant previous to the time of use in the experiment. Such ants had, then, no criterion of cor- rect odor, other than that of their own bodies. Experiment a.— May 5. Into a clean Petri cell I put a worker twenty-five days old, the offspring of a C colony queen and an E 606 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., colony king. With this worker I put another, fifteen days old, whose parents were both of the C colony. The two affiliated at once. Experiment b. — May 10. Into a Petri cell occupied by three workers, from seven to twelve days old, the progeny of a C colony queen and an H colony king, I introduced one by one three workers, from two to twelve days old, the progeny of a C colony queen and a C colony king. The affiliation was in each case immediate. They behaved toward each other as if they had always been associated. I then put the six young ants into an artificial nest inhabited by queens and Avorkers of the C colony, and they were adopted without examination. Experiment d. — June 11. Into a Petri cell occupied by five workers, from two to five weeks old, the progeny of a C colony queen and a C colony king, and engaged in the care of introduced larvse, I put a worker a few days old, the offspring of a C colony queen and an E colony king. The callow Avas adopted into the group without objection of any sort. Experiment e. — June 11. Into a Petri cell occupied by six workers, between one and three months old, the progeny of a C colony queen and a C colony king, and engrossed in the care of intro- duced larvse, I put a callow a few days old, the offspring of a G colony queen and an H colony king. The callow was immedi- ately accepted by the residents. Experiment f. — August 5. Into a Petri cell I put a callow two days old, the offspring of 0 colony parents, and hatched in one of my artificial nests that had been established just one year. With this callow I put one of about the same age hatched in the ances- tral wild nest of the same colony. The two callows instantly affi- liated, though they must have had different fathers. The following experiments show not only that the mother alone determines the intrinsic odor of her offspring, but that the heredi- tary odor is modified by the age of the ant. As in the foregoing experiments, the workers first i)laced in the Petri cells are those sequestered while in the pupa stage, having no acquaintance with any ant other than those of their own segregated group of workers. Experiment g. — February 23. Into a Petri cell occupied by two workers about one month old, the progeny of a C colony queen and a C colony king, I put two large and dark-colored workers 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 607 taken from the ancestral nest in the preceding August. Each of the two residents instantly attacked an introduced adult, and used their stings with such violence that 1, removed the adults through fear of endangering the lives of the junior ants. I then introduced two other workers, also of the C colony, but less deeply colored than those I had removed. The two parties avoided each other, always associating by twos during several hours ; but within a day they were huddled in one group. Three days later I put the four into a C colony nest, and they were all amicably received there. There was difference of odor, perceived at the first meeting, although all the ants were of the same colony. Experiment h. — May 9. Into a clean Petri cell I put five workers, from twelve to fourteen days old, the progeny of a C colony queen and an E colony king. With them I put five workers, four of them from twelve to twenty-five days old, one of them sixty-five days old, the progeny of a C colony queen and a C colony king. The two groups had each been segregated from the pupa stage of existence. All the nine ants that were less than twenty-six days old afliliated quickly. The oldest ant Avas repeatedly attacked by the ants that had not previously been associated with her, and was dragged unresisting from the group and cast down on the opposite side of the cell. After being thus ostracized for about three days she was received into full fellowship. As this ant had the same parentage and had spent all her life in segregation with the four younger ants that were at once accepted into full fellowship, her age appears to be the sole cause of her having been differently treated, and indi- cates a different odor due solely thereto. Experiment i. — June 14. Into a Petri cell occupied by three workers, ten days old, the progeny of a C colony queen and an E colony king, and engaged in the care of introduced larv?e, I put a worker, also ten days old, the offspring of a C col- ony queen and a C colony king. There was instant affiliation. I then introduced one by one ants of about the same age, but of diverse paternity, the mothers all being of the C colony, and all were amicably received, and were permitted to at once join in the care of the larvse. When the group numbered ten, I added from a nest of the C colony a queen and an adult worker. Both were at once attacked and dragged away to the side of the cell opposite the larvse. The queen was soonest tolerated, and within a day or 608 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., two was permitted to join the group ; but the adult worker was ostracized for eight or nine days. Experiment j. — June 16. Into a Petri cell occupied by two minims ten days old, the progeny of a C colony queen and a C colony king, and engaged in the care of inert young, I put two major workers from an artificial nest of the C colony. The majors were much older and stronger than the two resident ants, but they submitted to being repeatedly dragged by the minims away from the nursery, and Ihey were not allowed to join in the care of the young until after many days, one being ostracized until June 30, the other until July 4. Experiment k. — July 27. Into a Petri cell containing four workers, each twenty-three days old, the progeny of a C colony queen and a C colony king, and engaged in the care of introduced pupse, I put, one by one, five young ants, just taken from the natural nest of the C colony. Every one of these introduced ants was dragged to the side of the cell opposite the nursery, and were there cast down. If I lifted Ihe cover of the cell they were dragged outside it. I then chose callows from Ihe natural nest, and likewise intro- duced them one by one into this cell. All were received without sign of dislike. In a few hours or days all the ants Avere grouped together about the pupse. Experiment I. — On the 22d of August, 1901, I segregated pupse that hatched between August 27 and September 1, and I segregated the callows as soon as hatched, so that Ihey never associated with other ants. On the 25th of the following December, the ants being then four months old and fully colored, I put into their Petri cell a queen of their colony taken while still winged, and at the time when these ants Avere taken as pupte from the ancestral nest. This queen had since been kept in an artificial nest, with no other inmates than queens and workers of her own colony. The seques- tered ants at once attacked and dragged the queen, but did not maim nor kill her. They continued to drag her away from the inert young and to ostracize her for about ten days, and then they gradually accepted her company. This indicates that no vast amount of time, perhaps not more than some forty or fifty days, are required for modification of the odor of the individual ant. Other experiments invariably brought similar result. Whenever 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 609 ants are hatched from sequestered piipse, aud reared without associa- tion with older ants, they always drag old ants of their own line- age away from the inert young, and sometimes refuse for" many days to tolerate them near the nursery. The workers, on the other hand, never drag younger ants of their own maternal lineage away from the nursery, nor do they retaliate when the callows attack them. I have seen a very small pale callow tyrannize over a large deeply-colored adult for consecutive weeks. A cause for the hostility of one colony to another of the same spe- cies and variety is a difference of odor, coincident with difference of age in the individuals composing the colony. A queen, after mating, may settle in new ground, deposit her eggs, rear from them her progeny, and herself determine the in- herent hereditary odor of the colony, which will be the sanie for all ants of that queen's lineage hatched at about the same time. Such progeny may be separated aud kept segregated in sections for long periods, and the individuals of any section will at once affili- ate with those of any other section on reunion. The pupse may be segregated, and the subsequent affiliation of the ants produced therefrom will be equally complete, whether a queen be included in each division or not. The progeny of sister queens of the same age will instantly affiliate with each other or \nih. the aunt-queen, provided that the segregation of each division has been perfectly maintained, and that there is little difference in the age of the ants. Attacks made upon ants of the same lineage, when such are intro- duced into a segregated group, are more or less violent in proportion to difference of age between the residents and the introduced mem- bers. A group may rear successive broods, in successive seasons, from the eggs of the same queen, and these broods Avill from their earliest days to their latest recognize the odor of all the kindred with which they were associated during the first few days of active existence. Their standard of compatibility is then formed, and they will defend nest and young against the approach of all ants whose odor disagrees with that standard. It follows that ants in a nest containing queens and workers many years old would have a ■different standard from that of any more lately established nest, even though all were of the same lineage. This explains the fact 610 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept.^ that colonies apparently alike, and with nest-exits but a few feet apart, sometimes show bitterest hostility to one another. It also explains the fact that ants taken from the extremes of an ant-domain fifty yards in diameter, and kept apart for two years, amicably reunite, provided that no young has hatched in either segregated group. It furnishes also explanation of the highly variable behavior of the ants of the same lineage toward one another when brought together after segregation ; and it enables one knowing the exact conditions to accurately prophesy wdiat a given ant will do on meeting another given ant of her own lineage. In the following experiments, which are but a few examples from among many made by me in the summer of 1902 for the purpose of ascertaining the cause of hostility between colonies of the same species, all the ants were of the C colony, much used by me because of easy access to its populous natural nest. For the ants a year or more old, I used queens and workers of this colony that were captured by me on August 22, 1901, and that have since been kept by me in small artificial nests, where no pupa has been allowed to hatch, and to which no ant has ever been introduced from outside. When the ants did not differ in size or color sufficiently for me to thereby distinguish them, I marked those that I desired to observe.^ The ants depended upon to show the feeling of their kind toward such as were introduced, were all engaged in the care of inert young in Petri cells, where they had been for some days or weeks established as a family group. When I was about to use any such cell in experiment, I sometimes introduced an ant of an alien colony in order to ascertain the presence of fighters among the residents of the cell. Such aliens were always removed before the experiment. The ants could not carry intruders outside the cell, unless I lifted its cover. I therefore considered, in these experiments, the seizing and dragging of any ant away from the larvse pile and across the s I mark the ants upon the top of the abdomen using dried varnish, into which water-color paint has been rubbed before drymg. The var- nish is softened for immediate use by a drop of chloroform. The ant is "•ently held by the head until the chloroform has evaporated from the dab upon her abdomen. This mark often remains upon an ant several -weeks, and does not appear to influence her action nor that of her associates in the experiment. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 611 cell as equivalent to the casting out of that ant from the nest. I sometimes lifted the cover and allowed the resident ant to carry an intruder outside it. The Petri cells permitted more close and con- stant observation of the ants concerned than would have been pos- sible in any other residence. Experiment m. — On August 25, into a cell containing forty workers, hatched between July 4 and July 16 from pupse previ- ously segregated, 1 put one by one three workers, each twenty days old, also hatched from sequestered pupse, and also segregated to the time of the experiment. The introduced ants were all accepted without examination or attention. I then put in a queen, captured June 7, and since dealated. She undertook at once to sort the resident workers, and to carry some of them out of the cell. She was attacked by a resident and I removed her. I then put in an ant over one year old. She was seized and dragged across the cell, and this was repeated three times on her approach to the young, after whicli I removed her. I then put in another ant over a year old. Five residents attacked her at once and so violently that I rescued and removed her. I then put in a queen one year old. She was seized and dragged across the cell and I removed her. I then put in another queen of the same age and she was treated likewise. Experiment n. — On August 25, into a cell containing fourteen workers, all hatched on August 5 from segregated pupae, I put a marked ant less than thirty days older than the residents. She was accepted without examination. I then put in a queen hatched on the same day as were these residents, and since mated and dealated. She was instantly accepted into the ant-group. I removed her, and put in a queen one year old. She was three times dragged by two residents away from the young and across the cell, and I took her out. This queen had mated with a king of an alien colony, and had since reared progeny. I then put in another queen, a year old, who had mated with a king of her own colony, and had since reared progeny. She was likewise attacked and dragged. I put in adults of various ages, all more than a month older 612 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., than these ants, and all were attacked. In these attacks on older outsiders the marked ant was active. She had never before met old ants. Experiment o. — On August 25, into a cell where there was a queen who was hatched on August 5 among segregated pupce, and who was isolated soon after hatching, I put seven workers all under three days old. The eight ants at once snuggled together. Experiment p. — On August 26, into a cell containing fifteen workers, all hatched from segregated pupse on August 5, I put a dealated queen, also hatched on August 5. The workers at once accepted the queen. As these ants had never before seen a queen, they must have been guided in their acceptance of her by smell rather than by feeling. Feeling would have surely revealed a difference between the conformation of the newcomer and that of their habitual associates. After half an hour I removed this young queen, and put in a queen one year old. She was instantly seized and dragged across the cell. I took her out and put in a worker more than one year old. She was violently attacked and I removed her. I then put in an ant only a few days older than the residents. She was at once allowed to join in the care of the larvse. I then put in another dealated queen, also hatched on August 5, but since associated with older ants. She was nabbed and pulled, but was afterward licked, and in fifteen minutes was snuggled. I took her out and put in another queen one year old. She was attacked and dragged across the cell three times before I took her out. I then put in a worker about forty days older than the residents, but who had always been segregated with ants of her own age. She was attacked and dragged. Experiment q. — On August 26, into cell A, containing many workers that had hatched August 7 from pupse segregated August 3, and that had never since August 3 been protected from daylight, I put several workers that were also hatched on August 7 from pupjfi segregated August 3 in cell B, and that had always been kept in darkness. They affiliated instantly, and without mutual attention. I likewise put into cell B several workers from cell A, with the same result. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 613 At a later date, auts that had passed their whole pupa-stage in the light affiliated with those of the same age that had passed their whole pupa-stage in darkness, and vice versa. Experiment r. — On August 27 I put into a clean cell three queens, one captured, dealated, September 7, 1900; one captured winged, August 22, 1901, and one captured, winged, June 7, 1902. All were dealated at date. These queens had all at some time associated with queens older and younger than themselves, and they at once associated amicably with each other. 1 then removed from the cell the youngest of the three queens, and introduced one of exactly the same age as was she, but who had, during her twenty-two days of life, had no association with any ant older than herself. This young dealated queen constantly fled from the two older queens, and refused during two days to be driven or cajoled into touch with them. Meantime they snuggled each other voluntarily, though they had never before met. Experiment s. — On August 28, into a cell containing a score of workers, hatched August 5 from pupse sequestered August 3, I put, one by one, three workers of the same size and color as these resident ants, but twenty -one months older, having been hatched between the 13th and the 21st of November, 1900. Each of the visitors was seized and dragged. I took them out, and put into the cell, one by one, three workers, thirty-seven days old, and of the same size and color as the resident ants. Each of these visitors was received without seizure or nabbing. I then took them out and put in a queen hatched August 5. She was at once accepted. I removed her and put in a dealated queen hatched in June. This queen was nabbed, but she imme- diately set herself to the regulation of her new fainily, and she successively picked up and carried across the cell seven young ants. As fast as she brought the ants from the ant-group at the larvse- pile I removed them from the cell, and in half an hour she had settled in the midst of a serene family, where she appeared to be wholly acceptable. I then took her out, and without returnmg the rejected workers, I put in a queen a year old. This queen was attacked wi^h great violence by several residents together, and I removed her from the cell. 614 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., I then put in a queen that had lived in one of my artificial nests since September 7, 1900. She was likewise violently attacked, and I removed her. Large and small workers, a year or more old, also met with hos- tile treatment. The results from these and all other experiments recently made by me coincide with my observations during three years' study of this species, and confirm my view that the cause of that diversity of odor which characterizes diverse communities lies in the difference in the relative ages of the communities. The queen transmits her individual odor to her progeny, and it is probable, though not proven, that in successive seasons the odor of the progeny varies with the age of the producing queen, the odor being a product of metabolism. Effects of light and eolor upon the ant. — The haste with which the wild ants catch up their inert young and scurry into darkness whenever their nests are uncovered indicates great sensitivity to light. In the summers of 1901 and 1902 I reared ants from the larvae, letting them pass the whole pupa-stage in full daylight, both with and without ant-nurses, and I found that the ants thus reared had the same color and the same activities as had their congeners simul- taneously reared in darkness. Sir John Lubbock" has shown that the rays from which his ants withdrew were the ultra-violet, and Forel' has proven that his ants perceived these rays through the eyes. Accepting the results attained by these eminent myrmecologists, I undertook to give my ants opportunity for healthful living and for their ordinary domes- tic occupations in my glass nests, and at the same time to impel them to deliberate choice among the seven primary coloi's or some combination of these colors. ■ I therefore established newly cap- tured queens, workers and inert young in three sorts of dwellings, where my earlier experiments had shown that they could live com- fortably for long periods. I used the maze which is minutely described in my paper, ' ' Further Study of an Ant, ' ' and which is here represented in the drawing marked M ; a portable four-roomed nest, made for these experiments, and represented in the drawing ^ Ants, Bees and Wasps, pp. 211 to 217, Appleton & Co., New York, 1902. '' Experiences et remarques critiques sur les sensations des Insectes. Deuxieme partie, pp. 10-24. Como, 1900. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 615 marked N, and a score or two of Petri cells about teu centimeters broad and one centimeter deep. All these habitations contained flakes of sponge saturated with clean water, and were suitably supplied with morsels of food for the ants. In none of their resi- dences did I ever disturb the ants oftener than twice in a single day by any alteration of their environment. I put papers of vivid colors under the transparent glass floors of these habitations, offering always a choice between colors. In the maze four colors were presented; in the nest, three; in the Petri •cells, two. During two months of experimentation iu this line the ants never moved their young, nor themselves congregated upon one color in preference to another, nor did they in conse- quence of a change in the color of their floor, or of an interchange between black and white, ever remove from any spot upon which they had congregated. They gave no sign of regarding any quality in their floor other than its opacity, and the most vivid reds, greens and blues displayed there in full daylight failed either to entice or to agitate them. Their behavior was very different when colored glass was used for transmitting the light that entered their abodes. In all cases diffused, not direct, sunlight was used in these experiments. The walls as well as the roof of the dwelling Avere transparent, and the superimposed colored panes extended two inches beyond the walls, so that the chosen light entered from every quarter except through the floor, which Avas ahvays opaque white. This made the condi- tions nearly equal throughout the abode. The dwellings were placed upon a large table where the summer temperature was the same on all sides, and the diffused light from a large north window gave fairly equal illumination over the whole.* The ants were not affected by the intensity of the illumination from rays of longer wave-length than violet. — I repeatedly interchanged the panes over a Petri cell, one-half of which was covered by a pane that shut out all rays except a few red ones, and the other half by a pane transmitting much red light. During a residence of several weeks in this cell the ants showed no preference for the less intense light. I also covered one-half of a cell with a colorless pane, and the * These experiments were made at the Marine Biological Laboratory At Wood's Hole, Mass., in June, July, August and September, 1903. 616 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., other half of the cell with a dark-violet pane transmitting, as shown by the spectroscope, all the colors of the spectrum. I could scarcely discern the ants through the violet pane. But during a residence of several weeks in this cell the ants, after two removals from the colorless to the violet side, remained for many consecutive days under the transparent glass, and I repeatedly interchanged the two panes without causing the ants to remove from under the one or the other. The same indifference to the intensity of illumination was shown by ants placed in cells covered one-half with a double layer, the other half with a single layer of green glass; one-half with a double layer, the other half with a single layer of yellow glass ; or one-half with a double layer, the other half with a single layer of blue gljass. The relative proportions of the primary colors, from red to indigo, transmitted by the various colored panes varied greatly, as the spectroscope showed. But the ants apparently disregarded these proportions, and were hasty or deliberate in their action in direct ratio to the number of rays from the violet end of the spectrum. It is probable that ultra-violet rays were transmitted with the violet ones in all of my experiments. It must be constantly borne in mind that the ants are instinc- tively photophob. They always take shelter under an opaque covering when a choice is offered between darkness and any rays of light, even pure red. 1902. J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 617 Experiment 1. — June 8. I put into the maze four queens, fifty adult workers and a half-teaspoonful of larvse, and cov^ered the maze with colored panes, each covering one-quarter of the maze, from side to centre. Under the spectroscope the panes showed the light transmitted to be as follows : The red pane transmitted only red rays. The orange pane transmitted red, orange, yellow, green, blue. The green pane transmitted orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. The indigo pane transmitted yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. The ants spent thirty-eight days in the maze, and during that time made fifty settlements therein. Their first settlement, made by gathering the scattered larvae and forming a single group including all the queens and workers, was under the red pane. I then placed the indigo pane over the group, interchanging it with the red, and the ants at once removed from under the indigo pane, and again grouped themselves under the red. Whenever I put the indigo pane over them they sooner or later removed from its light and settled under another pane, the total result being that they settled twenty-nine times under the red pane, ten times under the orange pane and eleven times under the green pane. Not once did they move from under the red, orange or green pane to the indigo. In removing, they as often settled on the side opposite as upon a side adjoining their last place of sojourn. All other condi- tions remained unchanged, making it certain that their removal was due solely to the interchange of the panes. Their earliest removals from under the indigo pane were made in manifest haste, and were all made within a few minutes after 1 had interchanged the panes. But their haste gradually diminished, and on July 2, after the thirty-sixth removal, they remained several hours under the indigo pane before removing to orange. I changed the panes again at 6 o'clock P.M., putting them under indigo, and they passed the whole of July 3 under that pane, before removing to red on July 4. Their aversion to the violet rays, the only rays transmitted by the indigo pane that were not also transmitted by another pane, appeared to have then subsided, for they spent six whole days, from July 11 to July 16, inclusive, under the indigo pane. They appeax'ed to have learned that it furnished a safe shelter for them. 618 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEM'X OF [Sept. N. Experiment 2. — Using the artificial uest represented in the draw- ing, N", I put in, on June 9, five queens, thirty workers, and a teaspoonful of larvse, all taken from a wild nest on the preceding day. The food-roora was roofed with colorless glass, was used by the ants solely as a feeding place, and does not otherwise enter into the experiment. Over each of the three other rooms I placed a pane of colored glass — Red, transmitting red rays only. Yellow, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. Blue, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. , la 14 trials, occupying 14 days, the ants always removed from under the blue pane, whenever it was placed over them, and took shelter in another room. They removed 8 times to red, and 6 times to yellow. In this experiment they always departed from the room to which violet rays were admitted, and settled in one of the two other rooms. In order to secure an expression from the ants concerning partic- ular colors I used Petri cells, offering a ch lice between only two panes. I made each test with newly captured ants, including one or more queens, ten or more workers, and some inert young. Experiment 3. — Time, 40 days. Red pane, transmitting red rays only. Treble orange pane, transmitting red, green. The ants showed no preference for either side of the cell. ' The 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 619 paues were many times interchanged, but the interchange never caused their removal to the other side of the cell. The red and green rays were evidently as acceptable to them as were the red rays alone. Experiment ^.— Time, 53 days. Yellow pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. Green pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. The ants stayed indifferently through consecutive days under either pane, never removing from one side of the cell to the other on account of an interchange of the panes. They have therefore no preference for the red rays transmitted by the yellow pane. Experiment 5.— Time, 50 days. Red pane, transmitting red only. Yellow pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue, mdigo. The ants removed five times from under the yeUow pane to the red ; but were dilatory in their removals. They once waited three days, once four days, and once seven days, before removing. Experiment 6. — Time, 20 days. Yellow pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, greeu, blue, indigo. Blue pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. The ants always removed from under the blue pane within a few minutes after it was put over them. I interchanged the panes once or twice a day. In the first ten days they removed 20 times to the yellow side. The cause of the movement must have been either preference for the red or avoidance of the violet, and that the latter was the cause is indicated by Experiment 4. Experiment 7.— Time, 21 days. Indigo pane, transmitting yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet.^ Violet pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, greeu, blue, indigo, violet. The ants removed five times from under the violet pane to the indigo side of the cell, but their movements were dilatory, and they stayed, toward the end of their sojourn, six consecutive days under the indigo pane, and then six consecutive days under the violet pane. This indicates lack of preference for the red and orange rays transmitted by th'e violet pane. The violet pane transmitted more of the violet rays than did the indigo pane. 620 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [Sept. Experiment S. — Time, 21 Blue pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. Colorless pane, transmitting red, oi-ange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. The ants showed indifference concerning the two sides of the cell. They at first remained four days under the colorless pane, and when I then interchanged the panes, they remained ten consecutive days under the blue. I then reversed the panes again, and they remained under the colorless pane to the end of the test, seven days. This indicates that the red rays transmitted by the colorless pane presented no definite attraction to them. Experiment 9. — Time, 31 days. Yellow pane doubled, transmitting red, orange, yellowy green, blue, indigo. Green pane doubled, transmitting yellow, green, blue, indigo. A daily interchange of the panes caused no removal of the ants. The red and orange transmitted on the yellow side did not attract them. Experiment 10. — Time, 50 days. Blue pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. Double indigo pane, transmitting yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. The ants stayed consecutive days on each side, and never removed on account of an interchange of the panes. They have not, therefore, a preference for the orange rays transmitted by the blue pane. Experiment 11. — Time, 20 days. Treble orange, transmitting red and green. Double green, transmitting yellow, green, blue, indigo. After three dilatory removals to the orange side, the ants became indifferent to their location in the cell. Experiment 12. — Time, 30 days. Treble orange, transmitting red, green. Single orange, transmitting red, orange, yellow, gi'een, blue. The ants stayed indifferently under either pane, and never moved 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 621 on account of interchanges of the panes. This indicates no prefer- ence for orange, yellow and blue rays. Experiment 13. — Time, 45 days. Double orange, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green. Double green, transmitting yellow, green, blue, indigo. The ants moved once to orange on account of interchange in the panes. The green side presented so little of blue and indigo under the spectroscope as to make the presence of those rays doubtful. The ants did not seek the red rays. Experiment 14-. — Time, 43 days. Double orange, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green. Single green, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. The ants removed twice from green to double orange. This may indicate preference for red, or avoidance of the blue and indigo. The removals were dilatory, and the ants quickly became indifferent to the rays. Experiment 15. — Time, 35 days. Double orange, transmitting red, orange, yellow, gi'een. Yellow pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. The action of the ants was the same as in the last experiment, and showed that the cause of the removals was not a preference for red, but an avoidance of the blue and indigo. Experiment 16. — Time, 50 days. Single orange, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue. Double green, transmitting yellow, green, blue, indigo. The ants remained for consecutive days under each pane, and never removed on account of interchange of the panes. They have not, then, a preference for the red and orange transmitted by the orange pane. Experiment 18. — Time, 43 days. Single orange pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, gx'een, blue. Single green pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. The ants stayed consecutive days under each pane. I sometimes interchanged the panes twice a day, but such interchange never caused a change of location of the ant-group. The ants have not, then, a preference for red or for indigo. 622 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., Experiment 19. — Time, 22 days. Single orange pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue. Single yellow pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. The ants moved once to the orange side, and afterward stayed conseculive days under each pane. Interchanges of the panes never caused a removal of the ant-group. The ants have, then, but slight dislike for the indigo rays, the only rays in which the sides of the cell differed. Experiment 20. — Time, 65 days. Orange pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue. Violet pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. The ants removed hastily from under the violet as often as inter- change of the panes was made, one or twice a day, for about twenty days. Thereafter they became indifferent to the violet rays. Their' action indicates instinctive fear of the short w'ave- length rays, a fear that subsides with experience. Experiment 21. — Time, 50 days. Green pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. Blue pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. The ants withdrew in haste from under the blue pane. 1 interchanged the glasses once or twice a day, and their removal from under the blue pane was speedily made, until about twenty days had elapsed, when they became dilatory in their removals and remained sometimes several days under the blue pane. Experiment 22. — Time, 40 days. Green pane, transmitting orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo. Violet pane, transmitting red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. The ants removed from under the violet pane and settled under the green pane as often as I interchanged the panes, once or twice a day, up to the twenty-fifth day, when they became dilatory and manifested increasing indifference to their roofing. The red rays did not neutralize the effect of the violet ones. An analysis of the results of these experiments shows that the ants manifested no liking for any of the rays of light. If obliged to stay in light rays of some sort, the rays of longer wave-length 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 623 are preferred to those of shorter wave-length. Dividing the spectrum, as we know it, into red, green and violet, we might say that to the ants' eyes red and green are most like the darkness that they prefer, and that violet is to them most luminous; or that the red and green are less visible to them than is the violet. In this regard the eyes of the ant appear to be the reverse of our own. Our eyes perceive in the spectrum three fundamental colors — red, green and violet. The eyes of the ant may perceive there only two fundamental colors— one made up of the red and green rays, the other of the violet and ultra-violet rays. After the experiments above recorded were completed, I put five queens and about three hundred workers, from a colony freshly brought from its natural nest, into each of five similar artificial nests, having opaque floors and walls and colorless glass roofs. The first nest I covered Avith cardboard, making its interior dark. The second I covered with panes transmitting only red and green rays, and in this the ants disposed themselves through the compart- ments in about the same way as did those in the first, the dark, nest. Over the third I put panes transmitting yellow, green, blue and indigo rays, and in this the ants disposed themselves with considerable regard to the shade afforded by the sides and partitions of the nest. Over the fourth I put panes transmitting only the rays at the violet end of the spectrum, and in this nest the ants disposed themselves with the same manifest effort to avoid the light as they did in the fifth nest, which was covered with colorless glass. Interchanging the panes caused the ants to rearrange themselves in accordance with the above scheme of relationship to the light. Bearing in mind the fact that the ants showed no preference for red alone over the red and green (Experiment 3), it appears that the eye of the ant is not well adapted to the reception of light -rays whose wave-length is longer than in the violet rays ; that it receives blue and indigo more perfectly than red, orange, yellow and green ; and that there is a sudden increase of luminosity in the light-rays at that point in the spectrum where violet begins for our eyes. The ants may discern colors, and yet have no preferences among the colors discerned. Color is determined by the wave-length in the light-ray, and since the ants discriminate between rays of different wave-lengths, they probably perceive color in the rays. 624 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., Sensitivity to the length of the wave indicates perception of color. They certainly discern white. Last year, when some of my Sten- iimmas were intent upon the carrying of white pupse through the maze into their nest, I dropped among the pupse a few bits of white cord, cut to the size of the pupse, and several ants picked up and carried bits of the cord a part of the way to the nest. They must have been deceived by the color, and must have lifted the bits of cord without smelling them, and on account of their color alone. All my experiments emphasized the fact that the ants gradually lost their fear of the light, or of any modifications of it to which they were long exposed. Ants hatched in the light, or hatched under violet or blue glass, and anls hatched in darkness and but a day or two old, all behaved under the colored panes exactly as did adult ants taken from the natural nests, showing that the withdrawal from light is instinc- tive, and that the instinct manifests itself from the beginning of the active life of the ant. I sequestered pupse, and then segregated the ants hatched therefrom, and found that these ants, that had never associated with any other ants than those who had, like themselves, always lived in a Petri cell, behaved the same in regard to light-rays as did ants from the wild nests. The ant behavior in regard to light-rays is not the result of instruction from nor imitation of experienced elders. I also repeated many of the experiments with ants five, ten and twenty days old, as well as with ants a few months old, reared in artificial nests, and found that thir- instinct prevailed at all ages, and over any sort of rearing. There was, however, a difference in the times within which ants of different ages become accustomed to the light-rays. The younger the ants the more quickly they ceased to move to the opposite side of the cell when I interchanged the panes. The action of the ants when without inert young was essentially the same as when they had the care of eggs, larvse and pupse. The advantage gained in the experiments by the presence of the young was that the ants then reacted more speedily and definitely to the light-rays. The ants always grouped themselves upon or near the young, and there was so little of straggling that it seemed useless to count the few stragglers when reckoning results. The behavior of the ants toward the light-rays was the same whether queens were or were not present. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 625 The withdrawal of the ants from the violet rays may have psychological relation to rain, or to some form of water. Four times when I put ants into cells of which one-half was covered with blue glass, the ants caught up their inert young and piled it all on top of the food enclosed in the cell, as if to raise the young out of the wet. This action on their part was so extraordinary as to cause me to make record of it. The ants living in my other Petri cells during the past two years have always assembled the young on the side of the cell opposite the food, and have in no case laid live larvae or pupae on the food-pile. The plasticity of the ants is remarkably shown in their gradu- ally learning to stay where they were never disturbed by me, under ravs from which their instincts at first withdrew them. 40 626 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., October 7. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Eight persons present. A paper entitled " Three New American Bats," by James A. G. Rehu, Avas presented for publication. The deaths of Major J. W. Powell, a correspondent, and of Charles H. Hutchinson, a member, were announced. October 14. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair. Twelve persons present. A paper entitled " Additional Observations on the Strand Floi'a of New Jersey," by John W. Harshberger, Ph.D., was presen-ted for publication. October 21. Mr. Charles Morris in the Chair. Eleven persons present. A paper entitled "A Collection of Birds from Sumatra, obtained by Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller," by Witmer Stone, v^as presented for publication. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 627 October 28. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice -President, in the Chair. Twenly-three persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : " A List of the Reptiles and Batrachians in the Harrison-Hiller Collection from Sumatra," by Arthur Erwin Brown. " Studies on the Habits of Spiders, particularly those of the Mating Period, ' ' by Thomas H. Montgomery, Ph. D. " Birds of the Seskiyou Mountains, California: A Problem in Distribution," by Malcolm P. Anderson and Joseph Grinnell. In compliance Avith the recommendation of the Committee on the Hayden Memorial Geological Award, the medal was conferred on Sir A^rchibald Geikie, D.Sc, LL.D., late Director- General of the Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ireland. Archibald Geikie was born in Edinburgh, the 28th of Decem- ber, 1835, the youngest son of James Stuart Geikie. He was educated in the schools of his native city and, after graduation from the UniverRity of Edinburgh, he entered the Geological Sur- vey of Scotland at'the age of twenty years. Three years later, in 1858, he published his first book, entitled The Story of a Boulder ; or Gleanings from the Note-Book of a Field Geologist. The work of the Geological Survey was largely confined to mapping, the first general geological map of Scotland being published in 1862. While this map was issued under the direction of Sir Roderick I. Murchison, a large part of the work was contributed by Geikie. In 1867, at the age of thirty-two, Geikie was appointed Director of the Geological Survey of Scotland. All succeeding maps of the survey of Scotland were issued under his supervision, many of them being prepared by himself. Somewhat before this period he had begun to publish papers on physiographic geology, his work on The Scenery of Scotland, Viewed in Connection with Its Physical Geology, appearing in 1865. Subsequent papers deal with the effects of glaciation, modern denudation and other physiographic processes. In 1871 he was elected Murchison Professor of Geology and Mineralogy in the University of Edinburgh, The methods of geological surveying were carefully cuitivattKl by Geikie, the results of his experience being given to the world in his Outlines of Field Geology (187(i), which has gone through five editions, the last appearing in 1900. In the vear 1882, after serving on the Geological Survey of 628 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., Scotland for twenty-seven years, during fifteen of which he was Director, he was appointed Director-General of the Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ireland and Director of the Museum of Practical Geology, Jermyn street, London, which positions he held until his resignation from the Survey in 1901. He was knighted in 1891. In 1879 he was selected to write the article on Geology for the Encydopcedia Britannica, 9th ed. His Text-Booh of Geology, generally recognized to be the best presentation of the subject in any language, was issued in 1882, the second edition in 1885 and a third edition in 1893. His most important piece of research work, The Ancient Volcanoes of Great Britain, was published in 1897. The following were ordered to be printed : 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 629 CONTRIBUTIONS TOWARD A KNOWLEDGE OF THE ORTHOPTERA OF JAPAN AND KOREA, I.-ACRIDID^. BY JAMES A. G. REHN. The specimens which form the basis of this oontributiou are con- tained, in the collection of the Academy, and are principally from three sources : 1. A series . presented by Dr. H. C. Wood, simply labeled Japan, but in all probability from Yeso, as all the forms show Siberian affinities. 2. An excellent series from Kioto, purchased by the Academy from Mr. Y. Hirase. 3. A small series from Yokohama, contained in the Rehn Col- lection. Family ACRIDID^. Subfamily Acrydiinse {Tettigince Auct.) Acrydium japonicum (Bolivar). 1889 Tlettix] japonicus Bolivar, Ann. See. Ent. de Belgique, XXXI, p. 263. Four specimens, 3 males, 1 nymph. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood. Subfamily AcridinaB {Truxalinm Auct.)- Acrida nasuta (Linnaeus). 1758. iGryllus'] {Acrida) nasutus Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., X ed.,p. 427. Fifty-six specimens, 25 males, 28 females, 3 nymphs. Chemulpo, Korea. Dr. W. H. Jones (7). Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood (7). Yokohama, Japan. Rev. H. Loomis (7). Rehn Collection. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase (35), Nos. 14 and 15. Both extreme color phases of this species are represented in the series, with many intermediates exhibiting a complete transition from the uniform green to the ochraceous and umber form. Parapleurus fastigiatus n. sp. Types, d and ? , Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood. Allied to P. alliaceus (Germar), but differing in the greater ex- 630 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., tension of the preocular portion of the head (thus producing an extended frontal cost a and triangularly acuminate fastigium), and in the lesser development of the mediastine and scapular area of the tegmina. No relationship exists with P. fasciatus Brunner/ which approaches Duronia in possessing partial lateral caringe. 6". — Head with the vertex tumid, a slight longitudinal sulcus being presenl ; fastigium considerably produced, excavated, apex narrowly truncate, the lateral carinse well marked, only a trace being visible of the median carina; frontal costa constricted below the ocellus, strongly expanded veutrad, sulcate throughout the entire length, punctate in the dorsal portion ; eyes rather promi- nent, ovate; antennae slightly depressed, twice as long as the head and pronotum. Pronotum subcylindrical, cephalic border sub- truncate, caudal rotundate, median carina distinct, cut about the middle by the transverse sulcus; lateral lobes equally long as broad, the ventral margin deeply sinuate cephalad. Tegmina rather elongate, extending a considerable distance beyond both the abdominal apex and the hind femora; mediastine and scapular areas elongate, not dilated. Mesosternal lobes separated by an interspace much longer than broad ; metasternal lobes almost con- fluent. Subgenital plate acuminate, possessing a distinct keel on the dorsal surface. Posterior femora slender, genicular lobes rotund-angulate; tibise not equaling the femora, bearing twelve spines on the external margin, ten to eleven spines on the internal margins. ?. — Head with the fastigium rather broad, obtuse-augulate, the apex narrow]}^ truncate, excavated but with no trace of a median carina; frontal costa constricted below the ocellus, moderately expanded ventrad, shallowly sulcate throughout the entire length, punctate dorsad; eyes of medium size, ovate; antennae slightly longer than head and pronotum. Tegmina slightly exceeding the apex of the abdomen. Mesosternal lobes separated by an inter- space subquadrate in outline ; metasternal lobes considerably sep- arated by a rectangular interspace. Posterior tibiae with ten to eleven spines on the external and eleven spines on the internal margins. General color (specimens taken from spirits and dried) dull yellowish-brown; postocular streak blackish, this streak extending J Rev. Syst. Orthopt., p. 127. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 6(31 to the middle of the tegmina, in scapular area of the latter whitish; genicular arches aud the tips of the spines on the poste- rior femora black. Meamrements. -, ^ o V Length of head aud body, 20 mm. 29 mm. Length of pronotum, 4 " 5 " Length of tegmina, 18 " 22 " Length of hind femora, 13.5 " 16 " Total number of specimens examined 4, 2 males and 2 females. Chrysochraoii japonicus Bolivar. 1898. Chrysochraon japonicus Bolivar, Aqu. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Geneva, XXXIX, p. 82. Two specimens, c? and ? . Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood. Chorthippus- latipennis (Bolivar). 1898. Stenohothrus latipennis Bolivar, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat- Genova, XXXIX, p. 83. Eighteen specimens, 4 males, 13 females, 1 nymph. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase (9), No. 17. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood (9). This species was described from Korea aud Yamada, Hondo, the latter locality being on the east coast not very far from Kioto. Aiolopus^ tamulus (Fabricius). 1798. [Gryllus'\ Tamulus Fabricius, Entom. Syst., Suppl., p. 195. One female. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase. As already pointed out by Brunner,* this name far antedates tricoloripes Burmeister. Mecostethus magister n. sp. Type, cf. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood. This species appears to be closely related to the North Americau 3f. lineatus (Scudder), but differs in the greater size, the more sharply defined and constricted frontal costa, the comparatively ='This name, used by Fieber [Lotos, III, p. 100, May, 1853), should replace Stenohothrus Fischer on the grounds of priority. ^ As in the case of Chorthippus, this name has priority o\ev Epacromia Fisclier. *^ Revision du Syst. Orthopt., ]). 138. 632 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [Oct. , shorter wings, and in the carination of the ventral surface of the subgenilal plate. No relationship appears to exist with the Euro- pean Mecostethus grossus (Linn.). Head moderately prominent, the frontal costa forming a very marked angle at the junclion with the fastigium ; fastigium pro- duced, the median and lateral carinse well marked, and all termi- nating at the narrowly truncate apex ; frontal costa slightly expand- ing ventrad, sulcate throughout, the margins ■ slightly constricted at the ocellus; eyes large, ovoid, moderately prominent; antennse depressed, very much longer than head and pronotum. Pronotum rugulose ; cephalic margin truncate, caudal margin obtuse-angulate, lateral carinse apparent only on the cephalic margin of the prozona, niedian carina well developed, uniform, severed by the transverse sulcus which crosses slightly caudal to the middle ; lateral lobes with the ventro -cephalic angle rounded, tegmina exceeding the caudal femora. Mesosternal lobes separated by a space sub- quadrate in outline ; metasternal lobes very narrowly separated caudad. vSubgenital plate strongly produced, the caudal portion subhastate in outline, bearing a marked longitudinally disposed carina on the ventral surface. Caudal femora slender, genicular lobes rounded ; tibise almost equaling the femora in length, bearing 12-13 spines on the margins. Color (specimen from spirits). — General tint dull grayish -brown, eyes, postocular streak and lateral lobes of the pronotum reddish- brown. Ulnar area and extremity of the tegmina blackish, this color also suffusing the genicular region of the caudal femora and tibiae as well as the distal extremities of the latter. Scapular area of the tegmina whitish. 3Ieasurenients. Length of head and body, 28.5 mm. Length of pronotum, 6.5 " Length of tegmina 27 " Length of hind femora, 19 " Subfamily CEdipodinae. CEdaleus nigrofasciatus (DeGeer). 1773. Acrydium nigrofasciatum DeGeer, Mem. Ins., Ill, p. 493, PI. 41. fig. 5. A series of 90 specimens of this very variable species. The following localities and sources were represented in the series: 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 633 Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood (4). Yokohama, Japan. Rev. H. Loomis (30), Rehn Collection. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase (54), Nos. 10 and 23. Chemulpo, Korea. Dr. W. H. Jones (2). With the extensive series examined ample opportunity was pre- sented for studying the range of variation exhibited by this species. Several of the types would be regarded as distinct, if it were not that the extremes and intermediates occurred in the same locality, The variations have been studied under two heads — structure and coloration. Sti'ucture. The most peculiar and the most unusual structural form of this species is that in which the cephalic portion of the dorsal aspect of the pronotum is strongly inflated or bullate. Four specimens in the series illustrate this singular phase, between which and the normal condition no intermediates were examined. Kioto and Yokohama were the localities represented in the four specimens. The other gi-eat structural difference is in the median carina of the pronotum. In the majority of cases it is straight or very slightly arcuate, with a slight incision at the transverse sulcus ; in some cases it is much more arcuate on the prozona than in the metazona; in a few (7) it is highly arched, not notched by the transverse sulcus. The specimens belonging in the latter category are all from Yokohama. Examples of this species are found both subbrachypterous and macropterous. Coloration. The two general types of coloration, the brown and green, as pointed out by Saussure, are present in the series, many representa- tives of each, and a great number of intermediates showing what a wide range this broadly diffused species has in the color scheme. The extreme green phase has the base color of the head, prono- tum and dorsal aspects of the closed tegmina and caudal femora, as well as portions of the pleurse rich grass green, the lateral por- tions of the tegmina basally of a chocolate tint marbled with cream, the overlying lint being grouped into transverse bai-s anteriorly. The extreme brown phase is of a general dull umber tint, the 634 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., maculations of the tegmiua and posterior femora (these parts being uniform in the green phase) being brownish -black. Between these two extremes are found many intermediates repre- senting almost imperceptible gradations. Many individuals show variations which are individual or restricted to a comparatively few examples. The most important of these appear to be worthy of note. The presence of four converging light lines on the pronotum somewhat in the form of a cross These lines are present only in the brown phase, or closely related intermediates, and in some specimens are strongly marked, but as a rule are but faintly so. In DeGeer's original figure of this species (PI. XLI, fig. 5) this pattern of coloration is repi-esented, though in rather a crude manner. The blending of the chocolate marbling on the lateral portions of the tegmiua to form transverse bars is also a noticeable character. This latter phase is mainly found in the green type. (Edaleus infernalis Saussure. 188 4. (E\daleus'\ infernalis Saussure, Prodromus ffidipodiorum. p. 116. Three specimens, 1 c? (?), 2 females, Japan. No further data. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase. One specimen is apparently a male, but the tip of the abdomen is missing. Pachytylus migratorius (Linnjeus). 1758. [ Gryllus'] (Locusta) migratorius Liunreus, Syst. Nat., X ed., p. 432. One female. Chemulpo, Korea. Dr. W. H. Jones. Pachytylus oinerascens (Fabricius). 1793. [ Gryllus} cinerascens Fabricius, Ent. Syst., II, p. 59. Three specimens, 1 male, 2 females Chemulpo, Korea. Dr. W. H. Jones (2). Chefoo, China. Dr. W. H. Jones (1). Trilophidia annulata japonica Saussure. 188S. Trlilophidia a/i/iulata] var.japowica Saussure, Addit. Prodr. (Edipodiorum, p. 54. Four specimens, 2 males, 2 females. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase, No. 28. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. <'>35 Subfamily Pyrgomorphinse. Atractomorplia bedeli Bolivar. 1884. Atractomorpha Bedeli Bolivar, Monografia de los Pirgomor- finos. p. 69. Thirty-two specimens, 9 males, 20 females, 3 uymphs. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood (3). Yokohama, Japan. Rev. H. Loomis (2). Rehu CoUection. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase (27), Nos. 20 and 21. One specimen from Kioto differs from the usual form in having the Avhole superior aspect of the insect speckled with blackish- brown instead of being uniform greenish. In the males the supe- rior surface of the abdomen is bright carmine. Subfamily Locustinae (Acridiinm Auct.). Oxya velox (Fabricius). 1793. lOryllns] velox Fabricius, Entom. Syst., II, p. 60. Nineteen specimens, 10 malei, 9 females. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase. Nos. 18 and 19 (part). As noticed by Brunoer,'^ this species, which usually passes as hyla Serville, should bear the name given above. Oxya vicina Brunner. 1893. Olxyal vicina Brunner, Rev. du Syst. des Orthopteres, p. 15'i. Thirty-one specimens, 16 males, 15 females. Yokohama, Japan. Rev. H. Loomis (4), Rehn Collection. Kioto, Japan. Y. Hirase (27), jSTos. 18 and 19 (part). This species is very closely allied to 0. velox, but differs in several characters which, while not striking, are sufficient to differ- entiate it with little, trouble. As ]?runner has simply given a key and a brief description of this species, the notes made after a comparative examination with specimens of 0. velox may be of interest. The ventral surface of the last segment of the abdomen in the femah; of vicina is longitudinally bicarinate for the greater part of its length; in velox this is smooth. The basal portion of the mediastine area of the tegmina in the female of vicina is moder- ately expanded, the margin gently rounded; in velox this section is but^slightly more developed, but the greatest depth is caudal and not median, while the margin is abruptly excavated posteriorly, quite different from the gentle curve of vicina. 5 Revision du Syst. des Orthopteres, p. 152. 636 PROCEEDINOS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., The tegmina in velox always exceeds the caudal femora in length, while in vicina they do not equal it. This is apparently the only method of distinguishing the males of the two species. Another rather interestmg character noticed is that in velox the dorsal aspect of the pronotum is uniform wood-brown, while in vicina it is greenish in all the specimens examined but one. Fab- ricius with little doubt had velox as restricted by Brunner, as his description particularly mentions the brown surface of the pro- notum. Loousta^ japonica (Bolivar). 1899. Acridium Japonicum Bolivar, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Geneva, XXXIX, p. 98. Twenty-four specimens, 15 males, 9 females. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood (1). Yokohama, Japan. Rev. H. Loomis (23)-, Kehn Collection. This species possesses a dull, uniformly colored phase of which three representatives are in the series examined. Burr' erroneously credits this species to Burmeister, probably through a slip of the pen. Coptacra foedata (Serville)? 1839. Acridium f(K datum Serville, Orthopteres, p. 663. Six specimens, 1 male, 5 females. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood. As these specimens have been immersed for a considerable time in spirits, little can be determined on comparison with Serville' s description. It is mainly by the elimination of C. prcemorsa Slal, of which cyanoptera Stal and annulipes Bolivar appear to be synonyms,® and which possesses a non-sulcate frontal costa, that we arrive at some idea of the relationship of the specimens. Ser- ville's species has been recorded from Java, Burma and Cambodia. Podisma dairisama Scudder? 1897. Podisma dairisama Scudder, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XX, p. 114. Three males. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood. These specimens, while apparently referable to this species, differ * B^or the use of Locusta in this connection see Rehn, Bnt. News, XIII, p. 102. •> Ent. Month. Magaz., XXXIV, p. 29. ** Vide Brunner, Revision du Syst. des Orthopt., pp. 159-160. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. <^37 in the very short tegmina, which are in no case half as long as the tegmina, and in the quadrate interspace between the raesoster- nal lobes and excavated blunt tips to the cerci. Regarding the latter Scudder says {antea, p. 115) " blunt-tipped," but the figure (PI. VIII, fig. 7) gives no idea of the character of the apex as iound in the specimens here examined. Podisma mikado (Bolivar). 1891. Pezotettix Mikado Bolivar, Anales Soc. Espan. Hist. Nat., XIX, cuad. 3, p. 323. Eight specimens, 1 male, 4 females, 3 nymphs. Japan. Dr. H. C. Wood. This species was originally described from the female alone, and on comparing the description with my specimens it seems that they are identical. In the general form of the subgenital plate the male agrees with Podisma as restricted by Scudder,^ but in the caudal extension of the pronotum it agrees with Eupodisma Scudder,'" which has for ils type Podisma primnoa Fischer dc; Waldheim, from Transbaicalia and the Amur region of eastern Siberia. As the male has never been described, a few notes on the al)- dominal appendages may be of interest. Supra-anal plate obtuse-angulate at the apex, with a median shallow sulcus which is centrally constricted. Cerci tapering in the basal two-thirds, but apically expanded and excavated, the terminal portion slightly depressed. Furcula rounded, scarcely perceptible lobes. Subgenital plate very broad basally, with an acuminate subapical process; margin circular, entire. Eyprepocnemis plorans (Charpentier). 1825. Gryllus plorans Charpentier, Horte Entomologicfe, p. 134. Five females. Yokohama, Japan. Rev. H. l/oomis. Rehn Collection. ''Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XX, pp. 12 and 111. '» Ibid., pp. 12, 112 and 117. 638 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. THEEE NEW AMESICAN BATS. BY JAMES A. G. REH>*. Artibeus hercules n. sp. Tiipe. — Xo. o.7''^o. Collection of the Academy of Xatiirtil Science- of Philadelphia. Eastern Peru. Collected by John Haiixwell. Presented by E. D. Cope. General Characters. — Allied to JL. planirostris (Spix), but differing in the larger size, the much larger tooi and in numerous dental characters. Size. — This form is much larger than A. planirostris, its only ally. The foot averages at least two and a half millimeters longer. the forearm exhibits over five millimeters difference, and the tibia and metacarptis of the third finger are also more extensive, the former averaging three millimeters and the latter over six milli- meters difference. Foot. — The foot is very slender, in fact no wider than in A. planiro.?tris, though averaging over two millimeters longer. The foot of planirostris is heavA- and broad, the basal portion being the same length as in hercules, the difference in the latter being wholly in the length of the toes. Color. — ^These specimens have been in alcohol for a number of years, and as a result the exact color of the membranes and fur cannot be ascertained They appear much darker than in plani- rostris, but this is in all probability due to the preserving fluid. SL-ull — The single skull of A. hercules examined is that of a paratype and lacks the cranial portion. The anterior section of the skull is, as in accordance with the general charactei^, much larger and heavier, the palate being comparatively wider. The mandible has the coronoid process with a forward trend, which is not noticed in A. planirostris. Teeth. — Second upper premolar subquadrate in basal outline, quite different from the subpyriform tooth of A. planirostris, the internal node well developed and forming a conspicuous cusp. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 639 First upper molar broad, deep, the anterior inner angle more devel- oped than in A. planirostrU, which .species has this portion rounded. S Greene ; k. Myrica cenfera L. ; h. Cyperns nutiaUii Eddy ; w. Aiumophila arenaria (L.) Link ; d. Junnis sp. ley, the bottom of which is wet by the seepage of the ground water through the sand. The lower damp, marshy places are covered with a growth of Scirpus debilis L., from which arises Typha latifolia L. and a tall sedge, Scirpus sylvaticus L. The higher still damp areas support Cyperus nuttallii Eddy and Juncus sp., although these two plants are, as a rule, not found in association. The islands, or knolls of sand, which remain in the marshy area are held in situ by Myrica crrifera L., Ammophila arenaria (L. ) Link and Sulidago sempeivirens L. These three plants grow together side by side. Euthnmia caroliniana (L. ) Greene (^Solidngo tenui- folia Pursh. ) is found where the sand is damp. The sand marsh is 1902.1 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 647 fringed directly with Ammophila arermria (L.) Link, Solidago semp^rvirem L. and an occasional Mynca berry, while outside of these the slopes of the dunes are wind-swept and destitute of vegetation. In the degradation of a dune and the formation of a wind-swept hollow, we have a succession of societies which are approaching the ultimate state, that cf a mesophytic thicket. The transition, 'noticed in the dune complex at Sea Side Park, is from an intensely xerophytic association of species to marsh-dwelling xerophytps, and from these in turn to xerophytic shrubs and trees culminating in a mesophytic thicket filling the extent of the original dune valley. The annexed figure (fig. 4) illustrates a xerophytic marsh associa- a o^yenrcvsmncTocarpus (Ait.) Pers. ; b. Vaccinium corymbosumL Raf o. que cL nnnor (Marsh) Sarg. ; p. Andropogon T^ro^n^cus L. ; q. Kalnna I'u/nslifoha L. ; r. Chama'cypans thyoides (L.) B. b. F. , 8. Acer rubrum L. tion in the transverse dune complex at Sea Side Park, surrounded 648 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [Oct., by the encroaching army of shrubs and trees of xerophytic habit in the stage before the culminating one, the mesophylic thicket. The mesophytic thicket at South Sea Side Park occupies from what has gone before the hollows, or rounded depressions in the dune complex, and in its simplest make-up consists of the two following associations of species: One thicket examined consists of Pinus rigida Mill., Saxsafras sassafras (L. ) Karst., Vaccinium corymbo- 8um L., Juniperus virginiana L. , Chamcecyparis thyoides (L. ) B. S. P. and Myriea cerijera L., Another hollow contains Ilex opaca Ait., Juniperus virginiana L., Primus maritima Wang, while, as an undergrowth, associated together, are Rhus radlcans L. and Solidago sempprvirens L. Either before the final condition is reached, or after such thickets have been formed, the original condition of the dune complex may be restored by the diifling in of the sand into the depression, result- ing in a destruction of the long-established plant societies. Such vicissitudes in the life history of plant societies are not common, although examples are found occasionally on the New Jersey si rand. As a rule, before the final culmination of dune hollow history is reached, the elevated sand hills surrounding it are cap- tured by sand-binding plants, such as Ammophila arenaria (L. ) Link, but especially Had.-ionia tomentosa Nutt., which forms heaths about the depression, effectually preventing the transport of the sand and its deposition in the basin-shaped valleys adjoin- ing. In case the sand is transported, it begins to fill up the dune valley through the action of the oceanic flotsam and jetsam. The accumulation of such material in the storm-washed waterways between the dunes has gone on for ages. Before the advent of civilized man, the material washed ashore consisted of the trunks and limbs of trees, seaweed, leaves and the floatable objects carried to sea by the rivers. Since the occupation of the shore by white men, the flotsam and jetsam consists of a remarkable collection of nondescript rubbish, such as ship timbers, chips of wood, broken boards, spars of boats, sides of rowboats, old cots, mattresses, bottles, and, in fact, anything and everything used by man that is floatable and can stand the action of salt water for months at a time. Tlie piling up of such rubbish in the dune complex acts as an effective means of binding the sand and preventing its drifting. 1002.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 649 Soon about such objects the sand begins to form a dune, which grows larger and higher as the seasons pass until it is covered by the marram grass which binds it. A new washway may be made around this newly formed dune and the drift of previous years may be uncovered. The writer believes that if a trench were dug for a mile or two along the beach and paralleling the ocean, a dis- tinct stratum of rubbish would be revealed, if the excavation was made deep enough to reach the level above the ground water. The presence of so much wood undergoing decay accounts for the growth of the fungi found by the writer growing in the pure (?) sand of the dune complex. Astneus stellatus is common. Thelephora terrestris Fr. is found growing about the stems of Hud- sonia tomentosa Nutt. The puffball, Lxjcoperdon turneri E. and E., was found associated with these, while Clitocybe trullisata Ellis, found with largely developed base and small pileus, indicates, according to Prof. Peck who identified it, something unusual in the conditions of growth. Fuligo (^^thalium) septica Gmel., a myxo- mycete, is found commonly attached to decaying driftwood. Several new plants were found in 1902 growing in close con- tiguity with the objects drifted in through the oceanic spillways. Artemisia stelleriana Bess., reported previously from eastern Mas- sachusetts and Sandy Hook, was found. Ramex acetosella L. and Helianthus sp. were also collected in such situations. Only one conclusion can be drawn from their presence, namely, that their seeds were washed ashore with the rubbish mentioned. The thicket formation on the strand a mile below the Island Beach Life Saving Station perceptibly narrows its width. At the Island Beach Life Saving Station it forms a broad band of vegeta- tion, but below this point it is nowhere over a hundred yards wide and is confined to the more sheltered bay side of Barnegat pen- insula. Between the thicket formation and the narrow forest, the dune complex forms the dominant feature of the landscape, except where a slue or thoroughfare enters the beach from the bay side. At one place the strand is so narrow where this slue extends, that during heavy storms in winter the ocean and bay meet, cutting the strand into islands more or less separated from each other. Scirpus lacmtris L is the character plant along the edge of this slue, and where the slue becomes a marsh this plant forms pure societies. Where the ground becomes firmer, social groups of ^50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct.. Ilibi-^cus nioscheutos L. hold sway, while on the higher ground along Ihe borders Baccharls halimifolia L., Rhus copallina L. and Myrica cerifera L. occur. The importance of these slues and the corresponding channels or spillways cut into the dune complex during the heavy storms of winter, when bay and ocean may be said to unite, is evident upon careful consideration. Barnegat Bay and many similar ones along the Jersey coast are practically free from aquatic vegetation, such as Zostem marina L. , Fucus ve-iieulosus L. , VaUisneria spiralis L. , etc., which may contribute material to fill up the hay with vegetal detritus. The water in physical constitution oscillates between two extremes, salt and fresh. If the barrier between the sea and the lagoon is at times closed, so that the water in the bays becomes fresh, the result is that plants which are especially adapted to the production of salt marshes are killed by the fresh waters, while the occasional invasion of salt water during storms by way of the dune hollows and stronger tides through the inlets destroys the fresh- water plants, which might otherwise establish a swamp of their species. By these alternations some of the largest bays have been kept open, although in many places shallow in the extreme. Biippia maritima L., as it grows in Barnegat Bay, seems to be the only species which has succeeded in adapting itself to such fluctu- ating conditions. Tt has been referred to as the character plant of the shallower waters of that bay, and with the consideration of the above facts its probable future role in preparing the way for other adaptive hydrophytes becomes evident. LUDLAM AND SeVEN MiLE BeACHES. Strictly speaking, a beach is that part of a shore between high and low water, but in New Jersey the term is applied to what are really sea islands. Ludlam Beach, on which Sea Isle City is located, extends from Corson's Inlet to Townsend's Inlet. Except at a point below Sea Isle City, the beach is almost on a level, and during a violent storm it is likely to be entirely submerged, espe- cially at high tide. The dunes that exist below the town are much cut up. Ammophlla arenaria (L, ) Link dominates the fore- ground along the beach. The Myrica thicket exists on the dune complex associated with Baccharis halimifolia L. and Rhus radi- cals L. The highest dunes on Ludlam Beach, at Life Saving 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 651 Station ¥0. 34, have a few cedars and stand some distance back from the ocean front, and this disposition of dunes is most marked at Townsend's Inlet, where they encroach on the extensive salt meadows. Crossing Townsend's Inlet, Seven-Mile Beach is reached with the highest sea dunes on the whole New Jersey coast. This beach, settled upon in 1788," was not. investigated ecologically prior to the summer of 1901. A description of the flora was not incor- porated, therefore, in my paper published in 1900. Passing Avalon, the highest dunes (forty-two feet) are found close to the sea front. The dunes are held in place by Ammophila areivria (L. ) Link, and where the dune has encroached on the forest an occasional dead tree may be seen sticking out from the dune sur- face. Beyond Piermont, the district of Seven -Mile Beach studied by the writer is reached. The dunes fronting the ocean half-way between Stone Harbor and Piermont are rounded knolls about six to ten feet high covered with marram grass, Ammophila areiiari.a (L.) Link. The beach at low tide is extremely flat, and by the appearance of the sand may be divided into three zonal areas: (1) The firm, hard beach covered at high tide with salt water; (2) a higher beach with dry, loose, drifted sand held in place by drift- wood; (3) the wet beach filled at high tide by pools of water. The two latter areas comprise the middle beach of my previous paper. The upper beach is characterized by scattered patches of sea blite, Cakile edentula (Bigel.) Hook, and Ammodenia peploides (L.) Rupr , which forms rounded annual or temporary dunes. Here and there channels have been cut into the low dunes which are hardly worthy of the name, so that at high water the tide runs back to the meadows behind. Several of these cuts occur meeting marshy places behind, surrounded by dunes on the seaward side of the railroad. On the exposed sand of these depres- sions Portulaca oUracea L. grows, and on their edge creeps Stro- phoshjles helvola (L.) Britton. Just before the channel joins tbe marshy areas a large amphitheatre of barren wet sand is found, fringed by Scirpus lacmtrls L , Atriplex arenaria Nott., Sa/icoriiia herbacea L., Portulaca oleraeea L., outside of which character plants in concentric circles, Strophostyle-i helrola (L.) Britton, » The house built then stood in Piermont, at Second avenue and Thirty- first street. 652 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., Pluchea campJiorata (L. ) D.C, Cenchrus tribuloides L., Euphor- bia polygon ijolia L., Xanthium canadense Mill. This society may be said to be dominated by Strophostyles helvola (L. ) Briiton, In the standing water grows in hammocky places Spartina stricfa (Ait. ) Koth. These hammocks catch the blowing sand and are destined to become dune islands. Such a dune island in the midst of a marsh was covered by Spartina patens (Ait.) Muhl., killed on one side by the sand blast. Nearer Piermont, the physiography of the beach changes and the marked feature of this region is the height of the dunes and the absence of marshes and pools of water in the dune complex. The sea beach here is flat and about one hundred feet wide. The same zonal areas of lower and middle beach are present. The upper beach facing the dunes is flat and covered by Salsola kali L., Cakile edentula (Bigel) Hook and Xanthiwn canadense Mill. The frontal dune is ten feet high, sloping on the windward or land side. Upon it grow Ammophila arenaria (L ) Link., Cen- chrvs tribuloides L., Sieglingia purpurea (Walt ) Kuntze. The Myrica zone is absent in the hollows back of this dune. Its place is taken by the social groups of Strophostyles helvola (L.) Britton which forms dark-green mats. In the deeper hollows, Gerardia maritima Raf. and Euphorbia polygonifolia L may be called char- acter plants. The dune complex is undulating with rising hills of sand, covered on the seaward side by Strophodyles and on the land- ward slope are Solidago sempervirens L. and occasional clumj)s of Myrica cerifera L., not dominant; GEnothera humifusa Nutt., Baccharis halimifolia L. and Andropogon virginicus L. Across the area controlled by these herbaceous plants, the barren wind- swept zone is reached upon which no vegetation grows except the marram grass, Ammophila arenaria (L. ) Link, an occasional red cedar, and as rare plants, Phytolaca decandra L. and Euphorbia polygonifolia L. Dead trees stand up out of the sand over this zone, which is about six hundred feet wide. The high dunes (40-50 feel) are reached by gradual ascent after crossing the area devastated of its trees by the drifting in of the sand. These high dunes are abrupt on the landward side, where they encroach on the dense deciduous forest behind. This forest seems doomed to extinc- tion, if the past history of these dunes is followed in the dead trees of the wind-swept area. Not many years ago this forest was 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 653 some five hundred feet wider than at present, and by the relentless, unrestrained activity of the drifting sand it has been slowly, but surely, engulfed. It is a peculiar scene from the top of this dune: on the land side there is a dense mass of dark-green foliage, beyond which there is the broad expanse of green salt meadows with their bays and thoroughfares.* The sand which has formed these dunes comes fresh from the great ocean mill, ascends the surface of the dune and falls over its crest into the forest. When a stiff breeze is blowing it skims along like drifting snow, sufficiently strong to lacerate the skin, trimming the tops of the trees as flat as though shorn with shears The writer is of the opinion that the shapes of the trees along our coast is due more to the sand blast than to the direct action of the Avind. Gifford" describes the formation of these dunes: ** If the forests are what cause the dunes, by preventing the west wind from blowing back the sand, how did the forests form ? Single trees here and there, or groups of trees, which are clean underneath, so that the west wind sweeps through without serious interruption, do not cause the formation of dunes. In the course of time, however, a thicket forms under these trees. They become covered with grapevines, Virginia creepers and greenbriers. The birds and the wind scat- ter the seeds of many sorts of shrubs and bushes, such as Prunus marifimn, sweet gale, Baecharis halvmiJoUa, vie, until a dense forest is formed through which the west wind cannot penetrate, the consequence of which, in the course of time, is a dune, which in turn finally engulfs and kills the forest that had caused it." The forest which is being destroyed consists of the red cedar, Juniperus virginiana L., holly, Ilex opaca Ait., black gum, Nyssa sylvatica Marsh, wild cherry, Prunus serotina'Ehvh., Quercus lyrata Walt., hackberry, Celtis occidentalis L., willow oak, Quercus phellos L., swamp maple, Acer ruhrum L., persimmon, Diospyros virginiana L., pitch pine, Pinus rigida Mill., red mulberry, Morm rubra L., while as lianes may be mentioned Parthenocissus (Ampelopsis) quinquefolia (L. ) Planch., Vitis lahrusca L., Viti'i aestivalis Michx., Tecoma radicans (L. ) D.C., which reminds one of the dunes of the seashore of eastern Virginia, where the trumpet * A thorfeum capi^toem D. C. {PtUiramum capdla- ceum (Michx.) Hollick). Illd. Osmorrhiza sp. Vic. Chimaphila maculata [L.] Pursh. *VIe. GauHheria procumbens L. III+ Vaccinium corymbosum L. Vat' 'Sto«^^« ^^''^^'^^^"'^ ^' (^^^^^^"^ caroKn-.ant.m (Walt.) Briltou). Ilia III6. Trientalis americana Pursh. -rr t3 ir ^ Vat'. ^amoZw-s m^erandi L. {S. floribundus H. B. K.). Va. Sabbatia stellaris Pursh. *VII. Apocynum camiabinum L. *VI6. Asdeplas tuberosa L. Illet- ^scZe^ias incarnata L. • Illet^ Calystegia sepiuvi L. ( Convolvulus sepium L. ) . Illet- Cuscuta gronovii Willd. *VII. Jpomcea pwrpwrea Lam. [(L.) Roth]. jlXe. Ferfcena hastata L. *IIIet- Lycopus virginicus L. Illet- Monarda punctata L. Ille. Teucrium canadense L. *VII. Trichostema dichotomus L. VII. Datura sp. *VIIt- Solanum dulcamara L. Vllt- Solanum nigrum L. Vat- Gerardia maritima Rof. Vat- Gerardia purpurea L. Ille, Vat- Linaria canadensis [L.] Dumont. 664 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., *VII. Plantago major L. II, III. Diodia virginiana L. *IIIa, IIBt. Galium circcezans Michx. Ilia, IIBf. Galium pilosum Ait. VIc, Illaf. Mitehella repens L. ^!^IIIe, Yld. Samhucus canadensis L. Illf. Viburnum dentatum L. ^:^VIc. Sicyos angulatus L. Vllf. Achillea millefolium, L. Vllf. Ambrosia artemisicejolia L. VII. Ambrosia trifida L. VII. Anthemis cotula D. C. ^Vlcf. Aster diffasus Ait. {A. lateriflorus (L. ) Britton). Vaf. Aster subulaim Michx. Via. Aster tenuifolius L. Ye. Baccharis halimijolia L. *IIIet. Bidens bipinnata L. Ille, Yld. Cnicus horridulus Pursh. ( Cardans spinossissimus Walt.). *V€t. Eclipta alba [L.] Hassk. Yef. Erechtites hieracifolia Rof, *viit. Erigeron canadense L. {Leptilon canadense (L. ) Britton). *VI6t. Eupatorium teuerifolium Willd. (£. verbencefolium Michx.). ^i^IIf. Gnaphalium polvcephalum Michx. (G. obtusifoliufn L.). Gnaphalium purpureum L. *VIa. Illef. Heliantlius giganteus L. *VIet. Hieracium gronovii L. Yef. Jva frutescens L. *VIat. Kuhnia etipatorioides L. *VI6, Vcf. Liatris graminifolia Willd. (^Lacinaria cylindracea (Michx.) Kuntze). Va, Vef. Pluchea camphor ata [L.] D. C. *VIct. Prenanthes alba L. (Nabalus albus (L.) Hook.). *vit. Sericocarpus conyzoides Nees. (aS^. asteroides (L.) B. S. P.). Vlcf. Solidago odora Ait. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 665 *VIcf, Solidago puberula Nutt. Vaf . Solidago sempervirens L. Vaf. Solidago tenuifolia Pursh. (^Euthamia caroluiiana (L. ) Greeue). *VII. SoncJms oleraceus L. Vllf . Xanthimn strumarium L. Additional List of New Jersey Strand Plants. The data for the following list was obtained from two sources : (1) The collections made by the writer since 1900 on the New Jersey coast, and (2) the names on the sheets in the herbarium of the late J. Bernard Brinton, M.D., now at Biological Hall, Uni- versity of Pennsylvania. Those collected by the writer are . unmarked, while those plants collected by Dr. Briuton are marked by an asterisk. The orders are arranged according to the system of Engler and Prantl. Fungi. Fuligo (^Ihalium) septica Gmel. Sea Side Park. Gymnosporangium Ellisii Berk, (on white cedar). South Sea Side Park. Thelephora terrestris Fr. Sea Side Park. Clitocybe truUimta Ellis. Sea Side Park. Polyporus versicolor Fr. South Sea Side Park. Astrmus stellatus. Sea Side Park. Lycoperdon turneri E. and E. Sea Side Pai'k. Musci. Folytrichum commune L. Island Beach Life Saving Station. Ophioglossace^. ^Botrychium dissectimi Spreng. Ocean Beach. ^Botrychium obliquum Muhl. (B. lunarioides var. obliquum). Ocean Beach, Cape May. Lycopodiace^. Lycopodium carolinianum L. Island Beach Life Saving Station. 166 proceedings of the academy of [oct. , Conifers. Chamcecyparis thyoides (L. ) B. S. P. (C. sjjhceroidea Spach.). Island Beach Life Saving Station. Typhace^. '^Typha angustifolia L. Cape May. Gramine^. ^Andropogon furcatus Muhl. Anglesea. ^Elymus canadensis L. Anglesea. ^Panicnm dichotomum L. Ocean Beach. Cyperace^. ^Carex muhlenbergii Schk. Anglesea. ^ Car ex festucacea Willd. (C. strammea var. brevior Dewey). Avalon. ^Cyperus filicubnis Vahl. Atlantic City. "^Cyperus eylindricus (Ell.) Britton (C Torreyi Britton). Angle- sea. ^Eleocharis palustris glaucescens (Willd.) A. Gray. Anglesea. ^Eleocharis rostellata Torr. Cape May. Scirpus sylvaticus L. ^Stenophyllus capillaris (L. ) Britton (Fimbrystylis capillaris A. Gray). Anglesea. Lemnace^. Lemna minor L. Wildwood. Iridaceje. Iris versicolor L. Sea Side Park. Orchidace^e. Pogonia opkioglossoides (L. ) Ker. Sea Side Park. Fagace^. Querciis alba L. Wildwood. Ulmace.e. Celtis occidentalis L. Piermout. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 667 MoPvACE^. Morus rubra L. Piermout. Broussonetia papyrifera (L. ) Vent. Sea Side Park, Piermont. POLYGONACE.E. ^Rumex jycitientia L. Avalon. ^Rumex vertieillatus L. PHYTOLACCACEiE. Phytolacca decandra L. Piermont. AlZOACE^E. Mollugo verticillata L. Sea Side Park, Piermont. PORTULACACE^. Portulaca oleracea L. Stone Harbor. Crucifer^. Lepidium virginicum L. Sea Side Park. ROSACE/E. ^Geum canadense Jacq. ( G. album Gmel. ). Pyrus mains L. Sea Side Park (planted). ^Rubus villosus Ait. Anglesea. Leguminosje. ^Bradburya virgiuiana (L. ) Kuntze ( Centrosema virginianuyn Benth. ). Anglesea — the only station in New Jersey. Gleditschia iriacanihos L. Sea Side Park. Strophostyles umbellata (Muhl. ) Britton (S. peduncularis Ell). Sea Side Park. iLICACEiE. Ilex glabra (L. ) A. Gray, Sea Side Park. ACERACE^. Acer saccharinum L. J^Acer dasycarjmm Ehrh. ). Sea Side Park (planted). fiH^ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., Hypericace^. ■^Hypericum adpressum Bart. Cape May. CiSTACE/E. ■^Lechea racemulosa Michx. Barnegat. Cactace^. Opunt'm vulgaris IsiiW. (0. opuntia (Ij.) Coult.). Sea Side Park, Piermont. Onagrace.e. Onagra biennis (L. ) Scop. (CEnothera biennis L. ). South Sea Side Park, Ericaceae. Azalea viseosa L. South Sea Side Park. -^Chimaphila maeulata (L. ) Pursh. Anglesea. Cleihra alnifolia L. South Sea Side Park. Gayhissacia resinosa [(Ait. )] T. & G. Cuscutace.e. Cuscuia Gronovii Willd. Sea Side Park. Labiate. '■'"Kfellia verticellata (Michx.) Kuutze {Pycnanthemxm Torryei Benth. ). Ocean Beach. Mentha spicata L. (Mentha viridis L. '). South _Sea Side Park. SOLANACE.E. *Solanum nigrum L. Atlantic City. SCROPHr'LARIACE.E. '■^Gerardia tenuifolia Vahl. Cape Ann, Mass. lAnaria canadensis (L. ) Dumont. Sea Side Park. BlGNONIACE^. Teconia radicans (L. ) D. C. Piermont. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 669 RUBIACE/E. ^Cephalanthus occidentalis L. Auglesea. ^ Galium pilosum Ait. Anglesea. '^Galium trifidum L. Cape May. Mitchella repens L. Wildwood. CoMPOSITiE. ^ Aster multiflorus Ail. Anglesea. ■^Aster nova helgii L. var. litoreus A. Gray. Avalon. '^ Aster patens L. Ocean Beach. '^ Aster sureulosus Michx. Ocean Beach. ^Doell'mgeria umhellata {MiW.) Nees. {Aster umbellatus Mill.). Ocean Beach. Eupatorium perfoltatum L. South Sea Side Park. Euthamia caroliniana (L. ) Greene {Solldago tenuifolius Pursh. ). Sea Side Park. Helenium autumnale L. Sea Side Park. Helianthus sp. Sea Side Park. '^Hieracium scabrum Michx. Auglesea. Lactuca scariola L. South Sea Side Park. '^Riidheckia hirta L. Anglesea. Solidago pubenda Nult. South Sea Side Park. 670 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. A COLLECTION OF BIRDS FROM SUMATRA, OBTAINED BY ALFRED C- HARRISON, JR., AND DR. H. M. HILLER. BY WITMER STONE. The present paper is based upon a collection of bird skins col- lected on the Island of Sumatra by Mr. Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller, and presented by them to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. The collection, representing 138 species, is the most extensive ever brought to America from this island and adds materially to our knowledge of the distribution and relationship of a number of species. Collecting was carried on at three different points : ( 1 ) At Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, in the highlands east of I'adang, at from 1,500 to 3,000 feet elevation, during August and September, 1901; (2) at Goenong Soegi, in the Lampong district of south- eastern Sumatra, at an elevation of less than 500 feet, during Octo- ber and November, 1901, and (3) in the vicinity of Padang. No further data accompanies the specimens, but the collectors inform me that the apparent presence of a species exclusively at one locality, as shown by the specimens, does not necessarily indicate its absence from another, as species well represented in the Padang collection were in some instances passed byiu Lampong. In conse- quence of this the fact that of 94 species obtained in Lampong and 59 in Padang, only 33 wei'e secured in both places loses mucn of its signiticance. Moreover, upon comparing the published lists of Su- matra birds we find that the Marquis of Tweeddale's report, based upon a Lampong collection (Ibis 1877), con tarns 81 species not found in the present series, while our material includes 35 not men- tioned by Tweeddale. While information is still inadequate to form generalizations upon the details of the distribution of birds on the island, it would seem that the majority of the species range from the lower Malay peninsula throughout Sumatra and many into Java without mate- rial differentiation ; and a comparison of the combined lists from Deli, in the northwestern extremity of the island, with those of 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 671 Lampong, in the southeastern corner, show that the majority of the species occur at both points. In fact, the high mountains of the south-central part of Sumatra seem to be the only region where a conspicuously different avifauna exists. The materials are, how- ever, far too limited to warrant any positive statements on the matter. In the following list the material in collection of the Academy has been used for comparison, and also several skins loaned by the U. S. National Museum, through Dr. C. W. Richmond, for which the author expresses his thanks. All references given below have been verified except a few which are marked with an asterisk. Asarcornis scutulata (S. Miill.). Anas scutulata S. Mviller, Verh. Land en Volkenk., p. 159, 1839-44. Java. Two specimens from I^ampong have the head, rump and breast white, and white feathers in the wing. The breast has also a strong rusty suffusion and some black feathers scattered here and there. Bubulcus coromandus (Bodd.). Gancroma eorornanda Bo^d&ert, Tabl. PI. Enl., p. 54, 1783. Three specimens from the highlands of Padang. Amaurornis phoenicura (Forster). Rallus ph(Bnicurus Forster. Zool. Ind., p. 19, PI. IX, 1781. Ceylon. One example from the Padang highlands. Actitis hypoleuoa (Linn.). Tringa hypoleucos, Liunseus, Syst. Nat., X, p. 149, 1758. Four specimens from Lampong. Charadrius dominicus fulvus (Gm.). Charadrius fulvus Gmelin, Syst. Nat., I, p. 687, 1788. Tahiti. Four specimens from the highlands of Padang. Caloperdix oculea sumatrana (Grant). Caloperdix sumatrana Grant, Bull. Brit. Orn. Club, No. 11 (Nov. 1, I89:i), Ibis, 1893, p. 118. Sumatra and Java. Two adults and two downy young from the highlands of Padang. Argusianus argus (Linn.). Phasianus argus Linn^us, Syst. Nat. (XII), I, p. 272. 1766. Tar- tary. One male from Lampong. 672 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. Gallus gallus (Linn ). Phasianus gallus Linnaus, Syst. Nat. (X), p. 158, 1758. India Ori- entale. One from Lampong aud another from the Padang highlands. Carpopliaga aenea (Linn.). Golumba cenea Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. (XIT), I, p. 283, 1766. Moluccas. One specimen, Lampong. Treron nipalensis (Hodgs.). Toria Nipalensis Hodgson, Asiat. Res. XIX, p. 164, PI. IX, 1836. Nepal. Two examples from the Padang highlands. Osmotreron vernans (Liun.). Golumba verrums Liunceus, Mantissa, p. 526, 1771. Philippines. One from Padang aud four from the highlands to the east. Treron griseicapilla Schleg., N. T. D., I, p. TO (1863), from Sumatra, is separated mainly on account of the grayuess of the head, but this seems to be a phase of plumage probably due to age. Osmotreron olax (Temm.). Golumba olax Temminck, PI. Col., 241, 1823. Sumatra. Five specimens from Lampong. Osmotreron fulvicollis (Wagl.). Golumba fulvicollis Wagler, Syst. Av. Columba, Species 8, 1837. Philippines. One male from Lampong. Turtur tigrinus (Temm.) Golumba tigrina Temminck and Knip Pigeons, I, PI. 43, 1808-11. China and South Sea Islands. Two specimens from Lampong and one from the Padang high- lands. Turtur turtur (Linn.). Golumba turtur Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. (X), 165, 1758. One specimen from Padang, very light in color; no doubt a domesticated bird. Microhierax fringillarius (Drapiez). Drapiez, Diet. Class. d'Hist. Nat., VI, p. 412, PI. V, 1824* Three specimens from Padang aud two from the adjacent high- lands. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 673 Elanus hypoleucus Gould. Elarius hypoleucus Gould, P. Z. S , 1859, p. 137. Celebes. Two specimens from the highlands of Padang are probably refer- able to this species. The original descriplioa gives the under- wing coverts as pure wliite, but in these examples the ends of the longest of these feathers near the edge of the wing are clouded with slaty black. The wing measurements are : Ketupa ketupa (Horsf.). Strix ketupa Horsfield, Trans. Linn. See, XIII, p. 141, 1831. Java. One example from Padang and two from Lampong. Huhua orientalis sumatrana (Raffl.). Strix sumatraaa RafBes, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII. p. 279, 1833. Sumaira. Two specimens from the highlands of Padang. Raffles described a young bird, but both Schlegel and Hartert consider the Sumatra form distinct from H. orientalis Horsf. of Java, and this name must therefore be adopted. Psittinus incertus (Shaw). Psittacus incertus Shaw, Nat. Misc., PI. 769, 1790. Cage speci- men, supposed to have come from India. Four examples from Lampong. Lorioulus galgulus (Linn.). Psittacus galgulus Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., I (XII ed.), p. 150, 1766. India. Two from Padang and one each from the highlands and from Lampong. Falseornis longicauda (Bodd.). Psittacus longicaudus Boddaert, Tabl. PL Enl., p. 53. 1783. Ma- lacca. Four specimens from Lampong. Eurystomus calonyx "Hodgs.," Sharpe. Coracius calonyx "Hodgs.," Sharpe, P. Z. S., 1890, p. 551. Hima- layan Terai. Three specimens from Padang and one from Lampong district. These birds seem in some respects intermediate between the figures given on PI. 11, Vol. XVII of the Catalogue of Birds, representing E. orientalis and E. calonyx, but are closer to the latter. None of them have the terminal part of the tail plain black ius shown in the figure of orientalis, but, on the contrary, the outer webs are 4:^ 674 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., strongly shaded with purplish-blue almost to their tips. At the base is an area of greenish-blue of greater or less extent, some- times suffusing the inner web nearly to the tip, and in other exam- ples almost entirely concealed at the extreme base of the feather. Compared with other material before me, these specimens agree well with one from Siam, but differ markedly from a Philippine speci- men in the much smaller bill and in color pattern, the latter matching Sharpe's figure of orientalis exactly. Sharpe credits both forms to Borneo, calomjx being a winter visitor, and it is pos- sible this is also the case in Sumatra. Pelargopsis capensis (Linn.). Alcedo capensis Linnajus, Syst. Nat. (XII), 1766, p. 180. "Cape of Good Hope " prob.=Java, Four specimens from Larapong. The unfortunate complication of names which exists in this group has given rise to a great diversity of treatment by different authors. The facts in case are briefly as follows: Linnaeus (1755) gave the name capensis to a kingfisher described by Brisson from the Cape of Good Hope, but which we now know must have come from the Malay region. Boddaert (1783) proposed the name Javana for the bird figured by Daubenton {PL EnL, 757) as from Java, but which we now know is the Bornean species. Gmelin (1788) based a name leucocephala on the same plate. Pearson (1841) described a species gurial from Bengal. In the light of our present knowledge it is possible to fix the name javana upon the bird from Borneo (cf. Hartert, Nov. ZooL, IX, p. 202), and the other two names upon races of a closel}'- allied group found from India to Java. The name gurial with a definite type locality is easily disposed of, which leaves capensis Linn, for one of the remaining races. Sharpe (1870) was the first to designate these by name, pro- posing floresiana for the bird from Flores, burmanica for the Burmah foi'm, and malaccensis for that of the Malay peninsula. At the same time he states that he considers Brisson's description, upon which Linnoeus' name capensis was mainly based, to apply to the Javan bird, but that Daubenton' s plate, al^o quoted by Linnseus, represents his floresiana. Subsequently ( Cat. Bds. Brit. Mm., XVll, p. 106) he considers Daubenton' s plate to have been 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 675 based upon Bi-isson, which seems to fix capensis more firmly than ever upon the Javan bird. Sharpe did not adopt the name capen- sis solely because of I he incongruity, and so proposed the name fraseri for it (1870). The adoption of capensis is, I think, inevitable. Hartert (Nov. ZooL, IX, p. 202) claims that all the blue and green-backed species of Pelargopsis should be treated as subspecies of one widely spread group, which plan seems to sim- plify the matter materially, though the name Pelargopsis capensis javana for a Borncan bird will not meet with much favor from those who still believe in the propriety of ignoring names which are geographically misleading. Alcedo meninting Horsf. Alcedo meninting Ilorsfield, Trans. Linn. See, XIII, p. 172, 1821. Java. Two males from Lampong and a female from the Padang high- lands. Alcedo euryzonia Temm. Alcedo euryzonia Temminck, Planch. Col., text to livr. 86, 1830. One male from Padang. Ceyx rafidorsa Strickl. Ceyx rufidorsa Strickland, P. Z. S., 1846, p. 99. Malacca. One example from Lampong. Sharpe renames this bird euerythra ( Cat. Birds, XVII, p. 179) on the ground that Strickland's specimen is intermediate between this and iridactyla. Caroineutes pulohellus (Horsf.). Dacelo pulchella Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 175, 1821. Java. Five males and three females, representing all the localities. Halcyon conoreta (Temm.). Bacelo eoncreta Temminck, PI. Col., IV, PI. 346, 1835. Male and female from the highlands of Padang. Halcyon chloris (Bodd.). Alcedo chloris Boddaert, Tabl. PI. Enl., p. 49, 1788. Five specimens from the Padang highlands. One of tliese (No. 38,928, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.) has the black on the ear cx)verts and collar replaced almost entirely by green, while the wings are brighter blue. This would seem to be the .subspecies 676 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. , armstrongi Sharpe (Cat. Bh^ds Brit. 3Iiis., XVII, p. 277), but it is unlikely that two forms would occur together unless one was a migrant, and it is possible that the peculiarities shown by this specimen may have something to do with season or age. Buceros rhinoceros Liun. Buceros rhinoceros LiniuTeus, Sj'st. Nat. (X), I, p. 104, 1758. ludia. One male from the highlands of Padang. Anthracoceros convexus (Temm.). Buctros convexus Temminck, PI. Col., PI. 580, 1832. Five specimens from Lampong and one from the Padaug high- lands. One of the males has the casque laterally swollen anteriorly to a width of nearly two inches, so that it overhangs the bill on either side. Anthracoceros malayanus (Raffl.). Buceros malayanus Raffl., Trans. Linn. Sec, XIII, p. 293, 1822. Malacca. One male from Lampong. Bhytidoceros nndnlatns (Shaw). Buceros undulatus Shaw, Gen. Zool., VIII, p. 26, 1811. Batavia. One specimen from Lampong which has the base of the bill only slightly wrinkled, but wiih the black throat bar present; wing measures 19 inches, Merops sumatranns Raffl. Merops sumatranus Ratfles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 294, 1821. Sumatra. One young bird from Padaug. Merops philippinns Linn. Merops phihppinus LinnsEUS, Syst. Nat. (XIII ed.), I, p. 183, 1787. Philippines. Three examples from Padang and one from Lampong. There seems to be considerable variation in the amount of blue above, No. 38, 852 being quite blue on the crown and with scat- tered blue feathers on the back. Alcemerops amiota (Temm.). Merops amicta Temminck, PI. Col., IV., PI. 310, 1821. Four specimens from the Padang highlands and one from Lam- j^ong. No. 38,918 is molting, probably from the juvenal plumage, 1902.] NATUKAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ^77 and shows the uew bright-colored feathers coming in on the throat. The black bands on the end of the tail are not well defined and the belly is buff. My friend, Dr. C. W. Richmond, has pointed out to me that the name Ni/ctiornis usually applied to this genus is antedated by Nydornis Nitzsch (Pterylographue Avium Halle, 1833, p. 21 =: Nydibm-s Yieill. ), consequently we must adopt Geoff roy's name as above. Caprimulgus affinis Horsf. Vaprinmlfjus affinis Horsfiekl, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 14-3, 1821. Java. One specimen from Padaug. Maoropteryx comata (Temin.). Cypselm comatus Temminck, PI. Col., PI. 268, 1834. Sumatra. Four specimens from Lampong. Macropteryx longipennis (Rafln.). Hirnndo longipennis Rafinesque, Bull. Soc. Philom., Ill, p. 153, 1804.* Three examples from Padang. Pyrotrogon duvauceli (Temm.). Trocjon dumuceU Temminck, PI. Col., 291, 1824. Three specimens from Lampong. Pyrotrogon diardi neglectus Forbes and Robinson. Trogoii diardii neglectus Forbes and Robinson, Bull. Liverpool Museum. II, p. 34(1899). One example from Lampong. Though I have been unable to consult the above refeience I follow Hartert in adopting this name for the Sumatran bird. Sumiculus lugubris (Horsf.). Cuculus lugubris Horsfiekl, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 179, 1821. Java. Two specimens from Lampong, which have the tail nearly square. Hierococcyx fugax (Horsf.). Cuculus fugax Horsfiekl, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 178, 1821. Java. One specimen from the highlands of Padang. Cuculus intermedius Vahl. Cuculus intermedius Vahl, Skriv. af Natur. Sclsk., IV, 58, 1797. Trauquebaria. Three specimens from Lampong. The synonymy of this species as given in the British Museum 678 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. Catalogue of Birds, Vol. XIX, is very extensive, aud it is prob- able that several forms are confused, but I have not the material at hand to warrant the consideration of this point. Chalooooooyx xanthorhynohus (Horsf.). Guculus xaMJiorhynchus Horsfield, Trans. Luia. See, XIII, p. 179, 1821. Java. One adult male from Lampong. Caoomantis merulinus (Scop.). Guculus merulimis Scopoli, Del. Flor. et Fauu. Insubr., II, p. 89, 178(5. India. One immature specimen from Padang and another from Lam- pong, the latter being much more rufous above. It is probable that several forms are merged under this species in the British Museum Catalogue which should be entitled to recognition. Centropus javanicus (Dum.). C'entro'pusjavanicus'Dw.xwowi, Diet. Sci. Nat., XI, p. 144, 1818.* One example from the highlands of Padang. Centropus sinensis (Steph.). Polophilus sinensis Stephens, Gen. Zool., IX, p. 51, 1815. China. Three specimens from Lampong and one from the highlands of Padang. Zanolostomus javanicus (Horsf.). Plmnicophaus Javanicus Horsfield, Trans. Linn. See, XIII, p. 178. 1822. Java. One example from Lampong. Bhinortha chlorophsea (Raffl.). Ouculus chlorophmus Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 288, 1822. Sumatra. Two male specimens from Padang, one from the highlands and one from near the coast, and a female specimen from Lampong. Rhopodytes elongatus 'S. Miill.). Pho&nicophaus elongatus S. Miill., Tijdschr. Nat. Gesch., p. 342, 18-:i5. Sumatra. Four specimens from the highlands ^of Padang, four from the coast and one from Lampong. Urococcyx erythrognathus (nartl.). PluenicophoRus erytlirognathus Hartlanb, Verz. Mus. Brem. 1844, p. 95.* One example from the highlands of Padang aud two from Lampong. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Calorhamphus hayi (J. E. Gray). Bucco Jiayi J. E. Gray, Zool. Misc., p. 33, 1832. Molucca. Four examples from Padang and one from Lampong. Chotorhea chrysopogon (Temm.). Bucco chrysopogon Temm., PI. Col., HI, 1834, p. 285. 679 Ten specimens from the highlands of Padang.. Cyanops oorti (S. Miiller). Bucco oorti S. Miill., Tijdsclir., Nat. Gescli., II, p. 341, PI. 8, fig. 4, 1835. Sumatra. Male and female from the highlands of Padang. Cyanops mystacophanes (Temm.). Bucco 7nystacophanes Temm., PI. Col., Ill, p. 315, 1834. One young individual from Lampong. Mesobucco duvauceli (Less.). Bucco duvauceli Less., Traite, p. 164, 1831. Sumatra. ' Two from the highlands of Padang and one from Lampong. Xantholaema haemacephala (Mull.). Bucco hmmacephalus P. L. S., Muller, Syst. Nat. Anhang, p. 88, 1776. Philippines. One specimen from Padang and two from the highlands of the same province. Gecinus puniceus observandus Hart. Gecinus puniceus observandus Hartert, Nov. Zool., Ill, p. 543, 1896. Sumatra. One specimen from Lampong. Chrysophlegma mentale humii (Hargitt). Chrysophlegma humii Hargitt, Ibis, 1889, p. 231. Malacca. Three males from the highlands of Padang and three females from Lampong. Chrysophlegma miniatum malaccense (Lath.). J'icus malaccensis Latham, Ind. Orn., I, p. 241, 1790. Malacca. One example from the higlilands of Padang. Yuugipicus moluccensis (Gm.). Ficus moluccensis Gmelin, Syst. Nat., I, p. 439, 1788. Moluccas. Three specimens from Lampong and one from the Padang highlands. 680 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., Meiglyptes grammithorax (Mahl.). Phoeopicus grammithorax Mahlherb, Picidse, II, p. 12, PI. XLVIII, figs. 4 and 5, 18«2. Malay Peninsiala and Sunda Islands. Two examples from Lainpong. Meiglyptes tukki (Less.). Picus tuklci Lesson, Rev. Zool., 1839, p. 167. Sumatra. Two specimens from Lampong. Micropternus brachyurus (Vieill.). licus brachyurus Vieillot, Nov. Diet. d'Hist. Nat., XXVI, p. 103, 1818. Java. One example from the highlands of Padang. In the Catalogue of Birds Mr. Salvadori makes this a subspecies of 31. phceoceps Blyth, published in 1845 ! Tiga javanensis (Ljung). Picus javanensis Ljung, Mem. Ac. Roy. Stockh., 1797, p. 134, Java. Four specimens from the highlands of Padang. Xylolepes validus (Temm.). Picus validus Temm., PI. Col., IV, 378 ^, 402 ?, 1825. Two young birds from Lampong. Thriponax javanensis (Horsf.). Picus javanensis Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc., XIII, p, 175, 1821. Java. Three from Lampong. Calyptomaena viridis Raffl. Calyptommia viridis Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc., XIII, p. 295, 1822. Sumatra. Four specimens from Lampong. Enrylaimus javanicus Horsf. Eurylaimus javanicus Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc., XIII, p. 170, 1821. Java. One specimen from Lampong. Corydon sumatranus (RafiQ.). Coranas sumatranus Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 303, 1822. Sumatra. ', Seven specimens from Lampong. Cymborhynchus macrorhynobos lemniscatns Baffl Eurylaimus lemniscatus Raffles, Trans. 1822. Sumatra. Seven specimens representing all three localities Eurylaimus lemniscatus Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 1822. Sumatra. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ^^1 EucicMa boschi (Miill. and Schl.). Pitta hoseliii Muller aud Schlegel, Verb. Zool., Pitta, p. IP, t. 1, 1839-1844. Sumatra. Three males and a female from Lampong. Sharpe's description of this bird in Vol. XIV of the Catalogue of Birds, p. 447, fails lo mention the bars of black on the breast. As a matter of fact, each feather is banded with black, orange and purple, always in this order, there being several bands of each, though the orange bands are obsolete toward the base of some feathers. Himndo rustica gutturalis (Scop.). Hirimdo gutturalis Scopoli, Del Flor et Faun Insubr., II, p. 96, 1786. Three specimens from Lampong. Hirundo javanica Sparrm. Hirundo javanica Sparrman, Mus. Carls., II, PI. 100, 1789. Java. One from the Padang highlands and one from Lampong. Terpsiphone aflanis ("Hay," Blyth). Tehitrea affinis "Hay," Blyth, Jour. As. See. Bengal, XV, p. 293. Malay Peninsula. Two adults from Lampong. Terpsiphone inoei (Gould). Muscipeta incei Gould, Birds of Asia, Pt. 4. Nov., 1852, A pair of adults from Lampong. I am not at all satisfied that the relationship of the birds of this genus is properly understood. The seasonal plumages aud those dae to age seem so complicated that it is quite possible that more of the current species will have to be relegated to synonymy. Siphia cantatrix (Temm.V Afuscicapa cantatrix Tennnnick PI Col III PL 236 ( ? ). Muscicapa elegans Temminck, PI. Col., Ill, PI. 595 {c5 )■ Three specimens from Lampong. As the plate of the female was obviously issued long before that of the male, although now bound in the same volume, I see no course but to adopt the name based upon the_former. Artamides sumatrensis (S. Miill.). Ceblepyris sumatrensis S. Muller, Verh. Nat. Geschied. Land ui.d Volken, p. 190.* Two females and one male from Lampong and a female from Padang. fi82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. Pericrocotus xanthogaster (Raffl.). Lanius xanthogaster Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, j). 309, 1832. Sumatra. One male from the highlands of Padang. Lalage dominica (Mull.). Turdus dominicus P. L. S. Muller, Syst. Nat. Anhaug., p. 145, 1776. " St. Domingo." = Turdaa terat Boddaert, Tabl. PI. Enl., p. 17, 1783. Two specimens, one from Lampong and one from Padang. Lalage culminata (Uay). Geblepyris culminatus A. Hay, Madr. Jour., XIII, p. 157. Malacca. A female from Padang. Chloropsis zosterops Vigors. Chloropsis zosterops Vigors, App. Mem. Life of Eaffles, p. 674. Sumatra. Four specimens, three from Lampong and one from the highland of Padang, all males. Chloropsis media (Bp.). Phyllornis media "Miill." Bp., Consp., I, p. 396. 1850. Sumatra. Two males and a female from Padang highlands. Chloropsis icterocephala (Less.). Phyllornis icterocephalus Lesson, Rev. ZooL, 1840, p. 164. Sumatra, Borneo and India. Two males and a female from Lampong. Chloropsis cyanopogon (Temm.). Phyllornis cyanopogon. Temm., PI. Col., 512, tig. 1. Two from Lampoug, one from Padang. Irena criniger Sharpe. Irena criniger Sharpe, Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., Ill, p. 367. Sumatra and Borneo. Thirteen specimens from Padang highlands and the Lampong district, both males and females. One specimen (No. 38,966, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, ) from the Padang region differs from the series of females in having the plumage much bluer with little of the green cast, the tail and edge of the wings especially being dark-blue. This may be a young male, but it shows no signs of the black or enameled-blue feathers of the adult. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENOKti OF PHILADELPHIA. 688 Euptilotus entilotus (Jard. and Selby). Braehypus eutilotus Jard. and Selby, 111. Ornith., IV (n. s.), PI. III. Singapore. One specimen from Lampong. Microtarsus melanoleucus Eyt. A/icrotnrsus melanoleucus Eytou, P. Z. S., 1839, p. lO','. Malay region. One example from Lampong. Microtarsus melanocephalus (Gm.). Lanius melanocephalus Gmelin., Syst. 2s"at., I, p. 309, 1788. Sand- wich Islands. Two specimens from Lampong and five from the Padang high- lands. Criniger phasoceplialas (Hartl.). ]xos {TricMxos Less.) phcBOcephalus Hartlaub, Rev. Zoo!., 1844, p. 401. Malacca. Six specimens from Lampong. Tricholestes criniger (Blyth). Brachypodius (?) criniger Blyth, .Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, XIV, p. 577. Malacca. One from Padang. Trachycomus ochrocephalus (Gm.). Turdus ochrocephalus Gmelin, Syst. Xat., I, p. 821. Ceylon and Java. Four from the Padang highlands and two from Lampong. Pycnonotus simplex Less. Picnonotus simplex Lesson, Rev. Zool., 1839, p. 167. Sumatra. Four from Lampong and one each trom Padang and the adja- cent highlands. Three of these specimens are smaller and some- what lighter than the others, but not appreciably different in other respects. They are possibly distinct. Pycnonotus analis (Horsf.). Tardus analis Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 147, 1821. Java. Two from Lampong. five from the Padang highlands, and one from the coast. Pycnonotus plumo sus" B i y t h . Pycnonotus plumosus Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, XIV, p. 567. Malacca. Two frora Lamj)oug. ^84 i'RuCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. , Exibigula dispar (Horsf.). Tvnlus dispar Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 150, 1821. Java. Two from Lampoug aucl two from the Padaug highlands. Copsychus saularis musicus (Raffl.). Lnnivs musicus Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 307, 1832. Sumatra V Two fi'om the Padang highlands and one from Lampong. RafHes states that this is the " Tardus mindanensia of Gmelin and the Gracula saularis of Liunjeus, now with more propriety placed in the genus Lanius. It is one of the few singing birds of India." Whether this name is not a pure synonym of saularis is an open question; though Raffles probably had the Sumatran bird in mind he does not say so, nor is his diagnosis sufficient to iden- tify it. Our specimens show considerable variation, one having only four black feathers in the tail, and the next pair white for a space of one inch. This bird exactly matches a Siam example in the Academy collection. From the material at hand this race does not seem very well defined. Cittocincla macrurus suavis (Sclater^. Copsychus suavis ScUter, P. Z. S., 1861, p. 185. Borneo. Five specimens from Lampong. Sharpe (Cat. Birds, VII, p. 88) states that the name C. macrurus should not be used, as it is not identifiable ; the white outer tail feathers of Latham's plate would indicate the Bornean bird, while the type locality, " Pulo Condore," would almost certainly yield true " tricolor." The present series from Sumatra shows much variation in the extent of white on the outer tail feathers. In one it is I in., measured along the mid-rib, and in another 2^. Hydrocichla ruficapilla Temm. Knicurus ruficapillus Temminck, PI. Col., Ill, PI. 534, 1832. Three specimens from the Padang highlands. ^ Hydrocichla velata Temm. Enicurus velatus Temminck, PI. Col., Ill, PI. 160, 1823. One from the Padang highlands. Hydrocichla frontalis Blyth. Enicurus frontalis Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, XVI. p. 1.56, 1847. Malay Peninsula. Three specimens from Lampong. 1902.] NATURAL BCIKJSCj^S OF PHILADELf HIA. 6B5 Garrulax bicolor Hartl. Garrulax bicolor " S. Miill." Hartlaub, Rev. Zool., 1844, p. 403. Sumatra. One from the Padang highlands. Rhinociclila mitrata (Miill). Timalia mitrata S. Miiller, Tijdsclir, Nat. Gescli., 1835, p. 345, PI. 5, tig. 3. Java. Six specimens from the Padang highlands. Mixornis gularis (Raffl.). Motacilla gularis Raffles, Traus. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 312, 1822. Sumatra. Seven specimens from Lampong. Mixornis erythroptera (Blyth). Timalia erythroptera Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, XI, p. 794, 1842. Malay region. One specimen from Lampong. Macronus ptilosus Jard. and Selby. Macronus ptilosus Jardine and Selby, 111. Ornitli., PI. 150, 1835. Java and Sumatra. Three specimens from Lampong. Trichastoma buttikoferi Vorderm. 2'richostoma Biittikoferi Vorderman, Nat. Tijdsclir. Ned. Indie, 1892, p. 230. Lampong, Sumatra (Ref. from Biittikofer). One specimen from the Lampong district which agrees exactly with the description of Vorderman' s hitherto unique bird. The present specimen (No. 39,204, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.) measures: wing 70 mm., tail 54, tarsus 27, culraen 15. The ' ' narrow black edgings ' ' to the feathers of the crown, while clearly apparent, are really an optical effect produced by the loose-vaned feathers lying over one another. In Mr. Biittikofer' s excellent paper in Notes from the Leyden Museum, XVII, p. 65, 1895, I am unable to appreciate the impor- tance of the character upon which he bases his primary division of the genus Trichastoma (p. 87), i.e., the presence or absence of ' ' concealed white longitudinal shaft streaks on the feathers of the back and rump." The specimen above mentioned has the basal portion of the shafts of these feathers white, yet it is placed in the section with no white concealed streaks; while the type of T. celebeihse Strick- land, which is now before me (No. 17,370, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. ^>^6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct. , Phila. ), seems to shoAv less of these white shafts than does T. buttikoferi, yet it falls in the other division. Malacopteron erythrote of Sharpe I had already decided to be congeneric with T. buttikoferi before consulting Mr. Biittikofer's paper, and I find he has reached the same conclusion, regarding it as a synonym of Trichastoma pyrrhogenys Temm., which it evi- dently is. There may be some question, however, as to the geo- graphic distribution of the species, as our two specimens are labeled Sumatra. On p. 84 of Mr. Biittikofer's paper he refers Brachypteryx polyogenys Sirickl. with a query to Anuropsis malaccensis (Hartl. ). With Strickland's type before me I have no hesitation in confirm- ing this identification. Another of Strickland's types, also in the Academy's collection, brings to light a curious error which has been perpetuated in all the works on the Timalioe, and which involves a change in the name of the well-known Rhinomyias pedoral'is. Among the many type specimens secured for the Academy by Dr. Thomas B. Wilson is the original of Napothera umbratilis " Temm." Strickland (Cont. Orn., 1849, p. 128, PI. 31). This name being quoted by Sharpe, Gates and Biittikofer as a synonym of Trichastoma rostratum Blyth, I made an examination of Ihe Strickland specimen, regarding it as typical of the genus Tricha- stoma, but soon became convinced that it had nothing whatever to do with the latter, and subsequently, with the aid of Dr. C. W; Richmond, it was identified as Rhinomyias pectoralis Salvad. ! Strickland's name having many years' priority must be adopted, and the species will then stand a.s Rhi/iomylas wnbratilw (Strickl. ). Dr. Richmond has sent me for comparison some specimens of Rhinomyias from the U. S. National Museum collection, collected in Linga and Mandalar Islands, Western Sumatra, which he had identified as ^^ R. pectoralis.'" These, however, differ from the type of R. umbratilis, of which pectoralis becomes a synonym, and seem worthj^ of separation as a distinct race, for which I would propose the name of Rhinomyias umbratilis richmondi snbsp. nov. Type 170,8 0, U. S. Nat. Mus., Mansalar Island, west coast of Sumatra, Marcli 13, 19U2. Dr. W. L. Abbott. Size and proportions apparently similar to R. umbratilis (=pec- toralis Auct.). Coloration similar, but of a decided olivaceou> 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 687 cast, which color is entirely lacking from the type specimen of R. umbratilis. Nearly uniform olive-brown above (intermediate between mummy -brown and olive of Ridgway's Nomenclature of Colors), edges of wings and tail more tawny; sides of the face and neck like the back, lores whitish and feathers behind the eye dis- tinclly grayish. Below pure white, sides of body under the wings pale olive, and a pronounced pectoral band of olive-brown darkest at the sides. "Bill black. Iris brown. Feet purplish-fleshy" (Abbott). Length (in flesh) 6f inches = 162 mm. ; wing, 74 mm. ; tar- sus, 18 mm. Another specimen, obiained by Dr. Abbott on Linga Island, July 14, 1899, is esseniially similar, and from both of them the type of E. umbratilis differs in its distinctly tawny-brown coloration. Prinia olivacea (Raffl.). Mo acilla olivacea Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 313, 1822. Two specimens from Lampong. In his description of this bird in the Catalogue of Birds, Dr. Sharpe slates that the head of the adult is brown, and again that in the young or winter plumage the head is " brown, not gray." The specimens before me, which I take to be adult, have the head distinctly gray all around in contrast to the olive back, throat pure white and a broad gray collar joinmg the gray of the sides of the neck and separating the white throat from the yellow abdo- men. Two other examples from Java, kindly loaned by the U. S. National Museum, have the appearance of being young birds in Juvenal plumage, with shorter bills and duller coloration. Head uniform olive-brown like the back, lores and stripe to the top of the eye white. Orthotomus cineraceus Blyth. Orthotomus cineraceus Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, XIV, p. 589, 1845. Malacca. A male and female from Lampong. Orthotomus atrigularis Temm. Orthotomus atrigularis Temminck, PI. Col., Ill, text to livr. 101, 183(j. One female from Padang. Lanias superciliosus Lath. Laiiius superciliosus Latham, Ind. Orn. Suppl., p. 20, No. 14, 1801.* One adult male from Lampong. fi88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., Lanius tigrinns Drapiez. Lanius tigrinus Drapiez, Diet. Class. Hist. Nat., XIII, p. 523, 1828.* Two specimens from Padang and one from Lampong, represent- ing young and adult in winter plumage. Artamus leucorhynchus (Linn.). Lanius leucorhynchus Linnaeus, Mantissa, p. 534. 1771. Manilla. Ocypt-rus leucogaster Valenc , Mem. Mus. d'Hist. Nat., VI, p. 21, 1820. One from llie highlands of Padang, two from the coast and two from Lampong. Bicseum sumatranum Cab. Dicceum sumatranum Cabauis, Jour, fur Orn., 1878, p. 101. Sum- atra. One from the Padang highlands. Anthreptes malacensis (Scop.). Certhia malacensis Scopoli, Del Flor. et Faun. Insubr., II, p. 91, 1786. Malacca. Two specimens from the Padang highlands and four from Lampong. Cinnyris brasiliana (Gm.). Certhia brasiliana Gmel., Syst. Nat., I, p. 474, 1788. " Brazil." Nectarinia hasseltii Temm., PI, Col., 376, 1825. One from Lampong. Uotacilla boarnla melanope (Pall.). Motacilla Melanope Pallas, Reis. Russ. Reichs, III, App., p. 696, 1770. Dauuria. One from Padang and another from the adjacent highlands. Anthus rufulus malayensis (Eyt.). Anthus malayensis Eyton, P. Z. S., 1839, p. 104. Malay region. One specimen from the highlands of Padang and one from the coast. Phyllopneuste borealis (Bias.). Phyllopneuste borealis Blasius, Naumannia, 1858, p. 313. One specimen from Lampong. Urolonclia leuoogastra (Blyth). Amadina leuoogastra Blyth, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, XV, 286, 1846. Malay region. Thret^ adults from Lamjwng. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 689 TJroloncha leucogastroides (Moore). Munia leucogastroides Moore, Catalogue Birds East lad., Comp. JIuseum, II, p. 510, 1856. Java. One specimen from Lampong, which has the white belly mottled with brown transverse lines and crescents. Munia punctulata nisoria (Temm.). Munia nisoria Temminck, PI. Col., Ill, PI. 500, fig. 3, 1830. One adult and two young from Lampong. Munia maja (Linn). Loxia maja Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., I, p. 301, 1766. India, Orient. Two specimens from Lampong and one from Padang. Ploceus megarhynchus Hume. Ploceus megarhynchus Hume, Stray Feathers, 1875, pp. 153 and 406 (1878). Nynee Tal and Dacca. Two females from the Padang highlands and one from the coast. This bird is usually designated P/oceus a^ri^u^a " Hodgs." Gray, but I cannot see that Hodgson's unpublished drawings have any status so far as nomenclature is concerned, nor that Gray's pub- lished name, which is not accompanied by any description, can be considered. Eliminating these references the next name available is that of Hume, as given above. Oriolus maculatus Vieill. Oriolus maculatus Vieillot, Nov. Diet. d'Hist. Nat., XIII, p. 194. Java. Five specimens from the highlands of Padang. Oriolus zanthonotus Horsf. Oriolus Xanthonotus Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 152, 1821. Java. Two males and a female from Lampong, Buchanga cineracea Horsf. Edolius ciner'aceus Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 145, 1821. Java. Six specimens from the Padang highlands. Chaptia malayensis "Hay " Blyth. Chaptia malayensis " Hay " Blyth, Jour. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, XV, p. 294. Malacca. One from Padang. 44 090 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Oct., Dissemurus platurus (Vieill.). Dicrurus platurus Vieillot, Nov. Diet. d'Hist. Nat. IX, 1817, p. 588. Malabar ? Two specimens from Lampong and two from the highlands of Padang. It does not seem clear just where Vieillot' s bird came from, but from what material I have examined, it would seem thai the birds of Java, Sumatra and Borneo are identical, and that the names malayensis Blyth and brachyphorus Bp. are consequently synonyms of the above. Eulabes javanensis (Osbeck). Oorvusjavanensis Osbeck, Voyage [English Traasl.], p. 157, 1771. Six specimens from Lampong. I fail to see how this species can be cited from Osbeck' s original work which dales from 1757. In the German translation (1765) the name is changed to G. rellgiosa Linn,, but in the English trans- lation (1771) the original name is restored, consequently, inasmuch as Linnseus' name seems applicable to the Indian bird, we can use javanensis Osbeck, 1771, for this one. Lamprocorax chalybea (Horsf.). Turdus chalybeus Horsfield, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p, 148, 1831. Java, Two examples from the Padang highlands and five from Lam- pong, This species is described under three different names in the same volume of the Linncean Transactions. On the same page as the above Horsfield describes the female as Turdus strigatus, but in accordance with the A. O. U. code, we should give precedence to the name based on the male, even though the other stands first, Sturnopastor jalla (Horsf.). Pastor jalla Horsfield, Trans, Linn, Soc, XIII, p. 155, 1821. Java. Three specimens from Lampong. Corvus macrorhynclios Wagl. Corms Macrorhynchos Wagler, Syst. Av. Corvus, Sp. 3. Sumatra and Java. Two specimens from Lampong, just completing the post-juvenal molt. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 691 Dendrocitta occipitalis (Mull.). Glaucopis occipitalis Miiller, Tijclschr, Nat. Gescb., 1835, p. 343, PL IX, f. 1. Three specimens from the Padang highlands. Platylophus coronatus (Raffl.). Lanius coronatus Raffles, Trans. Linn. Soc, XIII, p. 306, 1822. Sumatra. Four specimens from Lampong and one from the Padang high- lands. Platysmurus leucopterus (Temm.). Glaucopis leucopterus Temminck, PI. Col., 265. Five specimens from Lampong and one from the highlands of Padang. ', 692 proceedings of the academy of [nov., November 4. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Thirly-one persons present. A paper entitled ' ' Synopsis of the Carditacea and of the Ameri- can Species," by William Healy Dall, was presented for publica- tion. November 11. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M. D. , in the Chair. Fifteen persons present. A paper entitled " Notes on the Orthoptera of New Mexico and Western Texas," by James A. G. Rehn, was presented for publi- cation. The deaths of Thomas C. Price and Dr. Frederick Packard, members, were announced. November 18. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brow2^, Vice-President, in the Chair. ^' Fourteen persons present. ,, A paper entitled " Hymenoptera from Southern California and New Mexico, with Description of a New Species," by H, Viereck, was presented for publication. November 25. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair. Twenty -six persons present. Herman T. Wolf and Lilian V. Sampson were elected membei-s. The following were ordered to be printed : 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 693 A LIST OF THE REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS IN THE HARRISON- HILLER COLLECTION FROM SUMATRA. BY ARTHUR ERWIN BROWN. The reptiles and batrachians collected in Sumatra ia 1901 by Mr. Alfred Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller, through the generosity of these gentlemen are now the property of the Academy. They were obtained at Goenoug Soegi, Lampong District, below the elevation of 500 feet; and at Batu Sangkar, Tanah Datar, in the forest region of Padang, between 1,500 and 3,000 feet. In the following list of the species represented, these localities are respectively indicated by the letters L. and P. REPTILIA. Chelonia. Trionyx subplanus Geoff. Trionyx cartilagineus (Bodd.). Lacertilia. L.,P. L. Hemidactylus frenatus (Schl.). ' ^• Draco volans L. In both of the specimens, d" and 9, the color is very dark- brown, so dark as to render all markings obscure. The ventral surface and under side of the wing membranes have a purplish tinge, with black spots on the latter which tend to run together transversely. In all details of scutellation they correspond to undoubted specimens of the present species. Draco fimbriatus Kuhl. Draco haematopogon Gray. ^• Calotes cristatellus (Kuhl.). ^•' ^• Varanus salvator (Laur.). ^•' ^^ In No. 15,032, 380 mm. long, the ventral scales are perfectly smooth. In No. 14,492, 440 mm. long, they begin to show faint keels. Tachydromus sexlineatus Baud. P- 694 peoceedings of the academy of [nov., Ophidia. Tropidonotus trianguligerus Boie. L., P. In seven specimens which present the scutellation of this species, there is considerable variation in color. No. 15,040, from Goenong Soegi, has the general color dark olive and the spaces between the black lateral blotches are colored like the back. This specimen has the postoculars f and the temporals ^-3. Tropidonotus chrysargus Schl. P. Macropisthodon rhodomelus (Boie). l; Macropisthodon flaviceps (D. and B.)- L- Zaocys carinatus (Gunth.). L. Zamenis korros (Schl.)- L. Dendrophis pictus (Gm.). L., P. Dendrelaphis caudolineatus (Gray). P. Calamaria leucocephala D. and B. P. The single specimen of this species is blackish above, yellowish beneath, a broad band of the light ventral color extending across the nape and the parietals. Psammodynastes pulverulentus (Boie). L. Compared with Bornean examples, this specimen has the ventral surface thickly speckled with black, forming four quite regular series in longitudinal lines. Dryophis prasinus Boie. L. Dryophis fasciolatus (Fisch.). P Chrysopelea ornata (Shaw). P. No. 15,006 has each scale with a conspicuous yellow spot. Ven- trals black-edged. Platurus laticaudatus (L.). L. BATRACHIA.. Ecaudata. Bana tigrina Daud. P. Rana erythraea (Schl.). P. Rana chalconota (Schl.) P. Callula baleata (MtilL). p. No. 14,981 is a Callula, a genus which, as far as I am aware, has not heretofore been reported from Sumatra. In the absence of specimens for comparison, 1 see no reason to separate it from C. baleata, which occurs in Java. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 695 Bufo asper Graven. P. Three of the four specimens show red on the throat, and in one of them it extends over the sides of the body. Megalophrys montana (Kuhl.). P. This specimen has the supraorbital and nasal appendages well developed, and may be the form known as M. nasuta Schl., which is very doubtfully distinct. The fingers are very slightly webbed. 696 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [N( SYNOPSIS OF THE CARDITACEA AND OF THE AMERICAN SPECIES. BY WILLIAM HEALEY DALL. This paper is in continuation of the series of similar synopses of groups of bivalve shells which the writer has prepared during the last few years, including the Leptonacea, TelUnacea, Veneracea, Lucinacea, Cardiacea, etc. The present paper contains a summary of the groups included in the Carditidce and the Condylocardiidce, and of the species reported to inhabit the Atlantic and Pacific coasts of America. Doubtless with a better exploration of the tropical and South American waters some additions may be ex- pected to the list. The group is intimately related to the Crassatellitidce, Astartidce and Chamidce, as shown by its paleontologic history, anatomy and development. There are no siphons, the border of the mantle is pierced for the excurrent orifice, while the incurrent orifice may or may not be complete, but in most cases seems to be formed by the apposition rather than the organic connection, ventrally, of the edges of the mantle. The gills are coarsely reticular and usually united behind the foot. In many, if not all, cases the young are developed within the body cavity of the mother and retained there until some progress in secreting the nepionic shell has been made, in addition to the completion of the prodissoconch. This incubation in one group takes place in the atrium of the ovary, in another in a specially developed fold of the ventral part of the mantle lobes which secretes and lines a shelly marsupium which is absent in the shells of male individuals. The species are iLsually sedentary, and mostly secrete a byssus by which they fix themselves when young, and in one large group this condition continues through life. The sculpture is predominantly radial and often strong, the periostracum conspicuous and fre- quently pilose; the valves, except in abyssal and minute species, are usually solid and heavy and their margins strongly crenate. The ligament in the Carditidce is strong and wholly external ; in 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 697 the Condylocardiidce the resilium is immersed and the ligament feeble or obsolete. The hinge-formula, when fully developed, as in Carditamera, is R 10 10101 10' ^^^^ ^^ many forms the laterals are obsolete and the distal cardinals very feeble, coalescent with valve-margin or nymph, and hardly to be made out, so that in such forms as Venericardia the formula may be reduced to ^ q "oio"^- The hinge has never more than two left cardinals, the posterior one invariably long- drawn-out, a characteristic feature of the family, while the Veiie- ridce never have less than three left cardinals, so that convergent forms may readily be referred to their proper family. The teeth are usually finely striated. It is evident that with part of the hinge armature so liable to degeneration too much stress in classification must not be laid on such mutable features, and as a matter of fact the generally accepted subgeneric and sectional groups are chiefly based on external form, a character which proves unexpectedly constant when the groups are traced back through the line of their fossil progenitors. The lunule is usually small, or even obsolete, and frequently unequally distributed between the valves, but when present is usually circumscribed by a deep, narrow sulcus, the termination of which on the inner left hinge-margin is frequently marked by a small but distinct pustule received into a dimple in the opposite valve ; this pustule may or may not coincide with the left anterior lateral lamina. In Beg ulna the sulcus is so extended by the torsion of the hinge as to become tubular, though this perforation is prob- ably closed by an organic plug in the living shell. The escutcheon is frequently linear or obsolete; when present it is usually limited by a ridge or keel. The pallial line is almost invariably entire, but in Cardiocardita ajar there is a broad posterior scar in front of the posterior adductor which simulates an indentation of the line and is probably caused by some enlargement of the siphonal muscles. The valves are usually white within and the color of tlie exterior is dull, except in a few tropical species. The group is of ancient origin and has Mesozoic representatives, but only those of Tertiary and Recent horizons will be considered here. Q^^ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV.j The living species are largely shallow water forms, especially the byssiferous types, but some of the minute species occur at con- siderable depths; the Arctic type, Cydocardla, occurs in 822 fathoms (1,707 meters), and Cali/ptogena in 322 fathoms (669 meters). In America Cardita s.s. and Venericardia s.s., Miodon, Calyp- togena, Milneria and Carditella are restricted to the Pacific coast ; while Pleuromeris and Pteromeris are known, so far, only from the Atlantic. The Pacific coast has twenty -seven and the Atlantic coast only twelve species of Carditacea, Carditamera with seven and Gyclocardia with fifteen being the most prolific in species. Of those enumerated in this paper seven are new. It seems that the world musters, as a whole, only about sixty species; the two Americas thirty-nine, and the Pacific coast nearly half of all that are known. The Carditacea are divided into Carditidce, with the ligament and resilium external and united, and Condi/locardiidce, with the resilium immersed and the hinge in a more or less permanently imperfectly developed state. The Carditidce comprise two subfamilies: Cardiiinoe, with the marsupium dorsal, or superior, and not reflected in the structure of the valves; and Theealiince, with the marsupium ventral, or infe- rior, and protected by an infolding or indentation of the inner shelly layer of the valves. The subdivisions of these groups are as follows : Subfamily OARDITIN^. Genus CAEDITA (Bruguiere, 1792), Lamarck, 1799. Type Chama calyculata Linne' (+ Mytilicardita Anton, 1839; Mytilicardia Herrm., 1847). Valves elongate-quadrate, strongly radially ribbed, very inequi- lateral and with a narrow byssal gape. Section Cardita s.s. Hinge with two left and three right cardinals, the laterals obso lete in the adult. Sectiou Carditamera Conrad, 1838. Type Cardita araia Conrad. Valves with the laterals well developed in tiie adult, the right 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 699 anterior cardinal often obsolete. Lazaria Gray, 1854, and Laza- riella Sacco, 1899, are sjTionymous. Section Glans Megerle, 1811. Type C. trapezia Linne. Valves short, quadrate, convex ; shell small ; the posterior right cardinal often obsolete. Subgenus BEGUINA Bolten, 179S. Type Chama phreiietica Born, 1780. Shell large, mytiliform, subcompressed, with feeble, radial sculp- ture, the umbones terminal, the hinge arcuate and drawn out, the lunule tubular, the posterior cardinals much elongated, the laterals absent. Azarella Gray, 1854, is synonymous. A single ludo- Pacific species is known. Genus VENERICAE.DIA Lamarck, ISOl. Type V. imbricata Lamarck, Parisian Eocene. Shell rounded-trigonal, strongly radially ribbed, lunule minute and deep, escutcheon linear, the hinge with two t ransvei-sely striated cardinals in the left and three in the right valve, a sub- lunular pustule sometimes present in the left valve, bat the laterals absent or obsolete. Megacardita Sacco, 1899, is synonymous. Subgenus CARDIOCARDITA Anton, 1839. Type Cardita ajar Bruguiere. Hinge like Venericardia s.s,, pallial line with a broad scar in front of the posterior adductor scar; Agaria (5ray, 1847; Acii- noholus Morch, 1853, and Azaria Tryon, 1872, are synonymous. Subgenus COSSMANNELLA Mayer Eymar, 1897. Type Cardita cegyptiaca Fraas, Eocene. Shell elongate-oval, the cardinal teeth feeble, the ribs slender and distant, the palhal line entire. Subgenus CARDITES Link, 1807. Type Cardita antiquata Linne (sp. ) ^ C. sulcata Bruguiere. Shell like Venericardia s.s., but the anterior right cardinal absent, the laterals obsolete. 700 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., Section Cardites s.s. Shell with external coloration, frequenting the warmer seas. Section Cyclocardia Conrad, 1867. Type Cardita borealis Conrad. Shell white, with a rude periostracum j frequenting the boreal seas or cold abysses. Arclurus (xray, 1839, not Cuvier, 1829; Adinoholus Morse, 1869, and Scalaricardita Sacco, 1899, are syn- onymous. Subgenus PLETJROMERIS Conrad, 1867. Type Cardita tridentata Say, not Reeve. Shell small, subtriangular, subequilateral, the hinge like Veneri- cardia, but the anterior and posterior right cardinals feeble, the left valve with feeble anterior and posterior laterals. Subgenus PTEROMERIS Conrad, 1862. Type Astarte perjilana Conrad. Shell small, high, oblique, with narrow umbones, radial ribbing, a well-marked lunule and escutcheon, the hinge as in Cardites. Coripia De Gregorio, 1885, is synonymous. Subgenus MIODON Carpenter, 1864 (not of Sandberger, 1870). Type M. prolongatus Carpenter. Shell not very different from Pteromeris, but not compressed, and with the posterior (instead of the anterior) right cardinal absent and a posterior right and anterior left lateral developed feebly. Subgenus NEOCARDIA Sowerby, 1892. Type N, angulata Sowerby, South Africa. Shell small, wing-shaped, resembling Pteromeris. Hinge as in Cardites except that long posterior laterals are said to be present, with no anterior laterals, the cardinals diminutive. Genus CALYPTOGENA Dall, 1891. Type C. pacifica Dall. Pliocene and Recent. Shell large, oblong, chalky, with only faint concentric sculpture, a well-marked escutcheon, but no lunule, the inner margins smooth, an anterior lateral in each valve; hinge formula ttVIItV,- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 701 Subfamily THBOALIIN^. Genus THECALIA H. and A. Adams, 1857. Type T. concamerata Bruguiere (sp, ), South Africa. Shell like a small Carditamera externally; the female has in each valve a funicular infold of the inner layer of the shell to serve as a marsupium, which, when the valves are closed, is completely internal ; the male only a small byssal gape in the same region. Hinge with two cardinals in each valve, the posterior right cardinal absent, the middle right cardinal large and produced behind ; there is an anterior lateral in each valve. The eggs are discharged into the marsupium, which is lined by a fold of the mantle, and remain there until the young shells are well advanced beyond the prodis- soconch stage. Genus MILNERIA Call, 18S1. Type Ceropsis minima Dall, 1871. Recent. California. Shell very small and trapezoidal, flattened on the ventral side ; the female with a dome-like indentation of the ventral margins of the valves, which is closed below only by a fold of the mantle and not included within the closed valves ; hinge with two left and three right cardinals, the posterior left lateral, posterior and anterior right cardinals minute and recognizable only in the best-developed specimens, which have the formula ^ o loioi • '^^^ "^^^® ^^ byssi- ferous and the species habitually nestles on flat surfaces, particu- larly the backs of Haliotis shells. The name Ceropsis being preoccupied since 1839 in Coleoptera by Solier, it was replaced by Milneria. The young are incubated as in Thecalia. Cabralia (Schmitzii) Boehm, 1899, from the Miocene of the Azores, was referred to the Carditidce, but appears to belong in the VeneridcB near Venerupis, its hardly sinuated pallial line being paralleled in Chione, etc. Family OONDYLOCARDIID^. Genus ERYCINELLA Conrad, 1845. Type E. ovalis Convsid (not of S. Wood). Miocene of Virginia. Shell small, oval, radially sculptured, with the ligament external ; the resilium internal and placed medially between two cardinals in 702 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., each valve, the lateral edges of the chondrophore slightly raised, so as to resemble ia some specimens two feeble cardinals ; feeble elongate posterior right and anterior left laterals fit into grooves in the opposite valve margins; the inner ventral margins crenulate. Subgenus CARDITELLA E. A. Smith, 1881. Type C. jmllida Smith, Magellan Straits. Valve trigonal, with strong radial sculpture with two cardinals in each valve, of which the right posterior is ill defined, the resilium sunken behind the two developed cardinals ; the ligament is feeble, but there is a developed anterior and posterior lateral in each valve. Subgenus CARDITOPSIS E. A. Smith, 1881. Type C. flahellmn Reeve. Chile. Like Carditella except that the ligament is obsolete and the re- silium sunken between the beaks as in Erycinella. Genus CONDYLOCARDIA Bernard, 1897. Type C. pauliana Bernard. Atlantic Islands. Shell minute, with conspicuous prodissoconch, the hinge teeth only partially developed out of the nepionic state, so that it is difiicult to decide what portions of a continuous lamina should be regarded as cardinal or lateral; subject to this caveat, the formula of the hinge of the type species is \ p ^jp^i'" ; when compared ^"^^^-^ RToiHbi)' ^^'^^ch is the formula of Erycinella, the relationship is fairly evident ; the sculpture is variable in the different species, but predominantly radial as a rule, the animal viviparous, another link with the Carditidce. East American Species. Cardita (Carditamera) gracilis Shuttleworth, 1856. Blauquilla, Tortuga and Margarita Islands, Dautzenberg ; Porto Rico, Blauner; Virgin Islands, St. Thomas, Swift; Tampa Bay, Florida, Coll. U. S. N. Mus., 54,141. This is a small and delicate representative of C. arata of the Florida Pliocene. Cardita (Carditamera) fioridana Conrad, 1838. Cape Canaveral on the east coast of Florida, thence south and west through the Gulf of Mexico to Yucatan, in shallow water. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 703 Cardita gibbosa Reeve, 1843, is synonymous. Courad, in 1832, figured an East Indian species on the strength of a valve said to come from Tampa Bay, which he identified with Sowerby's C. in- crassata, and which was renamed G. conradi by Shuttleworth in 1856. This has been referred by Tryon, in 1872, to Tampa Bay, but the species was undoubtedly exotic and should be expunged from American lists. ■? Cardita (Carditamera) pectunculus Bragui^re, 1792. Gulf of Paria, Guppy; South America, Hanley; Madagascar, Reeve (?). I feel some doubt as to the species thus named by Guppy, having seen no specimens. Lister's shell so named by Bruguiere may have been a large specimen of C. gracilis. The shell figured under this name by Reeve is almost certainly the West American C. affinis Broderip, and his locality erroneous. ^Cardita (Carditamera) minima Guppy, 1867. West Indies ; Trinidad ? Guppy. Also Pliocene. A small, apparently immature species from Matura, Trinidad, is listed by Guppy in 1867 and 1874 among his Pliocene species, and noted as occurring also in the Recent state. These might well be the young of C. gracilis. Cardita (Glans) dominguensis Orbigny, 1853. Cuba and St. Domingo, Orbigny; Cape Hatteras, N. C, and southward to Florida and the Gulf of Mexico, in 36 to 124 fathoms; U. S. Fish Commission steamer ' ' Albatross. ' ' Readily recognizable by its squarish form with bright and vari- able yellow, red and brown coloration in the southern part of its range. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) borealis Conrad, 1S31. Ashe Inlet, Hudson Strait, R. Bell ; Labrador, Stearns, in 3 to 10 fathoms; and southward in gradually increasing depths of water, as the surface grows warmer, to the vicinity of Cape Hatteras, where it has been found living to the depth of 250 fathoms, and dead valves to 435 fathoms ; the latter may, however, have been disgorged by fishes after the digestion of the soft parts. This species has been referred to Say's V- granulata, a Miocene form which is smaller, more ventricose and less oblique, with fewer ribs. It is, in part, the Arctiirus riidis of Humphrey (MS.), TlH ntOeSSUING^ OF IHE d.CE3XY OF [Ntu., .i.>.'niiat^ 0^ Gray, in ISS^. and Ike Cardita vfstita of Beshavei. ^ VJ. T*e Toang aw attadscd to sctmft? in shallow \raier by a .- bTssal tfanread. but tfee sheik do not sape and the adults :.' tvTssia;. Ttte lemate? aw viviparoui, containing a mulii- : Tixiug a: tJse pt^jper season, which aw retained within the : . = 7 until tisje adut: rrpe of scuipiure succeed^ the smooth pro- i:- efeva&ed. oblique. Tather convex, with the body of U;. vjLive- iuboTbtcuMr. oTered by a pitoee peiit»tracum on which iWtkV hairf anj arranswi in redialing lines. Titete are from iifieen C'j Tw«nty-«3Qe Iwwr ladaal ribs, whicii in the young are usually mijEe or £ess beaded. Tiii; spiecttss rias not bieen reported from CTreemami or SpiEsiaeigec.. Tib? average Eempeiature for seventy - Dxnr kcaiioe; wfaert it was found living wa- oS.'v'^'^ F.. the lowest 3?*^, a^ the higfesc 5^"= T. 2v:?«rfQandiand dd Cane Ci'>d. sptixingty, with liie tvpieal form. All tfer CTeijQcaidias isaxe a miTmal and a more elongated lomi which t osoaliv more mnqnesesd. Aiter the examination of a TCBv iax^ saies, I fiwri ho olker ciiaiacteEs by which this vaxiecy DMv ioe separaBed from tiie type, iiujse mentioned by Prof. Morse in hi§ dia.s3^3^ iaein^ injOMKtani. The tendency k. however, for tise nnmJoer rif rilK in the ■variety d: oe siightiy tes than in the tvpe. (T J I im 1 1 il ii I 'prsMzat Giia:iltl l5o<. Oe tfae mixitii of the Kk- 3»^r>j. Argentina; "VTilfcK Expbring Btsnarkabiy Hlr<' T. kmtalii. ovc mtire eompr^ted, and with 1. ■ il: 15 nfas. Ir ik»>uLi be compared with T. mmprena JReeve, ^TWSTuaxdi^ (Cyi^oexcdia 'P'li'H* Ball. IMI. Henreeu thtr ^lisaasippi deha and C«dar Edsys, Fia., in 24 to 1^) fxtkoD^. mud and sand, tin^ Doitom temperature 52" to 66° F. : TT. 6. ¥m. ConunisHon steamer • Albair»Das. fioaall, eoavex. eievated. with 17-i'l ratiieT aparsely beaded libe, with sibeqaal. cnae^-siriaticd ci^nneis. and a smoiilh lunuie of m»xi- enue iia&. It i- mudi numi eteganiiy scuiptured liian tiie young of V. burrtaUi at the same diameter. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 705 Venericardia (Cyolocardia) moniliata Call, 1W2. East of Rio Janeiro, in 59 fathoms, mud, bottom temperature 57° F. ; U. S. FL^h Commission steamer " Albatross." Small, with rather large, distinctly limited, smooth lunule and escutcheon, and about 24 slender, closely beaded radial ribs, with subequal striated interspaces. Venericardia (Pleuromeris) tridentata Say, 1826. Off Cape Hatteras, X. C, and southward to Florida and the Gulf of Mexico, in 36 to 124 fathoms. This is not the species figured by Reeve in 1843 under this name. The latter is an exolic. The present species is also found fossil in the Miocene and Pliocene Tertiary marls of the Atlantic coast. . Venericardia (Pteromeris^ perplana Conrad, 1841. Cape Hatteras, N. C, and southward to Florida and the Gulf of Mexico, from near low water to 52 fathoms. Ako Upper Miocene and Pliocene of the Carolinas. Small, oblique, wing-shaped, compressed and radially ribbed ; sometimes rather bright-colored and always variable. V. obliqua Bush, 1885, is synonymous, and Conrad, after describing the fossil as a Cardita, put it, in 1845, in the genus Astarte, and, because of an earlier Astarte perplana, changed the specific name to radians. A year later he named the recent shell from Tampa Bay Astarte flabel/a. A shorter, more feebly sculptured form from the York- town and Duplin Miocene he named Cardita abbreviata, but tliis while the ruling form in the earlier beds is gradually supplanted by V. perplana, and 1 have not seen it in the Recent slate. Carditopsis smithii Dal), 18%. Bermuda. This is figured under the name of Cardita doming uemit Orbigny in the list of marine mollusks added to the fauna of the Bermudas by Verrill and Bush in Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci., X, p. 517, PI. LXIII, figs. 6, 7, 8, 1900. It is a minute brownish shell, subtri- gonal in shape, with beaded radial sculpture and an internal resilium. Xo species of Cardita or Venericardia has as yet been identified from Bermuda. 706 proceedings of the academy of [nov., Notes. I have not beeu able to find in the literature the Cardita minima of Sowerby, to which Guppy refers a Recent and Pliocene form from Trinidad. The Cardita " affinis Shuttleworth " of Morch's Poulsen catalogue, from the West Indies, is probably due to a momentary mental confusion between C. gracilis Shuttleworth and C. affinis of the Pacific coast. At any rate, I have not been able to discover any such species in the literature. Cardita dadylus Bruguiere and C. cardiioidea Blainville, from the Antilles, belong to Coralliophaga. Cardita incrassata Conrad is exotic, and Car- dita ovata C. B. Adams, 1845, is Venus pygmcea Lamarck, as I have proved by an examination of the types at Amherst. I regard the Miocene Venericardia granulata Say, to which Conrad's V. borealis has been referred by Verrill and Bush, as suiBciently distinct. Cardita ardica Bruguiere is referable to Saxicava. West American Species. Cardita Grayi Ball, 1902. Cape St. Lucas, the Gulf of California and south to Panama and the Galapagos Islands. ' Trapezoidal and inflated, this is a very recognizable species. The Cardita incrassata cited by Carpenter in 1864 from the Galapagos Islands is probably this species. It is Cardita crassa Gray in Beeclmfs Voyage, 1839, but not of Lamarck, 1819. Cardita (laticostata) Sowerby,i 1832. Guaymas, Mexico, and south to Panama and Guayaquil. This shell has the aspect of C. floridana, but the hinge is desti- tute of lateral teeth, unless we regard the lunular pustule as a tooth. C. tricolor Sowerby, 1832, is a color variety, and C. angimlcataUeexe, 1843, has been claimed by Tryon, 1872, to be only a variety with flatter ribs and narrower channels. Cardita turgida Valenciennes, 1846, not Lamarck, 1819, is synonymous, according to Carpenter. Cardita (Carditameral aflftnis Sowerby, 1832. Margarita Bay on the west coast of Lower California, the Gulf of California, and southward to Panama. Large, elongate, with small cardinal teeth; the northern speci. ^ Not Cardita laticostata Pusch, 1837. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 707 mens darker colored and larger, forming the variety named Lazaria californica by Deshayes in 1852. The ribbing is relatively stronger in the young, and in the adult is often obsolete anteriorly. The animals adhere by a strong byssus and, when crowded, the anterior end is arcuate and attenuated ; but when growing freely this is much less marked. A specimen has been figured by Reeve for C. pedunculus Brug. Cardita (Carditamera) radiata Sowerby, 1852. Punta Arenas, Costa Rica, to Panama Bay and Guayaquil, in 6 to 12 fathoms. Very similar to C. affinis, but with a very different hinge and more checkered coloration. The lunule is also larger and wider than in that species. C. arcella Valenciennes, 1846, figured on the plates of the Voyage of the Venus, but never described, may, perhaps, have been intended for this species. Cardita (Carditamera) subquadrata Carpenter, 1865. Skidegate Channel, Queen Charlotte Islands, in 20 fathoms, Newcombe ; Straits of Fuca and southward to the Santa Barbara Channel and Todos Santos Bay, Lower California. Small, solid, subquadrate, speckled with brown. The soft parts are yellow with brown spots on the mantle edge, Cardita (Glans) sulcosa Dall, 1902. Panama Bay, in 18 to 30 fathoms, sand; U. S. Fish Commission steamer " Albatross." Small, quadrate, variegated in color, with a deep sulcus in the posterior end which emarginates the border of the shell. Cardita (Glans) naviformis Reeve, 1843. Valparaiso, Chile, in 25 fathoms, sandy mud, Cuming. Small, rectangular, very inequilateral, the beaks almost terminal, the posterior end squarely truncate, with 12-15 scaly ribs. Venericardia crassicostata Sowerby, 1825. Gulf of California and southward to the Galapagos Islands. This fine, variably colored species is Cardita jiammea Michelin, 1830, C. tumida and varia of Broderip, 1832. The differences are merely of color, the form being very uniform. The Cardita crassicosta of Lamarck is a typical Cardita, but if the name given by Sowerby in the Tankervilie catalogue be thought too close, Michelin' s name must be adopted. 708 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Nov., Venericardia Cuvieri Broderip, 1832. Gulf of Fonseca, iu 11 fathoms, 7 miles off shore, Cuming; and south to Panama. G. michelini Valenciennes, 1846, is synonymous. This fine species with heavy crenate ribs can hardly be mistaken for any other. It appears to be exceptionally rare. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) spurca Sowerby, 1832. Iquique, Peru, and southward to Ihe west coast of Patagonia, in 61 fathoms, bottom temperature 54° F. An inflated rotund species with about 20 narrow beaded ribs, with wider interspaces and covered with an olivaceous gray perios- tracum. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) velutina Smith, 1881. Port Rosario and Wolsey anchorage, 17 to 30 fathoms, sand and rock. Smith ; west coast of Patagonia and Magellan Straits, in 77 to 369 fathoms, mud, bottom temperature 46° to 48° F. ; U. S. Fish Commission steamer "Albatross." Much like V. spurca, but a thinner and lighter shell more deli- cately sculptured, with a larger and longer lunule and a very much more delicate hinge. It has about 20 ribs. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) compressa Reeve, 1843. Valparaiso, Chile; Portland Bay, West Patagonia, and in 20 fathoms, stony and shelly bottom, Boija Bay, Smith. I have not seen this species, but from the figures it must be close to Gould's V. procera, and if the species extends in the cold water on both coasts of the southern part of South America, as some others do, they may be identical, and in that case Reeve's name has precedence. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) barbarensis Stearns, 1890. Station 2,840, in the Santa Barbara Channel, in green mud, at the depth of 276 fathoms, and at Station 2,909, in 205 fathoms, bottom temperature 45.2° F. ; U. S. Fish Commission steamer " Albatross." Shell very thiu and delicate, with about twenty low ribs, slightly granular in the young and becoming obsolete distally in the adult, the lunule small and obscure. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 709 Venericardia (Cyclocardia) ventricosa Gould, 1850. Puget Sound, U. S. Exploring Expedition ; Vancouver Island (Newcombe), and southward to Los Coronados Islands off Lower California, living in 31 to 252 fathoms, soft bottom, temperature 43 2° to 58° F. A small, plump, rounded species, with 20-21 low, broad, radial ribs, with shallow narrower interspaces, crossed by flattish narrow concentric ridges, recalling basket-work, and covered by a gray or yellowish-brown velvety periostracum, the hairs of which are disposed in radial lines. Gould's types comprised two species, of which one which he figured is selected to carry his name. The other, represented by a single specimen, was unfortunately figured as his type in Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIII, Plate XVI, figs. 5 and 6 in 1890.' It was not until this revision was undertaken that the discrepancy was observed. Gould's diagnosis refers partly to each species. Venericardia (ventricosa var.?) Gouldii Dall. Station 2,923, in 822 fathoms, mud, off San Diego, Cal., bottom temperature 39° F. ; U. S. Fish Commission steamer " Albatross." Shell ovate, subcompressed, with 23 ribs, sculpture similar to that of V. ventricosa but feebler, with concentric ridges only in front of the low beaks, and the color paler, the lunule much smaller, and the lunular cardinals thin and feeble. The animal was alive when dredged and appears, from the dried remains, to have had a much smaller foot than V. ventricosa. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) stearnsii DaU, 1902. Puget Sound, with V. ventricosa, U. S. Exploring Expedition under Wilkes. SheU short, plump, strong, with very high prosogyrate beaks and about 19 strong, rudely nodulous radial ribs with narrower interspaces and a dark-brown pilose periostracum. It has been figured as mentioned under V. ventricosa, having been erroneously taken as the type of that species by the writer. It is a much shorter and higher shell with a very small deeply impressed lunule and strong hinge, in which the lunular pustule in the left valve is conspicuous. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) monilicosta Gabb, 1861. Pleistocene of Santa Barbara, Cal., Jewett. This resembles V. ventricosa Gould, but is more compressed, very 710 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., much more equilateral, and has the lunule and the interspaces between the ribs deeper, and the latter more channeled. It has 17-18 ribs crossed by rounded concentric ridges with the radial channels sharply cross -striated. There are also marked differences in the hinge, which is much more delicate than in V. ventricosa. It has not yet been reported living, but is noted here because it has been united with some of the recent species by Gabb and Cooper. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) incisa Dall, 1902. Aleutian region, from Unalashka to the Semidi Islands, in 6 to 75 fathoms, sand or mud, Dall. Shell small, with a polished yeUowish-olive periostracum, with 18-20 flat radial ribs separated by linear incised sulci, and crossed by similar concentric sulci ; interior white, often with a yellow flush in the cavity of the valves. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) alaskana Dall. Arctic Ocean, north of Bering Strait, from Point Barrow south to the Strait and Bering Sea, the south coast of the Okhotsk Sea, the Aleutian Islands, and eastward and southward along the Alaskan coast as far as the harbor of Sitka, in depths varying from 7 to 313 fathoms, with a bottom temperature from 35° to 46.2° F. Also North Japan, in 4-7 fathoms This species is that which from the Pacific has usually been named V. borealis Conrad, and I can only ascribe the long accept- ance of this determination, made by Dr. Carpenter, to the absence of a good series of the Eastern shell. After comparing them no one can hesitate to separate them specifically. There is a distance of several thousand miles between their nearest points of approach to each other in range, as far as known. In a general way, until Dr. Stearns looked into the matter ,in 1890, all the Pacific Cy- clocardias were lumped together under the name of borealis Conrad. The present species is ovate, compressed, with 23-25 uniform and elegant radial ribs with narrower interspaces, distinct to the margin of the shell and covered with a dark yellow -brown velvety perios- tracum, the hairs in close radial lines. The ribs are slightly granu- lar near the low beaks ; the lunule narrow and long. The hinge is solid, with the right anterior and posterior cardinals nearly obso- lete ; the interior is chalky white and is figured in the Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIII, PI. XVI, fig. 8, under the name of C. borealis. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 711 It attains a height of 35, a length of 39, and a diameter of 16 mm. The animal is viviparous and incubates an enormous number of young shells until the adult sculpture is fairly initiated. The brood is fully ripe in August in the Arctic Sea, and about June 1 in the Aleutian Islands. The variability of the shell is chiefly in outline, some specimens being longer than others. Venericardia (Cyclooardia) rudis Gray, 1839. Off the Sea Horse Islands, between Point Barrow and Icy Cape, in 23 fathoms, E. E. Smith; south through Bering Strait and Sea, among the Aleutian Islands, and eastAvard to Kadiak, in 10 to 60 fathoms, bottom temperature 35° to 45° F., Dall. Shell squarish, compressed, with high, almost posterior beaks; the lunular region deeply indented ; the hinge broad and massive ; the interior white or more or less tinted with livid purple ; sculpture of 12-16 low radial ribs, distally obsolete, with narrower shallow interspaces, with no granulations, covered by a smooth horny brown periostracum, often rude and eroded; height 29, length 31, diame- ter 16 mm. Gray, in his description of the shells of Beechey's voyage to the Pacific and Bering Strait, cites Arcturus rudis Humphrey, MS., as a synonym of the Pacific shells which he identifies with Cardita borealis Conrad. As this is the only name associated with the Bering Strait shells except horealis, and it is evident that Gray recognized only one species among them, I have revived the name for the ruder form of the two known to inhabit that region. In well-developed specimens the hinge plate is relatively almost as broad and heavy as in V. planicosta Lam. It is easily distin- guished from V. alashana by the fewer ribs, smooth periostracum, and prominent beaks with the resulting broad hinge plate. Venericardia (Miodon) prolongatus Carpenter, 1864. Middleton Island, Alaska, in Lat. 59° 35' N., in 12 fathoms, gravel, and south to ISTeeah Bay at the entrance to the Straits of Fuca. A small, elevated shell, of pale gray color, and very much the sculpture of V. incisa. It is notable for its prominent beaks and oblique form and was figured in the Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. , XIII, PI. XVI, figs. 7 and 9, in 1890. Like the other species, it is viviparous. 712 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Nov. , Calyptogena pacifica Ball, 1891. Clarence Strait, Alaska, in 322 fathoms, muddy bottom, tem- perature 42.4° F. ; U. S. Fish Commission steamer " Albatross." Also fossil in the Pliocene of Los Angeles, Cal. An oblong, heavy, dull and chalky shell ^vith no radial sculpture and with a grayish-green periostracum over a nearly smooth surface. Milneria minima Dall, 1871. Monterey, Cal, south to Cerros Island, Lower California, usually nestling on the backs of the shells of Haliotis. Originally described as Ceropsis minima, the generic name being preoccupied, was changed to Milneria in 1881. A minute, tra- pezoidal white shell, of which the females have a dome-shaped indentation on the ventral surface lined and closed by an extension of the mantle, in which the young are incubated. It is figured in Proc. U. S. Nat. 3Ius., VIII, PL XXIV, figs. 4 to 7, and also in Fischer's Manual. Carditella pallida E. A. Smith, iS9l. Port Rosario, Western Patagonia, in 2 to 30 fathoms. A small fan-shaped whitish shell with an internal resilium and 12 to 15 strong radial ribs. There is a small external ligament. Carditella semen Reeve, 1813. Off Mexillones, Atacama Desert, Bolivia, in three fathoms, Cuming. Ovate, olive-brown, with flattish ribs, very minute. Carditella tegulata Reeve, 1843. ^^alparaiso, Chile, in 25 fathoms, Cuming. Said by Smith to differ from C. pallida by being more inequi- lateral, less triangular and has only twelve ribs. It is certainly very closely allied. Carditopsis flabellum Reeve, 1843. Valparaiso, Chile, Cuming ; and the western part of the Straits of Magellan, in 61 fathoms, bottom temperature 47.9°; U. S. Fish Commission steamer " Albatross." Differs from C. pallida by the greater delicacy of the lateral teeth, a larger resilium, and the absence of any external hgament, according to Smith. 1902,] natural sciences of philadelphia. 713 Notes. Cardita nodulosa Lamarck is a Japanese species, but on Valen- ciennes' plates of the Voyage of the Venus, 1846, according to Carpenter, a West American species, probably C. affinis Sowerby, 1832, is so named by Valenciennes. In this citation and Carpen- ter's reprint by the Smithsonian InsLitulion the name is misprinted modulosa, both in text and index. In Carpenter's Report to the British Association, 1864, p. 287, a " Cardita incrassatus Tieiiier " is cited from the Proceedings of the Zoological Society for 1852, p. 157. No such species occurs in the locality mentioned, or any- where in the P. Z. S., or elsewhere that I have been able to discover. It is, perhaps, a case of misplacement of an index slip in the original MS. C. incrassata Conrad is said to be a variety of C. antiquata, and is not West American. Descriptions of New Species. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) armilla u- sp. Shell small, rounded, moderately inflated, nearly equilateral, white with a pale brownish periostracum ; sculpture of from 17 to 21 well-marked, rounded ribs with subequal interspaces; these ribs are beaded with rounded or ovate nodules and continue to the ven- tral margin of the valves, the interspaces are conspicuously cross- striated; beaks full, elevated, proeogyrate, with a small, slightly impressed smooth cordate lunule and very narrow escutcheon ; inner margins strongly crenate. Height 9, length 8, diameter 6 mm, U. S. Fish Commission stations 2,399, 2,400 and 2,407, in the northern part of the Gulf of Mexico between the Mississippi delta and Cedar Keys, in 24 to 196 fathoms, bottom temperature 51° to 66° F. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 93,370. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) moniliata n. sp. Shell small, rounded, moderately inflated, nearly equilateral, white, with 20 to 24 radial narrow ribs with wider, cross -striated interspaces; the ribs are sculptured with fine, small, sharp, close-set tubercles, the beaks small, nearly erect, the lunule lanceolate and smooth, the escutcheon similar but longer; internal margins minutely crenate; there is a distinct lateral and socket in each valve, the anterior lateral being in the left valve. Height and length 6.5, diameter 4 mm. 714 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ( NoV. , Off Rio Janeiro, Brazil, in 59 fathoms, bottom temperature 57° F. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 96,132. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) Gouldii n. sp. Shell thin, ovate, inequilateral, moderately inflated with about 23 low, broad, rounded ribs with much narrower shallow interspaces, the antex'ior ribs slightly creuulated by fine transverse ridges, the ribs behind the umbones nearly smooth, covered by a yellowish- brown periostracum; lunule very small and impressed, escutcheon linear; inner margin creuulated below, hinge plate delicate, nar- row, without marked laterals. Height 13.5, length 16.5, diame- ter 8 mm., the beaks somewhat eroded. This species may possibly be a variety of V. ventricosa, corre- sponding in its relation to that species with V. novanglicB Morse, in its relation to V. borealis. But the probabilities are against it. The measurements of the two most related and geographically most adjacent forms are as follows : V. ventricosa, height 17.5, length 19, diameter 15.5 mm. V. stearnsii, height 14.5, length 13.5, diameter 11 mm. Only one, a living specimen, of V. Gouldii was obtained at a depth of 822 fathoms, off San Diego, Cal. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 109,270. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) incisa n. sp. Shell small, polished, with a smooth lively olive-green perios- tracum over 18 to 20 flat radial ribs separated by linear incised sulci and crossed by similar concentric sulci, about as distant as the ribs are wide, lunule almost obsolete, no escutcheon visible ; beaks moderately high, somewhat anterior ; hinge delicate, internal margins strongly crenate ; siphonal end of the valves usually over- grown by a commensal minute hydroid; height 10, length 9.5, diameter 5.3 mm. Numerous specimens were obtained at different localities. The types were compared with the Carditas in most of the Museums of Northern Europe and appeared distinct. Type from Unalashka in 16 fathoms. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 109,267. Venericardia (Cyclocardia) stearnsii Ball. Venericardia ventricosa Gould, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIII, p. 216, 1890, ex parte; and PI. XVI, figs. 5. 6. Puget Sound 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 715 Venerioardia (Cyolocardia) alaskana Ball. Venericardia borealis Conrad, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. XIII, p. 216, 1890, ex parte ; and PI. XVI. fig. 8. Bering Sea. Cardita (Glans) sulcosa n. sp. Shell small, trapezoidal, with small elevated prosogyrate beaks, the lunule small and deeply impressed, escutcheon linear; from the beaks a wide and shallow sulcus extends to the lower posterior margin which it distinctly emarginales; sculpture of about 23 flat- topped ribs with much narrower channeled interspaces ; the ribs are crossed by concentric elevated ridges, thus producing annulations which are more conspicuous on the sides than at the top of the ribs; the coloration is of dark -brown, red -brown and white, more or less articulated on the ribs ; interior white, the margins strongly crenu- lated. Height 7.5, length 8.5, diameter 6.5 mm. The only form with which this might be confused is the young of C cuvieri, which is less quadrate and has coarser sculpture and fewer ribs. Bibliography. For the majority of the citations in the text, reference may be had to the bibliographical list in the synopsis of the Lucinacea, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Museum, XXIII, pp. 781-784, but for those especially important for the Carditacea the following list is offered : 179a. Bruguiere, Encyclopedie Methodique, I, p. 401. 1801. Lamarck, Systeme des Animaux sans Vert^bres, p. 123. 1807. Link, Beschreibung der Rostock Sammlung, p. 153. 1824. Blainville, Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles, XXXII, p. 326. 1832. Broderip, Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, pp. 55-56. 1882. Sowerby, Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, pp. 194-195. 1838. Conrad, Fossils of the Medial Tertiary, p. 11. 1839. Anton, Verzeichniss der Conchyliensammlung, p. 10. 1839. Gray, Zoology of Beechey's Voyage to the Pacific, Mollusca, p. 152. 1840. Gray, Synopsis of the Contents of the British Museum. 1841. Conrad, American Journal of Science, XLI, p. 347. 1843. Reeve, Conchologica Iconica, I, Monograph of Cardita. 1845. Conrad, Fossils of the Medial Tertiary, p. 74. 1847. Gray, Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, p. 194. 1852. Deshayes, Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, pp. 100-103. 1853. MoRCH, Catalogus Conchyliorum .... comes de Yoldi, II, pp. 37-8. 1854. Gray, Annals and Magazine of Natural History, XIV, p. 22. 1857. H. and a. Adams, Genera of Recent Mollusca, II, pp. 486-488 716 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., 1863, Conrad, Proceedings Academy of Nat. Sciences of Pliiladelpliia for 1862, p. 578. 1864. Carpenter, Supplementary Keport to the British Association, 1863, p. 643 ; and Annals and Magazine of Nat. History, 3d series, XIV, p. 434. 1866. Conrad, Checklist of Eocene Fossils of North America, p. 5. 1867. Conrad, American Journal of Conchology, III, pp. 13, 191. 1869. Morse, Annual Report Peabody Academy of Sciences, Salem, Mass., p. 76. 1870. Sandberger, Land und Siisswasser Conchylien der Vorwelt, p. 3.5. 1871. Dall, American Journal of Conchology, VII, p. 153. 1872. Tryon, Proceedings of Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia, pp. 349-258. 1881. Dall, American Naturalist, p. 718. 1881. E. A. Smith, Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, p. 43. 1885. Dall, Proceedinsrs U. S. National Museum, VIII, p. 549. 1885. DeGregorio, Bollettino Societa Malacologica Italiano, X, p. 153. 1890. Stearns, Proceedings XJ. S. Nat. Museum, XIII, pp. 314-320. 1891. Dall, Proceedings U. S. Nat. Museum, XIV, p. 189. 1893. SowERBY, Marine Shells of South Africa, p. 63. 1895. Dall, Proceedings U. S. Nat. Museum, XVII, p. 713. 1896, • Dall, State University of Iowa, Natural History Bulletin, II, p. 16. 1896. Bernard, Bulletin Musee d'Histoire Naturelle a Paris, II. 1897. Bernard, Journal de Conchyliologie, XLIV, p. 197, 1897, Mayer Eymar, Journal de Conchyliologie, XLIV, p. 367, 1899. BoEHM, Verhandlung. d. deutscheu geol. Gesellschaft, Vol. 50, p. 37, 1899. Sacco, Bollettino dei Musei de Zoologia, Universita di Torino. XIV, No. 349, pp. 111-113 (May); and Moll, dei terrene terziare del Piemonte e della Liguria, XXVII, pp. 5-33 (September). 1902,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 717 NOTES ON THE ORTHOPTERA OF NEW MEXICO AND WESTERN TEXAS BY JAMES A. G. REHN. The great part of the material on which this study is based was collected for the Academy in the spring and early summer of 1902 by Mr. H. L. Viereck and the author. All specimens from Ysleta and El Paso, Tex., and Alamogordo, Cloudcroft and Highrolls, N. M., were thus collected. A general geographical and biotic study of the localities in the Sacramento mountain region, New Mexico, will be published later in these Proceedings. Specimens belonging to the United States National Museum were examined in conjunction with the Academy material, and such specimens are designated in this paper by the initials of that insti- tution. The loan of this material was secured through the kind- ness of Mr. W. H. Ashmead. The fine recent work by Messrs. Scudder and CockerelP on the Orthoptera of New Mexico has proven of great value in studying this collection. Family BLATTIDu^. Homoeogamia subdiapliaiia Scudder. Ten males, one female. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 11, May 5 and June 6 and 7, 1902. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. June 8, 1902. As the female of this species has not been described I append a short description : Form ovate, the abdomen very broad. Pronotum similar to that of the male in general outline. Supraanal plate transverse, the posterior margin rounded and centrally emargiuate. General color wood-brown, edged on the pro- and mesonotum with ochraceous. Pro-, meso- and metanotum centrally ornamented with blotches of ochraceous, the penultimate abdominal segment bearing lateral blotches of the same tint. ' Proc, Davenport Acad. Sci., IX, pp. 1-60, 1902. 718 PROCEEDINQ3 OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., Measurements. Total length, 11.5 mm. Length of pronotum, 4 " Width of pronotum, 6 " Width of abdomen, 8 " The first specimen of this species secured was taken while flitting along a roadside through mesquite {Prosopis) and greasewood (Larrea) brush. Several spe(.'imens were subsequently taken near the same spot, but the remainder were all taken at light. Family MANTID^. Litaneutria minor (Scudder). One immature specimen. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. May 1, 1902. Family PHASMID^. Diapheromera sp. One immature specimen. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 23, 1902. Family AORIDID^. Subfamily Acrydiinse. Paratettix toltecus (Saussure). Male and female. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. May 29 and 31, 1902. Tettigidea lateralis (Say). One female. Sacramento mountains, N, M., 5,000 feet elevation. October 4, collected by C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Subfamily Acridinse. Opeia obscura (Thomas). Two females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,000 feet elevation. October 2, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Cordillacris^ occipitalis (Thomas). One female. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 9, 1902. 2 For use of this name in place uT Alplia Brunner, see Rehn, Canad But., XXXIII, p. 271. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 719 Orphulella salina Scudder. One female. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 5,000 feet elevation. October 4, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Gomphocerus clavatus Thomas. One male. Cloudcroft, Otero county, N. M. May 24, 1902. Psoloessa maculipennis Scudder. Three males. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. May 8 and 30, 1902. One male. La Cueva, Organ mountains. Donna Ana county, N. M., about 5,300 feet elevation. August 30, C. H. T. Townsend. Psoloessa ferruginea Scudder. Two males. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. l^Iay 5 and 30, 1902. Stirapleura pusilla Scudder. Four males, eight females. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 14, 24 and 26, May 9 and 30, 1902. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. June 3 and 11, 1902, Stirapleura mescalero n. sp. Type; ?. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. June 9, 1902. Allied to S. tenuicarina and pusilla Scudder, but differing from the former in the non-sulcate frontal costa, the carinate vertex, rectangulate fastigium and the shorter wings, and from the latter in the non-sulcate frontal costa, the carinate vertex, the sub- trigonal lateral foveolie and the shallower mesosternal lobes. Form rather heavilv built. Head with the vertex slightly tumes- cent and bearing a marked median carina; fastigium subelliptical and considerably excavated, the margins well raised and rectaugu- late anteriorly, the carina of the vertex being continued forward over the greater portion of the fastigium; lateral foveolie sub- trigonal, the antero-superior angle being subobsoletc ; frontal costa strongly constricted superiorly and also to a slight degree above the ocellus, lateral margins expanding inferiorly and becoming obsolete, the entire lengtli plane and non-sulcate, the section inferior to the 720 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV. , ocellus being rather heavily punctate; eyes subovate, but slightly longer than the infraocular portion of the gense; antennae not equaling head and pronotum in length. Pronotum moderately constricted mesially, the lateral carinse being considerably expanded both antei'iorly and posteriorly ; median carina distinct, cut very slightly before the middle; posterior margin of the pronotum obtuse-angulate, the apex well rounded; lateral lobes subequal in width, the lower margin sinuate anteriorly, the surface finely gi'auu- late. Tegmina slightly exceeding the abdomen in length. Meso- sternal lobes i*ather deep, considerably deeper than half the width of the interspace. .t^General color reddish -brown, the sides of the head, upper por- tions of the lateral lobes of the pronotum, pleurae and V markings on the upper surface of the hind femora much darker in intensity than the general upper surface. Lower surface pale yellowish. Tegmina with traces of quadrate maculatious in the distal half. Measurements. Length of head and body, 24.5 mm. Length of pronotum, 4 " Length of tegmina, 15.5 " Length of hind femora, 12.5 " Subfamily CEdipodinae. Arphia teporata Scudder. Twenty-one males, nine females. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 30, May 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 12 and 16, 1902. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. May 29, June 2, 3, 12 and 13, 1902. Encoptolophus costalis (Scudder). One male. Ysleta, El Paso county, Tex. April 2, 1902. Encoptolophus parvus Scudder. Twenty-four juales, twenty-five females. Sacramento mountains, N, M. , 6, 500 feet elevation. C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Hippiscus corallipes (Haldeman). Three males, four females, one immature. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. May 29, June 1 and 2, 1902. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 721 Hippiscus zapotecus (Saussure). One male, three females. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. June il, 1902. This species is very closely related to H. corallipes and quite difficult to separate, Hippiscus pumilus Scudder. Fourteen males, one female. Cioudcroft, Otero county, N. M. May 21, 22, 23 and 24, 1902. Only previous Xew Mexican record from Taos Valley, northern Hew Mexico. Tropidolophus formosus (Say). One female. Luiias Well, Sacramento mountains, N. M. September 29, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Dissosteira Carolina (Linnfeus). One male, two females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 5,000-6,500 feet elevation. October 3 and 4, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Lactista boscanus n. sp. Type ; female. Ysleta, El Paso county, Tex. April 2, 1902. Apparently allied to L. pellepidus Saussure, but differing in the liueato-rugose pronotum, the acute-angulate posterior process of the prouotum, and in the hyaline and unclouded margin of the apex of the wing. General form deep, compressed. Head with the fastigium broad and very shallow, the margins but slightly elevated, anteriorly trun- cate; vertex rugose and bearing a central carina, which extends a considerable distance forward on the fastigium ; frontal costa rather broad, expanded above the ocellus, non-sulcate, heavily punctate; eyes ovate, about equal to the infraocular portion of the gense. Pro- notum with the metazone lineato-rugose, the lateral lobes with com- paratively slight rugosities; median carina low, most elevated on the prozona, the transverse sulcus well marked; posterior angle acute, the margin subconcave; posterior angle of the lateral lobes rotundate. Tegraina elongate, the costal field strongly developed basally. Posterior femora robust, the lower carina well developed but not strongly arched ; posterior tibite shorter than the femora. 40 722 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV. , General color dull asliy-brown, dirty yellowish beneath; limbs and eyes suffused with reddish brown ; antennae dull brownish, finely punctate with a darker tint. Tegmina -with faint traces of basal, median and pre-apical bands. Wings with the disk pale yellowish, the fuscous band rather broad, involving the posterior margin and sending out a rather broad but short humeral spur; apex hyaline, the nervures fuscous, the margins unclouded except the costal por- tion. Posterior tibiae grayish-blue, with a dull glaucous pre-geni- cular annulus ; spines basally glaucous, terminally black. Measurements. Length of head and body, 21 mm. Length of pronotum, 6 " Length of tegmina, 22 " Length of hind femora, 12.5 " Mestobregma asperum (Scudder). Twenty-four males, twenty -five females. Saci'amento mountains, IS". M., 6,500 feet deviation. October, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M. ;. Trimerotropis melanoptera McNeill. Two males. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,500 feet elevation. October 3, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.;. Only previous record is the type locality — Silver City (Bruner). Trimerotropis vinculata Scudder. Seventy-five males, fifty females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,000-6,500 feet elevation. October 2 and 3, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 9-30, May 1-16, June 7 and 9, 1902. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. May 29, 31, June 2 and 11, 1902. Cloudcroft, Otero county, N. M. June 18, 1902, El Paso, Tex. April 5 and 6, 1902. Circotettix undulatus (Thomas). Six males, twenty-four females. Cloudcroft, Otero county, N. M. June 16-20, 1902. Beulah, San Miguel county, N. M. August 17, 1901. Dr. Henry Skinner. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 723 Heliastus aridus (Bruner). Forty-one males, nineteen females. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 10-Way 16, 1902. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. May 31, 1902. Ysleta, El Paso county, Tex. April 2, 1902. This species exhibits an enormous range of color variation, vary- ing from an extreme rusty form with a bluish cast to the tegmina, to a dull bluish-black form with an ashy suffusion on the head. Some specimens have the hind femora, wings and pronotum with strong maculations, while others are almost immaculate. When at rest on the Larrea and mesquite plains this species is very hard to detect, and is frequently unnoticed until it is almost trampled under foot. The habitat of this species appears to be a purely desert one. Braohystola magna (Girard). One male, two females. Organ mountains. Donna Ana county, N. M. September 27, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,500 feet elevation. October 3, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. K M.). Phrynotettixs tshivavensis (Haldeman). One male and one female. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. May 13, 1902. El Paso, Tex. March 31, 1902. . Subfamily Locustinae. Campylacantha vegana Scudder and Cockerell. One female. Las Vegas, N. M. August, T. D. A. Cockerell. ^oloplus elegans Scudder. One male and one female. Mesilla valley, Donna Ana county, N. M. October 8, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). .Eoloplus orassus Scudder. One female. White Sands, between the Sacramento and San Andreas moun- tains, N. M. September 30, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). * For use of this naaie in place of Haldemanella see Rehn, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1902, p. 595. 724 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., Melanoplus lakinus (Scudder). ^ One male. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,500 feet elevation. October 3, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Melanoplus atlanis (Riley). Two males, three females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,500 feet elevation. October 3, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Melanoplus altitudinum (Scudder). Three females, Cloudcroft, Otero county, N. M. May 22 and 26, June 17, 1902. Melanoplus sapellanus Scudder. One female. Top of Las Vegas range, San Miguel county, N. M. June 28, 1902, H. L. Viereck. Melanoplus femur-rubrum (De Geer). Two males, six females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 5,000 feet elevation. October* 4, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Melanoplus corpulentus Scudder. Fourteen males, ten females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,500 feet elevation. October 2 and 3, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N, M.). On comparison with Mexican specimens in the collection of the Academy these prove indistinguishable. Melanoplus bivittatus (Say). Two females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 6,500 feet elevation. October 3, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). Melanoplus thomasi Scudder. Two males, five females. Sacramento mountains, N. M., 5,000 feet elevation. October 4, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). This species was recorded from Tularosa only by Scudder and Cockerell (Proc. Davenport Acad. Sci, IX, p. 51), and the locality given above is probably not very far distant from Tularosa, which latter lies about tweutv miles to the north of Alamogordo. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 725 Dactylotum variegatum (Scudder). One female, LuSas AVell, Sacramento mountains, N. M. September 29, C. H. T. Townsend (U. S. N. M.). The collection of the United States National Museum also con- tains specimens from Ojo Caliente, Rio Arriba county, N. M., and Huachuca, Cochise county, Ariz. On a comparison of this species with D. pidum (Thomas), it will be seen that practically the only important diagnostic character is the shape of the tegmina. a, — Tegmina elongate-ovate, at least twice as long as broad, pictum (Thomas). aa.— Tegmina ovate, not more than half as long again as broad, variegatum (Scudder). Family TETTIGONID^. Ceuthophilus uniformis Scudder. One male and one female. Beulah, San Miguel county, N. M. July 10, 1902, T. D. A. Cockerell. Ceuthophilus pallidus Thomas. Eighteen males, nineteen females. Cloudcroft, Otero county, N. M. May 21, 23 and 26, June 19, 1902. TJdeopsylla viereoki n. sp. Type; male (?). Cloudcroft, Otero county, N. M. May 27, 1902, H. L. Yiereck. Differing from both previously known species of the genus in the smooth upper surface of the anterior tibiae and the abbreviate character of the posterior tibise, which latter are shorter than the femora. This specimen was found dead and is rather badly nmtil- ated, the extremity of the abdomen, the palpi, the median limbs, the labrum and clypeus, antennse and the apical joints of the tarsi being badly damaged or gone. I take great pleasure in dedicating this rather striking form to my friend and fellow -worker, Mr. H. L. Viereck, to whose tireless energy and perseverance the large entomological collection of the Alamogordo and Cloudcroft regions is entirely due. General form heavy and obese. Head with the vertex but very 726 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [NoV. , slightly raised ; eyes subtrigonal, flat. Pronotum broad, the ante- rior margin slightly emarginate centrally, truncate posteriorly, Metanotum deep, exceeding the mesonotum in lateral depth. Abdomen compressed, subcarinate superiorly. Anterior femora with a well -developed inferior median sulcus, the inner margin bearing one large and two small spines on the distal section ; tibiae flat above, heavily punctate and unarmed, below subsulcate and with three pair of spines, spurs four in number, the anterior external one very short and blunt. Posterior femora stout, the lower sulcus deep, the margins strongly beset with innumerable small teeth, the internal margin bearing the greatest number ; tibise slightly bowed, the superior surface flat, with four to five pair of spines of the first and a few irregularly scattered spines of the second order, distal portion of the inferior surface with six recumbent spines, the upper pair of spurs slightly the longer. General color ochraceous, suffused above with reddish-brown, the segments with their posterior borders blackish. Measuixments. Length of head and body (approximately), .... 23 mm. Length of pi'onotum, 9 " Breadth of pronotum, 10.2 " Length of hind femur, 19 " Length of hind tibia, 17 " Family GRYLLID^. Subfamily Gryllinse. Gryllus integer Scudder. Four males, four females. Highrolls, Otero county, N. M. May 31, June 2, 11, 13, 1902. Gryllus alogus n. sp. Type: ?; Albuquerque, Bernalillo county, N. M., 1902. Collected by T. D. A. Cockerell. Apparently allied to G. armattcs Scudder,* but differing in the shape of the anterior and lateral margins of the pronotum, and in the different proportions of the calcaria of the hind tibise, as well as the coloration. No relationship exists with G. personatus Uhler,* or with mexicanus Saussure.** *P8yc7te, IX, p. 293. ^Proc. Ent. Soc. FMla., II, p. 547. ^Miss. Sci. Mex., Orthopt., p. 403. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 727 Size rather small and forDi comparatively slender. Head mod- erately large, slightly tumid, both on the occiput and gense ; vertex decllnate, broad and flattened ; eyes oval. Pronotum about once and a half as broad as long, emarginate anteriorly, the posterior border slightly arcuate; lateral margins tumid, surface obscurely punctulate ; lateral lobes shallow, the anterior angle obtuse, the lower margin sloping upward and backward to the rounded poste- rior angle. Tegmina moderately long, not much more than twice as long as the pronotum, the mediastinal view with three branches. Anterior and median limbs rather slight, compressed. Posterior femora moderately heavy, rather attenuate apically; tibise two- thirds as long as the femora, armed with 6-8 spines on each margin, the upper inner calcar distinctly shorter than the intermediate one. Ovipositor reaching to the apex of the outstretched meta- tarsus. General color blackish-brown, the infraocular portion of the gense and the humeral angle of the tegmina ochraceous, the veins of the mediastinal area being of the same color. Posterior femora orange-red, becoming dull-brownish posteriorly. Measurements. Length of head and body, 17.5 mm. Length of pronotum, 4 " Length of tegmina, . > 9 " Length of hind femora, 11 " Length of ovipositor, 15 " Miogryllus lineatus (Scudder)? One immature male. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. April 25, 1902. This specimen is very questionably assigned to this species, and a number of characters show considerable difference from the descrip- tion. Considering the apparently immature condition of the speci- men I think this the best course to adopt. Subfamily (Ecanthmse. (Ecanthus sp. One immature female. Alamogordo, Otero county, N. M. June 9, 1902. This species is in all probability undescribed and shows closest relationship with (E. niveus and angustipennis. 728 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., HYMENOPTERA FROM SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA AND NEW MEXICO, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES. BY H. VIERECK. This paper is the result of a study of material collected in the year 1901 and received for identification from Prof. Cockerell. Unless otherwise stated, he is the collector of the specimens under consideration. Melissodes montana Cress. Three ? ?, 10 to 12 mm. in length. The abdominal fascise vary from ochreous to whitish. San Pedro, July 4, 11, Specimens in the Coll. Am. Ent. Society represent the originals only and are from " Colorado" and " New Mexico" (Cresson Coll.). One cJ*, La Jolla, August, has the dorsum of thorax covered with an ochraceous pubescence. The clypeus is aU yellow, a black dot on each side. « Diadasia rinconis opuntiae Ckll. (Det. Ckll.). San Pedro, July 27, at flowers of Opuntia. Diadasia australis Cress. One d', San Bernardino, July 6, on sunflower. Specimens in Coll. Am. Ent. Society represent only " Colorado" and "Texas." Nomada formula n. sp. Black, max'ked with yellow ; apex of wings cloudy ; metathorax with a bare, satiny, triangular area. ?. — Length 8 mm. Labrum closely indistinctly' punctured. Clypeus closely punctured, the yellow area above clypeus and the yellow areas on the sides of the face more distinctly punctured, the punctures a little wider apart. The black part of the head closely distinctly punctured. Cheeks dullish, indistinctly sculptured. Head covered with a fine silvery pubescence, not so heavy as to obscure any characters. First joint of flagellum at least one-fourth longer than 1902.1 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 729 the]^second. Pronotum punctured on the anterior margin. Dorsu- lum "sub-opaque, dosely punctured. Tubercles apparently irapunc- tate. Tegulse with well-separated punctures. Mesopleurse punctured much like dorsulum. Scutellum with a median longitudinal iuipres- sion/covered with shallow punctures. The parts of the posterior face of metathorax adjoining the area covered with a thin whitish ap- pressed sort of pubescence. The rest of the thorax and the greater part of the legs covered with pubescence similar to that on the head. The pubescence on the inner sides of the tarsi of a pale golden tint. Wings hyaline, apical and marginal cell smoky, stigma pale brown, nervures dark brown, transverse median ner- vure interstitial. Abdomen fint;ly closely punctured, covered with whitish pubescence in the same degree as the head and thorax, apical dorsal segment silvery. Black; labrum, clypeus, base of mandibles, supraclypeal mark, lateral face marks which border the eye extending nearly to the top and over to the insertion of antennae, apical dot on scape, pro- notum, tubercles, tegulse, a dot below, an almost rectangular mark below this on the mesopleurse, a dot on scutellum at each corner of scutellum, the scutellum, postscutellum, a spot on each side on the under sidt; of mesothorax, the four posterior coxse in front, an apical mark on all femora, the tibiae chiefly on the outside, the tarsi in front, an almost even band on the first segment separated from the apex by a narrower brown band, second segment with an emarginate band, third, fourth and fifth segments with regular bands, yellow. Flagellum beneath light brown, above dark brown. The four anterior legs with their coxae, femora and tibiae in part tes- taceous to almost ferruginous. Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Type locality, San Pedro, Cal., July 11. One 9. This comes near moc^este, but is distinguished at once by the characters in the diagnosis. Cotype, one ? , same place and date as the type. Sphecodes mandibularis Cress. One ?, San Pedro, July 11 (T. D. A. Cockerell). Previously recorded from Texas (Belfrage) ; Ottawa, Can. (Harrington) ; Carlinville, 111. (Robertson) ; Mesilla valley, K M. (Cockerell). 730 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., Colletes californicus Prov. Two d^c?, La Jolla, August. Provancher's description is very brief, but this is doubtless the species he had before him ; a fuller description is submitted. d^. — Length 8 mm. All of face below antennae hidden by a long white pubescence. Above the antennae the face is closely punctured, opaque, the pubescence sparser, yellowish. Cheeks with whitish pubescence, space between eyes and base of mandibles a little less than width of the latter at base, labrum polished, divided into five ridges, the one in the middle broadest, with a dent near its base. First joint of flagellum apparently a little shorter than the second. Dorsulum closely punctured, opaque, shiny in front, the punctures a little larger than those on top of head. Pubescence on dorsum of thorax the same color as that on top of the head. Mesopleurse as closely punctured as possible without being confluent, punctures about the same size as those on dorsulum, pubescence white like on the cheeks. Disk of metathorax divided into about eight deep, shining, squarti pits, by narrow longitudinal ridges. En- closed space on posterior face of metathorax not exactly smooth nor highly polished, triangular in shape and wider at base than long. The adjoining areas indistinctly sculptured, subopaque. Legs covered with loose white hairs. Wings perfectly clear, the ner- vures and stigma dark brown. First recurrent nervure received in about the middle of the second submarginal cell, the same cell about three-fourths as long on the radius as on the cubitus. Trans- verse median nervure interstitial, curved out. Abdomen subopaque, closely finely punctured. The first segment with loose hairs, those on remaining segments sparser. All the segments, except the apical, with an apical distinct fascia of appressed pubescence. On top of the abdomen the pubescence is pale yellowish, to the sides whitish. The apical segment is covered with a fine appressed, whitish pubescence. Black; spurs white, claws dark brown. The other specimen has the pubescence above, whiter, and the dent on the middle ridge of labrum continued into a longitudinal fovea; otherwise identical. Ceratina dupla Say. One 9, 5 mm. in length. Alpine Tavern, Mt. Lowe, August 12. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 731 Spilomena foxii Ckll. One 9, San Pedro, July 16 (W. P. and T. D. A. Cockerell). The only other record, that of the unique type, is Santa Fe, N. M. (T. D. A. Cockerell). Stigmus fulvipes Fox. Three 9 9 found burrowing in a sandbank at San Pedro, July b (W. P. and T. D. A. Cockerell). Only the unique type from LosAngeles, Cal. ^D. W. Coquillet), was heretofore known. Notogonia nigripennis occidentalis n. subsp. ?.— Length 16 mm. Differs from the typical form by the smoother sculpture and short longitudinal impressed line on each side of dorsulum, by the duller and more finely sculptured scutel- lum and by the medial longitudinal impression of the postscutellum. The flagellum is approximately as long as head and thorax. The flagellum of N. cequalis is distinctly longer than the head and thorax, measuring 10 mm. in the type (9) and consequently 2 mm. longer than length of head and thorax (8 mm.). The only specimen of N. nigripennk heretofore recorded is the unique type in Coll. Am. Ent. Society, from " New York." This is a most interesting find, and shows how little we know of the dis- tribution of certain species. Eucerceris insignis Prov. „„ , ^ , o n Eucerceris insignis Prov. AdcL, Hym. Queb P-^l^' 1^888 ((| not ? ). Cerceris provancheri D. T., Wien. Ent. Zeit., IX, 1890, p. 204. One d, La Jolla, August, at flowers of Erujonum fasciculaium. It is evident from Provancher's description that he described a c^ and not a 9 . Cerceris cockerelli n- sp- Entire tegument strongly, more or less closely punctured. c^.- Length 7.5 mm. Clypeus dullish with small punctures and large, close, somewhat indistinct punctures, the rest of the face below the insertion of antenna with large, rather indistinct punc- tures more separated than on clypeus, the spaces between the punc- tures minutely punctate; area in the middle of the face broad, flat anteriorly, abruptly and decidedly keeled posteriorly between the insertion' of antenna, the face below antennae covered with a close, fine, silvery pubescence and sparser longer hairs, head above the antenna with strong, separated punctures, the space between them 732 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV. , polished. Space between posterior ocelli a little less than that between them and nearest eye margin, cheeks with deep separate punctures, not as strong as on top of head, the space between the punctures rather opaque, minutely punctuied. The head and cheeks with fine long hairs. First joint of the flagellum about one and a half times as long as the second. Prouotum, dorsulum and scutel- lum covered with large, distinct, separated punctures, the space sep- arating them polished, postscutellum sparsely punctured, shining, mesopleurse strongly and coarsely punctured. Enclosed space of metanotum triangular with longitudinal sulcse medially, jiolished transverse strise radiating to each side of anterior half of sulcus, the rest of the metanotum deeply, almost confluently punctured and shining, mesopleurse punctured, becoming impuuctate near the suture ; from the base of the metapleurse rise two oblique raised lines, joining to form an acute angle, the apex pointed forward; the margins of the metapleurse make this a triangle, with the base in- curved anteriorly. Entire thorax pilose like the head around the ocelli, legs ciliate and more or less distinctly covered with a fine appressed pubescence. Wings subhyaline, nervures at base reddish, nervures and stigma brown, apical cell especially infuscated. First segment of abdomen with a small polished triangular impres- sion, abdomen dorsally uniformly sculptured, with deep separated punctures, shining. Pygidial area practically oblong, strongly margined, deeply punctured, shining, covered with sparse hairs. The abdomen sericeous, all the dorsal segments distinctly pilose. Black ; base of mandibles, all of the face below the insertion of antennse, a short distance above bordering on the eyes, front of scape, interrupted band on 2)ronotum, tegulse, spot on mesopleurse, two spcts on scutellum, postscutellum, apical third of femora, pos- terior trochanters, tibise except apical spot on posterior ones, first joint of tarsi, two spots on first dorsal segment almost united, a band on first dorsal segment almost united, a band on all the other dorsal segments (except apical) narrow medially and lateral spots on ventral segments three, four and five, yellow. Flagellum beneath orange, apical tarsal joints more or less testaceous. Related to C. imolita Cress. , from which it is distinguished by its uniformly different sculpture. Type locality. La JoUa, Cal., August, 1901 (T. D. A. Cock- erell). 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 733 Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Cotype, one cf, same place and date. PMlanthus crabroniformis Sm. Philanthus crabroniformis Sm., Cat. Hym Brit. Mus., IV, 474, 1856 /^ Philanthus multimaculatus Cam., Biol. Cent. Am. Hym., II, 133, Philarithm anna Dun., Ent. News, VIII, 68, 1897 (c^ not ? ). PhilantJius cleonm Dun., Can. Ent., XXX, 152, 1898, ?. One d". La Jolla, August. Two dd", San Pedro, July 10. A variable species, but distinguished from its relatives by the produced front of male, the sparse deep punctures of dorsum and the closer deep punctures of abdomen common to both sexes. In the male the front has a medial longitudinal impression, or is smooth, or with a slightly raised line ; an analogous variation appears in the front of the ? , the color pattern is also variable, more elaborate or less than the pattern described by Smith. This species is recorded from Colorado, Washington, New Mexico, California (type local- ity), Oregon and Montana. The Colorado specimens are the more strongly colored. Philanthus pacificus Cress. Two dd, San Pedro, Cal., July 9. Diploplectron brunneipes Cress. One 9, identical in size, structure and sculpture with the type from Nevada ; it differs in color of the prothorax which is black, and in the darker anteunse, tegulce and legs ; the abdomen is black with exception of the apex of pygidium. San Pedro, July 11. Mygnimia ustulata Dahlb. One d, La Jolla, August. Cryptocheilus flammipennis Sm. Two ? ? , San Pedro, July 27. Another ? in Coll. Am. Ent. Soc. from Palo Alto, 1891 (Leland Stanford, Jr., Univ.). Hemipogonius subopacus Cress. One ?, San Pedro, July 28 (A. Springer). Penn.-^ylvania is the only locality so far known for this species represented by the unique; types ? and d. It seems quite strange that it should be found on the Pacific coast. A careful comparison reveals no specific difference between this specimen and the type : the wings 734 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., are merely darker with a stronger violaceous reflection. One c? at the same place and time (T. D. A. Cockerell). Agenia accepta Cress. One ?, La Jolla, August. Wings uniformly fuscous, apical border paler. Specimens from Atco, N. J., June, 1897 (C. W. Johnson), Dakota, Texas, Las Cruces, KM., October 19, found dead (Ckll. ), have wings mottled as in the type from Georgia. Agenia euphorbise n- sp. J*. — Length 4 mm. Head apparently impunctate, opaque, face below antennae covered with appressed silvery pubescence, space between posterior ocelli a little less than that between them and nearest eye-margin, first joint of flagellum as long as or a little shorter than the second. Thorax dull, covered with very fine sil- very pubescence, apparent only in certain lights. Wings almost uniformly darkened, pale brown, nervures and stigma dark brown Abdomen shining, somewhat compressed, covered with a finer and less apparent pubescence than the thorax. First segment not dis- tinctly petiolate, about twice as long as broad at apex. Legs very finely sericeous. Second submarginal cell along the cubitus a little longer than the first. Black, tibite and tarsi brownish. Apical dorsal segment with a white spot. Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Type locality, San Pedro, Cal. Related to A. petiolatus Cress., from Illinois, but smaller and without a" distinctly petiolate first abdominal segment. One c?, July 27, on Euphorbia. Anoplius (Pompilinus) padrinus n. sp. . d^. — Length 4.5 mm. Plead impunctate, subopaque, face below antennae covered with appressed silvery pubescence, on the rest of the head the pubescence is so fine as to be almost invisible. Space between posterior ocelli about equal to that between them and near- est eye-margin, first joint of flagellum distinctly shorter than the second. The entire tegument has a bluish sheen to it, the thorax is covered with a very fine silvery pubescence apparent only in cer- tain lights, on the under side and oo the coxse it is heaviest. A faint furrow down the middle of the metathorax. Abdomen pol- ished, slightly dull, with a very fine pubescence. Legs silvery 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 735 sericeous. Second submarginal cell almost narrowed to a point on the cubitus. Wings smoky, bluish and iridescent in certain lights. Black with a bluish cast. The legs black. Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Type locality, San Pedro, Cal. One c?, July 27, on Euphorbia. Much like A. cylindricus Cress., but that is duller and has a petiolale submarginal cell. Anoplius (Pompilinus) marginatus Say. One &, San Pedro, July 11. Pedinaspis planatus Fox. Two dd", La Jolla, August. First record of the d. Aside from the ordinary sexual characters this is just like the female. Vespa oocidentalis Cress. La Jolla, August. One ? . Ancistrocerus halopMla n. sp. Clypeus finely, head and thorax above closely, coarsely punc- tured. Sides of metathorax produced, but not into a sharp point. Black on second abdominal segment hour-glass pattern. J.— Length, 9 mm. Clypeus bidentate, sparsely punctured, slightly produced across the middle, with sparse rather long slender hairs. Front and vertex with close coarse punctures, dull pilose, space between posterior ocelli a little larger than that between them and nearest eye-margin, head posteriorly bounded by a strong margin which joins the malar space close to the margin of the eye. First joint of flagellum about one and a half times as long as the second. Angles of the prouotum, produced though not sharply. Prouotum, mesonotum and dorsulum almost uniformly, coarsely and closely punctured, pilose like head, the dorsulum with a median impressed line anteriorly ; tegulte shining, sparsely punc- tured, mesopleurre more closely punctured and less distinctly than mesonotum, pilose, metapleurte rugulose dull, the middle of the margin produced into a short blunt tooth. The posterior face or basin of metathorax enclosed by well-defined margins laterally, roughened, dullish, a median raised line extending up three-fourths its height, and diverging into two raised lines before the upper margin of the basin. Tarsal claws cleft. Wings subfuscous, marginal cell and an apical margin near the marginal cell deeply clouded, nervures of basal half of wing and stigma yellowish 736 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., ferruginous to ferruginous, nervures of apical half dark brown, second submarginal cell narrowed about one-half on the radial ner- vure, the third hardly narrower on the radial than on the cubital nervure. Punctures of first dorsal segment coarser and closer than on the others, a median longitudinal line on the sides and apically, face of truncation shining, sparsely punctured. The succeeding dorsal segments becoming almost smooth basally, finely punctured before the maculated border, the latter distinctly closely punctured. Black ; mandibles except base and apex, clypeus, a short line bordering eyes below emargiuation, a spot between antennae, front of scape, a small spot behind the eyes, a broad line on pronotum, a spot on mesopleurse, greater part of tegulte, a spot on each side of scutellum, a line on postscutellum, tibise, tarsi, part of femora, an apical band on first dorsal segment dilated at the sides, an apical band on second dorsal segment and a cuneiform mark extending in obliquely from the lateral border of the apical band, second ven tral segment with an undulated apical band, separated narrowly from a large blotch which lakes up nearly all the area, the other segments (apical one excepted) with an apical band, yellow. Hook and part of the eighth, ninth and tenth joints of the flagel- lum ferruginous, apical tarsal joints and claws more or less darkened. Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Type locality, San Pedro, Cal. Type and one paralype July 9, another paratype July 27. One, La Jolla, August. The La Jo 11a specimen has a yellow line on the lateral margin of metathorax. Allied to A. sulphureus Sauss., but distinct by the closely arranged punctuation of head and thorax and the more opaque appearance of these parts. Odynerus rufobasilaris Ashm. One ?, Alpine Tavern, Mt. Lowe, altitude 5,000 feel, August 12, on flowers of Eriogonum polifolium. Beside the characters given in the original description this species has the lateral angles of the melatliorux produced into two long, sharp points. Tetrachrysis nortoni Aar. One ?, San Pedro, July 11. El is plumipes Cru. One ?, two dd", Coronado, July 31. 1902.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 737 Photopsis unicolor Cress. La Jolla, August. One cf. An interesting variation, having the posterior half of thorax and the legs blackish. This is the first time the species is recorded from any definite locality. Photopsis lingulatus n. sp. Allied to albicinda, but distinct by the more sparsely haired abdomen and the almost impunctate second abdominal segment. Length, c?, 11.5 mm. Clypeus truncate, the truncation slightly rounded. Mandibles obliquely truncate, slightly notched near the middle of the inferior edge, the truncation Irideulate, the apical tooth strongest, the middle one weakest, front with a median fur- row extending down from the anterior ocellus to between the inser- tion of antenuie, front almost smooth, polished like the rest of the head, which has shallow, indistinct punctures. Space between posterior ocelli greater than that between them and the anterior ocellus and greater than the space between them and nearest eye- margin. Lower margin of eyes almost contiguous with the mser- tion of mandibles. First joint of flagellum about three-fourlhs the length of the second. Prothorax rather coarsely reticulated, only on the sides is there a small area almost smooth. Mesonotum with deep, good-sized, separated punctures; parapsidal groove distinct, deep, extending back almost to the posterior margin. The lateral furrows merely indicated by faint lines. Scutellum convex, with shallow, almost confluent punctures; postscutellum dullish in con- trast to the other parts of the thorax which are shining, sculpture indefinite. Disk of metathorax with a broad almost quadrate polished area, the rest of the metathorax, excepting the greater part of the metapleurre, very distinctly netted, the meshes large, the pits shining. Mesopleuree bulged outward along the middle, the bulged surface irregularly reticulated, bounded by an irregular ridge formed by the termination of the i-eticulation. The depressed portion of the mesopleurse with shallow punctures on the greater part, partly smooth, mesopleuraj below with a few obscure punc- tures, above smooth and shining. Petiole not strongly convex, about twice as long as broad at apex, shining, roughened on the basal half, with a few indistinct punctures on the apical half. Second segment polished dorsad, the punctures are fine and well sep- arated or sparse. Yentrad the punctures are seemingly stronger, on the basal half no distinct i)uucturcs. Kcst of the segments 47 738 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV., finely sculptured to polished on basal half, the apical half hairy, a small puncture seems to be at the base of each hair. On the basal two-thirds of the third segment in the middle there is a curious area like a transverse half of an ellipse, with the rounded portion pointed toward the apex of the segment, this has a subtle surface, neither shining nor exactly dull, with an opalescent cast. A fur- row of gi-ayish felt-like pubescence close to the margin of the second dorsal segment. There is no furrow with felt -like pubescence on the second ventral segment. The wings have the third sub- marginal cell very faintly indicated, except at the lower corner, where it is" altogether erased, not a trace of a second recurrent nervure. The insect is almost uniformly covered with a moder- ately abundant fine, long, pale pubescence, that on the abdomen sparsest, 'pubescence of dorsulum stronger, shorter, of a golden tint. Rather brownish testaceous ; space between ocelli, tips of the mandibles, aud^j^arts of the femora almost black. Flagellum brownish. Tibiae and tarsi very pale brownish. Stigma very dark brown, nervures smoky testaceous. Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Type locality. La Jolla, ^Cal. One c?', August. ODONTOPHOTOPSIS n. g. Erected for the reception of those species having the anterior marginof the mesosternum armed with two processes. Type, Odontophotopsis exogyrus n. sp. Odontophotopsis exogyrus n- sp. Process of mesosternum in the shape of a broad projection pointed straight down, having the appearance of being bidentate, one tooth sharper than the other. Length, c?, 12.5 mm. Clypeus concave, polished. The entire head almost uniformly covered with well-separated medium punc- tures, an indistinct furrow extends from the anterior ocellus to be- tween the insertion of antennse. Posterior ocelli more than twice as far apart as they are distant from the anterior one, the distance between the posterior ocelli less than that between tliem and nearest eye-margin. Lower margin of eyes almost contiguous with insertion mandibles. Mandibles strong, decidedly curved, with a strong uperior and inferior margin, deeply emarginate on the lower mar- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 739 gin, the emargination exteuding in, one-half of the width, the part of the mandible beyond this narrow, oblique, strongly margined. First joint of flagellum about three-fourths the length of the second. Prothorax rugose. Dorsulum with strong separated punctures, the furrows of about the same degree, none strong, merely impressed lines, starting about one-thii'd the distance from the anterior mar- gin of the dorsulum and extending back to the posterior margin. Scutellum large, coarsely sculptui-ed, postscutellum indistinctly sculp- tured, propleurse rough above, smooth below^, mesopleurse with in- distinct shallow punctures on tlie depressed part, the bulged part reticulated but not margined, on the posterior border smooth and polished. Disk of metathorax with an oblong area bisected by a longitudinal ridge. An almost triangular area to each side of the enclosure, the rest of the metathorax except the lower half of metapleurse reticulated, the meshes on the posterior face largest, the lower half of metapleurje deeply depressed, making a channel which is smooth and shining. A median raised line extends from the deepest part of the impression back almost to the poste- rior coxa?, where it helps to make a narrow channel, which is thus separated from the rugose ai-ea adjoining the coxae. Third submarginal cell entirely obliterated, as is the second recur- rent nervure. Petiole nearly twice as long as broad at apex, con- vex but not strongly so, punctures rather shallow, not sharply defined, rather close together near the margins, more separated above, second segment polished, the punctures distinctly finer than those on the first, a long line with felt-like golden pubescence exteuding along the dorsal segment near the margin ; on the ventral segment this line is shortened almost to a spot. The rest of the segments very finely punctured. Covered in greater part with a golden pubescence ; the pubescence of the metathorax, sides of thorax and the first segment pale, silvery. Testaceous; flagellum brownish, legs paler than rest of the insect. Stigma deep brown, nervures much paler, the membrane slightly, uniformly clouded. Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Type locality. La Jolla, Cal. Two dd, taken in August. In the pavatype there is a very faint indication of a third transverse cubitus. 740 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV. , Odontophotopsis clandestinus n. sp. Mesosteruum with the processes of a quadrate character flattened, with the anterior margin pointing inward and forward, the poste- rior margin backward and outward. The lower margin slightly emarginate. Length, c?, 9 mm. Head covered with closely arranged deep punctures, closer between anterior ocellus and the insertion of an- tennse than elsewhere. Posterior ocelli about twice as far apart as they are distant from the anierior one, the distance between the posterior ocelli about equal to the distance between them and the nearest eye-margin. Lower margins of eyes almost contiguous with the base of mandibles. The mandibles not so strong, more gently curved, having a superior and inferior margin, the lower margin strongly notched. First joint of flagellum about three- fourths the length of the second, Prothorax with contiguous punctures almost rugose, the punctures more distinct dorsally than on the sides. Dorsulum with almost contiguous coarse punctures, the middle pair of furrows deeper than the lateral pair, the latter a shining line. Scutellum and postscutellum opaque, roughened, not distinctly sculptured. Propleurse closely punctured. Mesopleurse depressed about one-half from front to back, the depressed part almost impunctate below, closely punctured above, the bulged part of mesopleurse covered with closely arranged shallow punctures, the face directed backward and outward, shining, almost impunc- tate. Metathorax with a somewhat oblong enclosure extending to base of disk. This area is about one and a half times as long as wide, a little broader at apex than at base, also not square at apex. The shining surface is bisected by a longitudinal raised line, on each side of this area is a triangular area with one side on the base of the meiathorax. The rest of the disk is covered with moder- ately large, almost hexagonal or round, shallow pits. The sides of the metathorax have one -half deeply depressed, almost a broad channel, which is in greater part shining and without sculpture, the rest of the side is closely reticulated. Wings somewhat yellow- ish hyaline, stigma brown, nervures paler, a pale-brown stain on the lower half of the wings. A short stump of a vein extends beyond the insertion of the second transverse cubitus on the cubital nervure. Third submarginal cell outlined by faint nervures, which are not continuous; a very faint line extending half-way up to the 1902.] NATUBAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. '41 cubitus Stands fof the second recurrent ner^re. Petiole of abdo- nren a little less than twice as long, as broad at ■>?«. -»™^ *"" "°^ slroDdy, on the disk the punctures are d.stmct, rather deep, large Id "parated. The sides of the petiole are rather moderate^ .ugulo^; second segn^ent shining, punctured, *e pnnctures clo^r together on the sides than on the disk and not as lar-ge as those on the disk of the first segment or petiole, the rest of the dorsal sg- ments finely punctured on the apical half, second ventral segment more coarsely and closely punctured than the second dorsal -gmen. In the middle of the base of the exposed portion of the third dorsal segment is visible an area with a subtle surface m outline lAe a U The second dorsal segment has a lateral hue appre^^ed-lAe pubescence near the margin silvery, in some lights of a dirty ap- pearance; on the second ventral segment is a similar line, but less Ln one-half the length of the one on the dorsal segment. The entire insect is almost uniformly covered ivith a moderate amount of long, fine, while, erect pubescence; that on the dorsulum and margins of the segments is shorter and lies rather close. Brownish testaceous; legs pale testaceous, antenna; duU, duty testaceous, tips of the mandibles dark brown. Type, CoU. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliiladelphia. Type locality, Mesilla, N. M. „ , „s t ti.„ One ^, taken at light, July 31 (T. D. A. Cockerell). In the .hape of the mesosternal process this species comes close to the type of the genus, but it is quite different in many respects. Odontophotopsis succineus n. sp. Process of mesosternum a sharp tooth, in outhne a a acute angle. The tooth is short, ^s in melUcausus ^nd brevicornis, but sharper Lenc^th c?, 7.5 mm. Clypeus slightly concave, shmmg. Head polished, punctures small and sparse. Instead of a furrow runnmg from the anterior ocellus to between the insertion of the antenna there is a dent a short distance below the anterior ocellus, and from this a rather indistinct impressed line appears to extend to the margin of the clypeus. Hardly any space between the base o mandibles and the lower margin of eyes. Postenor ocelh about twice as far apart as they are distant from the antenor ocellus the space between the posterior pair distinctly less than U.ai between hem and nearest margin of the eyes. First joint of flagellum a trifle shorter than the second. Mandibles not so strong, gently curved, 742 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [NoV. a distinct superior and inferior margin, the latter emarginate, but not very deeply. Pi'othorax rugulose, a small tuft of appressed hairs on each side of the pronotum. Dorsulum shining, the punc- tures indistinctly outlined, well separated. Parapsidal grooves almost absent, only one pair faintly apparent. The greater part of the anterior half of mesopleurse depressed, shining, almost impunc- tate, the bulged pai-t reticulated, its posterior border shining and almost impunctate. Scutellum and postscutellum closely sculp- tured, opaque. The enclosed area on metanotum shining, almost twice as long as broad at base, parallel-sided, bisected by a raised line, the rest of the metanotum reticulated, the meshes large and of irregular outline, the sides of the metathorax channeled, smooth, shining and reticulated in parts. Wings slightly smoky, stigma light brown, nervures paler, third submarginal cell practically absent, a short stump of a vein on the radius is all there is of the third transverse cubitus, a stump, a continuation of the cubitus, extends a short distance beyond the insertion of the second trans- verse cubitus. First segment of abdomen about twice as long as broad at apex, convex but not strongly, shining, sparsely punc- tured with poorly defined punctures, the sides closely punctured or rugose. Second segment polished, the punctures on it v^ry fine and widely separated. The rest of the segments very finely sculp- tured, finely punctured near the apex. The area on the third dorsal segment is highly polished and extends to the punctured margin of the segment, the high polish is confined to a deltoid anterior portion of the area, in back of which is a transverse band of a more subtle character or between polished and opaque, at the base of the segment this area is about one-thii'd as wide as the entire width of the segment. The second dorsal segment has a line of appressed silvery pubescence near the margin, and about half as long as the margin, but equally removed from base and apex, the representative of this line on the second ventral segment is about one fourth the length of that on the dorsal segment. The pubescence is erect, long and fine silvery to pale golden and almost equally moderately distributed. Brownish testaceous, like some specimens of amber. Posterior legs pale to dark brown, anterior legs whitish-brown. Flagelluni dark brown, mandibles tipped with deep brown. Type, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Type locality. La Jolla, Cal. 1902.] NATURAL 8UIEJSCii:S OF PHILADELl'HlA. 743 Two d^cJ*, August. In the paratype the enclosure of melanotum is not so distinctly marked and more quadrate and the enclosure of the third segment is uniformly subtle. Sphaeroplithalma harpalyce Fox. One ?, La Jolla, August. Sphaerophthalma pacifica Cress. Three ??, La Jolla, August, and San Pedro, July 10. Two cTc?, San Pedro, July 25; La Jolla, August. This is the first record of the d'- In shape and color it is much like the ?. There can be no mistake about its identity. The wings are almost black. 744 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec December' 2 The President, Samuel G. Dixox, M.D in 'the Chair. Seventeen persons present. December 9. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Seven persons present. December 16. J. Cheston Morris, M.D., in the Chair. ', Eleven persons present. A paper entitled "Five New Species of Trachilomonas, " by T. Chalkley Palmer, was presented for publication. Minerals from Santiago Providence, Cuba. — Mr. S. Harbert Hamilton exhibited some of the minerals met with during his recent explorations of portions of Cuba, and described the manner of their occui-rence. He called attention to increments of raise shown by the southern coast of Cuba from Maysi to Santiago de Cuba (Puerto de Cuba). All along this coast are to be seen remains of from three to five terraces, and around the harbor of Santiago de Cuba are a series of amphitheatre -like benches, which, with the Sierra Maestre, give a very peculiar and picturesque effect to the landscape. These benches are fossiliferous, but the shells are usually only represented by casts. This part of Cuba has unquestionably suffered an extensive sub- sidence, possibly about the beginning of Tertiary time. The peculiar shape of Santiago Bay is to be accounted for as an old valley, which the sinking of the land has allowed the sea to encroach upon. Since its submergence this portion of Cuba has gradually been raising; the raised beaches attesting to the incre- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 745 merits of raise. It is believed that the floor of the bay is rising to-day, as it is only by constant dredging thai it is possible for vessels of moderate draught to come to the dock, many of the larger steamers having to discharge their cai'goes in the bay. It is said that formerly any vessel could dock without difficulty. The coral rock of the seashore is being carved into huge sea caves, one of the most prominent being under the old Morro Castle at the entrance to the harbor. Further up the coast are two large Stalactite sliowing cu]> metliod of growth. caves, or rather, a series of caves, that are now above tide and a considerable distance inland. They are known as Cuevas de Caribiss, and are within a few miles of the bay of Aserradero, where lies the wreck of the " Viscaya," adjacent to a cocoanut grove, a few huts of fishermen and charcoal burners and the ruins of a diminutive Spanish fort. The caves were evidently originally carved out by sea action, just as the one under INIorro is being formed to day. They present another proof of the raise of this coast. They are now tenanted by millions of cave bats, Artiheus 746 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, parvipcs Rehn, and Brachyphylla nana, whose guaao was once exported, buL is now unloiiched. It is stated that aboriginal remains have been found in them, but sevei'al days of excavation with five assistants yielded no return. It may be that further excavation Avould be more productive. In these caves, in the Cuevas de Guano particularly, occur Ihe most beautiful stalactites and stalagmites. They are not of the yellowish tinge so common in our limestone caverns, but of a snowy whiteness. When seen by the light of torches, wet, and covered with little shimmering crystals, they present a very beautiful appear- ance as they stand out from the black gloom of the cave. One huge growth, fancifully called the "Elephant's Head" by his companions, was successfully photographed by Capt. Jos. Priest. A stalagmite known as the " Grandificencia Casa Blanca " (the glorious white house) was removed with partial success and is now in the American Museum of Natural History. Their manner of growth was somewhat peculiar. Numerous little cups are formed from a quarter to a half -inch in size, arranged Avith the bowl upward, and lined with small crystals. As the water-carrying calcium bicarbonate slowly Irickled from the roof, it was caught by the cups on the stalagmites and stalactites and gradually changed to the normal carbonate. This is an adaptation of inorganic econ- omy he had not seen previously recorded. Several hundreds of pounds of these cave-growths were transported with danger and difficulty to Santiago and brought north. ^ On an extension of the Ferro-Carril y Almacenes de Santiago that goes from Santiago de Cuba to Alto de Songo are the manganese mines of Ponupo owned by the Ponupo Mining and Transportation Com- pany. The ore is a loose amorphous pyrolusite mined in oj^en cuts and washed before shipping. The deposits seem to be enormous, but he had not explored much more than in the immediate vicinity of the works. The mineral is said never to have been found crystallized, but usually occurs in the amorphous condition in nodules, and some- times in beautiful stalactitic masses called " Flor de Manganese. He was permitted to bring away the best examples of this interest- ing mineral, which had been conserv^ed in the company's offices. Associated with the manganese are remains of a limestone forma- tion containing oxide of manganese and a fossil which Mr, Vaughan has referred to the Eocene as Obitoides forbesii. It is possible that the manganese oxide may have been precipitated in ^ Since the above was written it has been noticed that some of the stalactites brought back have gradually assumed a darker shade. This is doubtless to be accounted for by the oxidation of salts of the heavy metals, which while in the subterranean chambers had but a deficient supply of oxygen. CaH, (€03)2 = CaCOg + H^O -f CO,. Being now removed from the cave atmosphere, oxidation of the trace of iron has occurred. 3 902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 747 the Eocene ocean, where this foraminifer dwelt, just as the dredg- ings of the Challenger and other deep sea explorers have found it in the oceans of to-day. This resulted in the formation of a manganiferous Eocene limestone, which tropical conditions have largely removed as soluble bicarbonate of caicium, concen- trating the binoxide of manganese as the present pyrolusite ore deposit. In 1524 the copper mines of the Sierra Cobre were opened. As high as fifty tons of ore a day have been mined from them, and the shafts are said to extend vertically for twelve hundred feet. The breaking out of the ' ' Ten Years' War ' ' put an end to the Avorking. From 1867 to 1901 nothing was done. The workings are said to be the largest in the world. This is to-day indicated only by the himdreds of tons of ruined machinery, huge buildings and dumps with innumerable abandoned shafts and tunnels. Owing to the dilapidated and extensive nature of the Cobre deposits, a detailed study of them was impossible. The principal copperiferous ,veins seem to perpendicularly cut, a shale whose dip is 70°, strike S. 20° W, Of course many offshoots occur, adding to the complexity. The ore at present mined and shipped seems to be an intimate mixture of oxide, carbonate and silicate of copper. Sulphides exist further down as they were found in the old dumps. Azurite and chalcopyrite were found in place. Oxide of iron, pyrite, crystals of quartz of peculiar habit, oxide of copper and other minerals forming a gossan, are met with, but not in good specimens. The water now filling the mines is highly charged with chalcanthite and melanterite, rude plants are in operation removing the copper from solution, Chalcanthite and brochautite are often found deposited in unexposed places. A mile or so upstream from the village, on the Rio Cobre, there is an interesting mineral occurrence. Here a pyritiferous dike or vein cuts a calcareous rock. The pyrite is oxidized to sulphate of iron and the iron precipitated as hydroxide by vegetable matter, producing in the reaction sulphuric acid. This in acting on the calcium compounds has produced gypsum. The gypsum thus formed is not crystallized in the usual shapes, but by a multiple growth along certain axis, produces unusual forms and combina- tions. In many instances the crystalline masses are of limpid pureness, free from inclusions. Again the molecules in their arrangement seem to include as much foreign matter as possible. In the valley of the San Juan, near the hill famous in history, which is a coarse conglomerate gravel, are deposits of clay which yield a rather inferior brick. Here are also deposits of sand and gravel extending to a considerable depth, as the experimental wells put down by Mr. LaBelle preliminary to operations on the new Santiago waterworks indicated. This sand and gravel is mostly too coarse for building. The valley of the San Juan was evidently 748 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC. , much deeper and has been filled since this portion of the island sunk. The same phenomenon is illustrated on the Santa Ynase road north of the town. At Dos Bocas a dark -gray rock has been quarried for road metal. It is probably a fine-grained trap. Dip? 30° to S. W. The strata exposed in the magnificent gorge of the Rio Guanini- cum near Santa Ana is in some places suitable for building. The new schoolhouse at Santiago and the piers of the Cuba companies railroad bridge are of this stone. Dip 20° S.E. There appears, however, to be a dearth of good building material in this district. Some local mining men in Santiago de Cuba, who had visited the summit of the Gran Piedra, 3,700' A.T., suggested that it showed signs of former local glaciers. In company with Captains Erwin and Priest the ascent was made with some hardship, owing to inclement weather. The summit is composed of two huge granite- like masses worn very smooth, suggesting possible ice action, but there were no scratches to be seen or anything to indicate morauic material. The evidence obtained was purely negative, but owing to the incessant rain and rank plant-growth chances for observation were limited. An attempt to ascend the Pico Tarqnino failed. A height of 5,875 ' A.T. was attained, but owing to the severe meteorological conditions, lack of suitable companions and supplies, at the end of several days it was necessary, on account of the illness of his companions, to abandon collections and return as best they could. The mountain, consisting of three peaks apparently, are heavily wooded. The speaker was only able to observe that tree ferns do not occur below about 1,000' A.T., and that considerably above this altitude two species of snajl, Helkina pulchra and Pleurodonte bayamemis, occur, which are not found at lower levels. Mt. Magota, 850' A.T., was also ascended. The start was made from Santa Ana through an interesting primeval forest. The mountain is capped by a limestone mesa about 350' thick. The top is only to be attained by a narrow cleft which would not have been found but for the assistance of the Cuban guide. The lime- stone top has been carved by the elements into holes and pinnacles of exceeding sharpness so as to make passage of its summit danger- ous and difficult. This annoying structure of rock is known as " dent de Perro " (teeth of the dog), and is certainly well named. In this rock are caves where General Maceo dwelt under Span- ish regime. Surrounded by sisal and other thorny plants this place must have been impregnable. The caves are now given over to bats and an occasional brigand. Fine examples of Pleuradonte marginella rostrata Pfr. and Zachryda jyroboscidea Pfr. were here obtained, but the mountain is overrun with a species of iguana which feeds on the snails. Near Magota mountain is a good indication nf copper which has 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 749 never been touched. The new railroad will make it available. In connection with copper and the supposed indication .which the presence of certain plants are said to give of the existence of metals, it may be mentioned that only here and at Cobre had he met with the cycad Zamia It may only be a coincidence. While in Cobre he received specimens of chromite said to have come from the neighborhood of Holguine. The deposit was not seen. The speaker said in conclusion that he desired to return thanks for the courtesies he had received from the many Americans and natives he had met while collecting and studying on the island. December 23. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, Vice-President, in the Chair. Ten persons present. A paper entitled " On the Terrestrial Vertebrates of Portions of Southern New Mexico and Western Texas," by Witmer Stone and James A. G. Rehn, was presented for publication. December 30. The President, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair. Thirty-six persons present. The following were ordered to be printed : 750 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [DeC. , THE DEVELOPMENT OF GONIONEMA MURBACHII. BY HENRY FARNHAM PERKINS. Gonionemus A. Agassiz, 1863, Contrib. Xat. Hist. U. S., IV, p. 350. From juvto, angled, and I'^i/J-a, thread, "kneed tentacles." Gonynema Haeckel, 1879, System der Medusen. Gonionemus Murbach, 1895,' Journal Morph., XI, 2. Gonionemus Mui-hacldi Mayer, 1901, Brooklyn lust. Sci. Bui., I, 1. Gonionema A. Agassiz, MSS. Gonionema MurhacMi Perkins, Johns Hopkins Uu. Cir., May, 1902. Introduction. The genus Gonionema was established by Dr. Alexander Agassiz to include a medusa which he discovered in 1862 in the Gulf of Georgia, Washington Territoiy. Its most striking character, ana- tomically, is the peculiar form of the tentacles, which are bent at an angle near the tip, and at the angle bear a sucking organ by means of which the medusa makes itself fast to any favorable object. This peculiarity in the form of tlie tentacles suggested to Agassiz the name which he proposed. The form of the name which is now used is that which Dr. Agassiz offers in correction of the original one, which was in error as to its ending. For a long time the Gulf of Georgia was the only locality from which this genus was described. In 1894, however, another habitat was discovered far distant, at Woods Hole, Ma.ssachusetts. Since then members of the genus have been found at the widely separated localities of the Fiji Islands and Alaska. A closely allied genus has been described from the coast of Brazil and from the Bahamas. Mayer says that he found a new species of Gonionema ("aphrodite") in the Bahamas, but as a matter of fact this medusa possesses rather the characters of the Olindiadre, two distinct kinds of tentacles and papilliform gonads. The history of the Woods Hole Gonionema is interesting. In spite of the fact that the " eel-pond " at the centre of the village of Woods Hole, a small body of water connected with the outer harbor by a narrow inlet, is easy of access to collectors, and that numerous students of jelly-fishes had investigated the waters around 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPUIA. 751 Woods Hole summer after summer for a number of years, Go7ii- onema was uever found in the Atlantic Ocean until 1894. During that summer a number of specimens were taken from the eel-pond, the creature having made an astonishingly sudden appearance upou the scene. It seems incredible that Gonionema could have been living in this small body of ^yater for any time previously, or at any rate that any number of individuals had been there. ]3ut the jelly-fish at once secured a good " foothold," and since the firet summer it has been very plentiful ; its numbers remain undimin- ished by the wholesale raids of collectors, in spite of the keen anxiety of some of those interested in it. During the sunnner of 1894, when Gonionema was first found at Woods Hole, Prof. W. K. Brooks secured a number of specimens and made drawings both from live medusae and from sections of preserved material. Some of these drawings, PI. XXXHI, figs. 21, 22, PI. XXXIV, fig. 25, are now published, with Dr. Brooks' generous permission, foi- the first time. The first printed account of the Woods Hole species of Goni- onema, since recognized as distinct from the G. vertens of Agassiz, was published in 1895 by Dr. L. Murbach.^ In several instances the species has been mentioned as identical with G. vertens, and it was not until 1901 that the specific name Murhachii was bestowed upon it by Dr. A. G. JNIayer. The work which I have done on the life-hisloiy of this form was originally undertaken and nas since been prosecuted with Dr. Mur- bach's kind encouragement, and I have received from him many favors in the way of material and helpful suggestions. The research has been carried on during 1900 and 1901 at the U. S. Fish Commission Laboratory, where I have had the great privilege of working during the summer, and under the direction of Prof. W. K. Brooks at the Biological Laboratory of the Johns Plopkins University. I wish to acknowledge my obligations to Dr. Bumpus, Dr. H. M. Smith and Dr. Whitman for courtesies wliich they have extended to me in my work. Note on the Ontogeny of the " Trachomedus.e. " According to Ilaeckel's classification Gonionema falls into his third order, the " Trachomedusse. " Haeckel characterized this ^ L. MuRBACU, 1895, " Preliminary Note on the Life-History of Gonio- nemus," Journal of irorphology, Xt, 3. 752 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC. , order as follows: " Development, hypogenesis (not metagenesis), but usually with metamorphosis." Subsequent research into the life-history of this group has shown that each clause of this state- ment is open to emendation. In the first place, the " usually " is superfluous. The exceptions which Haeckel supposed to exist and Avhich caused him to say " usually with metamorphosis " have been shown to be no exceptions, but cases of somewhat easily misunder- stood metamorphosis. Such, for example, was the case of Liriope, which has been studied by Metschnikoff^ and Brooks.^ The larva is a true hydra, although its free swimming mode of life and its superficial aspect caused it to be mistaken, formerly, for a gonosome. My study of a jelly-fish which Haeckel includes in his order " Trachomedusse " leads to the conclusion that the first part of Haeckel' s statement also requires revision, and that meta- genesis does occur among medusae of this order. Although there may be different interpretations of the terms " metagenesis" and " hypogenesis," the following notion of the process of alternation of generations may be safely accepted as that which is generally held by students of this group. The production by a larva of offspring unlike itself, and its own ultimate death without undergoing metamorphosis, are frequent accompaniments of the intermediate as of the primary process of multiplication; but they ai-e by no means essential to the process of metagenesis or alterna- tion of generations. Creatures which multiply sexually at one point of their life-history, and at another point non-sexually by budding or fission, are said to have a metagenetic development. In Gonionema a large number of adult individuals are produced from a single egg through an intermediate process of multiplication (text- figs. 2-10) ; buds are developed upon the body of the hydra-like larva, become detached and, beginning as pianulse, follow exactly the same course of development as the sexually produced parent. Both parent and offspring later change into fully developed meduspe. Gonionema has, then, a metagenetic form of development. It is, of course, a mistake to regard the mere presence of a hydrula stage enough to constitute alternation of generations (Murbach, 1895, p. 496). These emendations of Haeckel's description of the order add 2 Metschnikoff, Embryologische Studien an Medusen, 1886. ^ Brooks, Life-History of the Hydromedum, 1886. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 753 evidence to that already put forward by Brooks (1886, p. 300), and others, to show that the hard and fast lines drawn by Haeckel and the Hertwigs separating the " Trachilinie " and the " Lepto- linge," on the ground of anatomical differences or developmental features, are not borne out by Ihe facts. The Hertwigs (1878) hold that " the marginal sense organs (Gehdrorgane) alone furnish characteristics which enable us in every case to distinguish the Trachomedusffi (Trachomedusre and Narcomedusie of Haeckel) from the Vesiculatse (Campanularian medusae) without knowledge of their development." Dr. Brooks has, however, described a species of Laodice which unites in its anatomical features the char- acters of both the Leptoliua^ and the Trachylinse, having the ocelli of the former order and the chitinous gonangium containing medusa buds,* while Prof. Brooks has demonstrated (1886) that it also possesses the true endoderraal sense clubs of the Trachylinse. It may be that the present record of observations on Gonionema will be of interest as contributing some new points to the present meagre knowledge of the manifold forms and types which are exhibited iu the developmental processes of this great group. Gonosome. Gonionema is a very attractive feature of the \Yoods Hole fauna. Its exquisite glassy umbrella, marked with a cross of yel- low or brown by the four radial canals and the gonads, a brilliant row of closely set spots of gleaming phosphorescent green outlining its edge, a fringe of delicate streaming tentacles strung with bead- like clusters of thread cells, are all more or less familiar to many American biologists (PL XXXI, fig. 1). On cloudy days or toward nightfall the medusa is very active, swimming upward to the top of the water and then floating back to the bottom. In swimming it propels itself upward with rhyth- mic pulsations of the bell-margin, the tentacles shortened and the bell very convex (PI. XXXI, fig. 2). Upon reaching the surface the creature keels over almost instantly, and floats downward with bell relaxed and inverted and the tentacles extended far out hori- zontally in a wide snare of stinging threads which carries certain destruction to creatures even larger than the jelly-fish itself (fig. Agassiz, 1865, p. 125. 48 754 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, 1). Gonionema continues this fishing, with little respite, all day- long in cloudy weather. Occasionally it fastens itself to a blade of eel-grass or some other object near the bottom (PI. XXXI, fig. 3), or stops midway in its course with tentacles extended, as in my figure (1). In this position it is well-nigh invisible, but a deadly foe to small fish or crustaceans which cross its path. Gonads. In the mature Gonionema the sexual organs are " frill-like lobes, passing from one side to the other of the chimiferous canal" (Agassiz, 1865). Their form and position are shown in PI. XXXI, figs. 3, 4 and 5. The free edge of the ribbon of tissue is thickened and rounded, and is bent backward and forward across the radial canal. The color of the gonads has been supposed to afford means of discriminating between the sexes, the males differing from the females in the brighter yellow of the gonadial tissue. But this distinction does not hold, and it is necessary to examine the indi- vidual medusse with a lens in order to separate the sexes. The ovarian eggs, enclosed in the ectoderm of the gonads in the female, give them a granular appearance as contrasted with the more homogeneous and translucent tissue of the male. When a large number of the jelly-fish are separated into two vessels, one contain- ing the males and the other the females, the general color tone of the males is brighter and more lively than that of the females, but the specimens in each dish range all the way from light straw color up through orange, ochre, sienna, to dark brown. Embryology. It is my purpose to give in outline the main points in the early part of the life-history of Gonionema. I have not discovered that this genus exhibits any notable peculiarities in the development of the egg, and I shall therefore lay the greater emphasis upon certain features of the later developmental stages, which have more signifi- cance in so far as they are le^s familiar. A. Dehiscence. — The eggs are imbedded in the ectodermal tissue of the gonad as in a gelatinous matrix (PI. XXXI, fig. 5). The round thickened edge of the ribbon contains the riper eggs, but the thinner portion is well packed with maturing ova. Dehiscence takes place by the breaking down of the superficial ectodermal invest- 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 755 ment of the gonad and the liberation of the eggs or spermatozoa imbedded in its substance. The contractions of the umbrella in swimming put a strain upon the subumbral walls and help to rup- ture the epithelium of the gonads. What the cytological change is which precedes the extrusion of the sexual elements or the nature of the causes which effect this change are matters of uncertainty. We know only that these conditions can be artificially induced by means to be mentioned presently. The process of dehiscence occu- pies only a very few moments. Most of the eggs Avhich are ready for fertilization are extruded all at once, coming out of the bell- cavity in a cloud at each contraction of the marginal ring. Two or three minutes after dehiscence begins only a few belated eggs remain to be loosened from the gonads and expelled from the subumbral cavity one at a time. PI. XXXI, fig. 5, is drawn from a sketch of a medusa in the act of spaw'ning. The specimen was held inverted under the microscope in a watch-glass. Although not free to swim it went through the motions, contract- ing the bell rhythmically. In this way the softened ectodermal tissue of the gonads was ruptured and the eggs expelled. Little round pits are left by the eggs, like bullet-molds. The earliest date at which fertile medusse have been found was the first of July; the latest, the last -sveek of September, The period of maximum sexual activity is from the middle of July to the middle of August. B. Periodicity.— As stated by Murbach (1895), the eggs of Gonionema are deposited with great regularity. During the earlier part of the summer dehiscence takes place at about 8 P.IM., but later in the season, when dusk comes earlier, the medusie spawn at 7 or even as early as a quarter past 6. Extrusion of the eggs may be artificially induced, In this respect Gonionema differs markedly from some other marine animals which exhibit equal definiteness in the spawning time. Dr. jNIurbach found that after the medusfe had been shut up in a dark place for an hour, even dur- ing the daytime, they would deposit eggs and sperm. My experi- ments show that this is more likely to be the case in the afternoon than earlier in the day; before 2 o'clock in the afternoon, an hour in the dark would sometimes bring about a deposition of a small number of eggs, and if the period was lengthened to an hour and a half, a slightly larger number of eggs were found in the water. 756 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, But after 2 o'clock the hour's shutting away from the light brought about an apparently normal spawning. I found that the with- drawal of light brings about surprisingly definite results. The condition of the tissues arrives at the point requisite for the release of the eggs almost on the minute. This constancy is not appre- ciably affected by moderate changes in Ihe temperature. A large number of experiments and observations have been made to educe the exact time of stimulation (if we may so speak of an influence which seems to be purely negative) and the results are summarized in the following table. Record was kept of experiments carried on during the whole of the fertile season, partly in one summer, paiUy in the next. The stimulation -time varies somewhat with the season ; the table gives the results obtained during the last week in July, when the eggs were being discharged in the greatest numbers. Before 2 P.M. small number > eggs laid after 90 minutes' darkeninj 2-3 " almost normal no. " 75 3-4 " fully " " 65 4-5 " " " " " " " 60 5-6 " < fl u " " " 60 6-7 " " " " u " 50 " " At 8 " eggs laid normally, without artificial darkening. As the hour approached the normal time for the deposition of the eggs, the precision with which they were discharged became more and more marked. Between 4 and 7 P.M. the lime of darkening necessary to produce spawning does not vary more than four minutes on either side of the hour. Some experiments were tried with a view to inhibiting the normal deposition of eggs, or at least of hindering it, by keeping the eggs in strong artificial light. The results were not conclusive, as the electric lights in the laboratory were not in use until after dusk, when part of the stimulus had already been received. The experi- ments showed a certain degree of retarding of the process of spawn- ing as a result of the strong illumination. It would be interesting to determine whether the use of stronger light, applied at the commencement of evening dusk, would result in complete inhibi- tion of the process.^ ^ Subsequent experiments show that brilliant illumination has a stupe- fying eflfect on medusa?, inhibiting contraction of the bell and almost preventing spawning, though not altogether or in all instances. 1902.] NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 757 It is evident from the above statements that Gonionema is exceed- ingly sensitive to external conditions. Not all coelenterates are affected in the same degree, and some are apparently not affected at all by changes in illumination. Some medusse always lay their eggs early in the morning, while others of nearly related genera choose the evening or night. Experiments carried on by Wilson and Donaldson under Prof. Brooks' direction, at Beaufort, N. C, showed that in the case of Renilla and some sea anemones, at any rate, changes in light and temperature did not affect the precision with which the regular physiological processes took place. It is well known that a great many marine animals show more or less definiteuess in the habit of spawning. Metschnikoff gives a table® showing the time of spawning of a large number of different genera of jelly-fishes. In other groups the same tendency is manifest. This phenomenon is probably the result of the working of natural selection, the habit of laying the eggs at a certain definite time having proved of value to the different species. The fact that in some forms this precision of periodicity is not dependent upon external influences, while in others there is manifest a marked degree of sensitiveness to such stimula, seems to me to indicate that the tendency has been arrived at by different processes, and may be due to quite different requirements in the various creatures. But to return to the dehiscence of Gonioyiema: not all the eggs, by any means, which the ovaries contain are liberated at one time. Medusse have been seen to deposit eggs every night for a week, and while specimens kept in captivity are not very reliable in drawing inferences as to natural processes, this period of sexual activity would, it would seem, be more likely to be shortened than other- wise by the unnatural conditions. After the first three or four days on which spawning took place, a small number of ova were left in the gonads, and on the three successive evenings these were extruded a few at a time. Late in the summer the specimens taken are usually devoid of sexual products, and the gonads small and shriveled. C. Egg-Envelope. — In freshly laid eggs the polar bodies are only rarely to be found. They are normally given off and lost in the gonads previous to dehiscence. Before fertilization the eggs ^Metschnikoff, 1886, Embryologische Studien. 758 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, float in a cloud tlirougli the water, each one surrounded by a very- soft thick gelatinous envelope. If the egg is not fertilized the surrounding mass of semi-fluid jelly slowly shrinks up and the increased specific gravity causes the egg to sink to the bottom. Blister-like vacuoles appear in its substance, puffing out the jelly, and in the course of several days the protoplasm becomes disinte- grated and the egg goes to pieces. When fertilization takes place, the shrinking of the egg-envelope is more immediate and greater in degree, so that the egg sinks at once and sticks to the bottom by means of the viscid substance surrounding it. Methods. — It may be well to digress at this point in order to mention some of the methods employed in the preparation of material. The adhesive property above referred to is of great assistance in making mounts of the segmenting eggs, as they may be allowed to settle on glass slides, which are afterward run up through all the reagents, without danger of washing off. For sec- tioning, the best way of securing the eggs was found to be by stirring about in the water with a camel' s-hair brush and preventing them from gluing themselves down to the bottom of the dish. They would then stick together in masses, and being protected from too much pressure by the gelatinous covering, they were found to seg- ment normally. The bunches of eggs wei'e large euougli to see with the unaided eye, and could be easily transferred to the killing fluid, and afterward stained and cut. The best reagents that were used for killing were corrosive-acetic, three per cent, glacial-acetic in saturate solution of bichloride of mercury, and the full strength (forty per cent. ) solution of forma- lin. Corrosive-acetic was satisfactory^ for most purposes, both segmenting eggs and adult medusse being fixed in this mixture. They were immersed for from one to ten minutes, according to the bulk of the tissues. Pure (forty per cent. ) formalin was used very successful!}^ for the younger stages, giving good cytological fixation of segmenting eggs and of larvse. Fifteen to forty seconds is sufficient to fix the tissues thoroughly. In working with Gonionema I hav^e experienced none of the difficulty that seems to be met with in other coelenterates in getting uniform results with formalin material. I have used this reagent, both for fixation and for permanent preservation, with the best results. For narcotizing 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 759 the larvse and adult medusae, I find meulhol crystals the most con- venient and rapid chemical to use. It may be well to mention the method of keeping Gonionema alive in the laboratory. Running Avater is not desirable, and it is of no benefit to either medusse or larvse to change the water fre- quently, as I have learned after much laborious effort to keep the specimens alive in this manner. Balanced aquaria furnish the best environment for these creatures. I succeeded in keeping a large number of larvse in healthy growing condition for six months in aquarium jars in the laboratory. The quantity of water was kept constant by adding fresh water to make up for the loss by evapora- tion. Food was furnished in the form of protozoans and other microscopic organisms. Oxidation was secured by means of large quantities of diatoms which were reared for the purpose. Cultures were made from the scrapings of eel-grass, etc., and the diatoms which accumulated from them, collecting in clumps on the bottom of the dish, were scraped into the water with the larvse. At the end of January, the polyps, which came from eggs laid ihe pre- ceding August, died Avithout undergoing metamorphosis. Their death was probably due to a lack of food supply sufficient for the requirements of their growing tissues. D. Segmentation. — The egg is spherical, averaging .07 mm. in diameter. It consists of yellowish, rather cloudy protoplasm, sufficiently transparent to permit one to observe the more conspicu- ous changes which take place in the substance of the living egg. Segmentation is total and equal, of the type which is designated by Melschnikoff as " durschneidende Fu7'chung." The cleavage- furrow appears at one side of the egg first and cuts through its substance until it reaches the opposite side, dividing it into two hemispheres (PI. XXXI, fig. 6). The point at which the furrow starts is that nearest the nucleus, which lies eccentrically in the granular substance of the egg. The first indication of the fiu-row is a shallow groove, which deepens rapidly and at the same time lengthens so as to embrace the egg meridianally. The furrow is finally completed, superficially, a short time before it has entirely separated the egg into two distinct halves. The last point to lie cut off corresponds in position almost exactly with the nucleus, but on the opposite side of the egg. The first cleavage is completed one hour after fertilization. The two dautihter-uuclei now lie at 760 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, tlie plane of fission, and at llie same distance from the surface'^of the egg as the original nucleus. The second furrow normally starts on the same point of the surface as the first, and again divides the egg meridianally in a plane at right angles to the first. Sometimes the second furrow starts irregularly, at a point around the egg from the origin of the first furrow. One of the hemispheres is thus divided before the other, as in fig. 7. Fifty minutes elapses between the completion of the first and second furrows. Succes- sive segmentations come in at intervals of forty -five to fifty minutes. AVilh the eight-cell stage rotation of the blastomeres occurs. The four upper cells turn through an angle of 45° upon the lower ones, so that they come to lie in the valleys between the lower ones, instead of being superimposed upon them. Segmentation continues until a hollow blastula (PI. XXXI, fig. 8) is produced, a layer of thick cells surrounding a small cleavage cavity. The cells are of uniform thickness, and their outer ends give rise to cilia which drive the egg roimd and round by their motion within the mem- brane, sometimes in one dii'ection, sometimes in the opposite. During this stage the formation of the endoderm takes place. The inner ends of the blastomeres are delaminated, the process going on at an equal rate on all sides, until a uniform layer of endoderm cells lies within the ectodermal layer (PL XXXI, fig. 9). By increase in size of these endodermal ""cells the cavity of the egg comes to be entirely obliterated. During the subsequent life- history of the larva no cavity exists within the body until after several marked changes have taken place. The Planula. By the rupture of the egg membrane the nearly spherical ciliated larva makes its escape, and starts upon the stage in which it is a swimming planula (PI. XXXI, fig. 10). Its shape soon changes, becoming narrower and longer at one pole than the other ; this narrower pole is to be the future oral extremity of the larva. The cilia serve to propel the planula in a slow rotating j)rogression through the water, usually not far from the bottom. The larger end is directed forward in swimming. The time at which the planula appears is in the morning, about twelve hours after the egg was fertilized. The length of the larva is now between . 1 and .15 mm. (PI. XXXI, fig. 10). This condition persists for a 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 761 varying time. Toward the end of this time the first indications of a coelenteric cavity appear in the arrangement ot the cells at the posterior end of the swimming larva (PI. XXXI, fig. 11, P). Their inner margins come to lie in a straight line, following the long asis of the larva (PI, XXXI, fig, 11, C). This process is better understood when we notice that in changing its shape from the spherical morula to the elongated planula the larva also under- went a slight rearrangement of its cells. The endoderm was first formed as a spherical mass, and its cells were all conical, radiating from the centre to the surface. But as elongation took place in the formation of the planula, the cells were stretched out into a cylinder and their inner ends overlapped irregularly, as is shown at the anterior end (A) of fig. 11. When the coeleuteron begins fo be developed, the inner ends of these upper endodermal cells change their position somewhat and, as above stated, meet along a continuous line. At the same time a change is to be noticed in the cells at the surface of the oral pole. The cell walls at this point become less distinct (PI. XXXI, fig. 11, 0), and finally a disin- tegration of the boundaries leaves the tissue an undifferentiated layer of protoplasm. Before separation of the tissue to form the definitive coelenteric cavity, the larva stops swimming, loses its cilia, and settles down upon the bottom. The larger end, which was directed forward in swimming, is downward. Between the free- swimming stage and the sessile hydra-stage there frequently, though not always, intervenes a condition which reminds one of a minute planarian in its shape and movements. The planula settles down upon the bottom and slowly glides along by a rhythmic wave- like progression. This condition seems to take the place of Ihe last part of the ordinary and evidently more normal free-swimming stage, and is perhaps due to the unfavorable conditions of the laboratory. This condition is not at all like the pathological plasmodial forms to be mentioned below. Its changes in shape are slight, and i(s manner of movement rather a glide than a proto- plasmic flowing J[one of the definiteness of structure is lost, and these larvae transform into hydras as soon as those which change directly from the free-swimming planulse. It is, then, not a phenomenon of degeneration, nor, on the other hand, an essential phase in the life of the animal, but rather an intermediate and probably accidental condition. 762 pkoceedings of the academy of [dec, The Hydra. As soon as the planula-stage has given place to the settled hydra- stage the ccelenteron becomes complete. The mouth appears at the free end where the tissue has previously showed indications of dis- integration, at the end of the axial line formed by the endodermal cells. At first the mouth is visible only when the specimens are killed and cleared or sectioned. Soon, however, it becomes large enough to see in the live animal by focussing down from above with a high-power lens. It then appears as a minute pit in the ecto- derm. The coelenteron is more distinct at the upper end than below, where it disappears into the loosely constituted cell-mass of the interior. The definite cavity of the coelenteron is somewhat later in making its appearance. When finally established it is lined with a thick layer of columnar endodermal epithelium. At its bottom it flares out in following the contour of the body-wall, as it appears in PI. XXXII, fig. 15, which shows a late stage, but the same condition of the coelenteron as exists in the newly transformed larva. The figure also shows a thickened core of endoderm which projects upward into the coelenteron as a gastric peduncle. This conical mass of cells develops during the latter part of the hydra-stage. A. Tentacles. — In the later transformation of the developing Gonionema no definitely determinate periods separate the times of active change. The development time is variable, depending upon external conditions of food, temperature, etc. In an average larva, however, the first tentacles make their appearance during the third week after the fertilization of the egg, or a week after the larva becomes attached. Two tentacles appear opposite one another at a level about one-quarter of the distance from the upper pole of the hydra (PI. XXXII, fig. 12). They are knob-like when they appear, but grow rapidly to a considei'able length, the few endo- dermal cells which form the core of each tentacle increasing in number. Fig. 12 shows a vertical section of a two-tentacled polyp of the fifth week. The manner of origin of the tentacles will be described in the section on the origin of tentacles under "The Medusa. ' ' The second pair of tentacles (PI. XXXII, fig. 14) appear soon after the first, and by their rapid growth soon become as large as the first pair, from which they are then no longer distinguishable. NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 763 1902.] Irregularities are common in the appearance of the tentacles of the polyp, as in the adult. Il frequently happens that only one of the second pair ever makes its appearance. Or one may be slow in arising, and always remain smaller than the other. On the other hand, an abnormally large number are frequently developed, indi- viduals wilh five or six being not uncommonly found (Fl. XXXII, fig. 13). B. Form of Ci^^lenteron.—The appearance of the tentacles is accompanied by alterations in the form of the coelenteric cavity. The rapid growth of the cells al the points where the tentacles arise and the outpushiug of the tissue in the process seem to affect the contour of the body-wall over a considerable area, so that diverticula of the coelen- teron and of the mouth extend in the direction of each of the tentacles. A stellate arrangement results, the mouth being in the form of a cross. This cor- responds exactly with the condition in the medusa, especially in young speci- meus (PI. XXXIII, fig. 19), in which the twisting which in older individuals obscures somewhat the true relation of parts has not yet ing agreement in plan between oral lobes , , , T .1 il ' and radial canals, taken place. In the three- or five-tentacled hydra the number and arrangement of the oral lobes corresponds with the number and arrangement of the tenta- cles. Fig. 13, PI. XXXII, represents a polyp with five radial jiarts, in which one lobe of the mouth is bifurcated. This condition is very similar to that frequently met with in adult medusre (text fig. 1). The whole aspect of the hypostome of the Gonionema polyp is very similar to that of the manubrium of the young medusa. The ectoderm at the edges of the mouth becomes thickened and armed with nematocysts, which have by this time made their ap- pearance, in a manner to be described later, over a large part of Fig. 1. Abnormal five-parted medusa, show- 764 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC. , the body of the hydra. Below the mouth the hypostome become& narrow aud tubular and distinct from the rest of the body, a decided angle separating them at the level of the tentacles. Habits. One of the most striking habits of the adult jelly-fish is its pre- hensile propensity. The adhesive organ at the "knee" of the tentacle is composed of long slender glandular cells, packed into a thick cushion which is inclosed within a strongly muscular rim or collar (PI. XXXIII, fig, 20). This organ is located on the aboral side of the tentacle. When at rest the jelly-fish lies on the bottom with inverted bell, the tentacles widely extended horizontally and attached to the bottom by means of the combined cement gland and vacuum cup near the tip (PL XXXI, fig. 3). How this habit of inverting itself could have come to be acquired primarily by the adult medusa it is hard to see. But if, as I shall give my reasons for believing, the medusa arises by direct metamorphosis from the hydra, the habits of the hydra would naturally be more or less per- manent in the adult. It may be that this particular habit is more likely to be first acquired by the larva than by the adult. The tentacles of the hydra reach a relative length greater than in the case of any other known hydroid polyp. They frequently stretch out in the water for a distance three or four times the height of the polyp. Fig. 14, PI. XXXII, shows a hydra with the tentacles fully extended, their tips touching. the ground in the characteristic attitude. The drooping of the tentacles is evidently caused by their extraordinary length, and is almost as unusual an occurrence among the hydromedusre. At the points where the tips of the tentacles come in contact with the bottom they spread out somewhat, forming a sole-like surface which is closely applied to whatever object the polyp is settled upon (PI. XXXII, fig. 14). This smearing out of the tentacle tips is like that which occurs in live specimens of hydra held between slide and cover-glass for examination. Both polyp and medusa remain when at rest with the mouth expanded, the manubrium stretching upward, the tentacles widely extended and drooping to the bottom. When an animal swims against one of the tentacles, the reactions are much the same in the polyp as in the adult. The feeding habits of Gonionema have been described at 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 765 length by Yerkes,^ His account would apply almost as well to the process in the hydra. The tentacle which comes in contact with the prey is contracted with a suddenness and vigor which belies the ap- parent inertia of the moment before. The victim is seen to be firmly spitted on the microscopic lances of the nematocysts, and it is evident that the first thing that happened when the animal touched the tentacle was the discharge of all the thread cells in that region. The tentacle in contracting carries the food, protozoan or minute worm, or whatevei', toward the mouth. The long manubrium then moves about slightly as if in search of the morsel. Finally the tentacle places the food directly upon the mouth (PI, XXXII, fig, 16), which proceeds to turn itself over the object and work it down- ward until it vanishes into the gastric pouch of the polyp. Degeneration Phenomena.^ For some reason or other, not understood at present, the larvae in one of my aquarium jars began when three months old to exhibit most singular forms and activities. All appearance of the hydra form was lost, ectoderm and endoderm becoming indistin- guishable and cell outlines dissolved. The larva in this condition had very much the appearance of an amoeba, Tlie specimens slumped down on the bottom of the aquarium in a shapeless mass, and by protoplasmic flowing changed their shape through an end- less variety of forms, moving slowly from point to point. Thin l^seudopodia were sent out, along which the substance of the organ- ism flowed, and by the breaking of the connecting isthmus divided into two. Thti fragments became smaller and smaller until no longer recognizable. These abnormal larvae remained alive for six weeks, after which no trace of them was to be seen. Budding in the Larv.e — jMetagenesis." Contrary to Haeckel's statement that in the group of jelly-fish which he calls the " Trachomedusse " metagenesis does not occur, in ' R. M. Yerkes, "The Sensory Reactious of Gonioncmus," Am. Journ. Physiology, February, 1903. * More fully described iu the Biological Bulletin of the Marine Biologi- cal Laboratory, Woods Hole, August, 1902. " An earlier draft of this section appeared iu the Johns Hopkins Univer- sity Circulars, June, 1903. 766 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, Gonionema, which falls into that group, this process does take place. By a form of non-sexual multiplication different from any which has previously been described for any member of the hydro- meduspe, an intermediate process of reproduction is introduced into the life-history of Gonionema, whereby a large number of aduHs are produced from a single Qgg. Asexual multiplication in the larvseof Scyphomeduste has been known since 1841, when Sars saw and described the formation of buds in a scyphistoma of uncertain identity, but probably either an Aurelia or a Cyanea. Since that time several analogous cases have been made known. The scy- phistoma larvse of Cassiopea, for example, were found producing eggs in large numbers by Bigelow (1900), who gives a detailed account of the method of budding in a monograph on this Khizo- stome. It may be further stated that in general the non -sexual process of production of buds by the larvse is an important method of multiplication among the Discomedusse. The buds usually develop, after detachment from the parent polyp, into a second generation of scyphistomas, identical in form and fate with the original ones. Buds may arise on the body of the scyphistoma, or upon stolons from its base, and either singly or several at a time. In Cotylorhiza the buds develop so rapidly and remain attached so long that large clusters accumulate about the base of the scyphistoma. According to some authors, Goette for example, the distal end' of the bud in Aurelia and Cyanea is destined to become the oral end of the detached larva, developing mouth and tentacles. Friedemann, on the other hand, says^" that in Aurelia he has found the opposite condition, the mouth being invariably devel- oped at the attached end of the bud. This is the common relation in other forms. In Cunina, Avhich falls into Haeckel's order the " Narcome- dusse," the ciliated tentacled larva multiplies by buds produced from an aboral stolon. These buds are not detached until mouth, digestive cavity and tentacles are well developed. Several are pro- duced simultaneously, and ai'e attached to the parent by the oral extremity. The description of this remarkable process is given by Prof. W. K. Brooks in The Life-History of the Hydromedusce (1886). 1" Postembryonal Entw. von Aurelia aurita, Zeitscli. f. w. Zoologie, LXXl, 2, 1903. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 767 It is my purpose in this section to give an account of a process of budding in a medusa very different from Cunma, one in which the asexual multiplication takes place very differently. In Gonio- nema the buds are produced in a manner which reminds one very strongly P"='^«' ad characterized. Since the days of Ehrenberg. al-. 'he ch-i- cal constitution of the shells of Tr«.hel»nma> has been the theme of a continued, though desultory, discussion. No attempt will be made, in this preliminary paper, to deal with ,he "enu as'a whole, or to discuss the values of characters relied upon for speciSc diagnosis. I. will suffice for presen purp^ to X Tr«cLfo»o,ia.as established by Ehrenberg, together w.th the ^me author's genera, Lagenella, ChoM^Ua .uA CA^.^ua a rsattiling one genus, the TrackeU^non^. of Stem ai,d of m» s„bse.,uent authorities. Neither is it necessary o e^tei here at kn"h into the subject of the constitution of the lorica. Th. matLis, indeed, by no means simple; and o«ta,»^y .t .s not »- capable of being decided, as to every specie by a &« « h chemical tests upon the shells of one or '^-''T^t.^n^^Z I ChMmhla and Cludoglma were supposed by Ehienbe.g to De ^Hctuf On the other hand laier investigator, have found ntssMe'to dissolve, wholly or in part, the shells of certain of the«. Cs in acids. I have no notion of calling in question the correct- ness of anv of these observations at present. , u^ a. The lorica, however, in each of the five species now to be de- scribed is completely silicified. If this had not been the case the o lowing descriptions would not have been written now and m to form- for these five were selected from among about twenty, al Z2Z in a prepai-ation of diatoms that liad been strongly boiled (oTsome time I a large volume of concentrated n.tric add, to iVcnhad been added, lorn time to time, small pieces of potassium chlorate. Moreover, subsequent experiment, showed that 792 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC. , original maleriai yielded the same shells, intact in every least feature, after long boiling in a mixture of equal parts of concen- Irated sulphuric acid and bichromate of potash. Other portions of the maleriai were acted upon by both solutions in turn. Last of all the shells, after these processes, were mounted on a thin cover- glass, and this glass, supported on platinum, was brought to a low red heat, with incipient softening, and kept there for fifteen minutes. The loricae emerged unaltered from this ordeal, in no way differing in this respect from the frustules of diatoms accom- panying them. Whatever may be the case with other forms, there- fore, the loricie here described are neither chitinous nor calcai'eous but silicious. The material from which these forms were obtained came from Ancora, N. J. It was pointed out to the writer by Mr. C. S. Boyer, in the spring of 1897. It is in form of a grayish, paper-like film, and it completely covered many acres of boggy ground. It is made up mostly of the frustules of Eunotia pectinalis Kg., lined with the dead endoplasm and varnished over with coleoderm. This diatom, during the colder months, thrives enor- mously in the flooded cranberry bogs, and dies in situ when the water is drained off for the growing season. In addition to the Eunotia, the gathering contains the remains of various rhizopods, besides spicules of indeterminate origin, miscellaneous diatoms and Trachelomonas. It is recognized that complete descriptions of the following species must include an account of the protoplasmic contents of the loricai. This cannot be given here, for the reason that the organ- isms were long since dead and shrunken. Portions of the gather- ing were, however, macerated with water, and in some of the numerous forms enough was seen of the contents to indicate that the body of the living animal contained a quantity of deep-green chlorophyll, a part of which still survived. A final decision as to the allegiance of these forms must, undoubtedly, await a study of them in their living state. But the whole structure of the hard parts points to Trachelomonas, and the name is given with some confidence Measurements are observed maxima in all cases. The total size will vary downward in different specimens of a given species, and with it, mostly to a corresponding degree, the dimensions of salient features. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 793 Trachelomonas vestita u- sp. Pi. XXXV, figs, i and 2. Lorica a sphere, opaque in air, with a prolonged, neck-like aper- ture. Walls of sphere complex, greatly thickened by a complete layer of radiating, closely compacted silicious rods or spicules. General surface of spicular coating showing numerous rounded and confluent terminations, with often a few more prolonged and some- what spine-like. Neck transparent, finely striated longitudinally, flaring, with rounded, everted and somewhat reverted, finely fluted lip. Diameter, including spicules, 25 fi. Length of spicules, 2.5 fi. Length of neck beyond spicules, 6.5 jj.. Diameter of lip, 7 fi. Bogs, Ancora, N. J Mounted in air the lorica shows yellowish-brown by transmitted light, bluish-green with a broAvn edge with spot-lens, and white on dark background with reflected light. In Canada balsam, colorless* and with a conspicuous spicular halo. Trachelomonas spiculifera n. sp PI. XXXV, fig. 4. Lorica spherical. Wall thickened by a layer of radiating, compacted silicious spicules, less long than in 1\ vestita. Surface of spicular coating showing round, evenly sown, mostly isolated grains, the terminations of spiculse. Aperture small, situated in a hyaline, nearly flat, crater-like area, with an upward -sloping, hyaline edge, which is circular or generally irregularly polygonal. Diameter of sphere, 25 fj.. Diameter of crater, 7 At. Length of spicules, 1.25 fi. Bogs, Ancora, N. J. Mounted in air the lorica is slightly tinted with chocolate by transmitted light, light bluish-green with spot-lens, and nearJy white on dark background with reflected light. In Canada balsam, colorless and with a spicular halo. Trachelomonas vermiculosa n. sp. PI. XXXV, fig. 3. Lorica nearly spherical. Walls somewhat thin, general surface nearly smooth, at maturity adorned with high, rounded, isolated ' Color-eflfects with these silicious loricse are no doubt due to refraction, interference, etc., and are serviceable or signilicant in specific diagnosis only to a very limited extent. 794 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, vermiform ridges. Aperture quite sinal], ^vithout crater-like area, the edge slightly raised, smooth and rounded. Diameter of sphere, 23 a^. Height of surface ridges, 2 //. Diameter of aperture at top, 2.5 //.. Bogs, Ancora, N.J . Mounted in air the lorica has a purplish tinge with transmitted light, is purple to yellow with spot-lens, and sometimes violet with top illumination. In Canada balsam, colorless. Trachelomonas spinosa n sp. PI. XXXV, fig. G. Lorica spherical, with long, slim neck. Walls transparent, some- what granulate ; spines about 10, hollow, nearly straight, slender, evenly tapering, distributed symmetrically. Neck with a strength- ening ring of silica near the top. Aperture small. Diameter of sphere, 13 fi. Length of neck, 7 /j'-. Greatest length of spines, 12 /*. Bogs, Ancora, N. J. Mounted in air, the lorica is nearly colorless by transmitted light, shining purple to violet with spot-lens and with top illumination on dark background. In Canada balsam, colorless and very faint. Traclielomonas minor n. sp. PI. XXXV, fig. 5. Lorica spherical, with long, slim neck and one very long caudal spine. Walls transparent, surface showing a few isolated granules. Neck cylindrical, with capillary tube. Caudal spine nearly straight, or somewhat bent or spirally twisted, hollow. Diameter of sphere, 9 /x. Length of neck, 5 //. Length of spine, 17 m- Bogs, Ancora, N. J, Mounted in air or in Canada balsam the lorica gives color- effects like those of T. spinosa. Of the above, T. spiculifera and T. spinosa are fairly plentiful in the Ancora diatomaceous gathering, while T. vestita is not so abundant and T. minor may be called scarce. T. vermiculosa is about as plentiful as T. vestita. All five, however, are represented by numerous specimens, and a great many of each were studied with care. No wide variations from the types, as above given. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 795 were found in any of the five species, except in point of size as already mentioned, and to a minor degree in perfection of develop- ment, though not in character, of the surface markings. In par- ticular, there seems to be no tendency toward intergradation in case of any of those here described, or among the other very numerous kinds, to be desci-ibed in a future communication, which accom- pany them in this remarkable gathering. In addition to the numerous forms from A.ncora, N. J., others equally silicious, but quite distinct specifically, have been detected in small numbers among diatomaceous material from bogs and ponds over a wide range of country. All these are being made the subject of a careful study, the results of which are to be set forth in a future paper. Unmounted fresh material, preserved in formalin, which from its origin may be supposed to contain those organisms, is greatly desired by the writer. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXY. The figures are drawn to a uniform scale, an enlargement of 1200 diameters. Fig. 1. — TracJielomonas tiestita n. sp. Fig. 2. — I'rachelomonas vestita optical median section. Fig. 3. — TracJielomonas vermiculosa n. sp. Fig. 4. — Trachelomonas spiculifera n. sp. Fig. 5. — TracJielomonas minor n. sp. Fig. 6. — TracJielomonas spinosa n. sp. 796 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, The following reports were ordered to he printed : REPOKT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY. Forty-six meetings have been held during the year, with an average attendance of fourteen persons. Six weeks in midsummer were without a meeting because of the lack of a quorum. Verbal communications were made by Messrs. Lyman, Woolman, A. E. Brown, Harshberger, Pilsbry, Chapman, Murlin, Goldsmith, Crawley, Calvert, Montgomery, Shulz, Morris, Conklin, Mills, Stone, Moore, Keely, Bradner, Rhoads, Kraemer, H. Fox, Bur- nett Smith and Dr. Ida Keller. Fifty-five papers have been presented for publication and acted on by the Publication Committee, as follows: Henry A. Pilsbry, 7; James A. G. Rehn, 7; Arthur E. Brown, 3; John W. Harsh- berger, 3; Thomas H. Montgomery, Jr., 3; S. N. Rhoads, 2; Howard Crawley, 2; J. Percy Moore, 2; Gerrit S. Miller, Jr., 2; Benjamin Smith Lyman, 1 ; G. K. Gude, 1 ; Ralph V. Cham- berlain, 1; Thomas Meehan, 1 ; F. E. Blaisdell, 1; William J. Fox, 1 ; Albert M, Reese, 1 ; Edwin G. Conklin, 1 ; Clarence B. Moore, 1 ; Witmer Stone, 1 ; Witmer Stone and James A. G. Rehn, 1; Henry C. Chapman, 1 ; T. D. A. Cockerell, 1; John Raymond Murlin, 1 ; Henry Kraemer, 1 ; O. P. Hay, 1 ; Henry A. Pilsbry and Bryant Walker, 1 ; H. Carlton Bastian, 1 ; Ada Springer, 1 ; Henry F. Perkins, 1 ; Adele M. Fielde, 1 ; Malcolm P. Anderson and Joseph Grinnell, 1 ; William H. Dall, 1 ; H. Viereck, 1. Forty-five of these have been published as papers in the Pro- ceedings, two in the Journal, one ha's appeared as the report of a verbal communication, one was withdrawn, two were returned to the authors, two are in course of publication and two are held over until next year. Since the last report there have been published of the Proceed- ings'dOl pages and 41 plates; of the Journal, 358 pages and (5 plates; of the Manual of Conchology, 305 pages and 39 plates; of 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 797 the Transactions of the American Entomological Society (tlie Ento- luological Section of the Academy), 367 pages and 9 plates, and of the Entomological Neivs, 334 pages and 15 plates, making a total of 2271 pages and 110 plates issued by the Academy during the year. We are indebled to Mr. Clarence B. Moore for the publication of the second part of the twelfth volume of ihe quarto Journal, the entire expense of printing and illustration having been defrayed by him. The statistics of distribution remain the same as last year. It is much to be regretted that the biographical memoir of our esteemed Vice-President, Thomas Meehan, the preparation of which had been provided for by the Academy as stated in the last annual report, has not yet been presented for publication. Twenty members and one correspondent have been elected. The deaths of eighteen members and five correspondents have been announced. Seven membere have been omitted from the roll because of non-payment of dues, and the following have resigned : Henry Leffmau, Harry G. Parker, John H. Packard, Charles L. Phillips, Henry Erben, Miss E. W. Lowber, Theodore P. Matthews and Hampton L. Carson. The Hayden Memorial Medal has been voted to Sir Archibald Geikie, D.Sc, LL.D., late Director-General of the Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ireland, and has been transmitted to him through H.B.M Consul in Philadelphia. This is the first time that the gold medal has been awarded, it having heretofore been struck annually in bronze and accompanied by a grant of the balance of interest arising from the fund. The modification has been made in the deed of gift by the founder of the award, Mrs. Ferdinand V. Hayden. The cornerstone of the building formerly occupied by the Acad- emy at the corner of Broad and Sansom streets, exposed during the demolition of the edifice, was received with its contents from the contractor, Mr, John Griftith, Jr., who received the thanks of the society. The contents of the interesting relic were found to cor- respond with the list recorded in tlie minutes of the meeting of May 25, 1839. A resolution was adopted in January urging on tlie National Congress the propriety of erecting in Washington a memorial to the late Prof. Spencer F. Baird. 798 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, Mr. Stewardson Browa was appointed the Academy's represen- tative to the proposed International Conference on Plant Breeding and Hybridization. The Council Room and Lecture Hall continue to be used by several societies whose objects are in harmony with those of the Academy. Edward J. Nolan, Recording Secretary. REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY. During the year the roll of Correspondents has been revised. There have been stricken from the list of living the names of twenty-six persons whose decease has been ascertained. Direct responses to communications have been received from 132 Corre- spondents, and the addresses of sixty -nine more have beeti verified or corrected from other sources. There remain on the rolls the names of eighty-one persons whom the postal authorities have failed to find at the addresses indicated. A list of the last has been posted on the bulletin-board with the request that the Corresponding Secretary be advised by members having information A\hich may assist in tracing any of those whose names appear. There have been announced the deaths of the following : Carh^s Berg, Henri Filhol, Alpheus Hyatt, John Wesley Powell and Rudolph Virchow. Mr, George A. Bouleuger, of the British Museum, has been elected a Correspondent. It is desired to emphasize the importance of requiring a higli standard of scientific productiveness as an invariable prerequisite to election as Correspondent of the Academy. Responding to a circular letter of request seventy-six Correspon- dents have contributed and others have promised to contribute, to a collection of photographs and biographical sketches which is being formed. It is hoped that the representation of living correspon- dents will be completed during the ensuing year. Copies of the Annual Reports were sent to all Correspondents whose addresses could be verified, and were acknowledged appre- ciatively by many. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 799 Upon the invitation of the Senate of the University of Chris- tiana to send a delegate to the meeting held to honor the memory of Niels Henrik Abel on the 100th anniversary of his birth, Prof. Robert Collett, a Correspondent, was appointed as the Academy's representative. In lieu of sending delegates an address was forwarded to be read at the jubilee meeting of Prof. Albert Gaudry, held in Paris, and letters of sympathy to be read at the Boston meeting memorial to Prof. Alpheus Hyatt, and at the funeral services of Prof. Lacaze- Duthiers. The statistics of the correspondence for the fiscal year are given in the following table : Communications Received. Acknowledgments of the Academy's publications, . . . 177 Notices transmitting publications, 66 Requests for exchanges and deficiencies, 10 Invitations to participate in meetings, etc., 6 Circulars concerning the administration of scientific institu- tions, research funds, etc., 4 Notices of the deaths of scientific men, 5 Photographs from correspondents, 76 Letters from correspondents, 43 Miscellaneous letters, requests for information, etc., ... 12 Total communications received from 158 institutions and 104 individuals, 399 Communications Forwarded. Acknowledgments of gifts to the Library, 667 Acknowledgments of gifts to the Museum, 84 Acknowledgments of photographs, 76 Copies of Circular letter, 1-^2 Copies of Annual Reports, 173 Notices of election and correspondent's diplomas, .... 3 Address, resolutions, letters of congratulation and condolence, 4 Letters to correspondents, 14 Letters on miscellaneous topics, 21 Total forwarded, . , 1174 Respectfully submitted, J. Percy Moore, Corresponding Secretary. 800 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec, REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN. The additions to the Library during the past year have amounted to 6,086. They were received from the following sources: Societies, .... I. V. Williamson Fund, Editors, General Fund Meigs J^'und, .... .Authors, U. S. Dep' t of the Interior, James L. Pennypacker, U. S. Dep. of Agriculture, Wilson Fund, .... Geological Surv. of Sweden Ministry of Public Works, France, . . - . East Indian Government, Geolog'l Surv. of Russia, U. S. Department of State, Geological Survey of Bel- gium, Observatory of Manila, . Pennsylvania State Li- brary, (geological Survey of India, Mexican Government, Henry A. Pilsbry, . . Trustees of the British Museum, Department of Agricul- ture, Cape of Good Hope, Geological Survey of New South Wales, . . . Geological Survey of Fin- land, 259 158 765 683 299 211 178 164 86 35 34 15 15 13 11 11 11 10 9 8 8 Messrs. Pilsbry and John- Department of Mines, Victoria, 4 Conchological Section of the Academy, ... 4 U.S. Com. of Fish and Fisheries 3 U. S. Coast and Geodetic Surv. , 3 Geological Survey of Canada, 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Bernice Panahi Museum, Library of Congress, . . Dr. W. W. Keen, . . . Special Exchange, . Bergen Museum, . Dr. H. C. Chapman, , . Home See's Office, Queensl. Mrs. C. B. Aaron, . . Illinois State Bureau of Labor, 2 Indian Museum, ... 2 Geological Survey of New Jersey, 2 Dr. S. G. Dixon, ... 2 Due de Loubat, ... 2 U. S. Treasury Dep., . 1 U. S. Department of War, 1 United States Civil Ser- vice Commission, . . 1 Surgeon -General's Office, 1 Chicago Library Club, . 1 Angeio Heilprin, ... 1 Dr. William Osier, . . 1 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 801 Commission of Inland schaft. Untersuchungen Fisheries and Game, der deutschen Meere in Massachusetts, Kiel., Ab. Helgoland, . 1 'N'orwegian Goverumeul, 1 Geological Survey of Surveyor-General' ? OfRce, Washington, .... 1 Natal, . Council of the Fritjof Nansen Fund for the Department of Mines, ]S"ova Scotia, . Advancement of Sci- (leological Survey of ence, 1 Portugal, . . Danish Government, . . 1 Edward J. Nolan, Bureau of American Instiluto Geologico de Ethuology, .... 1 Mexico, . . . Bryant Walker, . . . 1 Bentham Trustees, Kew Geological Survev of Gardens, . . . Louisiana, .... 1 Morris Jaslrow, J '., . T. Guilford Smith, . . 1 Department of Marine Geological Survey of Iowa, 1 and Fisheries, Canada, 1 Witmer Stone 1 Kommission zur wissen- They were distributed to the several departments of the Library as follows : Journals, 4,672 Geology, 428 Botany, 178 General Natural History, 123 Conchology, .... 89 Entomology, .... 75 Voyages and Travels . . 64 Agricullure, .... 55 Anthropology, .... 50 Geography, 50 Anatomy and Physiology, 48 Mammalogy, .... 38 Ornithology, .... 37 Herpetology, .... 35 Physical Sciences, ... 32 Icthyology, 23 Encyclopedias, .... 19 Medicine, 17 Miscellaneous, .... 16 Mineralogy, 12 Bibliography, .... 11 Helminthology, ... 11 Philology, 2 Mathematias, .... 1 Of these 4,960 were pamplilets and parts of periodicals, 960 were volumes and 166 were maps and sheets. We are also indebted to Dr. William P. Wilson for a collection 51 802 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, of 617 Muybridge plates illustrating animal motion. They will fill six portfolios and go far toward the completion of the Academy's collection of these interesting plates, of which previously there were but 103 in the Library, Four hundred and ninety-eight volumes have been bound. A death-mask of Dr. Joseph Leidy, whose memory is held in deserved esteem, has been presented by his nephew. Dr. Joseph Leidy, Jr. The decrease in the number of volumes bound and the slight falling off of receipts from those reported last year are consequent on the absence of the Librarian from May until October, four months' vacation having been kindly granted him by the Council for the improvement of his health, an end which was measurably secured by a prolonged stay in Italy. He has great pleasure in acknowledging his obligation to his assistant, Mr. William J. Fox, who during that period perfoi'med the routine work of the Library and ako acted as Recording Secretary most acceptably. All of which is respectfully submitted, Edward J. Nolan, Librarian. REPORT OF THE CURATORS. The year just past has been one of prosperity. While the soci- ety's income is small compared with that of many other institutions of like character, the increase in its scientific collections has been large, and the results obtained in original reseanjh have been the most extensive in its history. The buildings and the collections in the care of the Curators have been kept in excellent condition during the year, while many improvements have been effected. Additional space has been provided for the Entomological depart- ment by enclosing another section of the first floor of the old Museum. The taxidermist's quarters in the new wing have been partitioned off from the rest of the basement and heated. An enlarged system of steam pipes, covered with magnesia, has been introduced in the old building. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 803 Five new plate-glass and mahogany cases have been placed in the Museum during the year, one large case for birds and two for mammals, while Mr. Clarence B. Mooi'e has added two for the accommodation of the archpeological material obtained by him in northwestern Florida. A number of moth-proof storage cases of various kinds have been provided for the rapidly increasing study series of birds, mammals and insects. The Museum staff was further increased at the beginning of the year by securing the services of Dr. J. Percy Moore and Mr. C. W. Johnson as assistants to the Curators. Dr. Moore has taken charge of the Helmiuthological collection and has identified and catalogued all of the material in the Museum. During the sum- mer, when on leave of absence at Woods Hole, he made valuable collections in this department for the Academy. Mr. Johnson, besides the care of the Isaac Lea Collection of Eocene Mollusca, Avhich he has continued as heretofore, has been able to rearrange, identify and label the entire series of American Cretaceous invertebrates. The types identified number upward of 400. The additions to the Lea collection for the year number 730 trays. In the care and arrangement of the various study collections important work has been accomplished, the details of which will be found in the reports of the several sections- -that on the Conchologi- cal collections by Dr. Pilsbry ; the Ornithological by ]\[r. Stone ; the Botanical by Mr. Stewardson Brown, and the Entomological by Dr. Skinner. In the rearrangement of the Museum the most notable work has been the installation of nearly one-half of the mounted birds in the cases provided for them in the new building. The specimens have been carefully examined by the taxidermist and labeled and arranged by Mr, Stone. Almost all the water-birds and the greater part of the Gallinacese have been transferred, and the floor will be ready for opening in the spring. Rearrangement of the mounted mammals has been made neces- sary by the addition of new cases, and the moose and other exposed specimens have been placed under glass. Several attractive mounts have been prepared during the year, notably the groups of Siamangs collected and presented by Mr. Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. 804 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC. , The alcoholic material has been examined, and a large number of specimens have been catalogued and systematically arranged. In the Department of Archaeology, J.rr. Clarence B. Moore has added many valuable specimens to his collection and has personally superintended their arrangement and labeling, while Miss H. N. Wardle has made important progress in cataloguing the Haldeman collection. The additions to the collections during the year have been of importance, as may be seen from the appended list. Most note- worthy were the valuable series of vertebrates and insects col- lected in Sumatra by Mr. Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller and generously presented by them to the Academy. Reports on these collections have already been published or pre- pared for publication, covering the mammals, birds, reptiles and fishes. Another important gift was a collection of 2, 000 plants from the western United States received from Mr. Benjamin H. Smith, while Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., Clarence B. Moore, Samuel F. Houston, John Carter, Charles H. Cramp, James D. Winsor and Beulah M. Rhoads, members of the Academy, have secured through purchase a valuable series of birds from the Galapagos Islands. From its general fund the Academy has also been enabled to purchase the Rhoads Collection of North American Mammals, com- prising some 4,000 skins and skulls which fill an important gap in the Museum, and places the mammal collection on an excellent basis. Many valuable specimens of mammals, birds and reptiles have been received during the year from the Zoological Society of Phila- delphia, and Dr. H. C. Chapman has presented a beautifully pre- pared set of marine invertebrates obtained from the Zoological Station at Naples. During the spring Messrs. H. L. Viereck and J. A. G. Rehn visited southern New Mexico under direction of the Academy, and secured valuable collections of insects and plants and many verte- brates. The Conservator of the William S. Vaux Collections, ]\Ir. Theo- dore D. Rand, regrets that owing to illness he has not been able to give as much time to his duties as heretofore. With the assistance of Mr. George Vaux, Jr., such desirable specimens as came to his 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 805 notice have been purchased. Among them may be specially mentioned a specimen of the water-enclosing chalcedony from Brazil, enclosed in a gangue of igneous rock, and two remarkably fine crystals of epidote from Prince of Wales Island, Alaska. Besides the services rendered by the salaried Museum Staff, the Curators would express their indebtedness to Messrs. Theodore D. Rand, Lewis Woolman, Philip P. Calvert and Charles Lriebeck for aid in various departments, and to the students of the Jessup Fund, Messrs. E. G. Vanatta, J. A. G. Rehn, H. L. Viereck and Miss H. N. Wardle. A large number of specialists have visited the Academy during the year for the purpose of studying the collections and material has been loaned to the following: J. Dwight, Jr., G. S. Miller, Jr., William Brewster, W. B. Scott, H. F. Osborn, W. T. Horuaday, T. Wayland Vaughan, J. N. Rose, M. W. Lyon, J. W. Gidley, Robert Ridgway, W. H. Dall, C. D. Beadle, H. C. Oberholser, B. G. Wilder, W. B. Clarke, F. A. Lucas, C. AY. Richmond. REPORTS OF THE SECTIONS. Biological and Microscopical Section. The regular monthly meetings of the Section have been held with an attendance larger than that of last year. Several new members have been admitted. Numerous communications were made as follows : By Mr. John W. Palmer upon malarial fever iu the Philippines and upon collec- tions of diatoms made in the same locality; by Dr. T. S. Stewart upon smallpox and bacteria; by Dr. J. Cheston Morris upon var- ious pathological subjects, including Texas fever and vaccine virus ; by Mr. John A. Shulze upon mounted specimens of diatoms; by Mr. T. C. Palmer on Trachelomonas ; Mr. Silas L. Schumo on Mosses; Mr. Hugo Bilgram and Mr. Harold Wingate on Myxo- mycetes; Mr. Lewis Woolman on microscopic organisms in recent artesian well borings, and Mr. William B. Davis and Mr. C. S. Bover on diatoms. }C. 806 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC The Conservator reports as an addition to the collection a set of microscopic slides illustrating the structure of the placenta in Mar- supials, presented by Dr. Chapman. It has been proposed to hold extra meetings upon certain stated evenings during the year, for informal discussion and for the exhibition of microscopical slides. The following officers have been elected : Director, .... J. Cheston Morris, M.D. Vice- Director, Recorder, Corresponding Secretary, Conservator, . Treasurer, T. Chalkley Pahner. Charles S. Boyer. Silas S. Schumo. F. J. Keeley. Lewis Woolman. CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION, The growt h of the collection of mollusks during the year has been satisfactory, although no single large accession has been received. A list of those giving specimens will be found in connection with the Additions to the Museum. The chief gifts in point of extent were the series of Japanese mollusks sent by Mr. Y. Hirase, Zanzibar species from Sir Charles Eliot, and Carolinian land snails from Mr. J. H. Ferriss. The greater portion of the material has been studied and the work on a large part of it is embodied in papers published in the Proceedings of the Academy. The completion of the monograph on Bulimulidre has rendered possible the arrangement of that group in the Museum, where two double table-cases now contain the exhibition series. The work of identifying and monographing the Urocoplidse is in progress. The Manual of Conchology has been issued during the year, as hitherto. The following officers were elected to serve for the ensuing year : Director, .... Charles W. Johnson. Vice- Director, Corresponding Secretary, Treasurer, Librarian, Conservator, . John Ford. E. G. Vanatta. S. Kaymond Roberts. Edward J. Nolan. Henry A. Pilsbry. 1902.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 807 Entomological Section. The Recorder reports that the meetings of the Section, at which Interesting communications were made, have been well attended during the year. One member and one associate were elected. The Entomological News, the journal published by the Section, has been continued, 334 pages and 15 plates having been issued. The collections have been useful to our own students, and a number of investigators from other scientitic institutions have visited the Academy to study them. Over 37,000 specimens have been added during the year, 25,000 having been collected by an expedition sent out by the Academy. Many species new to science have been described by the members of the Section and a few have been sent to specialists elsewhere for study and description. The collections are in a good state of preservation and improved boxes and cabinets have been added. Additional floor space has been granted and enclosed by the Academy to provide for the growth of the Section. At the annual meeting, held December 18, the following were elected to serve as oflicers during the year 1903 : Director, ...... Philip Laurent. Vice- Director, . . . . . H. W. Wenzel. » Treasurer, . . . . . . E. T. Cress on. Recorder and Conservator, . . . Henry Skinner. Secretary, ...... C. W. Johnson. Publication Committee, . . . . C. W. Johnson, J. H. Ridings. Botanical Section, Accessions to the herbarium fully up to those of former years are reported. About 6,000 specimens, principally North American, have been received, the greater number being donations. The most important of these is a collection of Western American plants, consisting of 1,925 species and numbering considerably over 2,000 mounted sheets, representing most of the characteristic genera and a large number of the species of the Rocky Mountain region, presented by Mr. Benjamin H. Smith, the collection having been made by him some years ago while living in that district. It com- prises, besides plants of his own collecting, those of Pringle, 808 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, Suksdorf, Howell and others, many of the sheets being annotated by the late Dr. Porter, thus adding considerably to their interest and value. The collection includes a number of species and several genera not before represented in the herbarium. A collection of 430 California and Oregon plants, made by Mr. H. E. Brown, was presented by the Conservator. A collection of about 800 North American plants was presented early in the year by Mr. AVilliam M. Canby. They represent nearly all regions from the east coast to the west, including Georgia, Florida, the Gulf States and part of Mexico. The collection con- tains a number of recently named species, notably of Cratcegiis, not already contained in the herbarium. A collection of about 100 s^oecimens, of similar range of locali- ties, was presented by Prof. Charles S. Williamson. Smaller collections have been presented by Prof. E. A. Garratt, from British Columbia ; by C. F. Saunders, from Vermont, and by E. G. Vanatta, from Maryland. An interesting collecf.ion of about 130 specimens, made in the vicinity of Sandwich Bay, Labrador, during the past summer, was presented by Dr. Amos I*. Brown. A collection of West Indian plants, presented by Dr. John W. Harshberger, was collected by him in Jamaica, Haiti and Santo Domingo in 1901. Messrs. James A. G. Rehn and H. L. Viereck, of the Academy's expedition to southwestern Texas and New Mexico, early in the year, brought back a good series of about 2,000 specimens of the plants of that region. The collection is particularly rich in the Cacti, of which most excellent examples were obtained. It adds a number of desirable forms to the collection, and Avhen thoroughly studied will probably add sev^eral species to science. The collections purchased by the Academy include about 900 specimens of California plants received from Mr. A. A. Heller, made by himself and Mr. H. E. Brown during the past season ; 540 West Australian plants from Dr. Pritzel, and about 350 Canary Island plants from Dr. Bornmiiller. Most of these specimens have been mounted and consolidated with the general collection, and the others will be similarly arranged at as early a date as possible. The work of arranging the C. W. Short Herbarium has pro- •1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 809 gressed satisfactorily during the year, about 15,000 sheets having been mounted, completing the work through the Scrophulariaceae. These specimens have been incorporated in the general collections, thus in many instances crowding the cases, so that additional room is required. The local herbarium of the Philadelphia Botanical Club has been enriched by donations from its members aggregating about 500 specimens. The meetings of the Section, at which a number of communica- tions of scientific interest have been presented, have been held regularly during the year. At the meeting held December 8, 1902, the following were elected to serve as officers for the ensuing year : Director, ..... Benjamin H. Smith. Vice-Director, .... Joseph Crawford. Recorder, ..... Dr. Ida A. Keller. Corresponding Secretary, . . John T. Pennypacker. Treasurer and Conservator, . Stewardson Brown. MiNERALOGICAL AND GEOLOGICAL SECTION. The Director reports that nine meetings were held, with an aver- age attendance of eight members. Six field meetings were held, at which the attendance was large. Some of the specimens col- lected were given to the Academy. The officers elected for the ensuing year are as follows : Director, Theodore D. Kand. Benjamin Smith Lyman. Vice- Director, Treasurer, Conservator, Recorder, . Emma Walter. F. J. Keeley. Charles Schiiffer, M.D. Ornithological Section. During the past year the Conservator has completed the arrange- ment of the mounted birds on the new ornithological floor, so far as the case-room will permit. The four large cases and three small ones now in place cover about 900 square feet of floor space and accommodate almost all of the water-birds and the majority of 810 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC.*, the GalHnacese, or approximately half of the mounted collection, so far as space occupied is concerned. The specimens transferred during the year have all been labelled and have been carefully examined by the taxidermist, while the entire series has been rearranged to bring it into systematic sequence. Several old horizontal cases have been renovated and placed on the ornithological floor for the accommodation of a special collec- tion, prepared for exhibition by the Conservator, illustrating the structure and molt of birds. The opening of this department to the public, unavoidably post- poned, will take place early in the coming year. Two additional large wooden storage cases and sixteen tin cases were provided for the accommodation of the rapidly increasing study collection of skins, and much important work has been accomplished in transferring the specimens to the new cases and in properly labelling the trays to aid in their examination. For this, as well as aid in cataloguing the collection, the Conservator is much indebted to Mr. J. A. G. Rehn. Several valuable additions have been made to the collection of birds during the year, notably the beautiful series of specimens from Sumatra, collected and presented by Mr. Alfred C. Harri- son, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller, containing many forms new to the collection. A collection of the birds of the Galapagos Islands was pur- chased through subscriptions by members of the Academy. This material fills an- important gap in our collection, as the Academy previously possessed no specimens from this region. An interesting series of New Mexican birds was collected by Mr. Rehn while on the expedition sent out by the Academy in the spring, and many other specimens were received through gift or purchase. The Delaware Valley Ornithological Club and the Pennsylvania Audubon Society have continued to hold their meetings in the Academy, and have done much to stimulate ornithological study. By invitation the American Ornithologists' Union has arranged to hold its twenty-first Congress at the Academy in November, 1903. Many visiting ornithologists have made use of the collections during the year, and considerable aid has been given to workers in other institutions. Q-l 1 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. At the annual meeting of the Section, December 18, 1902, the following officers were chosen for the ensumg year: Director, . Vice- Director, . Secretary, . Recorder, . Treasurer and Conservator, Spencer Trotter, M.D. George Spencer Morris. William A. Shryock. Stewardson Brown. Witmer Stone. The election of Officers, Councilors and Members of t^e Com- xnittee on Accounts to serve during 1903 was held with the follow- ing result : President, Vice-Presidents, . • • Kecording Secretary, Corresponding Secretary^ Treasurer, Librarian, Curators, . Councilors to serve three years, Committee on Accounts, SamuelG. Dixon, M.D. Arthur Erwin Brown, Edwin G. Couklin, Ph.D. Edward J. Nolan, M.D. J. Percy Moore, Ph.D. George Vaux, Jr. Edward J. Nolan, M D. Henry C. Chapman, M.D., Arthur Erwin Brown, Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., Henry A. Pilsbry, D.Sc. Thomas A. Robinson, Charles H. Cramp, Charles INIorris, Isaac J. Wistar. Charles Morris, William L. Baily, Harold Wingate, Lewis Woolman, Philip P. Calvert, Ph.D. Councilors to serve unexpired term of two years, . Edwin S. Dixon, Thomas H. Fenton, M.D. 812 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [D. COUNCIL FOR 1903. Ex-officio. — Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., Arthur Erwin Brown, Edwin G. Conklin, Ph.D., Edward J. Nokn, M.D., J. Percy Moore, Ph.D., George Vaux, Jr., Henry A. Pilsbry, D.Sc, Henry C. Chapman, M.D. To serve Three Years. — Thomas A. Robinson, Charles H. Cramp, Charles Morris, Isaac J. Wistar. To serve Two Years. — John Cadwalader, William Sellers, Edwin S. Dixon, Thomas H. Fenton, M.D. To serve One Year. — Charles Schaffer, M.D., Dr. C. Newlin Peirce, Theodore D. Rand, Philip P. Calvert, Ph. D. Curator of Mollusc a. Assistant Librarian, Assistants to the Curators- Taxidermist, Jessup Fund Students, Henry A. Pilsbry, D Sc. William J. Fox, Witmer Stone, Henry Skinner, M.D., Stewardson Brown, J. Percy Moore, Ph.D., Edward G. Vanatta, Henry W. Fowler, J. A. G. Rehn, David McCadden. J A. G. Rehn, Raymond Winter, Harriet Newell Wardle. Janitors, Charles Clappier, John Mcllhenny, Daniel Heckler. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 813 ELECTIONS DURING 1902. Jayiuary 28. — J. Chester Bradley, Marian G. Nimlet, Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., H. M. Hiller, Judson Daland, M.D , Owen S. Paxson, Frederick Ehreufeld, Bumett Smith. February 25. — J. E. Murlin, Ph.D., A. F. K. Krout, James A. Nelson, A. B. Gordon-Davis. March 25. — Madeline Dahlgren. April ^5.— Edwin C. Jellett, Frederick A. Packard, M.D., Robert Coleman Banes. June 2^. — Alexander MacEIwee, John Vinton Dahlgren. November 25. — Herman T. Wolf, Lilian V. Sampson. CORRESPONDEKT. May 27. — G. A. Boulenger, of London. 814 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dc ADDITIONS TO MUSEUM. Mammals. E. O. Austin. Two Varyiug Hares, Lepus americamis mrginianus, skins and skulls, Potter county, Pa. C. M. Barber. Skull of fostal Puma, Felis oregonus hippolestes ; skin and skull of Perognathus sp. and three alcoholic mammals. Arthur Erwin Brown. Two skins of black Prairie Dog, Cynomys, and skull of Antelope, Antilocapra, Pecos, Texas. Henry C. Chapman, M.D. Galeopithecus volans, dissected, in alco- hol ; two young Armadillos. Jonathan Cope. Fragment of Walrus jaw. J. G. DiLLEN. Star-nosed Mole, Condylura cristata, Pennsylvania, skin. G. P. Friant. Putorius ckognani, skin, Scranton, Pa. J. F. Jones. Eight-legged Puppy. Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. Collection of sixty-three specimens of mammals from Sumatra. George "W. Melville. Mounted head and skull of Pacific Walrus, Odobenus obesiis. J. Percy Moore. Five specimens of Bats from Jamaica, including Glossophaga soricina antillarum. Purchased. Rlioads collection of North American mammals. Skins, skulls and skeletons numbering about 4300 specimens. Four skins and skulls of Grizzly Bear and skin of Conepatus from Chi- huahua, Mexico ; series of mammal skins collected at Pt. Barrow, Alaska, by E. A. Mcllheuny ; twelve bats from Cuba. J. A. G. Rehn. Ten skins of Pennsjdvania mammals. J. A. G. Rehn and H. L. Viereck. (Collected on Academy Expe- dition to New Mexico.) Forty-six skins and skulls of small mammals. S. N. Rhoads. Six Meadow Mice, 3Iicrotus pennsylvanicus, in alcohol, and skull of Muskrat, Fiber zibethicus. Witmer Stone. Four skins and skulls of Barren Ground Caribou, two adults and two young, Bangifer arcticus, Pt. Barrow, Alaska. U. S. National Museum. (In exchange.) Nineteen mammals (skins, skulls and alcoholic), mainly from the Malay region. Geougb Vaux, Jr. Skull of Black Bear, Ursus americanus, British Columbia. H. L. Viereck. Incomplete skeleton of Cat. Oliver Wheler. Three skins of Pika, Ochotona cuppis, and a Chip- munk, Tamias, Glacier, B. C 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 815 Lieut. H. L. Willoughby. Skin and skeleton of Manatee, Triche- chus latirosiris (for mounting), Florida. Lewis Woolman. Two young moles, Scalops aquaticus, alcoholic. New Jersey. * Zoological Society op Philadelphia. Specimens prepared as indicated : Mounted : Nilghai, Boselaplms tragocamelus. To be mounted : Axis Deer, Cervus axis ; European Otter (male), Lutra Intra ; Mongoose Lemur, Lemur mongoz ; Cliimpanzee, Anthropopithecus troglodytes. Skin and skulls: Brush-tailed Wallab3% Petrogale penicillata ; South American Opossum, DidelpMs cinerea (no skull); Nine-banded Arma- dillo, Tatu novemcinctum ; Burchell's Zebra, Equus hurchelli ; Stanley's Chevrotain, Tragulus Stanley anus ; two Arizona Cottontails, Lepus arizonce, minor ; two European Hares, Lepus europmus ; Gopher, Crato- geomys castanops ; Gray Wood Rat, Neotoma micropus canescens ; Agouti, Dasyproeta isthmica ; Price's Chipmunk, Tamias pricei ; Alger- ian Hedgehog Erinaceus algerus ; Two Black-footed Raccoons, Procyon Tiernandezii ; European Otter (female), Lutra lutra; Great-eared Fox, Otocyon megalotis ; Black-backed Jackall, Canis mesomelus ; Japanese Macaque, Macacus fiiscatus ; Mona Monkey, Cercopithecus mona ; White-crowned Mangaby, Cercocehus cethiops ; Hocheur Monkey, Cerco- pithecus nictitans ; Dwarf Lemur, Microcebus coquereli ; Black Lemur, Lemur macaco. Skeletons: Rnfons-necked WaWahy, Eala7natur us rufi- collis ; Great Kangaroo, Macropus giganieus. Skulls. Hamadryas Baboon, Papio hamadryas ; Japanese Deer, Cervus sika ; Prehensile- tailed Porcupine, Coendu prehensilis ; Japanese Monkey, Macacus fus- catus. Alcoholic : five Bats from Pecos, Texas. Birds. Col. G. S. Andersox. Eight bird skins from the Philippines. R. L. Blankenberg. Ostrich egg. C. B. Clement. Pied-billed Grebe, Podilymbus podiceps. Delaavare Valley Ornithological Club. Two nests and eggs of Pennsylvania birds for the D. V. O. C. collection. O. G. Diehl. Specimen of Australian Paraquet, Callopsitiacus novce- hollandioi (mounted). C. H. Guilbert. IMockingbird, 3Iimus polyglottos. Alfred C. Harrison and Dr. H. M. Hiller. Collection of four hundred and forty bird skins from Sumatra. Mr. and Mrs. T. R. Hill. Two skins of Canada Grouse, Canachites canadensis, Alaska Purchased. Seven bird skins from Chihuahua, Mexico ; forty bird skins from Colorado, Texas, etc. Purchased by Subscription. Collection of bird skins from the Galapagos Islands. J. A. G. Rehn. Skin of Meadow Lark, Sttirnella magna. J. A. G. Rehn and H. L. Viereck. (Collected on Academy Expe- 816 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC. , dition to New Mexico ) One hundred and twenty-one skins of birds and three nests. S. N, Rhoads. Collection of Florida bird skins and several specimens oT Micropus from Mexico. Mrs. Charles ScHAFFER. Skins of Water Ousel, Cinclus mexicanus, and Jay, Cyanocitta stelleri. L. I. Smith, Jr. Skin of Night Heron, Nycticorax n. ncevius, Dela- ware county, Pa. RosEALLA Stuart. Skin of Robin, Merula migratoria (very old cage bird). C. C. Taylor. Skin of Franklin's Grouse, Dendrogapus franUini. H. L. ViERECK. Nine skins of Pennsylvania and Virginia birds. Zoological Society of Pennsylvania. Specimens prepared as follows : Skeletons : Mycteria americana, Coscoroba coscoroba, Pelecanus crispus. Skull and sternum : Cormorant, Phalaerocorax sp. Skins : Two Releodytes brunneicapillus, Dissemurus paradisceus, Cotinga cincta, Tanagra abbas, Conurus patagonus, Pauxi pauxi, Carpodacus purpureus (abnormal). Nest and eggs : Releodytes brumieicapillus. Reptiles and Batrachians. C. M. Barber. Two reptiles from Chihuahua, Mexico. Arthur Erwin Brown. Three specimens of Coluber subocularis, and one Ophibolus attenuatus type. Collection of two hundred and twenty-one reptiles mainly from Western Texas. Dr. H. C. Chapman. Soft-shelled Turtle from Cooper's Creek, N. J. Dr. S. G. Dixon. Toad, Bufo letitiginosus americanus, British Colum- bia. Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. Collection of repiiles from Sumatra. Joseph L. Hicks. Gecko, Jamaica. Dr. William E. Hughes. Small collection of reptiles from Chihua- hua, Mexico. Dr. W. H. Jones' Estate. Several reptiles from various localities. Witmer Stone, and J. A. G. Rehn. Several reptiles from New Jersey. (Collected for the Academy.) Witmer Stone. Muhlenberg's Turtle, Chelopus muhlenbergi, Penn- sylvania, and Green Snake, Cyclopias cestMs, New Jersey. I. A. Sweigart. Stufied Alligator, skin of Rattlesnake. L. H. T. Townsend, and C. M. Barber. Two Turtles, Nieoria rubida, Colina, Mexico. Lieut. H. L. Willoughby. Young Crocodile, C. americanus. Dr. H. C. Wood. Small series of reptiles from Egypt. Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Crocodile, C. americanus ; two snake-eating Cobras, Naja bungara ; Madagascar Boa, Boa mada- gascariensis ; Varanus niloticus ; three Emyda granosa. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 817 Fishes. J. Cope. Cottus ictalops, Chester county, Pa. Alfred. C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. Large collec- tion of Suinatran fishes. Dr. W. H. Jones' Estate. Several small fishes from Pacific islands. David McCadden. Several Atlantic coast fishes. Frank Smith. CepJialacanthus volans. New Jersey. 1. A. SwEiGART. Garcharius obscurus, stuffed. Insects. Academy Expedition to Texas and New Mexico. Twenty-five thousand insects. O. W. Barrett. Eight Orthoptera from Porto Rico. Dr. a. Borelli. Sixtj'-one Orthoptera from Paraguay. J. C. Bradley. Two hundred and thirty-eight insects, various orders. Dr. p. p. Calvert. Eighteen Odonata from United States. Dr. D. M. Castle. Twenty-four Coleoptera from the United States. T. D. A. Cockerell. One hundred and eighty-seven insects from New Mexico. Lucy V. Crawley. One Orthopter. E. T. Cresson. Two hundred and fifty Hymenoptera from Brazil. Dr. S. G. Dixon. Four insects from British America. S. N. Dunning. Five thousand four hundred and forty Hymenoptera from United States. Dr. Philip Fischelis. Ten Solpugidfe from Russia. W. J. Fox. Fourteen Hymenoptera from Brazil. George France. Three Lepidoptera from United States. A. C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. One thousand five hundred insects from Sumatra. S. H. Hamilton. Forty-three insects from Cuba. Purchased. Morgan Hebard. One Lepidopter from Colorado. Y. HiRASE. Five hundred Orthoptera from Japan. Purchased. Dr. W. E. Hughes. Forty-two Coleoptera and Orthoptera from Mexico. C. W. Johnson. Seventy Diptera from United States. Dr. "W. H. Jones. One hundred and eighty insects from Corea. Warren Knaus. Eighteen Coleoptera from Kansas. L. W. Mengel. Sixteen Lepidoptera (exotic). H. H. Newcomb. Four Lepidoptera from Mt. Katahdin, Maine. E. J. Nolan, M.D. Two insects from Italy. O. E. Poling. Forty-two Heterocera from Western United States. J. A. G. Rehn One hundred and eighty-four Orthoptera from United States. S. N. Rhoads. One thousand two hundred and seventy-four insects from Florida, Cuba and Mexico. 52 818 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, . Wirt Robinson. Twenty-five Coleoptcra and Lepidoptera from Jamaica, W. I. Henry Skinner. One hundred and ninety insects, including one hundred and twelve Lepidoptera from Thibet. C. S. Smallwood. Seventy Lepidoptera and Orthoptera from Florida. J. B. Smith. Eight Heterocera from United States. K. Stoddard. One Lepidopter from Pennsylvania. W. Stone. Five Hymenoptera from Philadelphia. Mrs. Charles Schaeffer. Three Lepidoptera from British Colum- bia. H. E. Summers. Thirty-one Hemiptera from United States. Lancaster Thomas. Four insects from North Carolina. C. H. T. Townsend. Twenty Orthoptera from Colima, Mexico. E. G. Vanatta. Thirteen insects from Pennsylvania. H. L. ViERECK. Two hundred and thirty -five insects from United States. H. W. Wenzel. Eleven Hymenoptera from North Carolina. Joseph Willcox. Sixty Coleoptera from North Carolina. De. H. C. Wood. Sixty -six Coleoptera from Africa. Zoological Society op Philadelphia. Four Scolopendra and insects. F. S. ScHAXJPP. One hundred and fifty-nine Orthoptera from Texas. Witmer Stone and J. A. G. Rehn. Five hundred insects from New Jersey Pine Barrens. Purchased from E. J. Oslar. Two hundred and two insects from Arizona and New Mexico. Recent Mollusca. LuciEN Alexander. Two species of bivalves from Daytoua, Fla. John. A. Allen. Four species of shells from Delaware and Penn- sylvania. Rev. E. a. Ashmun. Ninety trays of land shells from Arizona and New Mexico. C. F. Baker. Seven species of North American land and marine shells. Dr. Fred Baker. Two species of Truncatella from California. F. C. Baker. Two species of Planorbis from Maine and Wisconsin. Mrs. Beaman. One species of Sistrum. A. C. BiLLUPS. Twenty -three species of shells from Indiana. Dwight Blaney. Three species of Vertigo from Maine. H. C. Borden. Three species of Unio from Canada. Botanical Section. One shell from Surinam. F. W. Bryant. Co-types of Glyptostoma newierryanum depressum Bryant. Miss Mabel Buck. Twelve species of marine shells from Barbadoes. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 819 J. L. Buck. Bonis oblongus MiilL, from Barbadoes. Jacob B. Butler. One species of Mollusca taken from Rockfish. Fred L. Button. Fifteen species of North American land and marine shells. Dr. H. C. Chapman. Twenty-nine jars of Cephalopoda, etc., from Naples. George H. Clapp. Twenty-eight species of shells from America and Japan. T. D. A, CocKERELL. Ten species of land shells from New Mexico. T. D. A. CocKERELL and Miss Mary Cooper. Two species of shells from New Mexico. O. CoLLETT. AmpMdromus albizonatus simoni Jouss., from Ceylon. Prop. E. D. Cope Estate. Twenty-three species of Mollusca. Mrs. ANNIF4 P. Cope. Thirty-nine species of Indo-Pacific shells. O. A. Crandall. One species of Physa from Tennessee. Prof. W. H. Dall. Nine species of North American Venericardia. L. E. Daniels. Two species of Poly gyr a from Indiana. James M. Delaney. Three species of Japanese marine shells. Binney "W. Earl. Two species of land and fresh-water shells from Burlington, N. J. J. H. Ferriss. Ninety species of land shells, North Carolina, Arkan- sas, etc. John Ford. Nanina complanata Mt., from Borneo. R. C. McGregor. Two species of land shells from Washington. George W. Griffith. Vitrea cellaria MiilL, from Wilmington, Del. G. K. Gude. Six species of land shells trom India and Japan. A. GuLiCK. Eulota cavicolUs Pils., from Teje, Omi, Japan. Mrs. W. H. Harned. Two species of bivalves from Holland. Alfred C. Harrison and Dr. H. M. Hiller. One species of Ampullaria from Sumatra. Dr. J. W. Harshberger. Mytilus from New Jersey. Prof. Angelo Heilprin. Thirty-six species of mollusks from Mar tinique and St. Kitts. J. B. Henderson, Jr. Three species of Urocoptidm from Haiti. Y. Hirase. Three hundred and thirty-one species of Japanese land shells. O. P. Jenkins. Three jars of slugs in alcohol from California. C. W. Johnson. Three species of marine shells from Florida. F. W. Kelsey. Three species of marine Gastropoda from California. Dr. R. J. KiRKLAND. Acanthinula hcwpa in alcohol from Michigan. William A. Marsh. One species of Quadrula from Tennessee. D. N. McCadden. One Loligo in alcohol from Stone Harbor, N. J. Clarence B. Moore. Two hundred and twenty-one trays of marine shells from western Florida. P. W. Moore. Vitrinizonites latissimus in alcohol fioin Blowing Rock, N. C. 820 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec, Dr. E. J. Nolan. Ten trays and two jars of land sheila from Italy. Ida S. Oldeoyd. Two species of marine shells from California. C. R. Orcutt. Eight trays of Ptqndce from California. Dr. Charles Penrose. Nine species of laud shells from Idaho. H. A. PiLSBRT. Eighteen trays of shells from New Ireland and Tennessee. Sadie F. Price. Three species of Polygyra from Kentucky. Purchased. Two hundred and forty -six trays and eight jars of alco- holic mollusks from Cuba, Mexico, East Indies, etc. John Ramie. Veronicelia gilsoni Coll., from Fiji Islands. J. A. G. Rehn and H. L. Viereck. Twenty-four trays and one jar of land shells from New Mexico and Texas. S. N. Rhoads. Eight species of land and fresh-water shells from Massachusetts and Pennsylvania. John Ritchie, Jr. CJielidonura Mrundo Mart., from Upper Congo. S. Raymond Roberts. Six species of marine shells. E. W. Roper. Vertigo gouldi Binn., from Massachusetts. Rev. J. RowELL. Sixteen species of shells from California and Africa. Mrs. T. E. Ruggles. Seven species of marine shells. F. A. Sampson. Polygyra mooreana W. G. B., from Texas. H. E. Sargent. Pomatiopsis lapidaria Say, from North Carolina. Silas L. Schumo and U. C. Smith. Eleven species of Jamaican land shells. Dr. B. Sharp. Chiton ajnculatus Say, from Nantucket, Mass. Charles Simpson. Auricula pellucens Mke., from S. Florida. Burnett Smith. Eighteen species of American shells. G. "W. H. Soelner. Seven jars and two trays of Mollusca from Wash- ington, D. C. B- Strubell. Twenty species of land shells from the Molucca Islands. E. R. Svkes. Two species of Eulima from England. D. Thaanum. Fifty species of marine shells from Pacific Islands. U. S. National Museum in Exchange. One specimen of Gaza superba Dall, from the Gulf of Mexico. E. G. Vanatta. Four species of bivalves from Chestertown, Md. T. Van Hyning. Polygyra multilineata Say, from Iowa. Henry' Viereck. Eight jars of laud shells in alcohol from Pennsyl- vania and New Jersey. H. VON Ihering. Three species of South American land shells. Bryant "Walker. Forty-five species of American land and fresh- water shells. H. W. Wenzel. Seven species of shells from New Jersey. Joseph Willcox. Fourteen species of land and fresh-water shells from North Carolina. Suite of thirty-one specimens of Cyprma exan- thema (No. 72152-4). Dr. Harold Bacon Wood. Four species of land and marine shells from Mexico. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 821 L. "WooLMAN. Three species of North American shells. S. YosHiWARA. Thirteen trays and eight jars of alcoholic land shells from Ogasawara-jima. Worms. Eev. E. H. Ashmun. Larval trematodes. T, D. A. CocKERELL. Ncphelopsis and Eysohdella ; five bottles of Polychceta. Sir Charles Elliot. Larval trematodes. S. H. Hamilton. PJieretima. Alfred Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. Six bottles of Plan- arians. Dr. H. p. Johnsox. Three species of Californian Polychceta. Estate of Dr. "W. H. Jones. Eighteen bottles of Polychceta. Prof. W. G. Libbey and A. Ortmann. Thirty-nine bottles of Greenland Polychoita. J. Percy Moore. Twenty-nine bottles of Planarians and leeches from Patagonia ; three hundred and nineteen bottles of Polychceta, Massa- chusetts. (Collected for the Academy.) Dr. Charles B. Penrose. Cysticerci of Tcenia marginata. J. A. G. Kehn and H. L. Viereck. (Academy Expedition to New Mexico.) Three bottles of Cucullarius from Phrynosoma. S. N. Rhoads. Filaria from Skunk. Dr. Benjamin Sharp. Thirty-three bottles of worms chiefly Euro- pean. Dr. H. Skinner. Erpohdella punctata. George W. N. Soelner. Rhynchodesmus terrestris. Burnett Smith. Lepidonotus squamatus. L. I Smith, Jr. Filaria from Night Heron. Wither Stone. Six bottles of Planarians and leeches. E. G. Vanatta. Helodrilus. Prof. A. E. Verrill. Seven bottles of OUgochceta, Bermuda. Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Nine bottles of round and tape worms. Other Invertebrates. Dr. H. C. Chapman. Twenty jars of alcoholic invertebrates from Naples, and Bar Harbor, Maine. Dr. S. G. Dixon. Fan coral Acropora miiricata, Jamaica. Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller. Several crabs from Sumatra. De. W. H. Jones Estate. Several bottles of invertebrates from var- ious localities. David McCadden. Jelly fish, Stone Harbor, N. J. Ida S. Oldroyd. Laqueus californicus, San Pedro Bay ^22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [DeC, H. A. PiLSBRY. One milliped from Cades Cove. Purchased. One Crab, Cuba. S. N. Ehoads. Several alcoholic invertebrates, various localities. Joseph Willcox. Cambarus from Blowing Rock, N. C. Vertebrate Fossils. Purchased. Eleven specimens of fossil fishes. Invertebrate Fossils. John A. Allen. Polygyra, Wounded Knee, South Dakota. Rev. Leander T. Chamberlain, D.D. Additions to the Isaac Lea Collection of Eocene mollusks. Seven hundred and thirty trays. Dr. S. G. Dixon. Brachiopods from Islesboro, Maine, and series of Trilobites from British Columbia. George C. Gillespie. Baculites ovatus. C. J. Hatha Av AY. Specimens of fossils from Moosehead Lake, Me. John Torpey. Five specimens of fossils. Fossil Plants. Geological Section. Slab of Fern impressions. Minerals. E. Goldsmith. Several minerals and rocks from Pennsylvania and Colorado. Mohawk Mining Co. Mohawkite, Michigan. Archeology and Ethnology. Clarence B. Moore. Cast of skull of "Pithecanthropus," Java. Many additions to the Moore Collection. Purchased. Several Indian utensils, Western Texas ; Mexican neck lace with onyx pendant. Charles and Theodore Town. Whip made from vegetable fibre, Jamaica. Plants. Amos P. Brown, Ph.D. One hundred and thirty specimens from Labrador. Stewardson Brown. Four hundred and thirty specimens from Cali- fornia and Oregon, three hundred and fifty specimens from Pennsyl- vania and New Jersey. J. L. Buck. Fruit of Aristolochia ringens Vahl. 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.' 823 William M. Canby. Eight hundred specimens principally from the south and west, and eight specimens of Vraimgus. Samuel G. Dixon, M.D. Specimen of Pinus eduUs Engelm, from the Yellowstone. T. W. Edmondson. Fifty-three specimens from Ontario, Canada. William J. Fox. Fourteen specimens from the old world, and twenty-one specimens from North America. E. A. Gaeeatt. Fifty specimens from British Columbia. John W. Haeshbergee, Ph.D. One hundred and twenty specimens from Jamaica, Haiti and Santo Domingo. Purchased. Nine hundred Californian plants collected by Heller and Brown, five hundred and forty W. Australian plants collected by Dr. Pritzel and three hundred and fifty plants from Canary Islands col- lected by Dr. Bornmiiller. J. A. G. Rehn and H. L. Viereck. Two thousand specimens from New Mexico (collected for the Academy). Chaeles F. Saunders. Seventy-five specimens principally from Vermont and North Carolina. Benjamin H. Smith. Two thousand specimens from the Rocky Mountain region, and specimen of Heterotoma lobelioides Zucc. E. S. Steele. Specimen oi Lacinaria pilosa Ait. CuEWEN Stoddaet, Jr. Specimen of Kmlreuteria paniculata Laxm. E. G. Vanatta. One hundred specimens from Pennsylvania and Maryland. Chaeles S. Williamson. One hundred specimens from various parts of the Eastern United States. 824 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEM-J OF [Dec, INDEX TO SPECIES, ETC., DESCRIBED AND REFERRED TO IN THE PROCEEDINGS FOR 1902. Species described as neio are indicated by lieavy-faced, synonyms by italic numerals. Abies balsamea 474, 476, 479 pectinata 479 Ablabes flaviceps 178 tricolor 180 Acer dasycarpum 667 rubrum 647, 653 saccharinum 667 Achillea millefolium 664 Acrida nasuta 629 Acrididfe 629, 718 Acridiinse 635 Acridinse 629, 718 Acridium foedatum 636 japonicum 636 Acrydiinse 629, 718 Acrydium japonicum 629 nigrofasciatum 632 Actinobolus 699, 700 Actinoe sarsi 269 Actinophrys 257 Actitis hypoleuca 671 Acusta Iseta 240 sieboldiaua 236 Adapis 253 ^cidium elatinum 473 (Peridermium) elatinum 474, 475 Aello , 160, 161 cuvieri 160, 161, 16S ^oloplus crassus 723 elegans , 723 Agaria 699 Agenia accepta 734 euphorbise 734 petiolatus 734 Agriolimax campestris 421 Aiolopus tamulus 631 Alcedo capensis 674 chloris 675 euryzonia 675 meninting 675 Alcemerops amicta 676 Aleurodicus 279, 280 altissimus 280 anonse 280 cockerelli 280 cocois 280 dugesii 280 holmesii 279, 280 iridescens 280 jamaicensis 280 minimus 280 rairabilis 280 ornatus 280 persese 280 pulviuatus 280 Aleyrodes 279, 280 abnormis 282 abutilonea 283 acacige 282 aceris 280, 282 aepim 281 asarumis 2-^2 aspargi 281 asplenii 281 aurantii 281, 283 aurea 281 aureocincta 282 avellanne 280 banksiai 281 barodensis 281 berbericola 282 bergii 281 brassicse 280 capreae 280 carpini 280 cerata 281 citri 282, 283 cockerelli 281 comata 281 corni 282 coronata 282 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 825 Aleyrodes cotesii 281 croceata 281 decipiens 281 dubia 280 erigerontis 282, 283 eus;eni8e 281, 283 fall 281 filicum 281 fltchi 282, 283 floccosa 281 floridensis 282 fodiens 281 forbesii 282 fragrarise 280 fralini 280 fumipennis 281 gelatinosa 282 gossypii 281 goyabse 281 gi'aminicola 282 liirsvita 281 horrida 282 immaculata 281 inconspicua 282 j elenekii 2S1 lacerdse 282 lactea 281 lauri 281 lecanioides 281 limbata 281 louicerie 281 longicornis 281 mefanops 282, 283 melicyti ^Sl mori ; 282 mori arizonensis 282 nephrolepidis 382 nicotianas 282, 283 nigra 281 nubilans 281 papillifer ^Sl parva 28i pergandei 282 perileuca 282, 283 phahenoides 281 phillyrea 281 piperis 281 plumosa 282 prenanthis 281 proletella 280, 281 pyrol* 282 quercus 281 quercus-aquaticse 282 rolfsii 282 ribium 281 rubi 281 rubicola 281 ruborum 282, 283 281 281 281 283 Aleyrodes sacchari simplex spirsese spirseoides. . .. stellata ^b'** struthanthi 283 stypbeliiie 281 T-signata 381 tinseoides 381 tracheifer 383 vaccinii 381 vaporariorum 288 variabilis 282, 283 vinsonioides 282 vittata 282, 283 xylostei 281 youngi Aleyrodidse Allobophora fcetida Alpha 282 379 303 718 Alycseus biexcisus 26 reinhardtii 26 Amadina leucogastra 6S8 Amaranthus hybridias panicu- latus 661 pauiculatus 661 retroflexus 661 phoenicura 671 Amblystoma 88 Ambrosia artemesisefolia 664 trifida 664 Amelanchier canadensis . .500, 501 Ammodenia peploides 651, 661 Ammophila arenaria, 644-652, 656 658, 660 aruudinacea 660 Amnicolidse 121 Amoeba 256 Ampelopsis qninquefolia 662 Amphicarpsea monoica 662 Ampbitrite cirrata 276 Anaptomorphoris 253 Anas scutulata 67i Ancistrocerus lialophila 735 sulpbureus 736 Ancylus 513 Andropogon furcatus • 666 virginicus 647, 653 Anethops 39 occidentalis 40 Anilocra 295 Anoplius cylindricus 735 (Pomp'ilinus) marginatus. 735 (Pompilinus) padrinus. . . 734 Anthemis cotula ... 664 Anthracoceros convexus 676 malayauus 676 Anthreptes malacensis 688 826 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec. Anthus malayensis 688 rufulus malayensis 688 Antrozous minor 389, 390 pacificus 389, 390 pallidus 389, 390 Anuropsis malaccensis 686 Apis mellifera 35 Apocynum cannabinum 663 Aquilegia canadensis 661 Araneus cinereus 555 Arctogale leucotis 136 Arctogalidia inornata 156, 157 leucotis 157 simplex 143, 156 Arctosa , 536 cinerea 555 Arcturus 700 rudis 703, 711 Arenaria peploides 661 Argusianus argus 671 Armadillidium 300, 317 Armadillo asellus 295 Aronia arbutifolia 662 Arpliia teporata 720 Artamides sumatrensis 681 Aitamus leucorhynchus 688 Artemisia slelleriana 649 Artibeus liercules 638 jamaiceusis 639, 640 parvipes 638, 745 planirostris 638, 639 Asarcornis scutulata 671 Asclepias incarnata 642, 663 tuberosa 663 Asellus 342 Ashmunella 511 Astacus 295, 308 fluviatilis 321 Astarte 705 flabella 705 perplana 700, 705 radians 705 Astartidse 696 Aster diflfusus 664 lateriflorus 664 niultitlorus 669 nova belgii var. litoreus . . 669 patens 669 subulatus 664 surculosus 669 tenuifolius 664 umbellatus 669 Asterochilon 282 lecanioides 282 Astrfeus stellatus 649, 665 Atractomorpha bedeli 635 Atriplex arenaria 651 hastata 661 Atriplex patulum var. hasta- tum 661 Aurelia 766, 776, 777 Autolytus longisetosus 274 Axioiliea catenata 275 Axiouice flexuosa 276 Azalea viscosa 668 Azarella 699 A-Za^ria 699 BacchariVliaiimifolia, 650, 652, 653. 664 Beguina 697,698 Bellia borneensis 175 Belogona Euadenia 511 Bembidium anguliferum 73 affine 72 assimile 73 bifasciatum 72 concinnum 73, 78 dubitans 72 falsum 76 fuclisii 77 liumboldtensis 74 obscuripenue 74 4-maculatum 72 sulcatum 71, 73 suspectum 70, 76 vandykei 75 variegatum 71 vile 72 Bideus bipinnata 664 Bifidaria 513 contracta 420 pentodoD 420 Bitbynia striatula 121 striatula var. japonica 121 Blanfordia bensoui 26, 234 japonica 26, 27, 235 japonica var. simplex 26 Blattidae 717 Bombus americanorum var. pallidus 35 fervidus 35 pennsylvanicus 35 Bonellia 205 Bothropolys 39, 42 bipunctatus 42 multidentatus 48 nobilis 43 xanti 42 Botrycbium dissectum 665 obliquum 665 Brachyphylla cavernarum. . . . 409 nana 409, 745 Brachypodius (?) criniger 683 immaculatus 683 Brachypteryx polyogenys 686 Brachypus eutilotus 683 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 827 Brachystola magna 723 Bradburva virgimana 667 Brady cebus. . / 138, 13S Broussonetia papyrifera ^67 Bnbulcns coromandus 671 Bucco chiysopogon 679 duvauceli..."" 679 hsemaceplialus 679 bayi 679 mysticophanes 679 oorti 679 Buceros convexus 676 malayanus 676 rhinoceros 676 undiilatus 676 Buclianga cineracea 689 Buda 659 marina 661 Bufo asper 183, 695 biporcatus 183 divergens 183 melanostictiis 183 Bulimulus dealbatus pasonis. . 511 sp 239 Bungarus fascialns 181 flaviceps 181 Cabralia (Schmitzii) 701 Cacomantip mernhnas 678 Cakile americana 662 edentula 651. 652, 658, 662 Calamaria flaviceps 180 leucocephala 694 vermiformis 180 Callula baleata 694 Caloperdix oculea sumatraua. 671 sumatrana 671 Calophryniis pleurostigma.. . . 183 Calorhamplius hayi 679 Calotescristatellus 177, 693 moluccanus 177 Calyptogena 698, 700 pacifica 700, 712 Calyptomrena viridis 680 Calystegia sepium 663 Campanularia Johnstoni 785 Campylacautha vegana 723 Cancroma coromanda . . . ; 671 Caprinmlgus affinis 677 Carapa guianensis . . .122, 123, 124, 125 moluccensis 122, 125 nicaraguensis 122 procera 122, 124 surinamensis 122 Carcinas mannas 347 Carcineutes pulchellus 675 Cardamine hirsuta 662 Cardiocardita ajar 697 Cardita 698, 705, 707 abbreviata 705 segyptiaca 699 affinis 703. 706, 707. 713 (Carditamera) affinis 706 ajar 699 angisulcata 706 antiquata 699, 713 arata 69S, 702 arcella 707 arctica 706 borealis 700, 711 conradi 703 crassa 706 crassicosta 707 cuvieri 715 dactylus 706 dominguensis 705 (Glans) dominguensis. . . . 703 fiammea 707 floridana 700 (Carditamera) floridana . . 702 gibbosa 703 gracilis 703, 706 (Carditamera) gracilis 702 Grayi 706 incrassata 703, 706, 713 laticostata 706 michelini 70S minima 706 (Carditamera) minima . . . 703 (Glans) naviformis 707 nodidosa 713 ovata 706 pectunculus 707 (Cardilamera)pectunciilus 703 (Carditamera) radiata. . . . 707 sulcata 699 (Glans) sulcosa 707, 715 (Carditamera)subquadrata 707 tricolor 706 tumida 70? 706 707 vestita 704 Carditacea 696-716 Carditamera 697,698, 701 Carditella 698. 702 pallida 70J, 712 semen 712 tegulata 712 Cardites 609,700 Carditidse 696, 698, 702 Carditinse 698 Carditopsis 702 flabellum 702, 712 smithii 705 Carduus spinossissimus 664 turgida varia . . 828 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec. Carex festucac^ muhlenbergii straminea 660, straminea var. brevioi'. . . . Carpophaga fenea Carychium exiguum Cassia charasechrista 642, nictitans Cassiopea 766, Ceblepyris culminatus sumatrensis Celastrus scandens Celtis occidentalis 653 Cenclirustribuloides. .652, 658, Centropus javanicus sinensis Centrosema virginianum Centurio Ceutunouinse Cephalanthus occidentalis . 642, Ceratina dupla Cerceris cockerelli iusolita provancheri Ceropsis minima 701, Certhia brasiliaua malacensis Cervidae Cervus equinus javanicus 138, Centopbilus pallidus uniformis Ceyx euerythra riifldorsa tridactyla Choetoglena Chsetotyphla Chalcoccyx xantborliynchus. . Cbama calyculata phreuetica trapezia Chamaecyparis tbyoides. . .647, Chamidse Chaptia malayensis Charadrius dominicus fulvus. . fulvus Chenopodium album ambrosioides anthelmintbicum Cbilonycteris 161, bootlxi mexicana. . .400, 401.402, parnellii portoricensis 400, rubiginosa 402, Chimaphila maculata 663, Chione Chiromys 253, 666 666 672 431 662 662 767 682 681 663 ,666 660 678 678 667 161 161 669 730 731 732 731 712 688 688 205 132 131 725 735 675 675 675 791 791 678 698 699 699 666 696 689 671 671 661 661 661 163 401 403 401 401 403 668 701 253 Cbloropsis cyauopogon 683 icterocephala 682 media 683 zosterops 682 Chone infundibuliformis 376 Cborthippus latipennis 631 Chotorbea cbrysopogou 679 Chrysocliloris 345 Chrysochraon japonicus 631 Chrysopelea ornata 181, 694 Chrysophlegma bumii 679 mentale humii 679 mmialum malaccense 679 Cilisticus convexus 386 Cinnyris brasiliana 688 Circiaaria concava 420, 439 Circotettix undulatus 732 Cirolana 394, 395 Cistenides granulala 275 byperborea 375 Cistudo eurypygia 386, 387 Citrus 382 Cittocincla macrurus 684 macrurus suavis 684 tricolor 684 Clausilia aculus o^S, 526, 533 addisoni 520 agna 369, 371. 531 aulacophora 357-369 aulacopoma 373 aurantiaca 374, 377 aurantiaca var 337 aurantiaca var. erberi. 375, 376 aurantiaca var. bypopty- chia 376, 377, 533 aurantiaca var. plicilabris, 376, 532 awajiensis, 369-371, 373, 874 bigeueris 370 bilabiata 532 bilabrata 377,378, 533 brevior 519, 532 caloptyx 369, 372, 532 carystoma 365-367 carystoma var. jayi. . .366, 367 comes 524 crenilabium 874 dactylopoma 521-523 daemonorum 381, 532 dalli 377, 378 digonoptyx 524, 526. 538 do^-cas 361 ducalis 361 ducalis var.decapitata, 361,531 entospira 381 euholostoma 367. 379, 534 eurystoma var. bracbyp- tycbia 520, 531 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 829 Clausilia excelleus 380 expansilabris 524 goniopoma 521, 522, 533 gouldi 238 gracioe 367 harimensis 3f)9 heteroptyx 362, 519 hirasei 367 holotrema 378, 379 hungerlordiana .379, 524 ignobilis 370 luterlamellaris 531 iotaptyx 370, 378 isclina 370 japonica 379 iaponica var. surugae. .520, 521 JOS 523 kurozuensis 518, 519, 532 lewisii 532 lirulata 237 marlensi 235 micropeas 363 mikado 374, 378 mitsukurii 360 monelasmiis 527 neuiopsis 530-532 nesiotica 528 oostoma 520-523 oostoma var. dactylopo- ma 521, 532 oostoma var. goniopoma, 522, 532 opeas 363, 364 orthatracta 377 pachyspira 517, 532 pigra 367, 368, 369 pmguis 239 plagioptyx 519, 520, 532 platydera 531 plicilabris . . .237, 576, 377, 532 pluviatilis . . . . 235 proba 239, 525, 526 rowlandi 524, 526, 532 sericina 363, 365 sericina var. minor 363 sericina var. rhopalia, 365, 519 sbanghaiensis 523, 524 shikokuensis 369, 370 sieboldi, 236, 529, 529, 530, 531 sieboldi var. diptyx, 529, 531, 532 sieboldtii 529 spreta 238 stenospira 239 stereoma 520 stereoma var. bexaptyx, 520, 532 stimpsoni 235, 236 Clausilia strictaluna var. emersa 531 subaculus, 524, 525-527, 532 subaurantiaca 371 subgibbera 523, 524 subiguobilis 369, 376 sublunellata, 361, 363, 364, 371, 517, 518 subnlina 363, 365 subulina var. leucdpeas, 364, 5 19 tantilla 370 tau 524-528 tosana 367-369 tryoni 524 una 379, 380 valida 235 validiuscula 365, 518 variegata 528 variegata var. uakadai, 528, 532 Clemmys insculpla 385 percrassa 385 Clethra alnifolia 668 Clitocybe trullisata 649, 665 Cuicus horridulus 664 Coccidium scbubergii 7 Cocblicopa lubrica .420, 429 Colletes californicus 730 Coluber melanurus 179 oxycepbalus 179 Columba senea 6112 fulvicollis 672 tigrina 672 turtur 672 vernans 672 Commelyna sp 660 Coudylocardia 702 pauliana ... 702 Condylocardiidaj, 696. 697,698, 701 Condylophora lacustris 786 Convoluta 195 Convolvulus sepium 663 Copsycbus suavis 68Jf saularis musicus 684 Coptacra anuulipes 636 cyanoptera 636 fa?data 636 praemorsa 636 Coracius calonyx 673 sumatranus 680 Coralliophaga 706 Cordillacris'occipitalis 718 Coripia 700 Corvus javanensis 690 macrorhj'uchos 690 religiosa 690 Corydou sumatranus 680 830 PR0CEEDING6 OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec. Cossmaunella 699 Cotylorhiza 766 Crassatellitidge 696 Cratiegus coccinea 501 Douglasii 501 grandiflora 501 nigra 501 oxyacaatha 500, 501 sanguinea 501 tomentosa 501 Criuiger phseocephalus 683 Cryptocheilus flammipennis . . 733 Cryptops 39 poslica j^i Cuculus chloropliaeus 678 fugax 677 intermedius 677 lugubris 677 merulinus 678 xanthorhynclius . 618 Cunina 766, 767 Cupressus thyoides, 461, 466, 469 470, 494, 495, 498, 499 CusciUa gronovii 663, 668 Cyanea 766 Cyanops mysticoplianes 679 oorti 679 Cyclemys dhor 176 platynota 175 Cyclocardia 698, 700 borealis 710 Cyclophorus kikaiensis 27 turgidus 27 Cydonia 501 Cydonia vulgaris 500 Cylindrophis rufus 178 Cymborhynclius macrorhyn- chus lemniscatus 680 Cymothoa 295 Cynopterns tittaecheilus 136 Cyperus cylindricus 666 filiculmis 666 nuttallii 646, 660 ovularis 660 speciosus 660 strigosus 644 Torreyi 666 Cypselus comatus 677 Dacelo concreta 675 pulchella 675 Dactyloplioi'us 18 Dactylotum pictum 725 variegatum 725 Dasypterus floridauus 392 intermedius 392, 393 xanthinus 392 Dasyscypha resinaria 473, 474, 479, 496 Dasyscypha Willkommii 469 Datura sp 663 Dendrelaphis caudolineatus 180, 694 Dendrocitta occipitalis 691 Deiidropliis foi-mosus 180 pictus 179, 694 Dermauura ciaerea 404 pliseotis 405 rava 404, 405 tolteca 404 Dermonotus 161, 163 fulvus 400 Desmodium canadense 662 paniculatum 662 Desmodus 248 Diadasia australis 728 riucouis opuntiae 728 Dialeurodes 283 Dialeurodicus 280 Diaplieromera sp 718 Dicaeum sumatranum 688 Dicrurus platurus 690 Diaodon semicarinatus 185 Diodia virgiuiaua 664 Diospyros virginiaua 653 Diphylla 248 Diplocynodon 253 Diplommatina cassa 28 kiiensis 28 kobelti 28, 29 kobelti var. ampla 28 nippoueosis 28 pudica 28 tenuiplica 28 Diploplectrou bruuueipes ..., 733 Dipsadomorphus cynodoii 180 deudrophilus 180 Discomedusas 766 Discopleura capillacea 663 Dissemurus brachypliorus .... 690 malayeusis 690 platurus 690 Dissosteira Carolina 721 Distichlis maritima 655 spicata 654 Dcellingeria umbellata 669 Doloraedes 536, 586 albineus 589 hastulatus 589 idoueus . . . .586, 588, 589, 590 scapularis 589, 590 scriptus 589 sexpunctatus 589 tenax 589 tenebrosus . .586, 588, 589, 590 urinator 586. 588 Dondia americana 661 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 831 .... 693 .... 693 .... 176 .176, 693 .... 647 Draco fimbriatus haematopogon . . . quinquelasciatns. volans Drosera rotundifolia , Dryocalamus trilinealus 179 tristrigatus 179 Dryophis tasciolatus 694 prasinus 181, 694 Duronia 630 Dytiscus 305, 341 Echinocliloa crus-galli. . .643, 644, 660 Echinomera hispicla ... 4, 10, 12, 18 Echinorliynchus 223 Eclipta alba 664 Eclolius ciueraceus 689 Eisenia fcetida 84 Elanus hypoleucos 673 Eleocharis palustris glauces- cens 666 rostellata 666 Elis plumipes 736 Elymus canadensis 666 Enchytrfcus albidus 81, 82 marinns 80, 82 Encoptolophus costalis 720 parvus 720 Enhydrina valakadien 181 Enicurus frontalis 684. ruficapillus 684 velatus 684 Epacromia 631 Ephippigera S95 tshivavensis 595, 596 Erechtites liieracifolia 644, 664 Eremobia 595 magna 595 Eremops 39 Erigeron canadense 664 Erinaceus 248 Erosera filiformis 647 Erycinella 701, 702 ovalis '^01 Eucerceris insignis 731 Eucichla bosclii 681 Euconulus chersmus 420 fulvus? 420 sterkii 420 Eudrilus euginse 84 Eulabes javanensis 690 Eulota callizona maritimi 237 fasciola 240 (Cathaica) fasciola .. .234, 240 (Mastigeulota) gainesivar. bakodatensis 234 luhuana 237, 238 luhuana tsusbimana 236 235 237 32 Eulota (Euhadra) qusesita . similaris var vulgivaga var. lanx . . . senckenbergiana var. awsensis 31 Eumeces marginatus 185 Eunoa 271 nodosa ■ '^']- ffirstedi 271 Eunotia pectinalis 792 Euonymus americanus 662 Eupatorium perfoliatum 669 teucrifoliura 664 verbenaefolium 664 Eupbgedusa, 378, 379, 381, 523, 527, ^ 528 Euphorbia poly gonifolia. .652, 662 Eiiptilotus eutilotus 683 Eurylaimus javanicus 680 lemniscatus 680 Eurystonus calonyx 673, 674 orientalis 673, 674 Eutbamia caroliniana . 646, 665, 669 Exoascus 474 Eyprepocnemis plorans 637 Falcata comosa 662 Fametesta 30 Felis bengalensis 136 Fimbrystylis capillaris 666 spadicea 660 Flabelligera afflnis 275 infundibularum 275 Formica fusca subsericea, 602-604 Fossarulus 131 Fucus vesiculosus 650 Fulo-ur 505 "analiculatum... .505, 506, 507 carica 505,506, 507 contrarium 506, 507 coronatum 506 maximum 506, 507 perversum 507 pyrum 505, 506, 507 rapum 506 striatum 506 Fuligo (^Ibalium) septica. . 649, 665 Funambulus insignis 133 insignis diversus 133 Galeopitbecus 135 macrurus 135 marmoratus 135 philippensis 135 rufus 135 temmincki 135 ternateusis 135 undatus 135 variegatus 135 832 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec. Galeopithecus volans..l35, 241-254 Galium circsezans 664 pilosum 664, 669 trifidum 669 Gallus gallus 672 Ganeseila japonlca 234 mj-omphala 238 tabuensis 235 Garrulax bicolor 685 Gastrodanta acerra.. .418. 420, 433 andrewsse. . .418, 419, 421, 437 capsella 418, 419, 421 capsella placentella . .418, 419, 421 cerinoidea '? 420 clappi 421 coelaxis 418-420 collisella 437 deraissa 420, 433 gularis. .417, 418, 420, 434, 435, 437 gularis cuspidata 420, 435 gularis var. decussata, 417, 420, 436 gularis lawse 420, 435 gularis theloides 417, 420, 434, 436, 437 interna 421, 437 intertexta 420, 433, 437 lamellidens 418, 419, 437 lasmodon 436 ligera 420 multidentata 421 placentula 435 significans ? 421 suppressa 420, 483 walkeri 421 Gattyana amondseni 259 ciliata 263 cirrosa 259 senta 259 Gaultheria procumbens 663 Gaylussacia resinosa 647, 668 Gecinus puniceus observandus. 679 Gecko monarchus 176 stentor 176 Geliyra intermedia 183 mutilata 176 Geoemyda spinnsa 176 Geranium caroliniauum 662 robertianum 662 Gerardia maritima 652, 663 purpurea 663 tenuifolia 668 Geum album 662 canadense 662, 667 Glans 699 Glaucopis leucopterus 691 Glaucopis occipitalis 691 Gleditschia triacanthos 667 Globigerina 194 Glossophaga elongata ■. 38 longirostris 38 soncina soricina antillarum. . . Glyphyaliuia Gnaphalium obtusifolium . polycephalum purpureum. 37 432 664 664 664 Gomphocerus clavatus 719 Gouatodes kendali 176 Goniobasis plicifera 119, 120 proxima symmetrica 442 Gonionema 750-790 "apbrodite " 750 murbachii 750-790 Gonionemus 750, 751 Gonynema 750 Gonyocephalus liogaster 176 Gordius '. 200 Gracula saularis 684 Gryllidse 726 Gryllinse 726 Gryllus alogus 726 armatus 726 cinerascens 634 integer 726 mexicanus 726 (Locusta) migratorius. . . . 634 ( Acrida) nasutus 629 personatus 726 ploraus 637 Tamulus 631 velox 635 Gyge 345 Gymnodactylus marmoratus.. 176 Gymnopus leucocepbalus 136 Gymnosporangium 462 biseptatum, 461-474, 475, 482, 483, 486, 487, 489-492, 495, 496, 497, 499, 501 clavariseforme, 462, 463, 499, 501 clavipes 463, 498, 500 confusum 463 conicum 462, 463, 498, 500 conicum (juniperinum). . . 463 Cunningliamianum 463 Ellisii, 461-463, 465, 483, 486, 487, 489, 490, 495-498, 500, 668 fuscum 462, 463, 498, 500 globosum, . . .463, 483, 499, 501 juniperi ... 462 juniperium 463 macropus, 462, 463, 483, 485, 494, 499, 501 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 833 Gvmaosporan gium nidus-avis, ^ 463, 499, 501 sabinte 463 sabinae (fuscuin) 463 tremelloides 462, 463 Hyrostachys cernua 660 Hadra peliomphala 236 Halcyon armstrongi 676 chloris ^"^^ eoncreta 675 Haldemsinella ^'95^ robusta ^^5 tshivavensis 595 verruculata 596 Haldemannia tschivavensis . . . 595 Haldmanella 595 tschivavensis 595 Halodrilus littoralis S2 Harmothoe glabra 372 (Lainilla) glabra 270 imbricata, 259, 260, 264, 270, 271, 276 (Evane) impar 270 (Eunoa) nodosa 271 truncata 271 (Eunoa) truucata 272 Hedera Helix 34 Helenium autumnale 669 Helianthemum canadeuse 663 Ileliantlius giganteus 664 sp . 649,669 Heliastus aridus 723 Helicina 25 capsula 25 hirasei 25 235 , 420, 421 ogasawarana - 25 pulchra 748 yoshiwarana 26 yoshiwarana var. arata ... 26 yoshiwarana var. micro- theca 26 Helicodiscus 513 lineatus 421 Helix alternata 439 (Plectotropis) ciliosa. .235, 236 (Fruticicola) collinsoni. . . 238 (Fruticicola) commoda... 237 (Fruticicola) concinna 238 (Plectotropis) conella 235 (Acusta) conispira 236 (Fruticicola) craspedoche- ila 239 cumberlandiana 439 (Patula) depressa 240 (Fruticicola) despecta 237 (Camajna) edilha 234,240 53 japonica , occulta. . Helix (Patula) elalior 236 (Fruticicola) genulabris.. 237 (Fruticicola) gibbosa 237 herklotsi 238 (Fruticicola) japonica, 234, 235 (Acusta) Iseta 234 levettei 511 (Camsena) luchuana 236 luhuana 236 (Camsena) myomphala. . . 238 operculina 30 (Canisena) orientalis 236, 237 (Fruticicola) patruelis. . . . 235 (Patula) paupera 234, 240 (Fruticicola) peculiaris. . . 237 (Camsena) peliomphala, 237, 238 (Fruticicola) proba 239 (Conulus) pupula 240 (Camsena) pyrrhozona, 234, 240 (Camsena) qusesita 235, 238 (Plectotropis) scabricula. . 235 (Camsena) serotina 240 (Plectotropis) setocincta. . 235 (Acusta) sieboldiana, 235-237 (Fruticicola) similaris, 238, 239 simodse 239 (Camajna) simodse 238, 240 (Fruticicola) sphinctosto- ma 238 (Plectotropis) squarrosa, 236, (Fruticicola) stimpsoui... 237 strebeli 4^9 (Fruticicola) textrina 238 (Plectotropis) trochula... 236 Helodrillus 80.84 Hemidactylusfrenatus, 176, 183, 693 marmoratus 184 platyurus 176 Hemiderma perspicillaluni, 408, 409 tricolor 408 Hemiphsedusa 361, 366, 517 Hemipogouius subopacus 733 Hibiscus moscheutos, 642, 643, 650, 654, 655, 663 Hieracium gronovii 664 scabrum 669 Hierococcyx fugax 677 Hippiscus'corallipes 720, 721 pumilis 721 zapotecus 721 Hirasea 2» acntissima oO biconcava 30 eulhcca 30 834 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [De Hirasea hypolia 30 mirab'ilis 30, 31 nesiotica 30 operculina 30 sinuosa 80 Himndo javanica 681 lougipenuis 677 gutturalis 6S1 rustica gutturalis 681 Holospira roemeri 511 Homceogamiasubdiaphana 717 Hudsonia tomentosa, 644-648, 658, 663 Huhua orientalis 673 orientalis sumatraua 673 Hyalina (Conulus) acutaugula. 238 ? electrina 239 (Conulus) iucerta 235 (Conulus) labilis 234 (Pseudoliyalina) minus- cula 240 ? nitida 236 (Conulus) phyllopbila 237 (Microcystis) rejecta 236 (Conulus) stenogyra 236 (Conulus) teuera.' 234 Hydra 195, 201, 215 Hydrocicbla frontalis 684 ruficapilla 684 velata 684 Hydrocotyle umbellata 655 Hylobates boolock 159 lar 159 Hyopsodus 253 Hypancistrocerus 53, 54 Hypericum adpressum 668 mutilum 663 Hypolylus 772 Hyiisirhina dorise 180 enhydris 180 Hvrax 248, 254 Tdotea 295 liectica 345 Ilex glabra 647, 667 opaca, 647, 653, 655, 658, 659, 662 Indri 248 lone 345 Ipouifea purpurea 663 Irena criaiger 682 Iris versiciilor 660, 666 Isuardia palustris 663 Iva frutescens 664 Ixos (Trichixos)pboeocepbalus 683 Japalura nigrilabris 177 polycouata 184 Julus...r. 4, 320 Juucus bufonius 660 Juncus canadensis 660 dichotomus 660 gerardi 660 scirpoides 660 sp 646, 647 tenuis 660 Juuiperus communis. .463, 498, 499 nana 463, 498 oxycedrus. 498 sabina 463 virginiana, 498, 499, 647, 648, 653, 655, 658, 659 Ksellia verticellata 668 Kaliella ogasawarana 31 Kalmia augustifolia 647 Ketupa ketupa 673 Kneiffia pumila 663 Kosteletzkya virginica, 642, 643, 662 Kuhnia eupatorioides 664 Lachesis flavoviridis 185 sumatranus 182 wagleri 181 Lacinaria cylindracea 664 Lactista boscanus 721 pellepidus 731 Lactuca scariola 669 Lagenella 791 Lagisca multisetosa 267 rarispina 268, 269 Lalage culminata 682 dominica 682 Laminaria 277 Lamprocorax chalybea 690 Lauius coronatus 691 leucorhyncbus 688 musicus 6S4 superciliosus 687 tigriuus 688 xanthogaster 682 Laodice. . . .". 753 Lazaria 699 californica 707 Lazariella 699 Lechea maritima 663 minor var. maritima 663 racemulosa 668 Lemna minor 666 Lemur albifrons 250 gracilis 137 rufipes 252 tardigradus 137, 139 volans 135, 252 Lepidium virginicum 667 Leptilon canadense 664 Liatris graminifolia 664 Libocedrus decurrens 499 Ligia 291, 295, 326, 347 1902.] NATUKAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 835 Limax varians 234 Limnsea _• • • 51^ Limonium carolinianuni, 654, 656, 663 Limulus 189 Linaria canadensis 663, 668 linaria 643 vulgaris 643 Linum perenne 36 virginianum 662 Liriope '•'53, 773 Litaneutra minor 718 Lithobius 4,39,330 bipunctatus 42 monticola 42 multidentatus 43 permundus 43 rugosiis 42 xanti 39.42 Lobelia cardinalis 35, 36 fulgens 36 syphilitica 35, 36 Lobostoma 160, 163 cinnamomeum 161, 165 megalopliylla 161 Lobostomiua; 161 Locusta japouica 636 Lucustinse 635, 723 Loriculus galgulus 673 Loris 137, 138, 13S gracilis 137, 138, 245 tardigradus 138, 250 Loxia maja 6S9 Lucliupbaedusa 380 Ludwigia palustris 663 Lumbriconereis sp 274 Lycoperdon turneri 649, 665 Lycopodium caroliniauum, 647, 665 Lycopus virginicus 663 Lycosa 536 arenicola 537, 550 babingtoni 559, 561 baltimoriana 538, 561 carolinensis. .535, 537, 556, 559 (Tarentula) Carolinensis. . 556 charonoides 537, 544 cinerea 537, 555 communis 562 dt>mitex 550 erratica 562, 564 frondicola. . . .538, 550, 565, 568 funerea 53S halodroma 555 inhonesta 538, 557, 559 kochi 566 kochii 565, 566, 568 lenta 562, 564 lepida 538, 563 Lycosa lynx ••_ 555 maritima 555, 556 (Tarentula) modesta 544 nidicola 538, 559, 561 nidifex 550 nigra 536, 538, 540 nigraurata 538, 564 ocreata 540,542, 548 ocreata pulchra. .537, 540, 547 punctulata. . .537, 553, 553, 555 purcelli 538, 565, 566, 568 relucens 537, 542 scutulata 537, 553 sepulchralis 537, 543, 546 stonei 537, 546 sublata 536,^5_39 tigrina 557, 559 verisimilis 537, 543, 548 vulpina 557, 559 Lycosidse... 534,535 Lygosoma nitens 178 pellopleurum 185 Mabuia multifasciata 177 rudis 178 rugifera 177 Macacus cynomolgus 158 Macrobiotus 189 Macronus ptilosus 685 Macropisthodon flaviceps 694 rhodomelas 694 Macropteryx comata 677 loDgipennis 677 Macroscelides 249 Macucus cynomolgus 143 Mainatus javensis 690 Malacopterou erytlirote 686 Maudarina exoptata var. ob- tusa 29 mandarina var. hahaji- mana 29 ruscheubergeriana 25 Manis javanica 143 Mantidse •, • ■_• 718 Martes amencana var. abieti- noides 455 Mecostetbus magister 631 Megacardita 699 Megalophasdusa 360 Megalophrys montaua 695 Meibomia canescens 662 paniculatum 663 Megaderma 249 Meiglyptes grammitliorax 680 I uikki . 680 Meloenis loveui 274 INIelamspora (Calyptospora) Gappertiana 474 Melania anibidcxtra 120 836 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec. Melania biwae 120 boninensis 120, 121 caucellata 120 decussata 120 hakodadiensis 121 hidachiensis 120 japonica 120 libertina 119, 120, 121 libertina var. latifusus 120 libertina var. plicosa 120 multigranosa 119, 120 niponica , 119 plicosa 120 reiniana 119, 120 reiniana var hidachiensis . 119 retifera 121 tenuisulcata 120 Melanoplus altitudinum 724 atlanis 724 bivittatus 724 corpulentus 724 femur-rubrum 724 lakinus 724 sapellanus 724 thomasi 724 Melia azedarach 122 Meliacese 123, 123 Melissodes montana 728 Meminna indica 131 Mentha spicata 668 viridis 668 Merops amicta 676 philippinus 676 sumatranus 676 Mesobucco duvauceli 679 3Iestobregma asperum 722 Microhierax fringillarius 672 Microliyla ornata , . . . . 186 undulata 186 Micrommata carolinensis 5S4. serrata 5S4. iindata 584 Micropternus brachyurus 680 phfeocops 680 jMicrostomum 195 Microtarsus immaculatus 683 melanolenctis 683 Milneria 698, 701, 712 minima 712 Miodon 098, 700 prolongatus 700 Miogryllus lineatus 727 Mitchellia repens 654, 664, 669 ]\[ixoniis erythroptera 685 gularis 685 Molge pyrrhogaster ensicauda. 186 Mollugoverticillata. .643, 044, 661, 667 Molossus nigricans 395, 397 pretiosus 395, 396, 397 rufus 395, 396, 397 Monarda punctata 663 Monocystis ascidise 7 sipunculi 5 Monophyllus cubanus ...410, 411 lucise 411 plethodou 411 redmani 410 Mormoops 160, 161, 162 blainvillii. 160-162, 165-168, 172 blainvillii cinnamomea . . 162, 163, 165, 172 intermedia 161, 170, 172 intermedius 403 megalophylla .. .161, 162, 165, 166, 169, 172, 403 megalophylla intermedia, 162, 169, 170 megalophylla senicula.162, 172 tumidiceps 403 Mormopes 161 Mormops 160, 161 blainvillii 163. 165, 166 megalophylla, 166, 167, 169, 170 Morus rubra 653, 667 Moschus fulviventer 132 javanicus 128, 131, 132 kanchil 138, 130 mennina 131 napu 127, 131 pelandoc 133 stanleyanus 131 Motacilla boarula melanope . . 688 gularis 685 Melanope 688 olivacea 687 Muuia leucogastroides 689 maja 689 nisoria 689 punctulata nisoria 689 Mus alexandrinus 132 firmus 143, 155, 156 fremens 143, 154, 155 integer 155, 156 lingensis 143, 154 miilleri 156 sp 154 surifer 154 vociferans 155 Muscicapa cantatrix 681 elegans 681 Muscipeta incei 681 Mustela abietinoides, 451, 453, 454, 460 actuosa 448-451, 454, 456 americana 443-460 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 837 Mustela americana americana. 445, 446 americana abietiuoides . . . 444, 451 americana brumalis . .444, 448, 451 americana actuosa . . .444, 450, 453, 456 americana typicus . . -444. 450, 451, 457, 458 americanus ^J^Ji. at rata 444, 452, 454, 455 brumalis 447-450, 453, 454 caurina. .444, 448, 453, 455-460 caurina origenes, 444, 453, 454, 456, 458, 459 foina 444, 446, 447, 449 huro 444 leucopus 444 martes 444, 446, 447, 457 vulpina JfJ^Jt zibellina . . . .444, 446, 447, 448, 457, 458 Mygnimia ustulata 733 Myotis lucifugus 391, 392 Myrica cerifera . .644-647, 650, 652, 655, 658, 660 Mvtilicardia 695 Mvtilicardita 698 Nabalus albus 664 Naia naia 181 Nannosciurus exilis 154 melanotis 153, 154 pulcher 153, 154 whiteheadi 153 Napothera umbratilis 686 NarcomedusEe 766 Natalus major 398, 399 mexicanus 399, 400, 403 stramiueus. ..398, 399, 400, 403 Nectarinia hasseltii 68S Neocardia 700 angulata 700 Nereis pelagica 274 zonata 274 Nesopupa dedecora 31 Nicolea arctica 276 Noctilionina 161 Nomada formula 728 modesta 729 Northia conchylega . .274, 276, 277 Notharctus 253 Notogonia sequalis 731 nigripennis 731 nigripennis occidentalis. . . 731 Nyctibius 677 Nycticebus 136, 138 bensaleusis IJ^.! Nycticebus cinereus iJi-l coucang 137,138, 140 coucaug hilleri 139 coucaug javanicus 139, 140 coucang malaiauus. . .139, 141 coucang natun* 139, 140 javanicus 1^0 menasreusis 138 tardig^-adus 137, 1I^0 Nyctinomops 393 affinis 393 aurispinosus 393 depressus 393 femorosaccus 393, 394 laticaudatus 393-395 macrotis 393 orthotis 393 yucatanicus 393-395 Nyctinomus 393 antillularum 398 bahamensis 641 brasiliensis 398, 641 cynocephalus 641 europs 393, 394, 395 megalotis 393 Nyctiornis 677 Nyctornis 677 Nyssa sylvatica 653 Oakesia sessilifolia 660 Obitodes forbesii 746 Ocyale 536, 584 undata 584 Ocypterus leucogaster 6SS Odontopliotopsis 738 brevicornis 741 clandestinus 740 exogyrus 738 mellicausus 741 succineus 741 Odynerus abdominalis 48, 68 (Ilypancistrocerus) ad- vena 53, 54 (Stenancistrocerus) api- cipennis 44, 67 (Stenancistrocerus) area- tus 47. 68 (Stenancistrocerus) atri- pes 51, 69 brevithorax 63 (Odynerus) chapadae. .64, 69 (Ancistrocerus?) conjunc- tU9 ...52. 69 cordatus 57, 68' (Odynerus) corumba;, 63. 69 coxalis 54, 68 (Stenancistrocerus) convo- lutus 45, 67 838 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [De Odyneriis (Steuancistrocenis) dentiformis 48, 68 dorsonotatus 58, 68 (Ancistroceriis) fulvima- ciilus 49, 68 (Stenodynenis) griseus 66, 69 Herbertii 56, 69 inusitatus 61, 69 longicornis 59, 69 nasidens 63 preecox 63 (Hypancistrocerus) re- flexus 53, 69 relativus 63, 69 (Ancistrocerus) rufimacu- lus 50, 68 rufobasilaris 730 rufosuffusus 62, 69 ( Odynerns) sericeus . . . 65, 69 (Stenodynenis) serratns 65, 69 striatus 60, 69 (Stenodynenis) subapica- lis 67, 69 (Stenancistrocenis) suffii- sus 46, 67 (Ecanthinte 727 CEcantliiis angustipennis 727 niveuB 727 sp 727 (Edaleus infernalis > 634 nigrofasciatus 632 (Edipodince 632, 720 CEnothera biennis 663, 668 hiimifiisa 652 pumila 663 Olindias 782, 788 Omphalina andrewsse 420, 430 andrewsije montivaga.419, 420 fuliginosa 418, 420, 429 fuliginosa polita 417, 420 kopnoides 420 laevigata 420, 429 laevigata latior 417, 420 perlsevis 417, 420 rugeli 417-420, 430 subplana 418, 420, 429 Onagra biennis 668 Oniscus, 297, 300, 301, 304, 326, 346, 350 asellus. .286, 290, 292. 295, 302, 313, 316, 320, 341 miirarius 298, 340, 342 Onychocliaeta windlei 84 Opeia obscura 718 Opisthemega crassipes 4/ postica 41 Opisthemega spinicauda 4I Opuntia opuntia 655, 663, 668 vulgaris 663, 668 Oriolus maculatiis 689 xanthouotiis 689 Orphiilella salina 719 Orthotomus atrigularis 687 cineraceus 687 Osmorrhiza sp 663 Osmotreron fulvicollis 672 vernans 672 Oxya hyla 635 velox 635, 636 vicina 635 Oxycoccus macrocarpus 647 Oxygrapbis cymbalaria 661 Oxyopes 590 salticus 590 Oxyopidae 590 Oxyopus astutus 590 gracilis 590 Pachytylus cinerascens 634 migratorius 634 Paleeoruis longicauda . , 673 Paludina abbreviata 116, 116 bistrica 116, 118 ingallsiana 115, 118 japonica 116 Ireta 116, 117 malleata 116, 116 nitens 116, 118 oxytropis 115, 117 oxytropus var. japonica . . 117 oxytropus var. sclateri . . . 117 pyramidata 115 sclateri 118 stelmaphora 116 Panicum cnis-galli 660 crus-galli var. hispidum 643, 644 dichotomum 666 prolifenim 660 sanguinale 660 virgatnm, 645, 646, 647, 654, 660 Pantotberia 248, 253 Parapleurus alliaceus 029 fastigiatus 629, 630 Paratettix toltecus 718 Pardosa 536, 569 albopatella 571 minima 569, 571 nigra 5S8 nigropalpis. .569, 572, 573, 574 pallida 574 scita 569,573 solivaga 569, 574 Parthenocissus (luinquefolia. . 662 1902.] XATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 839 Partlienocissus (Ampelopsis) quinquefolia. 653 Pastor jalla 690 Pedinaspis plauatus 735 Pelargopsis burmauica 674 capensis 674, 675 floresiana 674 fraseri 675 eurial 674 javana 674, 675 leucocephala 674 malacceusis 674 Pelophilus sinensis 67S Peutastomum 189 Penclijieta bermudensis 80, 83 dyeri 83 taprobanfe 83 Pericrocotus xanthogaster .... 682 Peronia tongana 239 Petaurus...' 243, 253 Petrodromus 248 Petromyzou brancliialis. . . .85, 106 dorsatus 85 maiinns 106 planeri 85, 90 Peziza (Dasyscypha) Will- kommii . ." 475 (Blelotium) Willkommii. . 474 Pezotettix Mikado GS7 Phsedusa 523 Phseopicus grammitlaorax GSO Phasianus argus 671 gallus 672 Phasmidaj 718 Pheretima hawayana SO rodericensis 83 schmardse 83 Philanthus anna 733 cleouife 733 crabronifonnis 733 inultimaculatus 733 pacificus 733 Philomycus bilineatus 235, 239 carolineusis 421, 437 confusus 239 hemphilli....418, 419, 421, 438 wetherbyi 418, 419, 421 Philoscia vittata 286 Plicenioplutus erythroguathus. 67S Phoenicophaus elongatus G7S Javanicus 67S Pholoci miuuta 274 Photopsis albicincta 737 lingulatus 737 imicolor 737 Phrynotettix 595 taosaiius 595, 597 tshivavensis.595, 596, 597, 723 Phrynotettix verruculatus.595, Phj'llodoce citrina greenlandica mucosa Phyllopneuste borealis Phylloruis cyanopogon icterocepbalus media Phyllostomatidaj Physa 513, aneillaria gyrina 514, 515, liunierosa 513 lordi 515, mexicaua rhomboidea 514, 515, solida tabulata virgata 514, Phytolaca decandra 652, Picnonotus simplex Picus bracbyurus javanensis malaccensis moluccensis tukki validus Pinus rigida 647, 648, 653, Pipestrellus Pipistrellus cinuamomeus subflavus 390, ten\iis Pirata 536. elegans 575, 579, exigua exiguus humicolus 575, insularis liber 575, 578, marxi 575, minutus nigromaculatus. .575, 579, piratica piraticns procursus 575, Pirns american:i arbutifolia 500, communis 500, corouaria mains 500, Pisidium Pitta boschii Planorbis Plautago major Platurus laticaudatus Platylophus coronatus Platysma myoides Platysmurus leucopterus 596 274 274 274 161 514 513 516 -515 516 514 516 514 513 516 667 683 GSO 6S0 679 679 6S0 6S0 659 242 390 391 136 575 581 578 578 577 579 581 582 577 582 57S 583 583 501 501 501 501 , 501 513 6S1 513 664 694 691 243 691 840 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec. Plcctotropis vulvivaga 239 Pleurodonte bayameii sis 748 margin ella rostrata 748 Pleuromeris 698, 700 Ploceus atrigula 689 megarhynclius 689 Pluchea camphovata 651, 664 Podisma dairisama 636 mikado 637 primuoa 637 Podisoma Ellisii 462 Pogonia ophioglossoides . .647, 666 Polydoutophis geminatus 178 Polygala cruciata 663 Polygonatimi commutatnm. . . 660 gigantenm 660 Polygon ella articulata 661 Polygonum acre 661 incarnatum 661 persicaria 661 ramossissimum 661 Polygyra albolabris . .420, 424, 427 albolabris major 420 altispira 418-420, 427, 428 andrewsse.. .415, 417-420, 425, 426 andrewsse altivaga .. .420, 426, 427 andrewsfe intermedia 420, 425, 426 andrewsfe normalis. . .420, 425, 426 appressa perigrapta ..420, 424 chilhoweensis 417, 420, 424 christyi 417, 420 clarkii 419, 420 clausa 418, 420, 427 depilata 417, 420, 428 edwardsi 420 edwardsi magnifumosa . . . 420 exoleta 420, 424, 426 ferrissii 419, 420 frandulenta 420, 421 hirsuta 420, 437, 428 hirsuta altispira Ii.27 hirsuta pilula Ji.2S indianorum 511 indianorum lioderma 511 inflecta 418, 420, 423 magnifumosa 428 monodon cincta. .417, 420, 429 normalis 417 palliata 420, 424 pilula 417, 420 428 profunda 418, 420, 423 roemeri 511 rugeli 420, 423 sayii 418, 420, 424 PolygJ'i'a stenotrema 420, 427 stenotrema nuda 417 subpa]liata..416, 418, 420, texaseusis texasiana tliyroides 420, tridentata. . .416, 420, 421, trideutata var. complanta. tridentata tennesseensis. . 422, wheatleyi 418, 420, Polynoa (Harmothoe) island- "ica Polypetades viridis Polyporus versicolor Polytrichum commune Pomatiopsis hirasei lapidaria Pontodrilus ai'ense Porcellia 395. 300, 305, Isevis scaber..286, 312, 314, 327, 330, 331, 338, 339, spinicornis . .286, 296, 328, Porospora gigantea Portulaca oleracea 651, Portulacca oleracea Prenanthes alba Prinia olivacea Pristiloma ai'ctica idahoense lansingi Promops affinis depressus 393 Propithecus 243 diadema 252 Prunus maritima 644, 648, 653, 656, 658, 662 serotina 653, 662 virginiaua 658, 662 Psammodynastes pictus 182 pulverulentus 180, 181, 694 Pseudonenia 528 Pseudopliyllus brullei 21 harrisoni 21 neriifolius 21 Psittacus galgulus 673 longicaudus 678 Psittinus incertus 673 Psolojssa ferruginea 719 maculipennis 719 Pteromeris 698 Pteromys 343, 244, 253 Pteronotus 161 Pteropus 242-254 frugivorous 244 tittsecheilus 136 511 511 437 422 422 420, 423 437 373 185 665 665 27 441 83 350 347 329, 347 347 18 661 667 664 687 593 593 593 393 393 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 841 Pteropus vampyrus 136, 143 Ptilimnium capillaceum 603 Ptyclioptera contaminata 285 Punctum blanclianum 417, 421 pygmteum 421 Pupa 513 Pnpoides 513 Putorius nudipes 136 Pycnanthemum Torreyi 668 Pycuouotus analis 683 plumosus 683 simplex 683 Pvramidula 513 alternata 416, 421, 438-440 alternata costata 417, 421 alternata fergnsoni? 421 alternata mordax, 417, 421, 438, 439, 440 bryanti 416, 421, 440, 441 fergusoni 438 pauper 234 perspectiva 421, 440, 441 striatella 511 strigosa huachucaua 511 PyrgomorphinES 635 Pyrotrogon diardi neglectus . . 677 duvauceli 677 i Pyrus arbutifolia 662 j uialus 667 Pj'tbon reticulatus 178 ! Quercus 283 alba 661, 666 digitata 661 falcata 661 lieteropliylla 38, 34 ilicifolia 661 lyrata 653 minor 647 nana 661 palustris 33, 34 palustris-imbricaria 33 phellos 33, 653 tinctoria 661 velutina 661 Rallus phceuicurus 071 Raua clmlcouota 694 erytbrtea 182, 694 everetti 182 glandulosa 182 gracilis 185 macrodon 182 tigrina 182, 694 Ranunculus cymbalaria 661 Ralufa affinis 134, 149, 150 bicolor 147, 148, 149, 150 bicolor bypoleuca 134 bypoleuca 149, 151 melanopepla 148, 150 Ratufa uotabilis. ... .143, 150, 151 palliata 147, 149 pyrsonota 150 Reinia 524, 523 Remlla 757 Rbacopborus maculutus 183 viridis 185 Rbiuocicbla mitrata 685 Rhinomyias pectoralis 686 Rliinopoma 249 Rbiuortbia cliloropbtea 678 Rbinosciurus laticadatus. .143, 154 Rbopodytes elongatus 678 Rhus copalliua 643, 650, 662 glabra 655 radicaus 644, 648, 650, 654, 655, 662 Rbyncocyon 246, 248, 249 Rbynomyias umbratilis.. .686. 687 umbratilis ricbmondi 686 Rhjjtidoceros undulatus 676 Rcestelia aurantiaca 500 botryapites 501 cancellata 402, 500 cornuta 500 lacerata 501 nidus 501 pyrata 501 transformans 500 Rosa Carolina 662 Rubigula dispar 684 Rubus canadensis 662 villosus 667 Rudbeckia hirta 609 Rumex acetosella 649, 661 crispus 661 patientia 667 verticillatus 667 Ruppia maritima 650, 060 Rusa unicolor equinus 132 Sabbatia stellaris 663 Sagina decumbens 601 Sagitta 189 Salicornia ambigua 601 Bigelovii 654, 655, 661 herbacea . . . .651, 654, 655, 061 mucronata 661 Salsola kali 652, 658, 661 Sambucus canadensis 664 Samolis floribundus 663 valerandi 663 Sassafras sassafras . . .648, 655, 662 Satsuma japonica 236 Saxicava 706 Scalaricardita . . . .• 700 Scalibregma intlatum var. core- tbura 275 Scbueideria 18 842 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec, Scione lobata 370 Scirpus americanus 660 debilis 643, 645, 646 lacustris 649, 651 maritimus 660 pungeus 660 sylvaticus 646, 666 Sciurus affinis 134 albiceps 151 humei 153 hypoleucos 134, I49 insignis 133 melanops 151 notatns 143 pievostii 151 prevostii bangkanus 133 prevostii harrisoui 132 prevostii rafflesii 133 Rafflesii 133 teuuis 143, 151 vittatus 133, 151 Scolia dubia 35 Scyphomedusfe 766 Sedum spcctabile 35 Semnopithecus femoralis 159 maurus 141, 143, 158, 159 melalophos 141 mitratiTs 141 snmatranus 1 59 Sericocarpus asteroides 664 couj^zoides 664 Serpula sp 376 Setaria glauca 660 Siamanga 143 Sicyos angulatus 664 Sieglingia purpurea 643, 653 Silene stellata 661 , Simia maura I4.I ' melalophos 141 syndactyla 142 Simotes octolineatus 180 Siphia cantatrix 681 Smilax glauca 660 rotuiidifolia 654, 660 Solanum dulcamara 663 nigrum 663, 668 Solidago odora 664 puberula 665, 669 sempervirens. 044-648, 653, 665 teuuifolia 646, 665 tenuifolius 669 Sonclius oleraceus 665 Sonorelia grauulatissima 511 rowelli 511 Sorbus aria 500 aucuparia 500 Spartina cynosuroides 660 patens 653-655 Spartina polystacliya 643 stricta 653, 654, 655 SphiErium 513 magnum 513 Sphseroma 345 Sphterophthalma harpalyce. . . 743 pacifica 743 Spliecodes mandibularis 729 Sphyradium edentulum 431 Spilomena foxii 731 Spiranthes cernua 600 Spirorbis borealis 377 granulatus 376 spirillum 377 verruca 377 vitreus 377 Statice limonium 663 Stenamma fulvum piceum. 599-635 Stenobothrus latipennis 631 Stenoderma luciae 407, 408 montserratense 407, 408 nichollsi 407, 408 Stenophora juli 4, 8, 13, 14 Stenophyllus capillaris 666 Stenops 138 Stenolrema hirsutum 427 Stereophffidusa. . .379-381, 519, 530 Slichospora 18 Stigmus fulvipes 731 Stirapleura mescalero 719 pusilla 719 tenuicarina 719 Strix ketupa 673 sumatrana 673 Strobilops labyriuthica stre- beli 417, 430, 439 Strophostyles angulosa 663 helvola 651, 653, 663 peduncularis 667 umbellata 667 Sturuopastor jalla 690 Suseda linearis 661 Succinea 513 lauta 234, 240 luteola 511 obliqua 441 ovalis 418, 419, 431, 441 putris . . '. 340 Surniculiis lugubris 677 Bus barbatus 147 longirostris 147 oi 147, 147 vittatus 137, 143, 147 Symmorphus 53 Symphalangus 143 syndactylus 143 Syntherisma sanguinalis 660 Tachydromus sexlineatus.177, 693 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 843 Tacbydromus smaragdinus 184 Taphozoi 161 Tardigradns 137, 1 38 coucang Ij^l Tarentnla. .' 544 baltimoriana 561 inhonesta 551 kochii 566 lepida 562 tigrina 557 Taxodium 461 Tecoma radicans 653, 668 Terpsiphone iucei 681 Terrapene caroliua 386, 387 eurypygia 385 Testudo 383 atascosse 383 hexagonata 384 laticaudata 384 polyphemus 384, 385 Tetraclirysis nortoni 736 Tetraleurudes 283 Tettigidea lateralis 718 Tettiginse 629 Tettigonidse 725 Tettix japoniciis .... 629 Teucrium canadense 663 Theatops , 39 californiensis 41 crassipes 4I posticus 41 spinicaudus 41 Thecalia 701 concamerata HOI Thecaliinae 698, 701 Thelepus circinnatus 276 Thelephora terrestris 649, 665 Thriponax javanensis 680 Tiga javanensis 680 Timalia erythroptera 685 mitrata 685 Tissa marina 661 Tomichia japonica 21 Tomitlierium 253 Toria Nipalensis 612 Toxaspis (Terrapene) anguil- lulata 385 Trachelomonas 791-795 minor 794 spiculifera 793, 794 spinosa 794 vermiculosa 793, 794 vestita 793, 794 Tracbomedusas 751 Tracbycoraus ocbrocepbalus. . 683 Tragulus 128 bungnranensis 146, 147 fulviventer 131, 132 Tragulus fuscatus iavanicus 128-132, kancbil 128, malaccensis meminna 128, 130, mimenoides napu 127-130, 143 nigricans nigricollis 145, pelandoc....l29, 130, 131. pretiosus . . .143, 144, 145, stanleyanus 128, 130, Treron griseicapilla nipalensis Trialeurodes Tricbastoma biittikoferi . .685, celebense dicbotomus pyrrbogeuys rostratum Tricholestes criniger Tricuspis purpurea Trientalis americana Trifolium arvense bybridum Trilopbidia annulata japonica . Trimerotropis melanoptera.. . . vinculata Tringa bypoleucos Trionyx cartilagineus subplanus 176, Trocbilus colubris Trocbosa 536, cinerea 555, Trogon diardii neglectus duvauceli Tropidolopbus formosus Tropidonotus cbrysargus trianguligerus 178, Tropidophorus brookii Truxalinee Tupaia 245, 246, 248, ferruginea malaccana 143, nana pbaeura 157, tana 134, Turdus analis cbalybeus dispar dominicus mindauensis oclirocepbalus strigatus terat Turtur tigrinus turtur Typba angustifolia. . .660, 131 143 131 132 131 132 -145 132 146 132 146 131 672 672 283 686 685 663 686 686 683 643 663 662 662 634 722 722 611 693 693 35 544 556 611 617 721 694 694 178 629 249 158 157 251 158 143 683 690 684 682 684 683 690 682 672 672 666 844 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [De Typha latifolia 646, 660 Tyrannophfedusa, 366, 375, 377, 378, 380 Ucleopsylla vierecki 725 Urococcyx erythroguathus 678 Uroloucha leucogastra 688, 689 Ustilago maydis 494 Uvularia sessilifolia 660 Vaccinium corymbosum, 647, 648, 663 Vallisneria spiralis 650 Vallouia 513 Vampyrops dorsalis 405 fumosus 405 iufuscus 405, 406 reciflnus 406 vittatus 406 zarhinus 406 Varanus dumerili 177 heterophilis 177 salvator 177, 693 Venericardia 697-699, 705 (Cyclocardia) alaskana. 710, 711, 715 (Cyclocardia) armilla, 704,713 (Cyclocardia) barbarensis 708 borealis, 704, 706, 710, 714, 115 borealis var. novanglise. . . 704 (Cyclocardia) borealis 703 compressa 704 (Cyclocardia) compressa. . 708 crassicostata 707 Cuvieri 708 (Cyclocardia) Gouldii, 709,714 granulata 703, 706 imbricata 699 incisa « 711 (Cyclocardia) incisa. .710, 714 (Cyclocardia) raoniliata, 705, 713 (Cyclocardia) monilicosta. 709 novanglife 714 obliqua 105 (Pteromeris) perplana 705 planicosta 711 procera 708 (Cyclocardia) procera.... 704 (Miodon) prolongatus 711 (Cyclocardia) rudis 711 (Cyclocardia) spurca. (Cyclocardia) stearnsii, 708 709, 714 , 705 . 708 (Pleuromeris) tridentata. (Cyclocardia) velutina. . . veutricosa 714, lllf. (Cyclocardia) ventricosa, 709, 710 Veneridfe 697 Venerupis Venus pygmgea Verbena hastata Vertigo bollesiana. . . Vespa occidentalis. . . Vespertilio soricinus . tenuis vampyrus Viburnum dentatum Vitis aestivalis 653, labrusca 653, Vitrea approxima. , . .420, 431, caroiineusis 418, 430, carolineusis "wetherbyi, cliugmani, 414, 419, 420, 432, ferrea liammonis....418, 420, 431 indentata 420, 430, peutadelphia petrophila petrophila peutadelphia, rhoadsi 420, sculptilis 418, 420, vauattai 420, 432, wlieatleyi 420, wheatleyi cliugmani Vitrinizouites latissimus, 418- latissimus uvidermis uvividermis Viverra tauglunga 143, Vivipara sclateri Viviparidse Viviparus liistricus japouicus 117; japonicus var. iwakawa. . . malleatus 116, sclateri stelmaphora 116, Walsuria piscidia Willoughbaea scandens Xantliium cauadeuse strumarium Xantholtema hsemacephala Xenelaphis liexagonotus Xenopeltis unicolor Xylocarpus 122, granatum Xylocopa virginica Xylolepes validus Yungipicus moluccensis Zachrysia proboscidea Zamenis korros Zamia Zanclostomus javanicus 701 706 663 420 735 37 ISQ 136 664 662 662 432 430 420, 430 431, 433 420 -433 511 419 419 420, 432 432 431 433 432 4.S1 420, 430 420 419 156 116 115 118 118 117 117 118 117 122 655 652 665 679 179 178 123 125 35 680 679 748 694 749 678 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 845 Zaocys carinatus 694 Zaptyx 373, 381 Zonites carolinensis 430 lasmodon var ? \35 lawi 4S5 placentula 438 placentulus ^55 ■wheatleyi ^5i Zonitoides 513 arboreus 420, 433 elliottii 430, 433 milium 420 minnsculus 420 nitidus 431 patuloides 417, 430 Zostera marina 650, 660 846 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Dec, GENERAL INDEX, 1902. Additions to tlie Museum, 814. Anderson, Malcolm P., and Joseph Grinuell. Birds of the Seskiyou Mountains, California. A prob- lem in distribution, 637, (volume for 1903). Ashhurst, Samuel K., announce- ment of death of, 510. Berg, Carlos, announcement of death of, 114. Biological and Microscopical Sec- tion, report of the, 805. Blaisdell, F. E. The frons in Bembidium, with description of new species (Plate III), 23, 70. Botanical Section, report of the, 807. Brown, Arthur Erwin. A collec- tion of reptiles and batrachians from Borneo and the Loo Choo Islands, 1, 175. A list of reptiles and batrachians in the Harrisou- Hiller collection from Sumatra, 627, 693. Chamberlin, Kalph V. A new genus and three new species of Chilopods, 1, 39. Chapman, Henry C, M.D. Ob- servations on Galeopithecus vo- lans (Plates X, XI, XII), 174, 241. Cockerell, T. D. A. The classifi- cation of the Aleyrodidse (Plate XV), 174, 279. Collett, Robert, appointment as Academy's representative at Niels Henrik Abel's Commem- oration, 509. Conchological Section, report of the. 806. Conklin, Edwin G. Karyokinesis and Cytokinesis in the matura- tion, fertilization and cleavage of Crepidula and other Gastro- pods, 24, 113, (.Journal XII, 1). Cooper, James G., M.D., an- nouncement of death of, 512. Corresponding Secretary, report ot, 798. Council for 1903, 812. Crawley, Howard. The progres- sive movement of Gregarines (Plates I, II), 1, 4. A peculiar Helizoan, 256. Cresson, Caleb C, announcement of death of, 2. Curators, report of the, 802. Dall, William Healy. Synopsis of the Carditacea and of the Amer- ican species, 692, 696. Edwards, Edward B., announce- ment of death of, 512. Elections during 1902, 813. Entomological Section, report of the, 807. Fielde, Adele M. Notes on an ant, 593, 599. Fox, William J. Contributions to a knowledge of the Hymenop- tera of Brazil, No. 8, Eumeu- idse, continued (genus Ody- nerus), 23, 44. Giekie, Sir Archibald, reception of Haydeu Memorial Geological award, 627. Biographical no- tice, 627. General Index, 846. Hamilton, S. Harbert. Minerals from Santiago Providence, Caba, 744. Harshberger, John W., Ph.D. The germination of the seeds of Car- apa guiauensis Aubl., 113, 122. Two diseases of the white cedar (Plates XXII, XXIII), 173, 461. Additional observations on the strand flora of New Jersey, 626, 642. Hay, O. P. Descriptions of two 1902.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 847 species of extinct tortoises, one new, 255, 383. Haj-den Memorial Geological Award, conferring of, 627. Index to Genera, etc., 824. Lewis, Francis W., M.D., an- nouncement of death of, 113. Librarian, report of the, 800. Lockington, William N., announce- ment of death of, 593. Lyman, Benjamin Smith. Ac- counting for the depth of the Wyoming Buried Valley, 507. McCombs, R. S., M.D., announce- ment of death of, 510. Meehan, Thomas. ContributioDS to the life-histories of plants, 2, 33. Miller, Gerrit S., Jr. Mammals collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott in the region of the Indragiri river, Sumatra, 114, 143. Twenty new American bats, 255, 389. Mills, Charles K. The Neurofi- brillary theory and its bearings upon localization of function in the nervous system, 113. Mineralogical and Geological Sec- tion, report of the, 809. Montgomery, Thomas H., Jr. On Phy-logenetic classification, 173, 187. Descriptions of the Lycos- idte and Oxyopidse of Philadel- phia and its vicinity (Plates XXIX, XXX), 512, 534. Studies of the habits of spiders, particu- larlv those of the mating period, 627," (volume for 1903). Moore, Clarence B, Certain abor- iginal remains of the northwest Florida coast. Part II, 24 (Jour- nal XII, 2). Moore, J. Percy. Some Bermuda ] Oligochseta, with a description of ! a new species, 24, 80. Descrip- ! tions of some new Polynoidte, with a list of other Polychaeta I from north Greenland waters ; (Plates XIII, XIV), 174, 258. Report of Corresponding Secre- tary, 798. Murlin, John Raymond. Absorp- i tion and secretion in the diges- tive system of the laud Isopods (Plate XVI), 255, 284. Nolan, Edward J., M.D. Report of Recording Secretary, 796. Report of Librarian, 800. Officers, Councilors and Commit- tee on Accounts for 1903, 811. Ornithological Section, report of the, 809. Packard, Frederick, M.D., an- nouncement of death of, 692. Palmer, T. Chalkley. Five new species of Trachelomonas (Plate XXXV), 744, 791. Perkins, Henry Farnham. The development of Gonionema Mur- bachii (Plates XXXL XXXII, XXXIII, XXXIV), 512, 750. Pilsbry, Henry A. New land mollusca from Japan and the Bouin Islands, 2, 25. Revision of the Japanese Viviparidte, with notes on Melania and Bithynia (Plate IX), 113, 115. On the localities of A. Adams' Japanese Helicidaj, 173, 233. Additions to the Japanese land snail fauna, VI (Plates XVII, XVIII, XIX ,XX, XXI), 255, 360. Southwestern laud snails, 510. Additions to the Japanese land snail fauna, VII (Plates XXVn, XXVIII), 512, 517. New land mollusca from Idaho, 593. Pilsbry, Henry A., and Bryant Walker. The mollusca of the Mount Mitchell region (Plates XXIV, XXV), 256, 413. Powell, J. W., announcement of death of, 626. Price, Thomas C, announcement of death of, 692. Recording Secretary, report of, 796. Reese, Albert M. Structure and development ol the thyroid gland in Petromyzon (Plates IV, V, VI, VII), 24, 85. Relin, James A. G. A new species of the Orthopterous genus Pseu- dojihyllus from Sumatra, 2, 21. A new bat of the genus Glosso- phaga, 23, 37. A revision of the genus Mormoops, 160, 173. On the genus Phrynotettix Glover (Ilaldemanella Auct.), 593, 595. Contributions toward a knowl- edge of the Orthoptera of Japan, I, Acrididte, 594, 629. Tliree new American bats, 626, 638. Notes on the Orthoptera of New Mexico and western Texas, 692, 717. 848 PROC. OF ACAD. OF NAT. SCIENCES OF PHILADA. [Dec, 1902. Rhoads, Samuel N. Synopsis of the American Martens, 256, 443. Roberts, Charles, announcement of death of, 3. Schively, George S., M.D., an- nouncement of death of, 505. Sections, report of the, 805. Smith, Burnett. Phylogeny of the species of Fulgur with remarks on an abnormal form of Fulgur canaliculatum, and sexual dimor- phism in Fulgur carica, 505. Smith, Uselma C, announcement of death of, 255. Sower, Charles C, announcement of death of, 173. Springer, Ada. On some living and fossil snails of the genus Physa, found at Las Vegas, New Mexico, 512, 513. Standing Commttees, 1902, 1. Stone, Witmer. A collection of birds fi-oni Sumatra, obtained by Alfred C. Harrison, Jr., and Dr. H. M. Hiller, 636, 670. Stone, Witmer, and J. A. G. Rehn. A collection of mammals from Sumatra, with a review of the genera Tardigradus and Tragu- lus, 114, 127. On the Terrestrial Vertebrata of portions of south- ern New Mexico and western Texas, 749, (volume tor 1903). Viereck, H. flymenoptera from southern California and New Mexico, with description of new species, 692, 728. Virchow, Rudolf, announcement of death of, 594. PROC, ACAt) NAT SCI. PHILA. 1902. •j;r PERKINS. GdNIONEMA MURBACHII PROC ACAD NAT SCI PERKINS- GONIONEMA MURBACHI! PROC. ACAD. NAT SCI. PHILA ''^.. ^ A V "i «•' *> *«• .^ .%^' **** t?** - ^^^^ i^f rfii^ ' ■ PERKINS GONIONEMA MURBACHl PROC ACAD, NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1902. PLATE XXXIV. V-Ena. ». , ■■■;-'-^l4— Eel. M?v *>? 24 ^ ^ PERKINS. GONIONEMA MURBACHII. 27 PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1902. PLATE XXXV. PALMER ON TRACHELOMONAS. / ' ^ MBL WHOI LIBRARY UH IflSl 1